1

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 1 of 348

 1

INDEX
1. ISRO & PSLV, GSLV, SSLV .......................................................................................................................................................................... 9
2. Interim Budget ..........................................................................................................................................................................................10
3. India-EFTA Agreement ..........................................................................................................................................................................11
4. Katchatheevu Island Controversy .....................................................................................................................................................12
5. Ladakh Protest ..........................................................................................................................................................................................13
6. Supreme Court’s Decision On Electoral Bonds (February 15, 2024) ................................................................................15
7. States’ Startup Ranking 2022 .............................................................................................................................................................16
8. India-UAE Agreement On Digital Payment Platforms, Trade, and Energy ......................................................................17
9. Jnanpith Awards 2023 ...........................................................................................................................................................................19
10. Lok Sabha Elections 2024 ....................................................................................................................................................................19
11. Pakistan-Taliban Conflict ......................................................................................................................................................................21
12. Overview of WTO, ITO, World Bank, IMF .......................................................................................................................................22
13. Ramsar Sites in India..............................................................................................................................................................................25
14. Corruption Perception Index 2023 ..................................................................................................................................................27
15. 75th Anniversary of The Supreme Court .......................................................................................................................................28
16. Supreme Court Case On Madrasas (2024) ....................................................................................................................................30
17. Right Against Adverse Effects of Climate Change ......................................................................................................................31
18. Iran-Israel Conflict ..................................................................................................................................................................................32
19. Union Budget 2024-25 ..........................................................................................................................................................................34
20. India Foreign Policy Modi Era ............................................................................................................................................................36
21. Amendments in Surrogacy Rules ......................................................................................................................................................39
22. Maratha Reservation Bill .....................................................................................................................................................................40
23. Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS) Annual Report (July, 2023 – June, 2024) Released By NSSO....................41
24. Bhutan PM Visit To India and Subsequent Meetings ................................................................................................................42
25. Heavy Rainfall and Flood in UAE .......................................................................................................................................................43
26. France and Indian Abortion Law.......................................................................................................................................................44
27. Financial Action Task Force Mutual Evaluation Report...........................................................................................................46
28. US Presidential Elections......................................................................................................................................................................46
29. India-China Border Dispute ................................................................................................................................................................48
30. India’s First indigenous Hydrogen Fuel Cell Ferry ....................................................................................................................51
31. Genome India Project .............................................................................................................................................................................52
32. Sangeet Natak Academy Awards .......................................................................................................................................................53
33. Amendments To Electricity (Rights of Consumers) Rules, 2020 and Consumer Rights Day ..................................54
34. Human Development Index 2023-24 ..............................................................................................................................................55
35. Abrahmic Religions Origin and Importance of Jerusalem ......................................................................................................56
36. Basics of India’s Missile Defense Program ....................................................................................................................................58

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 2 of 348

 1

37. Emission Gap Report 2023 ..................................................................................................................................................................61

38. Delhi Air Pollution ...................................................................................................................................................................................62
39. Adani Hindernburg Case.......................................................................................................................................................................63
40. One Vehicle One Fastag .........................................................................................................................................................................65
41. Aditya L1......................................................................................................................................................................................................66
42. Agnipath Scheme .....................................................................................................................................................................................67
43. Buddhism ....................................................................................................................................................................................................69
44. Sovereign Gold Bonds ............................................................................................................................................................................72
45. CDP-SURAKSHA ........................................................................................................................................................................................72
46. India Employment Report, 2024 .......................................................................................................................................................74
47. Supreme Court Observation On Custodial Deaths .....................................................................................................................75
48. Application On Protection of Women From Domestic Violence Act, 2005 .....................................................................76
49. India's Antarctic Post offices and Pin Code MH-1718 ..............................................................................................................77
50. "Station Shiv Shakti" - Chandrayaan-3's Landing Site..............................................................................................................78
51. Mission Shakti, India’s Fighter Jets, Aircraft Carrier, Submarines ......................................................................................78
52. Myanmar Refugee Crisis .......................................................................................................................................................................81
53. Car-T Cell Therapy ...................................................................................................................................................................................83
54. Loktak Lake ................................................................................................................................................................................................84
55. 75th Anniversary of Universal Declaration of Human Rights...............................................................................................85
56. Republic Day Parade...............................................................................................................................................................................86
57. Bharat Ratna and Other Padma Awards 2024.............................................................................................................................87
58. Foreign Contribution Regulation Act...............................................................................................................................................89
59. Shivsena Case and Anti Defection Law ...........................................................................................................................................90
60. Recent Israel Palestine Conflict and Abraham Accord .............................................................................................................91
61. India's Foreign Policy - Nehru and Shastri Era............................................................................................................................94
62. Citizenship Amendment Act and NRC.............................................................................................................................................95
63. Gaganyaan Mission..................................................................................................................................................................................98
64. Parakram Diwas-2024 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 100
65. Atal Setu .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 101
66. 'World Food India 2023' .................................................................................................................................................................... 102
67. Fame India Phase II .............................................................................................................................................................................. 103
68. Ram Mandir Ayodhya inauguration .............................................................................................................................................. 103
69. Indira Gandhi Prize For Peace, Disarmament, and Development, 2023 ....................................................................... 106
70. Indira Gandhi's Foreign Policy (1966-1977) ............................................................................................................................ 107
71. Basics of Economy – Adam Smith, Gdp, Gnp, National income ......................................................................................... 108
72. Uttarakhand Passes Uniform Civil Code (Ucc) ......................................................................................................................... 109
73. Indus Valley Civilisation Recent Updates ................................................................................................................................... 110
74. Raisina Dialogue .................................................................................................................................................................................... 113
75. NITI Aayog National Multidimensional Poverty Index, 2023 ............................................................................................ 114
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 3 of 348
 1

76. The Chief Election Commissioner and Other Election Commissioners (Appointment, Conditions of Service
and Term of office) Act, 2023 .......................................................................................................................................................... 116
77. Restructuring DRDO ............................................................................................................................................................................ 117
78. ASI Survey On Gyanwapi Mosque .................................................................................................................................................. 118
79. India's Foreign Policy -Rajiv Gandhi and Manmohan Singh Era ....................................................................................... 119
80. Principal Organs of The United Nations...................................................................................................................................... 121
81. Enforcement Directorate ................................................................................................................................................................... 123
82. Prevention of Money Laundry Act, 2002 .................................................................................................................................... 124
83. Patanjali Case Explained .................................................................................................................................................................... 125
84. World Wildlife Day 2024 ................................................................................................................................................................... 127
85. Global Gender Gap Report................................................................................................................................................................. 127
86. New Lokpal Chairperson ................................................................................................................................................................... 128
87. Model Code of Conduct....................................................................................................................................................................... 129
88. Cinematograph Rules (Certification), 2024 ............................................................................................................................... 130
89. UNSC Reforms ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 132
90. Collegium System.................................................................................................................................................................................. 134
91. Disputes in South China Sea ............................................................................................................................................................. 135
92. China-Taiwan Dispute: ........................................................................................................................................................................ 137
93. Indian-Nepal Border Controversy ................................................................................................................................................. 139
94. Bombay High Court Ruled Down The Amended IT Rules, 2023....................................................................................... 140
95. Delisting of Centrally Protected Monuments By ASI ............................................................................................................. 141
96. VVPAT and Its Impact On Election Transparency and Right To Privacy of Candidates .......................................... 143
97. SC Delhi Metro Curative Petition .................................................................................................................................................... 144
98. Government To Review Real Estate (Regulation and Development) Act, 2016 (Rera) .......................................... 145
99. European Union..................................................................................................................................................................................... 146
100. World Air Quality Report, 2023 ...................................................................................................................................................... 148
101. Important Events in Cricket ............................................................................................................................................................. 148
102. Mission Sagar.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 150
103. Important Updates On BRIC............................................................................................................................................................. 152
104. New Electric Vehicle Policy, 2024 .................................................................................................................................................. 153
105. State of Global Water Resource Report, 2023 .......................................................................................................................... 154
106. India As The World's Top Arms Importer (2019-2023) ...................................................................................................... 155
107. India TB Report 2024.......................................................................................................................................................................... 157
108. Taiwan’s Earthquake and Pacific’s Rings of Fire ..................................................................................................................... 158
109. China’s Renaming of Places in Arunachal Pradesh and India’s Response .................................................................... 160
110. Neet Exam and NTA Issue ................................................................................................................................................................. 162
111. Public Examinations (Prevention of Unfair Means) Act, 2024 .......................................................................................... 163
112. Who Report On Global and India Immunization ..................................................................................................................... 164
113. India Sugarcane Subsidy Under WTO Scanner......................................................................................................................... 165

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 4 of 348

 1

114. World Bank Report On Water For Shared Prosperity ........................................................................................................... 167
115. Article 244(A) and Autonomy Issue in Assam ......................................................................................................................... 168
116. Kerala Temples Ban Oleander After Woman’s Death ............................................................................................................ 169
117. Article 31C ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 169
118. 46th Antarctic Treaty Consultative Meeting ............................................................................................................................. 170
119. Guidelines For Eliminating Corporal Punishment .................................................................................................................. 171
120. G7 Summit 2024.................................................................................................................................................................................... 173
121. Global Trade Update: UNCTAD ........................................................................................................................................................ 175
122. Xenotransplantation and Recent Developments ..................................................................................................................... 176
123. Indian Poultry Sector and H5n1 ..................................................................................................................................................... 176
124. Earth Day, 2024 ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 178
125. World Migration Report 2024 ......................................................................................................................................................... 179
126. India and Iran Sign Long-Term Bilateral Contract On Chabahar Port Operation ...................................................... 180
127. Indian Literary Works in UNESCO’s Memory of The World Register ............................................................................. 181
128. India Proposes Digital Competition Bill, 2024 Against Tech Giants ............................................................................... 182
129. EU-Brexit Reason and Britain Economic Crisis and EU Elections.................................................................................... 184
130. Role of Pro-Tem Speaker .................................................................................................................................................................... 187
131. Hindu Population Share Dipped 7.82%: PM-EAC ................................................................................................................... 188
132. Who’s New Global Malaria Strategy For 2030.......................................................................................................................... 189
133. Indian Space Situational Assessment Report (ISSAR) 2023 .............................................................................................. 190
134. Marine Heatwaves and Coral Bleaching in The Lakshadweep Sea .................................................................................. 192
135. Great Nicobar Island Project ............................................................................................................................................................ 193
136. UN Financing For Sustainable Development Report 2024 ................................................................................................. 194
137. What Is internet, Icann, Optical Fibre, Types of Cyber Attacks ......................................................................................... 195
138. SCO Summit in Astana, Kazakhstan, 2024 ................................................................................................................................. 198
139. Armenian Genocide ............................................................................................................................................................................. 199
140. Asia Hit Hardest By Disasters in 2023: WMO Report............................................................................................................ 201
141. Smart Cities Mission ............................................................................................................................................................................ 203
142. Who Global Report On Neglected Tropical Diseases (NTD) 2024 ................................................................................... 204
143. Bihar’s Demand For Special Category Status ............................................................................................................................ 206
144. NOTA in Indian Elections................................................................................................................................................................... 207
145. IPEF Ministerial Meeting 2024 ....................................................................................................................................................... 208
146. Finland and Sweden Join Nato: Background and Impact .................................................................................................... 210
147. Supreme Court Ruling On Taxation of Mineral Rights .......................................................................................................... 212
148. Maintenance Rights of Divorced Muslim Women ................................................................................................................... 213
149. Election of Non-Permanent Members To The UN Security Council ................................................................................ 215
150. Global Gender Gap Report 2024..................................................................................................................................................... 215
151. Summit On Peace in Ukraine............................................................................................................................................................ 217
152. International Big Cat Alliance .......................................................................................................................................................... 219
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 5 of 348
 1

153. World Environment Day 2024 ........................................................................................................................................................ 221

154. Armenian Azerbaijan Conflict ......................................................................................................................................................... 222
155. NATO and CSTO ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 223
156. Inter–Service Organisation Act ....................................................................................................................................................... 225
157. Maitri Setu ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 227
158. First All-India Survey On Ayush 2024 .......................................................................................................................................... 227
159. Rbi’s Repatriation of Gold From UK To INDIA .......................................................................................................................... 229
160. Global Economic Prospects Report 2024 ................................................................................................................................... 230
161. India To Take Australia To WTO Arbitration ............................................................................................................................. 231
162. Bharat NCAP ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 232
163. Paris Olympics 2024 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 233
164. Section 69A & Section 66A of The IT Act .................................................................................................................................... 236
165. National Security Council Appoints Additional National Security Adviser ................................................................. 237
166. Niti Aayog’s SDG India Index 2023-24 ......................................................................................................................................... 238
167. Telecommunications Act 2023........................................................................................................................................................ 240
168. President Rejects Mercy Petition ................................................................................................................................................... 241
169. Indian Post office Act, 2023.............................................................................................................................................................. 243
170. Rbi’s Financial Stability Report....................................................................................................................................................... 244
171. Farmer’s Protests and Farm Laws ................................................................................................................................................. 245
172. Attempted Assassination of Former U.S. President Donald Trump ................................................................................ 248
173. Information Technology Act, 2000 ................................................................................................................................................ 250
174. Lignosat – The World’s First Wooden Satellite: ....................................................................................................................... 253
175. Environmental Performance index, 2024 .................................................................................................................................. 254
176. Rudram-II Missile Flight Test: ......................................................................................................................................................... 256
177. International Booker Prize 2024 ................................................................................................................................................... 257
178. Cyclone Remal ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 258
179. Nagi and Nakti Bird Sanctuaries - New Ramsar Sites: .......................................................................................................... 259
180. Supreme Court's Judgement On Sub-Classification of Scs: ................................................................................................. 260
181. Bs-Vi Norms ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 262
182. Supreme Court On Kolkata Rape Case ......................................................................................................................................... 263
183. Bangladesh Protests ............................................................................................................................................................................ 264
184. India-Bangladesh Relations.............................................................................................................................................................. 266
185. Resolve Tibet Act, 2024 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 268
186. 23rd SCO Summit in Pakistan ........................................................................................................................................................... 269
187. Pushpak: Isro’s Reusable Launch Vehicle: ................................................................................................................................. 271
188. All About Indian Space Research Organisation ........................................................................................................................ 272
189. Inauguration of Nalanda University.............................................................................................................................................. 274
190. International Yoga Day ....................................................................................................................................................................... 276
191. 11 New UNESCO Biosphere Reserves .......................................................................................................................................... 277
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 6 of 348
 1

192. Stockholm Conference, Earth Summit, Kyoto Protocol......................................................................................................... 278

193. China Plus One Strategy and India: ............................................................................................................................................... 281
194. Kerala Legislative Assembly's Resolution To Rename Kerala As 'Keralam' ................................................................. 282
195. Niti Aayog's Formation of Multi-Sectoral Committees For Net-Zero Target ................................................................ 282
196. Eight New Cabinet Committees Formed ..................................................................................................................................... 283
197. 22nd India-Russia Annual Summit................................................................................................................................................ 284
198. Supreme Court On Menstrual Leave Policy ............................................................................................................................... 285
199. "Navigating New Horizons: A Global Foresight Report On Planetary Health and Human Wellbeing, 2024" 286
200. Stonewall Riots and Pride Month .................................................................................................................................................. 287
201. The Aparajita Woman and Child (West Bengal Criminal Laws Amendment) Bill 2024 ......................................... 289
202. OPS – NPS – UPS .................................................................................................................................................................................... 290
203. Unlawful Activities Prevention Act, 1967 ................................................................................................................................... 292
204. Paris Agreement, COP26, indc and Panchamrit ....................................................................................................................... 293
205. Justice Hema Committee Report .................................................................................................................................................... 296
206. Carlos Alcaraz's Achievements in Tennis ................................................................................................................................... 297
207. Gallantry Award 2024 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 298
208. DRDO Launches Zorawar: India's Indigenous Light Tank For Trials .............................................................................. 299
209. Women and Men in India Report 2023 ....................................................................................................................................... 300
210. PM Visit To Brunei and Singapore ................................................................................................................................................. 301
211. Khalistan Movement............................................................................................................................................................................ 302
212. Clause 6 of Assam Accord.................................................................................................................................................................. 304
213. World Development Report 2024 .................................................................................................................................................. 306
214. Extended Stay of Astronauts On ISS.............................................................................................................................................. 308
215. Wayanad Landslide .............................................................................................................................................................................. 309
216. Demand For Bhil Pradesh ................................................................................................................................................................. 311
217. Economic Survey For 2023-24 ........................................................................................................................................................ 312
218. Abhinav Bindra Awarded Prestigious Olympic Order By IOC............................................................................................ 314
219. Chhatrapati Shivaji Maharaj Statue At Rajkot Fort and Maratha Empire ..................................................................... 314
220. Special Protection Group Act ........................................................................................................................................................... 317
221. India-Iran Relations ............................................................................................................................................................................. 317
222. Paris Paralympics 2024...................................................................................................................................................................... 319
223. World Biofuel Day ................................................................................................................................................................................. 320
224. US Antitrust Ruling Against Google: ............................................................................................................................................. 321
225. Waqf Board Amendment Bill 2024 ............................................................................................................................................... 321
226. Eu's First Law On Violence Against Women.............................................................................................................................. 322
227. Goldman Environmental Prize 2024 ............................................................................................................................................ 323
228. Amendments To international Health Regulations (2005) ................................................................................................ 324
229. ISRO Study On Changes in Glacial Lakes in The Indian Himalayan River Basins ...................................................... 325
230. Annual Status of Education Report (ASER) 2023 ................................................................................................................... 326
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 7 of 348
 1

231. Swachh Survekshan Awards, 2023................................................................................................................................................ 327

232. 19th Summit of The Non-Aligned Movement (NAM) ............................................................................................................ 328
233. Khelo India Youth Games (KIYG) 2024:....................................................................................................................................... 328
234. Supreme Court Quashes Remission in Bilkis Bano Case ...................................................................................................... 329
235. Constitution of The 16th Finance Commission....................................................................................................................... 330
236. Draft Explosives Bill, 2024 ................................................................................................................................................................ 331
237. Tree Cover Loss in India..................................................................................................................................................................... 332
238. 66th Grammy Awards 2024 ............................................................................................................................................................. 333
239. International Energy Agency (IEA) Report On Renewable Energy, 2023..................................................................... 334
240. Neuralink Human Brain Implant For The First Time ............................................................................................................ 335
241. Women, Business and The Law 2024 Report ........................................................................................................................... 336
242. ISRO’s Second Launchpad ................................................................................................................................................................. 337
243. Household Consumption Expenditure Survey 2022-23 ...................................................................................................... 337
244. One Nation, One Election ................................................................................................................................................................... 338
245. Plastic Waste Management (Amendment) Rules, 2024 ....................................................................................................... 339
246. Belgium Recognises Ecocide As A Crime .................................................................................................................................... 340
247. Delhi Excise Policy Case ..................................................................................................................................................................... 340
248. Isro's Zero Orbital Debris Milestone and The Space Debris Crisis .................................................................................. 341
249. Food Waste Index Report 2024 ...................................................................................................................................................... 342
250. Asia Development Outlook Report 2024 .................................................................................................................................... 343

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 8 of 348

 1

ISRO & PSLV, GSLV, SSLV

ISRO (Indian Space Research Organisation)
 Established: 1969 by Dr. Vikram Sarabhai, superseding INCOSPAR
 Department of Space (DOS): Set up in 1972, ISRO brought under DOS
 Headquarters: Bengaluru, India
 Main Objective: Harness space technology for national development
 Funding: Managed and funded by the Government of India and the Department of Space
 Key Milestones:
 Aryabhata (1975): India's first satellite, focused on experiments in aeronomics, solar physics, and X-ray
astronomy
 Chandrayaan-1 (2008): India's first lunar mission, discovered water molecules on the moon
 Mars Orbiter Mission (Mangalyaan, 2013): India’s first mission to Mars, first country to reach Mars on its
first attempt
 Chandrayaan-2 (2019): Key mission in India's space exploration
 INSAT system (1983): One of the largest domestic communication satellite systems in the Asia-Pacific
 IRS (1988): India’s first remote-sensing satellite
 Launch Sites:
 Vikram Sarabhai Space Centre (VSSC): Thiruvananthapuram, Kerala – Launch vehicle development center
 Satish Dhawan Space Centre (SDSC): Sriharikota, Andhra Pradesh – Primary spaceport for launching
satellites
 Dr. A.P.J. Abdul Kalam Island: Odisha – Primarily used for missile testing and space-related experiments
 Kulasekarapattinam Spaceport (Under construction): Tamil Nadu – Dedicated to launching Small
Satellite Launch Vehicles (SSLVs) developed by the private sector

ISRO’s Launch Vehicles

 PSLV (Polar Satellite Launch Vehicle)
 Purpose: Launch satellites into Low Earth Orbit (LEO)
 First Successful Launch: October 1994
 It has a lift-off mass of 320 tons and is 44 meters tall.
 PSLV can carry satellites up to a total weight of 2000 kg into space and reach up to an altitude of 600-900
km.
 Stages: Four-stage rocket (solid and liquid propellants)
 Known as "Workhorse of ISRO" for its reliability
 Satellites Launched by PSLV: Chandrayaan-1 (2008), Mars Orbiter Mission (2013), Astrosat (2015 -
India's first space observatory), Aditya-L1 (2023), XPoSat (First dedicated scientific satellite for space-
based polarization measurements)

 GSLV (Geosynchronous Satellite Launch Vehicle)

 Purpose: Launch satellites into Geosynchronous Transfer Orbit (GTO)
 Height: 49.13 m (tallest ISRO vehicle)
 Stages: Three-stage vehicle with solid, liquid, and cryogenic propellant stages
 Payload Capacity: Up to 5,000 kg to GTO and 10,000 kg to LEO
 First Launch: April 18, 2001
 Success Rate: GSLV Mk I – 29%, GSLV Mk II – 86%
 Key Missions: GSLV-F14/INSAT-3DS (Meteorological observations and ocean surface monitoring), GSLV-
F12/NVS-01(NavIC), CARE Mission (2014 - Crew Module Atmospheric Re-entry Experiment), GSAT-19
Mission (2017 - Communications satellite), Chandrayaan-2 (2019), OneWeb (2022), Chandrayaan-3
(2023 - Launched using GSLV Mk III)
 Nickname: "Naughty boy" due to inconsistent track record
 GSLV Mk III: Most advanced ISRO launch vehicle, can support manned space missions

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 9 of 348

 1

 SSLV (Small Satellite Launch Vehicle)

 Purpose: Low-cost, quick-turnaround launch vehicle for small satellites
 Stages: Three-stage vehicle with solid propulsion stages and liquid propulsion-based Velocity Trimming
Modulae (VTM)
 Payload Capacity: Up to 500 kg
 Launch-on-Demand: Designed for quick integration (72 hours)
 Key Flights:
o SSLV-D1 (2022): First flight, failed to reach intended orbit
o SSLV-D2 (2023): Successfully reached orbit

INTERIM BUDGET
 An Interim Budget is a temporary financial plan presented by the government before elections.
 It covers government expenditures until a new government takes office.
 The Interim Budget 2024-2025, was presented by Finance Minister Nirmala Sitharaman on February 1, 2024,
serves as a fiscal roadmap for India until the full budget is introduced in July 2024.
 Theme: ‘Sabka Saath, Sabka Vikas, and Sabka Vishwas’ and “Sabka Prayas”
 No changes proposed in tax rates in the Interim Budget.
 Focus on upliftment of ‘Garib’ (Poor), ‘Mahilayen’ (Women), ‘Yuva’ (Youth), and ‘Annadata’ (Farmer).

Government Assistance Achievements:

 Helped 25 crore people out of multi-dimensional poverty over the last 10 years.
 Rs. 34 lakh crore disbursed through Direct Benefit Transfer, saving Rs. 2.7 lakh crore for the government.
 PM-SVANidhi aided 78 lakh street vendors, with 2.3 lakh on their third credit cycle.
 PM-JANMAN Yojana supports particularly vulnerable tribal groups.
 PM-Vishwakarma Yojana aids artisans across 18 trades.
Agriculture and Farmer Support:
 PM-KISAN SAMMAN Yojana benefited 11.8 crore farmers.
 PM Fasal Bima Yojana provided crop insurance to 4 crore farmers.
 e-NAM integrated 1361 mandis serving 1.8 crore farmers.

Women's Empowerment and Education:

 30 crore Mudra Yojana loans issued to women entrepreneurs.
 28% increase in female higher education enrollment.
 Women make up 43% of STEM course enrollments.
 Over 70% of PM Awas Yojana (rural) houses allotted to women.
PM Awas Yojana (Grameen):
 Plans for two crore additional houses in the next five years.
Energy Initiatives:
 1 crore households to receive 300 units of free electricity monthly through rooftop solarization.
 Expected annual saving per household: Rs. 15,000 to Rs. 18,000.

Healthcare Enhancement:
 Ayushman Bharat healthcare coverage extended to all ASHA and Anganwadi workers.

Infrastructure and Transportation:

 Capital expenditure to be increased by 11.1% to Rs. 11,11,111 crore (3.4% of GDP)
 Identification and implementation of three major economic railway corridors.
Aviation Growth:
 Doubling of airports to 149.
 Introduction of 517 new routes serving 1.3 crore passengers.
 Indian carriers placed orders for over 1000 new aircraft.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 10 of 348

 1

Green Energy and Environmental Initiatives:

 Plan for 100 MT coal gasification and liquefaction by 2030.
 Mandatory blending of biogas in natural gas sources.

Foreign Direct Investment (FDI):

 FDI inflow of USD 596 billion from 2014-23, double that of the previous decade.

State Government Reforms:

 Allocation of Rs. 75,000 crore as fifty-year interest-free loans for state reforms.

Fiscal Estimates:
 Fiscal deficit estimated at 5.1% of GDP for 2024-25.
 Gross and net market borrowings projected at Rs. 14.13 lakh crore and Rs. 11.75 lakh crore respectively.

Direct and Indirect Tax Proposals:

 Retention of existing tax rates for direct and indirect taxes.
 Introduction of GST has doubled the tax base and increased monthly collections to Rs. 1.66 lakh crore.
Tax and Customs Reforms:
 No tax liability for income up to Rs 7 lakh.
 Reductions in corporate income tax rates for domestic and new manufacturing companies.

INDIA-EFTA AGREEMENT
 India signed a Trade and Economic Partnership Agreement (TEPA) with EFTA countries (Switzerland,
Iceland, Norway, Liechtenstein) on March 10, 2024.
 EFTA is an inter-governmental organization established in 1960 to promote free trade and economic
integration.
 For the first time India is signing an FTA with four developed nations.
 EFTA has committed to:
o $100 billion foreign direct investment in India over the next 15 years.
o Creation of 1 million direct jobs in India over the same period.
o Investment commitments exclude foreign portfolio investment.
o First FTA to include legal commitment for promoting targeted investment and job creation.
 Market Access and Tariff Commitments
o EFTA offer:
 92.2% tariff lines covering 99.6% of India’s exports.
 100% tariff reduction on non-agricultural products and concessions on Processed Agricultural
Products (PAP).
o India offer:
 82.7% tariff lines covering 95.3% of EFTA exports, with Gold imports exempted from any duty
reduction.
 Sensitive sectors like pharma, medical devices, processed food protected under the PLI scheme.
 Dairy, soya, coal, and sensitive agricultural products are excluded from the agreement.
 Commitments in Services Sector:
o India offers: 105 sub-sectors to EFTA.
o EFTA offers:
 128 sub-sectors from Switzerland, 114 from Norway, 107 from Liechtenstein, and 110 from
Iceland.
 Better access for digital delivery of services (Mode 1) and commercial presence (Mode 3).
 Improved certainty for entry and temporary stay of key personnel (Mode 4).
 Professional Services and Intellectual Property Rights (IPR)
o Mutual Recognition Agreements (MRA) for professional services (nursing, chartered accountants,
architects).

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 11 of 348

 1

o IPR commitments at TRIPS (Agreement on Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights)

level.
 India's generic medicine interests and concerns about evergreening of patents have been addressed.
 IPR standards reflect Switzerland’s high benchmarks, demonstrating India’s robust IPR regime.
 Economic and Strategic Benefits
o Boost to “Make in India”: Opportunities for sectors such as infrastructure, manufacturing, machinery,
pharmaceuticals, chemicals, food processing, etc.
o Access to EU markets: Switzerland serves as a base for extending Indian market reach into the EU.
o EFTA will enable technology collaboration and access to world-leading technologies in areas like precision
engineering, health sciences, renewable energy, and innovation.
o TEPA will facilitate vocational and technical training, providing better employment opportunities for
India’s youth.

European Free Trade Association (EFTA):

 Established: 1960
 Founding members: Austria, Denmark, Norway, Portugal, Sweden, Switzerland, UK.
 Iceland joined in 1970, Finland in 1986, Liechtenstein in 1991.
 Several countries left EFTA to join the EU (e.g., Denmark, UK in 1973; Portugal in 1986).
 Current members: Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway, Switzerland.
 Global Trade Network: EFTA has over 60 Free Trade Agreements (FTAs), including with the EU.
 EFTA Council: Highest governing body, meets 8 times annually (ambassadorial level) and twice at ministerial
level.
 EFTA Secretariat
o Geneva HQ: Manages relations and FTAs.
o Brussels office: Handles EEA Agreement and EU collaboration.
o Luxembourg: Focuses on European statistical integration.
o EFTA Surveillance Authority (ESA): Monitors EEA compliance in Iceland, Liechtenstein, and Norway,
similar to the European Commission.
o EFTA Court: Located in Luxembourg, resolves EEA disputes with jurisdiction similar to the CJEU for EEA
EFTA countries.

KATCHATHEEVU ISLAND CONTROVERSY

 Prime Minister Narendra Modi raised the issue of Katchatheevu, criticizing the Congress Party for ceding the
island to Sri Lanka in 1974.
 Tamil Nadu CM M.K. Stalin questioned the steps taken by the Modi government to retrieve Katchatheevu.
 Fishermen in Ramanathapuram district boycotted the annual St. Anthony’s Church festival in February 2024
to protest the Sri Lankan government's arrests of Indian fishermen.
 Katchatheevu was ceded to Sri Lanka during a formal agreement signed between then India's Prime Minister
Indira Gandhi and Sri Lanka's Prime Minister Sirimavo Bandaranaike on June 28, 1974.
 Katchatheevu is located in the Palk Strait, a key maritime route between India and Sri Lanka.
 It is about 33 km from Rameswaram (India) and 24 km from Sri Lanka's Delft Island & 62 km southwest of
Jaffna, Sri Lanka's northernmost point.
 The islet covers 285 acres, and its only structure is St. Anthony’s Church.
 Katchatheevu is unfit for permanent habitation because the island lacks a freshwater source.
 Katchatheevu is traditionally important to fishermen from both India and Sri Lanka, and it has religious
significance due to the annual church festival.
 Katchatheevu holds strategic importance for monitoring maritime activities in the region, including security
threats and fishing activities.
 Originally under Sri Lanka's Jaffna kingdom in the medieval period, it later became part of the Ramnad
kingdom in India.
 During British rule, it was administered by the Madras Presidency.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 12 of 348

 1

 The discussions for delimitation of boundaries in Palk Strait and Gulf of Mannar started as early as October
1921 between the then Governments of Madras and Ceylon (now Sri Lanka), with Sri Lanka citing Portuguese
control (1505–1658), while India referred to the Raja of Ramnad's ownership.
 On June 29, 1974, Tamil Nadu Chief Minister M Karunanidhi contested the ceding, claiming historical
ownership by the Raja of Ramanad.
 1976: A supplemental pact clarified that fishermen from both countries could not fish in each other’s waters
without express permission.
o Indian fishermen, particularly from Tamil Nadu, have traditionally fished around Katchatheevu.
o The 1976 pact restricting fishing rights has led to frequent arrests of Indian fishermen by Sri Lankan
authorities, resulting in conflicts.
 August 15, 1991: Tamil Nadu CM Jayalalithaa urged the retrieval of Katchatheevu and restoration of fishing
rights for Indian fishermen.
 October 31, 1991: Tamil Nadu Assembly passed a resolution demanding the retrieval of Katchatheevu.

LADAKH PROTEST
 Over 100 volunteers, led by climate activist Sonam Wangchuk, began 'Delhi Chalo Padyatra', a foot march to
Delhi on a four-point agenda.
 On October 13, 2024, Wangchuk and 20 others were detained by Delhi Police for protesting outside Ladakh
Bhawan. They were previously denied permission to peacefully protest at Jantar Mantar, leading them to
start an indefinite hunger strike.
 The 'Delhi Chalo Padyatra' was organized by the Leh Apex Body (LAB) and the Kargil Democratic Alliance
(KDA).
 Protesters are demanding the reinstatement of statehood for Ladakh, which was made a Union Territory
without a legislature in 2019, after the abrogation of the Article 370, which gave special status to the state of
Jammu and Kashmir.
 Ladakh's leadership also seeks recognition as a tribal area under the Sixth Schedule of the Constitution to
safeguard local rights.
Four-Point Agenda
 Advocacy for statehood for Ladakh.
 Extension of the Sixth Schedule to protect cultural, land, and employment rights.
 Creation of a dedicated public service commission for recruitment in Ladakh.
 Establishment of separate Lok Sabha seats for Leh and Kargil districts.

Sixth Schedule & Asymmetrical Federalism:

 The Sixth Schedule applies to tribal areas in Assam, Meghalaya, Mizoram, and Tripura. It provides
Autonomous District Councils (ADC) with legislative powers over land use, cultivation, inheritance, and social
customs.
 India follows asymmetrical federalism, where some regions, such as Ladakh, can have more autonomy than
others based on their unique circumstances.
 In asymmetric federalism, a particular State may enjoy a degree of autonomy which another State does not.
 The difference, however, remains one of degree and not of kind. Different states may enjoy different benefits
under the federal setup, but the common thread is federalism.

Ladakh’s Demand for Inclusion in the Sixth Schedule

 Ensuring Representation: Ladakh lost its legislative assembly after the 2019 reorganization. Previously, it had
four members in the Jammu and Kashmir Assembly and two in the Legislative Council. The Ladakh
Autonomous Hill Development Council (LAHDC) has seen its role reduced.
 Lack of Public Participation & Preservation of Cultural Identity: Decision-making has shifted from public
involvement to bureaucratic processes, increasing concerns over land, jobs, and cultural identity.
o Sixth Schedule would grant autonomy to tribal communities, safeguarding Ladakh's cultural heritage and
providing legal protections for traditional practices.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 13 of 348

 1

o Article 35A (now repealed) allowed the Jammu and Kashmir legislature to define "permanent residents"
and grant them special rights.
 Fragile Ecosystem: Ladakh's high-altitude ecosystem, already vulnerable, faces threats from industrialization.
Activists warn that large-scale development could lead to the extinction of glaciers, affecting water resources
in India and neighboring regions.
 Sensitive Borders: Ladakh’s proximity to China and Pakistan creates security challenges. The ongoing military
standoff with China and tensions with Pakistan necessitate infrastructure development supported by the local
population.
 Socio-Economic Development: The Union Territory administration has been criticized for not generating
sufficient job opportunities. Despite being a Union Territory for four years, Ladakh still lacks a public service
commission and a comprehensive job policy.

Ladakh:
 Ladakh is the largest region in Jammu, Kashmir, and Ladakh, covering 95,876 km² and became a Union
Territory in 2019.
 It borders Tibet (China), Himachal Pradesh (India), Jammu and Kashmir, Pakistan, and Xinjiang (China).
 The region is drained by the Indus River and tributaries such as the Shyok, Nubra, and Zanskar rivers.
 Ladakh experiences a cold desert climate with extreme temperatures ranging from -40°C in winter to +35°C in
summer, and receives minimal precipitation (10-30 cm annually).
 The high-altitude landscape results in high radiation levels, with soils being gravelly and sandy loams, lacking
water retention and organic content.
 Historically, Ladakh was an independent kingdom until the Dogra invasion in 1834, and later became part of
British suzerainty post-1846, serving as a buffer zone between British India and Russia.
 After independence, Ladakh became contested between India and Pakistan, and in the 1960s, China annexed
parts of eastern Ladakh. Disputes continue over areas like Pangong Tso, Galwan Valley, and Aksai Chin.
 The 1962 Indo-China War resulted in the establishment of the Line of Actual Control (LAC), which remains a
point of contention.
 Ladakh is also a popular tourist destination known for trekking, mountaineering, and Buddhist monasteries,
with significant potential for energy pipelines connecting Central Asia.
 The region's geopolitical value is heightened by its position on the ancient Silk Route and ongoing disputes with
Pakistan over Siachen Glacier and with China over Aksai Chin.
 Recent Developments:
o In August 2024, the Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA) decided to create five new districts in Ladakh—
Zanskar, Drass, Sham, Nubra, and Changthang. This move is aimed at enhancing governance and
delivering benefits to people at the grassroots level.
o After this change, Ladakh will have a total of seven districts, including Leh and Kargil.

Sonam Wangchuk:
 He is an Indian engineer, innovator, education reformist & climate activist from Ladakh.
 He is the founding director of the Students' Educational and Cultural Movement of Ladakh (SEMCOL), which
was established in 1988 by a Wangchuk along with his brother and five peers.
 SEMCOL Campus was designed by Wangchuk to be environmentally sustainable, running entirely on solar
energy and using no fossil fuels for cooking, lighting, or heating.
 He has appealed to Prime Minister Narendra Modi to ensure the protection of Ladakh's environment,
highlighting the threat of extinction of nearly two-thirds of glaciers in the Union Territory.
 From June 1993 to 2005, he founded and worked as the editor of Ladakh's only print magazine, Ladags
Melong.
 In 2001, he was appointed as an advisor for education in the Hill Council Government.
 Wangchuk also founded the Ladakh Voluntary Network, a network of NGOs in Ladakh, and served on its
executive committee.
 Wangchuk inspired the character of "Phunsuk Wangdu" in the 2009 Bollywood film "3 Idiots."

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 14 of 348

 1

SUPREME COURT’S DECISION ON ELECTORAL BONDS (FEBRUARY 15, 2024)

 Verdict: The Supreme Court ruled the Electoral Bonds Scheme unconstitutional, citing violations of citizens'
right to information under Article 19(1)(a) of the Constitution.
 Key Concerns: Anonymity of donors was seen as a barrier to transparency, potentially enabling quid pro quo
transactions between donors and political parties.
 Immediate Action: The Court directed the State Bank of India (SBI) to stop issuing electoral bonds and
disclose all transaction details to the Election Commission of India (ECI).
 Unconstitutional Amendments: The court struck down amendments to Section 182 of the Companies Act,
which allowed unlimited and anonymous corporate donations.
 The court emphasized that information on political funding is crucial for voter decision-making and noted that
unlimited corporate donations could disproportionately influence policymaking.
 While small donations may warrant privacy, large corporate donations need to be disclosed in the public
interest.
 Increased Accountability: The decision seeks to remove anonymity in large political donations, ensuring
transparency and preventing undue corporate influence on politics.
 SBI Directive: SBI was ordered to disclose past donations and donor details to the ECI.

Overview of Electoral Bonds

 Introduction: Electoral bonds were introduced through the Finance Bill, 2017 and notified on January 29,
2018 by the Modi-led NDA government.
 Nature of Bonds: Electoral bonds are like promissory notes that can be bought by any Indian citizen or
company and donated to an eligible political party. They are free of interest and payable to the bearer on
demand.
 Denominations: Bonds are available in multiples of Rs 1,000, Rs 10,000, Rs 1,00,000, and Rs 1 crore.
 Validity: The bonds are valid for 15 days from the date of issue.
 Availability: Bonds can be purchased for 10 days at the beginning of each quarter (January, April, July,
October). An additional 30-day period is available during Lok Sabha election years.
 Purchase and Redemption:
o Only KYC-compliant accounts can purchase the bonds from 29 specified SBI branches in cities like New
Delhi, Mumbai, Kolkata, Chennai, etc.
o Political parties can encash the bonds through their verified accounts within the 15-day validity period.
o Eligibility of Parties: Only political parties registered under Section 29A of the Representation of the
Peoples Act, 1951, that secured at least 1% of votes in the most recent general or assembly elections, are
eligible to receive bonds.
o Anonymity: The bonds do not carry the name of the donor, so political parties may not know the donor's
identity.
o Tax Status: Donations made through electoral bonds are tax deductible for the donor, and the political
party receiving the donation is exempt from tax, provided they file returns.
 Restrictions Removed after the Introduction of Electoral Bonds
o Foreign companies are now allowed to donate to political parties.
o The 7.5% cap on corporate donations (based on net profit) was removed.
o Companies are no longer required to disclose their political donations in their financial statements if using
electoral bonds.

Top 20 Electoral Bond Purchasers:

 Major donors include companies like Future Gaming and Hotel Services Pvt Ltd (Rs 1,368 crore), Megha
Engineering and Infrastructure Ltd (Rs 966 crore), Qwik Supply Chain Pvt Ltd (Rs 410 crore), and others.
 The BJP received the highest amount of donations (Rs 6586 crore), followed by TMC (Rs 1,609.53 crore), INC
(Rs 1,421.87 crore), and others.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 15 of 348

 1

Total Electoral Bonds Sold:

 From 2017 to 2022, a total of Rs 11,450 crore worth of electoral bonds were sold.
 The BJP accounted for over 55% of the total funds, while other parties like TMC, INC, and others received
significantly less.

Chronology of the Electoral Bonds Case

 2017: Electoral bond scheme introduced in the Finance Bill.
 September 14, 2017: NGO 'Association for Democratic Reforms' files a PIL challenging the scheme. Other
petitioners include: Common Cause & Communist Party of India (Marxist).
 October 3, 2017: SC issues notices to the Centre and EC based on the PIL.
 January 2, 2018: Central government notifies the electoral bond scheme.
 November 7, 2022: Electoral bond scheme amended to increase sale days from 70 to 85 during election
periods.
 October 16, 2023: SC refers pleas challenging the scheme to a five-judge Constitution bench.
 October 31, 2023: Five-judge bench begins hearing the case.
 November 2, 2023: SC reserves its verdict.
 February 15, 2024: SC delivers a unanimous judgment, declaring the electoral bond scheme
unconstitutional.
 The bench comprised of Justices Sanjiv Khanna, B.R. Gavai, J.B. Pardiwala and Manoj Misra and was headed
by the Chief Justice of India D.Y. Chandrachud.

STATES’ STARTUP RANKING 2022

 Released by: Minister of Commerce and Industry, Piyush Goyal on January 16, 2024, in New Delhi.
 Participants: 33 States and Union Territories (UTs) participated, the highest ever in the history of the
rankings.
 The number of recognized startups has grown by 120% CAGR over the last seven years, surpassing 1 lakh
startups by October 2023.
 Startup coverage has expanded sixfold, with presence in 670+ districts across India.
 50% of recognized startups are located in Tier 2 and Tier 3 cities.
 Categories: States and UTs are classified into two categories based on population:
o Category A: Population > 1 crore
o Category B: Population < 1 crore
 Evaluation Criteria: Based on 7 broad reform areas with 25 action points, including:
o Institutional Support
o Fostering Innovation and Entrepreneurship
o Access to Market
o Incubation and Mentorship Support
o Funding Support
o Capacity Building of Enablers
o Roadmap to a Sustainable Future
 Survey Responses: 15% of total scores were based on 10,000+ survey responses collected in 9 languages
(telephonic and web-based).
 Additional Documents: National Report, Compendium of Best Practices, and individual State Reports
were released.

Classification of States and UTs in the Startup Rankings 2022

Category A:
 Best Performers: Gujarat, Karnataka, Kerala, Tamil Nadu.
 Top Performers: Maharashtra, Odisha, Punjab, Rajasthan, Telangana.
 Leaders: Andhra Pradesh, Assam, Madhya Pradesh, Uttar Pradesh, Uttarakhand.
 Aspiring Leaders: Bihar, Haryana.
 Emerging Ecosystems: Chhattisgarh, Delhi, Jammu & Kashmir.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 16 of 348

 1

Category B:
 Best Performer: Himachal Pradesh.
 Top Performers: Arunachal Pradesh, Meghalaya.
 Leaders: Goa, Manipur, Tripura.
 Aspiring Leaders: Andaman and Nicobar Islands, Nagaland.
 Emerging Ecosystems: Chandigarh, Dadra & Nagar Haveli and Daman & Diu, Ladakh, Mizoram, Puducherry,
Sikkim.
Key Government Initiatives for Startups
 Funds of Funds (FoF) Scheme: Established in June 2016 with a corpus of Rs. 10,000 crore to facilitate access
to domestic capital.
 Startup India Seed Fund Scheme (SISF): Approved for a four-year period from 2021-22, with a corpus of Rs.
945 crore to provide financial aid for concept validation, prototype development, and market entry.
 Startup India Investor Connect: AI-based matchmaking platform connecting startups with investors.
 Startup20: Established during the G20 India Presidency 2023, creating a global dialogue forum for startups.
 Startup India Innovation Week: Organized by DPIIT around National Startup Day (January 16) to celebrate
and promote entrepreneurship.
 National Startup Awards (NSA): Recognizes and rewards startups for innovation, employment generation, and
social impact.
 MAARG Portal: A mentorship platform providing startups with access to sector-specific guidance and support.

INDIA-UAE AGREEMENT ON DIGITAL PAYMENT PLATFORMS, TRADE, AND

ENERGY
Prime Minister Narendra Modi and UAE’s President Sheikh Mohamed bin Zayed Al Nahyan met in Abu Dhabi,
signing eight agreements focused on key areas.
1. Interlinking of Digital Payment Platforms:
 UPI and AANI:
o Agreements signed to interlink India's UPI and UAE's AANI platforms.
o This will enhance cross-border digital payments, making financial transactions between the two countries
smoother.
 Debit/Credit Card Interlinking:
o Pact to interlink domestic cards—India’s RuPay and UAE’s JAYWAN.
o Enhances financial sector cooperation, ensuring wider acceptance of RuPay in the UAE.
o UAE's JAYWAN is based on India's RuPay card framework.
2. Bilateral Investment Treaty (BIT):
 Investment Facilitation:
o The treaty is seen as a significant step in enhancing investments between India and the UAE.
o UAE is a key investor in India's infrastructure, committing USD 75 billion.
o In 2022-2023, UAE was the fourth largest foreign direct investor in India.
3. India-Middle East Economic Corridor (IMEC):
 Regional Connectivity:
o Framework Agreement signed for the IMEC to boost India-UAE cooperation and regional connectivity.
o The IMEC initiative was announced during the G20 Summit 2023 in New Delhi.
4. Energy Cooperation:
 Energy Security and Trade:
o Agreements on electrical interconnection and energy trade.
o Focus on long-term contracts for LNG imports from the UAE.
o UAE remains a key supplier of crude oil and LPG to India.
5. Cultural Cooperation:
 Archival Restoration:
o Cooperation protocol signed between the National Archives of India and UAE to restore and preserve archival
material.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 17 of 348
 1

 Maritime Heritage:
o The UAE pledged support to India’s Maritime Heritage Complex project at Lothal, Gujarat.
6. BAPS Temple:
 Temple Construction:
o India expressed gratitude for UAE’s support in constructing the BAPS Temple in Abu Dhabi, symbolizing deep
cultural ties.
o BAPS (Bochasanwasi Akshar Purushottam Swaminarayan Sanstha) temples are religious and cultural
centres affiliated with the Swaminarayan Sampradaya, a Vaishnava sect of Hinduism.
7. Port Infrastructure Development:
 Port Agreements:
o Agreements between RITES Limited and Gujarat Maritime Board with Abu Dhabi Ports to develop port
infrastructure.
o Aims to enhance connectivity between the two countries.
8. Bharat Mart:
 Retail Hub Development:
o Foundation stone laid for Bharat Mart in Dubai’s Jebel Ali Free Trade Zone.
o It will integrate retail, warehousing, and logistics, providing a platform for Indian MSMEs to access
international markets in the Gulf, West Asia, Africa, and Eurasia.

India-UAE Relations:
Diplomatic Relations:
 Established: India and the UAE established diplomatic relations in 1972.
 Strategic Partnership: The visit of India's Prime Minister in August 2015 marked a new strategic partnership,
further enhanced by the visit of the Crown Prince of Abu Dhabi in January 2017.
 Comprehensive Strategic Partnership: In 2017, the relationship was upgraded to a comprehensive strategic
partnership, leading to negotiations on a comprehensive economic partnership agreement.

Economic Relations:
 Trade: Bilateral trade reached USD 85 billion in 2022-23. The UAE is India’s third-largest trading partner and
second-largest export destination.
 Trade Goals: Both nations aim to increase bilateral merchandise trade to over USD 100 billion and services trade
to USD 15 billion in the next five years.
 Investments: Several Indian companies have established manufacturing units in the UAE’s SEZs, focusing on
sectors like cement, textiles, electronics, and more.
 Free Trade Agreements (FTA): Under India's new FTA strategy, the UAE is a top priority for an early harvest
deal, along with other regions like the UK, EU, and GCC.
 UAE’s Bilateral Agreements: The UAE plans to pursue economic agreements with countries including India, the
UK, Israel, and Kenya.

Cultural Relations:
 Indian Community: The UAE hosts over 3.3 million Indians, fostering strong cultural ties.
 Cultural Presence: Indian cinema, TV, and radio channels are widely available, and Hindi, Malayalam, and Tamil
films are screened in theaters.
 Yoga and Meditation: The Emirati community actively participates in International Yoga Day, and various yoga
and meditation centers operate successfully in the UAE.

Fintech Collaboration:
 RuPay and Digital Payments: Initiatives like RuPay card acceptance (since August 2019) and the establishment
of a Local Currency Settlement System (LCSS) promote digital payment collaboration.
 LCSS: A framework allowing transactions in local currencies (INR and AED) will support the development of an
INR-AED foreign exchange market.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 18 of 348

 1

Energy Security:
 Oil Reserves: The UAE plays a key role in India’s energy security through strategic oil reserves in Mangaluru,
India.

Strategic Regional Engagement:

 Regional Cooperation: Both nations collaborate in regional groupings and initiatives like the I2U2 and the
India-Middle East-Europe Economic Corridor (IMEC), underscoring their shared strategic interests.

JNANPITH AWARDS 2023

 The 58th edition of Jnanpith Award for the year 2023 will be awarded to Sanskrit scholar Jagadguru
Rambhadracharya and Urdu poet and lyricist Gulzar.
 The awardees receive a cash prize of Rs 11 lakh, a Vagdevi statue, and a citation for their literary
contributions.
 It is the second time the award is being given for Sanskrit and the fifth time for Urdu.
 Gulzar (Sampuran Singh Kalra)
o Born on August 18, 1934, in Dina, Jhelum district (now in Pakistan).
o Renowned Urdu poet, lyricist, and a respected figure in Indian cinema and literature.
o Awards include:
 Sahitya Akademi Award (2002) for Urdu.
 Padma Bhushan (2004).
 Dadasaheb Phalke Award (2013).
 National Film Awards, Oscar (2009), and Grammy (2010) for the song "Jai Ho" from Slumdog
Millionaire.
o He developed a unique form of poetry called Triveni (three-line, non-mukaffa poems).
 Jagadguru Rambhadracharya
o Born Pandit Giridhar Mishra in 1950 in Jaunpur, Uttar Pradesh; a polyglot and religious leader who
speaks 22 languages.
o A prominent poet and writer in Sanskrit, Hindi, Awadhi, and Maithili, with over 240 books authored.
o Notable works include Arundhatī, Aṣṭāvakra, Avadha Kai Ajoriya, and Dashavtar.
o He is the founder of Tulsi Peeth, a key publisher of Hindu religious literature in Chitrakoot, Madhya
Pradesh.
o He has held the position of Jagadguru Ramanandacharya since 1982.
o Awarded the Padma Vibhushan in 2015.

Jnanpith Award
 The Jnanpith Award is India's oldest and highest literary award, first awarded in 1965.
 Given annually for an author's outstanding contribution to Indian literature.
 Open to Indian citizens writing in English or Indian languages; not awarded posthumously.
 Instituted by Bharatiya Jnanpith in 1961, a literary organization founded by Sahu Shanti Prasad Jain and
Rama Jain.

LOK SABHA ELECTIONS 2024

 The 2024 Indian General Elections were held from 19 April to 1 June 2024 in seven phases, with the election
schedule being announced by the Election Commission on 16 March 2024, when the Model Code of Conduct
came into effect.
 The voter turnout for the entire election was 65.79%, with 968 million people eligible to vote, representing
70% of the country's population, and a total of 642 million voters participated, including a record 312 million
women voters.
 The phase-wise voter turnout was as follows: 66.14% in Phase 1 (April 19), 66.71% in Phase 2 (April 26),
65.68% in Phase 3 (May 7), 69.16% in Phase 4 (May 13) which was the highest, 62.2% in Phase 5 (May 20),
63.37% in Phase 6 (May 25), and 61.63% in Phase 7 (June 1).

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 19 of 348

 1

 Simultaneously, legislative assembly elections were held in Andhra Pradesh, Arunachal Pradesh, Odisha, and
Sikkim, along with by-elections in 25 constituencies across 12 legislative assemblies.
 The votes were counted and the result was declared on 4 June 2024, resulting in the BJP emerging as the largest
party with 240 seats, although it fell short of the majority mark of 272.
 The Congress secured 99 seats, while the Samajwadi Party won 37 seats, and the BJP formed a coalition
government with the Telugu Desam Party and Janata Dal (United) as the main allies.
 The National Democratic Alliance (NDA) secured a total of 293 seats out of 543, whereas the INC-led Indian
National Developmental Inclusive Alliance (INDIA) gained 235 seats.
 The NDA returned to power for a third consecutive term at the Centre, marking the first time since 1962 that
a government has been re-elected for a third straight term after completing two previous terms.
 Six national parties contested the elections, namely the BJP, Congress, CPI(M), BSP, NPP, and AAP, with all
except the BSP being part of either the NDA or INDIA alliances.
 Top ten parties in the General Elections (& number of seats won):
o Bharatiya Janata Party - 240
o Indian National Congress - 99
o Samajwadi Party - 37
o All India Trinamool Congress - 29
o Dravida Munnetra Kazhagam - 22
o Telugu Desam - 16
o Janata Dal (United) - 12
o Shiv Sena (Uddhav Balasaheb Thackrey) - 9
o Nationalist Congress Party – Sharadchandra Pawar - 8
o Shiv Sena – 7

Key Pointers to Remember:

 Prime Minister Narendra Modi retained his Varanasi constituency in Uttar Pradesh, defeating Congress
candidate Ajay Rai by a margin of 1,52,513 votes, although his victory margin significantly dropped from
nearly 480,000 votes in the previous election.
 Rahul Gandhi had a major victory in Raebareli, defeating BJP’s Dinesh Pratap by 3,90,030 votes, and also
won the Waynad seat with a margin of 3,64,422 votes over CPI’s Annie Raja.
 Amit Shah, the Home Minister, won the Gandhi Nagar seat by a margin of 7,44,716 votes against Congress’
Sonam Ranambhai Patel.
 Defence Minister Rajnath Singh secured the Lucknow seat for the third consecutive term, defeating
Samajwadi Party candidate Ravidas Mehrotra by 1,35,159 votes.
 Smriti Irani of the BJP was defeated by Congress’s Kishori Lal in Amethi.
 Suresh Gopi won the Thrissur constituency in Kerala by a margin of 74,686 votes, becoming the BJP’s first
Lok Sabha parliamentarian from the state.
 Shashi Tharoor retained his Thiruvananthapuram seat in Kerala for the fourth consecutive term, defeating
BJP’s Rajeev Chandrasekhar by 16,077 votes.
 BJP suffered a loss in the Faizabad constituency, where the Samajwadi Party won in the home of the Ram
temple in Ayodhya, consecrated by PM Modi earlier in January.
 BJP’s Shankar Lalwani from Indore, Madhya Pradesh, achieved the largest victory margin of the 2024
elections, winning by 12,26,751 votes against BSP’s Sanjay, with NOTA recording two lakh votes. Congress
candidate Akshay Kanti Bam withdrew his nomination on April 29 (before the third phase of election) and joined
the ruling BJP the same day.
 Four union ministers, including Smriti Irani, RK Singh, Arjun Munda, and Rajeev Chandrasekhar, lost in the
2024 elections.
 Shiv Sena’s Ravindra Dattaram Waikar won the Mumbai North West constituency by the narrowest margin
of the election, defeating Shiv Sena UBT’s Amol Gajanan Kirtikar by just 48 votes.
 TMC’s Yusuf Pathan defeated Congress leader Adhir Ranjan Chowdhury in Baharampur by a margin of 85,022
votes.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 20 of 348

 1

 Former Madhya Pradesh Chief Minister Shivraj Singh Chouhan of the BJP won the Vidisha seat by 8,21,408
votes against Congress’s Prataphanu Sharma.
 These results stand in contrast to the 2019 elections, where the BJP-led NDA won 353 seats, including 303 by
the BJP alone.

First General Elections:

 The first general elections in India were held between 25 October 1951 and 21 February 1952, the first
national elections after independence in 1947.
 Voters elected 489 members of the first Lok Sabha, with 173,212,343 registered voters (excluding Jammu
and Kashmir) out of a population of 361,088,090.
 All Indian citizens over the age of 21 were eligible to vote, though no voting took place in Jammu and Kashmir
until 1967 for Lok Sabha seats.
 The Indian National Congress (INC) won a landslide victory, securing 45% of the vote and 364 out of 489
seats, with Jawaharlal Nehru becoming the first democratically elected Prime Minister.

Election Commission
 The Election Commission of India, established on 25 January 1950, administers Union and State elections to
the Lok Sabha, Rajya Sabha, and State Legislative Assemblies, as well as the offices of the President and Vice
President.
 Panchayat and municipal elections are overseen by a separate State Election Commission as per
constitutional provisions.
 Constitutional provisions related to elections are covered under Part XV (Articles 324-329).
 Article 324 vests the superintendence, direction, and control of elections in the Election Commission, while
Article 326 provides for elections based on adult suffrage.
 The Election Commissioner Amendment Act of 1989 transformed the Election Commission into a multi-
member body, consisting of the Chief Election Commissioner (CEC) and other election commissioners, currently
including two Election Commissioners.
 Sh. Rajiv Kumar took charge as the 25th Chief Election Commissioner on 15 May 2022, after serving as
Election Commissioner since 1 September 2020.

PAKISTAN-TALIBAN CONFLICT
 In March 2024, Pakistan carried out airstrikes in Paktika and Khost provinces in Afghanistan, targeting
militants affiliated with the Tehreek-e-Taliban Pakistan (TTP).
 Casualties: Five women and three children were killed in the strikes, according to the Taliban regime in Kabul.
 The strikes were a retaliation after TTP’s Hafiz Gul Bahadur group claimed responsibility for a March 16
attack on a Pakistani army outpost in Khyber Pakhtunkhwa, which killed seven personnel including two
officers.
 In response, the Taliban launched attacks on Pakistani military posts along the Afghanistan-Pakistan border.
 Tehrik-e-Taliban Pakistan (TTP), also known as the Pakistani Taliban, was formed in 2007 under Baitullah
Mehsud.
 The TTP seeks to implement Islamic law in Pakistan and make the country an Islamic state.
 The group is responsible for killing tens of thousands of Pakistani citizens and has conducted attacks such as the
failed Times Square bombing in 2010.
 The TTP recruits primarily from the Pashtun tribal lands and finances itself through extortion, kidnappings,
donations, and natural resource extraction.
 The Afghan Taliban and TTP are different organizations but share ideological ties, both following the Deobandi
interpretation of Islam and advocating for Pashtun nationalism.
 The Afghan Taliban's rise to power has emboldened the TTP, resulting in more frequent attacks in Pakistan.
 Despite Pakistan's expectation of strategic influence post-2021, the Taliban has not severed ties with the TTP.
 Pakistan facilitated the peace agreement between the U.S. and the Taliban, which led to a phased withdrawal of
U.S. troops from Afghanistan.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 21 of 348

 1

 Pakistan played a key role in the Taliban’s rise in the 1990s and was one of only three countries to recognize
the Taliban regime, while maintaining an alliance with the U.S. in the war on terror.
 Border Disputes: The Durand Line dispute (border between Afghanistan and Pakistan) has been a long-
standing source of tension between the two countries.
 The line was demarcated in 1893 by the British, runs through Pashtun tribal lands, dividing families and villages
between Afghanistan and Pakistan.
 India has a stake in Afghanistan's stability, investing in infrastructure projects such as the Afghan Parliament,
Zaranj-Delaram Highway, and Salma Dam.
 India favors the continuation of the Afghan government and is concerned about the Taliban's growing influence,
which is seen as a protégé of Pakistan.
 India’s access to Afghanistan and Central Asia is largely dependent on transit routes through Pakistan, though
Chabahar Port offers an alternative route, enhancing India’s strategic position in the region.
 The withdrawal of U.S. troops could potentially provide a breeding ground for anti-India terrorist outfits like
Lashkar-e-Taiba and Jaish-e-Mohammed.

OVERVIEW OF WTO, ITO, WORLD BANK, IMF

World Bank
 Established: 1944 at the Bretton Woods Conference.
 Headquarters: Washington, D.C., United States.
 Primary Goal: To reduce poverty and support development by providing financial and technical
assistance to developing countries for projects that improve infrastructure, education, health, and overall
economic development.
 Membership: 189 member countries (as of 2024). Membership in the World Bank requires being a member
of the International Monetary Fund (IMF).
 Main Institutions: The World Bank Group is made up of five institutions.
o International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (IBRD): Provides loans to middle-income and
creditworthy low-income countries.
o International Development Association (IDA): Provides grants and concessional (low-interest) loans to
the world’s poorest countries.
o International Finance Corporation (IFC): Focuses on private sector development by investing in
businesses and industries in developing countries.
o Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency (MIGA): Provides political risk insurance and credit
enhancement to encourage foreign investment in developing countries.
o International Centre for Settlement of Investment Disputes (ICSID): Helps resolve investment disputes
between international investors and governments.
 Key Reports Released by the World Bank:
o World Development Report (WDR):
 Frequency: Annually.
 Content: Provides in-depth research on global economic and development issues, focusing on a different
development theme each year.
o Global Economic Prospects (GEP):
 Frequency: Biannually (twice a year).
 Content: Focuses on global economic trends and forecasts, providing insights into the economic
prospects of regions and countries.
o Poverty and Shared Prosperity Report:
 Frequency: Every 2 years.
 Content: Examines global poverty trends and how shared prosperity (income growth of the bottom
40%) is being achieved, with an emphasis on reducing inequality.
o Ease of Doing Business Report (discontinued in 2021):
 Frequency: Annually (until 2021).
 Content: Ranked countries on the ease of doing business, focusing on regulatory environments and the
processes required to start and operate a business.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 22 of 348

 1

o International Debt Statistics:

 Frequency: Annually.
 Content: Provides data and analysis on external debt and financial flows in low- and middle-income
countries.
 Key Projects and Programs:
o IDA Projects: Involve grants and low-interest loans to the poorest countries for projects in education,
healthcare, sanitation, and agriculture.
o Green Bonds: The World Bank issues green bonds to fund projects that combat climate change and
promote environmental sustainability.
o Human Development Projects: Focus on improving access to education, healthcare, and social
protection systems.
 Ranking/Indexes Released by the World Bank:
o Human Capital Index (HCI):
 Measures the potential productivity of the next generation of workers based on their health and
education.
 Provides insights into how well countries are investing in their people to drive long-term economic
growth.
o Logistics Performance Index (LPI): Evaluates the logistics capabilities of countries, focusing on factors
such as trade infrastructure, customs procedures, and supply chain efficiency.
o Global Financial Development Report: Assesses the state of financial systems across the world, focusing
on access to finance, stability, and financial infrastructure.
o Country Policy and Institutional Assessment (CPIA): A ranking of countries based on their policy
frameworks, governance, and capacity for fostering economic growth and poverty reduction.

International Monetary Fund (IMF)

 Established: 1944 at the Bretton Woods Conference, along with the World Bank.
 Headquarters: Washington, D.C., United States.
 Primary Goal: To ensure the stability of the international monetary system—exchange rates, international
payments, and the global financial system.
 Membership: 190 member countries (as of 2024).
 Key Functions of the IMF:
o Surveillance:
 Monitors global and member economies for stability.
 Conducts Article IV Consultations for economic analysis and policy advice.
o Financial Assistance:
 Provides loans to countries in economic crises or with balance of payments issues.
 Offers financial support through programs like Stand-By Arrangements (SBA) and Extended Fund
Facility (EFF).
 Grants concessional loans to low-income countries via the Poverty Reduction and Growth Trust
(PRGT).
o Capacity Development:
 Offers technical assistance and training to improve economic management.
 Focuses on public finance, monetary policy, financial systems, and statistics.
 Key IMF Reports:
o World Economic Outlook (WEO):
o Frequency: Biannually (twice a year).
o Content: Provides comprehensive analysis of global economic trends, forecasts, and risks, offering economic
outlooks for individual countries and regions.
 Global Financial Stability Report (GFSR):
o Frequency: Biannually (twice a year).
o Content: Assesses the stability of global financial markets and systems, identifying potential risks to financial
stability and offering policy recommendations.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 23 of 348

 1

 Fiscal Monitor:
o Frequency: Biannually (twice a year).
o Content: Focuses on fiscal policies and developments in countries, analyzing debt levels, fiscal strategies,
and the impact of government policies on economic stability.
 External Sector Report (ESR):
o Frequency: Annually.
o Content: Assesses global trade and capital flows, providing insights into countries’ external imbalances,
exchange rates, and competitiveness.
 Regional Economic Outlook Reports (REO):
o Frequency: Biannually (for different regions).
o Content: Provides region-specific economic analysis, trends, and challenges for regions such as Africa, Asia,
Europe, and Latin America.

International Trade Organization (ITO):

 The ITO was an ambitious initiative aimed at creating a comprehensive international institution to regulate not
just trade, but also employment, investment, and economic development.
 Proposed in: 1944 at the Bretton Woods Conference along with the IMF and the World Bank.
 Charter: The Havana Charter (1948) was the foundational document of the ITO, aimed at regulating
international trade and promoting economic growth, stability, and employment.
 Failed to Materialize: The ITO never came into existence because the U.S. Congress refused to ratify the
Havana Charter in 1950, mainly due to concerns over sovereignty and restrictions on domestic economic policy.
 Outcome: While the ITO failed to take shape, its goals were partially pursued through the GATT, and eventually,
the WTO emerged in 1995 to fulfill some of the ITO's original goals.

World Trade Organization (WTO):

 Established: January 1, 1995
 Predecessor: General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) of 1948.
 Headquarters: Geneva, Switzerland.
 Membership: 164 member countries (as of 2024)
 Plays a crucial role in promoting global trade cooperation, resolving conflicts, and ensuring the smooth flow of
international commerce.
 Dispute Settlement Body (DSB): Helps resolve disputes between members through structured processes,
ensuring compliance with WTO rules.
 Key Functions:
o Facilitates negotiations on international trade agreements.
o Provides a platform for settling trade disputes between member nations.
o Monitors and enforces trade policies and agreements of its members.
o Promotes free and fair trade by reducing trade barriers like tariffs and subsidies.
 Key Agreements:
o GATT: Governs trade in goods.
o GATS: General Agreement on Trade in Services, governing services trade.
o TRIPS: Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights, governing intellectual property protection in
trade.
Periodical Reports Released by WTO:
 World Trade Report:
o Frequency: Annually.
o Content: Provides in-depth analysis of key global trade developments and trends, focusing on specific trade-
related themes each year.
 Trade Policy Review (TPR):
o Frequency: Periodic (every 2 years for major economies, 4 years for intermediate economies, and 6 years
for smaller economies).
o Content: Reviews the trade policies and practices of individual member countries to enhance transparency.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 24 of 348

 1

 World Trade Statistical Review:

o Frequency: Annually.
o Content: Comprehensive global trade statistics and analysis, covering key data on exports, imports, major
trading economies, and sectors.
 Trade Monitoring Report:
o Frequency: Biannually (twice a year).
o Content: Tracks global trade measures taken by WTO members, such as changes in tariffs and trade
restrictions, assessing compliance with WTO rules.
 Global Trade Outlook and Statistics:
o Frequency: Annually (or more frequently, if necessary).
o Content: Provides projections for global trade volumes and examines risks and challenges for future trade
growth.
 Annual Report:
o Frequency: Annually.
o Content: Overview of WTO activities, including negotiations, dispute settlements, and progress toward
organizational goals.
 Trade and Development Report (in collaboration with UNCTAD):
o Frequency: Annually.
o Content: Focuses on the intersection of trade and development, especially in developing countries, and
highlights challenges and opportunities in the global trade environment.

RAMSAR SITES IN INDIA

 Total Ramsar Sites (as of October 2024): 85
 Wetland Definition (Environment Ministry): “Areas of marsh, fen, peatland, or water, natural or artificial,
permanent or temporary, with static or flowing water, including coastal areas up to 6m depth.”
o Excludes river channels, paddy fields, and human-made structures for drinking water, aquaculture, and
recreation.
 Ramsar Wetlands Area: Represents 10% of India’s total wetland area, spanning 18 States.
 Wetland Area in India: Estimated at 1,52,600 sq. km (~4.63% of India’s total area).
 India ranks third in the world in terms of the number of Ramsar sites.
 Gujarat has the largest wetland area, followed by Andhra Pradesh, Uttar Pradesh, and West Bengal.
 Sundarbans (West Bengal) is the largest Ramsar site in India.
 Wetlands in Uttar Pradesh and Gujarat are key stopovers for migratory birds.
 Chilika Lake in Orissa and Keoladeo National Park in Rajasthan were recognised as the first Ramsar sites
in India in 1981.
 Loktak Lake (Manipur), Khecheopalri Lake (Sikkim), Dal Lake (Kashmir) are significant culturally and as
tourism destinations.
 Wetlands help stabilize CO2, CH4, and N2O levels and sequester carbon through plant communities and soils.
 World's first Site: Cobourg Peninsula in Australia, designated in 1974.
 World’s largest Sites: Rio Negro in Brazil (120,000 square kilometres), and Ngiri-Tumba-Maindombe in the
Democratic Republic of Congo and Queen Maud Gulf in Canada; these Sites each cover over 60,000 square km.
 Top States:
o Tamil Nadu: 18 Ramsar sites (highest in number).
o Uttar Pradesh: 10 Ramsar sites.
 Countries with Most Ramsar Sites:
o United Kingdom: 175 sites.
o Mexico: 142 sites.
o China: 82 sites.
o Largest Ramsar Area: Bolivia with 1,48,000 sq. km under protection.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 25 of 348

 1

 Ramsar Convention:
o Adopted: February 2, 1971, in Ramsar, Iran.
o India’s Participation: Became a signatory in 1982.
o World Wetlands Day: Celebrated annually on February 2.
o Theme for 2024: "Wetlands and Human Wellbeing."
o Ramsar Site Criteria:
 Supports vulnerable or endangered species/ecological communities.
 Regularly supports 20,000+ waterbirds.
 Provides food, spawning grounds, or migration paths for fish.
 Peatlands: Covers 3% of land but store twice as much carbon as forests.
o Sparse in India, but critical for climate and biodiversity.
 Conservation Initiatives:
o Global Level:
 Montreux Record: A register of Ramsar sites where ecological changes have occurred.
 World Wetlands Day: Promotes awareness and conservation of wetlands.
o National Level:
 Wetlands (Conservation and Management) Rules, 2017: Framework for managing wetlands in
India.
 National Plan for Conservation of Aquatic Ecosystems (NPCA): Combines conservation efforts for
wetlands and lakes.
 Amrit Dharohar Capacity Building Scheme: Enhances wetland conservation efforts.
 National Wetland Conservation Programme (NWCP): Launched in 1985 for the conservation of
vulnerable wetlands.

Ramsar Sites Added in 2024 (Total 10, as of October 2024):

 Ankasamudra Bird Conservation Reserve (Karnataka):
o Human-made irrigation tank, area: 244.04 acres.
o Supports bird species including Bar-headed Goose.
 Aghanashini Estuary (Karnataka):
o Confluence of Aghanashini River and Arabian Sea, area: 4801 ha.
o Supports fishing, agriculture, and biodiversity conservation.
 Magadi Kere Conservation Reserve (Karnataka):
o Human-made wetland, area: ~50 ha.
o Important wintering ground for Bar-headed Goose, hosts vulnerable bird species.
 Karaivetti Bird Sanctuary (Tamil Nadu):
o Supports paddy and other agricultural crops.
o Hosts 198 bird species including Bar-headed Goose and Northern Shoveler.
 Longwood Shola Reserve Forest (Tamil Nadu):
o Tropical rainforest, important for endangered species like Nilgiri Laughing Thrush.
o Located in the upper Nilgiris.
 Nagi and Nakti Bird Sanctuaries (Bihar):
o Human-made wetlands, important for migratory birds.
o Host endangered Indian elephants and a variety of bird species.
 Nanjarayan Bird Sanctuary (Tamil Nadu):
o Restored wetland, area: 125.865 ha.
o Hosts species like Bar-headed Goose and Spot-billed Pelican.
 Kazhuveli Bird Sanctuary (Tamil Nadu):
o Brackish lake, area: 5151.6 ha.
o Supports mangroves and diverse aquatic habitats.
 Tawa Reservoir (Madhya Pradesh):
o Located at the confluence of Tawa and Denwa rivers.
o Supports irrigation, power generation, and aquaculture, lies within Satpura Tiger Reserve.
o Tawa River is the longest tributary of the Narmada river.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 26 of 348

 1

CORRUPTION PERCEPTION INDEX 2023

 Released by: Transparency International.
 Purpose: Ranks 180 countries and territories based on perceived levels of public sector corruption.
 Scoring system: Scale of 0 (highly corrupt) to 100 (very clean).
 Global average score: 43.
 Over two-thirds of countries scored below 50, indicating significant corruption problems.
 The global trend shows minimal progress over the past decade, with most countries stagnating or declining in
their efforts to combat corruption.
 Top Performing Countries:
o Denmark: Ranked 1st with a score of 90 (leading for the sixth consecutive year).
o Finland: Ranked 2nd with a score of 87.
o New Zealand: Ranked 3rd with a score of 85.
o Why they rank high: These countries have well-functioning justice systems and high rankings in the
Rule of Law Index, which ensures effective governance and lower corruption.
 Worst Performing Countries:
o Somalia: Ranked 180th with a score of 11.
o Venezuela, Syria, South Sudan, and Yemen: All tied at the bottom with scores of 13.
o Reasons for low ranking: These countries are plagued by protracted crises, often related to armed
conflicts and weak governance, which exacerbate corruption.
 India’s Performance:
o Rank: 93 out of 180 (declined from 85 in 2022).
o Score: 39 (slight decrease from 40 in 2022).
o Challenges: India faces persistent issues in tackling corruption despite efforts at various governance levels.
 Neighbouring Countries:
o Pakistan: Ranked 133, grappling with debt burdens and political instability.
o Pakistan's Supreme Court has expanded citizens' right to information under Article 19A, which helps
maintain some judicial oversight.
o Sri Lanka: Ranked 115, dealing with political instability but benefiting from strong judicial oversight.
o Bangladesh: Ranked 149, transitioning out of Least Developed Country (LDC) status with economic
growth, but struggles with restricted press freedom.
o China: Ranked 76, with an aggressive anti-corruption campaign that punished over 3.7 million officials
in the last decade. However, its reliance on punishment rather than institutional checks raises doubts about
long-term efficacy.
 Global Corruption Trends:
o Rule of Law and Corruption: The Rule of Law Index, published by the World Justice Project (WJP),
highlights a global decline in justice systems. Countries with weaker rule of law tend to have higher levels of
corruption.
o Corruption in Judicial Systems: Both authoritarian and democratic leaders are undermining judicial
independence, allowing impunity for corruption.
o Judicial corruption affects courts globally, where bribery and abuse of power limit access to justice for the
poor and vulnerable.
o Impacts on Society: In corrupt environments, the rich and powerful dominate judicial systems, resulting in
a lack of consequences for corrupt acts, further widening inequality.
 Key Recommendations in the report:
o Strengthening justice systems is crucial for addressing corruption.
o Ensuring fair and inclusive legal systems where everyone, including victims, can access justice is essential
to fight corruption effectively.
o Independent Judicial System: Corruption persists when justice systems are influenced by money or
politics, and thus must be kept independent to maintain checks on power.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 27 of 348

 1

75TH ANNIVERSARY OF THE SUPREME COURT

The Supreme Court marked its 75th anniversary with events held in Delhi, coinciding with the 75th anniversary
of the Indian Constitution.
Key Initiatives:
 Digital Supreme Court Reports (Digi SCR): Provides free electronic access to Supreme Court judgments
since 1950, promoting transparency and accessibility.
 Digital Courts 2.0: Utilizes AI for real-time transcription of court proceedings, streamlining judicial
processes.
 Revamped Bilingual Website: The new website is available in English and Hindi, improving access to judicial
information.
 Infrastructure Expansion: Plans for expanding the Supreme Court Building Complex were highlighted to
enhance judicial efficiency.
 Accessibility Focus: Initiatives to improve access to justice, especially in remote areas, were emphasized.
 Commemorative Stamp: A special postage stamp was released by the Prime Minister to celebrate 75 years
of the Supreme Court.
 New Supreme Court Flag and Insignia unveiled by President Murmu:
o New Flag: The flag is blue and prominently features the Ashoka Chakra, the Supreme Court building, and
the Constitution of India.
o New Insignia: Inscribed with ‘Supreme Court of India’ and the Sanskrit phrase ‘Yato Dharmastato Jayah’
(in Devanagari script), meaning "Where there is Dharma, there is victory" or "Victory lies where
righteousness prevails."
o Unveiling of New Lady Justice Statue:
 Commissioned at the direction of Chief Justice DY Chandrachud.
 A six-foot-tall statue was unveiled, depicting a saree-clad woman holding scales and the
Constitution of India instead of the traditional sword.
 Unlike the classical blindfolded version, this statue has no blindfold, symbolizing that "Law is not
blind; it sees everyone equally" as stated by Chief Justice D Y Chandrachud.
 The statue was designed by Vinod Goswami, reflecting the ongoing legal reforms and efforts to
“decolonize” the Indian legal framework.

Historical Background and Evolution of the Supreme Court of India:

 Establishment: The Supreme Court of India was established on 28th January 1950, replacing the Federal
Court of India and the British Privy Council as the highest court of appeal.
 Jurisdiction Expansion: The Supreme Court's jurisdiction is wider than that of its predecessors, with the power
to hear appeals, constitutional matters, civil and criminal cases.

Phases in Supreme Court’s Journey:

 First Phase (1950-1967):
o Judicial Restraint: Adherence to constitutional text and limited judicial activism.
o Notable Cases:
o Kameshwar Singh case (1952): Declared zamindari abolition as illegal but respected Parliament’s
constitutional amendments.
o Champakam Dorairajan case (1951): Struck down educational reservations but upheld the constitutional
right to equality.
 Second Phase (1967-1976):
o Judicial Activism: Marked by confrontations with Parliament, expanding fundamental rights.
o Key Judgments:
o Golak Nath case (1967): Asserted that Parliament cannot amend fundamental rights.
o Keshavananda Bharati case (1973): Introduced the basic structure doctrine, limiting Parliament’s
power to amend the Constitution.
o Emergency Period: The Court faced criticism for supporting the suspension of Article 21 (right to life) in
the ADM Jabalpur case (1976).

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 28 of 348

 1

 Third Phase (1978-2014):

o Post-Emergency Recovery: The judiciary sought to regain independence and credibility.
o Public Interest Litigation (PIL): Expanded access to justice through PILs, addressing issues of human
rights, environmental protection, and governance.
o Collegium System: Introduced to ensure judicial autonomy in appointing judges.
o Notable Judgment: Maneka Gandhi case (1978) expanded the interpretation of Article 21, broadening
personal liberty protections.
 Fourth Phase (2014-Present):
 Liberal Interpretation: The Court has continued its judicial activism by asserting its role in protecting
constitutional rights.
 Key Judgments:
o Right to Privacy as a Fundamental Right (2017)
 Case: Justice K.S. Puttaswamy (Retd.) v. Union of India.
 Judgment: Declared privacy as a fundamental right under Article 21 of the Constitution.
o Decriminalization of Section 377 (2018)
 Case: Navtej Singh Johar v. Union of India.
 Judgment: Decriminalized consensual same-sex relationships by partially striking down Section 377 of
the IPC, advancing LGBTQ+ rights.
o Abolition of Triple Talaq (2017)
 Case: Shayara Bano v. Union of India.
 Judgment: Declared instant triple talaq unconstitutional, protecting Muslim women's rights.
o Right to Die with Dignity (2018)
 Case: Common Cause v. Union of India.
 Judgment: Legalized passive euthanasia, expanding the scope of the right to life under Article 21.
o Ayodhya Verdict (2019)
 Case: M. Siddiq (D) Thr Lrs v. Mahant Suresh Das.
 Judgment: Awarded the disputed Ayodhya land to the Hindu side for temple construction while
allocating another site for a mosque.
o Decriminalization of Adultery (2018)
 Case: Joseph Shine v. Union of India.
 Judgment: Struck down Section 497 of the IPC, declaring adultery unconstitutional and violative of
Articles 14 and 21, ensuring gender equality.
o Sabarimala Temple Case (2018)
 Case: Indian Young Lawyers Association v. State of Kerala.
 Judgment: Lifted the ban on women of menstruating age from entering the Sabarimala Temple, affirming
gender equality.
o Suspension of Sedition Law (2022)
 Case: S.G. Vombatkere v. Union of India.
 Judgment: Suspended the colonial sedition law (Section 124A IPC), halting all new cases and pending
trials under the law.
o Revocation of Article 370 (2023)
 Judgment: Supported the revocation of Article 370 in 2019, integrating Jammu & Kashmir fully into
India, significantly altering the region's legal status.
o Election Commission Appointments (2023)
 Case: Anoop Baranwal v. Union of India.
 Judgment: Directed that appointments to the Election Commission of India should be made by a
committee consisting of the Prime Minister, Chief Justice of India, and Leader of the Opposition to ensure
transparency.
 Composition and Appointment:
o Strength: The Supreme Court has 34 judges, including the Chief Justice of India (CJI).
o Appointment: Judges are appointed by the President after consulting the Chief Justice of India and other
judges of the Supreme Court and High Courts.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 29 of 348
 1

o Eligibility: Judges must have served as a High Court judge for at least 5 years or as an advocate for 10 years
or be a distinguished jurist.
 Key Powers and Jurisdiction:
o Original Jurisdiction: Includes disputes between states and the central government (Article 131).
o Writ Jurisdiction: Power to issue writs for the enforcement of fundamental rights (Article 32).
o Appellate Jurisdiction: Hears appeals in constitutional, civil, and criminal matters.
o Advisory Jurisdiction: Provides legal advice to the President of India (Article 143).
 Role in Safeguarding Democracy:
o Guardian of the Constitution: The Supreme Court ensures the supremacy of the Constitution and protects
fundamental rights through judicial review.
 Judicial Independence:
o Financial Independence: Judges' salaries and expenses are drawn from the Consolidated Fund of India,
ensuring financial autonomy.
o Impeachment: Judges can only be removed for proven misbehavior or incapacity, through a special
majority in Parliament.
o Separation from Executive: Article 50 mandates separation between the judiciary and the executive.
o Significance of the Supreme Court:
o Upholding Rule of Law: Ensures that laws are interpreted justly and applied equally.
o Social Justice and Human Rights: Plays a key role in protecting marginalized communities and advancing
human rights through its judgments.
o Checking Executive Overreach: Acts as a check on the executive, ensuring its actions conform to the law.

SUPREME COURT CASE ON MADRASAS (2024)

 NCPCR Submission: The National Commission for Protection of Child Rights (NCPCR) submitted before the
Supreme Court that the curriculum taught in madrasas lacks comprehensiveness, violating the Right to
Education (RTE) Act, 2009.
 Curriculum Concerns: NCPCR argues that the textbooks focus heavily on the doctrinal primacy of Islam.
 Recommendation: NCPCR suggests that all Muslim and non-Muslim children should be moved from
madrasas to schools to receive education as per RTE guidelines.
 Allahabad High Court Judgment (March 2024):
o Act Declared Unconstitutional: The Allahabad High Court declared the Uttar Pradesh Board of
Madarsa Education Act, 2004, unconstitutional.
o Reason: The Act was found to contravene the principle of secularism enshrined in the Indian Constitution
and violated Article 14 (Right to Equality).
 Uttar Pradesh Board of Madarsa Education Act, 2004:
o Purpose: The Act was created to regulate and govern the functioning of madrasas in Uttar Pradesh.
o Framework: Established a Board to oversee madrasas' administration, curriculum, and activities in the
state.
 Madrasas in India:
o Total Madrasas (2018-19): 24,010 madrasas in India.
o Recognized Madrasas: 19,132.
o Unrecognized Madrasas: 4,878.
o Largest Concentration:
 Uttar Pradesh: 11,621 recognized and 2,907 unrecognized madrasas (60% of the country's total).
 Rajasthan: 2,464 recognized and 29 unrecognized madrasas.
 Several states and Union Territories, including Delhi, Assam, Punjab, Tamil Nadu, and Telangana had
no recognised madrasas.
 In 2023, 1.69 lakh students appeared for Class 10 and Class 12 equivalent exams conducted by the Uttar
Pradesh Madrasa Education Board.
 Parallel Board: States like Uttar Pradesh also have a Sanskrit education board, operating alongside the
madrasa system.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 30 of 348

 1

 A madrasa is an educational institution primarily associated with Islamic teachings. It evolved from
mosques and by the 10th century, madrasas became centers of both religious and secular learning.
 Origin: The earliest madrasas were established in Khorasan and Transoxania (present-day Iran, Central
Asia, and Afghanistan).
 Residential Facilities: Larger madrasas often provide accommodations, especially for students from
economically disadvantaged backgrounds.
 Categories of Madrasas in India:
o Madrasa Darse Nizami: Public charitable institutions that are not required to follow state school
curriculums.
o Madrasa Darse Aliya: Affiliated with state madrasa education boards. Teachers and officials are
appointed by the state government.
 Curriculum in Madrasas:
o The education system mirrors mainstream schooling, with levels such as Maulvi (Class 10), Alim (Class
12), Kamil (Bachelor’s degree), and Fazil (Master’s degree).
o Medium of Instruction: Charitable madrasas use Arabic, Urdu, and Persian as mediums, while recognized
madrasas use textbooks from the NCERT or state textbook corporations.
o Subjects: Include core subjects like Mathematics, Science, Hindi, English, Sociology, and optional papers
like Sanskrit or Deeniyat (religious studies).
 Funding for Madrasas:
o State and Central Government: Primary funding is from state governments, supplemented by central
schemes such as the Scheme for Providing Education to Madrasas/Minorities (SPEMM).
o Scheme for Providing Quality Education in Madrasas (SPQEM): Focuses on improving educational
standards.
o Infrastructure Development of Minority Institutes (IDMI): Aims at enhancing infrastructure in minority
institutions.
o Administrative Transfer: In April 2021, SPEMM was transferred from the Ministry of Minority Affairs to
the Ministry of Education.
 National Commission for Protection of Child Rights (NCPCR):
o NCPCR is a statutory body set up in March 2007 under the Commissions for Protection of Child Rights
(CPCR) Act, 2005.
o It functions under the Ministry of Women & Child Development.
o The Commission's primary role is to ensure that all laws, policies, programs, and administrative mechanisms
are aligned with a child rights perspective as outlined in the Constitution of India and the UN Convention
on the Rights of the Child.
o The NCPCR investigates complaints related to violations of child rights, including the right to free and
compulsory education under the Right to Education (RTE) Act, 2009.
o It monitors the implementation of the Protection of Children from Sexual Offences (POCSO) Act, 2012.

RIGHT AGAINST ADVERSE EFFECTS OF CLIMATE CHANGE

 Bench: Chief Justice of India (CJI) D.Y. Chandrachud, Justices J.B. Pardiwala, and Manoj Misra.
 Key Ruling: The Supreme Court ruled that people have a “right to be free from the adverse effects of climate
change”. This right is now recognized under Articles 14 and 21 of the Constitution.
 Context of the Case: The judgment was delivered in a case related to the conservation of the critically
endangered Great Indian Bustard (GIB).
 Petitioner: Filed by M K Ranjitsinh, a retired government official and conservationist.
 Objective: Sought protection for the Great Indian Bustard (GIB) and the Lesser Florican, both critically
endangered species.
 Petition's Request:
o Formulation and implementation of an emergency response plan for GIB protection.
o Installation of bird diverters, embargo on new projects, dismantling power lines, and wind turbines around
critical habitats.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 31 of 348
 1

 Previous Order (April 19, 2021): Imposed restrictions on setting up overhead transmission lines over a
99,000 sq. km area in GIB habitats in Rajasthan and Gujarat.
 Request for Modification: Filed by the Ministries of Power, Environment, and New & Renewable Energy
citing challenges for the power sector and commitments to renewable energy under the Paris climate
agreement.
 Supreme Court’s Response: Modified the 2021 order to allow an expert assessment of the feasibility of
underground power lines based on factors like terrain, population density, and infrastructure.
 The Court acknowledged that its previous directive on undergrounding power lines was not feasible and would
not achieve the intended conservation goals. The Union's plan for GIB conservation was approved.
 Constitutional Provisions:
o Article 48A: Mandates environmental protection by the State.
o Article 51A(g): Promotes the duty of citizens to conserve wildlife.
o Article 14: Guarantees equality before law, now expanded to address the right to be safeguarded from the
adverse effects of climate change.
o Article 21: Recognizes the right to life and personal liberty, which has been expanded to include
environmental rights, including protection from climate change.
o In the M.C. Mehta vs Kamal Nath case (2000), the Supreme Court affirmed the right to a clean
environment as part of Article 21.
 Implications of the 2024 Judgment:
o Strengthening Environmental Protection: This judgment reinforces legal bases for environmental
protections, aligning with international climate commitments.
o Influence on Future Litigation: The decision highlights the human rights dimension of climate change,
aligning with global trends recognized by organizations like the UN Environment Programme and the UN
Special Rapporteur on Human Rights and the Environment.
 Challenges in Balancing Climate Change Mitigation with Human Rights:
o Trade-offs: Mitigation strategies like land-use restrictions or renewable energy projects can displace people
or limit land access, conflicting with human rights.
o Access to Resources: Transitioning to renewable energy or carbon pricing can restrict access to resources
(e.g., energy, water, food), affecting marginalized communities.
o Environmental Migration: Climate-induced migration strains resources in host communities, raising
challenges in protecting both migrants' and host communities' rights.
o Adaptation vs. Mitigation: Balancing emission reductions and climate adaptation investments is difficult,
especially for vulnerable communities.
o International Cooperation: Climate change requires global collaboration, making it crucial to balance
national goals and global responsibilities while protecting vulnerable groups.

IRAN-ISRAEL CONFLICT
 After the Iranian Revolution of 1979, Iran transformed from a close ally of Israel under the Shah to an Islamic
Republic that openly opposed Israel, drastically changing the dynamics between the two nations.
 Religious and Ideological Differences:
o Iran: Governed by Shia Islam.
o Israel: Predominantly Jewish state.
 Iran is a strong supporter of the Palestinian cause, providing backing to militant groups like Hamas and
Hezbollah (considered terrorist organizations by Israel).
 Iran and Israel have been involved in proxy conflicts, backing opposing factions in various countries.
 Iran supports Hezbollah in Lebanon and Shia militias in Iraq, actions seen by Israel as direct threats.
 In Syria, Iran supports the Assad regime, while Israel opposes Iranian influence.
 In Yemen, Iran supports the Houthi rebels, while Israel aligns with opposing forces.
 Israel has strongly criticized the Iran nuclear deal (Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action - JCPOA) and has
conducted covert operations to disrupt Iran’s nuclear activities.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 32 of 348

 1

Key Events and Timeline

 1979: Iran's Islamic Revolution ousts the pro-Western Shah, cutting ties with Israel.
 1982: Israel invades Lebanon; Iran's Revolutionary Guards help establish Hezbollah, becoming Israel’s most
dangerous border adversary.
 1983: Hezbollah, backed by Iran, launches suicide bombings, driving Israeli forces from Lebanon.
 1992-1994: Argentina Bombings - Israel and Argentina accuse Iran and Hezbollah of bombing Israel's
embassy and a Jewish center in Buenos Aires. Both deny involvement.
 2002: Revelation of Iran’s secret uranium enrichment program raises fears of nuclear weapon development,
with Israel pushing for strong action.
 2006: Israel-Hezbollah War - A month-long conflict in Lebanon ends without eliminating Hezbollah.
 2010: Stuxnet Virus - A cyberattack (believed to be by Israel and the U.S.) targets Iran’s Natanz nuclear
facility.
 2012: Iranian nuclear scientist Mostafa Ahmadi-Roshan is assassinated in Tehran, allegedly by Israeli
operatives.
 2018: Israel strikes Iranian military targets in Syria after Iranian rockets hit Israeli-held Golan Heights.
 2020:
 Assassination of General Qassem Soleimani by the U.S.; Israel supports the strike. Iran retaliates with missile
strikes on Iraqi bases housing U.S. troops.
 Iranian nuclear scientist Mohsen Fakhrizadeh is assassinated; Iran blames Israel.
 2022: U.S.-Israel Pledge - U.S. President Biden and Israeli PM Lapid pledge to prevent Iran from acquiring
nuclear weapons.
 April 2024: Suspected Israeli airstrike kills seven Iranian officers in Damascus, triggering retaliatory drone
and missile attacks by Iran on Israel.
 July 2024: Hamas leader Ismail Haniyeh is assassinated in Tehran, allegedly by Israel.
 October 2024: Operation True Promise 2 - Iran launches 200 ballistic missiles at Israeli targets in the
largest direct attack during the conflict.
 October 2024: Hamas leader Yahya Sinwar, responsible for the October 2023 attack on Israel, is killed by
Israeli forces.

Implications of the Israel-Iran Conflict on India

1. Disruption of Trade Routes:
 The conflict threatens key shipping routes vital for India’s trade with Europe, the US, Africa, and West Asia.
 Red Sea and Suez Canal are critical, handling goods worth over USD 400 billion annually.
2. Economic Impact on Exports:
 Indian exports, particularly petroleum products, have been hit.
 Exports dropped by 9% in August 2024, with a 38% decline in petroleum product exports due to the Red Sea
crisis.
 Europe receives 21% of India’s petroleum product exports.
 Tea industry is vulnerable due to Iran being a significant importer, with 4.91 million kg exported to Iran in
early 2024.
3. Rising Shipping Costs:
 Shipping costs have risen by 15-20% due to conflict-related diversions.
 Increased costs are pressuring the profit margins of exporters in engineering, textiles, and garments.
4. India-Middle East-Europe Economic Corridor (IMEC):
 The IMEC, initiated during India's G20 presidency, aims to connect India, the Gulf, and Europe, reducing
reliance on the Suez Canal.
 The conflict threatens the progress and viability of this corridor, impacting regional trade and competition with
China’s Belt and Road Initiative.
5. Impact on Crude Oil Prices:
 The conflict has spiked global crude oil prices to around USD 75 per barrel.
 Higher oil prices may stall central banks' efforts to cut interest rates due to inflation concerns.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 33 of 348

 1

6. Effects on Indian Markets:

 India, importing over 80% of its oil, is vulnerable to price volatility.
 Indian stock markets (Sensex and Nifty) have already been affected by fears of prolonged conflict, with
investors shifting to safer assets like bonds and gold.
7. Logistics Challenges: Indian exporters are facing rising logistics costs and longer shipping routes.
India-Israel Trade:
 Growth: Trade has doubled over the past five years, reaching USD 10.7 billion in 2022-23.
 2023-24: Bilateral trade stood at USD 6.53 billion, excluding defense, showing a decline due to regional
instability.
 Key Exports: Diesel, diamonds, aviation turbine fuel, and Basmati rice.
 Diesel and diamonds account for 78% of India’s exports to Israel.
 Key Imports: Space equipment, diamonds, potassium chloride, and mechanical appliances.
India-Iran Trade:
 Declining Volumes: Trade between India and Iran has contracted over the last five years, reaching USD 2.33
billion in 2022-23.
 Trade Surplus: In 2022-23, India exported USD 1.66 billion worth of goods, primarily agricultural products, to
Iran and imported USD 0.67 billion.
 Key Exports: Basmati rice, tea, sugar, fresh fruits, pharmaceuticals, and meat.
 Key Imports: Methanol, petroleum bitumen, apples, dry dates, and liquified propane.

UNION BUDGET 2024-25

 Real GDP growth projected at 7.3% for FY 2023-24.
 Fiscal deficit for 2024-25 estimated to be 5.1% of GDP.
 FDI inflow during 2014-23 amounted to USD 596 billion, which is double the inflow during 2005-14.
 The government prioritizes the upliftment of the poor (‘Garib’), women (‘Mahilayen’), youth (‘Yuva’), and
farmers (‘Annadata’).
 A corpus of ₹1 lakh crore will be established with 50-year interest-free loans for youth.
 The scheme for 50-year interest-free loans for capital expenditure (CapEx) to states will be continued, with a
total outlay of ₹1.3 lakh crore.
 The government's approach to development is all-round, all-pervasive, and all-inclusive (सर्वां गीण, सर्व स्पर्शी और
सर्व समवर्े र्शी).

Key Focus Areas:

 Agriculture
o ₹1.52 lakh crore allocated for agriculture and allied sectors.
o Introduction of 109 high-yielding & climate-resilient varieties of 32 field & horticulture crops.
o Focus on natural farming for 1 crore farmers, with certification and branding support.
o Establishment of 10,000 bio-input resource centers to assist implementation.
o Digital crop survey for Kharif season using DPI in 400 districts.
o Issuance of Jan Samarth-based Kisan Credit Cards in 5 states.
o Financial support for setting up Nucleus Breeding Centers for Shrimp Broodstock.
o A new National Cooperation Policy to promote rural economy growth and job creation.
 Employment & Skilling: Prime Minister’s Package
o Scheme A (First Timers): Direct transfer of up to ₹15,000 to first-time EPFO employees.
o Scheme B (Job Creation in Manufacturing): Incentives for both employees and employers for EPFO
contributions during the first 4 years.
o Scheme C (Support to Employers): Reimbursement of ₹3,000 per month for up to 2 years for hiring
additional employees.
 Skilling Programs & Industrial Training Institutes (ITIs)
o 1,000 ITIs to be upgraded to hub and spoke models over the next 5 years.
o Focus on quality and outcome-based training in collaboration with states and industries.
o Internship programs with top companies for 1 crore youth, with a monthly allowance of ₹5,000.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 34 of 348

 1

 Special Focus on Women and Students

o Establishment of working women’s hostels and creches in collaboration with industries.
o Revision of the Model Skill Loan Scheme: Loans of up to ₹7.5 lakh for students.
o Introduction of E-vouchers for loans up to ₹10 lakh for higher education, with a 3% interest subsidy.
 Pradhan Mantri Janjatiya Unnat Gram Abhiyan
o Coverage of 63,000 villages, benefitting 5 crore tribal people.
o Inclusive Human Resource Development & Social Justice
o ₹3 lakh crore allocated for women and girl-focused schemes.
o Over 100 branches of India Post Payment Bank in the North Eastern Region.
o Completion of the Polavaram Irrigation Project for national food security.
o Essential infrastructure development funding for key industrial corridors.
 Manufacturing & Services (MSMEs)
o New mechanism for continuation of bank credit to MSMEs during stress.
o Increase in the Mudra loan limit from ₹10 lakh to ₹20 lakh.
o Mandatory onboarding on the TReDS platform for buyers with turnover reduced from ₹500 crore to ₹250
crore.
o Support for 50 multi-product food irradiation units in the MSME sector.
o Establishment of E-commerce Export Hubs in a PPP model for MSMEs and artisans.
 Urban Development: Cities as Growth Hubs
o Planned development of peri-urban areas through economic and transit planning.
o Brownfield redevelopment framework for existing cities.
o Water supply, sewage treatment, and solid waste management projects for 100 large cities.
o Transit Oriented Development Plans for 14 cities with populations above 30 lakh.
o PM Awas Yojana Urban 2.0 to benefit 1 crore urban poor and middle-class families.
o Establishment of 100 weekly ‘haats’ or street food hubs in select cities.
o Rental housing for industrial workers in PPP mode.
 Energy Security: Availability, Accessibility, and Affordability
o Over 1.28 crore registrations under the PM Surya Ghar Muft Bijli Yojana.
o A Pumped Storage Policy for renewable energy storage.
o Research and development of small modular nuclear reactors and new technologies.
o NTPC and BHEL to set up a 800 MW commercial thermal plant using AUSC technology.
o Roadmap for transitioning hard-to-abate industries towards the Indian Carbon Market.
o Energy audit for traditional micro and small industries in 60 clusters to transition to clean energy.
 Infrastructure
o ₹11,11,111 crore capital expenditure (3.4% of GDP).
o ₹1.5 lakh crore provision for long-term, interest-free loans for state infrastructure investments.
o Phase IV of PMGSY to provide all-weather connectivity to 25,000 rural habitations.
o Support of ₹11,500 crore for irrigation projects like the Kosi-Mechi intra-state link.
o Assistance for flood and disaster management in Assam, Himachal Pradesh, Uttarakhand, and Sikkim.
o Development of Industrial node at Gaya on the Amritsar-Kolkata Industrial Corridor.
o Road connectivity projects worth ₹26,000 crore:
 Patna-Purnea Expressway
 Buxar-Bhagalpur Expressway
o Bodhgaya, Rajgir, Vaishali & Darbhanga spurs
o Additional 2-lane bridge over the Ganga at Buxar
 ₹15,000 crore financial support for Andhra Pradesh Reorganization Act.
 Powering Innovation, Research & Development
o Establishment of Anusandhan National Research Fund for basic research and prototype development.
o ₹1 lakh crore financing pool to spur private sector-driven research and innovation.
o ₹1,000 crore venture capital fund to expand the space economy by 5 times over the next 10 years.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 35 of 348

 1

 Next-Gen Reforms
o Technology to accelerate the digitalization of the economy.
o Introduction of Jan Vishwas Bill 2.0 to enhance Ease of Doing Business.
o Incentives for states to implement Business Reforms Action Plans.
o Creation of sectoral databases to improve data governance.
o Review of the New Pension Scheme by a committee.
 Labour Reforms
o E-shram portal to integrate with other portals to provide a one-stop job-seeking solution.
o Shram Suvidha and Samadhan portals revamped to enhance compliance for industry and trade.
 NPS for Minors
o Launch of NPS-Vatsalya for contributions by parents/guardians for minors.
o Seamless conversion of NPS-Vatsalya into a regular NPS account upon the minor’s adulthood.

 Simplification of IT Act, Tax Reassessment, and Capital Gains Taxation

Tax Aspect Details
Income Tax Act, 1961 Simplified and easier to read
Reassessment Time limit reduced from 10 years to 6 years
Short-term gains on financial assets Taxed at 20%
Long-term gains Taxed at 12.5%

 Tax Relief and Revised Tax Slabs in New Tax Regime

Income Range (₹) Tax Rate (%)
0-3 lakh Nil
3-7 lakh 5%
7-10 lakh 10%
10-12 lakh 15%
12-15 lakh 20%
Above 15 lakh 30%
o Income tax savings of up to ₹17,500 for salaried employees.
o Income tax relief for salaried individuals and pensioners.
 Indirect Taxes (Customs Duty)
Goods/Services Customs Duty Rate
Medicines for cancer patients Fully removed
Mobile phone, mobile PCBA, chargers 15%
Shrimp & Fish Feed 5%
Gold and silver 6%
Platinum 6.4%

INDIA FOREIGN POLICY MODI ERA

Since taking office in 2014, Prime Minister Narendra Modi's foreign policy has been characterized by a proactive,
pragmatic, and multifaceted approach, aiming to reassert India's position on the global stage.
 This period saw the government emphasize economic diplomacy, leveraging India's growing economy and
technological capabilities to strengthen international partnerships.
 Modi's foreign policy initiatives, such as the Neighbourhood First Policy, Act East Policy, and Link West
Policy, have focused on regional and global engagement, underscoring India's role as a key player in both its
immediate neighborhood and on the global front.
 In addition, the government has placed strong emphasis on national security, strategic partnerships, and soft
power diplomacy, all while navigating complex geopolitical challenges.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 36 of 348

 1

General Foreign Policy Objectives of the Modi Government:

 Focus on Immediate Neighbors: Priority is to enhance relations with neighboring countries, as peace and
stability in South Asia is essential for India's development agenda.
 Para Diplomacy: Introduction of the concept of para diplomacy where Indian states and cities are encouraged
to establish special relations with countries, federal states, or cities of interest.
 Bilateral Trade Focus: Bilateral trade is the primary focus in India's relations with most countries, with special
emphasis on strategic partnerships with major global powers.
 SAARC Outreach:
o Modi invited all SAARC leaders and the leader of Mauritius (an observer in SAARC) to his swearing-in
ceremony.
o Lobsang Sangay, Prime Minister of the Tibetan Government-in-Exile, was present in the spectator’s gallery.
 Global Stage Re-engagement:
o One of the government’s key goals is to bring India back on the global stage.
o This involved outreach to SAARC countries, meetings with leaders of Japan, China, USA, and visits to
countries like Australia, UK, and France.
o Frequent foreign trips by the President and the External Affairs Minister have supported this initiative.
 Investor Confidence:
o Re-establishing international investor confidence in the Indian economy and polity is a major goal.
o The decisive majority of the NDA alliance has led to increased optimism and higher capital inflows.
o Despite this, there has been no proportional rise in Gross Fixed Capital Formation (GFCF).
 Attracting Foreign Direct Investment (FDI): Engaging directly with the largest foreign direct investors is
essential to restore confidence and remove policy bottlenecks that hinder infrastructure and manufacturing
investments.

Changes in Foreign Policy Under NDA Government

Centrality of Economic and Technological Development
 Focus on Technology: The government’s emphasis goes beyond economic development to recognize the critical
role of technology in driving economic power.
 Global Benchmarking: There is an implicit comparison of India's technological capabilities with global
standards, identifying gaps across sectors and aiming to bridge these through domestic and foreign policies.

Integration of Domestic and Foreign Policy

 Alignment with Domestic Programs: Foreign policy is increasingly aligned with domestic objectives.
 Promotion of National Initiatives: Prime Minister Modi referenced domestic programs like Swachh Bharat
and Digital India/Smart Cities in international platforms such as the USA and Japan.
 Global Collaboration: Modi has emphasized how advanced countries can help India achieve its goals related to
economic development and technological advancements.
Emphasis on National Power
 Balanced National Power: There is a stronger focus on national power, integrating economic, military-
strategic, and soft power.
 Military Strength: Acknowledges that economic power alone cannot substitute for military power in
international security and deterrence, especially against ideologically driven foes.
 Focus on Unconventional Threats: The government places increased focus on addressing cross-border
terrorism, non-state actors, and external ideologies.
 Domestic Defense Production: Greater emphasis on enhancing India's capacity to produce a wide range of
defense equipment domestically.

Greater Emphasis on Global Socio-politics and Soft Power

 Soft Power Expansion: There is a stronger focus on India's soft power in global politics.
 Cultural and Religious Ties: India is leveraging its cultural and religious heritage to build relations (e.g.,
Hinduism with Nepal, Buddhism with East and Southeast Asia, Yoga with the West, Islam with Indonesia,
Democracy with Australia and Canada).

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 37 of 348

 1

 Diaspora Engagement: India's global diaspora is increasingly viewed as an asset in advancing its global
influence.

Confident Pragmatism
 Flexible Economic-Security Relations: The government has relaxed self-imposed constraints, allowing for
independent pursuit of economic relationships with potential adversaries, separate from security concerns.
 Case Example: This approach is evident in PM Modi’s meetings with China’s President Xi Jinping, where
economic agreements were signed, and collaboration in the formation of the BRICS Bank and Asian
Infrastructure Investment Bank (AIIB) took place.

Policy Initiatives
Neighbourhood First Policy
 Focus: The Neighbourhood First Policy prioritizes strengthening ties with India's immediate neighbours in
South Asia.
 SAARC Outreach: Modi invited all SAARC leaders to his swearing-in ceremony on May 26, 2014, followed by
bilateral talks.
 SAARC Satellite: At a launch event at ISRO in 2014, Modi encouraged scientists to develop a SAARC satellite
for shared benefits like tele-medicine and e-learning, complementing the existing Indian Technical and
Economic Cooperation Programme.

Act East Policy

 Origin: The Look East Policy was initiated in 1992 by Narasimha Rao to engage with ASEAN and East Asian
countries.
 Act East Outlook: Sushma Swaraj emphasized the "Act East Policy" during her visit to Vietnam in 2014,
emphasizing a more proactive role in ASEAN and East Asia.

Link West Policy

 Strengthening Gulf Relations: This policy aims to enhance ties with India’s western neighbours, especially
Gulf countries, complementing the Act East Policy.
 Focus: Although termed 'Link West' with a broader geographical scope, it primarily focuses on the Middle East,
with some calling it Modi’s Middle-East Policy.

Indian Ocean Outreach

 Maritime Cooperation: This initiative focuses on building stronger economic and security cooperation with
maritime neighbours in the Indian Ocean Region (IOR).
 Strategic Visits: Unveiled during Modi's visits to Sri Lanka, Mauritius, and Seychelles.
 Objective: Establishes India's strategic supremacy in the IOR, contrasting with China's approach in the South
China Sea.

India First
 Clarity in Negotiations: The "India First" approach expresses India’s clear and specific demands from economic
and technological powers.
 Decision-Making: India’s choices are based on a cost-benefit analysis, rather than ideological or philosophical
considerations like non-alignment.

Fast-track Diplomacy
 Catchphrase: External Affairs Minister Sushma Swaraj coined "Fast-track Diplomacy" with three focuses:
proactive, strong, and sensitive.
 Achievements: A booklet titled "Fast Track Diplomacy" was published after 100 days of the Modi government
in 2014, showcasing foreign policy accomplishments.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 38 of 348

 1

AMENDMENTS IN SURROGACY RULES

Amendment in March 2023: The Surrogacy (Regulation) Rules, 2022, were amended to prohibit the use of donor
gametes, mandating that both male and female gametes must come from the intending couple.
 Supreme Court Judgment (October 2023):
o In the Arun Muthuvel vs. Union of India case, the Supreme Court allowed a woman with Mayer-
Rokitansky-Kuster-Hauser (MRKH) Syndrome to use a donor egg for surrogacy.
o The Court noted that the amendment impeding the use of donor gametes contradicted the objective of the
Surrogacy (Regulation) Act, 2021, which aims to help intending couples achieve parenthood through
surrogacy.

Recent Amendment (2024):

 Key Change: The 2024 amendment allows the use of donor gametes in surrogacy.
 Medical Certification: To use donor gametes, a certification from the District Medical Board is required,
confirming that one of the intending couple suffers from a medical condition necessitating the use of donor
gametes.

Key Features of the Surrogacy Act, 2021:

 Definition of Surrogacy: Surrogacy is when a woman carries and gives birth to a child for an intending couple,
with the intent to hand over the child after birth.
 Regulation of Surrogacy:
o Prohibited: Commercial surrogacy is banned.
o Permitted: Altruistic surrogacy is allowed.
o Mandatory Registration: Surrogacy clinics must be registered.
o Permissible: Surrogacy is allowed for intending couples with medical conditions requiring gestational
surrogacy, and for altruistic purposes, excluding child exploitation.
 Eligibility Criteria for Surrogate Mothers:
o A married woman, aged 25 to 35 years, with at least one biological child.
o Can only be a surrogate once in her lifetime.
o Must have a medical and psychological fitness certificate.
 Eligibility Criteria for Couples:
o Must possess a certificate of essentiality and a certificate of eligibility issued by appropriate authorities.
o The certificate of eligibility to the intending couple is issued upon fulfilment of the following conditions: (i)
the couple being Indian citizens and married for at least five years; (ii) between 23 to 50 years old (wife) and
26 to 55 years old (husband); (iii) they do not have any surviving child (biological, adopted or surrogate);
this would not include a child who is mentally or physically challenged or suffers from life threatening
disorder or fatal illness;
o Indian women who are widowed or divorced, aged between 35 to 45 years, can also avail surrogacy under
certain conditions.
o Single women undergoing surrogacy must use self-eggs and donor sperms to avail surrogacy procedure.
 Rights of Surrogate Child:
o The child born out of surrogacy is deemed the biological child of the intending couple or intending woman,
with full rights and privileges of a natural child.
 Prohibition of Abortion:
o No person or organization can force the surrogate mother to abort except in legally prescribed conditions.
 National Assisted Reproductive Technology and Surrogacy Board:
o Headed by the Minister of Health and Family Welfare.
o Functions include advising on policy matters, monitoring implementation, setting standards for clinics, and
overseeing State Boards.
 State Assisted Reproductive Technology and Surrogacy Boards:
o Constituted in states and Union Territories with a Legislature.
Issues Associated with the Surrogacy Regulation Framework:
 Ban on Commercial Surrogacy:

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 39 of 348

 1

o Risks pushing surrogacy into unregulated markets.

o Prevents women from using their reproductive capacity for monetary benefit.
o In Devika Biswas vs. Union of India (2016), the Supreme Court recognized reproductive rights under
Article 21.
.

MARATHA RESERVATION BILL

The Maharashtra State Assembly passed the Maharashtra State Reservation Bill, 2024, providing 10 percent
reservation for the Maratha community in government jobs and education under the socially and educationally
backward classes (SEBC) category.
 The Bill is based on the Maharashtra State Backward Classes Commission report, which identified the
Maratha community as socially and educationally backward.
 Constitutional Provisions Involved:
o Article 342A (3): Allows States and Union Territories to maintain a separate list of SEBCs, different from
the central list.
o Article 15(4): Empowers the state to make special provisions for socially and educationally backward
classes (SEBCs) and Scheduled Castes/Scheduled Tribes (SC/ST).
o Article 15(5): Enables the state to provide for reservations in educational institutions for backward classes,
excluding minority educational institutions.
o Article 16(4): Empowers the state to reserve appointments or posts for backward classes under-
represented in state services.
 Key Features:
o Creamy Layer Principle: The reservation will apply to Marathas who do not fall under the creamy layer
category, ensuring benefits to the economically marginalized within the community.
o Justification for Exceeding 50% Limit: Based on the Indira Sawhney Judgment (1992), the SC has
allowed reservations beyond the 50% limit for Marathas citing "abnormal and exceptional circumstances."
 Reservation Status in Maharashtra:
o Maharashtra currently has 52% reservation for various communities, including SC, ST, OBC, nomadic, and
semi-nomadic groups.
o With the addition of 10% Maratha reservation, the total reservation in Maharashtra will now reach 62%.
Important Committees and Commissions:
Narayan Rane Committee (2014):
 Recommended 16% reservation for the Maratha community before the 2014 general elections in Maharashtra.
 The recommendation was challenged in the Bombay High Court, which stayed the decision.
Gaikwad Commission (2018):
 Based on its findings, the Socially and Educationally Backward Class (SEBC) Act was enacted, granting 16%
reservation to the Maratha community.
 Bombay High Court later reduced the reservation to 12% in education and 13% in jobs.
 In May 2021, the Supreme Court abolished this category of reservation due to exceeding the 50% limit and
lack of adequate empirical data.
 The Indira Sawhney Judgment (1992) by the Supreme Court set the maximum reservation limit at 50%, with
exceptions allowed in extraordinary circumstances.
Maharashtra State Backward Classes Commission (2023):
 A new commission was set up in December 2023, headed by retired Justice Sunil B. Shukre, to re-evaluate the
Maratha reservation issue.
 Findings:
o 28% of Maharashtra’s population is Maratha, with 84% not advanced economically, educationally, or
socially.
o The plight of the community is attributed to extreme poverty, declining agricultural income, and land
division.
o 94% of farmers who committed suicide in Maharashtra were from the Maratha community.
o Under-representation of Marathas in public services is cited as a factor in their backwardness.
 Recommendation: Provide additional reservation for Marathas to increase their representation in government
jobs and other developed areas.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 40 of 348
 1

 Social and Economic Backwardness: The Shukre Commission identified the Maratha community as socially
and economically backward, needing reservations for upliftment.
 Farmer Suicides: The high percentage of farmer suicides among Marathas highlights the severity of their
economic distress, necessitating targeted intervention.
PERIODIC LABOUR FORCE SURVEY (PLFS) ANNUAL REPORT (JULY, 2023 –
JUNE, 2024) RELEASED BY NSSO
PLFS was launched in 2017 to estimate key employment and unemployment indicators. The objective of PLFS is
primarily twofold:

Objectives of PLFS:
1. Short-Term Urban Estimations:
o To estimate key employment and unemployment indicators such as Worker Population Ratio (WPR), Labour
Force Participation Rate (LFPR), and Unemployment Rate (UR) every three months for urban areas based
on Current Weekly Status (CWS).
2. Annual Estimations for Rural and Urban Areas:
o To estimate employment and unemployment indicators in both Usual Status and CWS annually for rural
and urban areas.
o Usual Status: Reference period is 365 days.
o Current Weekly Status (CWS): Reference period is 7 days.
Key Indicators Used in PLFS:
 Worker Population Ratio (WPR): Percentage of employed persons in the population.
 Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR): Percentage of people in the labor force (working, seeking work, or
available for work) within the total population.
 Unemployment Rate (UR): Percentage of unemployed persons among the total labour force.
 Activity Status: Determined based on activities pursued by an individual during the specified reference period
(preceding the survey date).

Key Highlights of the PLFS Report 2023-24:

 Stagnant Unemployment Rate:
o The unemployment rate for 2023-24 remained at 3.2%, the same as 2022-23.
o This is the first instance since the PLFS inception in 2017-18 where the unemployment rate hasn't shown
a year-on-year decline.
 Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR):
o The LFPR increased to 60.1% in 2023-24, up from 57.9% in 2022-23.
o Rural LFPR rose to 63.7%, while Urban LFPR increased to 52%.
o Indicates a greater number of people seeking work, particularly in rural areas, possibly due to reverse
migration or limited urban job opportunities post-pandemic.
o LFPR refers to the proportion of people working or seeking work in the total population.
 Worker Population Ratio (WPR):
o WPR increased to 58.2% in 2023-24.
o The male WPR was 76.3%, and the female WPR was 40.3%.
o WPR is the proportion of employed persons in the population.
 Job Quality Marginally Improved:
o The share of salaried or regular wage workers increased by 0.8 percentage points to 21.7%.
 Urban and Rural Divergence:
o Rural unemployment rate increased slightly to 2.5% from 2.4% in 2022-23.
o Urban unemployment rate decreased to 5.1% from 5.4%.
 Gender Disparity:
o Unemployment for women increased to 3.2%, up from 2.9% in 2022-23.
o For men, it decreased slightly to 3.2% from 3.3%.
 Increase in Self-Employment and Unpaid Work:

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 41 of 348

 1

o The share of people in self-employment rose to 58.4%, up from 57.3% in 2022-23.

o Self-employment includes entrepreneurial ventures and precarious informal work, making it a mixed
indicator of job quality.

BHUTAN PM VISIT TO INDIA AND SUBSEQUENT MEETINGS

 Bhutan's Prime Minister, H.E. Dasho Tshering Tobgay, visited India to further strengthen the close ties between
the two nations.
 Agreements Signed: During the talks, a series of agreements were signed, reflecting the mutual interests of both
countries in various sectors.
 Shared Values and Trust: India and Bhutan’s relationship is deeply rooted in trust, shared values, and goodwill,
fostering cooperation on multiple levels.
 Importance of the Friendship: This enduring friendship between India and Bhutan is essential for ensuring
mutual prosperity and promoting regional stability in South Asia.

Highlights of India-Bhutan Bilateral Talks:

 Petroleum Agreement:
o India and Bhutan signed an agreement for the supply of petroleum products, ensuring a reliable and
sustained supply from India to Bhutan.
o This enhances economic cooperation in the hydrocarbon sector and fosters bilateral growth.
 Food Safety Collaboration:
o Agreement signed between Bhutan's Food and Drug Authority and India's FSSAI to improve cooperation
on food safety standards.
o The collaboration aims to facilitate trade by ensuring compliance with food safety measures and reducing
compliance costs for both countries.
 Energy Efficiency and Conservation:
o A Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) was signed on energy efficiency and conservation,
demonstrating both countries' commitment to sustainable development.
o India will assist Bhutan in promoting the use of energy-efficient appliances and in developing standards
and labelling schemes to improve energy efficiency.
 Border Dispute Resolution:
o The talks coincided with ongoing discussions between China and Bhutan to resolve their border dispute,
particularly concerning the Doklam region, which holds regional security implications.
o Bhutan and China agreed on a border plan in August 2023, following an agreement signed in October 2021,
post the 2017 Doklam standoff between India and China.
 Bhutan’s Regional Economic Hub in Gelephu:
o Bhutan's plans for developing the Gelephu Mindfulness City (GMC), a sustainable regional economic
hub, initiated in December 2023.
o Spanning 1,000 square kilometres, it will focus on non-polluting industries like IT, education, hospitality,
and healthcare, aligned with India's Act East policy and regional connectivity goals.
 Financial Aid in Budget:
o In India’s Interim Budget 2024-25, Bhutan received the largest share of India's aid portfolio, with an
allocation of Rs 2,068 crore, reflecting India’s ‘Neighbourhood First’ policy.

Significance of Bhutan for India:

Strategic Importance:
 Geopolitical Buffer: Bhutan shares borders with both India and China, making it a vital buffer state for India’s
security interests.
 Defense and Infrastructure Support: India provides Bhutan with assistance in defense, infrastructure, and
communication to help maintain its sovereignty and territorial integrity.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 42 of 348

 1

 Border Infrastructure Development: India has assisted Bhutan in building border infrastructure like roads
and bridges to enhance Bhutan's defense capabilities.
 Doklam Standoff (2017): Bhutan played a crucial role during the Doklam standoff by allowing Indian troops
to enter its territory to counter Chinese incursions.

Economic Importance:
 Largest Trading Partner: India is Bhutan's largest trading partner and its major export destination.
 Hydropower Development: India has played a significant role in developing Bhutan’s hydropower projects,
which are a major source of revenue for Bhutan.
Cultural Importance:
 Cultural Ties: Both nations share strong cultural links, particularly through Buddhism and Hinduism, with a
vibrant Buddhist community in both countries.
 Education and Heritage: India has assisted Bhutan in preserving its cultural heritage, and many Bhutanese
students come to India for higher education.
Environmental Importance:
 Carbon-Neutral Commitment: Bhutan is committed to remaining carbon-neutral, and India has supported
Bhutan in achieving this goal.
 Renewable Energy and Conservation: India provides assistance in areas such as renewable energy, forest
conservation, and sustainable tourism to support Bhutan’s environmental goals.

HEAVY RAINFALL AND FLOOD IN UAE

 Record Rainfall: The UAE experienced the heaviest rainfall since 1949, with Dubai receiving 142 millimeters
of rain in one night. Normally, Dubai gets 94.7 millimeters annually.
 Heavy Rainfall Across the UAE:
o Al Ain recorded 254 millimeters.
o Fujairah saw 145 millimeters.
Impact on Daily Life:
 Widespread Flooding: Flooding affected homes, major roads, and prominent shopping centers like Dubai
Mall and Mall of the Emirates.
 Air Travel Disruptions: Flights were suspended and delayed at Dubai International Airport.
 Schools Closed: Schools across the UAE were closed due to the rains.
 Work-from-Home Directives: The government mandated work-from-home policies to manage the situation.
 Fatalities in Oman: In Oman, the rains resulted in the deaths of 18 people, including schoolchildren.
Reasons for Heavy Rains in the UAE:
 Storm System: A significant storm system moved across the Arabian Peninsula, causing unusually high rainfall
in the region.
 Cloud Seeding: The UAE utilized cloud seeding technology, where salt mixtures are sprayed into clouds to
induce rain. The National Center for Meteorology conducted six to seven cloud-seeding flights before the
storm.
 Climate Change: Global warming may have contributed, as higher temperatures lead to more water
evaporation, allowing the atmosphere to hold more moisture. The UAE has experienced a 1.5-degree Celsius
temperature rise over the past 60 years.
 Natural Climate Variability: Events such as El Niño and La Niña also impact weather extremes, making it
difficult to attribute this specific event solely to climate change.
Extreme Weather Patterns in India:
 Record-Breaking Heat: Early 2023 saw scorching temperatures, breaking a 123-year-old record in February.
 Cyclone Biparjoy: Formed in the Arabian Sea and lasted 13 days, making it the longest-lasting cyclone since
1977.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 43 of 348

 1

Frequency of Extreme Weather Events:

 314 Days of Extreme Events: According to the India Meteorological Department (IMD), India experienced
extreme weather on 314 out of 365 days in 2022, reflecting the trend in 2023.
Human and Economic Losses:
 Loss of Life and Crops:
o 3,026 lives lost due to extreme weather in 2023.
o 1.96 million hectares of crops were damaged, exacerbating economic hardships.
 Economic Impact: India is losing 3-5% of its GDP due to climate change, and this could rise to 10% if global
warming exceeds 2°C.
Shifting Monsoon Patterns:
 Changing Rainfall: Monsoon patterns have shifted to periods of prolonged deficit rainfall, followed by intense
rainfall in a short span.
 Increased Rainfall Intensity: This pattern has been growing stronger for decades due to warmer
temperatures and increased moisture in the air.
 Recent Heavy Rainfall: The interaction between western disturbances and the southwest monsoon is
causing concentrated, heavy rainfall in northern India.

IPCC Reports on Climate Change:

 Impact of Global Warming: IPCC assessments in 2023 confirmed that global warming is accelerating severe
climate-related events, including continuous heavy rainfall.

FRANCE AND INDIAN ABORTION LAW

France has become the first country to explicitly guarantee the right to abortion in its constitution.
 Background:
o Abortion Legalization: Abortion was first legalized in France in 1975.
o The decision to amend the constitution was driven by French President Emmanuel Macron following the
2022 rollback of abortion rights in the United States after the Roe v. Wade case.
 Constitutional Amendment:
o Amended Article 34 of the French Constitution now guarantees that "the law determines the conditions in
which a woman has the guaranteed freedom to have recourse to an abortion."
o The amendment provides a guarantee for current and future generations of women to have the right to
abortion in France.
o The constitutional amendment was approved with a three-fifths majority in a joint parliamentary session.
 Global and Historical Context:
o France’s constitutional protection goes further than similar provisions in the 1974 Yugoslav Constitution,
which allowed for freedom in deciding to have children but didn’t explicitly guarantee abortion rights.
o France’s amendment is in contrast to countries like Hungary, which placed significant bureaucratic hurdles
for abortion in 2022, and Poland, which imposed a near-total ban on abortion in 2021.
 Significance:
o The measure is hailed as a victory for feminists and a setback for anti-choice activists.
o A public ceremony marking the occasion was held on March 8, for International Women's Rights Day.

Global Trend Toward Liberalization:

 Global Abortion Statistics: Approximately 73 million abortions occur globally each year, according to the
World Health Organization (WHO).
 Liberalization of Abortion Laws: Over the past 50 years, there has been a clear trend toward liberalizing
abortion laws, especially in industrialized countries.
 Shift in Reproductive Rights: Despite the liberalization trend, some countries have moved toward restricting
abortion rights.

United States - Key Changes:

 Roe v. Wade Overturned: In 2022, the Supreme Court of the United States overturned the landmark Roe v.
Wade (1973) decision, which had guaranteed the constitutional right to abortion.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 44 of 348

 1

 Dobbs v. Jackson Women’s Health Organization: The 2022 decision marked a major shift in abortion rights,
leading to 21 states moving to ban or restrict access to abortion.

International Recognition of Abortion as a Human Right:

 Cairo Conference, 1994: At the International Conference on Population and Development, 179
governments committed to preventing unsafe abortions.
 United Nations’ 2030 Agenda: In 2015, the UN expanded its agenda to call for universal access to
reproductive-health care.
 WHO Recognition: The WHO identified unsafe abortion as a public health issue in 1967 and issued guidelines
in 2003 recommending that states adopt laws to protect women’s health.
 UN Population Fund: Advocates that addressing the unmet need for family planning could reduce maternal
mortality and decrease the number of abortions by up to 70% in the developing world.

Recent Trends in Abortion Laws:

 Liberalization:
o In the last 30 years, 60+ countries have expanded abortion access.
o Countries like Argentina, Thailand, South Korea, New Zealand, Colombia, and Mexico have legalized or
eased abortion restrictions.
 Countries Restricting Abortion: Despite global liberalization, countries such as the United States, Honduras,
El Salvador, Nicaragua, and Poland have tightened restrictions.

Abortion in India
Criminalization under the IPC:
 Section 312 of the IPC: Criminalizes voluntarily causing a miscarriage, even with the woman’s consent, unless
it’s to save her life.
 This provision means both the woman and any assisting party, including a medical practitioner, could be
prosecuted for the abortion.

Liberalization under the MTP Act (1971):

 Medical Termination of Pregnancy Act, 1971: Introduced to liberalize access to abortion, following unsafe
practices under restrictive laws.
 The Shantilal Shah Committee recommended the enactment of this law to address the rising concern of unsafe
abortions.

Amendments in the MTP Act (2021):

 Upper Gestation Limit Increased: The 2021 Amendment extended the upper gestation limit for seeking an
abortion from 20 weeks to 24 weeks for specific categories, including vulnerable women like survivors of rape,
incest, minors, and others.
 Medical Practitioner’s Opinion:
o For pregnancies up to 20 weeks, the opinion of one medical practitioner is required.
o For pregnancies between 20 to 24 weeks, the opinion of two medical practitioners is necessary.
o Beyond 24 weeks, the approval of a state-level medical board is required, particularly in cases of fetal
abnormalities.

Confidentiality and Unmarried Women:

 Confidentiality Clause: The 2021 Amendment ensures the privacy of women undergoing abortions,
prohibiting the disclosure of personal information except when legally required.
 Expanded Access: The Act extended access to abortion services under the failure of contraceptive clause to
unmarried women, ensuring their right to a safe abortion irrespective of marital status.
 Gestational Age: This refers to the duration of pregnancy calculated from the first day of the woman’s last
menstruation.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 45 of 348

 1

FINANCIAL ACTION TASK FORCE MUTUAL EVALUATION REPORT

Mutual Evaluation Report (June 2024):
 High Compliance: India achieved a "high level of technical compliance" with FATF standards, reflecting
significant progress in combating illicit finance.
 "Regular Follow-Up" Category: India has been placed in the "regular follow-up" category, the highest rating
given by FATF.
 Global Standing: India became the only federal economy in this category, alongside other G-20 nations such as
the UK, France, and Italy.
About the Financial Action Task Force (FATF):
 FATF Mandate: It is an intergovernmental body aimed at setting global standards to combat money laundering
and terrorist financing.
 Objective: To develop international policies to prevent money laundering and financing of terrorism at both
national and international levels.
 Established: In 1989 during the G7 Summit in Paris, initially to tackle money laundering. The mandate was
expanded in 2001 to include terrorist financing.
 Headquarters: Paris, France.

Membership:
 Criteria for Membership: A country must be strategically important (based on population, GDP, and financial
systems) and comply with international financial standards.
 Members: FATF includes 39 members, such as the United States, India, China, Saudi Arabia, Britain,
Germany, and the EU.
 India’s Membership: India became a member in 2010.

FATF Monitoring and Reporting:

 Assessment of Members: FATF assesses countries’ actions to mitigate risks related to money laundering and
terrorism financing and promotes global standards.
 Consequences of Non-Compliance:
o Grey List: Countries at risk of being non-compliant with FATF standards, potentially moving to the blacklist
if no action is taken.
o Black List: Non-Cooperative Countries or Territories (NCCTs) that support terror funding and money
laundering.
o Currently Blacklisted Countries: North Korea, Iran, and Myanmar.

Consequences of Being on FATF Blacklist: Countries face sanctions and financial restrictions, including loss of
financial aid from institutions like the IMF, World Bank, and ADB.

US PRESIDENTIAL ELECTIONS
Constitutional Requirements for U.S. Presidential Candidates:
 Must be a natural-born U.S. citizen.
 At least 35 years old and a resident for 14 years.
 Must meet these requirements by Inauguration Day.
 The Vice President must meet all presidential qualifications.
 Unlike the U.S., in India, a President can be a naturalized citizen and must be nominated by 50 proposers and
50 seconders.

Presidential Term Limits:

 In the U.S., a President can serve a maximum of two terms.
 India does not have such a bar on the number of presidential terms.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 46 of 348

 1

U.S. Two-Party System:

 Dominated by two major parties: Democratic Party and Republican Party.
 Third parties (e.g., Libertarian Party) exist but hold limited power.

Nomination Process – Primaries and Caucuses:

 Candidates announce their candidacy over a year before the election.
 The nomination process includes:
o Primary elections (state-run secret ballots).
o Caucuses (party-run meetings where participants choose their candidate).
 Delegates are selected in primaries/caucuses to vote at party conventions.
 The nominee must win a majority of delegates at the party convention.
 Democratic Party uses delegates and super delegates (who can vote independently), while the Republican
Party has pledged and unpledged delegates.

Electoral College and Election Day:

 Voters indirectly elect the President by choosing electors from their states.
 There are 538 electors (corresponding to Congress members + 3 from Washington, D.C.).
 Most states follow a winner-take-all system.
 The election takes place on the first Tuesday after the first Monday in November every four years.
 In some cases (e.g., George W. Bush in 2000), a candidate can win the presidency without winning the popular
vote.

Inauguration Day:
 After electors cast their votes in December, the votes are counted in early January by Congress.
 If no candidate wins 270 electoral votes, the House of Representatives elects the President.
 The President-elect assumes office on Inauguration Day – January 20th.
 The Tuesday in November election timing originated from the need for voters to travel to polling locations
without conflicting with Sunday worship or market days.

Democratic Party:
 Kamala Harris is the Democratic candidate for the 2024 U.S. presidential election.
 She is currently the Vice President of the United States (49th) and was previously the Senator from California
and Attorney General of California.
 She was chosen after Joe Biden decided not to seek re-election.
 Born in Oakland, California in 1964, Harris's father is Donald Harris, a man of Afro-Jamaican descent while his
mother is Shyamala Gopalan, who emigrated to the US at the age of 19 to pursue her doctorate in nutrition and
endocrinology.

Republican Party:
 Donald Trump is the Republican candidate, running for a third presidential campaign. He previously served
as the 45th President of the United States from 2017 to 2021.
 In May 2024, Donald Trump was convicted of 34 felony counts related to falsifying business records in a case
stemming from a $130,000 hush money payment to adult-film star Stormy Daniels during his 2016 presidential
campaign.
 The New York jury found that Trump had falsified records to cover up the payment, violating election laws. The
conviction marked a historic moment as Trump became the first former U.S. president to be criminally
convicted.

Comparison of Government in India and USA:

Type of System:
 USA: Presidential System – The President is both the Head of State and Head of Government.
 India: Parliamentary System – The President is the Head of State, and the Prime Minister is the Head of
Government.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 47 of 348

 1

Separation of Powers:
 USA: There is a clear separation of powers between the Executive, Legislature, and Judiciary.
 India: There is no strict separation between the Executive and Legislature. The Prime Minister and the Council
of Ministers are part of the Legislature.

Executive:
 USA: The President is elected through the Electoral College and serves a maximum of two terms of four years
each.
 India: The Prime Minister is appointed by the President and must have the confidence of the Lok Sabha
(Lower House). There is no limit on the number of terms for a Prime Minister.
Legislature:
 USA: The Congress is bicameral with two houses: the Senate and the House of Representatives. The President
is not part of Congress.
 India: The Parliament is also bicameral, with the Lok Sabha (House of the People) and Rajya Sabha (Council
of States). The Prime Minister and ministers are members of Parliament.

Judiciary:
 USA: The Supreme Court has a strong role in interpreting the Constitution. Judges are appointed for life by the
President, with Senate approval.
 India: The Supreme Court of India can also interpret the Constitution. Judges are appointed by the President
based on recommendations by the Collegium system and serve until the age of 65.

Election Process:
 USA: The President is indirectly elected through the Electoral College system.
 India: The Prime Minister is not directly elected. Members of the Lok Sabha are directly elected, and the party
with a majority selects the Prime Minister.

INDIA-CHINA BORDER DISPUTE

The India-China borders can be broken down into three sectors:
1. Western Sector (Disputed):
o Aksai Chin: India claims Aksai Chin as part of Jammu and Kashmir, but it has been under Chinese control
since the 1962 war. It covers 38,000 sq. km and is part of China's Xinjiang region. India also claims the
Shaksgam Valley, which Pakistan ceded to China through the Sino-Pakistani Border Agreement (1963),
a deal not recognized by India.
o Strategic Importance: Aksai Chin holds Daulat Beg Oldi, a strategic area near Karakoram Pass, which
houses one of the world's highest airstrips.
o Sino-Pakistani Border Agreement (1963): Under this agreement, Pakistan ceded the Shaksgam Valley,
part of Pakistan-occupied Kashmir (PoK), to China. India opposes this deal as it impacts its territorial claims
over Kashmir.
2. Central Sector (Undisputed):
o Sikkim: This region is generally stable with China recognizing India’s sovereignty over Sikkim, particularly
after 2003. However, tensions rose during the Doklam standoff (2017), which occurred at the tri-junction
between India, China, and Bhutan.
o Doklam Plateau: The Doklam plateau became a flashpoint as China attempted to build a road that would
extend its control near the Siliguri Corridor (India's “chicken's neck”), a vital route connecting India's
northeast.
3. Eastern Sector (Disputed):
o Arunachal Pradesh: China claims this region, calling it South Tibet, covering around 90,000 sq. km. This
was historically known as the North East Frontier Agency (NEFA).
o McMahon Line: Defined by the 1914 Simla Agreement, it serves as the boundary between India and Tibet.
China contests this border, especially focusing on the strategic Tawang region.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 48 of 348

 1

Key Border Disagreements:

 Johnson Line vs. McDonald Line:
o Johnson Line: Proposed by British India in the 1860s, it defines Aksai Chin as Indian territory, a claim
upheld by India.
o McDonald Line: Proposed by the British in 1893, it marks Aksai Chin as part of China, which Beijing
supports.

The India-China War of 1962:

1. Main Dispute: The sovereignty of Aksai Chin and Arunachal Pradesh was the primary issue, with China
viewing India as a threat to its control over Tibet.
2. Invasion: On October 20, 1962, the People’s Liberation Army (PLA) invaded in Ladakh and across the
McMahon Line.
3. Outcome: After a month-long war, China declared a ceasefire on November 19, 1962. India faced a major
defeat, losing Aksai Chin while Chinese forces withdrew north of the McMahon Line in the eastern sector.
4. Lack of Indian Preparation: India, believing war was unlikely, was ill-prepared militarily.

Post-War Border Conflicts:

1. Nathu La and Cho La Incidents (1967): Armed conflicts occurred near the Sikkim border, involving Indian
and Chinese troops.
2. Sikkim Merger (1975): After Sikkim became an Indian state, the eastern sector dynamics shifted.
3. Sumdorong Chu Skirmish (1987): A military skirmish occurred in Arunachal Pradesh’s Sumdorong Chu
Valley.
4. Doklam Standoff (2017): India and China faced off at the Doklam Plateau (tri-junction of India, Bhutan, and
China).
5. Galwan Valley Clash (2020): A deadly faceoff in the Ladakh region further escalated tensions along the Line of
Actual Control (LAC), where Indian and Chinese soldiers engaged in a violent skirmish.

Agreements and Initiatives to Resolve the India-China Border Disputes:

1. Shimla Agreement (1914): Aimed at defining the border between Tibet and British India. India accepts the
McMahon Line as the boundary, but China rejects it.
2. Panchsheel Agreement (1954): Focused on mutual respect for sovereignty, although tensions escalated soon
after.
3. Joint Working Group (1989): Formed to resolve border issues through Confidence Building Measures
(CBMs).
4. Line of Actual Control (LAC):
o The LAC is a de facto military border separating Indian-administered areas of Jammu & Kashmir from Aksai
Chin (administered by China).
o India recognizes the Johnson Line (1865), which places Aksai Chin in Jammu & Kashmir.
o China follows the Macartney-MacDonald Line, marking Aksai Chin in the Xinjiang region.

Key Agreements:
o 1993 Agreement: During PM Narasimha Rao’s visit, the Agreement for Maintenance of Peace and
Tranquillity along the LAC was signed, aiming to maintain peace at the LAC and respect the status quo.
o 1996 Agreement: Focused on confidence-building measures (CBMs) in the military field along the LAC,
aimed at avoiding border tensions.
o 2003 Declaration: A Declaration on Principles for Relations and Comprehensive Cooperation was
signed, elevating the relationship. China officially recognized India's sovereignty over Sikkim.
o The declaration included the appointment of Special Representatives to work on a boundary settlement,
focusing on the political framework.
5. Framework for Border Resolution (2003):
1. Step 1: Both sides agree on guiding principles for settling the border issue.
2. Step 2: Exchange of maps between India and China to clarify the boundary positions.
3. Step 3: Final demarcation of borders after consensus on the markings.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 49 of 348

 1

6. 2005 Protocol: Provided modalities for implementing military CBMs along the LAC.
7. 2012 Mechanism: Established a working mechanism for border consultations and coordination.

Recent Disputes in Detail:

Doklam Issue:-
1. Origin of the Issue:
o The Doklam standoff began in 2017 when India objected to China's road construction in the Doklam
Plateau, a territory disputed between Bhutan and China.
o China claims Doklam as part of its Donglang region, while India and Bhutan recognize it as Bhutanese
territory.
2. Actions Taken:
o India’s Response: Indian troops intervened to stop the construction, leading to a standoff.
o Chinese Accusations: China accused India of violating its territory, while India accused China of destroying
its bunkers.
o China blocked Indian pilgrims' passage to Kailash-Mansarovar via Nathu La.
3. Strategic Importance:
o Doklam lies at the tri-junction of India, China, and Bhutan.
o It is close to India’s Siliguri Corridor (also known as the "chicken's neck"), a narrow stretch connecting
Northeastern India to the mainland, making it strategically crucial for India.
4. Current Status: The standoff was eventually resolved diplomatically, but the issue remains sensitive, with no
lasting resolution.

Galwan Valley Incident and India-China Standoff:

1. Galwan Valley Incident (2020):
o 20 Indian soldiers lost their lives in a clash with Chinese troops, marking the first deadly conflict in 45 years
at the LAC.
o The attack occurred after agreeing to a de-escalation plan during corps commander-level talks on June 6.
2. Key Issue:
o India-China standoff in Pangong Tso, Galwan Valley, Demchok, Daulat Beg Oldie.
o Chinese troops transgressed into Indian territory near Pangong Tso to dominate resource-rich areas.
3. India's Infrastructure Projects:
o China opposes India's construction projects near the Galwan Valley, notably a strategic road connecting
the region to an airstrip.
o This led to escalated tensions, as the area was a flashpoint in the 1962 war.
4. China’s Strategy:
o China follows a “nibble and negotiate” strategy, attempting to prevent India's infrastructure development
along the LAC and gaining territory in the process.
5. Line of Actual Control (LAC): The LAC is not clearly demarcated, leading to regular transgressions and
conflicting territorial claims between India and China.

Broader Bilateral Issues Between India and China:

1. UNSC & NSG: China opposes India's entry into the UN Security Council and Nuclear Suppliers Group.
2. OBOR & CPEC: India rejects China’s One Belt One Road (OBOR) initiative, especially due to the China-
Pakistan Economic Corridor (CPEC), which passes through Pakistan-Occupied Kashmir (POK).
3. India-US Relations: Strengthening of India-US relations, and joint military exercises like MALABAR with
Japan, concern China.
4. Tibet & Dalai Lama: The Dalai Lama’s presence in India, and his visit to Arunachal Pradesh, create friction.
5. Masood Azhar: China has repeatedly blocked India’s bid to declare Masood Azhar as a UN-designated terrorist.

India and China Strategies:

China's "String of Pearls" Strategy:
 Objective: China's "String of Pearls" strategy is aimed at securing its maritime trade routes and enhancing its
military presence in the Indian Ocean, which is crucial for the flow of oil and goods.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 50 of 348

 1

 Tactic: China has built a series of ports and bases along the maritime routes stretching from the South China Sea
to the Arabian Sea, through nations like Pakistan (Gwadar Port), Sri Lanka (Hambantota), Bangladesh
(Chittagong), and Djibouti. These serve both commercial and military purposes, allowing China to project its
influence in the region.
 Key Locations:
o Gwadar Port (Pakistan): Close to the Strait of Hormuz, it provides China with access to the Arabian Sea and
is part of the China-Pakistan Economic Corridor (CPEC).
o Hambantota (Sri Lanka): A strategically located port leased to China, enhancing its naval reach near India.
o Djibouti: China’s first overseas military base, located near key sea lanes in the Horn of Africa.

India's "Necklace of Diamonds" Strategy:

 Objective: India's "Necklace of Diamonds" is a countermeasure to China’s "String of Pearls." It aims to secure
India’s strategic interests in the Indian Ocean by building alliances and increasing its naval presence at key choke
points along China’s trade routes.
 Tactic: India is enhancing its naval cooperation with countries strategically positioned in the Indian Ocean and
beyond. It has focused on building naval bases, improving surveillance systems, and forging defense ties with
nations like Japan, Vietnam, and the US, as well as signing agreements for port access in key locations.
 Key Locations:
o Changi Naval Base (Singapore): India has access to this base for refueling and rearming, ensuring a
presence in the South China Sea.
o Sabang Port (Indonesia): India has gained military access here, positioned at the entrance to the Malacca
Strait, a critical chokepoint for China’s maritime trade.
o Duqm Port (Oman): Located between China's Djibouti base and Pakistan’s Gwadar Port, it provides India
with a strategic foothold.
o Assumption Island (Seychelles): A naval base development project agreed upon with Seychelles to counter
China’s maritime ambitions in Africa.

INDIA’S FIRST INDIGENOUS HYDROGEN FUEL CELL FERRY

Prime Minister Narendra Modi inaugurated India’s first indigenous hydrogen fuel cell ferry at Kochi Harbor,
Kerala. This ferry is a major milestone in promoting sustainable and eco-friendly transportation in India.
 Vessel Details:
o Named ‘Suchetha’, this is a 24-meter-long catamaran with an electric propulsion system powered by
hydrogen fuel cells.
o It has a passenger capacity of 50 people.
o The fuel cells generate electricity through an electrochemical reaction between hydrogen and oxygen,
emitting only water and heat as by-products.
 Indigenous Technology:
o Developed domestically as part of the Kochi International Water Metro project.
o Collaboration between Cochin Shipyard Limited (CSL), L&T, Indian Register of Shipping, and other
stakeholders under the government's Aatmanirbhar Bharat initiative.
 Benefits:
o Cleaner Transportation: Expected to significantly reduce air pollution, noise, and congestion across
India’s canal networks.
o Promotes high-skilled employment and strengthens domestic expertise in sustainable marine
technology.
 Future Prospects:
o Cochin Shipyard plans to build seven more hydrogen fuel cell boats of various capacities.
o The project aims to enter the international market for clean marine technology and expand zero-emission
ferry systems across India through public-private partnerships.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 51 of 348

 1

GENOME INDIA PROJECT

Launch and Coordination:
 The Genome India Project (GIP) was initiated by the Department of Biotechnology (DBT) on 3rd January
2020.
 It is led by the Centre for Brain Research at the Indian Institute of Science (IISc), Bengaluru, and involves
collaboration with 20 institutions across India.
o India announced its first complete human genome sequencing in 2009, making it a significant milestone in
the country’s genomic research.

Objective:
 The project aims to conduct whole-genome sequencing and data analysis of 10,000 Indian individuals.
 The goal is to understand the nature of diseases in the Indian population and develop predictive diagnostic
markers.

Genetic Diversity:
 India, with a population of 1.3 billion, comprises over 4,600 population groups, many of which are
endogamous (marrying within close ethnic groups), contributing to significant genetic diversity and disease-
causing mutations.

Data Handling:
 The 8 petabytes of data generated from the project will be stored at the Indian Biological Data Centre (IBDC)
in Faridabad, inaugurated in 2022 as India's first national repository for life science data.

Significance:
 The project will create an India-specific genetic database crucial for studying genetic mutations unique to
the Indian population. For example, the MYBPC3 mutation, associated with early cardiac arrest, affects 4.5%
of the Indian population, a prevalence higher than the global average.
 The data generated will support predictive diagnostics, personalized healthcare, and therapeutic innovations
specific to the Indian population.

Economic and Scientific Impact:

 The project is part of India’s rapidly growing biology sector, which has expanded from USD 10 billion in 2014
to over USD 130 billion in 2024, driving scientific innovation and biotechnology development in the country.

Genome Sequencing:
Gene and DNA:
 DNA (Deoxyribonucleic acid) is the molecule containing genetic instructions essential for all living organisms’
functioning, growth, and reproduction.
 Genes are segments of DNA responsible for encoding proteins that perform various biological functions.

Genome:
 The genome represents the complete hereditary information of an organism, inherited from its parents.
 The human genome comprises about 3 billion base pairs made up of four nucleotide bases: adenine (A),
cytosine (C), guanine (G), and thymine (T).

Genome Sequencing:
 Genome sequencing is the process of determining the exact order of nucleotides (A, T, C, G) within the genome.
 Whole genome sequencing refers to the sequencing of the entire genome in a single process.
o The first whole human genome was sequenced through the collaboration of an international team.
o The project, known as the Human Genome Project, began in 1990 and was completed in 2003, taking 13
years and costing $3 billion.
o Today, technological advancements have dramatically reduced both the time and cost required for genome
sequencing.
o It now takes only about 5 days to sequence an entire human genome and conduct all necessary quality
checks.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 52 of 348

 1

Procedure of Genome Sequencing:

1. DNA extraction: DNA is extracted from biological samples like blood.
2. Fragmentation: The DNA is broken down into smaller fragments, which are tagged with fluorescent markers.
3. Sequencing: Specialised equipment called DNA sequencers read the nucleotide sequence of these fragments.
4. Data analysis: Computational algorithms reconstruct the complete genome from the sequence data.

Applications:
1. Biomedical Research:
o Helps identify genetic mutations responsible for diseases.
o Provides insight into diseases like cancer, diabetes, and neurological disorders.
2. Pharmacogenomics:
o Helps predict how individuals will respond to drugs based on their genetic profile.
o Optimizes drug selection, dosage, and personalized therapies.
3. Agricultural Genomics:
o Supports crop improvement programs by identifying genes for traits like disease resistance and yield.
o Aids in breeding for improved crop varieties with enhanced traits.
4. Evolutionary Biology:
o Provides insights into the evolutionary history of species.
o Helps study genetic diversity and population dynamics.
5. Conservation Biology:
o Assists in conservation by evaluating genetic diversity and identifying endangered species.
o Helps develop strategies for species preservation.

SANGEET NATAK ACADEMY AWARDS

Sangeet Natak Akademi Fellowship (Akademi Ratna Sadasyata):
 The highest honor conferred by the Sangeet Natak Akademi (SNA) for contributions in music, dance, and
drama.
 Recipients must be established figures in their fields, generally over the age of 50.
 The Fellowship includes a purse of Rs. 3.00 lakhs, a Tamrapatra (copper plaque), and an Angavastram (shawl).
 Fellows are nominated by current fellows and members of the General Council of the Akademi.
 Initially, there were 30 seats for fellows, later expanded to 40 seats in 2010.

Sangeet Natak Akademi Awards:

 These awards recognize outstanding achievement in music, dance, and drama.
 Introduced in 1951 as Presidential Awards before being incorporated into SNA.
 The award includes a purse of Rs. 1.00 lakh, a Tamrapatra, and an Angavastram.
 Currently, 41 awards are conferred annually, and over 1,298 artists have been recognized so far.
Sangeet Natak Akademi (SNA):
 Established in 1953, SNA is the apex body for promoting India's intangible cultural heritage through music,
dance, and drama.
 It was created by a resolution of the Ministry of Education, with P.V. Rajamannar as its first Chairman.
 It operates under the Ministry of Culture and is managed by a General Council.
 The Chairman is appointed by the President of India for a five-year term.
 The registered office is at Rabindra Bhavan, New Delhi.

Ustad Bismillah Khan Yuva Puraskar:

 Introduced in 2006 to recognize young talent (under 40 years old) in dance, music, and theatre.
 Winners receive Rs. 25,000, a Tamrapatra, and an Angavastram.
Kala Deeksha:
 An initiative by SNA to revive over 100 rare art forms nearing extinction through training programs.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 53 of 348

 1

AMENDMENTS TO ELECTRICITY (RIGHTS OF CONSUMERS) RULES, 2020 AND

CONSUMER RIGHTS DAY
Amendments to the Electricity (Rights of Consumers) Rules, 2020:
 Purpose: The amendments aim to reduce timelines for electricity connections, promote renewable energy
adoption, and strengthen consumer rights.
 Facilitating Rooftop Solar Systems:
o Exemption for Feasibility Study: Systems up to 10 kW no longer require a technical feasibility study.
o Faster Approvals: For systems above 10 kW, the timeline for feasibility study completion is reduced from
20 days to 15 days.
o Automatic Approval: If the feasibility study is not completed within the stipulated time, the approval is
considered automatically granted.
o Timeline Reduction for Commissioning: Rooftop solar PV systems must be commissioned within 15 days
(reduced from 30 days).
 Separate EV Charging Connections:
o Consumers can now obtain separate electricity connections for charging electric vehicles (EVs),
supporting India's Net Zero 2070 goal.
 Faster Connection Timelines:
o New connection timelines reduced to:
 3 days in metropolitan areas (from 7 days).
 7 days in municipal areas (from 15 days).
 15 days in rural areas (from 30 days).
 In rural areas with hilly terrain, the timeline remains 30 days.
 Rights for Residential Colonies/Flats:
o Owners in housing societies can now choose between individual connections or a single-point
connection for the entire premises.
o Decision based on transparent ballot conducted by the Distribution Company.
o Parity in Tariffs: Same tariff for consumers with single-point or individual connections.
 Mandatory Additional Meter for Billing Complaints:
o Upon receiving a complaint, the distribution licensee must install an additional meter within 5 days.
o This meter will check the consumption over 3 months to ensure billing accuracy.

Consumer Rights Day

 Date: Celebrated annually on March 15th.
 Purpose: To raise global awareness about consumer rights and the importance of consumers being informed,
respected, and protected.
 Historical Background: The day was first established after President John F. Kennedy’s address to the US
Congress on March 15, 1962, where he outlined four fundamental consumer rights:
1. Right to safety
2. Right to be informed
3. Right to choose
4. Right to be heard

Theme for 2024:

 Theme: “Fair and Responsible AI for Consumers.”
o Highlights the need for ethical AI development that respects consumer rights.
o Emphasizes that AI should be transparent, accountable, and inclusive to ensure consumer protection
keeps pace with technological advancements.

Significance of World Consumer Rights Day:

1. Educate: Inform consumers about their rights and how they can exercise them.
2. Advocate: Push for policies and regulations that protect consumers, especially in the digital age.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 54 of 348

 1

3. Unite: Bring the global community together to share knowledge and strategies for consumer
empowerment.

Key Initiatives Taken by India to Protect Consumer Rights:

1. Consumer Protection Act, 2019:
o Replaced the earlier 1986 Act.
o Introduced the Central Consumer Protection Authority (CCPA) to regulate consumer rights and practices.
2. State Consumer Protection Councils:
o Works with the CCPA to promote and protect consumer rights at the state level.
3. Mediation for Dispute Resolution:
o Introduced in the 2019 Act as a quicker, less formal option than litigation for resolving consumer disputes.
4. RBI Initiatives:
o Includes the Retail Direct Scheme and Integrated Ombudsman Scheme for strengthening the grievance
redress mechanism in the financial sector.
5. E-commerce Rules:
o Proposed rules to prevent unfair trade practices in the online space and to ensure transparency.
6. Mandatory Hallmarking:
o Introduced mandatory hallmarking of gold jewelry and artifacts to assure consumers of quality and
purity.

HUMAN DEVELOPMENT INDEX 2023-24

Overview of HDR:
 Released by: United Nations Development Programme (UNDP), annually since 1990.
 Objective: To examine global challenges affecting human development and offer recommendations for
progress.
 Core Component: The Human Development Index (HDI), a key statistical measure of a country's achievement
in human development.

Human Development Index (HDI):

 About:
o Quantifies a country’s performance in three basic dimensions:
1. Long and healthy life
2. Knowledge
3. Decent standard of living
 Indicators:
o HDI is calculated by aggregating four indicators into a single value between 0 and 1 based on dimension
indices.
 Developed by: Pakistani economist Mahbub ul-Haq. The HDI also embodies Amartya Sen’s “capabilities”
approach to understand human well-being, which emphasizes the importance of ends (like a decent standard of
living) over means (like income per capita).
 Significance:
o Evaluates the relationship between income and human development outcomes.
o Helps policymakers make comparative analysis on various development choices.
 Limitations:
o Does not capture inequalities, poverty, human security, or empowerment.
o HDR supplements HDI with additional indices to assess inequality (e.g., Gender Inequality Index).
Key Findings about India:
 HDI Rank: Improved to 134 in 2022 from 135 in 2021 (was 130 in 2018).
 HDI Value: Increased to 0.644 in 2022 from 0.633 in 2021.
 Life Expectancy at Birth: Increased to 67.7 years (from 67.2 years).
 Expected Years of Schooling: Rose to 12.6 years (from 11.9 years).
 Mean Years of Schooling: Increased to 6.57 years.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 55 of 348

 1

 Gross National Income (GNI) Per Capita: Improved to $6,951 from $6,542.
 Category: Placed under Medium Human Development category.
 Regional Comparison:
o India ranks below China (75), Sri Lanka (78), Maldives (87), Bhutan (125), Bangladesh (129).
o Ranks higher than Myanmar (144), Nepal (146), Pakistan (164), and Afghanistan (182).

Global Findings of HDR 2023-2024:

 Human Development Index (HDI): 193 countries were ranked, with Switzerland ranked first, followed by
Norway and Iceland.
 Uneven Recovery:
o Rich countries experiencing record levels of human development.
o Half of the world’s poorest nations remain below pre-crisis development levels.
 Economic Concentration:
o Around 40% of global trade is concentrated in just three countries.
 Widening Development Gap:
o The steady trend of reducing inequality between rich and poor countries has reversed.
 Rise of the Democracy Paradox:
o A paradox where populations believe in democracy but support leaders who undermine democratic
principles.
o This has led to increased political polarization and inward-looking policies.

ABRAHMIC RELIGIONS ORIGIN AND IMPORTANCE OF JERUSALEM

 Abrahamic Faiths: Comprise Judaism, Christianity, and Islam, centered on the worship of the God of Abraham.
 Lineage Claims:
o Judaism: Traces its lineage to Abraham's descendants through Isaac and Jacob.
o Islam: Asserts descent through Ishmael, another son of Abraham.
 Religious Evolution:
o Early Israelite religion developed from Canaanite beliefs, transitioning from polytheism to monotheism.
o Christianity: Emerged in the 1st century AD from Judaism, spreading through Jesus' apostles.
o Islam: Founded by Prophet Muhammad in the 7th century AD, expanding through early Muslim conquests.
 Global Influence: These religions are significant players in global religion, with Christianity and Islam being
the largest in terms of adherents.

Judaism:
 Origin: Judaism’s early history traces back to the Israelites, with its core scripture being the Tanakh (Hebrew
Bible).
 Key Events: The return of exiled Judahites to Israel post-Babylonian conquest and the compilation of the Talmud
(legal rulings and exegesis).
 Main Divisions: Includes Rabbinical Judaism, which follows both the Tanakh and the Talmud, and Karaite
Judaism, which rejects the Talmud and adheres only to the Tanakh.

Christianity:
 Rooted in: Christianity developed from Judaism under the teachings of Jesus in the 1st century.
 Doctrine: Based on the Old and New Testaments, Jesus is regarded as God incarnate.
 Major Events: Became the state religion of the Roman Empire in 380 AD, later dividing through the East-West
Schism (1054 AD) and the Reformation (16th century).

Islam:
 Founded by: Prophet Muhammad in the 7th century, Islam is rooted in the Quran, believed to be the final
revelation from God.
 Beliefs: Includes strict monotheism (tawhid) and respects prior scriptures (Torah, Psalms, and Gospel).

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 56 of 348

 1

 Expansion: Islam spread widely across regions through early conquests and established several caliphates.

Common Aspects of Abrahamic Religions:

 Abrahamic Origin: All three religions trace their roots to Abraham and share a common historical lineage.
 Monotheism: Each religion worships a singular, transcendent God, with differing understandings of God’s
nature.
 Shared Figures and Texts: Despite different roles, figures like Moses, Abraham, and Jesus appear in all
Abrahamic faiths.
 Ethical and Eschatological Views: Emphasis on good vs. evil, obedience to Divine Law, and belief in a final
judgment.

Differences in Abrahamic Religions:

 Concept of God:
o Judaism: Strict monotheism.
o Christianity: Doctrine of Trinity.
o Islam: Singular, all-powerful God (Allah).
 Scriptures:
o Judaism: Tanakh and oral traditions.
o Christianity: Old and New Testaments.
o Islam: Quran and Hadith.
 Other Rituals:
o Circumcision: Central in Judaism, culturally neutral in Christianity, Sunnah (not obligatory) in Islam.
o Dietary Laws: Kosher (Judaism), Halal (Islam), varied in Christianity.
Jerusalem in the Abrahamic Religions
 Holiness of Jerusalem: It is the holiest city in Judaism and has been the spiritual center of the Jewish people
since the 10th century BCE.
 Historical Significance:
o Temple Mount: Jerusalem housed the First and Second Temples, the most sacred sites in Judaism.
o Western Wall: The holiest prayer site for Jews, it is the last remnant of the Second Temple, destroyed in 70
CE by the Romans.
o Biblical Role: Jerusalem is mentioned extensively in the Tanakh (Hebrew Bible) as the capital established
by King David and the location of Solomon's Temple.
 Covenant with God: Jews believe the city is tied to God's covenant with Israel and that Messianic prophecy
involves the rebuilding of the Temple in Jerusalem.
2. Christianity:
 Sacredness: For Christians, Jerusalem is where many key events in the life of Jesus Christ took place.
 Significant Sites:
o Church of the Holy Sepulchre: Located in Jerusalem, it is believed to be the site of Jesus’ crucifixion, burial,
and resurrection.
o Via Dolorosa: The path that Jesus is said to have walked on the way to his crucifixion.
 Pilgrimage: Jerusalem is a major destination for Christian pilgrims, as it represents the fulfillment of Old
Testament prophecies and the place of Jesus' sacrifice and resurrection.
 Eschatological Beliefs: Many Christians believe that Jesus' second coming will take place in Jerusalem, further
highlighting its importance in Christian eschatology.
3. Islam:
 Third Holiest City: After Mecca and Medina, Jerusalem holds the third-most sacred place in Islam.
 Al-Aqsa Mosque: This mosque, located on the Temple Mount (known to Muslims as Haram al-Sharif), is the
third-holiest site in Islam. It is believed to be the place where the Prophet Muhammad ascended to heaven
during the Night Journey (Isra and Mi'raj).
 Dome of the Rock: A revered Islamic shrine located on the Temple Mount, it marks the spot from where
Muhammad is said to have ascended to heaven.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 57 of 348

 1

 Connection to the Quran: The Quran mentions the Prophet's night journey to the "farthest mosque,"
interpreted by many Muslims as Al-Aqsa.
Shared Importance:
 Monotheistic Legacy: All three Abrahamic religions view Jerusalem as a city of spiritual and historical
significance. It is tied to their shared belief in the God of Abraham, and many of the key figures from their
religious texts are associated with events that occurred in Jerusalem.
 Prophetic Significance: In all three faiths, the city is considered central to the unfolding of prophecies related
to the end of days and the fulfillment of divine promises.

BASICS OF INDIA’S MISSILE DEFENSE PROGRAM

The concept of missiles in India dates back to ancient times, where they were referred to as ASTRA in Hindu epics
like the Ramayana and Mahabharata. These scriptures describe missile control using Mantras, which can be
likened to modern missile control systems.
 In the 18th century, Tipu Sultan of Mysore used the first known rockets in India against the British during the
Anglo-Mysore Wars.
 These rockets were made of bamboo or steel spears, with a cast iron chamber for propellant and gunpowder
as the warhead.
 The British later adapted these rockets for their own use after observing their effectiveness.
 During British rule, India’s missile development stagnated due to colonial exploitation, lack of resources, and
diminished research capacity.
Classification of Missiles:
Missiles are categorized based on various factors such as launch mode, range, warhead, and propulsion.
1. Based on Launch Mode:
 Surface to Surface Missiles: Launched from the ground and aimed at ground targets.
 Surface to Air Missiles: Targeting airborne threats from the ground.
 Air to Air Missiles: Launched from aircraft to destroy aerial targets.
 Air to Surface Missiles: Launched from aircraft to target ground or sea-based threats.
 Surface to Sea Missiles: Targeting sea vessels from the land.
 Anti-tank Missiles: Designed to destroy armored vehicles.

2. Based on Range:
 Short-range Missiles: Typically range up to 1,000 km.
 Medium-range Missiles: Between 1,000 and 3,000 km.
 Intermediate-range Missiles: Between 3,000 and 5,500 km.
 Intercontinental Ballistic Missiles (ICBMs): Over 5,500 km.
Difference Between Ballistic and Cruise Missiles:
1. Ballistic Missile:
 Follows a ballistic trajectory to hit a target.
 Guidance is only provided during initial stages of the flight, and the missile relies on gravity and Coriolis Force
for the rest of its path.
 Travels at high altitudes, making it easier to track.
 Effective against large, stationary targets.
2. Cruise Missile:
 Fully guided missile that remains within the atmosphere.
 Travels at a steady speed and can be directed to hit mobile targets.
 Capable of flying at low altitudes, making it more challenging to detect.
 Suitable for small mobile targets.
Features of India’s Missile Systems:
1. Indigenous Technology:

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 58 of 348

 1

o India has developed most of its missile systems using indigenous technology, showcasing its self-reliance in
defense capabilities.
2. Accuracy:
o Indian missiles are equipped with advanced guidance technologies like inertial navigation systems,
satellite navigation, radar, and optical seekers to ensure precision.
o Missiles such as Agni-V and BrahMos have demonstrated extremely high accuracy, consistently hitting
targets with bullseye precision.
3. Quick Deployment:
o Many Indian missiles utilize solid fuels, enabling quick reaction capabilities. This ensures that the armed
forces can respond swiftly during conflicts.
o For example, the Agni and Prithvi missiles, mounted on transport-erector-launcher vehicles, can be
launched in under 15 minutes.
4. High Lethality:
o The indigenous propulsion systems provide Indian missiles with extended ranges and heavy warheads,
allowing them to inflict significant damage.
o The BrahMos missile, with its supersonic speed, is considered one of the deadliest cruise missiles globally
due to its high lethality.
Successful Missile Programs of India:
Missile Program Key Features Notable Missiles/Projects
Integrated Guided - Started in 1983, completed in 2008. Prithvi, Agni (1, 2, 3), Akash, Nag, Trishul
Missile Development - Aimed to develop indigenous
Program (IGMDP) missile development capabilities.
- Created a comprehensive range of
missiles for defense needs.
BrahMos Aerospace - - Established in 1998 as a BrahMos Supersonic Cruise Missile
Joint Venture collaboration between India's DRDO
and Russia’s NPO
Mashinostroyenia.
- High-speed, supersonic cruise
missile development.
Indian Ballistic Missile - Initiated in 1999. Prithvi Air Defence (PAD), Pradyumna
Defence Programme - Developed a two-tiered system with Ballistic Missile Interceptor, Advanced
endo-atmospheric and exo- Air Defence (AAD), Ashwin Ballistic
atmospheric interception. Missile Interceptor
- Protects against missile threats from
external forces.
Independent Projects - Projects after the completion of Agni Series (Agni-IV, V), K-Missiles,
IGMDP. Hypersonic Technology Demonstrator
- Focus on advanced missile Vehicle (HTDV) (in process)
technologies.

Different Types of Missiles in India

India's missile capabilities are key to strengthening its defense systems, with a diverse range of missile technologies
to meet geopolitical needs. These systems provide credible deterrence and ensure military readiness. Missiles in
India are classified based on speed, trajectory, and purpose.

1. Classification Based on Speed:

Subsonic Missiles:
 Travel slower than the speed of sound (Mach 1).
 Example: Prithvi (Short-range ballistic missile), U.S. Harpoon anti-ship missile.
Supersonic Missiles:
 Travel faster than the speed of sound but less than Mach 5.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 59 of 348

 1

 Example: BrahMos (Supersonic cruise missile), Russian Iskander.

Hypersonic Missiles:
 Speeds exceed Mach 5, more than five times the speed of sound.
 Example: Shaurya (India), DF-ZF (China).
2. Classification Based on Trajectory:
Ballistic Missiles:
 Follow a ballistic trajectory and are unpowered after the boost phase.
 Example: Agni series, Prithvi series (India).
Hypersonic Glide Vehicle (HGV):
 A type of ballistic missile that achieves hypersonic speed during re-entry.
 Example: China’s DF-17, Russia's Avangard.
India is currently in the technology demonstration stage of developing HGVs.
Cruise Missiles:
 Guided missiles that remain within the atmosphere, flying at a constant speed.
o Subsonic Cruise Missiles: Travel at less than Mach 1.
 Example: Nirbhay (India), U.S. Tomahawk.
o Supersonic Cruise Missiles: Travel between Mach 1 and Mach 5.
 Example: BrahMos (India).
o Hypersonic Cruise Missiles: Travel faster than Mach 5, powered by scramjet engines.
 Example: Russia's 3M22 Zircon, BrahMos-II (under development).
3. Fractional Orbital Bombardment System (FOBS):
 A warhead delivery system using low Earth orbit before re-entry to its target, capable of avoiding early warning
systems by approaching from unpredictable directions.
 Example: Originally developed by Russia, recently tested by China.
Types of Missiles Based on the Launch Mode
Launch Mode Description Examples
Surface-to- Launched from land-based platforms to strike Prithvi, Agni, BrahMos
Surface ground targets
Surface-to-Air Launched from land to intercept aerial threats like Akash, MRSAM (Medium Range
aircraft, helicopters, drones Surface-to-Air Missile)
Air-to-Surface Air launched to attack ground-based targets Helina anti-tank missile fired from
Rudra helicopter
Air-to-Air Launched from aircraft against hostile aerial targets Astra Beyond Visual Range (BVR)
air-to-air missile
Ship-to-Ship Naval anti-ship missiles launched from BrahMos anti-ship cruise missile
warships/submarines
Ship-to-Air Naval surface-to-air missiles for fleet air defence Barak-8 LR-SAM (Long-Range
Surface-to-Air Missile)
Submarine- Fired from submerged submarines K-15 Sagarika, K-4 (in development)
launched
Shoulder-fired Man-portable missiles fired from launchers carried FIM-92 Stinger, Igla (Russian
by infantry shoulder-fired SAMs)

Types of Missiles Based on Strategic Importance

Type Description Examples
Intercontinental Long-range missiles capable of Agni-V (Range: 5000-8000 km), equipped with
Ballistic Missiles delivering nuclear warheads across Multiple Independently Targetable Re-entry
continents Vehicles (MIRV), covers Asia-Pacific region
Sub-surface Ballistic Launched from nuclear-powered K-15 Sagarika (750 km), K-4 (3500 km in
Nuclear Missiles submarines to provide second- development), both completing India's
strike capability in case of a nuclear nuclear triad with Arihant class SSBN
attack

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 60 of 348

 1

Types of Missiles Based on Tactical Importance

Type Description Examples
Prithvi Short-range surface-to-surface ballistic Prithvi-I (150 km), Prithvi-II (350 km) for strategic
Missiles missiles for battlefield use targeting, Prithvi-III (naval variant for 350 km)
BrahMos Supersonic cruise missile capable of BrahMos (land, ship, submarine, air-launched
Missile Mach 3 speeds variants), BrahMos II (hypersonic, under
development)

EMISSION GAP REPORT 2023

Emissions Gap Report 2023: "Broken Record"
 Release: Ahead of COP28.
 Released by: United Nations Environment Programme
 Findings: Despite record-high global temperatures, countries have failed to sufficiently cut emissions.
 Objective: Informs climate negotiations and tracks efforts to limit global warming to below 2°C, ideally 1.5°C, as
per the Paris Agreement.
United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP)
 Established: 1972 at the United Nations Conference on the Human Environment (Stockholm Conference).
 Objective: Strengthens environmental standards and supports countries in implementing environmental
obligations.
 Headquarters: Nairobi, Kenya.
Governing Body
 UN Environment Assembly: Governing body of UNEP, created in 2012 to replace the governing council.
 Members: 193 members, meets biennially.
Reports Published by UNEP
1. Emissions Gap Report
o Tracks progress in limiting global warming as per the Paris Agreement.
o Assesses gaps between current global greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions and required reductions to prevent
the worst impacts of climate change.
o Highlights opportunities to bridge the emissions gap.
o Released annually before the UN Climate Change Conference (COP).
2. Annual Frontiers Report
3. Global Environment Outlook

Takeaways from the Emissions Gap Report 2023:

1. Rising Global Temperatures:
o A total of 86 days in 2023 had temperatures exceeding 1.5°C above pre-industrial levels.
o September 2023 marked the hottest month ever, surpassing the previous record by 0.5°C, with a global
average of 1.8°C above pre-industrial levels.
2. Record Global GHG Emissions in 2022:
o Global greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions rose by 1.2% from 2021 to 2022, reaching a record high of 57.4
gigatons CO2 equivalent (GtCO2e).
o Except for the transport sector, all sectors rebounded post-pandemic, exceeding 2019 levels.
o Fossil fuel combustion and industrial processes accounted for two-thirds of total GHG emissions.
3. Global Inequality in Emissions:
o Per capita GHG emissions vary widely across countries:
 Russian Federation and the USA have more than double the global average (6.5 tCO2e).
 India’s per capita emissions remain under half of the world average.
 Brazil, the European Union, and Indonesia have per capita emissions slightly below the G20 average.
4. Decisive Action in this Decade:
o The emissions gap reflects the difference between projected global emissions from current Nationally
Determined Contributions (NDCs) and the levels required for the Paris Agreement’s temperature goals.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 61 of 348

 1

o The global stocktake in 2025 will inform the next round of NDCs, setting the targets for 2035 to limit
warming to below 2°C and 1.5°C pathways.
5. Projected Global Warming:
o Continuation of current policies would limit global warming to 3°C (range: 1.9–3.8°C) throughout the
century.
o Even in the most optimistic scenario, with full implementation of conditional NDCs and net-zero
pledges, warming is likely to be limited to 2°C.
6. Need for Political Action: The report highlights four key areas where immediate political action is necessary:
o Prioritizing Carbon Dioxide Removal strategies.
o Enhancing measurement, reporting, and verification systems to boost credibility.
o Leveraging synergies and co-benefits with other mitigation efforts.
o Accelerating innovation in technology and climate solutions.

DELHI AIR POLLUTION

 Delhi's Air Quality Deterioration:
 On September 25, Delhi’s Air Quality Index (AQI) dropped into the ‘poor’ category (AQI 200-300), marking
the start of North India’s bad air season after monsoon.
 This marks the onset of the region's annual struggle with air pollution.
 Winter Action Plan:
 Delhi Government’s 21-point Winter Action Plan includes measures like:
o Drone monitoring of pollution hotspots.
o Deployment of anti-smog guns.
o Exploration of artificial rain to mitigate pollution levels.
 These efforts aim to tackle worsening air quality during the winter months.
Commission for Air Quality Management (CAQM):
 CAQM, formed under the Commission for Air Quality Management in National Capital Region and
Adjoining Areas Act, 2021, is responsible for implementing the Graded Response Action Plan (GRAP) to
tackle pollution in NCR.
 CAQM monitors air quality and coordinates actions to curb pollution in the National Capital Region (NCR) and
adjoining areas.
What is AQI (Air Quality Index)?:
 National Air Quality Index (NAQI): Launched in 2014, the NAQI was an initiative under the Swachh Bharat
Abhiyan:
 Measures air quality based on eight pollutants: PM10, PM2.5, NO2, SO2, CO, O3, NH3, and Pb (Lead).
 Converts complex data into a single number that reflects overall air quality.
India’s Worsening Air Pollution:
 Post-monsoon season brings deteriorating air quality due to:
o Stagnant air and temperature inversion, where warmer air traps cooler air near the ground, preventing
pollutants from dispersing.
o These conditions intensify hazardous levels of PM 2.5 and other pollutants.
 While pollution is at its peak in winter, poor air quality persists year-round, needing sustained and
comprehensive efforts.
Meteorological Impact:
 Specific meteorological conditions, like temperature inversion and low wind speeds, are prevalent in the
Indo-Gangetic plain, worsening pollution levels.
Economic Inequality and Air Pollution:
 Wealthier citizens can afford air purifiers or relocate to cleaner areas, while poorer communities face the full
impact of toxic air.
 This exacerbates inequality in access to clean air, raising equity concerns.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 62 of 348

 1

Sources of Air Pollution:

 Air pollution in India is caused by multiple sources:
o Year-round contributors include biomass burning (for cooking), vehicular emissions, industrial
activities, and trash-burning.
o Seasonal sources include farm stubble burning and festival-related firecrackers.
Record Improvement in Delhi’s Air Quality in April 2024:
Significant Air Quality Improvement:
 In April 2024, Delhi recorded the highest number of 'Good to Moderate' air quality days (23 days) in the past six
years, indicating substantial improvement.
Reduction in Poor Air Quality Days:
 The number of days with an AQI > 200 (which indicates poor air quality) was limited to 07 days in April 2024,
highlighting effective air pollution control measures.
PM2.5 and PM10 Reduction:
 Significant reduction in the daily average concentrations of Particulate Matter (PM) 2.5 and PM10 was
observed compared to previous years.
 PM includes solid particles and liquid droplets in the air such as dust, dirt, soot, and smoke.
o PM10: Particles with a diameter of 10 micrometres or less.
o PM2.5: Finer particles with a diameter of 2.5 micrometres or less.

Air Quality Index (AQI) Categories:

 Good (0-50): Air quality is considered satisfactory.
 Satisfactory (51-100): Air quality is acceptable, but some pollutants may pose a moderate health concern for a
small number of people.
 Moderate (101-200): Acceptable air quality, but may cause minor health concerns for sensitive individuals.
 Poor (201-300): Health warnings for sensitive individuals, general population at lower risk.
 Very Poor (301-400): Increased likelihood of adverse health effects, especially for vulnerable groups.
 Severe (401-500): Serious health effects, likely to affect the entire population.
Control Measures:
 CAQM (Commission for Air Quality Management) and related stakeholders played a significant role in
implementing effective air quality management strategies to limit pollution and improve air quality in the NCR.

ADANI HINDERNBURG CASE

Hindenburg Allegations: In January 2023, US-based firm Hindenburg Research accused the Adani Group of stock
manipulation, accounting fraud, and misuse of tax havens. These allegations caused a significant drop in the Adani
Group’s stock prices.
 Petitions: Several petitions were filed, demanding a court-monitored investigation, raising concerns about
national security and economic implications.
 Response: The Adani Group denied these allegations, labeling them as misleading and driven by vested
interests.

Supreme Court's Ruling (Vishal Tiwari v Union of India):

 No Transfer of Investigation: The Supreme Court rejected requests to transfer the investigation from SEBI
(Securities and Exchange Board of India) to another body. It upheld confidence in SEBI's competence to
investigate the matter.
 Conditions for Transfer: The Court highlighted that such transfers should only happen in exceptional
circumstances with solid justification, which was not found in this case.
 Credibility of Hindenburg Report: The Court considered the Hindenburg report unreliable, claiming it
aimed to manipulate markets through selective information.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 63 of 348

 1

SEBI's Role and Investigation:

 SEBI's Integrity Affirmed: The Court endorsed SEBI’s handling of the case, recognizing the market regulator’s
competence and independence in conducting the investigation.
 Court’s Directive to SEBI: SEBI was instructed to expedite the investigation within three months and use its
powers to determine if the short-selling actions following the Hindenburg report violated any market laws.
Justice Sapre Committee:
 In March 2023, the Supreme Court formed a Justice Sapre Committee to examine if there were any regulatory
failures that contributed to the losses investors faced following the market volatility triggered by the allegations.
New Allegations by Hindernburg
Hindenburg Allegations (August 20244):
 Conflict of Interest: Hindenburg Research accused SEBI Chairperson Madhabi Puri Buch and her husband of
having hidden stakes in offshore funds based in Bermuda and Mauritius. These funds are linked to the Adani
Group’s alleged stock manipulation.
 Potential Collusion: The allegations suggested a conflict of interest and potential collusion between Ms. Buch
and the Adani Group. This, according to Hindenburg, might explain SEBI’s alleged inaction in the ongoing
investigation into Adani’s stock manipulation claims.
 Agora Partners: Hindenburg accused Ms. Buch of retaining ownership of her consulting firm, Agora Partners
(Singapore), during her tenure at SEBI and transferring it to her husband’s name after her appointment as SEBI
Chairperson.
 Dhaval Buch’s Role: Allegations were also made against Ms. Buch’s husband, Dhaval Buch, for benefiting from
his advisory role at Blackstone. Hindenburg claimed that SEBI’s policy changes under Ms. Buch’s leadership
favored Blackstone’s investments in India’s real estate investment trusts (REITs).

SEBI’s Response:
 Full Disclosure: SEBI defended Madhabi Puri Buch, stating that she has consistently made necessary
disclosures regarding her securities holdings and transfers.
 Recusal in Conflicts: SEBI emphasized that Buch has recused herself from any cases where there could be
conflicts of interest.
 Investigative Steps: SEBI has communicated with over 100 regulators and agencies and reviewed more than
300 documents during the investigation into the Adani Group.
 Advisory to Investors: SEBI advised investors to remain calm and exercise due diligence amid the ongoing
probe.

What is Short Selling?

 Short selling involves borrowing a stock or security and selling it in the open market with the expectation
that the price will drop. The seller aims to buy it back at a lower price and return it to the lender, profiting
from the price difference.
 According to SEBI, short selling means selling a stock that the seller does not own at the time of trade.

Regulation of Short Selling in India

 SEBI permits all investor categories to engage in short selling but prohibits naked short selling.
 Investors are required to deliver the securities during the settlement period.
 Naked short selling refers to selling a stock without first borrowing or ensuring the ability to borrow the stock.
 Institutional investors must declare upfront whether a trade is a short sale; retail investors can disclose by
the end of the trading day.
 Short selling is allowed for securities traded in the Futures & Options (F&O) segment, subject to SEBI’s
periodic review.

Key Terms:
 Futures: A contract to buy/sell an asset at an agreed price on a set future date.
 Options: Provides the right, but not the obligation, to buy/sell assets by a specific date

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 64 of 348

 1

Hindenburg Research:
 Founded: Hindenburg Research was established by Nathan Anderson in 2017.
 Primary Focus: The firm specializes in forensic financial research and investigations, particularly focusing on
companies engaged in fraud, accounting irregularities, regulatory misconduct, and unethical practices.
 Short-Selling: Hindenburg is primarily a short-seller. It identifies companies with questionable practices and
takes short positions, betting on a decline in their stock price after exposing their irregularities.
 High-Profile Reports:
o Nikola: Hindenburg’s 2020 report alleged that electric vehicle company Nikola was involved in fraudulent
practices, leading to the resignation of its CEO and federal investigations.
o Lordstown Motors: In 2021, Hindenburg published a report on Lordstown Motors, accusing the company
of misleading investors about pre-orders and production capabilities.
o Adani Group: In January 2023, Hindenburg accused the Adani Group of stock manipulation and accounting
fraud, leading to a massive decline in the conglomerate’s stock value.
 Profit Mechanism: The firm profits by shorting the stocks of companies it believes are overvalued or
fraudulent. After publishing its reports, the stock price typically declines, benefiting its short positions.
 Name Origin: The firm’s name is inspired by the Hindenburg airship disaster of 1937, symbolizing its mission
to expose "man-made disasters" in the financial world.
 Reputation: Hindenburg has earned a reputation for being highly effective in its research, leading to significant
consequences for the companies it targets, including regulatory scrutiny, legal challenges, and massive stock
value drops.

ONE VEHICLE ONE FASTAG

What is the ‘One Vehicle, One FASTag’ Initiative?
 Objective: Launched by National Highways Authority of India (NHAI) to ensure that each vehicle has only one
FASTag and to prevent the misuse of linking multiple FASTags to a single vehicle or using a single FASTag for
multiple vehicles.
 User Responsibility: FASTag users are encouraged to complete the Know Your Customer (KYC) process to
avoid deactivation.
 Deadline: FASTags with incomplete KYC will be deactivated or blacklisted by banks after 31st January 2024.
What is FASTag?
 Technology: FASTag uses Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) to make automatic toll payments without
stopping the vehicle.
 Apps: NHAI has introduced mobile applications like MyFASTag and FASTag Partner for easier issuance and
management.
 Validity: FASTags are valid for 5 years and come with different color codes for specific vehicles.
Benefits of FASTag:
 For Road Users:
o Non-stop movement through toll plazas.
o Cashless toll payments.
o Reduced traffic congestion and travel time.
 For Toll Operators:
o Lower operational costs.
o Centralized control for better audits.
o Improved infrastructure capacity without new construction.
 For the Government:
o Savings on fuel and lower emissions.
o Improved transparency in toll collections.

Radio Frequency Identification (RFID):

 Working: RFID uses radio waves to identify tags on vehicles. Tags respond with their identity and information
when the reader sends out signals.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 65 of 348

 1

National Highways Authority of India (NHAI):

 Established: Created by an Act of Parliament in 1988 but became operational in 1995.
 Function: Develops, maintains, and manages National Highways under the Ministry of Road Transport and
Highways.
 Structure: Includes a Chairman and members appointed by the Central Government.

National Electronic Toll Collection (NETC) Programme:

 Developed by: National Payments Corporation of India (NPCI) to support electronic tolling across the country.
 Features: Provides a nationwide interoperable toll payment solution, ensuring FASTag can be used at any
toll plaza regardless of its operator.
 Interoperability: Standardized processes and technical specifications allow FASTag users to pay tolls at any
plaza across India.

ADITYA L1
1. Aditya-L1 Mission Overview:
o India's First Solar Mission: Launched on September 2, 2023, by the Indian Space Research
Organisation (ISRO), Aditya-L1 is India’s first space-based solar observatory mission.
o Halo Orbit: Aditya-L1 will be positioned in a halo orbit around the Sun-Earth Lagrange point 1 (L1),
providing continuous, uninterrupted observations of the Sun.
2. Importance of the Solar Mission:
o Understanding the Sun: The Sun, the closest star to Earth (150 million kilometres), is crucial for energy
in the solar system. However, several phenomena, like solar storms, coronal heating, and solar wind,
remain mysteries.
o Solar Influence: Solar activities like Coronal Mass Ejections (CMEs) and solar flares can disrupt Earth's
communication systems and technological infrastructure, making it vital to study and predict solar weather.
o Nuclear Fusion: At its core, the Sun undergoes nuclear fusion at 15 million degrees Celsius, releasing
immense energy.
3. Aditya-L1 Mission Goals:
o To study the Sun's corona, chromosphere, photosphere, and solar flares.
o Investigate Coronal Heating, Solar Wind Acceleration, and initiation of CMEs.
o Examine the near-Earth space weather and its dynamics.
4. Payloads of Aditya-L1 and Their Objectives:
o Visible Emission Line Coronagraph (VELC): Studies the solar corona and observes the dynamics of CMEs.
o Solar Ultraviolet Imaging Telescope (SUIT): Captures images of the photosphere and chromosphere in
near-UV, monitoring solar irradiance.
o Solar Low Energy X-ray Spectrometer (SoLEXS): Functions as a soft X-ray spectrometer, studying solar X-
ray flares.
o High Energy L1 Orbiting X-ray Spectrometer (HEL1OS): Investigates hard X-ray solar flares.
o Aditya Solar Wind Particle Experiment (ASPEX): Analyzes solar wind particles and their energy
distribution.
o Plasma Analyser Package for Aditya (PAPA): Studies the plasma characteristics and its interaction with
the solar wind in interplanetary space.
o Advanced Tri-axial High-Resolution Digital Magnetometers (MAG): Measures interplanetary
magnetic fields using two magnetic sensors located on a 6-meter boom.

Lagrange Points
1. Definition:
o Lagrange points are positions in space where the gravitational forces of two large bodies (e.g., Earth and
Sun) balance out, allowing objects to maintain stable orbits with minimal fuel consumption.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 66 of 348

 1

2. Types of Lagrange Points:

o L1, L2, L3: Located along the line connecting the two large bodies (Sun and Earth), these points are unstable
but useful for certain astronomical missions.
o L4 and L5: These points form stable equilateral triangles with the two large bodies and are known for
hosting objects like the Trojan asteroids.

Lagrange Point 1 (L1)

1. Significance:
o L1 offers a continuous, unobstructed view of the Sun, making it ideal for solar observatories like Aditya-
L1 and SOHO.
2. Advantages:
o L1 helps in early detection of solar flares and coronal mass ejections, providing crucial lead time for
space weather prediction.

Aditya L1's Journey

1. Phase 1: Earth-Bound Orbits:
o The spacecraft enters Earth-bound orbits, undergoing five manoeuvres to gain velocity for the journey
towards L1.
2. Phase 2: Trans-Lagrangian Insertion:
o Aditya-L1 enters a 110-day trajectory towards L1, continuously adjusting its path.
3. Phase 3: L1 Orbit and Mission Operations:
o Once at L1, the spacecraft enters a halo orbit and begins comprehensive solar studies.

Significance of the Aditya-L1 Mission

1. India’s First Solar Observatory:
o Aditya-L1 is India’s first solar mission, joining the ranks of spacefaring nations with advanced solar physics
missions like NASA and ESA.
2. Boosting Space Technology:
o The mission showcases ISRO’s technological prowess, expanding beyond Earth's orbit, and improving
real-time space weather monitoring for critical infrastructure protection.
3. Future Exploration:
o Aditya-L1 lays the groundwork for future solar missions, with plans for Aditya-L2 and Aditya-L3 to
further explore the Sun’s far side and poles.

AGNIPATH SCHEME
Agnipath Scheme Overview:
 Introduces the military rank of "Agniveer" translated as "Fire-Warriors".
 Aims to recruit individuals below officer ranks (non-commissioned) such as soldiers, airmen, and sailors into the
Indian Armed Forces.
 Recruitment period is for 4 years, post which up to 25% of these recruits may receive a permanent commission
for another 15 years based on merit and organizational needs.
 Applies to all ranks of sailors, airmen, and soldiers except those in the technical cadre of the medical branch.
 The scheme does not apply to defence officers for whom there is a provision called Short Service Commission or
SSC.

Eligibility Criteria:
 Age limit for candidates is between 17.5 years to 23 years.
 The upper age limit was initially 21 years but has been raised to 23 years.
 Eligibility for girls is the same as for boys, with no specific reservations for women.

Pay and Benefits:

 Death on Duty: Compensation of Rs 1 crore to the family, including the Seva Nidhi package and unserved salary.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 67 of 348

 1

 Disability: Compensation up to Rs 44 lakh based on disability severity, provided the disability is related to
military service.
 Pensions: No regular pension post-4-year term; only applicable to those selected for permanent commission
after initial tenure.

Scheme’s Objective:
 Designed to maintain a youthful profile within the armed forces.
 Aims to reduce the number of permanent military personnel, thereby decreasing government expenditure on
defense pensions.

Objectives of the Agnipath Scheme:

 Younger, More Agile Force:
o Aims to create a more agile and responsive fighting force through younger recruits.
o Expected to decrease the average age of Armed Forces personnel from 32 years to 26 years.
 Financial Efficiency:
o Intended to reduce the defense pension bill which is projected to rise to Rs 2.5 lakh crore by 2025, as per the
2022 Parliamentary Standing Committee on Defence report.
 Technological Adaptation:
o Seeks to enhance the integration of emerging technologies within the Armed Forces, utilizing the tech-
savviness of younger recruits.
 Skill Development for Civilian Life:
o Envisions Agniveers transitioning into the civilian workforce with skills and discipline acquired during their
military service, potentially boosting the national skilled workforce and economic growth.
 Employment Creation:
o Designed to increase employment opportunities through the skills and experience gained during the four-
year service period.

Global Comparisons:
 Voluntary Tour of Duty (US):
o In the United States, tours of voluntary duty vary in duration based on military needs and service branch,
ranging from 6 to 9 months up to a full year.
 Required Military Service (Conscription):
o Countries like Israel, Norway, North Korea, Singapore, and Sweden employ mandatory military service,
known as conscription.

Issues with the Agnipath Scheme:

 Retirement Benefits: Provides a one-time payment of Rs 11.71 lakh after the 4-year term without any pension
or gratuity benefits.
 Service Duration Concerns: The 4-year service term is considered too short to adequately train and retain
skilled soldiers, potentially leading to a deficit in skill and experience within the armed forces.
 Eligibility Age Limit: The upper age limit of 23 years excludes many youths, particularly those unable to apply
during the recruitment freeze caused by the pandemic.
 Unemployment After Service: With only 25% of recruits being absorbed permanently, concerns arise about
the scheme contributing to the existing high youth unemployment levels.
 Pension Expenditure Reduction: The scheme is perceived as a government strategy to reduce defense pension
costs, focusing on financial savings rather than building a long-term skilled military force.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 68 of 348

 1

BUDDHISM
Origin and Spread of Buddhism:
 Buddhism originated in the 6th century BCE in the Gangetic plain during a period known as the second
urbanisation in India.
 Buddha's teachings appealed to those dissatisfied with the existing Vedic rituals and the caste system.
 The support from merchants and artisans played a crucial role in the spread of Buddhism across northern India.
 Under the Maurya dynasty, Buddhism saw significant expansion both within India and into neighboring regions.

Buddha:
 Full Name: Siddhartha Gautama.
 Born: Circa 563 BCE in Lumbini, modern-day Nepal.
 Enlightenment: Achieved under the Bodhi tree in Bodh Gaya, India, at the age of 35 after a profound meditative
experience.
 Teachings: Began in Sarnath, India, with his first sermon known as the "Dhammacakkappavattana Sutta"
(Setting the Wheel of Dhamma in Motion).
 Death: Passed away at the age of 80 in Kushinagar, India; event known as Parinirvana.

Initial Spread During Buddha's Lifetime:

 Regions such as Magadha, Kosala, and Kaushambi embraced Buddhism.
 Republican states like the Sakyas, Vajjis, and Mallas also adopted Buddhism.
Factors Contributing to Buddhism's Appeal:
 Discontent with the existing caste system and rigid social hierarchies.
 The Buddha's teachings focused on compassion, non-violence, and personal responsibility.
 Conversion of rulers and elites, such as Ashoka, who significantly supported Buddhism through monastic
patronage and missionary efforts.
 Establishment of a monastic network and the spread of the monastic tradition.
 Accessibility of teachings to all social strata, facilitated by the use of Pali language, unlike the exclusive use of
Sanskrit in Brahmanical practices.

Spread Outside India:

 Hinayana Buddhism:
o Ashoka’s missions to Sri Lanka, Myanmar, and Thailand laid the foundation for Theravada Buddhism in these
regions.
 Mahayana Buddhism:
o Patronized by Kushan Emperor Kanishka, who supported the Fourth Buddhist Council in Kashmir, aiding its
spread to Central Asia.
o Spread further along the Silk Route, influencing regions like Kashgar, Khotan, and Bamiyan.
o Prominent Chinese monks like Fa-Hien and Hiuen Tsang traveled to India and back, propagating Mahayana
Buddhism in China.
o In China, Buddhism assimilated into local Confucian and Daoist traditions and later spread to Japan in the
6th century CE, where schools like Zen and Pure Land Buddhism developed.
 Vajrayana Buddhism:
o Originated in India around the 8th century and spread to Tibet and Southeast Asia.
o Influential figures like Atisha Dipankara and Padmasambhava played key roles in its spread.
o Integrated with the native Bon religion in Tibet, forming Tibetan Buddhism, characterized by the spiritual
leadership of reincarnated lamas like the Dalai Lama, considered the Bodhisattva of compassion.

Buddhism's Legacy:
 Though it dwindled in India by the 12th century, Buddhism remained influential in various forms across Asia:
Hinayana in Southeast Asia, Mahayana in East Asia, and Vajrayana in Tibet.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 69 of 348

 1

Doctrinal Debates and Sects:

 After Buddha's death, his followers divided over interpretations of his teachings, leading to various sects.
 The 2nd Buddhist Council at Vaishali around 383 BCE marked the first major split into:
o Sthaviravadins: Strict adherents to the Vinaya monastic discipline.
o Mahasanghikas: Advocated for more relaxed norms.
 The 1st century CE Fourth Buddhist Council under King Kanishka catalyzed the rise of Mahayana Buddhism,
which treated Buddha images as divine and deviated from the non-theistic Hinayana.
 In the 7th century, Vajrayana Buddhism emerged as a tantric branch of Mahayana.

Spread and Localized Adaptations:

 Buddhism spread along trade networks, leading to localized forms like Tibetan, Chinese, and Zen Buddhism.

Core Teachings Across Sects:

 Despite doctrinal divisions, all sects share core teachings like the Four Noble Truths, the Eightfold Path, and the
concept of Non-Self.

Major Tenets Under Buddhism:

 Theravada (Lesser Vehicle)
o Also known as "Teaching of the Elders."
o Follows Buddha's earliest teachings preserved in the Pali Canon.
o Focuses on individual liberation through meditation and adherence to monastic discipline.
o Prominent in Sri Lanka and Southeast Asia, spread from India by the 3rd century BCE.
o Key tenets include the Four Noble Truths, the Noble Eightfold Path, the three marks of existence, karma,
rebirth, and practices like jhana and vipassana meditation.
o Notable sub-sects include Sarvastivada, Vaibhasika, Sautrantika, Sthaviravada, Vibhajjavada, and Sammitiya.
 Mahayana (Greater Vehicle)
o Emerged around the 1st century BCE.
o Focuses on the path of the Bodhisattva, beings who forgo nirvana to aid others.
o More inclusive of lay participation compared to the monastic focus of Theravada.
o Spread from Kashmir to Central Asia, East Asia, and Southeast Asia.
o Key concepts include Bodhisattva, Buddha-nature, and emphasis on compassion and wisdom.
o Important texts include the Lotus Sutra and Heart Sutra.
o Influential sub-sects are Madhyamaka and Yogacara.
 Vajrayana (Diamond Vehicle)
o Tantric branch of Mahayana emphasizing rituals and tantra for quick enlightenment.
o Mainly practiced in Tibet, Bhutan, parts of Nepal, and Mongolia.
 Zen
o Sub-school of Mahayana emphasizing meditation as the path to enlightenment.
o Known as Chan in China and Son in Korea.
o Associated with Japan where it developed distinct sub-schools.
 Navayana
o Modern Buddhist movement that arose in late 20th century India.
o Reinterprets Buddhism in the context of social justice and equality, particularly concerning the caste system.

Decline of Buddhism:
 The decline of Buddhism in India began during the Gupta dynasty.
 By the 12th century CE, Buddhism had nearly disappeared in India, although it continued to flourish in other
parts of Asia.

Ideological Decline:
 Over time, institutional Buddhism developed hierarchies and corruption similar to those it initially opposed.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 70 of 348

 1

 Wealth accumulation and monks' involvement in worldly matters deviated from Buddhist ascetic principles.
 Fragmentation into multiple sects diluted the philosophical core of Buddhism, blurring its distinct identity from
Hinduism.

Hinduism’s Reform and Assimilation:

 Hinduism adapted Buddhist practices such as vegetarianism and the monastic system.
 Influential Hindu leaders like Adi Shankaracharya critiqued Buddhist philosophy while reviving Hindu practices.
 Conceptual similarities between Buddhism and Hinduism facilitated the assimilation of Buddhist elements into
Hinduism, particularly post-500 CE.
 The depiction of Buddha as an avatar of Vishnu in Hindu scriptures further integrated Buddhist teachings into
Hindu practice.

Loss of Royal Patronage:

 The decline of Buddhist-supporting dynasties like the Kushanas and the shift towards Brahmanical patronage
under the Guptas diminished state support for Buddhism.
 This shift led to the deterioration of Buddhist sanghas and educational institutions.

Lack of Vernacular Literature:

 Early Buddhist scriptures were composed in Pali, but later texts were in Sanskrit, limiting accessibility to non-
elite, vernacular-speaking populations.

Foreign Invasions:
 Invasions by non-Buddhist groups such as the Huns and later Turks (Khilji) led to the destruction and looting of
Buddhist monasteries and educational centers.
 Significant destruction occurred during Islamic invasions around 1100 CE, particularly affecting Mahayana
Buddhism in northern India.

Major Texts in Buddhism:

Buddhist literature is vast and varied, largely divided according to the major sects of Buddhism: Theravada,
Mahayana, and Vajrayana.

Theravada Buddhism:
 Pali Canon (Tipitaka):
o Vinaya Pitaka: Deals with rules for monastic life.
o Sutta Pitaka: Contains discourses of Buddha, including foundational texts like Dhammapada.
o Abhidhamma Pitaka: Offers detailed philosophical and doctrinal analyses.

Mahayana Buddhism:
 Mahayana Sutras:
o Lotus Sutra (Saddharma Pundarika): Emphasizes the importance of compassion and the possibility of
universal salvation.
o Heart Sutra: Discusses the concept of emptiness and is central to the Madhyamaka philosophy.
o Diamond Sutra: Focuses on the practice of non-attachment and the concept of emptiness.

Vajrayana Buddhism:
 Tantric Texts:
o Tibetan Book of the Dead (Bardo Thodol): Offers guidance on the experiences that the consciousness has
after death, during the interval between death and the next rebirth.
o Kalachakra Tantra: Detailed teachings on cosmology, meditation, and prophecy related to the 'Wheel of
Time'.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 71 of 348

 1

SOVEREIGN GOLD BONDS

 Introduction: Launched by the Government of India on October 30, 2015.
 Issuer: Reserve Bank of India on behalf of the Government of India.
 Purpose: Serves as an alternative to holding physical gold.

Features of SGB
 Denomination: Bonds are issued in units of one gram of gold and its multiples.
 Issue Price: As recently announced by RBI, Rs 6,263 per gram.
 Eligibility: Open to resident Indian entities such as individuals, Hindu Undivided Families (HUFs), trusts,
universities, and charitable institutions.
 Investment Limits:
o Minimum investment: 1 gram.
o Maximum subscription limit: 4 kg for individuals and HUFs; 20 kg for trusts and similar entities per fiscal
year.
o For joint holdings, the limit of 4 kg applies to the first applicant.

Tenure and Redemption

 Tenure: 8 years with an option to exit in the 5th, 6th, and 7th years on interest payment dates.

Sale and Purchase

 Authorized Sellers: Nationalised banks, private and foreign scheduled banks, designated post offices, Stock
Holding Corporation of India Ltd. (SHCIL), and authorized stock exchanges.
 Payment Modes: Cash (up to Rs. 20,000), demand draft, cheque, or electronic banking.
Benefits and Regulations
 Interest: Periodic interest is paid to investors, taxable under the Income-tax Act, 1961.
 Maturity Value: Investors are assured of the market value of gold at maturity.
 Loan Collateral: Bonds can be used as collateral for loans from banks, financial institutions, and NBFCs.
 Trading: Bonds are tradable on stock exchanges within a fortnight of issuance on dates notified by RBI.
 Transferability: Bonds can be sold or transferred as per the Government Securities Act, 2006.
 Taxation:
o Interest is taxable.
o Capital gains tax from redemption is exempt for individuals.

CDP-SURAKSHA
CDP-SURAKSHA (System for Unified Resource Allocation, Knowledge, and Secure Horticulture Assistance).
 Purpose: Digital platform to disburse subsidies to horticulture farmers under the Cluster Development
Programme (CDP).

Key Features of CDP-SURAKSHA

 Instant Subsidy Disbursal: Uses e-RUPI vouchers by the National Payments Corporation of India (NPCI) to
instantly transfer subsidies directly into farmers' bank accounts.
 Integrated Systems:
o Database linkage with PM-KISAN.
o Utilizes cloud-based server space provided by the National Informatics Centre (NIC).
o Involves UIDAI validation for secure identification.
o Integrated with the eRUPI payment system.
o Connected to the local government directory (LGD).
o Features include a content management system, geotagging, and geo-fencing.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 72 of 348

 1

Advantages Over the Previous System

 Subsidy Disbursement: Subsidies are provided upfront at the time of purchase, unlike the previous system
where farmers had to buy first and claim later.
 Vendor Verification: Payments to vendors supplying planting materials are made only after farmers verify the
delivery of their orders.

Significance of the Platform

 Sector Impact: Aims to boost the growth of India’s horticulture sector.
 Economic Contribution: Horticulture contributes nearly one-third to the agricultural Gross Value Addition
(GVA).
 Production Increase: Horticulture production increased from 240.53 million tonnes in 2010-11 to 334.60
million tonnes in 2020-21.

Horticulture Cluster Development Program (CDP)

 Launched: May 2021 by the Ministry of Agriculture and Farmers Welfare.
 Administered by: National Horticulture Board (NHB).
 Objective: Develop and grow horticulture clusters to make them globally competitive.
 Focus: Leverage geographical specialization, supporting the entire horticulture value chain from preproduction
to marketing.
 Key Aims:
o Increase exports of targeted crops by approximately 20%.
o Create cluster-specific brands to enhance competitiveness.
o Reduce harvest and post-harvest losses by improving infrastructure for handling produce.
o Boost farmers' income.
 Current Status:
o 55 horticulture clusters identified, 12 selected for pilot phase.
o Additional clusters in pipeline include a floriculture cluster in West Bengal, coconut clusters in Kerala and
Tamil Nadu, and white onion clusters in Gujarat.
 Future Goals:
o Cover approximately 9 lakh hectares, impacting 10 lakh farmers.
o Attract private investment of Rs 8,250 crore in addition to government assistance.
 Financial Assistance:
o Up to Rs 25 crore for mini clusters (up to 5,000 ha).
o Up to Rs 50 crore for medium clusters (5,000 to 15,000 ha).
o Up to Rs 100 crore for mega clusters (over 15,000 ha).
e-RUPI
 Launch Date: August 2, 2021.
 Launched by: Prime Minister Narendra Modi.
 Developed by: National Payments Corporation of India (NPCI) in association with the Department of Financial
Services, National Health Authority, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare.
 Nature: Digital voucher delivered via SMS or QR code.
 Purpose: Facilitate contactless, cashless payments without need for bank account, card, digital payment app, or
internet banking.
 Usage: Specific to person and purpose, used for transactions like government benefits or healthcare payments.
 Benefits:
o Beneficiaries do not require a bank account.
o Enables easy, contactless two-step redemption process without sharing personal details.
o Operable on basic phones, thus accessible to people without smartphones.
 Impact:
o Enhances Direct-Benefit Transfer (DBT) transparency and efficiency.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 73 of 348
 1

o Saves costs due to no physical issuance of vouchers.

o Ensures real-time payments to service providers being prepaid vouchers.

INDIA EMPLOYMENT REPORT, 2024

India Employment Report 2024 Overview
 Authors: Institute for Human Development (IHD) and International Labour Organisation (ILO).
 Launched: Part of a series started by IHD, with this edition focusing on issues up to 2023.
 Focus: Challenges of youth employment in the context of recent economic, labor market, educational, and skill
development changes.
Institute for Human Development (IHD)
 Establishment: Founded in 1998.
 Parent Organization: Operates under the aegis of the Indian Society of Labour Economics (ISLE).
 Nature: A non-profit autonomous institution.
 Objective: Aims to contribute towards building an inclusive society that values social, economic, and political
systems free from poverty and deprivations.

Key Highlights of the Report

 Labor Conditions:
o Stagnant or declining wages, increase in self-employment among women, and higher unpaid family work
among youth noted.
o Youths represent 83% of the unemployed workforce in India.
o The share of youth with secondary or higher education in total unemployment rose significantly from 35.2%
in 2000 to 65.7% in 2022.
Employment Trends and Data
 Employment Rates:
o Employment and underemployment for youth surged from 2000 to 2019.
o The Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR), Worker Population Ratio (WPR), and Unemployment Rate (UR)
saw long-term deterioration from 2000 to 2018 but improved post-2019.
 Employment Sectors:
o Non-farm employment growth did not sufficiently absorb the workforce from agriculture prior to 2018.
o Approximately 90% of workers engaged in informal employment.
o Regular employment which had been increasing since 2000, started to decline after 2018.
Skills and Digital Literacy
 Digital Literacy:
o Significant skill gaps noted: 75% of youth unable to send emails with attachments, 60% unable to copy
and paste files, and 90% unable to perform basic tasks in spreadsheets.
Wages and Economic Contribution
 Wage Trends:
o While wages for casual laborers saw a modest upward trend from 2012 to 2022, real wages for regular
workers either remained stagnant or declined post-2019.
o In 2022, 62% of unskilled casual agricultural workers and 70% in construction did not receive prescribed
daily minimum wages.

Structural Changes in Employment

 Gig and Platform Work:
o Rise in digitally mediated gig and platform work, which lacks substantial social security provisions, seen as
an extension of informal work.
Future Projections and Migration
 Migration and Urbanization:
o Migration expected to increase, with a rate of about 40% by 2030.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 74 of 348

 1

o The urban population is projected to reach about 607 million by 2030, primarily due to migration.

Regional and Gender Disparities

 Regional Disparities: States like Bihar, Uttar Pradesh, Odisha, Madhya Pradesh, Jharkhand, and Chhattisgarh
have poor employment outcomes, influenced by regional policies.
 Gender Gap: Substantial gender gap in labor market participation, especially among educated young women.

SUPREME COURT OBSERVATION ON CUSTODIAL DEATHS

Custodial death refers to deaths occurring while an individual is in police or judicial custody, arising from custodial
violence, including torture and other forms of abuse.
Constitutional and Legal Framework Related to Custodial Death
Constitutional Provisions:
 Article 21: Guarantees the right to life and personal liberty, including protection from torture and inhuman
treatment.
 Article 20: Provides protections against arbitrary punishment, including:
o No ex-post-facto law (Article 20(1)),
o No double jeopardy (Article 20(2)),
o No self-incrimination (Article 20(3)).
 Selvi v. State of Karnataka: The Supreme Court ruled that narco-analysis, polygraph, and brain-mapping
tests cannot be conducted without the individual's consent.
Legal Protections:
 Section 24 of the Indian Evidence Act (1872): Confessions made under coercion or threat by investigating
agencies are inadmissible in court.
 Sections 330 & 331 of IPC: Criminalize voluntarily causing hurt or grievous hurt to extort a confession or
information.
 Section 41 of CrPC (Amended in 2009): Provides safeguards during arrests and detentions, ensuring:
o Arrests are based on reasonable grounds with documented procedures.
o Arrests are transparent to family, friends, and the public, and detainees are allowed legal representation.
Supreme Court Judgments and Guidelines
 State of Jharkhand v. Sandeep Kumar: SC invoked Article 136 to set aside a High Court's bail granted to a police
officer in a custodial death case.
 D.K. Basu v. State of West Bengal: The Supreme Court issued specific guidelines to safeguard detainees,
including detailed documentation and communication requirements for arrests.
 Selvi v. State of Karnataka: The Supreme Court ruled that narco-analysis, polygraph, and brain-mapping tests
cannot be conducted without the individual's consent.
International Conventions Against Custodial Torture
 International Human Rights Law (1948): Protects individuals from torture and enforced disappearances.
 United Nations Charter (1945): Calls for treating prisoners with dignity and respect, ensuring their
fundamental freedoms as outlined in international human rights documents.
 Nelson Mandela Rules (2015): Adopted by the UN General Assembly to protect prisoners from torture and
ensure their inherent dignity.
 United Nations Convention Against Torture (UNCAT): An international treaty aimed at preventing torture and
degrading treatment worldwide.
Measures to Combat Custodial Torture
 Strengthening Legal Systems:
o Enact comprehensive legislation to criminalize custodial torture, following the Supreme Court's directives
in the Prakash Singh Case (2006).
o SC directives include separating investigation from law and order functions, setting up State Security
Commissions (SSC) with civil society members, and forming a National Security Commission.
o Ensure prompt, impartial investigations into allegations of custodial torture.
o Hold perpetrators accountable through fair and expeditious trials.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 75 of 348

 1

APPLICATION ON PROTECTION OF WOMEN FROM DOMESTIC VIOLENCE ACT,

2005
Prevalence of Domestic Violence in India
 Reported Incidents:
o 32% of ever-married women in India have experienced physical, sexual, or emotional violence by their
husbands during their lifetime.
 National Family Health Survey-5 (NFHS-5), 2019-2021:
o 29.3% of married women aged 18-49 have experienced domestic or sexual violence.
o 3.1% of pregnant women aged 18-49 have suffered physical violence during pregnancy.
 Underreporting of Cases:
o Many cases go unreported; according to NFHS data, 87% of married women who are victims of marital
violence do not seek help or report the abuse to authorities.
Protection of Women from Domestic Violence Act, 2005 (DV Act)
 Enactment: Passed by Parliament on September 13, 2005.
 Applicability: Extends to the whole of India and applies universally to all women, regardless of religious or social
background.
Scope of Protection
 Who is Protected:
o The Act protects wives or female live-in partners from violence by the husband, male live-in partner, or their
relatives.
o Domestic violence includes physical, sexual, verbal, emotional, or economic abuse, as well as harassment
related to dowry demands.
 Who is Covered:
o The Act applies to all women, including mothers, sisters, wives, widows, and female partners living in shared
households.
o It covers relationships that resemble marriage, adoption, and joint family living.

Filing a Complaint
 Who Can File:
o Any woman who alleges domestic violence or any person on her behalf can file a complaint.
o A child is also entitled to relief, and the mother can file an application on behalf of her minor child.
o If the mother files a complaint for herself, her children can be co-applicants.
o No female relative of the husband or male partner can file a complaint against the wife or female partner.
 Against Whom:
o Complaints can be filed against any adult male member in a domestic relationship with the woman.
o It also includes relatives (both male and female) of the husband or male partner.

Legal Remedies Available

 Relief Measures:
o Protection Order: To prevent further violence.
o Residence Order: Allows the woman to reside in the matrimonial house.
o Monetary Orders: For maintenance of the woman and her children.
o Temporary Custody: Custody of children may be granted to the woman.
o Compensation Order: For damages caused by domestic violence.
 Criminal Action: Criminal action is initiated only if there is a breach of court-granted relief.

Role of Protection Officers

 Appointment: Protection Officers are appointed by the government and attached to Magistrates' courts.
 Duties: They assist the woman in filing the case, provide legal aid, help obtain court relief, and execute court
orders with police assistance.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 76 of 348

 1

 Filing Options: The aggrieved person can file the petition before the Judicial Magistrate Court, with a service
provider, or at a nearby police station.

Role of Service Providers

 Who They Are: Members of notified Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs) under the DV Act.
 Duties:
o Assist in filing Domestic Incident Reports.
o Provide short-stay accommodation for women and children.
o Offer counseling and help with medical treatment.
o Provide vocational training for employment and sustainable income.

INDIA'S ANTARCTIC POST OFFICES AND PIN CODE MH-1718

Introduction
 Second Post Office: The Department of Posts has opened a second branch of the post office at the Bharati
research station in Antarctica, nearly four decades after the first.
 PIN Code: Letters intended for Antarctica will now have a new experimental PIN code, MH-1718.
 Active Research Stations: Currently, India operates two active research stations in Antarctica: Maitri and
Bharati.

Historical Context
 First Post Office: India established its first post office in Antarctica in 1984 at Dakshin Gangotri (India’s first
research station).
 Decommissioning: Dakshin Gangotri was submerged in ice by 1988-89 and subsequently decommissioned.

Continuing the Tradition

 New Post Office: On 26th January 1990, India set up another post office at the Maitri research station in
Antarctica.
 Current Research Stations: India currently operates two research stations in Antarctica: Maitri and Bharati,
located 3,000 km apart but both under the Goa postal division.

Operational Process
 Postal Delivery: Letters for Antarctica are sent to the National Centre for Polar and Ocean Research (NCPOR)
in Goa.
 Expedition Carrying Mail: When a scientific expedition departs from NCPOR for Antarctica, a researcher carries
the letters.
 Cancellation Process: At the research base, the letters are "cancelled" (marked to prevent reuse) and returned
via post.

Strategic Presence
 Assertion of Presence: Having an Indian post office in Antarctica helps assert India's presence on the continent.
 Unique Opportunity: The post office operates in Antarctica, which is foreign and neutral, aligning with the
principles of the Antarctic Treaty.
 Commitment to Exploration: The post office symbolizes India's dedication to scientific exploration and
environmental conservation.

Antarctica’s Governance
 Antarctic Treaty: This treaty neutralizes territorial claims, prohibits military activity and nuclear testing, and
promotes scientific discovery.
 India’s Role: The presence of an Indian post office in Antarctica is consistent with the treaty’s focus on neutrality
and scientific research.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 77 of 348

 1

"STATION SHIV SHAKTI" - CHANDRAYAAN-3'S LANDING SITE

 Approval: The International Astronomical Union (IAU) working group for Planetary System Nomenclature
approved the name ‘Statio Shiv Shakti’ for the landing site of Chandrayaan-3’s Vikram lander.
 Meaning of 'Shiv Shakti':
o Shiv: Represents determination for the betterment of humanity.
o Shakti: Symbolizes the strength to achieve these resolutions.
 Connection: The name reflects a connection between Himalayas to Kanyakumari, signifying national unity.

Other Key Locations

 Tiranga Point: The landing site of Chandrayaan-2’s failed lander in September 2019 was designated as Tiranga
Point by the Prime Minister.
 Jawahar Point: The location where Chandrayaan-1’s moon impact probe landed in November 2008 was named
Jawahar Point, as suggested by former President A.P.J. Abdul Kalam.

MISSION SHAKTI, INDIA’S FIGHTER JETS, AIRCRAFT CARRIER, SUBMARINES

 Anti-Satellite Missiles (ASAT): Designed to disable or destroy satellites; used for military capabilities like
countering enemy satellites or protecting national satellites during conflicts.
 Countries with ASAT Capabilities: China, India, Russia, and the United States have demonstrated ASAT
capabilities by conducting tests on their own satellites.
 Space Debris Concern: ASAT tests generate space debris, which can lead to the Kessler syndrome—a scenario
involving a chain reaction of collisions among space debris in Earth’s orbit.

Types of ASATs:
 Kinetic Energy ASATs: Destroy or disable satellites by colliding with them at high speeds.
 Non-Kinetic ASATs: Disable satellites through cyber-attacks, jamming transmissions, or using high-energy
lasers to blind or damage satellite components.
Historical Development:
 1957: Soviet Union launched Sputnik 1.
 United States: The US developed ASATs in response to the Soviet Union's launch of Sputnik 1 in 1957. Developed
the first ASAT, Bold Orion, an air-launched ballistic missile.
 The first US anti-satellite weapon was tested in October 1959.
 According to the Federation of American Scientists, an “air-launched ballistic missile” was fired from a B-
47 bomber of the US Air Force at an Explorer VI satellite. In 1985, the US launched the ASM-135A, the only US
air-launched missile to ever destroy a satellite. The ASM-135A destroyed the US Solwind P78-1 satellite.
 Russia (Former Soviet Union): Developed co-orbital ASATs. The Soviet Union first tested an orbital anti-
satellite (ASAT) weapon in 1968.
 Russia tested a direct ascent ASAT weapon in November 2021 against a live satellite, which created a large
amount of debris.
 The debris raised international concern and questioned the sustainability of objects in Low Earth Orbit (LEO),
including the International Space Station.
 Russia launched a satellite called Cosmos 2576 in May 2024 into low Earth orbit, which the United States assesses
is likely a counterspace weapon. The satellite's orbit allows it to stalk a U.S. spy satellite.
 2007: China destroyed a weather satellite, increasing space debris significantly.
 2019: India tested an anti-satellite weapon during an operation code named Mission Shakti. The target of the
test was a satellite present in a low Earth orbit, which was hit with a kinetic kill vehicle.
 2022: The US became the first country to ban the use of missiles against satellites.

India’s ASAT Test (Mission Shakti):

 Date: March 27, 2019.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 78 of 348

 1

 Agencies Involved: Defence Research and Development Organisation (DRDO) and the Indian Space Research
Organisation (ISRO).
 Location: Dr A P J Abdul Kalam Island, off the coast of Odisha.
 Outcome: Successfully destroyed a live satellite in Low Earth Orbit at an altitude of approximately 300 km.
 India's Status: Became the fourth country to successfully conduct an ASAT test.
 Target Satellite: An existing Indian satellite, operational but had outlived its utility.
 NOTAM Notice: Issued to alert airline authorities worldwide about the missile test.
 Space Debris: No significant space debris generated; debris fell back to Earth within weeks.
 Missile Type: Ballistic Missile Defence interceptor, part of India’s ballistic missile defence program.
 Mission Purpose: Demonstrated India’s commitment to national security and space development.

India’s Aircraft Carriers

 INS Vikrant:
o Construction: First domestically built aircraft carrier in India, constructed at Cochin Shipyard Limited.
o Indigenous Content: Features 76% indigenous content.
o Specifications: Weighs approximately 43,000 tonnes and is 262 meters in length.
o Speed: Can reach a top speed of 28 knots.
o Technology: Incorporates advanced design, sensors, and electronics, including a new combat management
system.
o Recovery System: Utilizes the STOBAR (Short Take-Off but Arrested Recovery) method.

INS Vikramaditya:
o Origin:Russia’s refurbished Admiral Gorshkov was commissioned into the Indian Navy as INS
Vikramaditya at Severodvinsk, Russia on November 16, 2013.
o Specifications: Weighs around 44,500 tonnes and is 284 meters in length.
o Speed: Capable of reaching speeds up to 30 knots.
o Technology: Despite modernization, still uses some older technology.
o Aircraft and Capabilities:
o Common Arsenal: Both carriers operate MiG-29K fighter jets, Kamov-31 and MH-60R helicopters, and
indigenously built Advanced Light Helicopters (ALH).

India's Naval Expansion Plans:

 Current Goal: Planning to expand to four aircraft carrier battle groups (CBGs) for enhanced naval presence.
 Long-term Vision: 15-year plan includes building four fleet carriers and two light fleet carriers.
 Future Developments: The Indigenous Aircraft Carrier 3 (IAC-3), also known as INS Vishal, is planned to be
constructed at Cochin Shipyard, similar to INS Vikrant.

India’s Fighter Jets

 Tejas: Light Combat Aircraft (LCA):
o Designed and Developed: Aeronautical Development Agency (ADA) under the Department of Defence
Research and Development. The ADA designed the Tejas as part of the LCA program, which was started in
1984 to replace the MiG-21 and Su-7 fighter planes.
o Manufacturer: Hindustan Aeronautics Limited (HAL). The Tejas is the world's lightest fighter aircraft in its
class.
o Features: Tailless, multi-role supersonic fighter; smallest and lightest in its class.
o Armament: Supports air-to-air, air-to-surface, and precision-guided weapons.
o Capabilities: Air-to-air refueling, max payload of 4000 kg, speed up to Mach 1.8, range of 3000 km.
o Induction: The first Tejas squadron, No. 45 Squadron IAF - Flying Daggers, became operational in 2016. The
squadron was the first to transition from MiG-21 Bisons to the Tejas.

 MiG-21:
o The MiG-21 is a supersonic fighter jet that was the first of its kind in the Indian Air Force (IAF)
o Origin: Designed in the 1950s by the USSR.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 79 of 348
 1

o Usage: Over 11,000 units built, used by more than 60 countries.

o IAF Service: First inducted in 1963; total of 874 variants used.
o Features: The MiG-21 has low radar visibility, an instantaneous turn rate, and “jackrabbit acceleration”.
o It also has a new helmet-mounted sight and high-off-boresight R-73 air-to-air missiles.
o Phase-out: Scheduled by 2025 in favor of modern fighters.

Advanced Medium Combat Aircraft (AMCA):

 Development: By Aeronautical Development Agency with DRDO, HAL, and other partners.
 Generation: 5th, featuring stealth, multi-role capabilities.
 Characteristics: Stealth airframe, internal weapons bay, advanced sensors, data fusion, supercruise, and swing-
role performance.
 Timeline: The first prototype is expected to be ready in 2028, and mass production is expected to begin by 2035.
The DRDO is seeking development and production partners for the project, which is expected to involve both the
public and private sectors.

Sukhoi Su-30MKI:
 Type: Twin-engine, two-seat, multi-role fighter.
 Roles: Air superiority, ground attack, electronic warfare, maritime strike.
 Manufacturer: Sukhoi (Russia), built under license by HAL.
 Induction: The first Russian-made Sukhoi Su-30MKI was inducted into the Indian Air Force (IAF) in 2002, and
the first Su-30MKI assembled in India entered service in 2004
Rafale:
 Type: French twin-engine, multirole fighter.
 Acquisition: 36 jets procured in 2016 for Rs 59,000 crore.
 Missions: Air supremacy, interdiction, reconnaissance, ground support, deep strike, anti-ship, and nuclear
deterrence.
 Armament: Includes Meteor missile, SCALP cruise missile, and MICA missile system.
 Missile Capabilities: Meteor (range 150 km), SCALP (range 300 km), MICA (range up to 100 km).
 Flight Capacity: 30,000 operational hours.
 Rafale Variants:

Rafale C: Single-seat variant for the Air Force, noted for 75% fleet availability and high mission reliability.
 Rafale B: Twin-seat variant used for training and enhanced situational awareness, maintains combat capabilities
of the C model.
 Rafale M: Naval variant, optimized for carrier operations with reinforced airframe and specialized landing gear;
used by the French Navy on the Charles de Gaulle aircraft carrier.
 Rafale N: Dedicated nuclear strike variant.
 Rafale R: Used for technology development purposes.
 Rafale Deal and Specifications:
o 2007 MMRCA Tender: Initially, India planned to procure 126 Rafales for the Medium Multi-Role Combat
Aircraft (MMRCA) competition.
o 2015 Deal Cancellation: The original tender for 126 jets was shelved.
o 2016 Direct Procurement: India signed a €7.8 billion deal for 36 Rafales, with deliveries scheduled
between 2019-2022.

Submarine Classes in India:

 Shishumar Class:
 Origin: Technology transfer from Germany.
 Fleet: Four submarines - INS Shishumar, INS Shankush, INS Shalki, INS Shankul.
 Capabilities: Advanced sensors optimized for anti-submarine and anti-ship warfare, primarily for operations
in the Arabian Sea.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 80 of 348

 1

 Sindhughosh Class:
 Origin: Russian-origin Kilo-class submarines.
 Current Fleet: Seven active submarines.
 Total Commissioned: Ten submarines, three decommissioned.
 Capabilities: Equipped with satellite sensors, radar, sonar, and electronic surveillance; armed with anti-ship
and anti-submarine weaponry.
 Active Submarines: INS Sindhughosh, INS Sindhudhvaj, INS Sindhuraj, INS Sindhuvir, INS Sindhuratna, INS
Sindhukesari.
 Kalvari Class:
o Origin: Indigenously built diesel-electric submarines, design based on France’s Scorpene class.
o Manufacturing: Built at Mazagon Dock under technology transfer.
 Project: Known as Project 75.
o Fleet: Five commissioned submarines - INS Kalvari, INS Khanderi, INS Karanj, INS Vela, INS Vagir.
o Upcoming: The sixth submarine, INS Vagsheer, scheduled for delivery in 2024.
o Future Development: All submarines under Project 75 (I) will include Air Independent Propulsion systems,
currently under development.
 Nuclear-Powered Attack Submarines (SSN):
o Past Fleet: INS Chakra II (Akula class), leased from Russia, decommissioned in 2021.
o Future Plans: Ordering another Akula class submarine (INS Chakra III), planned induction in 2025;
indigenous Project 75 Alpha SSNs under planning.

MYANMAR REFUGEE CRISIS

 Rohingyas are indigenous to Rakhine state in Myanmar, settled since the 15th century.
 They are considered part of the Muslim Indo-Aryans, resulting from pre-colonial and colonial immigrations.
 Myanmar government views them as illegal immigrants from post-independence and post-Bangladesh liberation
war periods.
 Persecuted minority, with an estimated population of 1.1 to 1.3 million before the 2015 crisis.
 Crisis Timeline:
o 2012: Initiated on June 10, leading to violent clashes between ethnic Rakhine Buddhists and Rohingya
Muslims, resulting in significant casualties and displacement.
o 2015: Systematic isolation by the Myanmar government, forcing many Rohingyas to flee by sea to
neighboring countries.
o 2016-2017: Military crackdown exacerbated the crisis, with widespread violence including the burning of
homes and villages, mass arrests, and allegations of severe human rights abuses.
 Legal Status of Rohingyas:
o Denied citizenship by Myanmar, rendering them stateless.
o Previously able to register as temporary residents with "white cards" granting limited rights like voting,
which were cancelled in 2015.
o Rohingya are not recognized as an official ethnic group and have been denied citizenship since 1982. They
are one of the largest stateless populations in the world.
o 2014 UN census initially allowed registration as Rohingyas, but changed under pressure to require
identification as Bengalis.
 International Responses:
o UN: Formed a nine-person commission led by Kofi Annan in 2016, which provided recommendations on
August 23, 2017, to reduce communal tensions and promote development in Rakhine state.
o A 2018 UN fact-finding commission claimed the Myanmar government was “genocidal” intent against the
Rohingya.
o ASEAN: No coordinated response; individual countries like Malaysia and Indonesia offered temporary refuge
under certain conditions, while Thailand provided humanitarian assistance without allowing permanent
entry.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 81 of 348

 1

o Bangladesh: Expressed concerns over economic migration; announced plans to relocate registered refugees
to different locations, without a clear plan for unregistered refugees.
o United States: Expressed willingness to accept Rohingya refugees, with a notable community settled in
Chicago.

Political Crisis in Myanmar

 2020 Elections and Military Coup:
o In November 2020, Aung San Suu Kyi's party, the National League for Democracy (NLD), won the elections.
o The military, known as the Tatmadaw, contested the election results, citing unfounded claims of electoral
fraud.
o In February 2021, the military executed a coup, detaining key leaders including Aung San Suu Kyi, declaring
a state of emergency, and seizing governmental control.
 Protests and Resistance:
o The coup incited widespread protests and a civil disobedience movement across Myanmar, with demands
for the restoration of democracy and the release of detained leaders.
o Various groups including civil servants and activists joined in strikes and demonstrations.
 Formation of Resistance Forces:
o In response to the Tatmadaw's severe crackdown on dissent, opposition groups and Ethnic Armed
Organizations (EAOs) formed the People's Defence Forces (PDFs).
o The PDFs support the National Unity Government (NUG), formed by ousted lawmakers to oppose the
military regime.
 Current Scenario:
o Intensified conflict throughout Myanmar, with local resistance forces active in Rakhine State, Kayin State,
Sagaing region, and Chin State.
 Implications for India:
o Balanced Stance: India has maintained a cautious approach, expressing concern over the disruption of
democracy while continuing engagement with the junta to protect strategic interests.
o Immediate Concern: Influx of Myanmarese nationals into India's northeastern border states, exacerbating
tensions in already volatile areas such as Manipur.
 Strategic Impacts: Anti-junta forces have seized control of two significant towns near India-Myanmar border
crossings:
o Rikhawdar near Zokhawthar in Mizoram.
o Khampat in the Sagaing region, approximately 60 km from Moreh in Manipur, a critical point in the proposed
India-Myanmar-Thailand trilateral highway project.

Legislative framework in India to handle refugees

 Foreigners Act of 1946: Grants the central government authority to detect, detain, and deport illegal foreign
nationals under Section 3.
 Passport (Entry into India) Act, 1920: Allows for the removal of illegal foreigners by force under Section 5,
pursuant to Article 258(1) of the Constitution of India.
 Registration of Foreigners Act of 1939: Mandates all foreign nationals (except overseas citizens of India) on a
long-term visa (more than 180 days) to register with a Registration Officer within 14 days of arrival in India.
 Citizenship Act, 1955: Outlines provisions for renunciation, termination, and deprivation of citizenship.
 Citizenship Amendment Act, 2019 (CAA): Aims to provide citizenship to persecuted Hindu, Christian, Jain,
Parsi, Sikh, and Buddhist immigrants from Bangladesh, Pakistan, and Afghanistan.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 82 of 348

 1

CAR-T CELL THERAPY

 CAR-T cell therapy, or chimeric antigen receptor T-cell therapy, is an advanced immunotherapy that uses a
patient's immune system to fight cancer.
 It involves genetically modifying a patient's T-cells to recognize and destroy cancer cells.
 The therapy is specifically effective against certain blood cancers such as leukemia and lymphoma.
 Immune System Basics:
o White blood cells (WBCs) are crucial for immune defense, produced in the bone marrow and circulating in
the blood and lymphatic system.
o Major types of WBCs include:
 Neutrophils: Destroy pathogens.
 Lymphocytes: Target specific invaders and retain memory of past infections.
 Monocytes: Become macrophages and dendritic cells, ingest pathogens and present antigens.
 Eosinophils: Kill parasites and modulate inflammatory responses.
 Basophils: Release histamine and other chemicals contributing to inflammation and allergies.
 Immune System Mechanisms:
o Innate immunity provides immediate, non-specific defense via barriers like skin and actions of phagocytic
cells.
o Adaptive immunity involves B-cells and T-cells:
 B-cells produce antibodies targeting specific pathogens.
 T-cells destroy infected cells and are central to adaptive immune responses.
 Role of T-Cells in CAR-T Therapy:
o T-cells can be engineered to express CARs that bind to cancer cell antigens, leading to the efficient
destruction of these cells.
o These engineered T-cells, once reintroduced into the patient's body, seek out and kill cancer cells.
 Procedure of CAR-T Cell Therapy:
o Begins with apheresis to collect T-cells from the patient's blood.
o T-cells are modified in the lab to express CARs, then expanded in number.
o Modified T-cells are infused back into the patient's bloodstream.
 Benefits of CAR-T Cell Therapy:
o Targeted Precision: Directly attacks cancer cells, minimizing damage to healthy cells.
o Personalised Treatment: Tailored specifically to the patient's cancer characteristics.
o Long-Lasting Effects: Engineered T-cells may persist in the body, providing ongoing protection against
cancer.
o Reduced Hospitalization: Potential decrease in hospital stays and supportive care needs due to targeted
treatment effectiveness.
o Advances in Treatment Options: Represents a significant development in cancer treatment strategies.
o Affordability: With advancements, the costs of CAR-T cell therapies are becoming more accessible.
 Significance and Advances:
o CAR-T cells are referred to as "living drugs" because they are living cells that continue to grow and act in the
patient’s body.
o Continuous research and technological evolution in CAR-T therapy aim to broaden its applicability and
improve patient outcomes across various cancers.

 Historical Development:
o CAR T cell therapy originated in the late 1980s.
o Initial clinical trials showed limited efficacy and safety, prompting further research and development.

 Approval and Applications in the USA:

o In 2017, the US FDA approved two CAR T cell therapies: Kymriah for B-cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia
and Yescarta for diffuse large B-cell lymphoma.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 83 of 348

 1

 Development and Approval in India:

o In October 2023, India's Central Drugs Standard Control Organisation (CDSCO) approved NexCAR19 for
commercial use.
o NexCAR19, developed by ImmunoACT, Tata Memorial Hospital, and IIT Bombay, is the first domestically
produced CAR-T therapy in India.
o It targets B-cell cancers such as leukemia and lymphoma and is approved for use in individuals aged 15 and
above.
o Immuno Adoptive Cell Therapy, an IIT Bombay-incubated company, received CDSCO approval for NexCAR19
(Actalycabtagene autoleucel), the first humanized CD19-targeted CAR-T cell therapy product in India for
relapsed/refractory B-cell lymphomas and leukemia.
 Cost and Accessibility: NexCAR19 is offered at a fraction of the cost compared to similar international therapies,
enhancing its accessibility and affordability.
 Ongoing Research and Expansion:
o Numerous other CAR T cell therapies are under clinical trials for various types of cancers.
o Research is expanding to include CAR T cell therapies for solid tumors and "off-the-shelf" CAR T cell
therapies using donor T cells rather than those from the patients themselves.

LOKTAK LAKE
The Loktak Lake Authority of Manipur issued a notice to remove all floating houses and fishing structures on the lake.
This action has led to strong reactions from the local fishing community and homestay operators.

 Issues Highlighted:
o Regulatory Lack: Inadequate regulation has contributed to an uncontrolled increase in homestays and huts,
posing risks to the lake's environment.
o Environmental Impact: Growth in structures on the lake has adversely affected the local ecosystem.
o Fish Production Decline: The initiation of a major hydropower project in 1983 has significantly reduced
fish production and impacted traditional fisheries.
o Land and Water Quality: Loss of agricultural land due to inundation and increased sedimentation and
pollutants from untreated rivers.
 Loktak Lake Overview:
o Location: Situated about 40 kilometers south of Imphal, Manipur.
o Significance: It is the largest freshwater lake in Northeast India and a major tourist attraction in Manipur.
Note: Wular Lake in Jammu and Kashmir is the largest natural freshwater lake in India.
o Loktak Day is observed every year on the 15th of October at the periphery of the Loktak lake.
o Unique Features:
 Known for its floating circular swamps, locally called phumdis, composed of soil, organic matter, and
vegetation.
 Home to the world's only floating national park, Keibul Lamjao National Park.
o Biodiversity:
 The park is a refuge for the endangered brow-antlered deer (sangai), the state animal of Manipur.
 Hosts approximately 230 species of aquatic plants, 100 bird species, and 400 species of fauna including
barking deer, sambar, and Indian python.
o International Recognition:
 Designated as a wetland of international importance under the Ramsar Convention in 1990.
 Included in the Montreux Record in 1993 due to ecological changes.

 Keibul Lamjao National Park:

o Location: Situated on Loktak Lake.
o Distinction: The world's only floating national park.
o Ecology: Characterized by phumdis, which are crucial for the ecosystem's balance.
o Wildlife: Natural habitat for the brow-antlered deer, known locally as Sangai, which is also the state animal
of Manipur.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 84 of 348

 1

75TH ANNIVERSARY OF UNIVERSAL DECLARATION OF HUMAN RIGHTS

Origins and Approval:
 Date of Approval: The UDHR was approved by the UN General Assembly on December 10, 1948.
 Location: The declaration was approved in Paris.
 Drafting: Led by Eleanor Roosevelt; involved a committee from the Commission on Human Rights representing
diverse geographic regions.
 Participation: Over 50 UN member countries participated in the final drafting.
 Adoption: When the UDHR was adopted by the United Nations General Assembly on December 10, 1948, India
was one of the 48 countries that voted in favor of the declaration. Adopted with eight abstentions and no votes
against.
 Anniversary: Marked the 75th anniversary in 2023 amid global conflicts and challenges to human rights.
Content of the Declaration:
 Structure: Consists of a preamble and 30 articles outlining fundamental human rights and freedoms.
 Key Rights Included:
o Right to life, liberty, and security.
o Freedom from slavery and torture.
o Equality before the law and right to a fair trial.
o Right to seek asylum.
o Freedom of religion, opinion, expression, and peaceful assembly.
o Right to education.
Legal Recognition and Influence:
 Legal Status: Not a treaty and not legally binding in itself.
 Influence: Served as the foundation for over 70 human rights treaties globally and regionally.
 Cultural and Social Impact: Inspired movements for decolonization, anti-apartheid, gender equality, and
against discrimination.
 Legacy: Regarded as the universal standard for human rights.
 Criticism and Support: While some criticize its application and claim it is ignored or misused, it remains a
guiding document for global human rights efforts.

National Human Rights Commission (NHRC) of India

 Establishment:
o Year: Established in 1993.
o Legal Basis: Created under the Protection of Human Rights Act (PHRA), 1993.
 Purpose:
o The NHRC was formed to protect and promote human rights, defined by the act as "rights relating to life,
liberty, equality, and dignity of the individual guaranteed by the Constitution or embodied in the
International Covenants."
 Structure:
o Composition: Consists of a Chairperson, who is usually a retired Chief Justice of India, and other
members including a Judge of the Supreme Court, a Chief Justice of a High Court, and two persons having
knowledge or practical experience in matters relating to human rights.
o Tenure: Members hold office for a term of three years or until they reach the age of 70, whichever is
earlier.
o Justice Arun Kumar Mishra is the current chairman of the National Human Rights Commission (NHRC) of
India.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 85 of 348

 1

REPUBLIC DAY PARADE

Celebrated annually on January 26th to commemorate the enactment of the Constitution of India on this day in 1950.
Marks India’s transition to a sovereign republic.
 Historical Context:
o India gained independence on August 15, 1947, but continued to be governed under the Government of India
Act of 1935.
o The Constituent Assembly appointed a Drafting Committee on August 29, 1947, chaired by Dr. B.R.
Ambedkar, to draft a permanent constitution.
o The final draft of the Constitution was presented to the Assembly on November 4, 1948, and was adopted on
November 26, 1949.
o The Constitution was fully enacted on January 26, 1950, with a 21-gun salute and the unfurling of the Indian
National Flag by Dr. Rajendra Prasad.
o January 26 was chosen to honor the declaration of Purna Swaraj (complete self-rule) made on this day in
1930 following the Lahore Session of the Indian National Congress in December 1929.

 Republic Day Celebrations:

o Start of Celebrations: Begin on January 23rd, Parakram Divas, commemorating the birth anniversary of
Netaji Subhash Chandra Bose. This change was made in 2022.
o Eve of Republic Day: The President of India delivers a national address, outlining the country’s
accomplishments, challenges, and future outlook.
o Republic Day Morning:
 Prime Minister lays a wreath at the Amar Jawan Jyoti as a tribute to fallen soldiers.
 Celebrations officially commence with the President's arrival at Kartavya Path, flag hoisting, national
anthem, and a 21-gun salute.
 Republic Day Parade:
o Features marching contingents from the Indian Armed Forces and Paramilitary Forces, motorcycle stunts,
vibrant tableaux from states/UTs and government departments, folk dance performances, and a fly-past by
the Indian Air Force.
 Post-Parade Events:
o Awards Ceremony: On the evening of Republic Day, the President bestows Padma Awards and Gallantry
Awards.
o Beating Retreat Ceremony: Held on January 29, marking the official closure of Republic Day festivities.
75th Republic Day
 Themes for 2024:
o ‘Viksit Bharat’ (Developed India) and ‘Bharat – Loktantra ki Matruka’ (India – The Mother of Democracy).
o Themes reflect PM Narendra Modi's view of India as "the mother of democracy."
o These themes were highlighted in the tableaux from various states and government departments.
 Major Highlights:
o Women-Centric Parade: The parade was notably women-centric, featuring women marching contingents,
and will include:
 100 women artists playing traditional Indian musical instruments.
 An all-women Tri-Service Contingent.
 Women personnel in CAPF contingents.
o French Participation: Included a 33-member band and a 95-member marching contingent, as well as
French military aircraft participating in the fly-past.
o Farmers as Special Guests: Approximately 1,500 farmers invited as part of the government's Jan Bhagidari
initiative.

 Cultural and Commemorative Events:

o Textile Installation: 'Anant Sutra – The Endless Thread', showcasing nearly 1,900 sarees, displayed with QR
codes providing details on the textiles.
o National School Band Competition: Held to foster patriotism among school children.
o Vande Bharatam 3.0: A dance competition, with performances at the parade.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 86 of 348
 1

o Veer Gatha 3.0: An initiative to educate children about the valor of armed services, with 100 school students
attending the parade.
o Bharat Parv: Organized by the Ministry of Tourism, featuring tableaux, cultural performances, and a food
court at the Red Fort.
o Parakram Diwas: Commemorates the life of Netaji Subhash Chandra Bose with various performances at the
Red Fort.

 Beating Retreat Ceremony:

o Date: January 29, 2024.
o Location: Vijay Chowk.
o Features bands from the Indian Armed Forces and CAPFs playing Indian tunes.
o Includes an online competition for public participation in playing or singing Indian tunes.

 Chief Guest:
o Guest of Honor: President Emmanuel Macron of France.
o Historical Context: This marks the sixth occasion a French leader has been the chief guest at India’s
Republic Day, highlighting the ongoing diplomatic ties between India and France.
o The Chief Guest of the first Republic Day Parade in 1950 was President Sukarno of Indonesia.

BHARAT RATNA AND OTHER PADMA AWARDS 2024

Instituted: Both the Bharat Ratna and Padma Awards were instituted in 1954 by the Government of India. Open to
all persons regardless of race, occupation, position, or sex.

 Bharat Ratna:
o Significance: The highest civilian award in India, recognizing exceptional service of the highest order in any
field of human endeavor.
o Selection Process: Recommendations made by the Prime Minister to the President of India. No formal
recommendations are required.
o Limitation: Limited to a maximum of three awardees in a particular year.
o Total Awardees: 53 individuals have been awarded till date.
o 2024 Awardees: Karpoori Thakur, M.S. Swaminathan, P.V. Narasimha Rao, Lal Krishna Advani, and
Chaudhary Charan Singh.
o Design: The medal was originally a peepal leaf-shaped design, made of bronze. In 1957, the design was
changed to a circular medallion with the sun's image on the obverse side and the state emblem and motto
on the reverse
o Inscription: The sunburst design has "Bharat Ratna" inscribed in Devanagari script.
o First Recipients: The first-ever recipients of the Bharat Ratna in 1954 were C. Rajagopalachari, Sarvepalli
Radhakrishnan, and C.V. Raman.
o Posthumous Awards: The 1954 statutes did not allow posthumous awards, but this was changed in January
1966. Lal Bahadur Shastri was the first individual to be awarded the Bharat Ratna posthumously in 1966.
o Youngest Recipient: Sachin Tendulkar is the youngest recipient of the Bharat Ratna, India's highest civilian
honor, at the age of 40 when he received it in 2014. Tendulkar was also the first sportsperson to receive the
award.
o Non-Citizen Recipients: Khan Abdul Ghaffar Khan (1987) from Pakistan and Nelson Mandela (1990) from
South Africa were awarded the Bharat Ratna as non-citizens of India.

 Notable Contributions of 2024 Bharat Ratna Awardees:

Karpoori Thakur:
o Positions Held: Served as the Chief Minister of Bihar twice, from 1970-71 and 1977-79.
o Pioneering Work in Social Justice: Known as "Jan Nayak" (People's Leader), Thakur was a pioneer in
implementing reservation policies for the Other Backward Classes (OBCs), Economically Backward Classes
(EBCs), and women within the state of Bihar.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 87 of 348

 1

o 1978 Reservation Model: During his tenure, Thakur implemented a groundbreaking model of reservations,
allocating 26% of government jobs and educational opportunities to OBCs and EBCs, including specific
quotas for women and economically disadvantaged groups among the upper castes.
o Advocacy: Focused on the rights of marginalized communities, promoting policies for social justice and
inclusive development.

Mankombu Sambasivan (MS) Swaminathan:

o Green Revolution: Dubbed the ‘Father of India’s Green Revolution,’ he played a crucial role in transforming
Indian agriculture through the development of high-yielding varieties of wheat and rice in collaboration with
Norman Borlaug.
o Sustainable Agriculture: Advocated for sustainable farming practices and fair pricing for farmers, heading
the National Commission of Farmers.
o Legislative Contributions: Instrumental in the development of the Protection of Plant Varieties and
Farmers' Right Act, 2001, which aimed at protecting farmers' rights and plant varieties.
o Awards and Honors: Received numerous awards including the Shanti Swarup Bhatnagar Award (1961), the
Ramon Magsaysay Award (1971), and the Albert Einstein World Science Award (1986). He has also been
honored with several Padma Awards: Padma Shri (1967), Padma Bhushan (1972), and Padma Vibhushan
(1989).

Pamulaparthi Venkata (P. V.) Narasimha Rao:

o Prime Ministerial Tenure: Served as the 9th Prime Minister of India from 1991 to 1996, during a pivotal
period of economic liberalization.
o Economic Reforms: Spearheaded major economic reforms that liberalized the Indian economy, reducing
trade barriers, encouraging foreign investment, and initiating privatization of several sectors.
o Foreign Policy: Reset India’s foreign policy by improving relations with the West, particularly the United
States, and establishing diplomatic relations with Israel.
o Nuclear Policy: Maintained India’s nuclear policy independence amidst global pressure to sign the Nuclear
Non-Proliferation Treaty.
o Cultural Contributions: Authored 'SahasraPhan', a Hindi translation of the famous Telugu novel ‘Veyi
Padagalu’.

Lal Krishna Advani:

o Political Leadership: Served as the Deputy Prime Minister of India from 1999 to 2004 and was a
prominent leader of the Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP).
o Role in BJP: Known for his intellectual leadership and principled politics, Advani was instrumental in
shaping the ideological and organizational structure of the BJP.
o Contribution to National Security and Governance: Played a significant role in promoting strong defense
policies and governance models focused on development and integrity.

Chaudhary Charan Singh:

o Advocacy for Farmers: As the Chief Minister of Uttar Pradesh and later as the 5th Prime Minister of India,
he was a staunch advocate for the rights and welfare of farmers.
o Agricultural Reforms: Led significant reforms in agriculture, including the abolition of the zamindari
system in UP in 1952 and promoting policies to improve the livelihoods of the peasantry.
o Political Legacy: Known for his dedication to the principles of democracy, secularism, and social justice,
Singh’s policies and leadership style were deeply influenced by Gandhian philosophy.

 Padma Awards:
o Categories: Originally named Padma Vibhushan with three classes—Pahela Varg, Dusra Varg, and Tisra
Varg—renamed in 1955 to Padma Vibhushan, Padma Bhushan, and Padma Shri.
o Relevance: Acknowledges distinguished contributions in various fields including arts, education, industry,
literature, science, sports, medicine, social service, and public affairs.
o Eligibility: All persons without distinction of race, occupation, position or sex are eligible for these Awards.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 88 of 348

 1

o Padma Awards Committee: The Awards are conferred on the recommendations made by the Padma
Awards Committee, which is constituted by the Prime Minister every year.
o Awarded by President: The awards are presented by the President of India usually in March/April every
year.

Overview of the 2024 Padma Awards:

o Total Awards: The President approved the conferment of 132 Padma awards.
o Award Breakdown: Includes 5 Padma Vibhushan, 17 Padma Bhushan, and 110 Padma Shri awards.
o Duo Cases: Includes two duo cases, where each duo is counted as one award.
 Categories of Awardees:
o Women Awardees: 30 of the recipients are women.
o International Awardees: 8 awards were given to Foreigners/NRI/PIO/OCI.
o Posthumous Awardees: 9 awards were conferred posthumously.
 Notable Recipients:
o Padma Vibhushan:
 Bindeshwar Pathak: Founder of Sulabh International, known for his work in sanitation and social reform.
 Padma Subrahmanyam: Renowned Bharatanatyam dancer and scholar.
o Other Distinguished Awardees:
 M. Venkaiah Naidu: Former Vice-President of India.
 Mithun Chakraborty: Actor and politician.
 Usha Uthup: Renowned singer known for her distinctive voice and style.
 Rohan Bopanna: Professional tennis player recognized for his contributions to the sport.

FOREIGN CONTRIBUTION REGULATION ACT

The Centre for Policy Research (CPR), a prominent Indian think tank focused on public policy, experienced the
cancellation of its FCRA license in January 2024. This event was the latest in a series of governmental measures
following IT raids on the organization in September 2022.

Background and Purpose of FCRA:

 Enactment Year: Originally enacted in 1976 during the Emergency period.
 Purpose: To regulate foreign donations to individuals and organizations, ensuring operations align with the
values of a sovereign democratic republic.
 Concern: Enacted due to concerns about foreign interference in India's internal affairs.

Amendments to FCRA:
 2010 Amendment: Aimed to consolidate laws regulating the acceptance and utilization of foreign contributions
and prohibit their use for activities detrimental to national interest.
 2020 Amendment: Introduced several restrictions including:
o Prohibiting the transfer of foreign contributions to any other person or organization.
o Reducing the permissible limit for administrative expenses from foreign contributions from 50% to 20%.
o Requirements for receiving foreign donations only in an "FCRA account" at a specified SBI branch in New
Delhi.
o Public servants are barred from accepting foreign donations.

FCRA Registration:
 Necessity: Essential for receiving foreign donations in India.
 Eligibility: Open to individuals or associations engaged in cultural, economic, educational, religious, or social
programs.
 Bank Account Requirement: Applicants must open a bank account at a designated branch of the State Bank of
India in New Delhi to receive foreign funds.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 89 of 348

 1

Under FCRA:
 Restricted Activities: Applicants should not engage in activities including religious conversion, activities
inducing communal tension, or sedition.
 Restrictions on Recipients: The Act prohibits certain individuals and organizations (e.g., candidates,
journalists, judges, government servants, politicians, and political organizations) from receiving foreign funds.

Validity and Renewal of FCRA Registration:

 Validity: Registration is valid for five years.
 Renewal: NGOs must apply for renewal within six months of the registration's expiry.
 Cancellation: The government can cancel registration for various violations or inactivity in the registered field
for two consecutive years. Following cancellation, re-registration is barred for three years.

FCRA 2022 Rules Update:

 Compoundable Offences: Increased the number of compoundable offences from 7 to 12.
 Contribution Limits: Raised the limit for contributions from relatives abroad that do not require government
intimation from Rs 1 lakh to Rs 10 lakh.
 Bank Account Intimations: Extended the time limit for intimating the opening of bank accounts.

SHIVSENA CASE AND ANTI DEFECTION LAW

Overview of the Shiv Sena Case:
The case arose from a split within the Shiv Sena party in Maharashtra in June 2022. Involved two factions, one led by
Eknath Shinde and the other by Uddhav Thackeray.

Legal Actions:
 Shinde faction challenged disqualification notices from the Deputy Speaker.
 Thackeray faction challenged the Maharashtra Governor's decision to call for a trust vote and the subsequent
swearing-in of Shinde as Chief Minister.
 Challenges were also made against the election of a new Speaker.

Key Legal Questions in the Shiv Sena Case:

 Role and Neutrality of the Speaker: Questioned in handling disqualification petitions and intra-party disputes.
 Definition of ‘Political Party’: Explored the interpretation under the Tenth Schedule of the Constitution
concerning political vs. legislative party distinctions.
 Anti-Defection Law: Examined its application in cases of political party splits and definition of defection.
 Freedom of Speech vs. Anti-Defection Laws: Discussed potential conflicts between anti-defection laws and the
freedom of speech of legislators.
 Governor’s Role in Floor Tests: Assessed the constitutional validity of the Governor's actions in demanding a
floor test and accepting the resignation of a Chief Minister.
Supreme Court's Judgments on Key Legal Questions:
 Disqualification by Speaker: Confirmed that disqualification issues should be decided by the Speaker following
established legal procedures.
 Political Party Definition: Emphasized that a political party must be registered with the Election Commission
and recognized based on its whip and leader.
 Whip Appointment: Highlighted the necessity for the Speaker to conduct an independent inquiry to verify the
political party’s decision regarding whip appointments.
 Governor's Role: Stated that the Governor can only call for a floor test if there is objective material supporting
the decision.

Overview of Anti-Defection Law:

 Introduction: Enacted as the Tenth Schedule of the Indian Constitution through the 52nd Amendment Act, 1985.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 90 of 348

 1

 Purpose: To curb political defection by MPs or MLAs to enhance the stability of governments formed by elected
legislatures.

Key Features of the Law:

 Disqualification Criteria:
o Elected members may be disqualified for defecting to another party.
o 'Defection' includes voluntarily giving up membership of their party or violating the party's directives on
voting in the legislature without prior permission.
o Independently elected members are disqualified if they join a political party.
o Nominated members who join a party six months after appointment are also subject to disqualification.
 Merger Clause:
o Initially, a one-third faction of a party could merge with another party without facing disqualification.
o Post the 91st Constitutional Amendment Act, 2003, this threshold was raised to two-thirds.

Provisions on Merger:
 Merger Validity: A merger is considered valid only if two-thirds of the members of a party agree to the merger.
 Impact of Merger: Members who are part of the valid merger are not subject to disqualification under the Anti-
Defection Law.

Role of the Speaker/Chairman:

 Authority: The Speaker of the Lok Sabha or the Chairman of the Rajya Sabha (or state legislative
assemblies/councils) has the authority to decide on questions of disqualification under the anti-defection law.
 Judicial Review: Decisions made by the Speaker or Chairman are subject to judicial review.

RECENT ISRAEL PALESTINE CONFLICT AND ABRAHAM ACCORD

 The Palestinian militant group Hamas launched an unprecedented assault on Israel on 7 October, 2023 with
hundreds of gunmen infiltrating communities near the Gaza Strip.
 Meanwhile, Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu stated that Israel had not started the ongoing conflict
but was resolved to end it decisively by launching a full scale war.

Late 19th and Early 20th Century:

 Zionist Movement Emergence: Late 1800s, advocating for a Jewish homeland in historic Palestine.
 Balfour Declaration (1917): British government support for a "national home for the Jewish people" in
Palestine.

1947-1949: Partition and First Arab-Israeli War:

 1947: UN partition plan approved, leading to the creation of Israel in 1948.
 1948-1949: First Arab-Israeli War results in the establishment of Israel and the displacement of many
Palestinian Arabs.
 British Withdrawal (1948): Britain withdrew from Palestine, leaving resolution of Jewish and Arab claims to
the United Nations.
1950s-1960s: Palestinian Nationalism and Conflicts:
 1964: Formation of the Palestine Liberation Organization (PLO).
 1967: Six-Day War, Israel captured the Golan Heights from Syria, the West Bank and East Jerusalem from Jordan,
and the Sinai Peninsula and Gaza Strip from Egypt.

1970s-1990s: Peace Efforts and Conflicts:

 1975: The UN granted observer status to the PLO and recognized the Palestinian right to self-determination.
 1978: Camp David Accords, Israel-Egypt peace treaty. Aimed to lay the groundwork for peace in the Middle East
and resolve the "Palestinian problem", which remained largely unfulfilled.
 1987-1993: First Intifada, Palestinian uprising in the occupied territories.
 1993: Oslo Accords, initiating peace negotiations and limited Palestinian self-rule.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 91 of 348

 1

2000s-2010s: Peace Efforts and Repeated Conflicts:

 2000-2005: Second Intifada, marked by significant violence.
 2005: Israel's unilateral withdrawal from the Gaza Strip, continues to control borders.
 2006: Hamas wins Palestinian legislative elections.
 2007: Hamas takes control of the Gaza Strip after conflicts with Fatah.
 2008-2009: Gaza War (Operation Cast Lead).
 2014: Gaza War (Operation Protective Edge).
 Ongoing: Clashes, settlement expansions, and intermittent peace negotiations.

2020s: Continuing Tensions and Conflict:

 2021: Escalation of violence in May, including clashes in East Jerusalem and military conflict between Israel and
Hamas in Gaza.

Emergence of Hamas:
 1987: Hamas was founded as an offshoot of Egypt's Muslim Brotherhood, with an agenda to pursue its goals
through violent jihad.
 Recognition: Classified as a terrorist organization by the U.S. government.
 Political Success: In 2006, Hamas won the legislative elections of the Palestinian Authority.
 Control Over Gaza: By 2007, Hamas had ejected Fatah from Gaza, leading to a geographic split in the Palestinian
movement.

Key Historical Events:

 First Intifada (1987): Tensions in the West Bank and Gaza escalated, resulting in an uprising against Israeli
control that expanded into a small-scale conflict between Palestinian militants and the Israeli army.

Oslo Accords:
 1993: Israel and the Palestine Liberation Organization (PLO) agreed under the Oslo Accords to recognize
each other and renounce violence. This accord led to the creation of the Palestinian Authority, granting it
limited autonomy in the Gaza Strip and parts of the West Bank.
 2005: Israel unilaterally withdrew from Gaza, removing Jewish settlements but maintaining control over the
territory's borders.

UN Involvement:
 2012: The United Nations upgraded the Palestinian representation to "non-member observer state."

Territorial Disputes with Neighboring Countries:

 West Bank: Located between Israel and Jordan with Ramallah as the administrative capital under Palestinian
control. Israel captured it during the 1967 war and has since established several settlements.
 Gaza Strip: Situated between Israel and Egypt. Israel occupied the strip after the 1967 war, handed over control
of Gaza City and most of the territory during the Oslo Accords but withdrew settlements in 2005. Israel continues
to control international access to Gaza.
 Golan Heights: A strategic plateau captured by Israel from Syria in the 1967 war, effectively annexed in 1981.
The USA officially recognized it as part of Israel in 2019.

India's Position:
 Initial Opposition: India was among the few countries that opposed the UN’s partition plan for Palestine in
1947, drawing parallels to its own partition experience.
 Recognition of Israel: India formally recognized Israel in 1950.
 Support for Palestinian Representation: India was the first non-Arab country to recognize the Palestine
Liberation Organisation (PLO) as the sole representative of the Palestinians and recognized Palestine's
statehood in 1988.

Evolution of India’s Policy:

 Early Policy: For the first four decades post-independence, India’s policy was strongly pro-Palestine.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 92 of 348

 1

 Dehyphenation of Policy:
o Transitioned from a pro-Palestine stance to a more balanced approach between Palestine and Israel,
reflecting India’s friendly relations with Israel that began in the late 20th century.
o In recent years, India's policy has shifted to be perceived as more pro-Israel.

Current Policy Stand:

 Two-State Solution: India advocates for a two-state solution to the Israel-Palestine conflict, supporting the right
to self-determination for both nations in a peaceful manner.

Abharam Accords
Overview of Abraham Accords:
 Introduction: The Abraham Accords are a series of historic peace agreements reached in 2020 aimed at
normalizing relations between Israel and several Arab nations.
 Significance: These accords represent a significant shift in the geopolitical landscape of the Middle East,
fostering new diplomatic and economic ties.

Reason Behind the Name:

 Abraham Accord: Named after Abraham, recognized as the "Father of Many Nations" in Judaism, Christianity,
and Islam, symbolizing the shared spiritual heritage and potential for cooperation among the involved parties.

Parties Involved:
 Participants: The agreements involve Israel and several Arab states, including the United Arab Emirates (UAE),
Bahrain, Sudan, and Morocco.
 Facilitation: These accords were facilitated by the U.S. administration led by President Donald Trump,
showcasing a collaborative effort to enhance regional peace.

Details of the Abraham Accords:

 Diplomatic Initiatives: Establishment of embassies and ambassadorial exchanges between Israel and the Arab
states.
 Collaboration Areas: Promote cooperation across various sectors such as tourism, trade, healthcare, and
security.
 Cultural and Religious Access: Facilitates visits by Muslims worldwide to historically significant sites in Israel,
including peaceful prayer at Jerusalem’s Al-Aqsa Mosque.

Advancements Since the Abraham Accords:

 Diplomatic Establishments: 2021: Israeli embassy opened in Abu Dhabi; UAE opened its embassy in Tel Aviv.
 Economic Agreements and Trade:
o Trade Volume: Trade between the UAE and Israel reached approximately 900 million USD.
o Free Trade Agreement (2022): Agreement signed to establish a free trade area, covering government
procurement and Intellectual Property Rights (IPR).
 Water and Energy Cooperation:
o Three-way Water Accord: Agreement among Israel, UAE, and Jordan for Israel to supply water, involving
the construction of a new desalination plant or water delivery.
o Prosperity Green & Blue Agreement: Initiative to build a solar field in Jordan to supply 600 megawatts of
electricity to Israel.
 Tourism and Employment:
o Tourism: Following the establishment of direct flights, the UAE hosted over 67,000 Israeli tourists in the
first month after the Accords.
o Employment: Due to economic challenges in Israel, the UAE emerged as a popular destination for Israeli job
seekers.
Shortcomings of the Abraham Accords:
 Impact on Israeli-Palestinian Relations:

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 93 of 348

 1

o Limited Progress: The Accords have not produced significant improvements in the Israeli-Palestinian
situation, contrary to some of the initial aspirations.
 Regional Participation:
o Saudi Arabia: Continues to adhere to the Arab Peace Initiative, hence not part of the Abraham Accords.
o Oman and Qatar: Declined to formalize their ties within the framework of the Abraham Accords, indicating
limited regional consensus.

INDIA'S FOREIGN POLICY - NEHRU AND SHASTRI ERA

Objectives of India’s Foreign Policy:
 National Security: Post-independence, safeguarding India's territorial integrity, sovereignty, and national
interests became the primary focus of India's foreign relations.
 Maintaining Regional Stability: A key goal was fostering peace, stability, and prosperity in India's immediate
neighborhood and the broader region through diplomatic engagement, dialogue, and cooperation with
neighboring countries.
 Economic Development: Promoting economic growth by enhancing trade, technological exchanges, and
addressing socio-economic challenges through foreign relations is a critical objective.
 Global Peace: India is committed to promoting global peace, security, and disarmament through diplomacy,
dialogue, and active participation in international peacekeeping initiatives.
 Promotion of India’s Rich Heritage: India's foreign policy also focuses on promoting its cultural heritage,
diversity, and values to enhance its global influence and appeal.
 Protection of Indian Diaspora: With the largest diaspora globally, India seeks to protect the interests and well-
being of its diaspora communities abroad, while promoting their cultural, economic, and social ties with India.

Nehruvian Era (1947-1964):

 Independence and Partition: Post-independence, India was partitioned into two nations: India and Pakistan.
This led to large-scale migration of Hindus and Muslims across the border, resulting in communal violence and
tensions between the two countries.
 The Panchsheel (Five Principles): Nehru introduced the Panchsheel principles to guide international relations,
particularly during the decolonization period and the Cold War. The principles were:
 Mutual respect for sovereignty and territorial integrity.
 Mutual non-aggression.
 Mutual non-interference in domestic affairs.
 Equality and mutual benefit.
 Peaceful coexistence.
 United Nations Membership: India became a founding member of the United Nations in 1945 and actively
contributed, particularly in areas of decolonization and disarmament.
 Non-Aligned Movement (NAM): Nehru played a crucial role in establishing the NAM (founded in 1961), which
sought to foster cooperation among nations not aligned with any major power bloc during the Cold War.
 Sino-Indian War (1962): India fought a brief border war with China over disputed Himalayan territories,
leading to a shift in India's focus towards military modernization and strengthening strategic alliances.
 Relations with the Soviet Union: India built strong political and economic relations with the Soviet Union
during Nehru’s tenure. The Soviet Union became a key source of foreign aid and military assistance for India.

Shastri’s Era (1964-1966):

 Indo-Pakistan War of 1965: The war between India and Pakistan occurred due to long-standing tensions over
the disputed Kashmir region.
 Tashkent Declaration (1966): Following the 1965 war, the leaders of India and Pakistan met in Tashkent (then
part of the USSR, now in Uzbekistan) and signed the Tashkent Declaration, which called for an end to hostilities
and the restoration of diplomatic relations.
 India-Soviet Union Relations: The Soviet Union continued to be a significant source of foreign aid and military
assistance for India during Shastri’s tenure.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 94 of 348

 1

 Public Law 480 (PL 480) Program: India received food aid from the United States under the PL 480 program,
which provided concessional food assistance to countries in need during the 1960s.

CITIZENSHIP AMENDMENT ACT AND NRC

Citizenship Amendment Act (CAA), 2019:
 Amendment to Citizenship Act, 1955: The CAA seeks to amend the Citizenship Act, 1955 to provide citizenship
based on religion.
 An illegal immigrant enters India without valid travel documents or stays beyond the permitted time, potentially
facing prosecution, deportation, or imprisonment.
 Eligibility: It grants citizenship to six non-Muslim communities (Hindus, Sikhs, Buddhists, Jains, Parsis, and
Christians) from Pakistan, Afghanistan, and Bangladesh who entered India on or before 31st December 2014.
 Exemption from Criminal Cases: These communities are exempt from criminal proceedings under the
Foreigners Act, 1946, and the Passport Act, 1920, which impose penalties for illegal entry or overstaying.

Rules Concerning the CAA:

 Historical Steps: Previous measures to address refugee issues include amendments to the Citizenship Rules in
2004 and notifications in 2014, 2015, 2016, and 2018.
 CAA Rules (2024): Applications for citizenship under CAA must be made under Section 6B of the Citizenship
Act, 1955. Applicants must provide proof of their country of origin, religion, entry date into India, and knowledge
of an Indian language.
 Proof of Origin: A variety of documents, such as birth or educational certificates, identity documents, land
records, or previous citizenship documents, can be used to prove country of origin.
 Proof of Entry: Applicants can submit any of 20 different documents as proof of entry into India, including visas,
residential permits, Aadhaar cards, ration cards, government letters, and birth certificates.
 Naturalisation: Under The Citizenship Act, 1955, one of the requirements for citizenship by naturalization is
that the applicant must have resided in India during the last 12 months, as well as for 11 of the previous 14
years.
 The amendment relaxes the second requirement from 11 years to 5 years as a specific condition for applicants
belonging to these six religions, and the aforementioned three countries.

Exceptions:
 The provisions of the Act will not apply to the tribal areas of Assam, Meghalaya, Mizoram or Tripura as
included in the Sixth Schedule to the Constitution and States of Arunachal Pradesh, Mizoram. Manipur and
Nagaland that are protected by the Inner Line Permit (ILP).
 This means that those ―illegal migrants who will be deemed Indian citizens through the Act will not be able to
settle down in the exempted areas.

Mechanism for Implementation of CAA:

 Responsible Agencies: The Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA) has tasked the Postal Department and Census
officials with processing citizenship applications. Central security agencies like the Intelligence Bureau (IB) will
conduct background checks.
 Empowered Committees: Final decisions on citizenship applications will be made by empowered committees
led by the Director (Census Operations) in each state, with members from various departments such as the IB,
PostMaster General, State/National Informatics Centre, and State government.
 District-Level Committees (DLC): Headed by the Superintendent of the Postal Department, these committees
will review applications, with a representative from the District Collector's office as an invitee.
 Processing Applications: The DLC will receive and review applications, while the Empowered Committee will
make final decisions, bypassing state-level control.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 95 of 348

 1

Key Concerns:
 Exclusionary Nature: The CAA is viewed as exclusionary because it grants citizenship to undocumented
migrants from Afghanistan, Bangladesh, and Pakistan only if they belong to six non-Muslim religious
communities (Hindu, Sikh, Buddhist, Jain, Parsi, Christian). This exclusion of Muslims raises concerns about
religious discrimination.
 Constitutional Challenge:
 The CAA faces challenges under Article 14 of the Indian Constitution, which guarantees equality before the law
and prohibits discrimination based on religion. Granting citizenship based on religion is viewed as
discriminatory and inconsistent with this constitutional guarantee.
 Impact on Assam Accord: In Assam, the CAA raised concerns about its compatibility with the Assam Accord
(1985), which established criteria for determining citizenship, including specific cut-off dates for residency.
 However, In a majority verdict of 4:1, the Supreme Court upheld the constitutional validity of Section 6A which
grants Indian citizenship to immigrants who came to Assam between January 1, 1966 and March 25, 1971.

National Register of Citizens (NRC):

 Definition: The NRC is a register containing the names of genuine Indian citizens residing in the country. Its
purpose is to identify and deport illegal immigrants as mandated by the Citizenship Act of 1955, the Foreigners
Act of 1946, and the Passport (Entry into India) Act, 1920.
 Historical Background: The only nationwide NRC was created in 1951 after the Census. At present, Assam is
the only state with an updated NRC, monitored by the Supreme Court in 2014.
 Nodal Agency: The Registrar General and Census Commissioner is responsible for the NRC. There is
increasing demand for nationwide implementation of the NRC.

Need for NRC:

 Identification of Illegal Immigrants: The NRC helps identify and document legal citizens and aims to identify
and deport illegal immigrants. The Ministry of Home Affairs cites that over 4.5 lakh people migrated from East
Pakistan without travel documents between 1964-65.
 National Security: The NRC can help protect national security by identifying and removing illegal immigrants,
who may pose security threats. Examples include violence outbreaks in states like Manipur and Assam due to
illegal immigration.
 Indigenous Population Concerns: In states like Assam, there are concerns about the displacement of
indigenous communities due to illegal immigration. The NRC is seen as a way to protect the rights of these
communities.
 Fake Vote Bank: Illegal immigrants, particularly in Assam, West Bengal, and Uttar Pradesh, are seen as forming
vote banks for certain political parties, living under false identities.

NRC in Assam:
 Historical Context: Large-scale migration to Assam from Bangladesh (formerly East Pakistan) after India's
independence led to demographic and cultural tensions in the state.
 Aim: The NRC aims to identify genuine citizens residing in Assam as of March 24, 1971, to address concerns
about illegal immigration.
 Background:
o Undocumented Migration: Assam experienced undocumented migration, with estimates suggesting
around six million migrants out of a population of 26 million.
o Assam Agitation and AASU: In 1978, the All Assam Students Union (AASU) began a movement demanding
the detection and deportation of illegal immigrants, leading to the Assam Agitation.
o Assam Accord (1985): Signed between Prime Minister Rajiv Gandhi and Assam Movement leaders, the
Accord promised to identify illegal immigrants who arrived after March 24, 1971.
o ULFA: The United Liberation Front of Assam (ULFA), formed in 1979, initially targeted Bangladeshi
immigrants, though it later shifted its stance.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 96 of 348

 1

 NRC Process:
o Supreme Court Order: The NRC process in Assam began in 2013 following an order from the Supreme
Court.
o Criteria: The NRC was updated to include names of persons (or descendants) who were listed in the 1951
NRC, appeared on Electoral Rolls up to March 24, 1971, or had any other admissible document proving their
presence in India before this date.
o Final NRC (2019): On August 31, 2019, the updated NRC was released, with over 1.9 million applicants not
included in the list.
o Appeals: Residents not on the NRC list can file appeals with Foreigners Tribunals, the High Court, and the
Supreme Court.

Supreme Court’s Ruling on Section 6A of the Citizenship Act (IN RE : SECTION 6A OF THE CITIZENSHIP ACT
1955)
In a majority verdict of 4:1, the Supreme Court upheld the constitutional validity of Section 6A which grants Indian
citizenship to immigrants who came to Assam between January 1, 1966 and March 25, 1971. The Constitution Bench,
led by Chief Justice of India D.Y. Chandrachud, also upheld the cut-off date of March 25, 1971, for entry into Assam
and granting citizenship as correct.
 Justice Surya Kant to prepare the judgement of the Court on behalf of the majority including D.Y. Chandrachud CJI,
Surya Kant J, M.M. Sundresh J, and Manoj Misra J, while the dissenting opinion was laid down by J.B. Pardiwala J.

 Majority Opinion:
o Constitutional Validity: The court upheld the validity of Section 6A of the Citizenship Act, stating that it
does not violate Articles 6 and 7 of the Constitution, which set 26th January 1950 as the cut-off for granting
citizenship to migrants from East and West Pakistan. Section 6A operates separately, with a later cut-off date.
o Justification for 1971 Cut-off Date: The court justified the 25th March 1971 cut-off date, noting that the
Pakistani Army began Operation Searchlight on 26th March 1971 to suppress the Bangladeshi
nationalist movement in East Pakistan.
o Assamese Culture and Identity: The petitioners failed to prove that Section 6A compromises the ability of
the Assamese people to protect their cultural identity. The court emphasized that constitutional and legal
provisions already protect Assam’s cultural and linguistic interests.
o Parliament’s Power: Section 6A was enacted under Parliament’s powers derived from Article 246 and
Entry 17 of the Union List, which governs citizenship, naturalization, and aliens. The law does not violate
Article 14 (Right to Equality), as Assam's migration issue is distinct from the rest of India.
o Migration Burden: The court acknowledged that the migration from Bangladesh has significantly impacted
Assam, but noted that a nation can accommodate immigrants while focusing on sustainable development
and equitable resource distribution.
o Failure to Address Immigration: The court stressed that the issue is not solely due to Section 6A but also
the government’s failure to detect and deport post-1971 immigrants from Bangladesh in a timely manner.
o Criticism of Current Systems: The existing mechanisms and tribunals for identifying illegal immigrants in
Assam were found to be inadequate for enforcing Section 6A and related laws like the Immigrants (Expulsion
from Assam) Act, 1950, and the Foreigners Act, 1946.
o Judicial Oversight Required: The court emphasized that the implementation of immigration and
citizenship laws requires judicial supervision and cannot be left to the discretion of authorities. It asked the
Chief Justice of India to form a Bench to oversee the implementation of these laws in Assam.

 Dissenting Opinion:
o Unconstitutionality of Section 6A: The dissenting judge, J.B. Pardiwala J. declared Section 6A
unconstitutional, rejecting concerns that it would infringe upon the cultural and linguistic rights of different
ethnic groups.
o Development and Immigration: The dissent asserted that immigration and sustainable development can
coexist and accepted the petitioners' argument that immigration impacts local rights to sustainable
development. However, they warned that this reasoning could restrict inter-State movement within India.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 97 of 348

 1

GAGANYAAN MISSION
Indian Human Spaceflight Program (IHSP) and Gaganyaan Mission:
 Initiation of IHSP: The Indian Human Spaceflight Program (IHSP) was envisioned in 2007. ISRO began research
and development on various critical technologies required for the mission.
 Budget and Announcement: On August 15, 2018, during India’s 72nd Independence Day celebrations, the
Prime Minister announced a manned mission to space. A budget of INR 10,000 crore was allocated for this
mission.
 Delays: The mission launch was delayed due to the Covid-19 pandemic, and it is now expected to launch in 2025.

Gaganyaan Mission Overview:

 Mission Objective: The Gaganyaan Mission aims to send a three-member crew on a 3-day mission to a Low Earth
Orbit (LEO) of 400 km and bring them safely back to Earth.
 Mission Status: The Government of India has approved two unmanned missions and one manned mission under
this program. The first manned spaceflight is expected in 2024.
 International Significance: Successful completion of this mission will place India among the elite nations (US,
Russia, China) with human space flight capability.
Gaganyaan Mission Objectives:
 Immediate Aim: To demonstrate indigenous capability in human space flight.
 Long-Term Goal: To lay the foundation for future sustained human space exploration programs by India.
Technologies Required for the Gaganyaan Mission:
 ISRO needs to develop several new technologies to ensure crew safety, including:
o Human-rated launch vehicle.
o Habitable orbital module.
o Crew escape system.
o Life support system.

Human-Rated LVM3:
 Launching Vehicle: A modified version of ISRO’s LVM3 (formerly GSLV Mk III) is used for the Gaganyaan mission.
 Configuration: Reconfigured to safely transport humans into orbit, it consists of a three-stage propulsion
system:
1. Solid stage.
2. Liquid stage.
3. Cryogenic stage.
 Crew Escape System (CES): Integrated for crew safety during launch.
 Orbital Module: Designed for crew habitation and mission operations.

Orbital Module (OM):

 Purpose: Will orbit Earth and comprises two parts:
1. Crew Module (CM).
2. Service Module (SM).
 Avionics: Equipped with advanced avionics systems with adequate redundancy for safety.

Crew Module (CM):

 Habitable Space: Provides an Earth-like environment for crew members with necessary control systems for
communication, navigation, and avionics.
 Structure: Built with double-walled rigid construction featuring:
o A pressurized metallic inner structure.
o An unpressurized external structure with a Thermal Protection System (TPS).
 Features: Includes life support systems, crew interfaces, avionics, and deceleration systems. It is designed for
safe re-entry into Earth’s atmosphere and safe landing.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 98 of 348

 1

Service Module (SM):

 Function: Provides essential support to the Crew Module while in orbit.
 Structure: Unpressurized, containing the propulsion system, thermal systems, power systems, avionics, and
deployment mechanisms.

Crew Escape System (CES):

 Purpose: Ensures the safety of astronauts by allowing them to abort the mission and escape the spacecraft in
case of a mid-flight emergency.
 Flight Test Vehicle Abort Mission-1 (TV-D1):
o This is the first of two missions to test the performance and safety mechanisms of the CES.
o It verifies the separation of the crew module from the rocket in case of an emergency.
o The mission demonstrates the functioning of the abort and escape systems to ensure crew safety.

Life Support System:

 Purpose: Provides an Earth-like environment for the crew in space.
 Emergency Escape and Crew Management: Includes emergency escape provisions, as well as training,
recovery, and rehabilitation of crew members.

Training Programmes for Gaganyaan Mission Crew:

 Location: Astronaut Training Facility in Bengaluru.
 Training Modules:
o Classroom training, Physical fitness training, Simulator training, and Flight suit training.
o Covers microgravity familiarization via Parabolic Flights, aero-medical training, survival training, and
crew simulators.

Different Phases of the Gaganyaan Mission:

 Two Unmanned Missions: Planned for technology demonstration, safety verification, and reliability assessment
before the manned mission.

Testing Phase:
 Integrated Air Drop Test (IADT):
o Validates the deceleration system (parachutes and pyros) using an Indian Air Force (IAF) helicopter.
 Pad Abort Test (PAT):
o Crew module is dropped from a helicopter to assess the impact at different heights and velocities.
 Test Vehicle (TV) Flights:
o A single-stage liquid rocket developed for the abort mission tests.

Unmanned Missions:
 Objective: Focuses on technology demonstration, safety, and reliability tests.
 Advanced Tests:
o Includes airdrop tests for parachute systems, flight tests of the test vehicle, and abort tests.

Water Survival Test Facility (WSTF):

 Purpose: Initial recovery trials of the crew module conducted in collaboration with the Indian Navy in February
2023, as part of preparation for recovery operations.
Vyommitra:
 Definition: Vyommitra is a female humanoid robot designed to fly aboard the test flight of the Gaganyaan
mission.
 Name Meaning: Vyommitra means "friend in space," derived from Sanskrit where Vyom means space, and Mitra
means friend.
 Functions:
o It will simulate human activities in space.
o Equipped with Artificial Intelligence (AI), it will perform basic tasks such as operating equipment, testing
safety mechanisms, and responding to commands in the Crew Module.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 99 of 348
 1

o Vyommitra will relay useful information back to the ground station to assist in testing the life support
systems for the mission.
Vyomanauts:
 Definition: The term "Vyomanauts" is used to refer to Indian astronauts.
 Crew Members:
1. Group Captain Prasanth Balakrishnan Nair.
2. Group Captain Ajit Krishnan.
3. Group Captain Angad Pratap.
4. Wing Commander Shubhanshu Shukla.
 Training: The crew is currently undergoing training at the Human Space Flight Centre in Bangalore.
o They previously completed general astronaut training at Russia’s Yuri Gagarin Cosmonaut Training Centre
in Russia.

PARAKRAM DIWAS-2024
Parakram Diwas is celebrated annually on January 23rd to mark the birth anniversary of Netaji Subhas Chandra Bose.
 Inception: Initiated in 2021, the name "Parakram" means courage or valor, reflecting Netaji's strong and
courageous spirit in India's freedom struggle.
 Celebrations:
o Various events are held to honor Netaji's contributions, organized by the Ministry of Culture along with
institutions like the Archaeological Survey of India, National School of Drama, Sahitya Akademi, and National
Archives of India.
o The celebration highlights Netaji's role in the freedom struggle and the legacy of the Azad Hind Fauj.
 Statue: To mark Netaji’s 125th birth anniversary in 2022, a hologram of Netaji was installed near India Gate,
later replaced by a statue on September 8, 2022.
Bharat Parv: Prime Minister launched Bharat Parv, a nine-day event organized by the Ministry of Tourism, to
showcase India's cultural diversity.

Subhash Chandra Bose Aapda Prabandhan Puraskar

 Purpose: Instituted by the Government of India to recognize the work done by individuals and institutions in
disaster management.
 Administered By: National Disaster Management Authority (NDMA), under the Ministry of Home Affairs, per
the Disaster Management Act, 2005.
 Award: Announced annually on January 23rd (Netaji's birth anniversary), the award carries a cash prize of Rs.
51 lakhs for institutions and Rs. 5 lakhs for individuals, along with a certificate. The cash prize for institutions
must be used for disaster management activities.
 Eligibility:
o Open to Indian nationals and institutions.
o Recognizes contributions in areas like prevention, mitigation, preparedness, rescue, response, relief,
rehabilitation, research, innovation, or early warning in disaster management.
 SCBAPP 2024:
o The 60 Parachute Field Hospital, Uttar Pradesh, received the 2024 award for outstanding contributions to
disaster management.
o Their work during events like the Uttarakhand floods (2013), Nepal Earthquake (2015), and Turkey-Syria
earthquake (2023) was recognized.

Netaji Subhas Chandra Bose:

 Birth: Subhas Chandra Bose was born on January 23, 1897, in Cuttack, Orissa.
 Civil Services: He cleared the Indian Civil Services Examination in 1920 but resigned in April 1921, driven by
nationalist sentiments and the turmoil in India.
 Indian National Congress: He joined the Indian National Congress and actively participated in the freedom
struggle.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 100 of 348

 1

 Congress President: Bose was elected president of the Indian National Congress twice, first in 1938, and,
then again, in 1939, but he resigned due to ideological differences with Mahatma Gandhi.
 Formation of Forward Bloc: In 1939, he established the Forward Bloc, aimed at unifying anti-British forces in
India.
 World War II: At the onset of World War II, Bose fled India, seeking support from the Soviet Union, Germany,
and Japan to fight British rule.
 Indian National Army (INA): With the help of Japan, Bose reorganized and led the Indian National Army (INA),
which was made up of Indian prisoners of war and workers from Southeast Asia, in a military campaign against
British forces.
 Azad Hind Government: Bose, with Japanese backing, formed the Azad Hind Government in exile on October
21, 1943 and led the INA in battles against Allied forces in Imphal and Burma, aiming to liberate India.

ATAL SETU
 India’s opened Mumbai Trans Harbour Link (MTHL), also known as the Atal Bihari Vajpayee Sewri-Nhava
Sheva Atal Setu.
 The Atal Setu was inaugurated by Prime Minister Narendra Modi in January 2024. It connects Mumbai to Navi
Mumbai and reduces travel time significantly, featuring a 21.8 km stretch (16.5 km over sea and 5.5 km on land).
 PM Modi highlighted the bridge as a symbol of a developed India, aimed at enhancing connectivity and economic
growth. It also facilitates faster access to Mumbai and Navi Mumbai airports.
 Recent Controversy: The Mumbai Trans Harbour Link (MTHL), also known as the Atal Setu, is under
inspection after cracks emerged on an exit road near Navi Mumbai

Atal Setu Bridge Overview:

 Longest Sea Bridge in India: Atal Setu is India’s longest sea bridge and the 12th longest in the world.
 Project Cost: ₹17,840 crore.
 Traffic Capacity: Expected to handle nearly 70,000 vehicles daily.
 Expected Lifespan: 100 years.
 Toll Charges: ₹250 one-way for cars.
 Travel Time Reduction: The bridge reduces travel time between Mumbai, Pune, Goa, and South India.
 Earlier Dr. Bhupen Hazarika Bridge was the longest bridge in India, over the River Brahmaputra, in Assam. The
9.15 Km long river bridge.

Technologies Incorporated:
 Reverse Circulation Drilling (RCD) Piling: First use in India for quieter and efficient foundation laying.
 Orthotropic Steel Deck (OSD) Bridge Girders: Ensures the bridge can handle heavy vehicle loads while being
lightweight.
 Open Road Tolling (ORT) System: Allows toll collection without stopping vehicles, improving efficiency.

Benefits of Atal Setu:

 Reduced Travel Time: Expected to decrease travel time between Sewri and Chirle from 61 minutes to 16
minutes.
 Increased Vehicle Usage: Estimated 40,000 vehicles will use the bridge daily in its first year.
 Economic Integration: It enhances connectivity between Mumbai and Navi Mumbai, benefitting surrounding
areas like Pune, Panvel, and Alibaug.

Mumbai Trans Harbour Link (MTHL):

 Length and Location: The MTHL is 22 km long and connects Sewri in Mumbai to Chirle in Navi Mumbai, making
it one of India’s longest sea bridges.
 Connectivity: It links Mumbai Port and Jawaharlal Nehru Port, improving access to regional airports and
facilitating smoother transportation across the region.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 101 of 348

 1

'WORLD FOOD INDIA 2023'

 The second edition of 'World Food India 2023' was inaugurated by the Prime Minister at Bharat Mandapam,
Pragati Maidan, New Delhi.
 Launched first in 2017 by the Ministry of Food Processing Industries, it highlights India's potential in the global
food market under the theme "Transforming the Food Economy."
 The Prime Minister distributed Seed Capital Assistance to support over one lakh Self Help Group (SHG) members,
promoting self-reliance in local communities.
 The event also emphasized 2023 as the International Year of Millets, encouraging the global cultivation and
consumption of these nutritious grains.
 MillInd (a probot) is the official mascot for World Food India 2023.

Key Points Highlighted by Prime Minister Narendra Modi:

 He addressed the growing challenge of food security and emphasized promoting sustainable agricultural
practices, technological advancements, and international collaborations.
 The food processing sector in India is termed a 'sunrise sector,' with foreign direct investment (FDI)
exceeding Rs 50,000 crores in the past nine years.
 The Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) scheme in food processing has spurred entrepreneurship and
innovation, generating new employment opportunities.
 Infrastructure development in agriculture and food processing is prioritized, with the Agri-Infra Fund projects
receiving over Rs 50,000 crores.
 Investments in fisheries and animal husbandry are being encouraged to boost post-harvest infrastructure and
maintain agricultural produce quality.
 Processed foods now make up 23% of India's agricultural exports, rising from 13%, indicating a 150%
increase in export value, contributing to India's status as a global food processing hub.
 Empowering small farmers, industries, and women is central to the government's initiatives, supported by
Farmer Produce Organizations (FPOs), cottage industries, and self-help groups.
 Women’s leadership in the food processing industry is being promoted to increase their role and contribution.
 The importance of millets (Shri Anna) was highlighted as part of India's 'superfood bucket,' with efforts to
promote them domestically and globally for their nutritional and environmental benefits.
 The food processing industry is encouraged to incorporate ancient sustainable and healthy food habits, including
knowledge from Ayurveda, to enhance global food security and nutrition.
 A balance between farmer interests and consumer demands was emphasized, aiming for a sustainable, equitable
food ecosystem that ensures fair farmer returns while satisfying consumer preferences.

Focus Pillars:
1. Shree Anna (Millets): India aims to promote millets as a superfood to enhance food security, nutrition
security, and sustainability amid global challenges like climate change, population growth, and malnutrition.
o The United Nations has declared 2023 as the International Year of Millets (IYM 2023).
2. Exponential Food Processing:
o India aims to position itself as a global hub for food processing.
o Key enablers include financing agri-food value chains and providing affordable credit to the food
processing sector, particularly to micro, small, and medium enterprises (MSMEs).

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 102 of 348

 1

FAME INDIA PHASE II

The Parliamentary Standing Committee on Industry recently suggested that the government extend the FAME-II
Scheme (Faster Adoption & Manufacturing of Electric Vehicles) deadline by at least three additional years.
 FAME India Phase II: The Faster Adoption and Manufacturing of Electric Vehicles (FAME) India Phase II aims to
promote electric mobility in India, with an initial budget of ₹10,000 crore for three years, starting from April 1,
2019. The scheme has been extended until March 31, 2024.
 Implementing Agency: Department of Heavy Industry, Ministry of Heavy Industry and Public Enterprises.
Key Recommendations by Parliamentary Committee:
 Restoring Subsidy on Electric Two-Wheelers: The committee recommended reinstating the subsidy for
electric two-wheelers, which was reduced in June 2023. The subsidy initially covered 40% of the ex-factory
price but was cut to 15%, affecting sales.
 Enhanced Budget Allocations: Suggested increased budget allocations to sustain the momentum of electric
vehicle (EV) adoption.
 Inclusion of Private Electric Four-Wheelers: Recommended including private electric four-wheelers under
the FAME-II scheme with limits based on cost and battery capacity.
 Supportive Frameworks: Called for transparent and consistent government policies at all levels to make India
a global EV hub, with dedicated manufacturing hubs for batteries, cells, and EV components.
 Funding for BHEL and Charging Stations: More funds should be allocated to Bharat Heavy Electricals Limited
(BHEL) for Engineering, Procurement, and Construction (EPC) solutions for charging stations. Public sector
undertakings should also install charging stations on their premises.
 Incentivizing Charging Stations: FAME-II should provide incentives to individuals and organizations for setting
up charging stations, with a focus on women’s self-help groups and cooperative societies.
FAME India Scheme Overview:
 Background: FAME India is part of the National Electric Mobility Mission Plan, aimed at encouraging the
adoption of electric and hybrid vehicles through upfront purchase incentives.
 Phase I: Launched in 2015 and completed in 2019 with a budget of ₹895 crore, it focused on technology
development, demand creation, pilot projects, and charging infrastructure. Achievements include supporting
2.78 lakh xEVs and sanctioning 465 electric buses.
 Phase II: Started in April 2019 for three years (later extended) with a budget of ₹10,000 crore, focusing on
electrifying public and shared transport. It supports e-buses, e-3 wheelers, e-4 wheeler passenger cars, and e-2
wheelers, along with charging infrastructure development.

RAM MANDIR AYODHYA INAUGURATION

The Ram temple in Ayodhya was inaugurated on 22nd January 2024, concluding a 200-year-old saga that
significantly shaped India's socio-political landscape.
 Chief Architects: Chandrakant Sompura and his sons Nikhil Sompura and Ashish Sompura.
 Design Advisors: Institutes like IIT Guwahati, IIT Chennai, IIT Bombay, NIT Surat, Central Building Research
Institute Roorkee, National Geo Research Institute Hyderabad, and the National Institute of Rock Mechanics
contributed to the design.
 Construction Company: Larsen and Toubro (L&T).
 Project Management Company: Tata Consulting Engineers Limited (TCEL).
 Sculptors: Arun Yogiraaj (Mysore), Ganesh Bhatt, and Satyanarayan Pandey.
 Total Area: 70 acres (70% green area).
 Temple Area: 2.77 acres.
 Temple Dimensions: 380 ft length, 250 ft width, and 161 ft height.
 Architectural Style: Indian Nagar Style.
 Architectural Features:
o 3 floors
o 392 pillars
o 44 doors.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 103 of 348

 1

 Bhoomi Pujan: Performed on 5th August 2020.

 Proposed Inauguration Date: 22nd January 2024.
 Materials Used: No steel or iron was used in the construction. Traditional materials were prioritized for
sustainability and alignment with ancient techniques.
o Bansi Paharpur Pink Sandstone from Rajasthan's Bharatpur district for the main structure.
o Granite stones for the plinths.
o White Makrana and colored marbles for inlay work.
o Teakwood for the doors.
o Ram Shilas (special bricks inscribed with "Shri Ram") were used, symbolizing the stones used in the
construction of Ram Setu.
o Other Materials: Shaligram rock, copper plates, gold, and ashtdhatu (an alloy of eight metals).

 Architectural Design: Over 550 temples across India were studied to finalize the architectural design of Ram
Mandir, combining artistic vision and traditional techniques.
 Foundation:
o A 14-meter thick layer of roller-compacted concrete forms the temple's foundation, resembling artificial
rock.
o The 21-foot-high granite plinth protects the temple from ground moisture.
 Main Temple:
o Built in Nagara Style, the temple’s original design was developed in 1988 by the Sompura family of
Ahmedabad, later modified in 2020 following Vastu Shastra and Shilpa Shastra.
o The temple has three stories, each representing different stages of Lord Rama’s life. The ground floor focuses
on Lord Rama's birth and childhood, while the first floor depicts his darbaar (court).
o The temple contains five Mandaps (halls): Nritya Mandap, Rang Mandap, Sabha Mandap, Prarthna Mandap,
and Kirtan Mandap.
 Shri Ram Mandir:
o The temple includes 44 doors, with some coated with 100 kg of gold.
o The main entrance, Singh Dwar, features statues of prominent characters from the Ramayana.
o Intricate carvings of deities and India's historic events adorn the pillars and walls.
o The Parikrama Path includes engravings from 100 key events of Valmiki’s Ramayana.
 Temple Complex:
o The temple is surrounded by a rectangular Parkota (compound wall), 732 meters long and 14 feet wide.
o Four temples dedicated to Surya Dev, Devi Bhagwati, Ganesh Bhagwan, and Lord Shiva are located at the four
corners of the compound.
o The complex includes other temples for Maa Annapurna, Lord Hanuman, and historic figures like Maharishi
Vashishtha, Maharishi Valmiki, and Devi Ahilya.
o Kuber Tila is located in the southwestern part, with a restored ancient Lord Shiva temple and a bronze idol
of Jatayu.
 Infrastructure:
o The temple complex includes facilities like a sewage treatment plant, water treatment plant, fire service, and
an independent power station.
o A Pilgrims Facility Centre can accommodate 25,000 visitors, providing medical and locker services.
o The complex has separate blocks for bathing, washrooms, and other amenities.
 Safety Measures:
o 200 lightning arresters have been installed to protect the structure from lightning strikes, based on lessons
learned from old temples in Mathura and Kashi.
 Cultural Hub:
o The complex also houses a museum showcasing artifacts related to Lord Ram and the Ramayana, making it
a center for both religious worship and cultural education.
o Time Capsule: A time capsule has been placed 2,000 feet below the temple, containing a copper plate with
information about the Ram Mandir, Lord Rama, and Ayodhya. Its purpose is to preserve the identity of the
temple for future generations.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 104 of 348

 1

o Earthquake Resistance: The temple is designed to be earthquake-resistant, with an estimated lifespan of

2,500 years.
o Shaligram Rocks for Idols: The idols in the temple are crafted from Shaligram rocks, which are 60 million
years old, sourced from the Gandaki River in Nepal.
o Ashtadhatu Bell: The temple features a bell made of Ashtadhatu (a combination of gold, silver, copper, zinc,
lead, tin, iron, and mercury). The bell weighs 2,100 kg, and its sound can be heard up to 15 km away.
 Nagara Style of Architecture:
o Development: The Nagara style of temple architecture originated around the 5th century AD and has been
prevalent in North India.
o Key Elements:
o Sanctum Sanctorum (Garbhagriha): A small room housing the principal deity.
o Mandapa: A hall leading to the sanctum for assembly and prayer.
o Shikhara: The towering spire above the sanctum, shaped like a pyramid or curvilinear peak.
o Vahana: The mount or vehicle of the deity placed before the sanctum.
Ram Janmabhoomi Movement:
 1751: Origins of the Movement: The movement originated when the Marathas requested control over
Ayodhya, Kashi, and Mathura from the Nawab of Awadh (Nawab Shuja-ud-Daula). This followed the
Marathas' assistance to the Nawab in defeating the Pathan forces in the Doab Region.
 19th Century Momentum: The Ram Janmabhoomi movement gained traction in the 19th century, with
judicial records from 1822 mentioning a mosque located on the birthplace of Lord Ram.
 1855 Clash: In 1855, a violent clash between Hindus and Muslims near the Babri Masjid led to Hindus
capturing the Janmasthan site.
 1949 Idol Placement: In 1949, the idol of Ram Lalla was placed in the mosque, intensifying demands for the
construction of a grand Ram temple at the site.
 1980s Legal and Religious Activism: The Vishwa Hindu Parishad (VHP) initiated a campaign for the
'liberation' of Ram Janmabhoomi, Krishna Janmabhoomi, and Vishwanath shrine. In 1986, the locks of
Babri Masjid were opened, allowing Hindus to offer prayers, marking the beginning of intense legal and
religious battles.
 1989-1990 Developments: In 1989, a foundation-laying ceremony for the Ram temple took place, followed
by LK Advani’s Rath Yatra in 1990, which sparked widespread riots.
 1992 Babri Masjid Demolition: On 6th December 1992, a mob demolished the Babri Masjid, leading to
political upheavals and a series of legal proceedings. In 1993, the Acquisition of Certain Area at Ayodhya Act
was passed, allowing the government to acquire the disputed land.
 Liberhan Commission 2009: The Liberhan Commission’s report in 2009 concluded that the demolition of
the Babri Masjid was premeditated.
 2010 Allahabad High Court Verdict: In 2010, the Allahabad High Court divided the 2.77-acre disputed land
in a 2:1 ratio. Two-thirds, including the garbha griha, was allocated to Shri Ram Lala Virajman and Nirmohi
Akhara, while one-third was given to the Sunni Central Waqf Board.
 2019 Supreme Court Verdict: The Supreme Court awarded the entire disputed land to Hindu petitioners
for the construction of a Ram temple and allocated an alternative plot for the construction of a mosque.

Places of Worship Act, 1991:

 1991 Law Introduction: In September 1991, the P.V. Narasimha Rao government enacted the Places of
Worship (Special Provisions) Act, 1991 to freeze the status of religious places as they were on August 15,
1947.
 However, the Ayodhya dispute was excluded from this Act as it was already under litigation.
 Purpose: The Act aims to prohibit the conversion of any place of worship and to maintain the religious
character of such places as they were on August 15, 1947.
 Key Provisions:
o No Conversion: It prohibits the conversion of any place of worship from one religious denomination to
another.
o Status as of 1947: The religious character of a place of worship shall remain as it was on August 15, 1947.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 105 of 348

 1

Exemptions from the Act:

 Ayodhya Exclusion: The disputed site at Ayodhya was exempted from the Act, allowing the trial in the
Ayodhya case to continue.
 Ancient Monuments: Places of worship that are classified as ancient and historical monuments under the
Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Sites and Remains Act, 1958.
 Settled Disputes: Any dispute that has been finally settled or resolved by the parties involved.
 Conversion by Acquiescence: Any conversion that occurred through acquiescence before the Act commenced.

INDIRA GANDHI PRIZE FOR PEACE, DISARMAMENT, AND DEVELOPMENT,

2023
The Indira Gandhi Prize for Peace, Disarmament, and Development for 2023 has been jointly awarded to Daniel
Barenboim, an Argentine-born classical pianist, and Ali Abu Awwad, a Palestinian peace activist, for their efforts in
fostering peace and non-violent resolution in the Israel-Palestine conflict.

About the Indira Gandhi Prize for Peace, Disarmament, and Development:
 Establishment: The award has been conferred annually since 1986 by the Indira Gandhi Memorial Trust to
honor the legacy of Indira Gandhi, former Prime Minister of India.
 Purpose:
The prize recognizes individuals or organizations for their exceptional contributions to international peace,
disarmament, and development.
 Components of the Prize: The award includes a monetary prize of 25 lakh rupees and a citation.
 Categories:
The prize is given in three main categories:
o Peace
o Disarmament
o Development
 Criteria for Selection: Recipients are selected based on their outstanding and sustained efforts to address key
global challenges in peace, disarmament, and development, making a positive impact on the international
community and contributing to human welfare.

Some of the Important Past recipients of this award include:

Mikhail Gorbachev, former leader of Soviet Union (1987);
UNICEF (1989)
Jimmy Carter, former president of the US (1997)
UN and its secretary-general Kofi Annan (2003)
Angela Merkel, chancellor of Germany (2013)
Indian Space Research Organisation (2014)
Former Prime Minister of India, Manmohan Singh (2017)
Sir David Attenborough (2019)
Pratham NGO (2021)

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 106 of 348

 1

INDIRA GANDHI'S FOREIGN POLICY (1966-1977)

 Birth: Indira Gandhi was born on November 19, 1917, in the Nehru family, and she was the daughter of
Jawaharlal Nehru.
 Education: After completing her schooling and university education, she earned a doctorate degree and received
the Columbia University Citation of Distinction.
 Marriage and Family: On March 26, 1942, she married Firoz Gandhi, and they had two sons, Rajeev Gandhi
and Sanjay Gandhi.
 Political Beginnings: In 1955, she joined the Congress Working Committee and participated in the party’s
central election. By 1958, she was part of the Central Parliamentary Board of Congress and presided over
various Congress committees.
 President of Congress: She served as President of the Indian National Congress in 1959 and again in 1978.
 Ministerial Roles: She served as the Minister of Information and Broadcasting (1964-1966) and later
became the Prime Minister of India from 1966 to 1977 and again from 1980 until her assassination in 1984.
 Planning Commission Chair: She took over as the Chair of the Planning Commission in 1980.

Contributions in India's National Movement

 Freedom Struggle: Indira Gandhi actively participated in the freedom struggle and worked to create awareness
among children and youths. In 1930, she organized Bal Charkha Sangh and Vanar Sena, which consisted of
young children supporting the Civil Disobedience Movement.

First Term as Prime Minister

 Becoming PM: Indira Gandhi assumed office as Prime Minister of India on 24 January 1966 following Lal
Bahadur Shastri’s death.
 Expelled from Congress: In 1969, she was expelled from Congress and formed the New Congress party, which
secured a landslide victory in the 1971 Lok Sabha elections.
 Bangladesh War: She supported the East Pakistan cause, which resulted in the creation of Bangladesh after
India's victory over Pakistan in 1971. This increased her popularity, and her party won numerous state elections
in 1972.

Fall and Return to Power

 Emergency Period (1975-1977): On 25 June 1975, she imposed a national emergency citing internal
disturbances, which lasted until March 1977. This decision was viewed as politically motivated and led to her
defeat in the 1977 elections.
 Imprisonment: She was imprisoned between October 1977 and December 1978 on charges of corruption but
was later re-elected to the Lok Sabha in November 1978.
 Return to Power: Her party, Congress (I), won the 1980 General Elections, bringing her back to power.
 Industrial Policies: After returning to office, she followed her father’s industrial development policies, including
fostering closer ties with the Soviet Union.

Major Contributions of Indira Gandhi

 Twenty Point Programme (1975): Aimed at eradicating poverty and improving the living standards of the poor.
The program was aligned with the National Common Minimum Program and UN Millennium Development
Goals.
 Economic Reforms: Indira Gandhi introduced economic reforms to make India self-sufficient. Her policies
included the Green Revolution and the nationalization of banks in 1969, aimed at ensuring easy access to
banking services and stabilizing the banking system.
 Abolition of Privy Purse (1971): Through the 26th Amendment to the Constitution, she abolished the privy
purses given to the rulers of princely states, aligning with the principles of social justice and equality.
 Garibi Hatao: In response to opposition campaigns, Indira Gandhi promoted the slogan Garibi Hatao (eradicate
poverty). It became a key part of the Fifth Five-Year Plan, focusing on agricultural productivity, job creation,
and poverty reduction.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 107 of 348

 1

Honors and Awards

 Bharat Ratna (1972)
 Mexican Academy Award for Liberation of Bangladesh (1972)
 Second Annual Medal, FAO (1973)
 Sahitya Vachaspati by Nagari Pracharini Sabha (1976)
 Other international honors include Mothers’ Award (USA), Howland Memorial Prize from Yale University, and
Diploma of Honour by the Argentine Society for the Protection of Animals.

BASICS OF ECONOMY – ADAM SMITH, GDP, GNP, NATIONAL INCOME

Economics is a social science concerned with the production, distribution, and consumption of goods and services. It
examines how individuals make choices under conditions of scarcity and the consequences of these decisions on the
utilization of resources.
 Hesiod, a Greek farmer and poet from the 8th century B.C., emphasized the efficient allocation of labor,
materials, and time to address scarcity.
 The foundation of contemporary Western economic theory was laid by Adam Smith with the publication of "An
Inquiry into the Nature and Causes of the Wealth of Nations" in 1776.

Central Problems in Economics: Economics addresses the issue of scarcity by determining: What to produce, How
to Produce and for whom to Produce?

Factors of Production:
 Land: Includes all natural resources like forests, minerals, and water.
 Labor: Human effort used in production, which includes both physical and mental labor.
 Capital: Tools, machinery, and buildings used in production.
 Entrepreneurship: The initiative to combine the other factors of production to create goods and services.

Types of Goods:
 Final Goods: Products used directly by the end consumer.
 Intermediate Goods: Goods used as inputs in the production of other goods, e.g., tea leaves used by a restaurant.

Branches of Economics:
 Microeconomics: Deals with individual and business decisions regarding the allocation of resources.
 Macroeconomics: Concerns the performance and structure of an economy as a whole.

Schools of Economic Thought:

 Classical View: Advocates for minimal government interference in the economy.
 Keynesian View: Supports active government intervention to stabilize the economy.

Types of Economies:
 Capitalist Economy: Market-driven with minimal government intervention.
 Socialist Economy: Government determines economic output and pricing.
 Mixed Economy: Features characteristics of both capitalism and socialism; prevalent in many countries
including India.

Indian Economic System Post-Independence:

 India adopted a Mixed Economy model post-independence to ensure balanced economic development. This
model combines large-scale industries managed by the state and small-scale industries driven by the private
sector.

Structural Composition of an Economy:

 Primary Sector (Red-Collar Workers): Involves extraction and harvesting of natural resources.
 Secondary Sector (Blue-Collar Workers): Engages in manufacturing and processing of products.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 108 of 348

 1

 Tertiary Sector (White-Collar Workers): Provides services such as retail, entertainment, and financial
services.
 Quaternary Sector: Includes education, information technology, and research.
 Quinary Sector (Gold-Collar Workers): Involves high-level decision-making within a society or economy.

Fundamental Concepts of the Indian Economy

 National Income Concepts
o GDP (Gross Domestic Product): Measures the total value of all goods and services produced within a
country's borders in a specific time period.
o GNP (Gross National Product): Includes all goods and services produced by residents of a country, both
domestically and abroad.
o NNP (Net National Product): GNP minus depreciation, providing a clearer measure of national economic
performance.
 Monetary Policy Tools
o Repo Rate: Rate at which the RBI lends to commercial banks.
o Reverse Repo Rate: Rate at which RBI borrows money from banks.
o MSF (Marginal Standing Facility): Allows banks to borrow overnight from the RBI at a higher rate than the
repo rate.
o Bank Rate: The long-term rate at which RBI lends to banks, typically higher than the repo rate.
o CRR (Cash Reserve Ratio): Percentage of a bank's total deposits to be held as reserves in cash with the RBI.
o SLR (Statutory Liquidity Ratio): Percentage of a bank's total deposits to be kept in liquid assets on their
own premises.
 Fiscal Policy Components
o Fiscal Policy: Government policy on taxes, spending, and borrowing to influence the economy.
o Fiscal Deficit: Occurs when a government's total expenditures exceed the revenue that it generates,
excluding money from borrowings.
o Primary Deficit: Fiscal deficit minus interest payments.
 Balance of Payments (BoP): The balance of payments (BOP) is a statistical statement that summarizes a
country's economic transactions with the rest of the world over a specific time period.
o Current Account Deficit (CAD): Measures the flow of goods, services, and unilateral transfers into and out
of the country.
o Capital Account Deficit: Occurs when the outflow of domestic money to foreign assets exceeds the inflow
of foreign money to domestic assets.

UTTARAKHAND PASSES UNIFORM CIVIL CODE (UCC)

Uniform Civil Code (UCC) aims to replace the fragmented personal laws currently used by different religious
communities with a single set governing personal matters such as marriage, divorce, inheritance, and adoption.
 Constitutional Framework:
o Article 44 of the Indian Constitution mandates the state to strive to secure a Uniform Civil Code for all
citizens across the territory of India.
o UCC is categorized under the Directive Principles of State Policy in Part-IV of the Constitution, noted in
Article 37 as non-justiciable, meaning they are not enforceable by any court but are fundamental in
governance.
 Current Personal Laws in India:
o Personal matters are listed in the Concurrent List of the Constitution, allowing both the Parliament and
state legislatures to legislate.
o Codified Hindu Personal Laws: Include The Hindu Marriage Act (1955), The Hindu Succession Act (1956),
The Hindu Minority and Guardianship Act (1956), and The Hindu Adoption and Maintenance Act (1956).
These laws also apply to Sikhs, Jains, and Buddhists.
o Muslim Personal Laws: Governed by religious texts and recognized by laws like the Shariat Application Act
(1937) and the Dissolution of Muslim Marriages Act (1939).

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 109 of 348

 1

o Other Communities: Christians, Zoroastrians, and Jews follow their respective personal laws.
 Goa as an Exception:
o Goa operates under a Uniform Civil Code, applying the Portuguese Civil Code of 1867 to all Goans regardless
of religion or ethnicity, a practice that continued after India annexed the territory in 1961.
 Progressive Approaches and Law Commission Recommendations:
o Law Commission's 2018 Report, titled “Reform of Family Law,” suggests preserving personal law diversity
while ensuring alignment with fundamental rights through codification and reform, rather than a wholesale
imposition of UCC.

Uttarakhand Uniform Civil Code, 2024 Bill Passage:

Uttarakhand has become the first state in India to pass a law on Uniform Civil Code, known as the Uniform Civil Code,
Uttarakhand, 2024 Bill.
 Assam and Gujarat are also in the process of working towards implementing their versions of a Uniform Civil
Code.
o General Impact: UCC mandates uniform laws for all residents, altering practices in marriage, divorce, and
succession.
o Marriage Age: Aligns the minimum age for marriage to 18 for women and 21 for men across all
communities, including Muslims, conforming to the Hindu Marriage Act, 1955 and Special Marriage Act,
1954.
o Registration of Relationships: Requires all live-in relationships and marriages to be registered within one
and two months respectively.
o Exclusions: UCC does not apply to tribal communities protected under Part XXI of the Constitution and
excludes the LGBTQIA+ community from its marriage laws.
o Succession Laws: Modifies Muslim testamentary succession, removing the one-third bequeathal cap.
Equates distribution rules for intestate succession with the Indian Succession Act, 1925, emphasizing equal
rights among sons, daughters, and parents.
o Prohibited Practices: Criminalizes nikah-halala, triple talaq, and polygamy among Muslims.
o Right to Remarry: Section 30 allows remarriage post-divorce without conditions such as the controversial
halala practice.
o Penalties: Introduces penalties including imprisonment and fines for forcing compliance with banned
practices.
o Changes for Hindus: Removes distinction between ancestral and self-acquired property. Both parents are
elevated to Class I heirs in intestate succession, potentially impacting the distribution to children and widow.

INDUS VALLEY CIVILISATION RECENT UPDATES

On September 20, 1924, John Marshall, then Director General of the Archaeological Survey of India, announced the
discovery of the Indus Valley Civilization, now known as the Harappan civilization, in The Illustrated London News.
 Early Excavations: Daya Ram Sahni first excavated Harappa during 1921-22, uncovering seals, painted pottery,
and beads. Rakhal Das Banerji began excavations at Mohenjo-daro in 1922, finding similar artifacts.
 Significant Findings and Meetings: In June 1924, Marshall met with Sahni and Banerji in Shimla, observing
significant similarities between artifacts from Harappa and Mohenjo-daro, despite the sites being 640 km apart.
 Civilization Phases:
o Early Phase (3200 BCE - 2600 BCE): Initial development.
o Mature Period (2600 BCE - 1900 BCE): Peak of urban development.
o Late Phase (1900 BCE - 1500 BCE): Decline and collapse of the civilization.
 Geographical Spread and Sites: The Harappan civilization covered approximately 1.5 million sq.km. across
what is now India, Pakistan, and Afghanistan.
o Major Sites: Mohenjo-daro, Harappa, Ganweriwala in Pakistan; Rakhigarhi and Dholavira in India.
o Total Sites: About 2,000, with around 1,500 in northwestern India (Gujarat, Haryana, Jammu and Kashmir,
Maharashtra, Rajasthan, Uttar Pradesh) and 500 in Pakistan.
o Southernmost Outpost: Daimabad near the Godavari river in Maharashtra.
 River Significance: The civilization thrived along the banks of the Indus and the now dried-up Saraswati rivers,
with the latter believed to have dried up around 1900 BCE.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 110 of 348

 1

Year Site Discoverers Location Key Features

1921 Harappa Daya Ram Sahni, Montgomery district, Granaries, bullock carts, sandstone sculptures
Punjab, by the Ravi of human anatomy
River
1922 Mohenjodaro R.D. Banerjee, Punjab district of "Mound of the Dead," Great Bath, granary,
E.J.H. MacKay, Larkana, by the Indus Bronze dancing girl, Pashupati Mahadeva seal,
Marshall River steatite statue of a bearded man, many seals
1929 Sutkagendor Stein Dast river, southern Trade outpost between Harappa and Babylon
Balochistan, Pakistan
1931 Chanhudaro N.G Majumdar Sindh, on the Indus Bead maker's shop, a dog chasing a cat's
River footprint
1935 Amri N.G Majumdar Banks of the Indus Evidence of antelope, rhinoceros
1953 Kalibangan Ghose Rajasthan, beside the Fire altars, camel bones, wooden plough
Ghaggar River
1953 Lothal R.Rao Gujarat, on the Bhogva India’s first artificial port, dockyard, rice husks,
River near the Gulf of fire altars, graveyard, ivory weight balance,
Cambay copper dog, chess-playing pieces
1964 Surkotada J.P Joshi Gujarat Horse skeletons, beads, stone covered beads
1974 Banawali R.S Bisht Haryana’s Hisar Evidence of beads, barley, toy plough, the
district largest number of barley grains, both pre-
Harappan and Harappan cultures present
1985 Dholavira R.S Bisht Gujarat, Rann of Advanced water management systems, giant
Kachchh water reservoirs, unique water harnessing
techniques, dams, embankments, stadium,
rock-cut architecture

Findings of Recent Years:

1. Recent Rakhigarhi Excavation:

Rakhigarhi, located in Haryana, India, is a significant archaeological site linked to the Harappan civilization. Recent
excavations date the site back 8,000 years, providing new insights into ancient human settlements.

 Phases of Excavations:
o First Phase (1997-2000): Conducted by Dr. Amarendra Nath, evidence of North Harappan culture dating
back to 2500 BC was uncovered.
o Second Phase (2006-2013): Led by Professor Vasant Shinde from Deccan College Pune, findings included
cultural artifacts and DNA tests suggesting a civilization over 4,000 years old.
o Third Phase (Recent): Jointly conducted by the ASI and Deccan College Pune, led by ASI joint director Sanjay
Kumar Manjul and assistant professor Prabhodh Shirwalkar, revealing that the civilization could date back
7,000 to 8,000 years.
 Key Discoveries:
o Human and Animal Traps: Evidence suggests consistent human DNA over 8,000 years.
o Burial Grounds: Significant find, indicating advanced societal structures.
o Utensils and Ornaments: Discovery of old silver, copper ornaments, and clay pots, including a complete
dinner set from the period.
o Residential Structures: Findings include underground large settlements with multi-bedroom houses,
courtyards, and advanced drainage systems.
o Textiles: Discovery of colorful worn clothing, including shawls and skirts, suggesting advanced textile
craftsmanship.
 Public Accessibility and Museum Development:
o ASI's Objective: To make Rakhigarhi site accessible to the public by conserving structural remains and
improving visitor amenities.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 111 of 348

 1

o Museum Construction: Underway near the site with an estimated cost of ₹23 crores, aiming to showcase
the unearthed antiquities.
 Significance Highlighted in Budget Speech 2023:
o Union Finance Minister Nirmala Sitharaman emphasized the development of Rakhigarhi as one of five
iconic archaeological sites, reflecting its national cultural importance.

2. 5,200-year-old Harappan settlement in Kachchh, Gujarat

The 5,200-year-old Harappan settlement known as Padta Bet is situated 1.5 km from Khatiya village in the Kachchh
district, Gujarat. The site was recently excavated by archaeologists from Kerala University.
 Archaeological Team: The expedition was led by Assistant Professors Abhayan G.S. and Rajesh S.V. from the
Department of Archaeology, Kerala University.
 Excavation Details: The settlement was unearthed on the slopes of a hillock called Padta Bet, spread across an
area of about 200mx200m. The site contained circular and rectangular structures made of local sandstone and
shales.
 Cultural Layers: The excavation revealed continuous human occupation from the Early Harappan to Late
Harappan periods (circa 3200 BCE to 1700 BCE). Various artefacts including pottery and animal bone fragments
were discovered.
 Pottery: A significant amount of pottery found includes types from the Early Harappan, Classical Harappan, and
Late Harappan periods. Novel ceramic types unique to the region, such as large storage jars and small bowls,
were also identified.
 Structural Erosion: The team hypothesized that many structural remains may have eroded due to the unstable
nature of the landscape, explaining the limited number of structures found.
 Strategic Location: Padta Bet is strategically located on top of a hillock, offering a vast view of the surrounding
valley and mountain ridges. A nearby stream likely served as a water source during the settlement's peak periods.
 Artefacts and Tools: Artefacts found include semi-precious stone beads (carnelian, agate), terracotta spindle
whorls, copper and lithic tools, grinding stones, and hammer stones.
 Animal and Plant Remains: Excavations revealed animal bones (cattle, sheep, goat) and shell fragments,
indicating practices of animal domestication and shellfish exploitation. Archaeobotanical samples were collected
to identify plant exploitation.
 Collaborative Research: The project involves collaboration with various international and national institutions,
including the Catalan Institute of Classical Archaeology, Spanish National Research Council, University of La
Laguna, Albion College, Texas A&M University, Deccan College Post Graduate and Research Institute, KSKV
Kachchh University, Central University of Karnataka, and Assumption College, Changanassery.

3. Recent Study on Lothal Dockyard:

Researchers from the Indian Institute of Technology-Gandhinagar (IITGn) conducted a study providing new
evidence supporting the existence of a dockyard at Lothal, an ancient Harappan site in Gujarat.
 Location and Historical Significance: Lothal is situated near the Sabarmati River and was historically
considered a trading hub connected to the Rann of Kutch via inland water routes.
 Findings: The study revealed that the Sabarmati River used to flow close to Lothal, contrary to its current
course which is 20 km away. This geographical setup facilitated Lothal's role as a Harappan port.
 Travel Routes: There was a historical travel route connecting Ahmedabad, through Lothal, to the Nal Sarovar
wetland and the Little Rann, eventually leading to Dholavira, another Harappan site.
 Archaeological Evidence: The existence of a dockyard at Lothal was previously hypothesized based on the
discovery of a 222 x 37 meters basin at the site. This study confirms the riverine connectivity that supports
the dockyard theory.
 Techniques Used: The research utilized multi-sensor data, cloud-computing, and multi-platform resources.
Early maps, satellite imagery, and digital elevation models were employed to trace the ancient course of the
Sabarmati River and identify old river channels.
 Collaborative Effort: The study was a collaborative effort involving multiple teams and used advanced
technologies to confirm the geographical and historical context of Lothal during the Harappan period.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 112 of 348

 1

 Implications: The findings underscore Lothal's significance in the maritime activities of the Harappan
civilization and confirm its role in ancient trade routes, likely facilitating trade with Mesopotamia.

4. More findings at Rakhigarhi

Rakhigarhi is situated in Haryana’s Hisar district, approximately 150 km from Delhi. It is recognized as the largest
site of the Harappan civilization.
 Archaeological Discoveries:
o Mound 7: Identified as a burial site with 56 skeletons discovered, including a notable woman's skeleton
dating back approximately 4,600 years.
o DNA Analysis: The woman’s DNA indicates ancestry linked to ancient Iranians and Southeast Asian hunter-
gatherers, with no Steppe Pastoral gene evident, challenging theories of Aryan migration.
 Cultural and Academic Impact:
o National Curriculum: Following these discoveries, the National Council of Educational Research and
Training (NCERT) plans to update the Class 12 History textbook to reflect these findings, emphasizing the
genetic and cultural continuity of the Harappan civilization with modern South Asians.
 Excavation Details:
o Phases: The site has seen multiple phases of excavation, starting in 1997 with significant findings such as
industrial tools, pottery, and evidence of urban planning.
o Discoveries: Finds include fire altars, sacrificial pits, animal figurines, terracotta toys, and jewelry,
suggesting a rich cultural and religious life.
 Scientific Studies and Theories:
o Continuity Theory: Some researchers suggest the continuity of the Harappan and Vedic cultures, citing
archaeological evidence of cultural practices that align with Vedic traditions.
o Genetic Studies: DNA studies indicate a lack of Steppe pastoralist ancestry, suggesting that the local
Harappan population did not experience significant gene flow from Central Asian Steppe pastoralists until
after 1500 BCE.
RAISINA DIALOGUE
The ninth edition of the Raisina Dialogue was held from February 21 to February 23, held in New Delhi.
 Inauguration: To be inaugurated by Prime Minister Narendra Modi. Greece’s Prime Minister Kyriakos
Mitsotakis was the chief guest at the inauguration session.
 Organizers: Hosted by the Observer Research Foundation in partnership with the Ministry of External Affairs,
India.
 Purpose and Format: An annual conference focusing on geopolitics and geoeconomics that aims to tackle global
challenges through multi-stakeholder, cross-sectoral discussions involving heads of state, government officials,
business leaders, and representatives from media and academia.
 Theme for 2024: "Chaturanga: Conflict, Contest, Cooperate, Create."
 Thematic Pillars:
1. Tech Frontiers: Regulations & Realities
2. Peace with the Planet: Invest & Innovate
3. War & Peace: Armouries & Asymmetries
4. Decolonising Multilateralism: Institutions & Inclusion
5. The Post 2030 Agenda: People & Progress
6. Defending Democracy: Society & Sovereignty
 Participants: More than 2,500 participants from 115 countries including ministers, former prime ministers and
presidents, military commanders, technology leaders, academics, journalists, and strategic affairs experts.
 Attendance and Coverage: The event will also be broadcasted on various digital platforms, reaching a global
audience.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 113 of 348

 1

Major Points of Discussion:

 Geopolitical Shifts:
o Discussions on the changing global power dynamics involving major countries like the USA, China, Russia,
and European nations.
o Focus on how nations are adapting strategies and forming alliances in response to new challenges.
 India’s Role:
o Described as a “bridging power” by India’s External Affairs Minister, emphasizing India's role in finding
common ground with a multi-vector policy.
o Highlighted as a global mediator or "Vishwamitra."
 Connectivity Projects:
o The Greek Prime Minister emphasized the importance of projects like the India-Middle East-Europe
Economic Corridor for enhancing connectivity.
 Baltic-Nordic Forum:
o Participation of ministers from the Baltic-Nordic forum marked a significant diplomatic outreach, aiming to
strengthen trade and investment ties with Central and Eastern Europe.
 Global Conflicts:
o A significant focus on the ongoing Russian war in Ukraine with discussions revolving around European
security and responses to China’s military strategies.
o Calls for India to reconsider its relationships with Russia and to support Ukraine’s sovereignty at a proposed
“Peace Conference” in Switzerland.
 Regional Security:
o Discussions on security concerns in key areas like the Indo-Pacific, Middle East, and Eastern Europe.
o Strategies for conflict resolution and peace-building were explored.
 Observer Research Foundation (ORF):
o ORF, a key organizer, is highlighted as an independent think tank based in New Delhi with additional centers
in Mumbai, Chennai, and Kolkata.
o It aims to influence global policy through research and dialogue, promoting a strong and prosperous India.

NITI AAYOG NATIONAL MULTIDIMENSIONAL POVERTY INDEX, 2023

Nodal agency for MPI in India, tasked with constructing an index to monitor state and UT performances in reducing
multidimensional poverty.
 India's first National Multidimensional Poverty Index (MPI) was released in 2021 by NITI Aayog.
 Formed the MPI Coordination Committee (MPICC) involving various ministries such as Health, Education,
Nutrition, Rural Development, and others.
 The MPI was originally developed in 2010 by the Oxford Poverty & Human Development Initiative (OPHI)
and the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP). The MPI uses ten indicators across three
dimensions to measure poverty:
 MPI Coordination Committee (MPICC):
o Consists of experts from different sectors including health, education, and urban development, enhancing
the index's multidimensional approach.
o Collaborates with International Institute for Population Sciences (IIPS) and technical partners like OPHI and
UNDP.
 Dimensions of the National MPI:
o Comprises three equally weighted dimensions: Health, Education, and Standard of Living.
o Includes 12 indicators across these dimensions.
 Sub-indices of the National MPI:
o Headcount Ratio (H): Measures the proportion of multidimensionally poor in the population.
o Intensity of Poverty (A): Calculates the average proportion of deprivations experienced by the poor.
o MPI Value: Product of Headcount Ratio and Intensity of Poverty, reflecting both the share of the population
in poverty and the degree of their deprivations.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 114 of 348

 1

 Importance of MPI:
o Enables tracking of progress towards Sustainable Development Goal (SDG) target 1.2, aimed at reducing
poverty in all its dimensions.
o Based on data from the National Family Health Survey (NFHS), showcasing progress in poverty reduction
between 2015-16 and 2019-21.

Findings of the Report:

 Reduction in MPI Value and Headcount Ratio (2015-16 to 2019-21):
o Significant decrease in India's MPI value and the headcount ratio, indicating effective multidimensional
poverty reduction.
o Major declines observed in Uttar Pradesh, Bihar, Madhya Pradesh, Odisha, and Rajasthan.
 Contributing Factors:
o Improvements in nutrition, schooling years, sanitation, and cooking fuel were key drivers in reducing the
MPI value.
o From 2015-16 to 2019-21, India's MPI value nearly halved from 24.85% to 14.96%, pulling approximately
135.5 million people out of poverty.
 Progress Toward SDG Target 1.2:
o This progress shows India's potential to achieve SDG target 1.2 well before the 2030 deadline.
o Intensity of Poverty also decreased from 47.14% to 44.39%.
 Rural-Urban Disparities:
o Despite overall reduction, disparities between rural (19.28%) and urban (5.27%) multidimensional poverty
persist.
o Faster reduction in MPI value observed in rural areas compared to urban areas.
 State-Wise Reduction:
o Uttar Pradesh saw the largest number of individuals escaping multidimensional poverty, followed by Bihar
and Madhya Pradesh.
o Bihar, previously the state with the highest MPI value, noted the fastest reduction.
 District-Level Performance:
o MPI allows for district-level analysis, showing fastest poverty reduction in districts within Madhya Pradesh,
Gujarat, Uttar Pradesh, and Rajasthan.
 Indicator-Wise Improvements:
o All 12 indicators across Health, Education, and Standard of Living showed significant improvement.
o Largest reductions were in sanitation (21.8 percentage points) and cooking fuel (14.6 percentage points).
o India achieved significant progress in reducing multidimensional poverty, as evidenced by a drop from
24.85% in 2015-16 to 14.96% in 2019-21.
o About 135 million individuals moved out of poverty during this period, indicating strong movement towards
achieving SDG Target 1.2.
o The intensity of poverty, reflecting the average deprivation among the poor, decreased from approximately
47.14% to 44.39%.
o The MPI value, combining the headcount ratio and the intensity of deprivations, nearly halved from 0.117 to
0.066.
o Rural areas witnessed a significant reduction in multidimensional poverty, with MPI dropping from 0.154 to
0.085 and the headcount ratio falling from 32.59% to 19.28%.
o Urban areas also saw improvements, with MPI reducing from 0.039 to 0.023 and the headcount ratio from
8.65% to 5.27%.
o The fastest absolute reductions in MPI were observed in Bihar, Madhya Pradesh, and Uttar Pradesh.
o Bihar, starting with the highest MPI in 2015-16, saw the most significant decrease in both MPI value and
poverty incidence, with multidimensional poverty falling from 51.89% to 33.76%.
o Reductions in deprivations were most notable in sanitation (21.8% points) and cooking fuel (14.6% points).
o Disaggregated MPI estimates at the district level can help target interventions and address regional
disparities effectively.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 115 of 348

 1

THE CHIEF ELECTION COMMISSIONER AND OTHER ELECTION

COMMISSIONERS (APPOINTMENT, CONDITIONS OF SERVICE AND TERM
OF OFFICE) ACT, 2023
The Chief Election Commissioner and Other Election Commissioners (Appointment, Conditions of Service and Term
of Office) Act, 2023, updates the Election Commission (Conditions of Service of Election Commissioners and
Transaction of Business) Act, 1991. It regulates salaries and conditions for the Chief Election Commissioner (CEC)
and Election Commissioners (ECs), aligning them with a Supreme Court judge's remuneration.
 Background: Following a 2023 Supreme Court ruling (Anoop Baranwal v. Union of India) requiring a less
Executive-controlled appointment process for the CEC and ECs, the new Act was established to reinforce the
independence of the Election Commission of India (ECI) from executive influence.
 The Court had stipulated that their appointment should involve a broader selection committee until a formal
legislative process was established.
 Constitutional Basis: Under Article 324 of the Constitution, the ECI is tasked with managing electoral rolls and
overseeing elections across India, including for the President and Vice-President. The Constitution mandates that
the President appoints the CEC and ECs based on the provisions of an Act of Parliament.
 Key Provisions of the 2023 Act:
o Composition: The ECI will consist of the CEC and a variable number of ECs, as determined by the President.
o Appointment Process: The President appoints the CEC and ECs based on recommendations from a
Selection Committee, comprising the Prime Minister, a Cabinet Minister, and the Leader of Opposition in the
Lok Sabha (or leader of the single largest opposition party in the absence of a designated Leader of
Opposition).
o Selection Committee Aid: A Search Committee, led by the Cabinet Secretary, proposes five candidates to
the Selection Committee, which can also consider other candidates.
o Eligibility Criteria: Appointees must be individuals of integrity with extensive experience in election
management and administration, and must have held or currently hold a government position no less senior
than a Secretary.
o Term and Reappointment: Commissioners serve a six-year term or until age 65, whichever comes first,
with no possibility for reappointment. However, an EC can be elevated to CEC, with the total service capped
at six years.
o Financial Entitlements: The salary and allowances for the CEC and ECs are set equivalent to those of the
Cabinet Secretary.
o Term of Office: The Chief Election Commissioner (CEC) and other Election Commissioners (ECs) are
appointed for a term of 6 years or until they reach the age of 65 years, whichever comes first. An EC promoted
to CEC will not serve more than 6 years combined in both roles.
o Salary: The salary of the CEC and ECs is equivalent to that of a Supreme Court judge.
 Resignation and Removal:
o CEC and ECs can resign by submitting a written notice to the President.
o The CEC can only be removed from office under the same conditions as a Supreme Court judge.
o ECs can only be removed based on a recommendation from the CEC.
 Leave and Other Benefits:
o CEC and ECs are entitled to leaves as per the rules applicable to the service they belonged to prior to their
appointment.
o They can carry forward leaves accrued prior to their appointment.
o The President holds the authority to grant or deny leave to CEC and ECs.
o The President also determines other conditions of service such as travel allowances, medical facilities, leave
travel concessions, conveyance facilities, etc.
 Transaction of Business:
o The Election Commission may decide on the procedure and allocation of its business unanimously among
the CEC and ECs.
o In case of differing opinions among the commissioners, decisions are made based on the majority opinion.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 116 of 348

 1

 Legal Protections:
o No civil or criminal proceedings can be initiated or continued against anyone who is or has been a CEC or an
EC for actions performed in the discharge of their official duties.

RESTRUCTURING DRDO
 The government-appointed nine-member panel led by K. Vijay Raghavan has delivered its thorough evaluation
concerning the operations of the Defence Research and Development Organisation (DRDO).
 This committee, which included representatives from the DRDO, various service sectors, industry, and academia,
has completed its report on how to reform the DRDO.
 The Government of India has allocated a three-month period for the DRDO to assess and respond to the
report's recommendations, which are set to be rolled out gradually.

The key objectives set for the committee were:

 To refocus DRDO’s efforts on developing advanced technologies essential for future warfare.
 To explore strategies for attracting and maintaining a highly skilled workforce.
 To establish a project-based employment system that incorporates both incentives and disincentives, ensuring
strict accountability for performance.
 Reports on DRDO:
o Parliamentary Standing Committee on Defence Report: Highlighted that 23 of DRDO's 55 mission mode
projects experienced substantial delays.
o CAG Report (December 2022): Found that 67% (119 out of 178) of the projects reviewed did not meet
their original timelines, with delays often due to design changes, delayed user trials, and slow supply order
processes.
 Vijay Raghavan committee Recommendations:
o Formation of Defence Technology Council (DTC): Recommended by the Vijay Raghavan committee,
chaired by the Prime Minister with the Defence Minister and National Security Advisor as Vice Presidents.
The council aims to steer the country’s defense technology roadmap and oversee major project executions.
o Composition of DTC: An executive committee led by the Chief of Defence Staff, including the Principal
Scientific Advisor, the three service chiefs, their vice chiefs, and two members each from academia and
industry.
o Role of DTC: To identify and align defense technology efforts by coordinating with various stakeholders,
ensuring strategic integration of technological advancements in defense.
o Background of Review: Initiated due to persistent project delays and inefficiencies within the Defence
Research and Development Organisation (DRDO); a response to recent critical reports from the
Parliamentary Standing Committee on Defence and the Comptroller and Auditor General (CAG).
 Recommendations for DRDO:
o Refocus on Core Functions: Encouraged to concentrate on research and development rather than
production, productization, and product management, which are suggested to be handled more efficiently
by the private sector.
o Reduction in Project Overreach: Advised to avoid extending its mandate to areas where other entities
could provide better specialization, such as drone development.
o New Department Proposal: Creation of the Department of Defence Science, Technology, and Innovation
under the Defence Ministry, proposed to promote R&D within the academic and startup ecosystems and to
function as the secretariat for the DTC.
o Operational Roles of New Department:
o Facilitate interaction and integration among DRDO, academia, and industry.
o Manage laboratories for testing and certification, previously a function of DRDO.
 Other Suggestions:
o 2007 P. Rama Rao Committee: Advocated for a leaner DRDO with a commercial arm to enhance
profitability and project efficiency.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 117 of 348

 1

o 2021 HR Policy: Focuses on knowledge sharing and participative management to foster a more dynamic
work environment.
 DRDO Overview:
o Established: 1958, headquartered in New Delhi.
o Purpose: Research and development wing of the Ministry of Defence, focusing on making India self-reliant
in defense technologies.
o Structure: Consists of over 50 labs specializing in various defense areas such as aeronautics, electronics,
and combat systems.
o Motto: “Balasya Mulam Vigyanam” - “The source of strength is science.”
 Key Programs:
o Integrated Guided Missile Development Programme (IGMDP): Spearheaded by Dr. APJ Abdul Kalam to
develop self-reliance in missile technology, producing missiles like Prithvi, Agni.
o Mobile Autonomous Robot System (MARS): Robotic system for handling and defusing landmines and
IEDs.
o Highest Terrestrial Centre: Located near Pangong Lake, Ladakh, serves as a cold storage for natural and
medicinal plants.
o Recent Projects: Includes ECWCS for extreme cold climates, ‘Pralay’ missiles, and advanced aerial and
marine systems.
 Issues Facing DRDO:
o Budget and Resources: Faces challenges such as insufficient budgetary support and manpower shortages.
o Project Delays and Cost Overruns: Notable in projects like the Light Combat Aircraft (LCA) Tejas.
o Performance: Criticized for under-delivery on ambitious promises, outdated equipment focus, and
prolonged testing phases without conclusive results.

ASI SURVEY ON GYANWAPI MOSQUE

The Gyanvapi Mosque is situated in Varanasi, adjacent to the Vishwanath Temple, and its historical narrative is closely
linked with Hindu-Muslim relations in the region.
 The Archaeological Survey of India (ASI) in its scientific survey report on the Gyanvapi mosque complex has
concluded that “there existed a Hindu temple prior to the construction of the existing structure” at the site.
 Archaeological Inscriptions: The survey documented 34 inscriptions in various scripts including Devanagari,
Grantha, Telugu, and Kannada, which were identified on the architectural remnants of the temple reused in the
mosque’s construction.
 Reuse of Architectural Elements: The report highlights that architectural elements from the dismantled
temple, such as pillars and pilasters, were incorporated into the mosque's expansion, specifically in the sahan
(courtyard). Notably, figures of Vyalas (mythological creatures in Hinduism) on these pillars were found to be
defaced.
 Integration into Mosque Structure: The central chamber of the original temple structure was integrated into
the mosque, forming part of its central hall. This integration included the temple’s main entrance and other
significant architectural features.
 Findings in Cellars: In the cellars constructed beneath the mosque's platform to accommodate worshippers, the
survey found reused temple pillars and sculptures of Hindu deities buried under the soil, suggesting further use
of temple materials in mosque construction.

Timeline of Legal Dispute:

 Initial Legal Claim: In 1991, a petition was filed in a Varanasi district court to return the land of the Gyanvapi
Mosque to the Kashi Vishwanath temple, alleging that the mosque was built under Aurangzeb's orders after
partially demolishing a temple in the 16th century.
 Revival of the Case: The case was rekindled in 2019 following the Supreme Court's verdict on the Babri Masjid-
Ram Janmabhoomi issue. Subsequently, the Varanasi district court ordered the Archaeological Survey of India
(ASI) to perform a scientific survey to investigate the mosque's foundations.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 118 of 348

 1

 Legal Interruptions: In 2021, the Allahabad High Court intervened, halting proceedings at the Varanasi court in
light of the Places of Worship Act 1991, which mandates that the religious character of places of worship must
remain as it was on August 15, 1947.
 Latest Developments: In July 2023, the Varanasi district court tasked the ASI with determining whether the
mosque was constructed over a Hindu temple. The survey began in August 2023 after a brief suspension ordered
by the Supreme Court.

History of the Temple:

 Vishweshwar Temple Origins: The site was originally home to the Vishweshwar Temple dedicated to Lord
Shiva, built by Todar Mal in the late 16th century, establishing Banaras as a significant Brahminic center.
 Debate on Pre-Temple History: There are debates among scholars about the early history of the Vishweshwar
Temple, with some accounts noting its destruction and reconstruction under various rulers.
 Aurangzeb’s Demolition: In 1669, Mughal Emperor Aurangzeb ordered the demolition of the Vishweshwar
Temple, and the Gyanvapi Mosque, also known as the Alamgiri Mosque, was constructed using parts of the
temple.
 Political Motivations: Aurangzeb's actions are seen by some scholars as politically motivated, aimed at
suppressing Hindu leaders and local zamindars resisting his rule, rather than purely driven by religious reasons.
 Muslim Counter-Claims: Some Muslim narratives argue against the notion of religious motives behind the
demolition, suggesting alternate reasons such as the temple's collapse or destruction during communal riots.
 Reconstruction Efforts: In the late 17th and 18th centuries, rulers like Bishan Singh and Malhar Rao Holkar
attempted to rebuild the Vishweshwar Temple but were unsuccessful.
 It was primarily Ahilyabai Holkar, the Maratha queen, who successfully reconstructed the temple around 1780
 British Era Disputes: During the British Raj, the Gyanvapi site became a center of disputes between Hindus and
Muslims, with legal battles and occasional riots over access and rituals at the site.
 Post-Independence Developments: In the late 20th century, the Vishva Hindu Parishad (VHP) initiated efforts
to reclaim the site, leading to legal battles and tensions, particularly after the 1992 Babri mosque demolition.

INDIA'S FOREIGN POLICY -RAJIV GANDHI AND MANMOHAN SINGH ERA

Rajiv Gandhi's Tenure as PM (1984-1989): Rajiv Gandhi assumed office after the assassination of Indira Gandhi,
and during his time as Prime Minister, he emphasized modernization, international cooperation, and regional
stability.
 Foreign Policy Focus: His foreign policy sought to strengthen India's position globally, foster economic growth,
and improve strategic partnerships, while managing domestic challenges and international pressures.
 Indo-Sri Lankan Accord (1987): Signed between Rajiv Gandhi and Sri Lankan President J.R. Jayewardene on
July 29, 1987, the accord aimed to resolve the civil conflict in Sri Lanka, largely caused by Tamil groups
demanding a separate state.
 Key Provisions of the Accord:
o Devolution of Power: Proposed a Provincial Council system to provide autonomy to Sri Lankan provinces.
o Tamil Language Rights: Ensured rights for the Tamil language.
o Return of Displaced Persons: Emphasized the return of people displaced by the conflict to their homes.
o Indian Peace Keeping Force (IPKF): India sent the IPKF to disarm Tamil militant groups, including the
LTTE.
o Challenges in Implementation:
o Disarmament Issues: Disarming the LTTE was a major hurdle, leading to conflict with the IPKF.
o Casualties and Conflict: The presence of the IPKF led to conflict and casualties, straining India-Sri Lanka
relations.
 The Accord’s Aftermath:
o 13th Amendment to the Sri Lankan Constitution: The amendment, passed on November 14, 1987, aimed
to devolve power to the provinces, set up a provincial council system, establish high courts in provinces, and
recognize Tamil as an official language.
o Surrender of Arms: Sri Lankan troops were withdrawn, but the LTTE resisted disarmament.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 119 of 348

 1

o Interim Administrative Council: A plan to form an Interim Administrative Council after disarmament faced
issues due to LTTE dominance.
 Indian Peace Keeping Force (IPKF):
o Role and Challenges: Initially sent to disarm militant groups, the IPKF became involved in combat, facing
resistance from the LTTE and locals.
o End of Indian Intervention: Indian involvement ended in 1989 when a change in Sri Lankan leadership
nullified the accord.
 Legacy: The Indo-Sri Lanka Accord aimed for peace but faced numerous challenges. It is a significant part of Rajiv
Gandhi’s foreign policy legacy, highlighting India's efforts to stabilize its neighborhood. However, the lasting
resolution of the Sri Lankan conflict was not achieved during this period.
 India-Soviet Union Relations: The Soviet Union remained a crucial ally of India during Rajiv Gandhi’s tenure,
offering military and economic assistance.
 1985 Air India Bombing: A terrorist attack by Sikh separatists escalated the conflict between the Indian
government and Sikh militants in Punjab, marking a critical moment in India’s internal security situation.
 Economic and Military Modernization: Rajiv Gandhi, after assuming office in 1984, focused on modernizing
India’s economy and military. His leadership contributed to a thaw in India-U.S. relations, highlighted by his 1985
visit to the U.S. which eased Cold War tensions and enhanced cooperation in economic and technological fields.
 SAARC: In 1985, India was instrumental in founding the South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation
(SAARC). Despite regional tensions, SAARC aimed to promote collaboration and cooperation among South Asian
countries.
 Global Peace Advocacy: Rajiv Gandhi championed nuclear disarmament and peace on the global stage. At the
1988 UN General Assembly, he proposed a comprehensive disarmament plan, emphasizing India's commitment
to global peace and nuclear disarmament.
Manmohan Singh’s Tenure as PM (2004-2014): Manmohan Singh served as the 13th Prime Minister of India from
22 May 2004 to 26 May 2014. His Foreign Ministers were Natwar Singh, Pranab Mukherjee, S.M. Krishna, and Salman
Khurshid.
 Oil for Food Scam (2005): The UN's Oil-for-Food Programme, meant to help Iraq after the Gulf War, became
controversial due to corruption. Natwar Singh and his son were implicated in the scam as beneficiaries of illegal
payments. Natwar Singh was dismissed, and Manmohan Singh temporarily took over the foreign portfolio.
 India-US Civil Nuclear Agreement: In 2005, India and the US agreed on civil nuclear cooperation. India would
separate its civilian and military nuclear facilities and place the civilian ones under IAEA safeguards. In return,
the US and the Nuclear Suppliers Group (NSG) would allow India to engage in global nuclear trade. This led to
political challenges, with the Left withdrawing support from the government, but the deal was finalized in 2008.
 Bangladesh-India-Myanmar Trilateral Agreement: In 2005, the India-Myanmar-Thailand Trilateral Highway
project began under the Mekong Ganga Cooperation Initiative to improve cross-border connectivity.
 Relations with Pakistan: During his tenure, Manmohan Singh did not visit Pakistan. In 2005, both countries
agreed to open a bus service across the LoC, but relations deteriorated after the 2008 Mumbai attacks.
 Relations with China: In 2006, a "ten-pronged strategy" was proposed to improve relations with China. The
Nathula Pass was reopened in 2006 after four decades. China became India's largest trade partner during this
period, though a military standoff occurred in 2013 near Ladakh.
 Entry of China into SAARC: China was given observer status in SAARC in 2005. India blocked China's bid for full
membership.
 Relations with Afghanistan: India emerged as the largest regional donor to Afghanistan, supporting numerous
development projects.
 India-Africa Summit (2008): The first India-Africa summit was held in 2008 to strengthen trade and diplomatic
ties. Leaders from 14 African nations participated.
 Japan and Israel: India and Japan established a "Strategic and Global Partnership" during this period. India also
expanded ties with Israel, making significant investments in each other’s economies.
 Manmohan Doctrine: Dr. Manmohan Singh's foreign policy focused on economic growth, global cooperation,
and regional stability. The doctrine emphasized India’s development priorities, greater integration with the
global economy, and working with the international community to create a favorable economic and security
environment.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 120 of 348

 1

PRINCIPAL ORGANS OF THE UNITED NATIONS

The UN’s structure includes principal organs, specialized agencies, funds and programmes, related organizations,
and other entities.
Six Principal Organs of the UN:
1. United Nations General Assembly (UNGA)
2. United Nations Security Council (UNSC)
3. International Court of Justice (ICJ)
4. United Nations Secretariat
5. Economic and Social Council (ECOSOC)
6. United Nations Trusteeship Council
 Functions: Each principal organ has distinct purposes but collectively works towards international cooperation
and peace.
 Headquarters:
o Five organs (UNGA, UNSC, ECOSOC, Trusteeship Council, Secretariat) are located at the UN Headquarters in
New York.
o The International Court of Justice (ICJ) is located in The Hague, Netherlands.
1. United Nations General Assembly
It is the main policy-making body of the UN, where all member states discuss a wide range of international issues
under the UN Charter.
 History:
o The first session of the UNGA was held on 10 January 1946 in London with representatives from 51 nations.
o It moved to the UN Headquarters in New York in October 1952 during its seventh regular session.
 Key Decisions:
o Appointing the UN Secretary-General (on the recommendation of the Security Council).
o Electing the non-permanent members of the Security Council.
o Approving the UN budget.
 Functions and Powers:
o Setting the agenda: Organizes the work of the UN.
o Making recommendations: Provides advice on international issues within its mandate.
o Discussing and debating: Offers a forum for member states to deliberate on global issues.
o Adopting resolutions: Covers topics like human rights, disarmament, and development.
o Reviewing work of UN bodies: Can suggest improvements for other UN entities.
o International law: Can initiate studies and recommend the development of international law.
 Working:
o The General Assembly holds an annual session starting the third Tuesday of September, lasting until the
following September.
o Sessions occur at UN Headquarters in New York unless a change is made by a majority vote.
o The general debate starts the week after the opening session, lasting nine working days without
interruption.
 Voting and Majority:
o For peace, security, budgetary issues, and member-related decisions, a two-thirds majority is needed.
o Other decisions require a simple majority.
 Elections:
o Elections are held for the President of the General Assembly, Security Council, Economic and Social
Council, Human Rights Council, and International Court of Justice (ICJ).
o Most elections occur annually, except for ICJ judges, who are elected every three years.
 Membership:
o All 193 UN member states are part of the General Assembly.
o Observer status can be granted to international organizations or entities, allowing limited participation in
the General Assembly’s work.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 121 of 348

 1

 Budget:
o The General Assembly approves the UN budget and determines the financial contributions of each member
state.
 Resolutions:
o The General Assembly votes on resolutions submitted by sponsoring states, reflecting the collective stance
of the international community on various global issues.
2. United Nations Security Council (UNSC)
It holds the primary responsibility for maintaining international peace and security.
 History:
o Established on January 17, 1946.
o Comprises five permanent members with veto power and ten elected non-permanent members.
o The first peacekeeping force was deployed during the Korean War in 1950.
 President:
o The UNSC President sets the agenda, presides over meetings, and oversees crises.
o The presidency rotates monthly among members in alphabetical order based on the country’s English
name.
 Membership:
o 15 members: 5 permanent (China, France, Russia, the United Kingdom, and the United States) and 10 non-
permanent members elected for two-year terms.
 Binding Decisions:
o All UN member states must comply with UNSC decisions under the UN Charter.
o The UNSC has the authority to issue binding resolutions.
 Imposing Sanctions:
o The UNSC recommends peaceful settlements of disputes and, if necessary, imposes sanctions or authorizes
the use of force to maintain or restore peace.
 Military Interventions:
o The UNSC authorized military actions in the Korean War and the Congo Crisis, as well as peacekeeping
missions in Cyprus, West New Guinea, and the Sinai Peninsula.
 Veto Power:
o Permanent members can veto any substantive resolution, including those on the admission of new UN
members or nominees for the Secretary-General.
 Election of Non-Permanent Members:
o The 10 non-permanent members are elected regionally by the UN General Assembly for two-year terms,
with five being replaced every year.

3. International Court of Justice (ICJ):

 The ICJ is the main judicial organ of the UN, established in June 1945 by the UN Charter and began functioning
in April 1946.
 It resolves legal disputes between states and gives advisory opinions on legal questions referred by authorized
UN organs.
 The ICJ is the successor to the Permanent Court of International Justice (PCIJ), created in 1920 by the League
of Nations.
 All UN member states are parties to the ICJ statute and can initiate cases, while only certain UN organs and
agencies can submit advisory proceedings.
 The ICJ consists of 15 judges, elected for nine-year terms by the UN General Assembly and Security Council.
 The ICJ is located in the Peace Palace, The Hague, Netherlands, and operates in English and French.
 Dalveer Bhandari, an Indian, has been a judge since 2012.

4. United Nations Secretariat:

 The UN Secretariat carries out the day-to-day operations of the UN.
 It is led by the Secretary-General, who is appointed by the General Assembly based on a recommendation from
the Security Council.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 122 of 348
 1

 The Secretariat provides economic and political analysis for the General Assembly and Security Council and
plays a role in setting the UN's agenda.
 It is organized into various departments and offices that coordinate to ensure the coherence of the UN’s
programmes.
 The Secretary-General is the chief administrative officer of the UN, with the role outlined in Chapter XV of
the UN Charter.
 The current Secretary-General, António Guterres, is the ninth Secretary-General of the UN and serves a five-
year term.

5. Economic and Social Council (ECOSOC):

 ECOSOC coordinates the economic and social work of the UN and its associated organizations. UNECOSOC was
founded on June 26, 1945, and is established in Chapter X, Articles 61-72, of the UN Charter.
 It promotes collective action for global development and sustainability.
 ECOSOC has 54 members, with 18 elected annually elected by the General Assembly for three-year terms.
 It holds major sessions annually in July, where high-level discussions are conducted on economic, social, and
humanitarian issues.
 ECOSOC is responsible for promoting higher standards of living, addressing international economic and social
issues, and encouraging respect for human rights.
 It coordinates with the 15 specialized agencies, eight functional commissions, and five regional
commissions.
 ECOSOC meets annually with World Bank and IMF finance ministers.
6. United Nations Trusteeship Council:
 The Trusteeship Council was set up to oversee the administration of trust territories and ensure their
progression towards self-governance or independence.
 By 1994, all trust territories achieved independence or joined neighboring independent nations.
 The last trust territory, Palau, became a member state in 1994.
 The Trusteeship Council has suspended its operations since November 1, 1994, and its future role remains
uncertain, though it still exists under the UN Charter.

ENFORCEMENT DIRECTORATE
The ED is a multi-disciplinary organization responsible for investigating offences related to money laundering and
foreign exchange law violations. It operates under the Department of Revenue, Ministry of Finance.
 As a top financial investigation agency, ED follows the Constitution and Laws of India.
Genesis of ED:
 The ED's origins date back to 1st May 1956 when an ‘Enforcement Unit’ was set up under the Department of
Economic Affairs to handle Foreign Exchange Regulation Act (FERA) 1947 violations.
 Initially headquartered in Delhi, it had branches in Bombay and Calcutta, and later in Madras (now Chennai).
 In 1957, the unit was renamed Enforcement Directorate.
 FERA 1947 was replaced by FERA 1973, which was later repealed in 2000 to make way for the Foreign
Exchange Management Act (FEMA) 1999 due to economic liberalization.
 The Prevention of Money Laundering Act (PMLA) 2002 was enforced in 2005, further expanding ED's
responsibilities.
Structure of ED:
 Hierarchy: The ED is headed by the Director of Enforcement based in New Delhi.
 There are five regional offices (Mumbai, Chennai, Chandigarh, Kolkata, Delhi), ten zonal offices, and eleven
sub-zonal offices across India.
 Recruitment: ED recruits officers from IRS, IPS, IAS, and other investigative agencies such as Income Tax, Excise,
and Customs.
 Tenure: The tenure of ED directors was extended in 2021 through amendments allowing up to five years in
service.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 123 of 348

 1

2021 Amendment:
 A High-Level Committee is required to recommend whether officers like the Director of Enforcement (ED)
should receive a service extension.
 For the ED Director, a five-member panel, including the Central Vigilance Commissioner and Vigilance
Commissioners, evaluates if the officer is suitable for an extension.
 For the CBI Director, a High-Level Committee comprising the Prime Minister, the Leader of the Opposition,
and the Chief Justice of India must recommend the extension.
Legislative Amendments:
 Amendments to the Delhi Special Police Establishment (DSPE) Act, 1946 and the Central Vigilance
Commission (CVC) Act, 2003 allow the government to extend the tenure of both the CBI and ED Directors for
one year after their initial two-year terms.
 The heads of these central agencies can receive up to three annual extensions.
 However, no extension can be granted beyond five years in total, including the original appointment term.
Supreme Court Ruling (July 2023):
 The Supreme Court upheld these amendments, allowing the tenure of the CBI and ED Directors to be extended
"piecemeal."
 However, the Court declared the extension given to the outgoing ED Chief as illegal.
Statutory Functions of ED:
 COFEPOSA (1974): ED handles cases related to foreign exchange and smuggling, ensuring preventive detention
under the Conservation of Foreign Exchange and Prevention of Smuggling Activities Act (COFEPOSA).
 FEMA (1999): ED investigates violations of foreign exchange laws and adjudicates penalties.
 PMLA (2002): ED traces and attaches properties involved in money laundering and prosecutes offenders under
the Prevention of Money Laundering Act (PMLA).
 FEOA (2018): ED enforces the Fugitive Economic Offenders Act (FEOA) to confiscate properties of economic
offenders who flee the country.
ED’s Jurisdiction:
 Both FEMA and PMLA cover the entire territory of India, granting the Enforcement Directorate (ED) the
authority to act against any individual or entity to whom these laws apply.
 Cases under FEMA are handled in civil courts, while those under PMLA fall under the jurisdiction of criminal
courts.
 The ED can investigate crimes committed by individuals or legal entities, including public servants involved in
offences related to money laundering.
 The ED cannot act suo motu (on its own). A complaint must first be lodged with another agency or the Police,
after which the ED investigates the matter.
 Once a case is under investigation, the ED can attach properties, arrest individuals, and initiate proceedings
for violations under FEMA and PMLA.
 The final resolution of the case is through adjudication by courts or PMLA courts.

PREVENTION OF MONEY LAUNDRY ACT, 2002

 The PMLA, 2002 is a law passed by the Parliament of India to prevent money laundering and allow for the
confiscation of property derived from illegal activities.
 It aims to combat money laundering related to crimes such as drug trafficking, smuggling, and terrorism
financing.

Key Provisions:
 Definition of Money Laundering (Section 3): Money laundering is defined as any act of attempting, assisting,
or being involved in processes related to the proceeds of crime to make it appear as legitimate property.
 Offences Under PMLA:
o Part A: Includes money laundering offences under various acts such as the Indian Penal Code, Prevention
of Corruption Act, Narcotic Drugs and Psychotropic Substances Act, Antiquities and Art Treasures Act,
Trademarks Act, Wildlife Protection Act, Copyright Act, and Information Technology Act.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 124 of 348

 1

o Part B: Covers offences mentioned in Part A with a value of Rs 1 crore or more.

o Part C: Relates to money laundering offences involving trans-border crimes.
 Punishment for Money Laundering (Section 4): The punishment includes rigorous imprisonment of not less
than three years, extending to seven years, along with a fine.
 Agencies' Powers Under the Act:
o Enforcement Directorate (ED): Investigates money laundering offences and handles the attachment of
properties.
o Financial Intelligence Unit-India (FIU-IND): Responsible for receiving, processing, and analyzing financial
transaction information related to suspicious activities.
o Other Investigative Agencies: Various agencies, such as CBI, local police, customs departments, SEBI,
investigate scheduled offences under respective laws.
 Obligations Under PMLA:
o Financial Institutions: Banks, financial institutions, and intermediaries must verify and maintain records
of their clients' identities.
o Reporting: Financial entities are required to report suspicious transactions to FIU-IND.
 Setting Up of Authority:
o Adjudicating Authority: Established to exercise jurisdiction and powers under PMLA.
o Appellate Tribunal: Set up to hear appeals against the orders of the Adjudicating Authority and other
authorities like the Director of FIU-IND.
 Special Courts Under PMLA: Sessions courts are designated as Special Courts to try offences under the PMLA
and related crimes.

 Objectives of PMLA:
o Prevention: Prevent money laundering through stringent regulations and monitoring financial transactions.
o Detection: Detect and investigate instances of money laundering via enforcement and regulatory
mechanisms.
o Confiscation: Confiscate property obtained through money laundering to deter offenders and disrupt illicit
financial flows.
o International Cooperation: Facilitate international cooperation in combating money laundering and
terrorist financing.
 Recent Amendments to PMLA:
o Proceeds of Crime: The definition of Proceeds of Crime has been expanded to include not only property
derived from the scheduled offence but also any other property obtained from related criminal activities.
o Redefinition of Money Laundering: The amendment redefines money laundering as a stand-alone crime,
meaning it is no longer dependent on another crime (predicate or scheduled offence).

PATANJALI CASE EXPLAINED

In 2022, Patanjali published an advertisement titled “MISCONCEPTIONS SPREAD BY ALLOPATHY: SAVE YOURSELF
AND THE COUNTRY FROM THE MISCONCEPTIONS SPREAD BY PHARMA AND MEDICAL INDUSTRY,” which triggered
a legal response from the Indian Medical Association (IMA).
 The IMA filed a petition at the Supreme Court, citing instances where Baba Ramdev made statements against
allopathy, calling it a "stupid and bankrupt science" and blaming allopathic medicine for Covid-19 deaths.
 The IMA also accused Patanjali of contributing to vaccine hesitancy during the pandemic by spreading false
rumours and claims about allopathic medicine.
 The IMA's petition emphasized that alongside attacking modern medicine, Patanjali was making false claims
about its own products curing diseases.

Charges Against Patanjali:

 Violation of Drugs & Other Magical Remedies Act, 1954 (DOMA):
o Section 4 of the DOMA prohibits publishing misleading advertisements about drugs.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 125 of 348

 1

o Violating this section can result in up to six months of imprisonment and/or a fine for the first offence. Repeat
offences can lead to one year of imprisonment.
 Violation of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019 (CPA):
o Section 2(28) defines 'misleading advertisements,' and Section 89 provides strict penalties for such offences.
o First-time offenders may face penalties of up to Rs 10 lakh and two years of imprisonment, while repeat
offenders may face up to Rs 50 lakh in fines and five years of imprisonment.
o Misleading advertisements include those that give false descriptions, engage in unfair trade practices,
conceal important information, or mislead consumers about a product or service's nature, substance,
quantity, or quality.
 Violation of MoU Between Ministry of AYUSH and Advertising Standards Council of India (ASCI):
o In 2017, the Ministry of AYUSH signed an MoU with the ASCI to identify and act against misleading
advertisements that violate DOMA.
o The IMA pointed out that Patanjali's advertisements violated this agreement, which mandates the Ministry
of AYUSH to send complaints regarding misleading advertisements to ASCI for review.

Consumer Protection Act, 2019:

 The Consumer Protection Act, 2019 replaced the Consumer Protection Act of 1986 and broadened its scope to
better address consumer concerns.
 The Act recognizes offences such as providing false information about the quality or quantity of goods or
services and misleading advertisements.
 It outlines actions to be taken if goods or services are found to be dangerous, hazardous, or unsafe.
 The Act came into effect in July 2020 and aims to empower consumers by safeguarding their rights through
various rules and provisions.
Central Consumer Protection Authority (CCPA)
 Established under: Section 10 of the Consumer Protection Act, 2019.
 Purpose: To protect consumer rights by addressing unfair trade practices, false information, and misleading
advertisements that harm public and consumer interests.
 Ministry: Ministry of Consumer Affairs, Food and Public Distribution.
Powers and Functions of CCPA
 Conduct investigations into violations of consumer rights and initiate complaints/prosecutions.
 Order the recall of unsafe goods and services.
 Order the discontinuation of unfair trade practices and misleading advertisements.
 Impose penalties on manufacturers, endorsers, and publishers of misleading advertisements.

Drugs and Magic Remedies (Objectionable Advertisements) Act of 1955 (DOMA):

The Act defines "drug" broadly, including items like talismans, mantras, and charms that claim to have miraculous
healing powers.
Key Provisions:
 Prohibition of Certain Advertisements: The Act prohibits advertisements that claim to prevent or cure certain
diseases listed in Schedule J. This includes diseases like cancer, tuberculosis, diabetes, and epilepsy.
 Prohibition of Misleading Advertisements: Advertisements that are false or misleading about the nature,
substance, quality, or potency of any drug or remedy are prohibited.
 Cognizance of Offences: No court can take action under the Act unless a complaint is made by the government
or an authorized individual.
 Exemptions: Advertisements for drugs or remedies with substances listed in Schedule J may be exempted if
they comply with the specified conditions in the Schedule.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 126 of 348

 1

WORLD WILDLIFE DAY 2024

 World Wildlife Day (March 3): Annually observed to highlight the significance of wildlife conservation and
promote sustainable practices for biodiversity protection.
 Purpose: Aims to raise awareness about the need for wildlife conservation, the interconnectedness of all living
things, and encourages peaceful coexistence between humans and animals through education, activism, and
campaigning.
 History:
o First proposed by Thailand at the UN General Assembly in 2013.
o The General Assembly passed a resolution on December 20, 2013, declaring March 3 as World Wildlife Day
starting from 2014.
o The date also marks the signing of the Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild
Fauna and Flora (CITES) in 1973, which regulates international trade in endangered species.
 Theme of WWD 2024: "Connecting People and Planet: Exploring Digital Innovation in Wildlife Conservation,"
emphasizing the role of technology in advancing wildlife conservation in the digital age.
 Significance: Serves as a global reminder to protect and conserve wildlife and promotes the respectful treatment
of animals.

GLOBAL GENDER GAP REPORT

Tracks global progress in closing gender-based disparities.
 Issued by: World Economic Forum (WEF).
 Purpose: Measures gender equality annually, focusing on four key areas:
o Economic participation and opportunity
o Educational attainment
o Health and survival
o Political empowerment
 Inception: Introduced in 2006, it is the longest-standing index monitoring efforts by various countries to close
gender gaps over time.
 Current Progress: The latest report shows some progress, but the pace of closing the gender gap remains slow.

 India’s Progress on Gender Inequality Index (GII):

o Rank improvement: India ranked 122 out of 191 countries with a score of 0.490 in the 2021 GII. In 2022,
India climbed 14 places to rank 108, showing notable progress in gender equality.
o Consistent improvement: Over the past decade, India’s rank on the GII has consistently improved,
reflecting steady advancement in gender equality.
 Important Definitions:
o Maternal Mortality Ratio (MMR): The number of pregnancy-related deaths per 100,000 live births.
o Adolescent Birth Rate: The annual number of births to females aged 10-19 years per 1,000 females in
that age group.
o Labor Force Participation Rate: The percentage of the working-age population (ages 15 and older)
engaged in the labour market, either working or actively seeking employment.
 Major Issues Related to Gender Inequality in India:
o Gender-Based Violence:
 Women and girls in India face various forms of violence, such as domestic violence, sexual
harassment, rape, dowry-related violence, and honour killings.
 According to the National Family Health Survey-5, nearly one-third of women in India have
experienced physical or sexual violence.
o Unequal Access to Education:
 Despite efforts, disparities in enrollment, retention, and completion rates still exist between boys
and girls.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 127 of 348

 1

 Cultural norms, economic constraints, and safety concerns often impede girls’ access to education.
o Invisible Labour:
 Women in India perform a significant amount of unpaid care work such as household chores,
childcare, and eldercare. This work is often overlooked and undervalued, contributing to economic
dependency and time poverty.
o Gender Wage Gap:
 Women in India earn significantly less than men for similar work across sectors.
 The World Inequality Report 2022 shows that men in India earn 82% of labour income, while women
earn only 18%.
o Child Marriage:
 Child marriage disproportionately affects girls, reducing their educational and economic
opportunities and exposing them to health risks.
 According to UNESCO, one in three of the world’s child brides is in India.
 The prevalence of child marriage has reduced by half, from 47% in 2006 to 23.3% during 2019-21
(NFHS-5). However, states like Andhra Pradesh, Assam, Bihar, Jharkhand, Rajasthan, Telangana,
Tripura, and West Bengal have higher prevalence than the national average.

NEW LOKPAL CHAIRPERSON

Former Supreme Court judge Justice Ajay Manikrao Khanwilkar has been appointed as the chairperson of Lokpal,
India's anti-corruption ombudsman. Justice Khanwilkar retired from the Supreme Court in July 2022, and now
brings a wealth of judicial experience to his role.

About Lokpal:
 Establishment: Lokpal is a statutory body created under the Lokpal and Lokayuktas Act of 2013.
 Mandate: The Lokpal is tasked with investigating allegations of corruption against public functionaries and
matters connected to it.

Organisational Structure:
 Composition: Lokpal consists of a chairperson and up to 8 members.
 Chairperson Eligibility: A former Chief Justice of India, a former Supreme Court judge, or an eminent person
meeting the eligibility criteria can serve as chairperson.
 Members:
o Half of the members must be judicial, being either former Supreme Court judges or former Chief Justices
of High Courts.
o 50% of members must be from SC/ST/OBC/Minorities and women.
 Term: Members serve for 5 years or until they turn 70, whichever comes earlier.
 Perks and Benefits: The chairperson receives the same salary and benefits as the Chief Justice of India (CJI),
and members receive benefits similar to Supreme Court judges.

Appointment Process:
 The President of India appoints the chairperson and members based on the recommendation of a Selection
Committee.
 Selection Committee includes:
o The Prime Minister (Chairperson)
o Speaker of Lok Sabha
o Leader of Opposition in Lok Sabha
o The Chief Justice of India or a nominated judge
o One eminent jurist

Jurisdiction:
 Lokpal can investigate allegations of corruption against:
o Prime Ministers

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 128 of 348

 1

o Union Ministers
o Members of Parliament
o Officials of the Union Government
o Individuals associated with government-funded entities or those receiving substantial foreign
contributions.
 Exceptions for Prime Minister: Lokpal cannot investigate the Prime Minister in sensitive areas such as
international relations, security, public order, atomic energy, and space without approval from 2/3rds of
its members. A full Lokpal bench must consider initiating inquiries against the Prime Minister.

Powers of Lokpal:
 Lokpal can exercise superintendence over the CBI in corruption cases and authorize the CBI to conduct search
and seizure operations.
 The Inquiry Wing of Lokpal has powers akin to a civil court.
 Lokpal can recommend the transfer or suspension of public servants involved in corruption.
 It is empowered to prevent the destruction of records during preliminary inquiries and can confiscate assets
obtained through corruption.

Reporting and Accountability: Lokpal must submit an annual report on its activities to the President, which is
then presented to both Houses of Parliament for scrutiny.

Pinaki Chandra Ghose: The first Chairperson of the Lokpal of India, serving from March 23, 2019 to May 27, 2022.
Ghose is a retired Supreme Court of India judge and a former member of the National Human Rights Commission.

MODEL CODE OF CONDUCT

Model Code of Conduct: A set of guidelines established to direct political parties and candidates during elections,
created with the consensus of political parties to ensure adherence to its principles in both letter and spirit.

 Objective: The MCC ensures free and fair elections under Article 324 of the Constitution by maintaining a fair
environment for all political parties and candidates, ensuring the proper use of government machinery during
elections, and preventing electoral offenses, malpractices, and corrupt activities.
 Enforcement:
o The MCC comes into effect from the date the Election Commission announces the election schedule and
remains in force until the election process is completed.
 Applicability:
o During Lok Sabha elections, the MCC is applicable across the country.
o During State Assembly elections, it applies within the entire state.
o In bye-elections, the MCC is enforced only in the concerned constituency.
 Prevention of misuse: The MCC ensures that government resources are not misused for election purposes, and
it holds political parties and contesting candidates accountable for upholding the principles of a fair electoral
process.

 Historical Background of the Model Code of Conduct (MCC):

o The MCC originated in the 1960 Kerala Assembly elections, where a code was prepared by the State
Administration for political leaders.
o It was later adopted by the Election Commission of India (ECI) in the 1962 Lok Sabha elections,
circulated to all recognized political parties and State governments, and was generally followed.
o From 1962 to 1991, the ECI refined the code to address corrupt electoral practices, including the misuse of
muscle power and money.
o A significant addition was made to regulate the 'party in power' to prevent it from gaining an unfair
advantage during elections.
o Despite demands, the MCC has not been incorporated into law, but after 1991, it was enforced strictly by
T.N. Seshan, then Chief Election Commissioner, under Article 324 of the Constitution.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 129 of 348

 1

o In 2013, following a directive from the Supreme Court, guidelines on election manifestos were included
in the MCC for the 2014 general elections.

 Provisions of the Model Code of Conduct (MCC):

1. General Conduct:
o Political parties and candidates must avoid actions that could create hatred or tensions between different
groups.
o Criticism of other parties should focus on policies, programs, past records, and work.
o Religious places should not be used for election propaganda.
o The right to a peaceful home life should be respected; campaigning in an area requires prior permission.
2. Meetings: Parties or candidates must inform the local police in advance about the venue and time of meetings
to allow authorities to maintain law and order.
3. Processions: The time, venue, and route of processions must be communicated to the local police or authorities
in advance to ensure proper arrangements.
4. Polling Day: Parties or candidates should cooperate with authorities to ensure peaceful elections. Distribution
of food or alcohol near polling stations is prohibited.
5. Polling Booth: Only individuals with a valid Election Commission pass, along with voters, are allowed to enter
polling booths.
6. Observers: The ECI appoints observers who can be approached by candidates or agents with complaints or
issues related to the conduct of elections.
7. Party in Power: The ruling party, whether at the central or state level, must not misuse its official position for
election campaigning.
8. Election Manifesto: The election manifesto must not contain anything contrary to the ideals of the Constitution
and must align with the MCC's principles.
Reforms in MCC:
 Legal Enforcement: In 2013, the Standing Committee on Personnel, Public Grievances, Law, and Justice
recommended making the MCC legally binding by incorporating it into the Representation of the People Act,
1951.
 Enforcement through Existing Laws: Although the MCC cannot be directly enforced by law, certain provisions
can be implemented using existing legal frameworks like the Indian Penal Code (1860), Code of Criminal
Procedure (1973), and the Representation of the People Act (1951).
 Law Commission Recommendation (2015): The Law Commission highlighted that ruling parties often release
government-sponsored advertisements just before the MCC is enforced, giving them an unfair advantage. To
address this, the commission suggested banning such advertisements for up to six months before the term of the
House or Assembly ends.
 Use of Technology: Technological tools, such as AI-based systems, could be deployed to monitor and prevent
MCC violations, particularly on social media platforms.
 Independence of ECI: The Election Commission of India (ECI) should be granted greater independence, similar
to that of the Comptroller and Auditor General (CAG), to allow for more stringent enforcement of the MCC.

CINEMATOGRAPH RULES (CERTIFICATION), 2024

 The Cinematograph (Amendment) Act, 2023 led to the Ministry of Information and Broadcasting notifying the
Cinematograph (Certification) Rules, 2024, replacing the 1983 rules.
 Film certification in India involves a decision on whether to:
o Prohibit a film from public viewing,
o Allow it with certain deletions/modifications, or
o Categorize it appropriately.
 The Central Board of Film Certification (CBFC), a statutory body under the Ministry of Information and
Broadcasting, was established in Mumbai with regional offices to regulate public film exhibitions as per the
Cinematograph Act, 1952.
 CBFC offices are located in Mumbai, Chennai, Kolkata, Bengaluru, Thiruvananthapuram, Hyderabad, New Delhi,
Cuttack, and Guwahati.
 The Board ensures that a film:
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 130 of 348
 1

o Is assessed for its overall impact.

o Is reviewed in the context of the period depicted and contemporary standards, ensuring it does not degrade
the audience's morality.
 The Supreme Court’s ruling in S. Rangarajan vs P. Jagjivan Ram (1989) highlighted that films have a powerful
influence on thought and action, ensuring greater attention and retention than printed media. As a result, prior
certification is necessary to regulate this impact.

Key Aspects of the Cinematograph (Certification) Rules, 2024:

 Terms of office: A member of the Board shall serve at the discretion of the Central Government.
 Representation of women: 1/3rd of the members of the Board must be women, with a preference for having
half the members as women.
 Temporary absence of Chairperson: In the event of the Chairperson’s absence, the Central Government may
nominate a member to act in that capacity until the Chairperson returns.
 Constitution of advisory panels: Advisory panels will be set up by the Central Government at each regional
office of the Board.
 Improved efficiency: The process of film certification will be made more efficient by reducing timelines and
adopting digital procedures to streamline the process.
 Further classification of UA category: The existing UA (Unrestricted with Caution) category will be sub-divided
into three age-based groups to ensure young viewers are exposed to age-appropriate content. This categorization
will be voluntary.
 Provision for priority screening: Filmmakers with urgent release schedules can request expedited certification
screenings, aligning with the "Ease of Doing Business" initiative.
 Change of category for television: Recertification is required for edited films to be broadcast on television, as
only films classified under Unrestricted Public Exhibition can be shown.
 Perpetual validity of certificates: The 10-year validity limit for film certificates is removed, granting perpetual
validity.
 Unauthorized recording and exhibition: The Act makes unauthorized recording and exhibition of films a
punishable offense under the Copyright Act, 1957.
 Section 6(1) omission: The Act omits Section 6(1) of the Cinematograph Act, 1952, as per the Supreme
Court’s directive in the Union of India vs KM Shankarappa case (2000), which prohibited the Centre from
exercising revisional powers over films already certified by the CBFC.

The Central Board of Film Certification (CBFC)

 Statutory body: The Central Board of Film Certification (CBFC) regulates public exhibition of films under the
Cinematograph Act, 1952.
 Ministry: Operates under the Ministry of Information and Broadcasting.
 Established: Launched in 1951.
 Headquarters: Located in Mumbai.
 Composition: The Board consists of a Chairman and non-official members.
 Appointment: All members are appointed by the Central Government.
 Regional offices: CBFC operates through 9 regional offices in Mumbai, Kolkata, Chennai, Bangalore,
Thiruvananthapuram, Hyderabad, New Delhi, Cuttack, and Guwahati.
 Advisory panel: The regional offices are supported by advisory panels for examining films.
 Panel appointment: The Central Government nominates panel members from various fields for a period of 2
years.
 Public exhibition of movies: Films can only be publicly exhibited in India after certification by the CBFC.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 131 of 348

 1

UNSC REFORMS
It is one of the UN’s six main organs and is aimed at maintaining international peace and security.
 Consists of 15 members: 5 permanent members with veto power (China, the US, France, the UK, Russia) and
10 non-permanent members.
 The non-permanent members are elected by the UN General Assembly based on regional representation (5
from Asia & Africa, 1 from Eastern Europe, 2 from Latin America, 2 from Western Europe).
 Members serve two-year terms, and the presidency rotates monthly among them.
 Decisions require the affirmative vote of 9 members, including a concurring vote from P-5 (veto power).
Role of UNSC:
 Primary function is maintaining international peace and security.
 Investigates disputes or situations that might lead to international conflict.
 Recommends solutions or methods to resolve disputes.
 Formulates plans to regulate armaments and prevent conflicts.
Powers of UNSC:
 The only UN body with the authority to issue binding resolutions.
 Determines the existence of threats or aggression and decides on necessary actions.
 Can call for economic sanctions or other non-military measures to prevent aggression.
 Has the authority to suspend economic or diplomatic relations, impose blockades, and authorize military
action.
Need for Reform:
 The G4 group calls for the expansion of both permanent and non-permanent categories of the UNSC to include
more developing countries, enhancing the Council's representativeness and legitimacy.
 Regional Representation: Emphasis is placed on better representation for regions like Africa, Asia-Pacific, Latin
America, and the Caribbean. The G4 reaffirms its support for the Common African Position (CAP) based on the
Ezulwini Consensus and the Sirte Declaration.
 Text-Based Negotiations: The G4 expresses concern over the slow progress in Intergovernmental
Negotiations (IGN) and calls for urgent text-based negotiations to accelerate reform.
 Global Imbalances: India’s representative at the UN highlighted that recent global events have exposed the
UNSC’s limitations in ensuring international peace and security. The G4 believes reform must address the lack of
representation, particularly in the permanent membership category.
 Urgency and Significance: The G4 emphasizes that without reform, the UNSC will remain inadequate in
addressing global challenges such as conflict resolution, climate change, and humanitarian crises.

Changing Geopolitics:
 The current structure of the UNSC reflects the post-WWII world and does not accommodate today's multi-polar
global order.
 Developing nations play a significant role in international affairs, but regions like Africa and Latin America lack
permanent representation.
 The decision-making process excludes many UN members unless they are on the UNSC at the time, limiting
participation.

Lack of Transparency:
 There is limited transparency in UNSC working methods, with decisions often made behind closed doors.
 P-5 members exercise their veto power arbitrarily, leading to a lack of accountability.

Monopoly of P-5:
 The P-5 control major decisions, such as deploying peacekeeping forces, without proper representation of
regions like Africa, where many conflicts occur.
 Veto power is often misused by P-5 members, exacerbating the imbalance between permanent and non-
permanent members.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 132 of 348

 1

 Example: Russia has used its veto power extensively, including to block resolutions on Ukraine and Crimea.

Emergence of Unconventional Security Threats:

 The UNSC’s outdated structure limits its ability to address modern security threats like terrorism, cybercrime,
climate change, and refugee crises.
 The Council has failed to effectively handle conflicts in Syria, Afghanistan, and Yemen.
Inefficiency in Maintaining International Peace:
 Geopolitical rivalries between permanent members hinder the UNSC’s ability to respond to global crises.
 Past failures include its inaction during conflicts in Somalia, Bosnia, and Rwanda.
Undermined Status of the UN:
 Without reforms, the UNSC risks being sidelined by regional organizations such as SCO, NATO, and BIMSTEC,
which may take on greater roles in international affairs.

Major Groups Involved:

L69 Group:
 Comprises 42 developing countries from Asia, Africa, Latin America, the Caribbean, and the Pacific, including
India.
 Advocates for expanding both permanent and non-permanent seats in the UNSC to reflect current global
dynamics.
 Proposes a review of the composition of permanent membership every 15 years to ensure relevance with global
realities.
 Named after the L.69 draft document introduced in 2007-08, which initiated the Intergovernmental
Negotiation (IGN) process for UNSC reforms.

C-10 Grouping (Committee of Ten):

 Represents 10 African nations advocating for Africa’s representation in UNSC reforms.
 Supports the Common African Position, based on the Ezulwini Consensus and Sirte Declaration.
 The Ezulwini Consensus (2005) calls for two permanent seats with veto power and five non-permanent seats
for Africa on the UNSC.
 The Sirte Declaration (1999) laid the foundation for the establishment of the African Union and emphasized
addressing peace and security issues on the continent.

G-4 Grouping:
 Formed in 2004, the G4 includes Brazil, Germany, India, and Japan, which aspire to become permanent
members of the UNSC.
 The G4 supports each other’s bids for permanent membership and advocates for UNSC reforms.
 Typically holds meetings during the annual UN General Assembly (UNGA) session to coordinate efforts on
UNSC reforms.

How can the formal Changes Made in UNSC:

 Reforming the UN Security Council requires amending the United Nations Charter through a two-stage process
as outlined in Article 108.
 First Stage: The General Assembly must approve the reform with a two-thirds majority (at least 128 out of 193
member states). Importantly, no member, including the P5, can veto at this stage, as per Article 27.
 Second Stage: Once approved by the General Assembly, the UN Charter is treated as an international treaty
and is amended.
o The amended Charter needs to be ratified by at least two-thirds of the member states, including all P5
members, in accordance with their national procedures.
o During this stage, ratification may be influenced by the Parliaments of the P5 members, which could affect
when the amended Charter comes into effect.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 133 of 348

 1

Past Successful Reforms:

 Initially, the Security Council had 11 members: 5 permanent and 6 non-permanent.
 In 1963, the General Assembly recommended an amendment to the UN Charter via A/RES/1991 (XVIII),
adopted on 17 December 1963.
 This amendment came into force on 31 August 1965 and:
o Increased Security Council membership from 11 to 15.
o Raised the number of required affirmative votes from 7 to 9.
o Set the geographic representation pattern for non-permanent members:
 5 from African and Asian States.
 1 from Eastern European States.
 2 from Latin American States.
 2 from Western European and other States.
 Rules 142-144 of the General Assembly's Rules of Procedure relate to the election of Security Council
members.
 Article 27(3) of the UN Charter states that votes on non-procedural matters in the Security Council require
an affirmative vote of nine members, including the concurring votes of the permanent members. This is
known as the veto power of the permanent members.

COLLEGIUM SYSTEM
 The Collegium System is a process used for the appointment and transfer of judges in the higher judiciary,
including the Supreme Court (SC) and High Courts (HC).
 This system evolved through SC judgments rather than any legislative act or constitutional provision.
Evolution of the System:
1. S P Gupta Vs Union of India (First Judges Case, 1981):
o The SC ruled that the Chief Justice of India's (CJI) recommendations on judicial appointments could be
refused by the executive for “cogent reasons.”
o This decision gave the Executive primacy in the appointment process for the next 12 years.
2. Supreme Court Advocates-on-Record Association Vs Union of India (Second Judges Case, 1993):
o The SC introduced the Collegium system, where "consultation" with the CJI was interpreted to mean
"concurrence."
o The decision emphasized that it should be an institutional opinion formed in consultation with the two
senior-most judges of the SC, and not the CJI’s individual opinion.
3. Re special reference 1 of 1998 (Third Judges Case, 1998):
o The SC, on a reference made by the President of India under Article 143, expanded the Collegium to a five-
member body (CJI and four senior-most judges).
4. Supreme Court Advocates-on-Record Association & Anr. vs. Union of India (Fourth Judges Case, 2015):
o The National Judicial Appointments Commission (NJAC) was introduced through the 99th Amendment
Act, 2014 to replace the Collegium system.
o This case involved the constitutional challenge to the Ninety-Ninth Constitutional Amendment and the
National Judicial Appointments Commission (NJAC) Act, 2014.
o A five-judge Constitutional bench of the Supreme Court heard the challenge.
o The decision was rendered with a majority of 4:1, striking down both the Constitutional amendment and
the NJAC Act as unconstitutional.
o The majority opinion held that the NJAC Act and the constitutional amendment posed a threat to the
independence of the judiciary.

Structure of the Collegium System:

 The SC Collegium is headed by the CJI and includes the four next senior-most judges.
 The HC Collegium is led by the Chief Justice of the HC, with the two senior-most judges of that court.
 The government plays a role only after the Collegium recommends names, and it can request reconsideration
of a name but cannot reject it outright.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 134 of 348

 1

Judicial Appointments Procedure:

1. Chief Justice of India (CJI):
o The President of India appoints the CJI, usually based on seniority and the outgoing CJI's recommendation.
o Since the 1970s supersession controversy, appointments have strictly followed seniority.

2. Supreme Court Judges:

o The CJI initiates proposals for other SC judges.
o The CJI consults the Collegium members and the senior-most judge from the HC of the recommended judge.
o The recommendation is sent to the Law Minister, who forwards it to the Prime Minister for advising the
President.
3. Chief Justices of High Courts:
o Chief Justices are appointed based on the principle of transferring judges from outside their home states.
o The outgoing Chief Justice of the HC initiates the process by consulting two senior-most colleagues.
o The Collegium makes the final recommendation, which is forwarded through the Chief Minister and
Governor to the Union Law Minister.
4. High Court Judges:
o The HC Collegium initiates the proposal for appointment of HC judges.
o Recommendations are made by the CJI and two senior-most judges of the SC.
Issues with the Collegium System:
1. Exclusion of the Executive:
o The complete exclusion of the executive has raised concerns about the Collegium's lack of accountability
and transparency in appointments.
o This has led to criticisms that it can result in favoritism and nepotism.
2. Favouritism and Nepotism: The Collegium system lacks clear criteria for assessing candidates, leading to
concerns that appointments may be influenced by personal relationships rather than merit.
3. Violation of Checks and Balances: The principle of checks and balances between the Legislature, Executive,
and Judiciary is undermined, as the judiciary gains disproportionate power in appointing its members.
4. Closed-Door Mechanism:
o Decisions are made without transparency. There is no public record of the meetings or the reasons for
decisions made by the Collegium.
o The system lacks a secretariat or official procedure for maintaining records of its deliberations.
5. Unequal Representation: There are concerns about the under-representation of women and other
marginalized groups in the higher judiciary.

DISPUTES IN SOUTH CHINA SEA

 Location and Geography:
o The South China Sea is a marginal sea of the Western Pacific Ocean in South East Asia.
o It is bordered by China to the north, Vietnam to the east and south, the Philippines to the west, and Borneo
to the south.
o The sea covers approximately 3.5 million square kilometers and includes over 200 small islands, reefs,
and rocks, most of which are uninhabitable.
o It is one of the most strategically and economically important waterways in the world, extending from the
Strait of Malacca in the southwest, to the Strait of Taiwan in the northeast.
o It is surrounded by several nations, including China, Taiwan, the Philippines, Malaysia, Brunei, Indonesia,
Singapore, Cambodia, Thailand, and Vietnam.
o The region is rich in natural resources, including oil, gas, and fisheries, and serves as a crucial trade route for
various economies.
 Historical Claims and Conflict:
o In 1992, China asserted claims over the entirety of the South China Sea, citing historical rights dating back
to the Western Han dynasty.
o This claim is visually represented by the "Nine-dash line" which China uses to demarcate its claims.
 Strategic and Economic Importance:

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 135 of 348

 1

o The South China Sea is a crucial maritime corridor, essential for international trade.
o Approximately one-third of global maritime trade transits through this area annually.
o It is a significant route for petroleum products, with about 40% of the global trade in these commodities
passing through the sea each year.
o Global Trade Hub: The South China Sea facilitates over $5.3 trillion in trade annually, accounting for
approximately one-third of global marine traffic.
o Oil Reserves: Estimated proven oil reserves in the region are about 7.7 billion barrels, with potential
reserves up to 28 billion barrels.
o Natural Gas Reserves: Estimated total natural gas reserves stand at around 266 trillion cubic feet.
o Philippines' Energy Exploration: The Philippines relies on the support of the US and its allies for energy
resource exploration in the contested areas of the South China Sea.
o Global Fishing Hub: The region hosts over half of the world’s fishing vessels, critical for the food security
and economic livelihood of millions globally.
 Territorial Disputes:
o The region is noted for its complex territorial disputes involving multiple countries.
o Key contested areas include the Paracel Islands, Spratly Islands, and various reefs and shoals.
o Disputes primarily involve China and the Philippines, with Vietnam, Malaysia, and Taiwan also holding claims
in the region.
 Geopolitical Significance:
o The South China Sea is of high geopolitical importance due to its strategic location and the extensive
economic interests tied to its maritime routes.
o The territorial disputes have led to heightened tensions between claimant countries, particularly involving
China and neighboring Southeast Asian nations.

Ongoing Disputes in South China Sea (SCS)?

 Sovereignty Disputes:
o Northern SCS: China, Taiwan, and Vietnam contest the Paracel Islands. China has occupied them since 1974.
Pratas Island is claimed by both the PRC and Taiwan but is controlled by Taiwan.
o Southern SCS: All Spratly Islands are claimed wholly by China, Taiwan, and Vietnam, while Brunei, Malaysia,
and the Philippines claim parts of them. Vietnam controls the most features; Taiwan controls the largest
island.
o Eastern SCS: Scarborough Shoal is claimed by China, Taiwan, and the Philippines, with China in control since
2012.
 Maritime Boundaries and the "Nine-Dash Line": China's "nine-dash line" and Taiwan's "eleven-dash line"
claim extensive areas overlapping with the 200-nautical-mile Exclusive Economic Zones (EEZs) that could be
claimed by Brunei, Indonesia, Malaysia, the Philippines, and Vietnam under UNCLOS.
 Disputes Over Maritime Rights: The U.S. and many other countries interpret UNCLOS as allowing freedom of
navigation and overflight through EEZs, contrary to China's interpretation that it can regulate both economic
activities and military movements within its EEZ.
 UNCLOS Provisions: UNCLOS allows countries to claim 12-nautical-mile territorial seas and 200-nautical-mile
EEZs around their coastlines and habitable land features. Non-habitable but naturally formed land features that
remain above water at high tide only get 12-nautical-mile territorial seas and do not qualify for EEZs.
 Safety and Security Concerns: There have been increasing incidents of unsafe maneuvers by PRC military and
non-military vessels and aircraft in the SCS, challenging safety norms and international agreements on maritime
and air safety, as reported by the U.S. Department of Defense. The period 2021-2022 saw a significant rise in such
unsafe and unprofessional behaviors.
 Tensions with the Philippines:
o 2013-2016 Dispute: After China took control of Scarborough Shoal in 2012, the Philippines sought UNCLOS
arbitration in 2013.
o 2016 UNCLOS Tribunal Ruling: The tribunal invalidated China's nine-dash line claim, recognizing that
China had interfered with Philippine maritime activities, damaged the marine environment, and conducted
illegal reclamation in the Philippines' EEZ.
 China’s Island-Building Activities:

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 136 of 348

 1

o 2013-2015 Operations: China constructed artificial islands on seven features in the Spratly Islands,
creating approximately five square miles of new land.
o Militarization: These artificial islands now host military-grade infrastructure including anti-ship and anti-
aircraft missile systems.
o Comparison with Other Claimants: While other nations have also engaged in construction on occupied
features, China's activities are notable for their scale and the level of militarization.
 Stalled Regional Cooperation:
o ASEAN and China: Talks for a binding code of conduct in the SCS started in 2002 between China and ASEAN
members.
o Progress and Challenges: Negotiations have been slow, with accusations that China is delaying the process
to solidify its strategic advantages in the region.

India’s Stand on the SCS:

 2016 Tribunal Ruling: Post-Philippines vs. China arbitration, India merely noted the ruling, maintaining
neutrality to avoid siding against China.
 Shift in Stance by 2020: India and the Philippines emphasized peaceful dispute resolution under international
law, marking a shift from India’s previous neutral position.
 Joint Exercises: India conducted naval exercises with the US, Japan, Philippines in 2019, and with ASEAN nations
in 2021 and 2023, signaling increased presence in the South China Sea.
 Support to Philippines and Vietnam: India has expanded military sales, including a deal with the Philippines
for BrahMos missiles and supplying a missile frigate to Vietnam in 2023.
 Galwan Valley Incident: Ongoing border tensions with China, including incursions and renaming of Indian
territories, influence India’s stance in the South China Sea.
 Importance of Southeast Asia: The region acts as a gateway to the Indian Ocean, essential for India’s trade
security and strategic dominance.
 From Look East to Act East: Reflects a strategic shift to active engagement and security cooperation with Indo-
Pacific nations to counter China’s dominance.
 ONGC Videsh’s Involvement: Participation in oil and gas explorations in Vietnam’s EEZs underscores India’s
interest in energy resources and maritime trade security.
 Quad Alliance: Shared concerns with the US regarding freedom of navigation and China’s activities in the South
China Sea.
 Supporting ASEAN Centrality: India’s policy underscores support for ASEAN’s central role in regional security
dynamics, despite internal differences within ASEAN.

CHINA-TAIWAN DISPUTE:
 Taiwan's Geopolitical Significance: Taiwan is situated in the Taiwan Strait, part of the "first island chain"
which is strategically important for US foreign policy due to its proximity to US-friendly territories. It is
north of the Philippines and the South China Sea, about 180 km off the south-eastern coast of China.
 It is separated from the mainland by the Taiwan Strait.
 Separate Governance: Since 1949, Taiwan, officially the Republic of China (ROC), has been governed
independently from the People’s Republic of China (PRC) located on mainland China.
 Current Political Climate:
o US-China Relations: Taiwan has become a potential flashpoint in U.S.-China relations, particularly following
significant events like the visit of US House Speaker Nancy Pelosi in August 2022, which escalated tensions.
o PRC’s Stance: The PRC considers Taiwan a renegade province and has expressed intentions to unify it with
the mainland.
o Taiwan’s Government: Taiwan features a democratically elected government and hosts a population of
about twenty-three million people, with its political leaders having varied perspectives on the island’s status
and its relationship with the mainland.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 137 of 348

 1

Origins of the Dispute:

 Early Settlements and Historical Governance:
 Austronesian Origins: The first known settlers in Taiwan were Austronesian tribal people from modern-day
southern China.
 Chinese Historical Records: Taiwan was first documented in Chinese records in 239 CE during an exploratory
mission by an emperor.
 Dutch Colonization: Controlled by the Dutch from 1624 to 1661.
 Qing Dynasty Rule: Administered by China’s Qing dynasty from 1683 until 1895.
 Japanese Rule: Following the First Sino-Japanese War, Taiwan was ceded to Japan in 1895 and remained under
Japanese control until the end of World War II in 1945.
 Modern Political Developments:
 Post-World War II: After Japan's surrender, Taiwan was placed under the administrative control of the Republic
of China (ROC) with the support of the US and the UK.
 Civil War and ROC Relocation: Following the Chinese civil war and the rise of the Communist Party in mainland
China in 1949, the ROC government retreated to Taiwan.
 Democratization Efforts: Taiwan underwent significant democratization, particularly under President Lee
Teng-hui, who initiated constitutional reforms leading to the election of the island’s first non-Kuomintang
president in 2000.
 International Status and Conflicts:
 Changing International Recognition: Initially, the ROC represented China in the United Nations until 1971
when the UN recognized the People's Republic of China (PRC). The US established formal ties with Beijing in
1979.
 Diplomatic Recognition: Presently, only about 15 countries officially recognize the ROC.
 Political Status: Taiwan operates like an independent state but lacks wide formal international recognition due
to PRC opposition.
 Relations with China:
 One Country, Two Systems Proposal: China has proposed that Taiwan could enjoy significant autonomy under
Beijing’s control, a proposition Taiwan has rejected.
 1992 Consensus Dispute: Both sides allege a consensus in 1992, but disagree on its terms, particularly
regarding Taiwan's legal status.
 Recent Tensions: Increased pressure from Beijing on international entities to recognize Taiwan as part of China,
coupled with economic interdependencies and political assertiveness from the PRC, notably through actions in
Hong Kong.
International Community on Taiwan:
 US Policy Shifts:
o 1979 Changes: The US switched diplomatic recognition from Taipei (ROC) to Beijing (PRC),
acknowledging the "One-China" policy, but terminated its mutual defense treaty with Taiwan.
o Strategic Ambiguity: Despite recognizing Beijing, the US maintains a policy of strategic ambiguity,
indicating potential military support for Taiwan if China attempts an invasion.
 Military Support and Tensions:
o Arms Sales: The US continues to sell defensive weapons to Taiwan, a policy intensified during the Trump
administration and continued under Biden, contributing to heightened Sino-American tensions.
o Nancy Pelosi’s Visit: The 2022 visit by US House Speaker Nancy Pelosi to Taiwan significantly escalated
tensions, leading to large-scale Chinese military exercises in the Taiwan Strait.
 International Representation for Taiwan:
o Exclusion from Global Bodies: China opposes Taiwan’s participation in UN agencies and most international
organizations that require statehood for membership.
o Support for Inclusion: The US supports Taiwan's meaningful participation in international forums,
including the WHO, especially highlighted during the COVID-19 pandemic for Taiwan's effective pandemic
response.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 138 of 348

 1

 Taiwan’s International Participation:

o Member Status: Taiwan participates in over forty international organizations, mostly regional, such as
the Asian Development Bank and the Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation, plus the World Trade Organization.
o Diplomatic Relations: Only fourteen countries maintain official diplomatic relations with Taiwan. No
country holds formal diplomatic ties with both China and Taiwan simultaneously.
 Impact of US-China-Taiwan Tensions:
o Military Assertiveness: Increased military activity by China in the Taiwan Strait could potentially lead to
US-China confrontations.
o Economic Repercussions: Any conflict in the Taiwan Strait threatens global trade routes and could disrupt
international supply chains, particularly affecting Taiwan’s critical semiconductor industry.
 India’s Position and Relations with Taiwan:
o Diplomatic Stance: India adheres to the One-China policy and does not have formal diplomatic relations
with Taiwan.
o Economic and Cultural Ties: Since 1995, India and Taiwan have maintained representative offices
functioning as de facto embassies, enhancing trade, investment, and bilateral cooperation under India's Act
East Policy.
o Bilateral Organizations: The India-Taipei Association (ITA) in Taipei and the Taipei Economic and
Cultural Centre (TECC) in New Delhi facilitate these exchanges.

INDIAN-NEPAL BORDER CONTROVERSY

Key Disputed Areas:
 Kalapani, Limpiadhura, and Lipulekh: Located at the India-Nepal-China trijunction in Uttarakhand’s
Pithoragarh district, covering a 372-sq-km area. This region is crucial due to its strategic location near the
border with China.
 Susta Region: Situated in West Champaran district, Bihar, covering a 145-sq-km area. Dispute arose due to
the shifting course of the Gandak River, which altered the territorial boundaries defined by historical treaties.
Origins of the Dispute:
 Treaty of Sugauli (1816): This treaty between the Kingdom of Nepal and British India established the Kali
River as the western boundary of Nepal with India. Conflicts arise due to varying interpretations of the river’s
source:
o Nepal's Claim: Nepal identifies the Kali River with the river flowing west of Kalapani, asserting that its
source is at Limpiadhura or Lipulekh Pass within Nepalese territory.
o India's Claim: India contends that the Kali River originates from a rivulet named Pankhagad south of
Kalapani, placing the region within Indian territory.
Limpiyadhura and Lipulekh:
 Geographical Importance: These areas are near the Nepal-Tibet border, with Lipulekh serving as a vital pass to
Taklakot in Tibet, China.
 Nepal’s Allegations: Nepal claims that these territories were encroached upon by the Indian army post the 1962
conflict with China, based on historical offerings by King Mahendra of Nepal.
Susta Region Dispute:
 River Dynamics: The shifting course of the Gandak River has placed Susta on the eastern bank, which as per
the Treaty of Sugauli, would make it Indian territory. However, Nepal does not recognize this change,
maintaining its claim over the land on the historical western bank of the river.
Significance of Resolving the Dispute:
 Bilateral Relations: Timely and amicable resolution of these disputes is crucial for maintaining and enhancing
the long-standing friendly relations between India and Nepal.
 Regional Stability: Resolving border disputes is essential for regional stability, especially given the strategic
locations of the disputed areas near China.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 139 of 348

 1

Timeline of Resolution actions:

1. Establishment of Boundary Working Group (1980s): India and Nepal set up the Joint Technical Level
Boundary Working Group tasked with delineating their border, successfully resolving most areas except Kalapani
and Susta.
2. Kalapani Issue Addressed (1988 & 1997): Nepal officially raised the Kalapani issue in 1988. In 1997, Indian
Prime Minister I.K. Gujral promised to resolve the dispute if Nepal could provide evidence supporting its claims.
3. Prime Ministerial-Level Talks (2000): Discussions between PM Atal Bihari Vajpayee and Nepal PM G.P. Koirala
aimed to demarcate outstanding areas by 2002; however, progress stalled.
4. Renewed Efforts (2014): PM Narendra Modi and his Nepali counterpart, Sushil Prasad Koirala, agreed to
establish a boundary working group to expedite the resolution of Kalapani and Susta disputes.
5. Constitutional Amendment by Nepal: Recent actions include Nepal’s parliament passing a Constitutional
Amendment Bill to incorporate Kalapani, Lipulekh, and Limpiyadhura into its official map, escalating tensions.

BOMBAY HIGH COURT RULED DOWN THE AMENDED IT RULES, 2023

 The Bombay High Court struck down the Amended IT Rules, 2023.
 These rules had allowed the establishment of a Fact Check Unit (FCU) by the Centre for monitoring
misinformation related to the government.
Background of the Case:
 In April 2023, the Ministry of Electronics and IT (MEiTY) amended the Information Technology (IT) Rules, 2021.
 Purpose of the amendment: To establish an FCU to identify and address "fake, false, and misleading"
information about the Central government on social media platforms.
Arguments Presented:
 Stand-up comic Kunal Kamra, the Editors’ Guild of India, the News Broadcasters & Digital Association, and the
Association of Indian Magazines challenged the constitutional validity of the Rules.
 The Centre argued that the Rules were not meant to curb opinion, criticism, satire, or humor but to prohibit the
spreading of fake, false, and misleading facts related to government business on social media.

Decision by Justice Chandurkar:

 On August 8, after concluding the hearings, he reserved his verdict.
 Justice Chandurkar struck down the amended IT Rules, finding them violative of Articles 14, 19(1)(a), and
19(1)(g) of the Constitution.
 He noted the terms “fake, false, or misleading” as vague and overbroad, leading to potential misuse and a chilling
effect on freedoms.
 Justice Chandurkar emphasized that ensuring only 'non-misleading' information reaches the public is not a state
responsibility.

Views of Other Justices:

 Justice Patel supported striking down the amendment, viewing it as coercive classification of speech and a form
of censorship.
 Justice Gokhale provided a contrasting view, stating that alleging bias against FCU members due to their
government appointments was unfair, and found the challenge to the FCU’s character premature.

Procedural Outcome:
 Justice Chandurkar’s opinion leads to a 2-1 majority favoring the petitioners.
 The case will be formally concluded by a division bench of two judges, which will announce the majority decision
against the impugned Rule.
 There is potential for an appeal before the Supreme Court.

Reason Behind the Strike Down:

 The court found the amended IT Rules, 2023, to be in violation of constitutional rights:
o Article 14: Right to equality.
o Article 19: Freedom of speech and expression.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 140 of 348

 1

o Article 19(1)(g): Freedom to practice any profession.

 The terms “fake, false, and misleading” were deemed vague, with no clear definitions provided.
 Concerns raised about potential misuse and arbitrary censorship by the government, which could undermine
democratic principles.

Fact Checking Unit (FCU):

 Established under the Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology.
 Designated as a statutory body within the Press Information Bureau (PIB).
 Role: To flag false information related to the central government and its agencies on social media platforms.

Amended IT Rules, 2023:

 Online intermediaries (social media platforms like Facebook, YouTube, and Twitter, and ISPs such as Airtel, Jio,
Vodafone Idea) must prevent the dissemination of inaccurate government-related information.
 These platforms are required to make efforts to avoid hosting content flagged as false or misleading by the FCU.
 If the FCU identifies information as false, intermediaries must remove it.
 Failure to comply could result in the loss of safe harbour protection, exposing them to legal actions related to
third-party content.

Definition of Intermediary:
 Defined under Section 2(1)(w) of the Information Technology Act 2000.
 Includes network service providers, telecom service providers, internet service providers, search engines, web-
hosting service providers, online auction sites, online payment sites, online marketplaces, and cyber cafes.

Criteria for Exemption (Section 79(1)):

 Intermediaries are exempt from liability for third-party information if:
o Their role is only to provide access to a communication system used for transmitting, hosting, or storing
information.
o They do not initiate the transmission, select the receiver of the transmission, or modify the information
contained in the transmission.
Conditions for Intermediary Liability (Section 79(3)):
 Intermediaries can be held liable for third-party content in specific situations:
o Involvement in unlawful acts such as conspiracy, abetting, aiding, or inducing.
o Failure to promptly remove or disable access to unlawful material upon receiving actual knowledge or
notification from the government, without tampering with evidence.

DELISTING OF CENTRALLY PROTECTED MONUMENTS BY ASI

 ASI plans to delist 18 centrally protected monuments.
 These monuments are part of a list of 24 "untraceable" monuments previously identified by ASI.
 "Untraceable" refers to monuments whose exact location and condition cannot be confirmed due to urbanization,
remote location challenges, or dense forests.
Criteria for Delisting:
 The decision to delist is based on an assessment that these monuments do not hold national importance.
 A report titled "Issues relating to Untraceable Monuments and Protection of Monuments in India" was submitted
to Parliament by the Ministry of Culture, influencing this decision.
 The Ministry of Culture reported to the Parliamentary Standing Committee on Transport, Tourism and Culture
that 50 out of India’s 3,693 centrally protected monuments were missing.
Examples of Monuments Facing Delisting:
 Kos Minar No.13 at Mujessar village in Haryana: A medieval highway milestone from the Mughal period.
 Gunner Burkill’s tomb in Jhansi district.
 Telia Nala Buddhist ruins in Varanasi.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 141 of 348

 1

Historical Significance of Kos-Minars:

 Kos-minars were erected during the reign of Mughal Emperor Jahangir and are considered the earliest known
examples of road milestones in Indian history.
 The concept was initiated by Mughal Emperor Akbar in A.D. 1575 for administrative convenience and to aid
travelers.
Definition of Delisting:
 Delisting a monument means it no longer receives conservation, protection, and maintenance from the ASI.
 Once a monument is delisted, the area can be used for regular construction and urbanization activities.
Legal Framework for Delisting:
 Delisting is conducted under Section 35 of The Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Sites and Remains
(AMASR) Act, 1958.
 This section empowers the Central Government to declare whether an ancient and historical monument or
archaeological site and remains have ceased to be of national importance.
Terminology and Constitutional Mandate:
 The term “Missing Monuments” is not mentioned in the AMASR Act but was used by the CAG Audit team in their
report.
 Article 49 of the Indian Constitution directs the state to protect monuments, places, and objects of national
importance across the country.
Overview of the AMASR Act, 1958:
 Aims to preserve ancient and historical monuments and archaeological sites and remains of national importance.
 Regulates archaeological excavations and the protection of sculptures, carvings, and similar objects.
 Section 4 allows the Central Government to declare monuments and sites as being of National Importance.
National Monuments Authority (NMA):
 Established under the AMASR (Amendment and Validation) Act, 2010.
 Functions under the Ministry of Culture.
 Responsible for the protection and preservation of monuments and sites, managing prohibited and regulated
areas around centrally protected monuments.
 Grants permissions for construction-related activities within these zones.

Challenges in Protecting Monuments:

 Uniform Restrictions: Imposes standard 100-meter prohibited and 200-meter regulated zones around
monuments, which may not be adequate due to unique characteristics of each site.
 Coverage Gaps: Smaller monuments not on national or state lists lack legal protection, making them susceptible
to development pressures and neglect.
 Limited Powers of ASI: Faces challenges like encroachment and delays in publishing notifications, which hinder
effective protection.
 Staffing and Budget Constraints: ASI has limited manpower and budget, affecting security measures and
making monuments prone to theft and vandalism.
 According to a 2022 report by the Ministry of Culture, only 248 out of 3693 protected monuments have assigned
guards.

Overview of ASI:
 The ASI operates under the Union Ministry of Culture.
 It is tasked with the protection and maintenance of monuments and archaeological sites declared of national
importance under The Ancient Monuments Preservation Act, 1904, and The Ancient Monuments and
Archaeological Sites and Remains Act, 1958 (AMASR Act).

Functions of ASI:
 Conducts surveys of antiquarian remains.
 Engages in the exploration and excavation of archaeological sites.
 Responsible for the conservation and maintenance of protected monuments.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 142 of 348

 1

Historical Background:
 Founded in 1861 by Alexander Cunningham.
 Alexander Cunningham is recognized as the "Father of Indian Archaeology" and was the first Director-General of
ASI.

VVPAT AND ITS IMPACT ON ELECTION TRANSPARENCY AND RIGHT TO

PRIVACY OF CANDIDATES
 In 2023, the Association for Democratic Reforms (ADR) filed a petition raising concerns about the potential
manipulation of Electronic Voting Machines (EVMs).
 ADR made three requests:
1. Return to the paper ballot system.
2. The printed slip from the Voter Verifiable Paper Audit Trail (VVPAT) machine should be given to the voter
for verification and placed in a ballot box for counting.
3. 100% counting of VVPAT slips in addition to the electronic counting by the control unit.

Supreme Court's Judgment:

 Verification of VVPAT:
o Recognized the fundamental right of voters to ensure their vote is accurately recorded and counted.
o Clarified that this right does not include counting all VVPAT slips or physically accessing these slips.
 Return to Paper Ballot:
o The court refused the request to return to the paper ballot system, citing sufficient checks and protocols to
ensure the legitimacy and integrity of EVMs and the election process.

Directions Issued:
 Strengthening of Symbol Loading Unit (SLU) Protocol:
o After completing the symbol loading process in the VVPAT, the SLU will be sealed and secured in containers,
which are to be signed by candidates or their representatives.
o These sealed containers are to be stored in strong rooms with the EVMs for at least 45 days post the
declaration of election results.
 Verification of Burnt Memory:
o Verification of the burnt memory semi-controller of 5% of EVMs per assembly segment of a parliamentary
constituency.
o This verification is applicable upon a written request from either of the two runners-up candidates within 7
days post the announcement of the result.

"Journey of EVM-VVPAT":
 1982: EVMs were first utilized in an assembly by-election in Kerala.
 1989: The Representation of the People Act, 1951 was amended to officially permit the use of EVMs in elections.
 2004: EVMs were adopted for use in General Elections across India and have been used in all elections since this
adoption.
 2013: The Supreme Court, in the case Subramanian Swamy v. Election Commission of India, mandated the
use of Voter Verifiable Paper Audit Trail (VVPAT) systems with EVMs to enhance electoral transparency.
 2019: The Supreme Court, in N. Chandrababu Naidu and Others v. Union of India and Another, ruled that at
least 5 EVMs per assembly constituency or assembly segment in a parliamentary constituency must undergo
VVPAT verification to ensure the accuracy of the electoral process.

Milestones in VVPAT Usage:

 2017 Legislative Assembly Elections: Goa became the first state in India to use Voter Verifiable Paper Audit
Trail (VVPAT) with all Electronic Voting Machines (EVMs).
 2019 Lok Sabha General Elections: VVPATs were fully deployed across all constituencies, marking the first
nationwide implementation in a general election.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 143 of 348

 1

Overview of EVM:
 EVMs are portable, microcontroller-based devices designed to modernize the election process.
 Manufactured and supplied by Bharat Electronics Limited (under the Ministry of Defense) and Electronic
Corporation of India Limited (under the Department of Atomic Energy).

Components of EVM:
 Ballot Unit: Functions as a keyboard with 16 buttons/keys for voting.
 Control Unit: Acts as the master unit, operated by the polling or presiding officer.
 VVPAT (Voter Verifiable Paper Audit Trail): Allows voters to verify their votes are cast as intended by printing
a slip with the candidate's serial number, name, and symbol, which is visible for 7 seconds before being
automatically cut and dropped into a sealed box.

Advantages of EVM-VVPAT:
 Operates on battery power, eliminating the need for external power sources.
 Prevents invalid votes, similar to paper ballot systems.
 Limits voting to no more than 4 votes per minute to prevent booth capturing.
 Voting ceases after the ‘CLOSE’ button on the control unit is pressed, ensuring vote finality.
 The ‘TOTAL’ button on the control unit displays the total number of votes polled up to that moment without
revealing candidate-specific vote counts.
 EVMs are designed to be tamper-resistant and cannot be pre-programmed in a spurious manner.

Purpose of Introduction:
 Introduced to enhance transparency in the electoral system and to bolster voter confidence by verifying the
accuracy of the vote recording process.

SC DELHI METRO CURATIVE PETITION

DMRC entered into a public-private partnership with DAMEPL in 2008 for the Delhi Airport Metro Express.
 DMRC was responsible for land acquisition and construction; DAMEPL was to design, install, and maintain the
railway systems and manage operations until 2038.
 Dispute arose over deferred payment requests by DAMEPL, citing delays and lack of retail activity.
 DAMEPL later terminated the agreement, citing safety concerns and technical issues for which they held DMRC
responsible, leading to arbitration.
o Legal Proceedings and Rulings:
 2017: Arbitration panel ruled in favor of Reliance, ordering DMRC to pay nearly Rs 8,000 crore.
 Delhi High Court Rulings:
 A single judge bench refused to interfere with the arbitration award.
 A division bench in 2019 overturned the arbitral award, favoring DMRC, citing overlooked facts and ambiguities.
 Supreme Court Rulings:
 In September 2021, the Supreme Court reversed the High Court's decision, emphasizing restraint in interfering
with arbitral awards to respect the arbitration process.
 A review petition against this judgment was dismissed in November 2021.
 In a curative petition, the Supreme Court overturned its 2021 decision, citing that the interference restored a
"patently illegal award" and placed an undue financial burden on DMRC, a public utility.
o Key Highlights of the Recent Judgment by Supreme Court:
 The Court observed no valid basis for its earlier interference under Article 136.
 Recognized the need to use Article 142 to rectify the serious injustice caused by restoring the arbitral
award, emphasizing the necessity of correcting the undue financial impact on DMRC.

Curative Petition Overview:

 A curative petition is the last constitutional remedy available after a review petition is dismissed by the
Supreme Court.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 144 of 348

 1

 Originated from the Supreme Court’s judgment in Rupa Ashok Hurra vs. Ashok Hurra.
 It's an innovative use of Article 142 of the Constitution, which allows the Supreme Court to pass any order
necessary to do complete justice in a case.
 Grounds for entertaining a curative petition include violation of natural justice, evidence of judicial bias, and
it must be certified by a senior advocate.

GOVERNMENT TO REVIEW REAL ESTATE (REGULATION AND

DEVELOPMENT) ACT, 2016 (RERA)
 Overview of RERA:
o Enacted in 2016 to regulate the real estate sector and enhance transparency, accountability, and efficiency.
o Aims to protect homebuyers and ensure fair practices within the real estate industry.

 Significance and Need for RERA:

o Real estate is a major investment sector, with more than 77% of the average Indian household’s assets held
in real estate.
o Prior to RERA, the real estate sector was largely unregulated, making it difficult for consumers to hold
builders and developers accountable.
o The Consumer Protection Act of 1986 was found inadequate for real estate complexities.
o RERA was introduced to create accountability, reduce frauds and delays, and establish a fast-track dispute
resolution mechanism.

 Key Provisions of RERA:

o State-Level Regulatory Authorities: States are required to establish Real Estate Regulatory Authority
(RERA) to register real estate projects, maintain databases, protect interests of various stakeholders, and
ensure compliance with regulations.
o Real Estate Appellate Tribunal: Establishes tribunals to hear appeals against decisions of RERAs.
o Mandatory Registration: Projects exceeding 500 sq. meters or eight apartments must register with RERA.
o Escrow Accounts: Requires 70% of funds collected from buyers to be kept in escrow accounts for
construction purposes.
o Developer Liability: Developers are liable for structural defects for five years post-construction.
o Interest on Defaults: Both promoters and buyers must pay an equal rate of interest on defaults.
o Advance Payment Cap: Promoters cannot accept more than 10% of the property cost as advance payment
without entering into a sale agreement.
o Carpet Area Definition: Charges are based on the carpet area (usable floor area) rather than the super built-
up area, which includes common spaces.

 Implementation of RERA:
o All States and UTs, except Nagaland, have notified rules under RERA.
o 32 States/UTs have established Real Estate Regulatory Authorities, and 28 States/UTs have set up Real Estate
Appellate Tribunals.
o As of now, 1,01,304 real estate projects and 72,012 real estate agents are registered under RERA.
o RERA authorities across the country have resolved 1,06,657 complaints.
Purpose of Review:
 To assess the effectiveness of RERA in achieving its goals such as enhancing transparency, accountability,
information dissemination, and grievance redressal in the real estate sector.
 Government conducts regular interactions with homebuyers and other stakeholders to collect feedback on their
experiences with RERA, aiming to identify and rectify any implementation shortcomings.
Data Collection Initiatives:
 The Ministry of Housing and Urban Affairs is establishing a data collection unit to monitor the functioning of the
RERAs.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 145 of 348

 1

 The data collected will include the number of projects approved, their progress, instances of delays, and other
pertinent metrics to help evaluate the overall impact of RERA.
Uniformity and Compliance:
 The government is working to ensure that the information on RERA websites across different states is uniform.
 Focus on compliance with the Act’s requirements for the mandatory publication of annual reports and quarterly
progress reports by builders.
 Issues have been raised about the absence of critical information on RERA websites and instances where RERAs
registered projects without proper verification of documents.
Potential Amendments:
 The ongoing review process by the government may lead to future amendments to the Act.
 This approach indicates a commitment to proactive governance, aiming to enhance the effectiveness of RERA
based on the insights gained during the review.

EUROPEAN UNION
 Establishment: Formed under the Maastricht Treaty, which took effect on November 1, 1993.
 Member States: Comprises 27 countries located primarily in Europe.
 Primary Objectives: Promotes cooperation and integration among member states to enhance economic and
political stability across Europe.
 Euro Currency: Adopted by 19 of the 27 member states, serving as the common currency.
 Single Market: Facilitates the free movement of goods, services, and capital among the member states,
promoting economic integration and efficiency.
Evolution of the EU:
 Post-World War II Initiatives:
o Formed to promote peace, stability, and prosperity across Europe after the devastations of WWII.
 Key Milestones:
o European Economic Community (EEC), 1957: Established by the Treaty of Rome to foster economic
cooperation and create a common market among its members.
o European Free Trade Association, 1960: Founded to enhance free trade and economic integration among
non-EEC European countries.
o Direct Elections to European Parliament, 1979: Marked the first instance of direct public participation in
EU governance.
o Erasmus Programme, 1987: Launched to fund educational exchanges for university students within
Europe.
o Maastricht Treaty, 1993: Transformed the EEC into the EU, broadening the integration to include political,
social, and security aspects, beyond just economic.
o Euro Introduction, 1999: The euro was adopted as the official currency for commercial and financial
transactions in 11 member states.
o Treaty of Lisbon, 2007: Aimed to enhance the EU’s efficiency, transparency, and democratic processes to
address global challenges like climate change.
o Croatia's Accession, 2013: Croatia became the 28th member of the EU.
o Brexit, 2016-2020: UK voted to leave the EU in 2016 and officially departed in 2020. The total number came
down to 27 Members again.

Governance Structure of the EU:

 Main Decision-Making Institutions:
o European Council: Comprises heads of state or government of EU member states, setting the political
direction and priorities.
o European Commission: Acts as the executive body, proposing legislation, implementing decisions,
upholding the EU treaties, and managing day-to-day operations.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 146 of 348

 1

o European Parliament: Directly elected body representing EU citizens, sharing legislative and budgetary
powers with the Council of the EU.
o Council of the EU: Main decision-making body representing member states' governments, responsible for
adopting legislation and coordinating policies.
 Supporting Institutions and Bodies:
o Court of Justice of the European Union: Ensures uniform interpretation and application of EU law across
all member states.
o European Central Bank: Manages monetary policy of the eurozone, aiming to maintain price stability.
o European Court of Auditors: Monitors the EU’s finances, ensuring efficiency and accountability in the
management of resources.

Some Interesting facts on EU:

 EU Membership: Europe consists of 44 countries as per the United Nations, but only 27 countries are members
of the European Union as of 2024.
 Geographical Anomalies: Cyprus, geographically located in Asia, is considered a European country for political
and cultural reasons and is a member of the EU.
 Currency Usage: The Euro is the common currency for 19 of the 27 EU member states. Non-EU countries like
Montenegro and Kosovo also use the Euro, despite not being EU members.
 EU Symbols and Policies: The EU has established symbols like a flag and an anthem, and commemorates its
founding on May 9, known as Europe Day.
 While a Constitution for the EU was not adopted, it operates with a common foreign and security policy.
 Schengen Agreement: The Schengen Agreement allows visa holders from one Schengen member country to
travel freely among most of the other EU countries.

Economic Power of the EU:

 World's Largest Economy: The EU's combined GDP surpasses that of the United States, making it the world’s
biggest economy.
 Currency Influence: The euro presents a significant challenge to the dominance of the US dollar in global
markets.
 Trade Dominance: The EU's share of world trade is triple that of the United States, enhancing its capacity to be
assertive in international trade disputes, notably with the US and China.
 Regional Influence: Economically, the EU wields considerable influence over neighboring regions as well as in
Asia and Africa.
 Role in Global Organizations: The EU plays a crucial role in international economic institutions like the World
Trade Organisation (WTO).

Political and Diplomatic Powers of the EU:

 UN Security Council Representation: The EU includes Britain and France, both permanent members of the UN
Security Council, alongside several non-permanent members, collectively enhancing EU influence on global
diplomatic decisions.
 Diplomatic Approach: The EU prefers to utilize diplomacy, economic investments, and negotiations over
coercion and military force. Notable examples include dialogues with China regarding human rights and
environmental issues.

Military Powers of the EU:

 Military Capacity: Combined, the EU member states have the world’s second-largest armed forces in terms of
personnel.
 Defense Spending: The EU's total defense expenditure ranks second globally, following the United States.
 Nuclear Capabilities: Britain and France, both EU members, possess a significant nuclear arsenal with
approximately 550 nuclear warheads.
 Technological Advancement: The EU is a leading entity in the global space and communications technology
sectors.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 147 of 348

 1

WORLD AIR QUALITY REPORT, 2023

India is ranked as the world's third most polluted country, with an average annual PM2.5 concentration of 54.4
µg/m3.
 Neighboring Comparisons: Bangladesh and Pakistan are ranked as the most and second most polluted
countries respectively.
 City Rankings: 9 out of the 10 most polluted cities globally are in India. Remaining one is in Lahore, Pakistan.
 Capital Pollution: Delhi is noted as the world's most polluted capital city for the fourth consecutive year.
 Specific Area Mention: Begusarai in Bihar is identified as the world's most polluted metropolitan area, with
an average PM2.5 concentration of 118.9 µg/m3.
Health Impacts:
 Exposure Levels: Approximately 136 million Indians, accounting for 96% of the population, are exposed to
PM2.5 levels seven times higher than the WHO recommended maximum of 5 µg/m3.
 Urban Air Quality: Over 66% of Indian cities have annual PM2.5 averages exceeding 35 µg/m3.
 Health Consequences: PM2.5 pollution, mainly from burning fossil fuels, is linked to increased rates of heart
attacks, strokes, and oxidative stress, among other severe health issues.
Global Air Quality Insights:
 Compliant Countries: Countries including Australia, Estonia, Finland, Grenada, Iceland, Mauritius, and New
Zealand meet the WHO’s annual PM2.5 guideline of 5 µg/m3 or less.
 Data Availability: Africa remains the most underrepresented continent in terms of air quality data availability.
 Improvements and Challenges: Some nations like China and Chile have reported decreases in PM2.5 pollution
levels, indicating some progress in air pollution control.
 Transboundary Pollution: The report highlights that air pollution is not confined by borders, underscoring the
necessity for international cooperation to address air quality issues effectively.
Global Impact of Air Pollution:
 Mortality: Air pollution contributes to roughly seven million premature deaths annually worldwide, accounting
for about one in every nine deaths globally.
 Health Issues: PM2.5 exposure is associated with asthma, cancer, stroke, mental health issues, and can impair
children's cognitive development and exacerbate conditions like diabetes.
Particulate Matter
Definition: Particulate Matter (PM) consists of solid particles and liquid droplets suspended in the air.
Sources:
 PM is generated from activities like burning fossil fuels (e.g., gasoline, diesel, coal) and dust-generating actions.
 Larger particles primarily come from soil, while smaller particles result from the combustion of fossil fuels.
Categories of PM:
 Primary PM: Directly emitted from sources such as smokestacks or vehicle tailpipes.
 Secondary PM: Forms when gaseous emissions undergo chemical reactions downwind from their original
sources.

IMPORTANT EVENTS IN CRICKET

T20 World Cup 2024
 Inception of T20 World Cup: Introduced in 2007 as an international cricket championship, held biennially.
 Expansion of Teams: Started with 12 teams in 2007; expanded to 16 teams in 2014 and to 20 teams by the
2024 edition.
 India's Performance:
o Won the inaugural T20 World Cup in 2007, defeating Pakistan in the final.
o Finished as runners-up in 2014, losing to Sri Lanka.
o Won the 2024 T20 World Cup, marking their second T20 World Cup win.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 148 of 348

 1

 Team Achievements:
o India won the T20 World Cup twice (2007, 2024).
o West Indies also won twice (2012, 2016).
o England secured the title in 2010 and 2022.
 2022 Achievements:
o England became the first team to hold both the men’s T20 World Cup and the ODI World Cup simultaneously.
 Key Performers of 2024 T20 World Cup:
o Virat Kohli became the leading run-scorer in T20 World Cup history with 1292 runs across 35 matches since
2012.
o Shakib Al Hasan recorded as the top wicket-taker with 50 wickets in 43 matches from 2007 to 2024.
 2024 T20 World Cup Final Highlights:
o Player of the Match: Virat Kohli.
o Player of the Tournament: Jasprit Bumrah.
 Most wickets in the 2024 edition: Arshdeep Singh (India) and Fazalhaq Farooqi (Afghanistan) with 17 wickets
each.
 Lowest economy rate in the 2024 edition: Jasprit Bumrah with 4.17.
 Historic Achievements in 2024:
o India became the first team to win the T20 World Cup undefeated.
o India defended their total in the final, marking only the third occurrence of a team winning the final by
defending a target (after 2007 and 2012).
 Retirements Announced Post-2024 World Cup: Virat Kohli, Rohit Sharma, and Ravindra Jadeja announced
retirement from T20 internationals post-victory.
 Prize Money: BCCI announced a prize of Rs 125 crore for the Indian team following their 2024 World Cup win.

Virat Kohli's ICC ODI Player of the Year Awards:

 Won ICC ODI Player of the Year for the fourth time in 2023.
 Previous wins were in 2012, 2017, and 2018.
 Became the first cricketer to win the ICC ODI Player of the Year award four times, surpassing the previous record
held by AB de Villiers.
Updates on Asia Cup
 2025 Men’s Asia Cup Hosting: Scheduled to be hosted by India.
 Format: T20, in preparation for the 2026 T20 World Cup.
o 2027 Asia Cup to be hosted by Bangladesh in ODI format, aligning with the ODI World Cup in South Africa.
o Each of the 2025 and 2027 Asia Cups will feature 13 matches.
 Participation in Asia Cup: Features senior teams from ACC member countries: Afghanistan, India, Pakistan, Sri
Lanka, Bangladesh, and one additional qualifying team.
 Historical Context and Achievements:
o Established in 1984 with the first tournament held in Bangladesh.
o India holds the record for most titles won, with 8 victories.
o Notable historical figures include Wasim Akram of Pakistan as the leading wicket-taker and Sri Lanka’s
Arjuna Ranatunga as a celebrated captain.
o The 2023 tournament saw Nepal participating for the first time.

Gautam Gambhir: New Head Coach of the Indian men’s cricket team
 Gautam Gambhir named new head coach of the Indian men’s cricket team by BCCI Secretary Jay Shah.
 Gautam Gambhir, a former professional cricket player, significantly contributed to India's victories in the T20
2007 and ODI World Cup 2011.
 Known for his strategic acumen, Gambhir transitioned to coaching, leading Kolkata Knight Riders (KKR) to an
IPL title in 2024.
 He captained KKR to two IPL championships during his playing career.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 149 of 348

 1

 Rahul Dravid, previous head coach, stepped down after leading India to a T20 World Cup victory.
 Gambhir's coaching approach prioritizes the team's performance in upcoming international competitions.

BCCI Awards, 2024

 BCCI Awards, 2024 held on January 23, 2024, in Hyderabad, honoring Indian cricketers for their performances
in domestic and international cricket.
 Jasprit Bumrah, Shubman Gill, and Ravichandran Ashwin awarded for their international performances for the
2022-23, 2021-22, and 2019-20 seasons, respectively.
 Ravichandran Ashwin recognized for the highest wickets in the India vs West Indies Test series and
received his second Polly Umrigar Award.
 Smriti Mandhana and Deepti Sharma honored for their outstanding performances over the last five
seasons in women's cricket.
 Ravi Shastri and Farokh Engineer received the Col. CK Nayudu Lifetime Achievement Awards for their
contributions to Indian cricket.
 State teams Saurashtra (2022-23), Mumbai (2021-22), and Madhya Pradesh (2020-21) recognized for their
Ranji Trophy achievements.
 Young cricketers like Yashasvi Jaiswal and Shafali Verma acknowledged for their potential and performance.
 Kashvee Gautam highlighted as the most expensive pick in the Women’s Premier League (WPL) shortly before
receiving the Best Junior Women’s Cricketer award.

New ICC President Appointed

 Jay Shah elected as the new chairman of the International Cricket Council (ICC), starting from December
1, 2024.
 He is the youngest person ever elected as ICC chairman at the age of 35.
 Shah holds the position of secretary at the Board of Control for Cricket in India (BCCI).
 He will succeed Greg Barclay of New Zealand as ICC chairman.
 Jay Shah is the fifth Indian to hold the ICC chairman position, following Jagmohan Dalmiya, Sharad Pawar, N
Srinivasan, and Shashank Manohar.
 The ICC, originally named the Imperial Cricket Conference, was founded in 1909 and renamed as the
International Cricket Council in 1989.
 The ICC is the international governing body responsible for organizing major cricket tournaments like the ICC
Cricket World Cup, ICC T20 World Cup, and ICC Champions Trophy.
 As of 2024, the ICC comprises 108 members, including 12 Full Members who are eligible to play Test matches
and 96 Associate Members.
 The headquarters of the ICC is located in Dubai, UAE.

MISSION SAGAR
 India's SAGAR Vision: Launched in 2015 as "Security and Growth for All in the Region," aimed at enhancing
maritime security, cooperation, and the maritime commons.
 Mission Sagar I: Initiated by India in May 2020, aimed at providing essential assistance to Indian Ocean
countries during the COVID-19 pandemic.
 Mission Alignment: Part of India's SAGAR (Security and Growth for All in the Region) initiative but distinct
in focus; Mission Sagar emphasizes humanitarian outreach, while SAGAR is a broader maritime cooperation
policy.
 INS Kesari Deployment: In a recent activity under Mission Sagar, INS Kesari delivered 500 tonnes of food aid
to Mozambique, addressing drought and pandemic challenges.
 India also provided Mozambique with two fast interceptor crafts and self-defense military equipment.
 Mission Sagar Details:
o Launched: May 2020.
o Assistance Provided: Over 3,000 metric tons of food aid, more than 300 metric tons of liquid medical
oxygen, 900 oxygen concentrators, and 20 ISO containers to 15 countries.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 150 of 348

 1

o Countries Covered: Maldives, Mauritius, Madagascar, Comoros, and Seychelles initially; extended to include
Sudan, South Sudan, Djibouti, Eritrea, Vietnam, Cambodia, and others.
 Mission Sagar II: Launched in November 2020, INS Airavat delivered food aid to Sudan, South Sudan, Djibouti,
and Eritrea.
 Mission Sagar III: Launched in December 2020, INS Kiltan delivered disaster relief to Vietnam and Cambodia.
 Significance of Missions: Demonstrates India’s role as a first responder in its extended Maritime
Neighbourhood, enhancing regional cooperation and addressing maritime challenges.
 Related Indian Maritime Policies: Includes Act East Policy, Project Sagarmala, Project Mausam, positioning
India as a 'net security provider', and focusing on the Blue Economy.
 Mission Sagar IV: Conducted in March 2021, INS Jalashwa delivered 1000 metric tonnes of rice to Comoros,
marking India’s continued engagement with the region.
 Observer Member in IOC: India joined the Indian Ocean Commission as an observer, supporting its strategic
vision in the Indian Ocean.
 Goals of SAGAR:
o Deepen economic and security cooperation with maritime neighbors.
o Assist in building maritime security capabilities through information exchange, coastal surveillance, and
infrastructure development.
o Ensure the Indian Ocean region is inclusive, collaborative, and adheres to international law.
 Blue Economy Significance:
o Contributes to India’s socio-economic objectives such as livelihood generation, energy security, and
ecological resilience.
o Oceans are crucial for global trade (80% of transportation), food, and livelihood for a substantial global
population.
o Seabed provides 32% of global hydrocarbons, with potential for renewable blue energy (wind, wave, tidal,
thermal, biomass).
o Emerging technologies enable marine resource development, including bio-prospecting and seabed mineral
mining.
 Regional Challenges:
o Provide humanitarian aid during natural disasters.
o Counteract piracy and terrorism by non-state actors.
o Achieve sustainable development through integrated and cooperative regional strategies.
 Countering Chinese Influence:
o China’s Maritime Silk Route, part of the Belt and Road Initiative, aims to increase its influence in the Indian
Ocean.
o China's investments in neighboring countries often have commercial aims with military underpinnings,
raising strategic concerns for India.
 Significance and Impact of SAGAR:
o Expands strategic partnerships with Indian Ocean Region (IOR) littorals in Asia and Africa.
o Asserts India’s leadership role and long-term responsibilities in the region through transparent capacity
building and capability enhancement.
o Aligns with other Indian maritime policies such as the Act East Policy, Project Sagarmala, Project Mausam,
and India as a ‘net security provider’.
o Positions maritime issues at the center of India’s foreign policy, indicating maritime resurgence.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 151 of 348

 1

IMPORTANT UPDATES ON BRIC

BRICS Expansion: Egypt, Iran, UAE, Saudi Arabia, and Ethiopia joined BRICS, effective from January 1, 2024.
Energy Reserves Access Through New Members:
 Saudi Arabia: Enhances BRICS' energy cooperation by directing oil exports increasingly towards China and
India.
 Iran: Continues to expand oil exports to China despite international sanctions, highlighting its pivotal role in
energy supply within BRICS.
Diversification of Energy Sources:
 Russia: Seeks new markets within BRICS for its energy exports, reducing reliance on traditional Western markets
and enhancing the coalition's overall energy security.
Strategic Maritime Influence:
 Egypt and Ethiopia: Their inclusion in BRICS boosts the group’s geopolitical influence by providing greater
access and control over key maritime trade routes in the Horn of Africa and the Red Sea region.
BRICS Overview:
 Acronym for Brazil, Russia, India, China, and South Africa, representing major emerging economies.
 Economist Jim O'Neill created the term BRIC in 2001 (for Brazil, Russia, India, and China) with the belief that
these economies would dominate global growth by 2050.
 Convenes an annual Leaders’ Summit.
 The 15th BRICS Summit hosted by South Africa in 2023.
 The 16th BRICS Summit scheduled to be hosted by Russia in October 2024.
Evolution of BRICS:
 2006: BRIC concept formalized at the G8 Outreach Summit in St. Petersburg, Russia, and later at the 1st BRIC
Foreign Ministers' Meeting in New York.
 2009: First BRIC summit in Yekaterinburg, Russia.
 2010: South Africa joined, renaming BRIC to BRICS.
 2011: South Africa’s first summit attendance in China.
 2014: Adoption of the Fortaleza Declaration and establishment of the New Development Bank (NDB) at the 6th
BRICS Summit.
 2015: Ufa Declaration adopted at the 7th BRICS Summit in Ufa, Russia, addressing global governance and
security.
 2021: 13th Summit hosted virtually by India, marking India's third chairmanship.
 2022: Beijing Declaration supported Russia-Ukraine dialogue, with additional focus on COVID-19 and digital
transformation.
Functioning Principles:
 Governed by the principles of openness, pragmatism, solidarity, non-bloc nature, and neutrality regarding third-
party relations.
 Rotating chairmanship among member countries annually, with responsibilities and agenda set during summits.

BRICS Initiatives:
 Political and Security Cooperation: Focuses on global security issues, counterterrorism, and multilateral
system reforms.
 Economic and Financial Cooperation: Aims to boost economic growth through enhanced intra-BRICS
collaboration in trade, agriculture, SMEs, energy, finance, and banking.
 Contingent Reserve Arrangement (CRA):
o Established in 2015 as a financial safeguard.
o Total lending capacity of $100 billion.
o Capital contributions and fund access: China ($41 billion), Brazil ($18 billion), India ($18 billion), Russia
($18 billion), South Africa ($5 billion).
o Voting rights: China 39.95%, Brazil 18.10%, India 18.10%, Russia 18.10%, South Africa 5.75%.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 152 of 348

 1

New Development Bank:

 Established by BRICS during the Fortaleza Summit in 2014; began operations in 2015.
 Headquarters: Shanghai, China, with regional offices in South Africa and Brazil.
 Membership: Open to United Nations members; includes Bangladesh, United Arab Emirates, Egypt, and Uruguay
as new members.
 Voting Power: Based on subscribed shares, with BRICS nations holding no less than 55% collectively; no
single country has veto power.
 Funding Commitment: $32.8 billion allocated to 96 projects focusing on infrastructure and sustainable
development.
 BRICS Payment System: In development to serve as an alternative to the SWIFT system, aiming to reduce
reliance on the dollar-dominated global payment system.

Cultural and People-to-People Initiatives:

 BRICS Parliamentary Forum: Encourages legislative collaboration.
 BRICS Film Festival: Promotes cultural exchange through cinema.
 BRICS Youth Summit: Engages younger generations from member countries.
 BRICS Academic Forum (BAF): Facilitates scholarly discussions and collaborations.

India's Role and Benefits in BRICS:

 Strategic Cooperation: Engages on global issues including security, terrorism, climate change, and trade.
 Economic Benefits: Access to a combined market of over 3 billion people, enhancing trade and investment
opportunities.
 Multilateral Institution Reform: Collaborates in promoting reforms to create a more inclusive global order.
 South-South Cooperation: Leverages the platform for enhancing trade, investment, and technology transfer
among developing nations.
 Global Positioning: Recognized as a key player in shaping a new world order through BRICS, amidst evolving
geopolitical dynamics.

NEW ELECTRIC VEHICLE POLICY, 2024

 India's New Electric Vehicle Policy Overview:
o Customs Duty Reduction: EV imports on Completely Knocked Down (CKD) units subject to a 15%
customs duty for those with a minimum CIF value of USD 35,000, effective for 5 years.
o Import Cap and Investment Criteria: The policy limits EV imports to 8,000 units per year. Manufacturers
must invest at least Rs 4,150 crore (~USD 500 million) to qualify for duty concessions.
o Manufacturing Requirements: Companies are required to set up manufacturing facilities within 3 years
and achieve a minimum Domestic Value Addition (DVA) of 25% within that period, increasing to 50%
within 5 years from the approval date.
o Maximum Import Allowance: Companies investing over USD 800 million can import up to 40,000 EVs,
with an annual limit of 8,000 units.
o Carryover Provision: Unused annual import limits can be carried over to subsequent years.
o Duty Limitation: The total duty exemption is capped at either the actual investment made or Rs 6,484 crore
(equivalent to the incentive under the Production Linked Incentive (PLI) scheme for Automobile and Auto
Components), whichever is lower.
o Bank Guarantee Conditions: Returned only upon achieving 50% DVA and an investment of at least Rs
4,150 crore or to the extent of duty saved over 5 years, whichever is higher.
 Key Benefits of the Policy:
o Encourages innovation and technological advancement in EV technology.
o Supports domestic manufacturing, enhancing the 'Make in India' initiative.
o Aims to reduce crude oil imports and the trade deficit by promoting EV adoption.
o Contributes to air pollution reduction and aligns with India’s climate goals of reducing emissions intensity
by 45% by 2030 and achieving net-zero emissions by 2070.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 153 of 348

 1

 Strategic Impact:
o Designed to attract major global EV manufacturers by providing investment incentives and duty reductions.
o Targets companies like Tesla to establish manufacturing facilities in India by meeting their demands for tariff
concessions.
o Positions the EV sector as a significant component within India's vast automotive market, which significantly
contributes to the GDP and highlights its strategic importance.

Other Initiatives related to Electric Vehicles in India

 Electric Mobility Promotion Scheme (EMPS) 2024:
o Replaces the FAME-2 scheme to promote electric two-wheelers (e2W) and three-wheelers (e3W).
o Budget allocation: Rs 5 billion.
o Duration: April to July 2024, with potential extension or replacement afterward.
o Subsidy reduced to Rs 5,000 per kilowatt-hour of battery capacity, capped at Rs 10,000 per e2W.
o Expected to cover 333,387 e2Ws.
o Excludes electric four-wheelers (e4Ws) and electric buses.
 Phased Manufacturing Programme (PMP):
o Launched by the Ministry of Heavy Industries to boost domestic manufacturing of electric vehicles (EVs) and
their components.
o Implements a graded duty structure to encourage local production.
 National Mission on Transformative Mobility and Storage: Focuses on developing strategies for
transformative mobility and phased manufacturing of EVs, components, and batteries.
 EV30@30 campaign: India supports the global EV30@30 initiative aiming for at least 30% of new vehicle sales
to be electric by 2030.

STATE OF GLOBAL WATER RESOURCE REPORT, 2023

The latest annual State of Global Water Resource Report, 2023 issued by the World Meteorological Organization
(WMO) since 2021, provides an extensive and uniform analysis of global water resources.
o This report draws on contributions from numerous National Meteorological and Hydrological Services, along
with various other organizations and experts.

Key Observations from the Report:

 2023 Global Climate Overview: Recorded as the warmest year globally with temperatures averaging 1.45 ±
0.12 °C above pre-industrial levels.
 Greenhouse Gas Concentrations: Carbon dioxide (CO2), methane, and nitrous oxide reached their highest
recorded levels, intensifying the greenhouse effect.
 Oceanic Changes: Ocean heat content and global mean sea level achieved new record highs.
 Sea Level Rise Rate: The rate of sea level rise between 2014 and 2023 more than doubled compared to the rate
from 1993 to 2002.
 Antarctic Sea Ice: Reached a record low extent, signaling significant changes in polar regions.
 Glacier Retreat: Record ice loss observed in glaciers globally during the 2022-2023 hydrological year, notably
in western North America and Europe due to highly negative mass balances.
 Extreme Weather Events: Heatwaves, wildfires, and floods caused severe impacts on human populations and
ecosystems worldwide.
 Socioeconomic Impacts: Increased challenges in food security, higher rates of population displacement, and
heightened risks to vulnerable populations due to weather and climate hazards.

Global Hunger and Food Insecurity:

 Global hunger levels increased, with 9.2% of the global population (735.1 million people) undernourished in
2022, up from 7.9% (612.8 million) in 2019.
 The ongoing global food and nutrition crisis is the largest in modern history.
 Conflicts, economic downturns, high food prices, and climate extremes have worsened food insecurity
worldwide.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 154 of 348

 1

 Agricultural Losses:
o Droughts cause over 65% of losses in the agriculture sector globally.
o Floods, storms, and cyclones contribute to around 20% of agricultural losses.
Displacement Due to Climate Hazards:
 Weather-related hazards caused new, prolonged, and secondary displacements in 2023, increasing vulnerability.
 Climate-related displacements are often driven by multiple factors, including social, political, economic,
environmental, and demographic aspects.
 Climate shocks and stresses in displacement contexts worsen poverty, hunger, and inequality, limiting access to
essential services.
Extreme Weather and Climate Events in 2023:
 Mediterranean Cyclone Daniel: In September, caused severe rainfall and flooding, leading to over 4,700 deaths
in Libya.
 Tropical Cyclone Freddy: One of the longest-lived cyclones, causing flooding and loss of life in Mozambique,
Malawi, Madagascar, and Zimbabwe.
 Tropical Cyclone Mocha: Affected Bangladesh and Myanmar, with over 156 deaths in Myanmar, one of the most
intense cyclones in the Bay of Bengal.
 Hurricane Otis: Category 5 hurricane in Mexico, causing widespread destruction and estimated economic losses
of around US$12 billion.
 New Zealand's North Island: Experienced repeated extreme rainfall, flooding, and Cyclone Gabrielle, with
economic losses estimated at US$5.3 to 8.6 billion.
 Heatwaves in Europe and North Africa: Persistent heatwaves affected southern Europe and North Africa, with
record-breaking temperatures in Italy, Tunisia, Albania, Morocco, and Algeria.
 Canada's Wildfires: 2023 saw the worst wildfire season in Canadian history, with 14.9 million hectares burned.
 Hawaii Wildfire: The deadliest wildfire occurred in Maui, Hawaii, with over 100 deaths and destruction of over
2,200 structures.
 Droughts: Long-term droughts persisted in northwestern Africa, the Iberian Peninsula, central and southwest
Asia, and parts of Central and South America.
 Flooding in the Greater Horn of Africa: Heavy rains associated with El Nino and the positive Indian Ocean
Dipole caused significant flooding, displacing millions of people.
World Meteorological Organization (WMO):
 A specialized agency of the United Nations focused on atmospheric, oceanic, climatic, and water resources
matters.
 Became a UN specialized agency in 1951, dedicated to meteorology (weather and climate).
 Originated from the International Meteorological Organization (IMO), founded in 1873.
 Officially established in 1950.
 Has 193 member states and territories.
 Facilitates the free exchange of meteorological data and information globally.
 Contributes to policy formulation related to safety, economic welfare, and environmental protection.

INDIA AS THE WORLD'S TOP ARMS IMPORTER (2019-2023)

Despite efforts to enhance its defense-industrial base, India remains the world's largest arms importer.
 Swedish think tank, Stockholm International Peace Research Institute (SIPRI) has released “Trends in
International Arms Transfers, 2023”.
 The report provides an overview of the global arms market, including insights into major arms suppliers and
purchasers, regional distribution, and shifts in the trade dynamics.

Important Points from the Report:

Global Arms Import Trends (2018-2022):
 Top five arms importers: India, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Australia, and China.
 Nine out of the ten biggest arms importers, including the top three (India, Saudi Arabia, and Qatar), were located
in Asia and Oceania or the Middle East.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 155 of 348
 1

India's Arms Imports:

 Russia remained India’s primary arms supplier, accounting for 36% of imports.
 This period marked the first time since 1960-64 that deliveries from Russia/USSR constituted less than half of
India’s total arms imports.

European Arms Imports:

 European countries' arms imports increased by 94% between 2014-2018 and 2019-2023.

Ukraine's Arms Imports:

 Ukraine became the fourth largest arms importer globally, receiving arms from over 30 states during 2022-2023.

Pakistan's Arms Imports:

 Pakistan was the fifth largest importer in 2019-2023, experiencing a 43% increase in arms imports.
 China was the major supplier to Pakistan, providing 82% of its arms imports during this period.

Global Arms Export Trends:

 The five largest arms exporters: United States, France, Russia, China, and Germany.
 France surpassed Russia to become the second largest arms exporter.
 Russia’s arms exports fell by 53%, while French sales surged by 47%.
 India was the largest single recipient of French arms exports.

Changes in Russian Arms Exports:

 In 2019, 31 countries received weapons from Russia; by 2023, this number had reduced to 12, with India and
China as the primary customers.

U.S. Role in Global Arms Exports:

 The USA expanded its role as an arms supplier, exporting to more countries than ever before, during a period of
challenged economic and geopolitical dominance by emerging powers.
 The U.S. increased its share in global arms exports from 34% to 42% during the same period, consolidating its
position as the leading arms exporter.

Indian Defence Sector Overview:

 India’s Defence Ministry allocated ₹6.2 lakh crore in the Interim Budget 2024-25.
 Of this, ₹1.72 lakh crore is designated for capital expenditure aimed at new procurements.
 The capital allocation represents a 5.78% increase from the 2023-24 Budget Estimates.

Key Government Initiatives to Boost Indigenous Defence Manufacturing:

 Positive Indigenisation Lists: Lists specific components and subsystems mandated for domestic
manufacturing, with the 5th list recently released including 98 items.
 Increased FDI Limits: Foreign Direct Investment limits increased in 2020 to 74% through the Automatic Route
and up to 100% via the Government Route to encourage foreign investment in the defence sector.
 Defence Industrial Corridors: Established in Tamil Nadu and Uttar Pradesh to foster regional defence
manufacturing ecosystems.
o Uttar Pradesh corridor includes nodes in Agra, Aligarh, Chitrakoot, Jhansi, Kanpur, and Lucknow.
o Tamil Nadu corridor comprises nodes in Chennai, Coimbatore, Hosur, Salem, and Tiruchirappalli.
 Innovations for Defence Excellence (iDEX): Facilitates an innovation ecosystem in Defence and Aerospace by
engaging industries, MSMEs, startups, R&D institutes, and academia, providing grants and support for R&D.
o Managed by the Defence Innovation Organization (DIO), a not-for-profit entity under the Companies Act,
2013.
 SRIJAN Portal: A platform for vendors to find opportunities for manufacturing previously imported defence
equipment, allowing for indigenization and collaboration with Defence Public Sector Undertakings (DPSUs) and
other government agencies.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 156 of 348

 1

Stockholm International Peace Research Institute (SIPRI):

 The Stockholm International Peace Research Institute (SIPRI) is a globally recognized independent international
institute focused on research related to conflict, armaments, arms control, and disarmament.
 Established in 1966 and based in Stockholm, Sweden, SIPRI offers comprehensive data, analysis, and
recommendations which are made available to policymakers, researchers, the media, and the interested public.

INDIA TB REPORT 2024

The India TB Report 2024, was released by the Union Health Minister, Shri Jagat Pratap Nadda.
 The report reveals that the disparity between the projected and recorded cases of tuberculosis (TB) is
diminishing.
 This progress is significant as undiagnosed cases likely contribute to the ongoing spread of the disease. Reducing
this gap is crucial for India's objective to eradicate TB by 2025.
 The annual India TB Report is produced by the Central TB Division of the Ministry of Health and Family
Welfare under the National TB Elimination Programme (NTEP).
 Initiated in 2001, this report details policy updates, implementation progress, and performance indicators at
state and district levels.

About Tuberculosis (TB):

o Infectious disease caused primarily by the bacteria Mycobacterium tuberculosis.
o Primarily affects the lungs (Pulmonary TB) but can also affect other parts of the body (Extrapulmonary TB).
o Spread through the air via droplets from coughs or sneezes of infected individuals.
o Most infections are asymptomatic, known as latent TB, which is non-contagious.
 Prevention and Treatment:
o Prevention strategies include high-risk individual screening, early detection, effective treatment, and
vaccination with BCG (Bacillus Calmette-Guerin) vaccine.
o Treatment typically requires a long-term regimen of multiple antibiotics.
 Drug-Resistant TB:
o Multidrug-resistant TB (MDR-TB): Resistant to at least isoniazid and rifampicin, the two most potent TB
antibiotics.
o Extensively drug-resistant TB (XDR-TB): Resistant to isoniazid and rifampicin, any fluoroquinolone, and
at least one of three injectable second-line drugs (amikacin, kanamycin, or capreomycin).
 India TB Report 2024 Insights:
o The report indicates a narrowing gap between the estimated number of TB cases and the actual cases
reported, enhancing efforts towards TB elimination.
o Closing this gap is critical as undiagnosed or unreported cases can continue to transmit the infection.
 Goal: The findings are aligned with India's national goal to eliminate TB by 2025, marking significant progress
in tackling the disease within the country.

Overview of TB in India (2023 Report Highlights):

 Reporting Sources: Majority of TB cases are reported by government health centers; however, notifications
from private sector increased significantly.
 Private Sector Reporting: From 1.9 lakh cases in 2015 to 8.4 lakh of the total 25.5 lakh cases in 2023,
constituting about 33%.
 TB Incidence: Slight increase in estimated TB cases to 27.8 lakh in 2023 from 27.4 lakh in the previous year.
 Mortality Rates: Steady at 3.2 lakh deaths due to TB in 2023; however, a decrease from 4.94 lakh in 2021 to 3.31
lakh in 2022.
 Treatment Initiation: Achieved the target of initiating treatment in 95% of diagnosed patients in 2023.
Challenges in TB Elimination:
 Meeting Targets: India faces challenges in reaching its ambitious goal to eliminate TB by 2025, with case and
death numbers falling short of targets.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 157 of 348

 1

 Risk Factors:
o Undernourishment: 7.44 lakh TB patients were undernourished in 2022. Government provides Rs 500
monthly support to nearly one crore beneficiaries; Ni-kshay Mitra programme supports with food baskets.
o HIV: Higher TB risk in HIV-positive individuals; 94,000 TB patients also had HIV in 2022.
o Diabetes: Increases susceptibility to TB; 1.02 lakh TB patients with diabetes in India in 2022.
o Alcohol Use: Daily consumption over 50 ml increases TB risk; 7.1% of screened TB patients identified as
alcohol users.
o Tobacco Use: Screening in 2023 showed 11% of TB patients used tobacco; 32% of these linked to cessation
services.
International and National Initiatives:
 WHO's End TB Strategy:
o Adopted in 2014, targeting an end to the global TB epidemic by 2035.
o Goals include a 95% reduction in TB deaths and a 90% reduction in TB incidence by 2035 compared to
2015 levels.
o Aims for zero TB-affected families facing catastrophic costs due to TB by 2035.
o Underpins the United Nations Sustainable Development Goal 3.3.
 WHO Initiatives:
o Launched the “Find. Treat. All. #EndTB” initiative with the Global Fund and Stop TB Partnership.
o Publishes the Global Tuberculosis Report annually.
o The Global Plan to End TB, 2023-2030, outlines priority actions and financial resources needed to end TB.
 India’s National Efforts:
o National Tuberculosis Elimination Programme (NTEP): Targets to reduce the TB burden by 2025, ahead
of the global 2030 target.
o Pradhan Mantri TB Mukt Bharat Abhiyan: Enhances patient support, increases community involvement,
and incorporates Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) activities.
o Nikshay Poshan Yojana: Provides a financial incentive of Rs 500 for TB patients registered on the Nikshay
Portal.
o National TB Call Centre – Ni-kshay SAMPARK: Offers patient query resolution and tele-counseling on TB
treatment.
o TB Mukt Panchayat Initiative: Empowers Panchayati Raj Institutions to tackle TB effectively.
o Tribal TB Initiative: Focuses on addressing TB challenges within India's tribal communities.
o Mission Indradhanush: Includes provision of the BCG vaccine as part of broader immunization efforts.
 Global TB Vaccine Efforts:
o TB Vaccine Accelerator Council: Facilitates development, testing, authorization, and usage of new TB
vaccines.

TAIWAN’S EARTHQUAKE AND PACIFIC’S RINGS OF FIRE

 Taiwan experienced a significant 7.4 magnitude earthquake, one of the largest in over 25 years.
 This seismic activity prompted Japan to issue a tsunami alert for the Ryukyu Islands, stretching from Taiwan to
Kyushu, including the significant US military base location, Okinawa.

Causes of Earthquakes in Taiwan:

 Located on the Pacific "Ring of Fire," a region with 90% of the world’s earthquakes.
 Earthquakes result from tectonic activities involving the Philippine Sea Plate and the Eurasian Plate.
 The interaction of these plates can cause tension, leading to earthquakes when this tension is suddenly released.
 Taiwan's mountainous terrain can amplify the effects of earthquakes, increasing the risk of landslides.

Pacific Ring of Fire:

 Known for frequent seismic and volcanic activity, housing about 75% of the world's active volcanoes and 90%
of earthquakes.
 Spans approximately 40,000 kilometers along several tectonic plates including the Pacific, Juan de Fuca, Cocos,
and others.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 158 of 348

 1

 Extends from the western coast of the Americas, across the Aleutian Islands, down through East Asia to New
Zealand, and into the northern coast of Antarctica.
 Countries within this zone include Indonesia, Japan, the US, Chile, and Russia, among others.

Volcanic Activity in the Ring of Fire:

 Caused by the subduction of tectonic plates where one plate is forced under another.
 This subduction process, moving at a rate of one to two inches per year, causes rocks to melt into magma,
leading to volcanic eruptions.

Recent Research on Tectonic Activities:

 Studies indicate the Pacific Plate is cooling, potentially affecting tectonic dynamics.
 This cooling might lead to increased stress along plate boundaries, potentially causing more frequent and intense
earthquakes.
 The cooling and contracting are more pronounced in the younger (about 2 million years old) northern and
western parts of the Pacific Plate.

Process of Subduction:
Occurs when tectonic plates move and one plate slides beneath another. This is commonly seen with oceanic
plates.
 Formation of Magma: As the subducting plate descends into the hotter mantle beneath the earth's crust, it heats
up, causing volatile elements to mix and produce magma.
 Volcanic Activity: The generated magma rises through the overlying crust, leading to volcanic eruptions at the
surface.
 Subduction Zone Characteristics: These are geological sites where two tectonic plates collide and one plate
bends and goes underneath the other, descending into the mantle.
 Geological Impact: Subduction zones are critical in understanding the dynamics of earthquakes and volcanic
activity, as they mark significant geological interactions between tectonic plates.

Earthquakes:
 Definition and Basics:
o Earthquakes involve the shaking of the Earth caused by the sudden release of energy, producing seismic
waves.
o Hypocenter (Focus): The point within the Earth where the earthquake starts.
o Epicenter: The point directly above the Hypocenter on the Earth's surface.
 Types of Earthquake Waves:
o Body Waves: Travel through the Earth's interior.
 P Waves (Primary Waves): Faster and arrive first at the surface. They can travel through both solid and liquid
materials.
 S Waves (Secondary Waves): Slower and arrive after P Waves, can only travel through solids.
o Surface Waves: Travel along the Earth's surface and are the last to be recorded by seismographs.
 Love Waves: Cause horizontal shearing of the ground.
 Rayleigh Waves: Move the ground in an elliptical pattern, similar to ocean waves.
 Causes of Earthquakes:
o Most commonly caused by tectonic plate movements.
o Other causes include volcanic eruptions, rock-injection/withdrawal (due to magma movements), and human
activities like mining or nuclear tests.
 Earthquake Measurement:
o Seismometers: Instruments that measure seismic waves.
o Richter Scale: Quantifies the magnitude of the earthquake (range: 0-10).
o Mercalli Intensity Scale: Measures the intensity based on observed effects (range: I-XII).
 Global Distribution:
o Circum-Pacific Belt: Accounts for 81% of the world's earthquakes.
o Alpide Belt: Contains 17% of the world's largest earthquakes.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 159 of 348

 1

o Mid-Atlantic Ridge: Mostly underwater, another significant site of earthquakes.

 Earthquakes in India:
o India is highly susceptible to earthquakes due to its geological placement near the Himalayas.
o The country is divided into four seismic zones (II, III, IV, and V), with Zone V being the most prone to severe
earthquakes.
o Zone V (very severe intensity zone): Parts of Jammu and Kashmir (Kashmir valley); Western part of
Himachal Pradesh; Eastern part of Uttarakhand, Kutch in Gujarat; part of Northern Bihar; all northeastern
states of India and the Andaman & Nicobar Islands.

Tsunami:
A tsunami, derived from the Japanese term for "harbour wave," refers to a series of ocean waves known as a
wave train, which are typically caused by underwater disturbances such as earthquakes, volcanic eruptions,
landslides, rapid atmospheric pressure changes, or meteorite impacts.

Characteristics and Mechanics:

 Unlike singular waves, a tsunami consists of multiple waves.
 Most frequently occur in the Pacific Ocean's "Ring of Fire," an area prone to tectonic activities like earthquakes
and volcanoes, accounting for about 80% of all tsunamis.
 Tsunamis can travel across oceans at speeds up to 800 kilometers per hour, allowing them to cover vast
distances such as the entire Pacific Ocean in less than a day.
 Due to their long wavelengths, tsunamis maintain most of their energy over great distances.

Global Awareness:
 In recognition of the significant threat posed by tsunamis, the United Nations General Assembly designated
November 5th as World Tsunami Awareness Day in December 2015 to promote tsunami awareness and
share innovative approaches to risk reduction.

CHINA’S RENAMING OF PLACES IN ARUNACHAL PRADESH AND INDIA’S

RESPONSE
China has renamed 30 places in Arunachal Pradesh, which it refers to as Zangnan or South Tibet, claiming the
region as part of its territory.

India's Response:
 India has consistently rejected China's renaming attempts, stating that Arunachal Pradesh has always been
and will remain an integral part of India.
 The Ministry of External Affairs (MEA) spokesperson, Randhir Jaiswal, emphasized that such naming does
not change the reality of Arunachal Pradesh's status as an Indian state.
 This incident marks the fourth list of standardized geographical names issued by China, with previous lists
released in 2017 (6 names), 2021 (15 names), and earlier in 2022 (11 names).
 India has maintained a firm stance on its territorial sovereignty over Arunachal Pradesh, responding to China's
claims with consistent and clear assertions about the region being an inalienable part of India.
Overview of the India-China Border Dispute:
 The dispute spans a 3,488-kilometer border shared by India and China, with contentious issues primarily in
Aksai Chin in the western sector and Arunachal Pradesh in the eastern sector.
Aksai Chin Dispute:
 Administered by China as part of Xinjiang but claimed by India as part of its Union Territory of Ladakh.
 Strategically important due to proximity to the China-Pakistan Economic Corridor (CPEC) and potential military
routes.
Arunachal Pradesh Dispute:
 China claims the entire state, referring to it as "South Tibet."
 Administered by India as a northeastern state, considered an integral part of India.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 160 of 348

 1

Border Demarcation Issues:

 The Line of Actual Control (LAC) is not clearly demarcated along some stretches, leading to ambiguities and
tensions.
 The border is categorized into three sectors: Western (Ladakh), Middle (Himachal Pradesh and Uttarakhand),
and Eastern (Arunachal Pradesh and Sikkim).
Historical and Recent Military Standoffs:
 The 1962 Sino-Indian War highlighted the long-standing tensions.
 Recent confrontations include the 2017 Doklam standoff, the 2020 clashes in Galwan Valley in Ladakh, and the
2022 tensions in Tawang, Arunachal Pradesh.
What China’s Claims?
China's Territorial Claims in Arunachal Pradesh:
 China asserts its claim over Arunachal Pradesh, an area of approximately 90,000 sq km, referring to it as
Zangnan based on historical and cultural ties.
 It specifically cites historical connections between Tawang monasteries and Lhasa.
1962 Indo-China War and Arunachal Pradesh:
 During the 1962 Indo-China War, the People's Liberation Army temporarily occupied the region but withdrew
to positions behind the McMahon Line, respecting its delineation post-conflict.
 Despite the withdrawal, China has maintained its claim over the area.
Renaming Strategy by China:
 The Ministry of Civil Affairs of China has released standardized geographical names for places in Arunachal
Pradesh as part of its territorial claim.
 Naming batches released: six in 2017, 15 in 2021, 11 in April 2023, and 30 in March 2024.
 This renaming is part of China's broader strategy to reinforce its claims by altering place names in disputed
territories.
China's Justification for Claims:
 China defends its actions by stating that the standardization of names is essential to preserve the oral traditions
of minority ethnic groups in what it calls southern Tibet.
 Claims are based on historical, cultural, administrative, and judicial grounds.
China’s Methods and Tactics to Increase its Territorial Influence
 Salami Slicing Tactics:
o Involves incremental territorial claims to gradually erode control over disputed areas.
o Applied in the South China Sea, leading to the construction of outposts on contested reefs and islets.
o Aims to establish physical presence, impact freedom of navigation, and set precedents for further claims.
 Wolf Warrior Diplomacy:
o An aggressive diplomatic style characterized by robust rhetoric and nationalistic tones.
o Targets to project power and deflect international criticism, but risks isolating China and damaging
diplomatic ties.
o Can undermine peaceful dispute resolutions and heighten regional tensions.
 Artificial Island Creation:
o Construction and militarization of islands in the South China Sea.
o Serves to fortify China’s physical presence and support territorial claims.
o Has attracted international criticism, disrupting navigation freedoms and raising militarization concerns.
 Debt-Trap Diplomacy:
o Involves extending substantial loans to developing nations for infrastructural projects.
o Critics argue these loans can lead countries into economic dependency on China, potentially influencing their
territorial or political decisions.
o Raises ethical concerns about exploiting developing nations and expanding Chinese economic influence.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 161 of 348

 1

NEET EXAM AND NTA ISSUE

Exam Date: Held on May 5 across 571 cities worldwide, including 14 international centers.
Participants: Approximately 2.4 million candidates took the exam.
Purpose: To fill 1,08,940 MBBS seats in over 700 medical institutions across India.

 Controversy and Allegations:

o Perfect Scores: Unusually high number of candidates (67) scored the maximum of 720/720.
o Statistical Anomalies: Reports of candidates achieving "statistically impossible" marks.
o Cheating Allegations: Instances of cheating by proxy and potential question paper leaks are under
investigation.
o Legal Proceedings: Matters related to the alleged question paper leak are pending before the Supreme
Court.
o Public Reaction: Nationwide protests by students and political parties demanding a thorough investigation
and possibly a re-examination.

 NTA’s Response and Actions:

o Initial Explanation: NTA officials suggested the high number of perfect scores was due to an "easy paper".
o Investigative Committee: A four-member committee was formed to probe into the allegations.
o Findings and Recommendations: The committee noted that compensatory marks awarded to 1,563
students due to technical issues during the exam led to a "skewed situation". They recommended that grace
marks should only apply to attempted questions and proposed cancelling the results for these candidates.

National Eligibility Entrance Test (NEET-UG) Overview:

 Conducted by: National Testing Agency (NTA).
 Purpose: Admission to undergraduate courses like MBBS, BDS, AYUSH, BVSc, and AH in India.
 Format: Online examination available in 11 languages including English, Hindi, Tamil, Urdu, Bengali, Telugu,
Kannada, and Assamese.
 Previous Conductor: Before NTA, it was managed by the Central Board of Secondary Education (CBSE).

National Testing Agency (NTA) Details:

 Established: In 2017 as a Society under the Indian Societies Registration Act, 1860.
 Role: An autonomous body responsible for conducting various entrance examinations for higher educational
institutions.
 Key Exams Conducted: NEET-UG for medicine, JEE-Main for engineering, CUET-UG for undergraduate courses,
and other specialized exams like CUET-PG, UGC-NET, CSIR UGC-NET.
 Other Exams: CMAT, Hotel Management Joint Entrance Examination, Graduate Pharmacy Aptitude Test, and
entrance tests for institutions like Delhi University and Jawaharlal Nehru University.
 Governance: Chaired by an eminent educationist appointed by the Ministry of Education; the Director General
acts as the CEO.
 Functions: Developing a question bank, establishing a strong R&D culture, partnering with international
organizations like ETS, and conducting examinations for government ministries and state governments.
Supreme Court Decision on NEET-UG 2024:
 The Supreme Court allowed ongoing admission counseling to proceed without interruption.
 A retest was mandated for 1,563 students who initially received grace marks due to technical issues during
NEET-UG 2024. This retest took place on June 23.
 Candidates who opted out of the retest would have their scores calculated without the added grace marks.
Government Response to NEET Issues:
 The Union Education Minister acknowledged the problems with NEET as an "institutional failure" of the National
Testing Agency (NTA).

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 162 of 348

 1

 The former chief of the National Testing Agency (NTA), Subodh Kumar Singh, has been removed from his
position amid controversies surrounding the NEET and UGC-NET examinations.
 He has been placed on "compulsory wait" in the Department of Personnel and Training.
 Pradeep Singh Kharola, a retired Indian Administrative Service (IAS) officer, has been appointed as the new
director general of the NTA.
 A high-level committee, led by former ISRO chairman Dr. K Radhakrishnan, was formed to review and ensure
the fairness of NTA’s operations. The committee is expected to deliver its findings in two months.
 The Central Bureau of Investigation (CBI) has begun probing the NEET UG after signs of a paper leak were
discovered in Bihar.
Legislative Measures:
 The Public Examinations (Prevention of Unfair Means) Act, 2024 has been enacted, underscoring the
government's commitment to maintaining the integrity of public examinations.

PUBLIC EXAMINATIONS (PREVENTION OF UNFAIR MEANS) ACT, 2024

Necessity for the Public Examinations (Prevention Of Unfair Means) Act, 2024:
Significant occurrences of question paper leaks affecting public recruitment exams across India, with 48 instances
in 16 states over the past five years, impacting 1.51 crore applicants for approximately 1.2 lakh posts.
 Impact of Malpractices: Delays and cancellations of examinations due to unfair practices, adversely affecting
millions of candidates' future opportunities.
 Lack of Specific Legislation: Previously, no substantive law specifically targeted the unfair practices or offenses
within public examination systems.
Objectives of the Act:
 Increase Transparency and Fairness: Aims to enhance the integrity, transparency, and credibility of public
examination systems.
 Ensure Fair Rewarding: Guarantees that the efforts of earnest candidates are acknowledged and safeguarded,
ensuring their future prospects remain secure.
 Legal Deterrence: Establishes legal measures to deter individuals, organized groups, or institutions that engage
in unfair means for monetary or other wrongful gains, protecting the examination process from being
compromised.
Purpose of the Public Examinations (Prevention Of Unfair Means) Act, 2024:
 Aimed at increasing transparency, fairness, and credibility in public examinations.
 Intended to deter unfair practices and ensure genuine efforts by candidates are justly rewarded.
Significance of the Act Due to Past Incidents:
 Reacts to 48 reported instances of paper leaks across 16 states in the last five years, affecting 1.51 crore
candidates competing for 1.2 lakh posts.
 Addressed delays and cancellations in exams, impacting millions of candidates.
Key Features of the Bill:
 Definition of Public Examinations: Under Section 2(k), a Public Examination is defined as any examination
conducted by a “public examination authority” listed in the Schedule of the Bill, or any such other authority as
may be notified by the Central Government.
 Includes exams conducted by entities like UPSC, SSC, RRBs, IBPS, NTA, and other central government bodies.
 Punitive Measures: Offences under this act are cognizable, non-bailable, and non-compoundable, with
penalties ranging from three to five years in prison and fines up to Rs 10 lakh.
 Service Provider Accountability: Fines up to Rs 1 crore and recovery of costs for involved service providers if
found guilty of facilitating unfair practices.

Provisions for Addressing Unfair Means:

 Lists over 15 specific actions considered as using unfair means, including leakage of question papers,
unauthorized access to materials, and tampering with examination data.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 163 of 348

 1

Administrative and Enforcement Measures:

 Requires offenses to be investigated by officers not below the rank of Deputy Superintendent of Police or
Assistant Commissioner of Police.
 Establishes a High-Level National Technical Committee to develop security protocols for digital platforms and
set national examination standards.

Model Framework for States:

 Serves as a model law for states, encouraging them to adopt similar legislation to safeguard state-level
examinations from disruptions caused by criminal activities.

WHO REPORT ON GLOBAL AND INDIA IMMUNIZATION

A World Health Organization (WHO) study highlights that immunization has saved an estimated 154 million lives
globally over the past 50 years.
 Key Contributions of Vaccines:
o Measles Vaccine: Accounted for saving approximately 94 million lives since 1974, making a substantial
impact on reducing infant mortality.
o Overall Effectiveness: Vaccines are credited with saving an average of 6 lives every minute over the last
five decades.
o Disease Coverage: Vaccination against 14 different diseases has led to a 40% reduction in global infant
mortality.
o Health Gains: Each life saved through vaccination corresponds to an average gain of 66 years of full health.
 Enhanced Access to Immunization:
o Stakeholder Collaboration: Key improvements in vaccine access have been due to the collaborative efforts
of governments, health agencies, UNICEF, and GAVI (the Vaccine Alliance).
 Challenges in Vaccination Programs:
o Inequitable Distribution: Ongoing issues with the fair distribution of vaccines.
o Vaccine Hesitancy: Concerns among the public about potential side effects contribute to hesitancy.
o Coverage Statistics: Currently, 84% of infants globally receive 3 doses of the DTP vaccine, protecting against
diphtheria, tetanus, and pertussis.
 Success in Disease Eradication and Containment:
o Polio: Wild poliovirus types 2 and 3 have been eradicated (type 2 in 1999 and type 3 in 2020), with India
declared polio-free in 2014.
o Other Vaccines: Vaccines against malaria and cervical cancer have significantly contained these diseases,
demonstrating high efficacy.

Indian Immunization Programme:

 Overview of India's Immunization Programme:
o India operates the Universal Immunization Programme (UIP), which is one of the world's largest public
health initiatives.
o Annual Vaccination Figures: More than 30 million pregnant women and 27 million children are
vaccinated each year under UIP.
 Key Achievements in Immunization:
o Polio-Free Certification: India was declared polio-free in 2014.
o Elimination of Maternal and Neonatal Tetanus: Achieved in 2015.
 Introduction and Expansion of New Vaccines:
o Recent additions to the UIP include the Measles-Rubella Vaccine, Pneumococcal Conjugate Vaccine (PCV),
and Rotavirus Vaccine (RVV).
 Current Immunization Coverage:
o According to UNICEF, only 65% of children in India receive full immunization within the first year of life.
o Reduction in zero-dose children: From 2.7 million in 2021 to 1.1 million in 2022, which marks a significant
improvement.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 164 of 348

 1

 Geographic Focus of Underimmunization:

o 63% of zero-dose children are concentrated in the states of Bihar, Madhya Pradesh, Maharashtra, Rajasthan,
and Uttar Pradesh.
 Government Initiatives to Enhance Immunization:
o Mission Indradhanush (MI): Launched in 2014 by the Ministry of Health and Family Welfare to vaccinate
all unvaccinated and partially vaccinated children.
o Intensified Mission Indradhanush (IMI): Targets further reduction in the number of zero-dose children.

Universal Immunization Programme:

History and Evolution of UIP:
 Expanded Programme on Immunization: Initiated in 1978, targeting urban populations initially.
 Renamed to Universal Immunization Programme (UIP) in 1985, extending its reach to include rural areas.
 Integrated into the National Rural Health Mission: Since 2005, UIP has been a key component of this broader
health initiative.

Vaccination Coverage Under UIP:

 Free Immunization: UIP offers free vaccinations against 12 vaccine-preventable diseases.
 Nationally Covered Diseases (9 total): Diphtheria, Pertussis, Tetanus, Polio, Measles, Rubella, severe form of
Childhood Tuberculosis, Hepatitis B, and Meningitis & Pneumonia caused by Haemophilus influenzae type B.
 Sub-nationally Covered Diseases (3 total): Rotavirus diarrhoea, Pneumococcal Pneumonia, and Japanese
Encephalitis.

INDIA SUGARCANE SUBSIDY UNDER WTO SCANNER

Issue Highlighted by the US and Australia: Alleged violation by India of the subsidy limits under the WTO's
Agreement on Agriculture (AoA) due to excessive sugarcane subsidies.

Subsidy Calculation Methodology:

 WTO Panel Recommendation: The methodology used for subsidy calculation is based on the WTO panel's
recommendation from a previous ruling (2014-15 to 2018-19).
 Components Considered: Includes India's Fair and Remunerative Price (FRP) and State-Advised Prices (SAPs)
as benchmarks for minimum sugar mill prices.

Market Price Support (MPS) Data:

 Annual MPS Figures: India's MPS for sugarcane was $15.9 billion (2018-19), $14.6 billion (2019-20), $16.5
billion (2020-21), and $17.6 billion (2021-22).
 Comparison to Production Value: These MPS figures each year exceeded 90% of the total value of sugar
production, well above the WTO's permissible threshold of 10%.

Controversy and Response:

 India's Stance: India has contested the classification of FRP and SAPs as market price support under the AoA,
arguing against the methodology used.
 Legal Standstill: The appeal process has stalled due to the inactivity of the WTO's Appellate Body, preventing
the adoption of the panel report.

Challenges in Resolution:
 WTO Appellate Body Inactivity: Decisions on appeals, including those involving India, are pending, awaiting
the restoration of the Appellate Body.

What is FRP and SAPs:

 Fair and Remunerative Price (FRP):

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 165 of 348

 1

o Definition: A mandated minimum price set by the government that sugar mills are required to pay to
sugarcane farmers.
o Purpose: Ensures that farmers receive a fair and reasonable compensation for their sugarcane crops.
 State-Advised Prices (SAPs):
o Additional Payments: In some states, sugar mills pay farmers above the FRP, known as State-Advised Prices
(SAPs).
o Objective: SAPs aim to enhance production efficiency by providing farmers with incentives beyond the FRP.

WTO’s Agreement on Agriculture (AoA):

 Establishment: Formulated during the Uruguay Round of the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT)
negotiations and became effective with the launch of the World Trade Organization on January 1, 1995.
 Designed to reduce trade barriers and foster a transparent, fair, and market-oriented global agricultural trading
system.
 Intends to significantly reduce agricultural support and protection by WTO member countries through
established rules.
 Three Pillars of the AoA:
 Domestic Support:
o Objective: To reduce domestic subsidies that distort free trade.
o Specific Targets: Developed countries are to reduce Aggregate Measurement of Support (AMS) by 20%
over 6 years, and developing countries by 13% over 10 years.
o Subsidy Categories: Includes Amber Box (most directly linked to production levels), Blue Box
(production-limiting programs), and Green Box (non-trade-distorting supports).
 Market Access:
o Definition: Refers to conditions agreed upon by members for the entry of goods into their markets.
o Requirements: Progressive reduction of tariffs and conversion of non-tariff barriers into tariff measures
to enhance market access.
 Export Subsidies:
o Focus: Includes subsidies on agricultural inputs making exports cheaper, and other export incentives
like import duty remission.
o Impact Concerns: Potential dumping of subsidized agricultural products into other countries, potentially
harming those countries' domestic agricultural sectors.

World Trade Organization (WTO):

 Establishment: The WTO was established in 1995 as the successor to the General Agreement on Tariffs and
Trade (GATT), which was created in 1947.
 Purpose: It aims to regulate international trade between nations, promoting open trade for the benefit of all.
 Functions: The WTO facilitates the implementation, administration, and operation of trade agreements. It
provides a forum for negotiations and settling disputes and monitors national trade policies.
 Membership: As of now, the WTO has 164 member countries, representing over 98% of global trade and
economic output.

WTO Appellate Body:

 Role: The Appellate Body is a standing body of seven persons that hears appeals from reports issued by panels
in disputes brought by WTO Members. It can uphold, modify, or reverse legal findings and conclusions of a panel.
 Challenges: Since December 2019, the Appellate Body has been inactive due to disagreements primarily led by
the United States concerning its functioning and judicial overreach, which have prevented the appointment of
new judges.
 Implications of Inactivity: The inactivity has led to a significant backlog of disputes and raised concerns about
the effectiveness of the WTO’s dispute resolution mechanism.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 166 of 348

 1

WORLD BANK REPORT ON WATER FOR SHARED PROSPERITY

 Report was released at 10th World Water Forum in Bali, Indonesia.
 World Bank defines Shared prosperity as boosting prosperity, particularly for poorest, to achieve more
equitable societies.

"Water for Shared Prosperity" Highlights:

 Global Water Crisis: As of 2022, 2.2 billion people lack access to safely managed drinking water, and 3.5
billion lack access to safely managed sanitation.
 Regional and Demographic Disparities: Major disparities exist, with 80% of those lacking services located
in rural areas. China and India, with 36% of the global population, only have 11% of the world's freshwater
resources.
 Impact of Climate Change on Water Scarcity:
o Increased Risk and Exposure: Over 800 million people are at high risk of drought, and twice as many
live in flood-prone areas.
o Future Projections: By 2100, meteorological droughts could affect 15% more land globally, increasing to
nearly 50% when accounting for temperature effects.
 Socio-Economic Implications of Water Scarcity:
o Human Capital and Economic Growth: Water and sanitation are critical for educational success and human
capital development. In low-income countries, 56% of jobs are in water-intensive sectors, heavily impacting
economic output in times of water scarcity.
o Social Cohesion and Conflict: Effective water management is essential for fostering community trust and
cooperation and reducing conflict.
 Recommendations for Water Management:
o Building Resilience: Focus on strengthening resilience to hydro-climatic risks, particularly for the poorest
populations.
o Resource Management and Allocation: Improve the development, management, and allocation of water
resources to enhance access and efficiency.
o Promoting Equity: Ensure equitable and inclusive delivery of water services to tackle poverty and enhance
shared prosperity.

Overview of the 2024 World Water Forum (10th WWF):

 Theme: "Water for Shared Prosperity".
 Organizers: Jointly organized by the Government of the Republic of Indonesia and the World Water Council.

World Water Council Details:

 Establishment: Formed in 1996.
 Location: Based in Marseille, France.
 Membership: Comprises 260 member organizations from 52 countries, including India.
 Mission: Focuses on promoting water as a key political priority globally to support sustainable and equitable
development.

Forum Characteristics:
 First Event: The forum was first held in 1997.
 Frequency: Occurs every three years, hosted by a different country each time.
 Significance: Recognized as the world's largest water-related event.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 167 of 348

 1

ARTICLE 244(A) AND AUTONOMY ISSUE IN ASSAM

In the Diphu Lok Sabha constituency of Assam, which is predominantly tribal, candidates across all political parties
committed to implementing Article 244(A) of the Constitution if come to power before the Lok Sabha 2024 Polls.

Context of Diphu Constituency:

 Location and Demographics: Diphu is a Lok Sabha constituency in Assam, notable for its sparse population of
8.9 lakh voters, and covers tribal-majority districts including Karbi Anglong, West Karbi Anglong, and Dima
Hasao.
 Political Significance: Reserved for Scheduled Tribes, encompassing six legislative assembly segments.

Article 244(A) of the Constitution:

 Introduction: Added through the Constitution (Twenty-second Amendment) Act of 1969, Article 244(A)
enables the establishment of an autonomous state within Assam, encompassing regions like Karbi Anglong.
 Autonomy Provisions: Proposes a self-governing body with potential for a Legislature or Council of Ministers,
offering more autonomy than the Sixth Schedule.

Comparison with Sixth Schedule:

 Current Autonomy under Sixth Schedule: Provides for councils with elected representatives for local
governance in tribal areas, but with limited powers, especially in law enforcement and financial authority.
 Enhanced Autonomy under Article 244(A): Grants more comprehensive autonomous powers, notably in law
and order.

Historical Context and Demand for Autonomy:

 Origins of Autonomy Demand: Started in the 1950s with aspirations for a separate hill state, leading to the
creation of Meghalaya in 1972. Despite Meghalaya's statehood, Karbi Anglong region opted to stay part of Assam,
influenced by promises of autonomy under Article 244(A).
 Role of ASDC: The Autonomous State Demand Committee (ASDC) has been pivotal in advocating for regional
autonomy, significantly influencing political and peace processes in the region.

Recent Political and Peace Developments:

 Peace Negotiations and Settlements: Ongoing peace negotiations with various groups, including a notable
settlement in 2021 with five militant groups in Karbi Anglong, promising greater autonomy and a special
development package worth Rs 1,000 crore over five years.
 2023 Agreement: A similar agreement was signed with the Dimasa National Liberation Army, following the lines
of enhancing autonomy and development.

Sixth Schedule:
Purpose of the Sixth Schedule: The Sixth Schedule provides for the administration of tribal areas in Assam,
Meghalaya, Tripura, and Mizoram to safeguard the rights of tribal populations in these regions.
Provisions Included:
 Autonomous District Councils (ADCs): The schedule allows for the creation of Autonomous District Councils
that can govern themselves through their own laws. ADCs have legislative, administrative, and judicial powers
over a variety of issues, including land management, forest management, water resources, agriculture, and public
health within their territories.
 Powers of ADCs: These councils are endowed with the power to make legislative regulations for the control of
money lending and trading by non-tribals, as well as the management of village councils and courts that can
decide on matters defined under the Sixth Schedule.
 Composition and Elections: Each ADC comprises up to 30 members, with a term of five years. The members
are elected through direct elections. Up to four members in the council can be nominated by the Governor.
 Judicial Powers: ADCs have the authority to establish, constitute, and manage courts for the trial of cases
between the tribes. However, jurisdiction of these courts is subject to the jurisdiction of the concerned High
Court.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 168 of 348

 1

Role of the Governor: The Governor of the state has the authority to organize and re-organize the autonomous
districts and can also reserve certain bills passed by the district councils.
Special Provisions: The Sixth Schedule also allows for the creation of regional councils for specific areas within the
districts, aimed at promoting more localized forms of governance.
Financial Autonomy: ADCs receive grants and funds directly from the Centre to undertake development projects
and welfare schemes, fostering socio-economic development in the tribal regions.

KERALA TEMPLES BAN OLEANDER AFTER WOMAN’S DEATH

Two temple boards in Kerala, managing around 2,500 temples, have prohibited the use of oleander flowers in
offerings following an incident where a 24-year-old woman died after accidentally ingesting some oleander leaves.
 This decision reflects the heightened awareness of the toxicity of the oleander plant, which is known for its
decorative beauty but also for its dangerous properties.

Oleander Plant Characteristics:

 Type: Evergreen shrubs from the genus Nerium, commonly referred to as oleander or rosebay.
 Native Region: Mediterranean, but cultivated globally in various climatic zones for ornamental and landscaping
uses.
 Appearance: Known for its drought tolerance and commonly used as a natural, green fencing along highways
and beaches.
 Varieties: Different types are distinguished by the color of their flowers.
Traditional Medicinal Uses:
 Ayurvedic Pharmacopoeia of India (API): Utilizes oil from the root bark for treating skin diseases.
 Charak Samhita: Recommends leaves of the white flowered variety for severe skin conditions, including leprosy.
 Bhavaprakasha: Describes oleander as poisonous, used in treating wounds, skin diseases, parasites, and itching.
Toxicity:
 Toxic Components: Contains cardiac glycosides such as oleandrin, folinerin, and digitoxigenin, which are found
in all parts of the plant.
 Human and Pet Risk: All parts of the plant are highly toxic, with ingestion potentially leading to death.
 Symptoms of Poisoning: Include nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, skin rashes, confusion, dizziness, and potentially
lethal cardiac complications such as irregular or slow heartbeat.

ARTICLE 31C
While hearing a case to decide whether the government can acquire and redistribute private property, a 9-judge
Bench of the Supreme Court decided to take up another issue of "radical constitutional consequence": does
Article 31C still exist?
 Article 31C of the Indian Constitution:
o Protection of Laws: Shields laws that ensure the distribution of the community's material resources for the
common good (Article 39(b)) and prevent the concentration of wealth and means of production to the
common detriment (Article 39(c)).
o Immunity from Certain Challenges: Laws made under these directive principles are immune to challenges
based on Article 14 (Right to Equality) or Article 19 (Freedom of Speech, Right to Assemble, etc.).
 Introduction and Evolution of Article 31C:
o Enactment: Introduced by the Constitution (25th Amendment) Act, 1971 to overcome hurdles identified
in the Supreme Court's judgment on the Bank Nationalisation Case (R.C. Cooper v. Union of India), which
invalidated the acquisition of 14 commercial banks.
o Kesavananda Bharati Case (1973): Upheld the idea of the Constitution's "basic structure", striking down
parts of Article 31C that implied that no law giving effect to DPSP could be questioned in courts.
o Expansion and Restriction: The Constitution (42nd Amendment) Act, 1976, expanded protections
under Article 31C to cover all directive principles, but the Supreme Court's Minerva Mills v. UoI (1980)

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 169 of 348

 1

ruling limited Parliament's amendment power, striking down parts of the 42nd Amendment as exceeding
constitutional bounds.
 Ongoing Case Background:
o Law in Question: Challenge to Chapter VIII-A of the Maharashtra Housing and Area Development Act, 1976,
as amended in 1986, which allows the government to acquire cessed properties in Mumbai.
o Legal Basis: The amendment was justified by citing Article 39(b) of the Constitution, aiming to distribute
material resources to serve the common good.
o High Court Ruling (1991): Upheld the amendment, citing Article 31C’s protection for laws furthering
Article 39(b).
 Supreme Court Deliberations:
o Initial Focus: Began with interpreting Article 39(b) only.
o Extended Scope: Quickly shifted to whether Article 31C still exists after the Minerva Mills decision,
addressing constitutional uncertainties.
 Arguments Presented:
 Petitioners' Argument: Claimed that since Article 31C was modified by the 42nd Amendment and this modified
version was struck down in Minerva Mills, the original Article 31C did not automatically revive.
 Centre's Argument: Advocated for the doctrine of revival, suggesting that the pre-amendment version of Article
31C should be restored as per Justice Kurian Joseph’s interpretation in the NJAC judgment.

42nd Amendment to the Indian Constitution:

 Enactment Year: 1976, during the Emergency period under Prime Minister Indira Gandhi.
 Nickname: Often referred to as the "Mini-Constitution" due to its extensive alterations and additions to the
Constitution.
 Key Changes:
o Reduction of Judicial Powers: Attempted to diminish the authority of the Supreme Court and High Courts.
o Introduction of Fundamental Duties: Listed the duties of citizens which are intended to promote a
responsible citizenry.
o Extent of Changes: Constitutes one of the most profound amendments, impacting a wide range of
constitutional articles.

46TH ANTARCTIC TREATY CONSULTATIVE MEETING

India hosted the prestigious 46th Antarctic Treaty Consultative Meeting and 26th Meeting of the Committee for
Environmental Protection in 2024.
 Hosting Organization: The Ministry of Earth Sciences (MoES), through the National Centre for Polar and
Ocean Research (NCPOR), will orchestrate the events.
 Location: The meetings was held in Kochi, Kerala.
 Purpose: These meetings aim to enhance global dialogue on environmental stewardship and foster scientific
collaboration in Antarctica.

Main Agenda of ATCM 46:

 Sustainable Management: Focus on strategic planning for the sustainable management of Antarctica and its
resources.
 Legal and Policy Frameworks: Discussion on policy, legal, and institutional operations related to Antarctica.
 Scientific Cooperation: Emphasis on research, collaboration, capacity building, and cooperation among nations.
 Environmental Protection: Strategies to address climate change impacts and the development of a tourism
framework.
 Promotion and Awareness: Efforts to promote awareness about the Antarctic region.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 170 of 348

 1

Agenda of CEP 26:

 Environmental Assessment: Focus on the evaluation, impact assessment, management, and reporting of the
Antarctic environment.
 Climate Change Response: Formulating responses to the impacts of climate change in the region.
 Protection Plans: Development of area protection and management plans, including marine spatial protection.
 Biodiversity Conservation: Initiatives for the conservation of Antarctic biodiversity.

Significance:
 Global Impact: The ATCM and CEP meetings are crucial for international efforts to protect Antarctica's fragile
ecosystem and enhance scientific research.
 Annual Convening: These sessions are part of the annual gatherings under the Antarctic Treaty System,
addressing critical environmental, scientific, and governance issues in Antarctica.

Antarctic Treaty Overview:

 Establishment and Purpose: Signed in 1959 and effective from 1961, the Antarctic Treaty was created to
ensure Antarctica remains a zone for peaceful purposes, scientific inquiry, and environmental conservation.
 Party Membership: As of now, the treaty includes 56 member countries.
 Antarctic Treaty Secretariat (ATS): Founded in 2004, the ATS administrates the Antarctic Treaty System,
coordinating the annual Antarctic Treaty Consultative Meeting (ATCM) and the Committee for Environmental
Protection (CEP), managing diplomatic communications, and ensuring treaty compliance.

India’s Role in the Antarctic Treaty:

 Consultative Status: India has been a Consultative Party since 1983, participating actively in the decision-
making alongside other consultative nations.
 Research Contributions: India established its first Antarctic research station, Dakshin Gangotri, in 1983 and
currently operates two full-time research stations, Maitri (established in 1989) and Bharati (launched in 2012).
 Legislative Actions: In 2022, India reinforced its commitment to the Antarctic Treaty by enacting the Antarctic
Act.

Committee for Environmental Protection (CEP):

 Establishment: The CEP was formed under the 1991 Protocol on Environmental Protection to the Antarctic
Treaty, known as the Madrid Protocol.
 Function: It advises the ATCM on issues concerning the conservation and environmental protection of
Antarctica.

National Centre for Polar and Ocean Research (NCPOR)

 It is an autonomous institution established in 1998 under the Ministry of Earth Science.
 India’s scientific and strategic endeavors in the polar regions (the Arctic and Antarctic), the Himalayas, and
the Southern Ocean are under the National Centre for Polar and Ocean Research (NCPOR) in Goa.

GUIDELINES FOR ELIMINATING CORPORAL PUNISHMENT

Three private school teachers in Pune have been booked under the Juvenile Justice Act over allegedly thrashing three
Class 10 students, and threatening to grade them poorly in internal assessments
 Also, the Tamil Nadu School Education Department released guidelines for the elimination of corporal
punishment in schools (GCEP).

What is Corporal Punishment?

 Definition by UN: The UN Committee on the Rights of the Child defines corporal punishment as “any
punishment in which physical force is used and intended to cause some degree of pain or discomfort,
however light.”
 Prevalence: According to the World Health Organization (WHO), about 60% of children aged 2–14 years
experience physical punishment globally.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 171 of 348

 1

 Types in India: Defined by NCPCR as any physical act causing pain, discomfort, or injury, including coercive
postures, forced ingestion of substances, and confinement. Mental harassment includes sarcasm, derogatory
language, intimidation, and humiliating remarks that disrupt a child's psychological well-being.
 United States: In the US, school corporal punishment is legal in 22 states.
 Indian Law: Sections 26 and 27of Bhartiya Nyaya Sanhita (BNS) 2023 provide legal grounds justifying corporal
punishment under specific conditions. The Juvenile Justice (Care and Protection of Children) Act, 2015
emphasizes the 'best interest of the child' as a principle for all actions and decisions affecting children.

Legal Framework in India

 Definition and Legal Context: Corporal punishment refers to any physical punishment that causes pain or
discomfort to a child, regardless of its severity. In India, there is no specific statutory definition targeting
children under general law.
 Prohibitions and Laws:
o The Right of Children to Free and Compulsory Education (RTE) Act, 2009, specifically prohibits physical
punishment and mental harassment of children in schools under Section 17(1) and considers these acts
punishable under Section 17(2).
o Section 75 of the Juvenile Justice Act prescribes stringent punishment for cruelty towards children, with
penalties including rigorous imprisonment and significant fines, especially if the child suffers substantial
harm.
 Types of Corporal Punishments:
o Physical: Includes hitting, kicking, or forcing the child into uncomfortable positions.
o Mental: Encompasses actions that harm a child’s academic and psychological well-being, such as sarcasm,
intimidation, and using humiliating language.
 Safeguards and Protections:
o Absolute prohibition of corporal punishment under the RTE Act.
o Punishment for violations can extend to five years of imprisonment and fines up to Rs 5 lakh; more severe
consequences if the child suffers serious physical or mental harm.
o The NCPCR (National Commission for Protection of Child Rights) provides guidelines that include the
formation of a ‘Corporal Punishment Monitoring Cell’ in schools, consisting of teachers, parents, a doctor,
and a lawyer to ensure compliance and address grievances.
 Grievance Redressal Mechanisms:
o Installation of drop boxes in schools for anonymous complaints.
o Designation of the NCPCR and the State Commissions for Protection of Child Rights (SCPCRs) under
Section 31 of the RTE Act to monitor and ensure the protection of children's rights in the educational
setting.

National Commission for Protection of Child Rights (NCPCR)

 Establishment and Governing Act: The NCPCR is a statutory organization created by the Commission for
Protection of Child Rights (CPCR) Act, 2005.
 Administrative Control: It operates under the Ministry of Women and Child Development.
 Definition of a Child: The CPCR Act defines a child as anyone from birth up to 18 years of age.
 Objective: Its primary aim is to ensure that all laws, policies, programmes, and administrative mechanisms
conform to the rights of the child, consistent with the Indian Constitution and the UN Convention on the
Rights of the Child.
 Composition: Comprises a chairperson and six members, with a mandate that at least two members are
women.
 Term and Appointment: Members and the chairperson are appointed by the Central Government for a term
of three years.
 Age Limitations: The maximum age limit is 65 years for the Chairperson and 60 years for the members.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 172 of 348

 1

 Compensation: The salary and allowances, along with other terms and conditions for the Chairperson and
members, are determined by the Central Government.

G7 SUMMIT 2024
<

 Host: The 2024 G7 Summit was hosted by Italy.

 Focus Areas: The summit addressed defending the rules-based international system, engaging with Africa,
and seeking resolutions for global conflicts such as those in Ukraine and Gaza, as well as enhancing
relationships with developing and emerging economies.
Historical Context and Evolution of the G7
 Origin: Initiated in 1975 as the Group of Six (G6) with the US, France, Italy, Japan, the UK, and West Germany to
tackle economic issues like global recession post-OPEC’s oil embargo.
 Expansion: Canada joined in 1976, becoming the G7. Russia joined in 1997 to form the G8, but was removed
in 2014.
 EU Involvement: Since 1981, the European Union, represented by the Presidents of the European Council and
the European Commission, has participated without holding the presidency.

Functioning of the G7
 Structure: The G7 lacks a formal institutional structure and operates without a charter or permanent secretariat.
 Membership: Comprises wealthy democracies with no formal membership criteria.
 Presidency: Rotates annually among the member countries, with the presiding country setting the summit’s
agenda.
 Sherpas: Key figures who prepare for the summit, overseeing negotiations and drafting the final communique.

Key Achievements of the G7 Summit

 Agenda Expansion: Initially focused on economic issues, now covers broader topics such as trade, security,
climate change, and technological advancements.
 Response to Global Crises: Has coordinated efforts on economic recoveries, global health emergencies like
COVID-19, and geopolitical conflicts.
 Technological Initiatives: Introduced measures like the “Hiroshima AI Process” to address challenges posed by
emerging technologies.

Challenges Facing the G7

 Representation Issues: The G7 has been criticized for its limited, pro-capitalist, elitist composition with a
Western bias. Current member states represent less than 30% of the global GDP, significantly reduced from
about 50% in the 1970s.
 Calls for Inclusion of Emerging Economies: There is an ongoing discourse advocating for the expansion of the
G7 to include emerging economies like India, China, and Brazil, which are part of the BRICS group.
 Economic Challenges: G7 nations face issues like slow growth, rising inequality, and demographic challenges
such as Japan's ageing population and Italy’s significant public debt.
 Climate Change and Policy Differences: Member countries exhibit varied priorities concerning climate action,
complicating consensus on effective measures.
 Global Health and Pandemic Response: The COVID-19 pandemic underscored the necessity for better global
health cooperation. The G7 faced criticism for its delayed response and the uneven vaccine distribution,
questioning its efficacy in handling future global health crises.
 Geopolitical Tensions and Divergent Interests: The G7 countries have different geopolitical focuses, such as
the U.S.’s strategy to contain China's influence contrasted with European nations dealing with regional issues like
Ukraine.
 China’s Economic Influence: The rise of China challenges the G7, with initiatives like the Belt and Road Initiative
creating economic dependencies. In response, the G7 launched the Partnership for Global Infrastructure and
Investment (PGI) at the 2022 summit.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 173 of 348

 1

 Internal Disagreements and U.S. Policy Swings: Varying U.S. administrations influence the G7’s unity and its
global strategies on trade, climate change, and diplomacy.
 De-globalisation Trend: Shifts towards nationalistic policies challenge the G7's principles of promoting free
trade and global economic integration.

Key Agendas at the G7 Summit 2024 in Puglia, Italy:

 Global South Focus and International Law: The summit's agenda emphasizes the importance of the Global
South, promoting adherence to international law, and addressing economic and security concerns.
 Ukraine Conflict: The G7 supports Ukraine by leveraging €300 billion in frozen Russian assets and proposing
a $50 billion loan to mitigate the financial and humanitarian crises arising from the conflict.
 Israel-Gaza Conflict: Discussions led by the US aim for an immediate ceasefire and a comprehensive peace
agreement, enhancing humanitarian aid to both Israelis and Gazans.
 Economic Security in Indo-Pacific: Strategies to secure economic interests in the region include countering
China’s influence, enhancing trade security, and forming strategic alliances.
 Artificial Intelligence and Energy Transitions: The summit discusses setting global standards for AI usage and
advancing sustainable energy initiatives, particularly in the Africa-Mediterranean corridor.
 Migration Management: The focus is on developing coordinated policies and enhancing security measures to
manage global migration effectively.
 Engagement with Africa: Aligning with the African Union Agenda 2063, the summit prioritizes food security,
infrastructure development, and agricultural productivity to support African nations.
 Climate Change Initiatives: Despite challenges in meeting 2030 emission reduction targets, the summit aims
to reaffirm commitments to phase out coal by the mid-2030s and explore innovative solutions for cleaner energy
transitions.
 International Cooperation: Engagements with key emerging economies and developing nations to tackle global
challenges collectively, enhancing dialogue on sustainable growth and security.
 G7 PGII Promotion: At the summit, leaders focused on promoting the Partnership for Global Infrastructure
and Investment (PGII), introduced at the 2022 summit, aimed at addressing the USD 40 trillion infrastructure
gap in the developing world. The G7 committed to mobilize USD 600 billion by 2027 to fund infrastructure in
low and middle-income countries.
 India-Middle East-Europe Economic Corridor (IMEC): The summit highlighted support for IMEC, a
comprehensive network designed to connect India, the Middle East, and Europe through rail, road, and sea,
including additional infrastructure like electricity cables and data lines. Signatories include India, US, Saudi
Arabia, UAE, EU, Italy, France, and Germany.
 Support for Other Infrastructure Projects: The G7 backed significant projects like the Lobito Corridor in
Central Africa, Luzon Corridor in the Philippines, and the Middle Corridor, enhancing trade routes across
continents.
 Great Green Wall Initiative: Support was reaffirmed for this initiative aimed at combating desertification in the
Sahel region of Africa by developing a transcontinental tree line to improve biodiversity and local economies.
 AI Governance Interoperability: The summit discussed enhancing interoperability among AI governance
frameworks across G7 nations to ensure innovation is managed responsibly and inclusively.
 Extraordinary Revenue Acceleration (ERA) Loans for Ukraine: A commitment was made to provide
approximately USD 50 billion in additional funding to Ukraine by the end of 2024 to support its recovery and
rebuilding efforts.

Significance of G7 for India:

 Global Stature Recognition: India's participation as a guest in G7 meetings underscores its growing
importance as a major global economic and strategic player.
 Economic Opportunities: Participation allows India access to advanced technologies and new markets,
reinforcing its position as the 5th largest global economy.
 Technological Advancements: Engagement with G7 nations supports India's advancement in areas like
renewable energy, artificial intelligence, and digital technology.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 174 of 348

 1

 Strategic Partnerships: India has formed crucial alliances with several G7 nations (U.S., U.K., France,
Germany, Japan) to counterbalance China's regional influence, especially in the Indo-Pacific.
 Development Assistance Influence: G7's role as major development aid donors can significantly impact India’s
developmental initiatives, benefiting from educational and other socio-economic projects.
 Geopolitical Balancing: India navigates its historical ties with Russia while enhancing relationships with the
West, vital for maintaining global stability and pursuing strategic interests.
 Indo-Pacific Engagement: G7 forums enable India to engage effectively with key powers in the region,
influencing dynamics and maintaining strategic balances.
 Climate Change Cooperation: Collaboration with G7 can aid India in enhancing its climate change mitigation
and adaptation strategies. Participation in climate-related discussions at G7 summits, like the 2019 session on
Climate, Biodiversity and Oceans, highlights this engagement.
 Leadership in Global South: Post-G20 Summit, India's aim to lead the Global South, particularly in climate
initiatives, is facilitated by its interactions at G7 gatherings.

GLOBAL TRADE UPDATE: UNCTAD

As part of its 60th-anniversary celebrations, the United Nations Conference on Trade and Development has
rebranded to "UN Trade and Development" with new logos and branding in all official UN languages.
 Economic Context: Global trade fell to USD 31 trillion in 2023, a 3% decline from 2022. This drop was mainly
due to reduced demand in developed economies and diminished trade in East Asia and Latin America.
 Sector Performance:
 Trade in goods decreased by 5%, significantly impacting overall figures.
 Conversely, services trade grew by 8%, boosted by a nearly 40% increase in tourism and travel-related
services.
 Impact on Developing Countries: Developing countries saw a more significant trade decrease, with a 5% drop
in imports and 7% in exports. In contrast, developed countries experienced a 4% and 3% decline in imports
and exports, respectively.
 Regional Trade Dynamics: Despite overall declines, Africa experienced a notable increase in intra-regional
trade.
 Environmental Goods:
 Despite broader market contractions, environmental goods saw a 2% increase in trade, notably driven by a
60% increase in electric vehicle sales.
 End-of-Year Stabilization: The last quarter of 2023 indicated some stabilization in trade, especially in
developing regions, though apparel trade continued to decline by 13%.
 2024 Outlook:
 Economic forecasts for 2024 are optimistic, with an anticipated 3% GDP growth.
 Challenges such as logistical disruptions in key maritime routes and ongoing geopolitical tensions may
temper growth expectations and exacerbate volatility in energy and agricultural markets.
 Political Influence on Trade: Recent trends show an increase in the political proximity of trade, indicating
stronger trade relationships between geopolitically aligned countries. There's also a notable concentration in
major trade relationships, although this trend showed signs of easing in late 2023.
Key Observations Related to India from UNCTAD's Global Trade Update 2024:
 India-China Trade Dynamics: Despite initiatives like the Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) scheme aimed
at reducing dependence on Chinese imports, India saw an increase in imports from China.
 Impact of Russia-Ukraine Conflict: The conflict led to a notable shift in global trade flows, increasing Russia's
trade dependency on China by 7.1% and reducing its dependency on the EU by 5.3%. This was largely due to
the redirection of Russian oil exports towards China and India.
 Government of India’s Analysis:
o The Ministry of Commerce and Industry acknowledges the increased trade dependence but highlights that
it reflects a positive trade reorientation.
o India's imports from the EU rose by 9.7% in 2023, with a significant portion being capital goods (35% in
2022) and intermediate goods and raw materials (50% in 2022), which are crucial for manufacturing.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 175 of 348

 1

o Noteworthy is the surge in India’s smartphone exports, which increased by 98.42% to USD 14.27 billion in
2023 from USD 7.19 billion in 2022.
 Trade Performance with the EU and China: In 2023, India's trade interactions with both the EU and China
showed significant improvement, benefiting from strategic diversification and enhanced economic engagements.
About UNCTAD:
 Established in 1964, UNCTAD functions as a permanent intergovernmental body.
 It acts as the principal authority of the United Nations General Assembly in the domain of trade and
development.
 Headquarter: Geneva, Switzerland.
 UNCTAD membership consists of 195 states.
 Its activities are advisory by nature.

XENOTRANSPLANTATION AND RECENT DEVELOPMENTS

 Recent Development: The first recipient of a modified pig kidney transplant passed away about two months
after the procedure.
 Definition of Xenotransplantation:
o Involves the transplantation of live cells, tissues, or organs from a non-human animal source into a human
recipient.
o Can also include human body fluids, cells, tissues, or organs that have had ex vivo contact with live
nonhuman animal cells.
 Historical Context:
o Xenotransplantation trials with the heart began in the 1980s.
o Genetic modifications are essential for the animal organ to prevent rejection by the human body.
o Post-operation, continuous monitoring is critical to observe the body’s response to the new organ.
 Reasons for Using Pigs in Xenotransplantation:
o Pig heart valves have been utilized in human surgeries for over 50 years.
o Pigs have similar anatomical and physiological features to humans, making them suitable donors.
o Pigs are easily bred and cost-effective, allowing for a variety of organ sizes to match human recipients.
o In January 2022, the first xenotransplantation using a genetically-modified pig heart was performed.
 Explanation of CRISPR:
o Stands for Clustered Regularly Interspaced Short Palindromic Repeats.
o A gene-editing technology that mimics the natural defense mechanisms found in bacteria, used to cut DNA
at specific sites.

INDIAN POULTRY SECTOR AND H5N1

The H5N1 outbreak has exposed significant vulnerabilities within India's industrial livestock sector, emphasizing the
need to reassess animal welfare within the country's environmental and legal frameworks.

Disease Outbreaks and Biosecurity Issues:

 Avian Influenza (Bird Flu): Frequent outbreaks disrupt poultry production, necessitate culling, and cause
market instability.
 Newcastle Disease: A highly contagious disease that significantly affects poultry health and productivity.
 Biosecurity Weaknesses: Poor biosecurity measures at farms and markets aid the spread of diseases.
 Poor Living Conditions: High-density confinement in battery cages leads to stress, overcrowding, and
environmental pollution.

Economic and Market Challenges:

 Feed Price Instability: Fluctuations in key feed components like corn and soybean meal impact production costs
and increase reliance on imports.
 Market Volatility: Misinformation during outbreaks severely affects poultry product consumption and market
stability.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 176 of 348

 1

Infrastructure and Supply Chain Deficiencies:

 Inadequate Cold Chain Facilities: Leads to high spoilage rates, particularly during peak production times.
 Fragmented Supply Chain: A disorganized chain with multiple middlemen increases costs and reduces profits
for farmers.
Regulatory and Policy Constraints:
 Complex Regulatory Environment: Overlapping regulations across government levels complicate compliance.
 Limited Access to Financial Resources: Difficulties in obtaining formal credit impede growth and
modernization for small and medium-scale farms.

Labor and Environmental Issues:

 Labor Shortages: Challenges in securing and retaining skilled labor affect operational efficiency.
 Environmental Impacts: Inadequate waste management contributes to water and air pollution.
 Antibiotic Resistance Concerns: Increased use of antibiotics in poultry raises public health risks.
Animal Welfare and Industry Exit Challenges:
 Animal Welfare Standards: Difficulties in consistently applying high standards across the industry.
 Contract Farming Issues: Challenges in exiting the industry due to contractual and financial constraints.
Specifics of H5N1 Influence:
 Historical Context: First human infection traced back to 1997 in Hong Kong from chickens.
 Impact in India: First detected in Maharashtra in 2006, with widespread outbreaks through 2020 and 2021.
 Global Repercussions: Ability of H5N1 to cross species barriers, affecting wildlife globally.
 Human Fatality Rate: WHO estimates a 52% fatality rate for H5N1, highlighting its severe risk to human
health.
Overview of Provisions Related to the Poultry Sector in India
 Poultry Population Overview:
o Total Birds: India hosts 851.8 million poultry birds; around 30% are part of 'backyard poultry' by small
and marginal farmers.
o Species and Locations: Chickens, turkeys, ducks, and geese are primarily reared for meat and eggs, with the
highest poultry populations in Tamil Nadu, Andhra Pradesh, Telangana, West Bengal, Maharashtra,
Karnataka, Assam, and Kerala.
 Legal Framework and Guidelines:
o 2021 Guidelines for Poultry Farmers:
 Defines categories based on flock size: Small Farmers (5,000-25,000 birds), Medium Farmers (25,000-
100,000 birds), and Large Farmers (over 100,000 birds).
 Regulatory Requirements: Medium-sized poultry farms need a Certificate of Consent from State
Pollution Control Boards, valid for 15 years, under the Water Act, 1974, and the Air Act, 1981.
o Implementation: The Animal Husbandry Department is responsible for guideline implementation at state
and district levels.
 Regulatory Classification and Animal Welfare:
o Pollution Standards: The Central Pollution Control Board classifies poultry units with over 5,000 birds as
polluting industries requiring compliance and regulatory consent.
o Animal Welfare Legislation: The Prevention of Cruelty to Animals (PCA) Act, 1960, prohibits intensive
confinement of poultry, emphasizing animal welfare.
o Law Commission Proposals: The 269th report of the Law Commission of India in 2017 pushed for draft
rules to enhance chicken welfare in meat and egg production.
 Industry Support Initiatives:
o Poultry Venture Capital Fund (PVCF): Part of the “Entrepreneurship Development and Employment
Generation” program under the National Livestock Mission, supporting financial initiatives in poultry.
o National Livestock Mission (NLM) Programs: Includes financial assistance for Rural Backyard Poultry
Development and the Innovative Poultry Productivity Project.
o Disease Control: The Assistance to States for Control of Animal Diseases Scheme under the “Livestock
Health and Disease Control” initiative covers vaccinations for critical poultry diseases like Ranikhet Disease,
Infectious Bursal Disease, and Fowl Pox, including efforts to control Avian Influenza.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 177 of 348

 1

EARTH DAY, 2024

 Origination and Global Recognition:
o Initial Proposal: Proposed by John McConnell in 1969 at a UNESCO conference.
o First Celebration: Launched in the United States on April 22, 1970.
o UN Endorsement: Recognized by the United Nations in 1972.
o Global Participation: Engages over 1 billion people across 193 countries, coordinated by
EARTHDAY.ORG.
 Historical Milestones:
o 50th Anniversary: Earth Day 2020 marked the 50th anniversary with significant digital mobilization,
involving over 100 million participants worldwide.
 Annual Significance:
o Promotes global awareness and actions for environmental sustainability.
o Encourages cooperation among different sectors to address environmental issues.
o Focuses on individual and collective actions to mitigate environmental degradation.
 Theme for 2024: 'Planet v/s Plastics'
o Objective: Addressing the critical issue of plastic pollution.
o Goals:
 Increase public awareness of the adverse impacts of plastics on health and biodiversity.
 Advocate for the elimination of single-use plastics by 2030.
 Promote technological innovations for reducing plastic waste.
 2024 Campaign Goals:
o Facilitate global participation in reducing plastic usage.
o Support policies and innovations aimed at a sustainable, plastic-free future.
o World Earth Day 2024 underscores the urgency of environmental stewardship and sustainable practices to
ensure the well-being of the planet for future generations.

Earth Hour
 Origination and Evolution:
o Initiation: Started in Sydney, Australia, in 2007 as a symbolic lights-out event by the World Wildlife Fund
(WWF).
o Global Participation: Now includes millions of participants across over 190 countries annually.
 Purpose and Activities:
o Timing: Observed towards the end of March each year, specifically from 8:30 p.m. to 9:30 p.m. local time.
o Objective: To raise awareness about climate change and the need for energy conservation.
o Symbolic Act: Encourages the switching off of non-essential lights for one hour to symbolize commitment
to the planet.
 Impact and Involvement:
o Governments, businesses, and landmarks participate by turning off lights to promote energy conservation
awareness.
o Acts as a global demonstration of solidarity for environmental sustainability.

World Wildlife Fund (WWF):

 Foundation and Mission:
o Established: Founded in 1961 in Morges, Switzerland.
o Mission Statement: Aims to halt the degradation of Earth’s natural environment and promote a harmonious
existence between humans and nature.
 Operations and Collaborations:
o Works with various stakeholders, including governments, industries, and local communities.
o Focuses on protecting endangered wildlife, preserving natural habitats, and addressing global
environmental challenges.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 178 of 348

 1

WORLD MIGRATION REPORT 2024

The World Migration Report 2024 was released by the International Organization for Migration (IOM), detailing
global migration trends and remittance flows.

Key Highlights from World Migration Report 2024:

 Climate Change and Migration:
o Environmental changes are significantly driving global migration, with projections indicating over 216
million people could be displaced internally by 2050.
o Migration serves as both a coping and adaptation strategy to climate change impacts.
 Regional Migration Insights:
o Africa: Reduced rainfall and increased drought in North Africa (Libya, Algeria, Morocco) are leading to
increased migration.
o Asia: South Asia, especially Pakistan and Bangladesh, witnessed massive displacements due to extreme
weather events in 2022, with significant internal migration also occurring in India from states like Rajasthan,
Uttar Pradesh, and Madhya Pradesh.
 Remittance Trends:
o India remains the top recipient of remittances, receiving USD 111 billion in 2022.
o Mexico, China, the Philippines, and France were also top remittance receivers.
o Global remittances escalated by 650%, from USD 128 billion in 2000 to USD 831 billion in 2022.
o A significant USD 647 billion was sent to low- and middle-income countries.
 Migration Statistics:
o India has the largest number of international migrants, mainly residing in the UAE, USA, and Saudi Arabia.
o India ranks 13th as a destination for immigrants, hosting approximately 4.48 million people.
 Challenges for Migrants:
o Migrants, especially from South Asia, face issues like financial exploitation, debt from migration costs,
xenophobia, and workplace abuses.
 Displacement Figures:
o By the end of 2022, the number of displaced individuals worldwide reached a record high of 117 million.
 Migration from India:
o India is the source of the largest number of international migrants, totaling nearly 18 million.
o Significant Indian diasporas exist in the UAE, USA, and Saudi Arabia.
o The report notes a higher share of female immigrants from India compared to males.
 Employment in GCC Countries:
o The Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC) countries are prominent destinations for workers from India, Egypt,
Bangladesh, Ethiopia, and Kenya.
o These migrants predominantly work in sectors like construction, hospitality, security, domestic work,
and retail.

International Organization for Migration:

 Establishment: Originated in 1951 as (Provisional Intergovernmental Committee for the Movement of Migrants
from Europe) PICMME to manage post-WWII migrant movements.
 Integration with UN: Became a related organization of the United Nations in 2016.
 Headquarters: Located in Geneva, Switzerland.
 Membership: Consists of 175 Member States with 8 states holding Observer status.
 India's Membership: Joined IOM on June 18, 2008.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 179 of 348

 1

INDIA AND IRAN SIGN LONG-TERM BILATERAL CONTRACT ON CHABAHAR

PORT OPERATION
India and Iran have signed a 10-year contract for operating the Chabahar port, enhancing India’s strategic and
economic footprint in Central Asia and beyond.

Historical Agreements:
 2015: India signs an MoU to develop Chabahar Port.
 2016: Trilateral agreement between India, Iran, and Afghanistan to establish the International Transport and
Transit Corridor via Chabahar.
Contract Details:
 The agreement facilitates the operation of the Shahid-Beheshti terminal by Indian Ports Global Ltd. (IPGL)
and Iran's Port and Maritime Organisation (PMO).
 Initially delayed over arbitration clause disagreements; recently resolved to mutual satisfaction.
Strategic Importance:
 Bypasses Pakistan: Provides an alternative route to Afghanistan and Central Asia, reducing reliance on Pakistan
for transit.
 INSTC Access: Key gateway to the International North-South Transport Corridor, enhancing connectivity with
Russia, Central Asia, and Europe.
 Economic Impacts: Reduces transport costs and time by 30% and 40% respectively; supports trade with
landlocked Central Asian nations.
Humanitarian and Strategic Role:
 Serves as an entry point for humanitarian aid, particularly to Afghanistan.
 Strategic counter to China’s influence through the development of Gwadar port in Pakistan.
 Enhances India's presence in the Indian Ocean Region and provides capabilities to address regional security
challenges, including sea piracy.

Challenges Impacting Chabahar Port’s Potential:

 US Sanctions and Warnings:
o US Concerns: Highlighted risks of sanctions to India for engaging with Iran, stemming from longstanding US
restrictions on Iran since 1979.
o Sanction Exemptions: In 2018, the US granted India specific exemptions to facilitate Chabahar's
development and its connectivity projects with Afghanistan, though concerns persist.
 Regional Instability:
o Houthi Threats in the Red Sea: Houthi rebels pose risks to sea lane security impacting Chabahar’s maritime
operations.
o Geopolitical Tensions: The return of the Taliban in Afghanistan and strained Iran-Israel relations
contribute to regional instability, affecting trade and operations at Chabahar.
 Competition from Other Projects:
o India-Middle East-Europe Economic Corridor (IMEC): Presents competitive challenges to Chabahar as
both aim to connect Asia with Eastern Europe.
 Chinese Influence:
o Competition with China: Potential Chinese investments in Chabahar could dilute India’s influence and
interests due to strong competition from China.
 Infrastructure Development Hurdles:
o Infrastructure Challenges: Significant investments and expertise required to enhance port facilities and
connectivity which can be hindered by delays or inefficiencies.
India-Iran Economic Relations Overview:
 Bilateral Trade: India-Iran trade stood at USD 2.33 billion in FY 2022-23, up 21.76% year-on-year but down
23.32% compared to the previous year.
 Exports and Imports:

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 180 of 348

 1

o Exports to Iran: Included agricultural products like meat, dairy, onions, and garlic, totaling USD 1.66
billion.
o Imports from Iran: Consisted of items like methyl alcohol, petroleum products, and fruits like apples and
dates, amounting to USD 672.12 million.
 Investments:
o FDI Inflows: Minimal direct investment from Iran to India, with only USD 1 million recorded from April
2000 to December 2023.
 Oil Trade Disruption:
o Impact of US Sanctions: India has ceased importing Iranian oil due to ongoing US sanctions, impacting
economic ties.

Overview of Chabahar Port

 Location and Access:
o Geographical Position: Situated in Sistan and Baluchestan province, Iran, on the Gulf of Oman.
o Unique Features: Chabahar is the only Iranian deep-sea port with direct access to the ocean, positioned
outside the Strait of Hormuz.
 Infrastructure:
o Terminals: Consists of two main terminals: Shahid Beheshti and Shahid Kalantari.
 Strategic Corridor:
o Link to INSTC: Integral to the International North-South Transport Corridor (INSTC), a multi-mode
network of ship, rail, and road route for moving freight between India, Russia, Iran, Europe, and Central Asia.
o Route Details: The corridor spans approximately 7,200 kilometers from the Indian Ocean to Northern
Europe.

Strategic Importance of Chabahar Port for India

 Geopolitical Significance:
o Counter to Gwadar Port: Acts as a strategic counter to Pakistan's Gwadar Port, developed as part of China’s
Belt and Road Initiative.
o Access to Central Asia and Afghanistan: Provides a pivotal route to Afghanistan and further into Central
Asia, bypassing Pakistan.
 Trade and Connectivity:
o Proximity to India: Approximately 550 nautical miles away from Kandla Port in Gujarat, facilitating shorter
and more cost-effective shipping routes.
o Trade Potential: Enhances India's trade connections not only with Iran but also boosts economic
interactions with Europe through diversified routes.

INDIAN LITERARY WORKS IN UNESCO’S MEMORY OF THE WORLD REGISTER

 The 20th General Meeting of the Memory of the World Committee for Asia and the Pacific (MOWCAP) took
place in Ulaanbaatar, Mongolia during the 2024 cycle.
 20 new items were inscribed from various Asia-Pacific member states.

Indian Contributions
 Indira Gandhi National Centre for the Arts (IGNCA) played a crucial role in the nominations, marking its first
participation since the inception of the Regional Register in 2008.

Indian Works Included

 Ramcharitmanas
o Authored by Goswami Tulsidas in the 16th century.
o Written in Awadhi dialect, based on the Ramayana by sage Valmiki.
o Known for its spiritual insights, moral lessons, and poetic beauty.
 Panchatantra
o Dates back to at least the 3rd century BCE.
o Originally written in Sanskrit by Pt. Vishnu Sharma.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 181 of 348
 1

o Teaches Niti (sensible way of living), featuring anthropomorphized animals to impart practical life lessons.
 Sahṛdayāloka-Locana
o A Sanskrit treatise by Acharya Anandvardhan.

Significance for India

 Represents a confirmation of India’s rich literary heritage and cultural legacy.
 Enhances India’s role in global cultural preservation.
About UNESCO’s Memory of the World (MOW) Programme
 Launched in 1992.
 Aims to safeguard, preserve, facilitate access to, and use of documentary heritage.
 Enhances public awareness of the significance of documentary heritage globally.

Other Inscribed Items in the Asia-Pacific Region

 Australia and Tuvalu: Funafuti: The Edgeworth David 1897 Expedition Documents.
 Bangladesh: “Sultana’s Dream” by Rokeya S. Hossain.
 China: Archives related to Chengdu Traditional Teahouses, Huizhou Genealogy Archives, Printing Blocks at the
Derge Printing House.
 Indonesia: Indarung I, Indonesian Sugar Research Institute’s Archives, Tambo Tuanku Imam Bonjol Manuscript.
 Malaysia: Al-Tarikh Salasilah Negeri Kedah, Royal Correspondence of Baginda Omar.
 Mongolia: Family Chart of Hereditary Lords of the Khalkha Mongols, Mongolia’s First Postage Stamps ‘Eldev
Ochir’.
 Philippines: Doctrina Christiana en Lengua Espanola y Tagala, Hinilawod Epic Chant Recordings.
 Uzbekistan: Images of Khorezm Oasis by Khudaibergan Devanov, “Turkestan Album”.
 Viet Nam: Bas-reliefs on the Nine Bronze Urns in Hue Imperial Palace.

About MOWCAP
 Established in 1998.
 Focuses on the preservation and access to documentary heritage of the Asia/Pacific region.
 Celebrates regional achievements in genealogy, literature, science, and other categories.
 MOWCAP covers 43 countries, representing one of UNESCO's five regional programs.

INDIA PROPOSES DIGITAL COMPETITION BILL, 2024 AGAINST TECH GIANTS

A Committee on Digital Competition Law, formed by the Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA), has recommended a
new Digital Competition Act.

 About Digital Competition Bill 2024

o Inspired by the EU’s Digital Markets Act (DMA), which fully took effect earlier in the year.
o The bill is designed to proactively legislate against anti-competitive practices by major digital companies.
o It aims to set presumptive norms to prevent anti-competitive actions before they occur, with the potential
for heavy penalties.
 Need for Digital Competition Bill
o Current ex-post antitrust framework under the Competition Act, 2002 is reactive, addressing violations
only after they occur.
o The Digital Competition Bill (DCB) proposes an ex-ante approach to prevent violations before they
disrupt the market.
o Aims to address monopolistic actions by big tech, highlighted by recent fines such as Google's Rs 1.337 crore
penalty by the Competition Commission of India (CCI) in 2023.
o Seeks to reduce barriers for new entrants and promote innovation and diversity in the digital market.
o Focuses on creating equitable conditions for smaller companies to compete effectively.
o Aims to guide the digital ecosystem's growth towards systematic fairness and competitive equity.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 182 of 348

 1

 Key Proposals of the Draft Digital Competition Bill

o Introduces a forward-looking, preventive, and presumptive law (an ex ante framework) that anticipates
potential antitrust issues.
o Lists core digital services under Schedule I, which includes:
 Online search engines, video-sharing platforms, online social networking, interpersonal communications
services, operating systems, web browsers, cloud services, advertising services, and online intermediation
services.
o Proposes to designate certain enterprises as Systemically Significant Digital Enterprises (SSDEs), based
on factors like turnover, user base, and market influence.
o Entities that provide core digital services and meet specific parameters can be designated as SSDEs, with
additional enterprises possible if deemed significant by the CCI.
o Responsibilities of SSDEs include prohibitions against practices such as self-preferencing and anti-
steering, with possible fines up to 10% of their global turnover if these regulations are violated.
o Also introduces the concept of Associate Digital Enterprises (ADEs), which are other group companies
that benefit from shared data within the tech group, holding them to similar obligations as SSDEs depending
on their involvement.
Regulating Acts in Different Countries
Country Mechanism Description
Digital Markets Act (DMA) DMA aims to eliminate harmful business practices by major digital
Europe and Digital Services Act players, fostering fairer competition. DSA regulates various online
(DSA) services, including websites, infrastructure, and platforms.
Implemented to curb the dominance of Big Tech companies. It
USA Anti-trust legislation empowers states in competition cases and boosts federal
regulators' funding.
Advises stricter regulations for Facebook and Google to enhance
Competition watchdog media competition. The Online Safety Act empowers authorities to
Australia
recommendations mandate the removal of online bullying posts and imposes fines on
companies and hosts involved in the alleged abuse.
Enforces disclosure of terms and conditions by tech giants,
Digital Platform Transaction
Japan prevents unfair trade practices, and protects user information to
Transparency Act (DPTTA)
ensure fair competition.
Competition Act Updated to include stricter rules for digital markets, targeting
Canada
Amendments anti-competitive practices by large tech firms.
Amendment to the Bans app store operators from enforcing in-app payment systems,
South
Telecommunications promoting fair competition and consumer choice.
Korea
Business Act

Existing Framework for Competition Act in India

Competition Act 2002 and CCI
 Competition Act 2002: Targets antitrust issues and regulates Big Tech Companies in India.
 Establishes the Competition Commission of India (CCI), which ensures fair competition by monitoring
monopolistic practices.
 Recent action includes penalizing Google for misusing its dominant position in the online search market.

Competition Amendment Bill, 2022

 Aims to strengthen the CCI’s review process, especially for the digital and infrastructure sectors.
 Mandates regulations to assess significant business operations within India.

Information Technology Act, 2000

 Provides a legal framework for electronic governance by recognizing electronic records and digital signatures.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 183 of 348

 1

 However, it is noted for lacking provisions to address modern technology misuse.

Multi-stakeholder Initiatives
 Involves collaboration between governments, businesses, and academia for technology governance.
 Examples include the Global Network Initiative (GNI) and Partnership on AI (PAI).

RBI Directions and Vision Documents

 The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) regularly issues directives and regulations to oversee the activities of big tech
companies in the fintech sector.

Competition Commission of India (CCI):

 Establishment and Purpose
o The Competition Commission of India (CCI) was established by the Government of India under the
Competition Act, 2002.
o Its primary role is to enforce the Competition Act, 2002, which aims to promote and sustain competition,
eliminate practices having adverse effects on competition, protect the interests of consumers, and ensure
freedom of trade in the markets of India.
 Key Functions
o Anti-Competitive Agreements: CCI is tasked with preventing anti-competitive agreements (like cartels)
that cause or are likely to cause an appreciable adverse effect on competition within India.
o Abuse of Dominant Position: It regulates entities to prevent abuse of a dominant position in the market
which could hurt competition or consumers.
o Combinations Regulation: CCI reviews mergers and acquisitions which could have a significant impact on
competition in the relevant market in India, ensuring they do not have an adverse effect on competition.
o Advocacy and Training: The commission also engages in competition advocacy, creating awareness and
imparting training on competition issues.
 Structure
o The CCI consists of a Chairperson and six Members appointed by the Government of India.
o They are chosen for their expertise in international trade, economics, business, commerce, law, finance, or
accountancy.
o The headquarters of CCI is located in New Delhi.

EU-BREXIT REASON AND BRITAIN ECONOMIC CRISIS AND EU ELECTIONS

Brexit is the term used for the United Kingdom's exit from the European Union (EU), abbreviated from "British
Exit."
Origins of the Term
 Similar to "Grexit," a term for Greece's potential exit from the EU, which was coined by Citigroup economists in
February 2012.

Historical EU Relations
 The UK has had a consistently challenging relationship with the EU, attempting to distance itself on several
occasions.

European Union Overview

 Founded in 1957, evolving to its current structure in 1992.
 Consists of 28 out of 51 European countries.
 The EU operates under a treaty that establishes the European Parliament and European Council with member
state representatives.
 Represents 16% of world imports and exports, making it the largest trading bloc globally.
 Awarded the Nobel Peace Prize in 2012 for its efforts in peace, reconciliation, democracy, and human rights.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 184 of 348

 1

Euro Area (EA)

 The Euro Area is a monetary union within the EU, using the common currency, Euro, comprising 19 of the 27 EU
countries.
 Britain was a member of the EU but not of the Euro Area, maintaining its currency, the Pound Sterling.

Leave EU Campaign
 Advocated for the UK's exit due to financial and bureaucratic burdens linked to EU membership and concerns
over immigration from EU countries, particularly from the PIGS economies (Portugal, Italy, Greece, Spain).

2016 Referendum on EU Membership

 A referendum held on June 23, 2016, asked whether the UK should remain in or leave the EU.
 All British, Irish, and Commonwealth citizens over 18 resident in the UK, plus UK nationals living abroad
registered in the UK within the last 15 years, were eligible to vote.
 51.9% voted in favor of exiting the EU, marking the first time a member country decided to leave since the EU's
founding.

Withdrawal Agreement Overview

 Negotiated between the EU and the U.K. in 2019, it established an 11-month transition period ending in
December 2020, extendable to 2022 or 2023.
 The U.K. continued to participate in the EU’s Customs Union and Single Market during this period.
 The U.K. adhered to EU law and international agreements of the EU, despite no longer being a member.
 The transition period aimed to provide continuity and minimize disruptions for citizens, businesses, public
administrations, and international partners.

Impact on the U.K. and EU

 Exiting the EU meant the U.K. left hundreds of international agreements on various topics including trade,
aviation, fisheries, and civil nuclear cooperation.
 With only 11 months for negotiations, only basic deals covering trade, fisheries, and security were likely.
 Potential for a new no-deal scenario at the end of 2020 if trade talks faltered.
 In case of no deal, agreements on citizens' rights, financial obligations, and the Irish border remained intact.
 Both regions would need to prepare for trading on World Trade Organization (WTO) terms.
 EU would only agree to zero tariffs and zero quotas if the U.K. committed to zero dumping, ensuring no
lowering of social and environmental standards.
 Negotiations could be contentious over the inclusion of services in the trade deal and access to British waters.
 Non-trade subjects also expected to cause political issues as EU member states adjust their policies to new
regulations.
Impact on India
 The U.K. is a significant trading partner for India, with investments from Indian companies in the U.K.
quadrupling in the last four years.
 The U.K. ranks among the largest G20 investors in India.
 Brexit's implications include potential volatility in the global and Indian stock markets due to fluctuations in the
pound.
 The U.K. and EU combined account for 23.7% of the Rupee’s effective exchange rate, influencing foreign portfolio
investments and potentially weakening the rupee.
 Indian businesses in the U.K. previously enjoyed border-free access to the rest of Europe, which may be
compromised post-Brexit.
 Concerns over the future of Indian investments, as they are more substantial in the U.K. than in the rest of Europe
combined.

Britain’s Economic Crisis

 Overview of Recent Economic Conditions
o Britain's economy entered a recession in the second half of 2023, with GDP contracting by 0.3% in the fourth
quarter after a 0.1% decline in the third quarter.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 185 of 348

 1

o This recession is more severe than economists had predicted, as a Reuters poll estimated a 0.1% decline for
the fourth quarter.
 Economic Context and Government Response
o The British Pound weakened against major currencies, and there are increased bets on the Bank of England
(BoE) cutting interest rates in the near future.
o The Finance Minister announced a budget plan due on March 6, aiming for economic measures to support
growth.
o The economy's total growth for 2023 was just 0.1% compared to 2022, with a forecast of only 0.25%
growth for 2024.
 Historical and International Comparisons
o The economy's size is just 1% above its late 2019 levels before the pandemic, with only Germany among G7
nations performing worse.
o The recession marks the UK's economy stagnating for nearly two years, the longest period of no per capita
GDP growth since records began in 1955.
 Political Implications and Statements
o Prime Minister Rishi Sunak, who promised to boost economic growth, faces political challenges, including
potential losses in by-elections coinciding with recession news.
o Labour Party criticizes the economic management under the Conservatives, who have been in power for over
a decade.
 Inflation and Economic Outlook
o Inflation was recorded at 4.0% in January, lower than expected, prompting discussions on potential rate cuts
by the BoE.
o Despite signs of economic recovery, the BoE remains cautious due to strong wage growth, complicating
efforts to reduce inflation.
 Sectoral Contributions to GDP
o Decreases in GDP for the fourth quarter were significantly impacted by sectors like manufacturing,
construction, and wholesale.

European Parliament Elections

 Date of Election: Scheduled for June 6-9.
 Eligibility: Approximately 373 million citizens from 27 EU member states are eligible to vote.
 Voting Age: Varies by country—18 in most, 16 in Belgium, Germany, Austria, and Malta; 17 in Greece if turning
17 during the election year; no age limit in Hungary for married individuals.
 Voting from Abroad: Permitted in all member states except Czechia, Ireland, Malta, and Slovakia; restricted to
within the EU for Bulgaria and Italy.
 Voting System: Varies—closed lists in some states and preferential systems in others.
 Methods of Voting: Includes voting at national embassies, by mail, or electronically, depending on the country’s
laws.
 The European Parliament elections are held every five years.
 All citizens of EU member states are eligible to vote for Members of the European Parliament (MEPs).
 Elections involve a proportional representation system. Voters elect MEPs who represent their interests at the
EU level.

Political Groups in the European Parliament

 MEPs form political groups based on shared beliefs, which influence EU policy-making.
 Each group must consist of at least 23 MEPs from a quarter of the EU countries.
 Major political groups include the European People’s Party (EPP), Progressive Alliance of Socialists and
Democrats (S&D), Renew Europe, Greens/European Free Alliance (Greens/EFA), European Conservatives and
Reformists (ECR), Identity and Democracy (ID), and The Left Group (GUE/NGL).

European Parliament (EP):

 Members: Comprises 720 Members of the European Parliament (MEPs) elected every five years.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 186 of 348

 1

 Functions: Negotiates EU laws with the European Council, approves the EU budget, and votes on international
agreements and EU enlargements.
 Powers: Approves or rejects the appointment of the European Commission president but cannot propose laws;
can only negotiate laws proposed by the European Commission.

European Council Overview

 Role: Sets the EU’s political direction and priorities.
 Members: Includes heads of state or government from member countries, the Presidents of the European
Council and European Commission, and the High Representative for Foreign Affairs.
 History: Established as an informal summit in 1975; became an official institution with the Treaty of Lisbon in
2009.
 Decision-Making: Decisions are made by consensus.

India-EU Relations
 Trade Relations: The EU was India's third-largest trading partner in 2021.
 Financial Relations: EU foreign direct investment (FDI) in India was €87 billion in 2020.
 Trade Volume: Trade in goods and services between India and the EU was €95.5 billion in 2020.
 European Investment Bank (EIB) Investments: Over €3 billion in infrastructure, energy, and climate projects
in India.
 Strategic Partnerships: Includes efforts on connectivity, water, resource efficiency, and circular economy
approaches; a Trade and Technology Council focusing on digital transformation and green technologies launched
in 2023.
 Development Cooperation: Under NDICI-Global Europe, India is set to receive €90 million in grant funding
from 2021-2027.

ROLE OF PRO-TEM SPEAKER

Bhartruhari Mahtab has been appointed as the pro-tem Speaker of the 18th Lok Sabha.
 He is a seven-term MP from Cuttack.

Role and Definition of Pro-tem Speaker

 A pro-tem Speaker is a temporary position, indicated by the Latin term "pro-tem" which means "for the time
being".
 The pro-tem Speaker is appointed to oversee the proceedings of the Lok Sabha or state legislatures until the
permanent Speaker and Deputy Speaker are elected.
Constitutional and Conventional Aspects
 The President of India appoints the pro-tem Speaker under Article 95(1) of the Constitution.
 Traditionally, the pro-tem Speaker is the senior most member of the house, chosen with the consensus of its
members.
 The Constitution does not specifically mention the term 'Pro-tem Speaker'.
Duties of the Pro-tem Speaker
 Presides over the first sitting of the newly elected Lok Sabha.
 Administers the oath of office to the new MPs.
 Conducts the elections for the Speaker and Deputy Speaker of the House.
 Facilitates the floor test to confirm the government’s majority.
Tenure of the Pro-tem Speaker
 The office of the pro-tem Speaker ceases to exist once a new Speaker is elected by the House.
 The First Protem Speaker of Lok Sabha was G.V Mavlankar.
 Seth Govind Das (Second, Third, Fourth and Fifth) and Shri Inderjit Gupta (Tenth, Eleventh, Twelfth and
Thirteenth) have the rare distinction of serving as Protem Speaker in 4 successive Lok Sabhas.
 Dr Virendra Kumar was the Protem speaker for 17th Lok Sabha.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 187 of 348

 1

HINDU POPULATION SHARE DIPPED 7.82%: PM-EAC

 Key Findings of the PM-EAC Report on Religious Demographics in India (1950-2015)
o Decline in Hindu Population: Decreased by 7.82%; Hindu population as of 2011 was 79.8%.
o Increase in Minority Populations:
 Muslims: Increased from 9.84% to 14.095%.
 Christians: Increased from 2.24% to 2.36%.
 Sikhs: Increased from 1.24% to 1.85%.
 Buddhists: Rose from 0.05% to 0.81%.
 Jains: Decreased from 0.45% to 0.36%.
 Parsis: Decreased by 85%, from 0.03% to 0.0004%.
o Total Fertility Rate (TFR) in India:
 Current TFR is around 2; preferred TFR is 2.19.
 Hindu TFR declined from 3.3 in 1991 to 1.9 in 2024.
 Muslim TFR declined from 4.4 in 1991 to 2.4 in 2024.
 Global and Regional Demographic Trends
o OECD Countries: Average decline in majority populations by 29%.
o Africa: Dominant religions shifted from animism to other religions, with animism no longer the majority in
any of the surveyed 24 countries by 2015.
o South Asia: Majority religious groups are increasing while minority populations have declined in countries
like Bangladesh, Pakistan, Sri Lanka, Bhutan, and Afghanistan.
 Demographic Patterns and Their Relevance
o Definition: Demographic patterns refer to trends observed in human populations based on factors like birth
rates, death rates, and migration.
o Relevance:
 Planning and Development: Crucial for infrastructure, healthcare, education, and social services
planning.
 Analyzing Trends: Helps in understanding the causes and consequences of population changes, such
as economic development impacts, cultural shifts, and healthcare needs.
 Policy Formulation: Influences policies on healthcare, education, urban planning, and elderly care
based on age-specific and population distribution needs.

Economic Advisory Council to the Prime Minister:

 Overview of EAC-PM
o The EAC-PM is a non-constitutional, non-statutory body, established to provide economic advice to the
Prime Minister of India.
o The body is independent and aims to present economic issues from a neutral viewpoint.
 Functions of EAC-PM
o Advisory Role: It advises on various economic matters including inflation, microfinance, and industrial
output.
o Analytical Role: Analyzes economic or related issues referred by the Prime Minister or initiated suo motu
by the Council.
o Macroeconomic Focus: Addresses issues of macroeconomic importance, offering insights and
recommendations to the Prime Minister.
o Additional Tasks: Takes on other tasks as requested by the Prime Minister from time to time.
 Operational Details
o Nodal Agency: The NITI Aayog serves as the nodal agency for the EAC-PM, assisting with administrative,
logistic, planning, and budgeting needs.
 Reporting and Publications
o Produces periodic reports including the Annual Economic Outlook and the Review of the Economy.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 188 of 348

 1

WHO’S NEW GLOBAL MALARIA STRATEGY FOR 2030

WHO Global Malaria Program Strategy to 2030
 Strategic Objectives:
o Development of norms and standards to guide malaria control and elimination efforts.
o Introduction of new tools and innovations to combat malaria effectively.
o Promotion of strategic information for impact to enhance decision-making and resource allocation.
o Provision of technical leadership in the global response to malaria.

Malaria Statistics for 2022:

 Estimated 249 million new malaria cases worldwide.
 Approximately 608,000 malaria-related deaths globally.
 Africa remains the most affected region, with 95% of malaria deaths and 94% of cases occurring there.

Goals and Targets for Malaria Reduction (2020-2030)

 Goal 1: Reduce Malaria Mortality Rates
o 2020 Milestone: Achieve at least a 40% reduction; actual reduction was 18%, with 22% off track.
o 2025 Milestone: Target at least a 75% reduction.
o 2030 Target: Aim for at least a 90% reduction.
 Goal 2: Reduce Malaria Case Incidence
o 2020 Milestone: Aim for at least a 40% reduction; actual reduction was 37%, with 3% off track.
o 2025 Milestone: Target at least a 75% reduction.
o 2030 Target: Aim for at least a 90% reduction.
 Goal 3: Eliminate Malaria from Countries Where it Was Transmitted in 2015
o 2020 Milestone: Elimination from at least 10 countries; status was on track.
o 2025 Milestone: Eliminate from at least 20 countries.
o 2030 Target: Eliminate from at least 35 countries.
 Goal 4: Prevent Re-establishment of Malaria in Countries That are Malaria-Free
o 2020 Milestone: Prevent re-establishment and remain on track.
o 2025 Milestone: Continue to prevent re-establishment.
o 2030 Target: Maintain prevention of re-establishment.
World Malaria Day:
 Observed: Annually on April 25.
 Established: In 2007 by the World Health Organization (WHO).
 2023 Theme: "Time to deliver zero malaria: invest, innovate, implement".
About Malaria:
 Cause: Caused by the Plasmodium parasite, transmitted through bites of infected female Anopheles
mosquitoes.
 Prevalence: Common in tropical and subtropical regions including sub-Saharan Africa, Southeast Asia, and
South America.
 Species: Plasmodium falciparum (most deadly), Plasmodium vivax (most widespread).
Symptoms:
 Includes fever, chills, headache, muscle aches, and fatigue.
 Severe cases can lead to organ failure, coma, and death.
Vaccines:
 RTS,S: First malaria vaccine approved by WHO for use in high transmission areas in Africa, with efficacy
between 30-40%.
 Developed by GlaxoSmithKline and supported by the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation.
 R21 Vaccine: Developed by Oxford University, awaiting WHO approval, approved for use in Ghana and Nigeria,
manufactured by Serum Institute of India.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 189 of 348

 1

Malaria Statistics:
 2021 Data: Estimated 619,000 deaths.
 Significant decline in malaria cases and deaths in India over the past 10 years.
Global Efforts to Contain Malaria:
 Global Malaria Program:
o Led by WHO, aims to reduce malaria incidence and mortality by 40% by 2020, 75% by 2025, and 90% by
2030 compared to 2015 levels.
 Malaria Elimination Initiative:
o Launched by the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation, focuses on eliminating malaria through various
strategies including treatment access and mosquito population reduction.
 E-2025 Initiative:
o Launched by WHO in 2021 to stop malaria transmission in 25 targeted countries by 2025.
India’s Malaria Programs
 India's Anti-Malaria Programs
o National Vector-Borne Disease Control Programme (NVBDCP): This umbrella program focuses on the
prevention and control of vector-borne diseases including Malaria, Dengue, Chikungunya, Japanese
Encephalitis, Kala-azar, and Lymphatic Filariasis.
 National Malaria Control Programme (NMCP)
o Launch Year: 1953
o Key Activities:
 Insecticidal Residual Spray (IRS) with DDT.
 Monitoring and Surveillance of malaria cases.
 Treatment of malaria patients.
 National Framework for Malaria Elimination (NFME) 2016-2030
o Objective: Eliminate malaria (zero indigenous cases) across India by 2030.
o Strategy: Maintain malaria-free status in areas where transmission has been interrupted and prevent the
re-introduction of malaria.
o Alignment: Based on the WHO Global Technical Strategy for Malaria 2016–2030.
 High Burden to High Impact (HBHI) Initiative
o Start Date: July 2019
o Location: Initiated in the states of West Bengal, Jharkhand, Chhattisgarh, and Madhya Pradesh.
o Outcome: Reduction in malaria endemicity due to the distribution of Long-Lasting Insecticidal Nets (LLINs)
in high burden areas.
 Malaria Elimination Research Alliance-India (MERA-India)
o Established by: The Malaria Elimination Research Alliance (MERA)-India was launched on the eve of
World Malaria Day in 2019 by Dr. Balram Bhargava, the Director General of the Indian Council of Medical
Research
o Purpose: Conglomerate of partners collaborating to control malaria, enhancing research efforts towards
malaria elimination.

INDIAN SPACE SITUATIONAL ASSESSMENT REPORT (ISSAR) 2023

Overview of ISSAR 2023
 Released by the Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO).
 Provides an annual assessment of space activities and threats, aiding in safe and sustainable outer space
operations.

Purpose of Space Situational Assessment

 Space Situational Awareness (SSA): Essential for understanding environmental hazards in space such as
natural objects (asteroids, comets, meteoroids), energy and particle flux, and man-made space debris.
 Aims to ensure safe and responsible space operations.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 190 of 348

 1

ISRO’s SSA Activities

 Involves close approach assessments for satellites and launch vehicles.
 Includes prediction of atmospheric re-entry and studying the evolution of space object populations to protect
national space assets.

Global Space Scenario in 2023

 Continued growth in the space object population due to increased space access and diverse applications of
space technology.
 3143 new objects were added from 212 launches and on-orbit breakup events, compared to 2533 objects from
179 launches in 2022.
 Noted five major on-orbit breakup events leading to a net addition of 69 fragmented objects to space debris by
year-end.

Indian Space Developments in 2023

 Total of 127 Indian satellites launched by end of 2023, inclusive of government and private/academic
institutions.
 Operational satellites as of December 31, 2023: 22 in LEO and 29 in GEO.
 Active deep space missions: Chandrayaan-2 Orbiter, Aditya-L1, and Chandrayaan-3 Propulsion Module.
 21 Indian satellites have re-entered the atmosphere to date, with 8 re-entries occurring in 2023 alone.

ISRO Launch Successes in 2023

 All seven ISRO launches in 2023 were successful, placing 5 Indian satellites, 46 foreign satellites, and 8 rocket
bodies into intended orbits.

ISRO’s Space Situational Awareness (SSA) Activities:

 Analyses of Close Approaches: ISRO conducts regular assessments to predict close approaches of space objects
to Indian satellites.
 Collision Avoidance Maneuvers (CAMs):
o In 2023, 23 CAMs were executed to prevent potential collisions, an increase from 21 in 2022 and 19 in 2021.
o Alerts for close approaches within 1 km exceeded 3,000, with about 1 lakh close approach alerts received
overall, mainly from the USSPACECOM.
 Special Missions: No critical close approaches were detected for Chandrayaan-3 during all its mission phases
and for Aditya-L1 during its Earth-bound phase.

International Cooperation on Space Sustainability:

 ISRO’s Global Engagement:
o Participates in the Inter-Agency Debris Coordination Committee (IADC), International Academy of
Astronautics (IAA), International Astronautical Federation (IAF), and International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) on space debris and traffic management.
o Chair of IADC for 2023-24, hosted the 42nd IADC meeting in April 2024.
o Contributed to IADC space debris mitigation guidelines and participated in annual re-entry campaigns.
 UN Involvement: Active in the UN-Committee on the Peaceful Uses of Outer Space (COPUOS), contributing to
discussions on space debris and space activity sustainability.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 191 of 348

 1

MARINE HEATWAVES AND CORAL BLEACHING IN THE LAKSHADWEEP SEA

Study Conducted by:
 Institute: ICAR-Central Marine Fisheries Research Institute (CMFRI).
 Observation: Severe bleaching of coral reefs due to prolonged marine heatwaves since October 2023.
 Historical Events: Previous major bleaching events occurred in 1998, 2010, and 2015; however, the scale of
the current event is unprecedented.

Measurement of Heat Stress in Corals

 Threshold: Corals experience thermal stress when sea surface temperatures exceed 1 degree Celsius above
the maximum mean temperature.
 Degree Heating Week (DHW): Used to measure accumulated heat stress over 12 weeks, calculated in celsius-
weeks. DHW values above 4 degrees Celsius weeks lead to significant coral bleaching.

Current Situation (as of October 27, 2023)

 Lakshadweep Sea temperatures have consistently been 1 degree Celsius above normal since late October 2023.
 This elevated temperature has led to the crossing of the critical DHW threshold, resulting in significant coral
bleaching.

Marine Heatwaves and Coral Bleaching in the Indian Ocean

 Study: A 2022 study by the Indian Institute of Tropical Meteorology (IITM), Pune.
 Findings: There is a significant increase in marine heatwaves in the Indian Ocean, attributed to rapid ocean
warming and strong El Nino events.
 Frequency Increase: The western Indian Ocean saw an increase of approximately 1.5 events per decade, while
the north Bay of Bengal saw 0.5 events per decade.
 Event Count: From 1982–2018, the western Indian Ocean experienced 66 events, and the Bay of Bengal had
94 events.

Impacts on Lakshadweep
 Environmental Impact: Threats to the livelihoods of coastal communities, tourism, fisheries, and critical marine
habitats, including seagrass meadows and kelp forests.
 Structural Impact on Islands: Lakshadweep’s formation relies on the health of its coral reefs; death of coral
leads to organic matter accumulation which hinders new coral formation.
 Additional Factors: Excessive atmospheric heat from global warming and shifts in ocean currents contribute to
unusually high water temperatures.

Coral Reefs Overview

o Corals: Sessile animals that attach themselves permanently to the ocean floor.
o Types: Classified into ‘hard’ and ‘soft’ corals.
 Hard Corals: Possess stony skeletons made from limestone produced by coral polyps. Dead polyp
skeletons serve as foundations for new polyps.
o Formation: Stony coral skeletons accumulate over thousands to millions of years, forming complex coral
reefs, often called the "rainforests of the sea."
o Ecosystem: Coral reefs host thousands of marine species, making them vibrant ecosystems.
o Lakshadweep Islands: Almost all islands in Lakshadweep are coral atolls, with their soil largely derived
from corals and surrounded by extant coral reefs.

Coral Bleaching Explanation

 Process: Occurs when water temperatures are too warm, causing corals to expel the microscopic algae living in
their tissues.
 Consequence: Without algae, coral tissues become transparent, revealing their white skeleton—a condition
known as coral bleaching.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 192 of 348

 1

 Impact on Corals: While bleached corals are not immediately dead, they risk starvation and disease. Without
algae, corals can survive for approximately two weeks.

GREAT NICOBAR ISLAND PROJECT

Proposed Rs 72,000-crore infrastructure upgrade at Great Nicobar Island considered a threat to indigenous
people and the ecosystem.

About Great Nicobar Island

 Location: Southernmost island of the Andaman and Nicobar Islands, in the eastern Bay of Bengal.
 Separated by the 150-km wide Ten Degree Channel.
 Indira Point: Southernmost point of India, approximately 150 km from the northernmost island of the
Indonesian archipelago.

Ecosystem
 Contains tropical wet evergreen forests, mountain ranges up to 650 m above sea level, and coastal plains.
 Features two national parks and a biosphere reserve.
 Hosts endangered species, including the leatherback sea turtle as the island’s flagship species.

Tribes of Nicobar
 Shompen: Hunter-gatherers reliant on forest and marine resources.
 Nicobarese: Previously located on the west coast; many relocated post-2004 tsunami.
 Currently, 237 Shompen and 1,094 Nicobarese reside in a 751 sq km tribal reserve, with 84 sq km proposed
for denotification.

Great Nicobar Island Project

 Background: Launched in 2021.
 Environmental clearance granted in November 2022 by the Environment Ministry for development projects
worth Rs 72,000 crore.
 Originated after a report by NITI Aayog, which highlighted the island’s strategic location.
 Proposal Components:
o Construction of an international container trans-shipment terminal.
o Development of a greenfield international airport.
o Township development.
o Establishment of a 450 MVA gas and solar-based power plant over 16,610 hectares.
 Strategic and Functional Aspects:
o Port to be controlled by the Indian Navy.
o Airport to serve dual military-civilian purposes and support tourism.

Economic Reasons for Developing Great Nicobar Island

 Location advantages: Positioned equidistantly between Colombo, Port Klang, and Singapore.
 Proximity to the East-West international shipping corridor, a major global trade route.
 Proposed International Container Trans-shipment Terminal (ICTT) could serve as a crucial hub for cargo
ships.
 As per the NITI Aayog report, aims for Great Nicobar to become a significant player in cargo transshipment and
the regional and global maritime economy.

Strategic & Security Reasons

 Initial development proposals trace back to the 1970s, highlighting its national security importance.
 Strategic location crucial for monitoring and controlling the Indo-Pacific region’s maritime choke points such as
Malacca, Sunda, and Lombok.
 Concerns over Chinese military build-up and infrastructural expansion in nearby regions, including a military
facility at Coco Islands, Myanmar (55 km north).
 Developing Great Nicobar for strong military deterrence is deemed vital for India’s national security.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 193 of 348
 1

Concerns Around the Great Nicobar Island Project

 Ecological threats: Potential massive loss of tree cover impacting local flora, fauna, and increased sediment
runoff harming coral reefs.
 Loss of mangroves due to development activities.
 Port project risks to the marine ecosystem, including damage to coral reefs and threats to the Nicobar
Megapode bird and leatherback turtles in Galathea Bay.

Impact on Indigenous People

 Potential severe effects on the Shompen people, a particularly vulnerable tribal group, due to their dependency
on forest and marine resources.
 Allegations of tribal rights violations and insufficient consultation with the Tribal Council of Great and Little
Nicobar Islands.
 Revocation of a no-objection certificate by the Tribal Council in November 2022 for diverting about 160 sq
km of forest land, citing incomplete information.
Seismic Concerns
 The project area is in a seismically volatile zone that experienced permanent subsidence of about 15 ft during
the 2004 tsunami.

National Green Tribunal's Role

 In April 2023, the Kolkata Bench of the National Green Tribunal (NGT) opted not to interfere with the granted
environmental and forest clearances.
 Ordered the formation of a high-power committee to review these clearances, with the current status of the
committee's report remaining unclear.

UN FINANCING FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT REPORT 2024

Key Issues Identified:
 Global crises including geopolitical tensions and climate disasters, compounded by a cost-of-living crisis, have
stalled progress in healthcare, education, and other development areas.
 Debt services increase: For Least Developed Countries (LDCs), annual debt services are projected to rise from
USD 26 billion in 2022 to USD 40 billion between 2023 and 2025, driven largely by climate-related disasters.
 Interest payment burden: Poorest nations now allocate 12% of their revenues towards interest payments, a
fourfold increase over the past decade. Approximately 40% of the global population resides in countries where
more is spent on interest than on health or education.
 Slowing development funding: LDCs face reduced growth in development funding due to factors like low
domestic revenue from tax evasion, a decrease in the global corporate tax rate from 28.2% in 2000 to 21.1% in
2023, and unmet Official Development Assistance (ODA) and climate finance commitments from OECD
countries.
Investment Needs:
 The report estimates that approximately USD 4.2 trillion is needed to close the development financing gap, up
from USD 2.5 trillion pre-COVID-19 pandemic.
Recommendations in the Report:
 Suggests that the international financial system established in 1944 at the Bretton Woods Conference is
outdated and inadequate for current needs.
 Calls for a “massive surge of financing” and a comprehensive reform of the international financial architecture to
achieve SDGs by 2030.
 Emphasizes the necessity for global cooperation, targeted financing, and significant political commitment to
meet the SDGs.
Progress of India in Achieving SDGs
 India’s Rank: India ranks 112th out of 166 countries in the United Nations SDG Index and Dashboards
Report 2023, improving from 121st in 2022.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 194 of 348

 1

Progress in Key Goals:

 Goal 1 - No Poverty:
o India has reduced its poverty rate from 45% in 1993 to 21% in 2011.
o 415 million people exited poverty between 2005 and 2021 (Global Multidimensional Poverty Index 2023).
 Goal 2 - Zero Hunger:
o Undernourishment decreased from 18.2% (2004-2006) to 14.5% (2016-2018).
o India is home to one-quarter of the world’s undernourished population, highlighting its global role in
addressing hunger.
 Goal 3 - Good Health and Well-being:
o Maternal mortality ratio reduced from 384 in 2000 to 103 in 2020 (UN MMEIG 2020 report).
o Under-five mortality rate decreased from 89 per 1,000 live births in 1990 to 34 in 2019.
 Goal 4 - Quality Education:
o Literacy rate: 67.77% in rural India and 84.11% in urban India (Education Ministry).
o 85% of youth (14-18) in rural districts are enrolled in educational institutions (ASER 2023).
 Goal 5 - Gender Equality:
o Female labour force participation rate increased from 23.3% in 2017-18 to 37.0% in 2022-23 (PLFS-5).
Measures to Boost SDG Financing
 Dedicated Investment Funds:
o Establish funds dedicated to financing SDG-related projects, structured as public-private partnerships,
attracting investments from governments and private investors.
 Policy and Institutional Reforms:
o Strengthen domestic resource mobilization through progressive taxation, reducing tax evasion, and
addressing illicit financial flows.
o Ensure that national policies and regulations support SDG implementation.
 International Cooperation:
o Foster cooperation among governments, international organizations, civil society, and the private sector to
mobilize resources, share best practices, and address common challenges.
o Provide debt relief to developing countries for SDG investments.
o Developed countries should meet their Official Development Assistance (ODA) commitments.
o Introduce global tax reforms to address tax havens and ensure that multinational corporations pay their
fair share of taxes.

WHAT IS INTERNET, ICANN, OPTICAL FIBRE, TYPES OF CYBER ATTACKS

 Cybersecurity refers to technologies, processes, and rules created to protect computer systems, servers,
networks, programs, devices, and data from cyber-attacks.
 It focuses on preventing unauthorized access to data and misuse of technologies.
 India’s increasing reliance on digital technologies and vulnerability of its Critical Information Infrastructure
has made it a target of cyber threats.
 According to CERT-In, 3.94 lakh cybersecurity incidents were reported in 2020 in India, marking a 63%
increase from the previous year.

Types of Cyber Threats

 Cybercrime: Involves criminal activities through a computer network for financial gain or disruption.
 Cyber-Espionage: Unlawful access to confidential information, often targeting government organizations.
o Example: In March 2021, Chinese hacking group APT 10 (Stone Panda) targeted Bharat Biotech and
Serum Institute of India (SII).
 Cyberwarfare: Use of cyberspace to conduct warfare against other countries.
o Example: NATO designated cyberspace as an operational domain.
 Cyberterrorism: Cyberattacks aiming for political objectives and causing fear, usually targeting national security
infrastructure.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 195 of 348

 1

Methods Used for Cyberattacks

 Malware: Malicious software created to disrupt or damage computer systems, often spread through unsolicited
emails or download links. Types include:
o Virus: A self-replicating program that spreads through infected files.
o Trojans: Disguised as legitimate software, used to damage or steal data (Example: Emotet).
o Spyware: Secretly records user activity.
o Ransomware: Locks user data until a ransom is paid (Examples: Wannacry, Petya).
o Adware: Advertising software used to spread malware.
o Botnets: A network of infected computers used for malicious tasks.
 SQL Injection: Steals data by exploiting vulnerabilities in data-driven applications.
 Phishing: Attackers send spam emails or messages containing links to malicious websites (Example: Dridex
malware).
 Man-in-the-Middle Attack: Cybercriminals intercept communications between two individuals to steal data.
 Denial-of-Service Attack (DoS): Overloads networks and servers with traffic to prevent legitimate requests.
o Example: In April 2023, a coordinated DDoS attack targeted six major airports and healthcare institutions
in India by Anonymous Sudan.
 Romance Scams: Cybercriminals use dating sites to deceive victims into sharing personal data.

Initiatives Taken for Cyber Security

Legal Measures
 Information Technology Act, 2000: Covers protection of Critical Information Infrastructures (CIIs), declaration
of ‘protected systems’, cyberterrorism, hacking, privacy violations, fraud, and other cyber crimes.
 Digital Personal Data Protection Act (DPDP), 2023: Aims to balance individual rights with the need to process
digital personal data for legal purposes.
o Applies to data processing within India and outside India if related to offering goods or services in India.
o Grants rights such as:
 The right to obtain information about data processing.
 The right to seek correction and erasure of personal data.
 The right to nominate another person in case of death or incapacity.
 National Digital Communications Policy, 2018:
o Focus on securing India’s digital sovereignty.
o Aims for 50 Mbps broadband connectivity to every citizen and 1 Gbps internet for Gram Panchayats.
o Ensures connectivity in uncovered areas and attracts investments of USD 100 Billion in the digital sector.
 National Cyber Security Policy, 2013: Aims to build resilience against cyber threats across all sectors and
includes a crisis management plan.
Institutional Measures
 National Cyber Security Coordinator (NCSC): Coordinates national-level cybersecurity matters.
 National Critical Information Infrastructure Protection Centre (NCIIPC): Designated as the national nodal
agency for CII protection under Section 70A of the IT Act.
 Defence Cyber Agency: Handles matters of cyberwarfare and cybersecurity for national defense.
 Indian Computer Emergency Response Team (CERT-In): Established under Section 70B of the IT Act,
responsible for maintaining India’s cybersecurity, issuing alerts, and advising on cyber threats and counter-
measures.
 Cyber Swachhta Kendra: A Botnet Cleaning and Malware Analysis Centre offering free tools for removing
malicious programs.
 National Cyber Coordination Centre (NCCC): Generates situational awareness on cybersecurity threats,
enabling timely information sharing for proactive and protective actions.
 Indian Cyber Crime Coordination Centre (I4C): Set up by the Ministry of Home Affairs to handle all types of
cybercrime, offering:
o National Cyber Forensic Laboratory for forensic assistance to State/UT police.
o National Cyber Crime Reporting Portal for reporting cyber crimes.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 196 of 348

 1

o Citizen Financial Cyber Fraud Reporting and Management System for reporting financial frauds and
preventing fund siphoning.
o CyTrain MOOC platform for capacity building of public officials.

Other Measures
 Chief Information Security Officers (CISOs): Guidelines issued for securing infrastructure and ensuring
compliance within organizations.
 Cyber Auditing: Regular audits of all new government websites and applications before and after hosting.
 Cyber Crime Prevention for Women and Children (CCPWC) Scheme: Grants provided to States/UTs for
setting up Cyber Forensic cum Training Laboratories and organizing cyber awareness and investigation
capacity-building programs.

ICANN and NASSCOM Collaboration

 Collaboration Objective: The Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers (ICANN) and
NASSCOM have partnered to develop identifier technology for managing devices and infrastructure via the
internet.
 Initial Focus: The collaboration will concentrate on updating Internet of Things (IoT) devices using the
Domain Name System (DNS), even when the manufacturer or supplier has shut down operations.
 Research Focus: The first research project will test the use of DNS to update IoT firmware and examine the
scalability of the proposed technology outside laboratory conditions.

Internet of Things (IoT)

 Definition: IoT refers to a network of devices, from simple sensors to smartphones and wearables, connected to
communicate and share data.
 Functionality: IoT allows devices on private networks to communicate with others, connecting different
networks and enabling a more integrated and connected world.

Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers (ICANN)

 Role: ICANN is a non-profit organization responsible for managing domain names and Internet Protocol (IP)
addresses globally.
 Formation: It was established by the US Department of Commerce in 1988 and became independent of US
control on October 1, 2016.
 Responsibilities: Ensures that computers across the internet can communicate by maintaining databases of
unique identifiers and coordinates the stable, secure operation of the internet.
 Governance: ICANN is managed by an internationally diverse Board of Directors overseeing policy
development, with an international staff ensuring operational commitments.
National Association of Software and Services Companies (NASSCOM)
 Overview: NASSCOM is the apex body for the IT industry in India, established in 1988 as a non-profit industry
association.
 Mission: NASSCOM supports the IT and BPO industry in India, focusing on service quality and enforcing
Intellectual Property Rights (IPR).
 Members: Include Indian companies involved in software development, software services, and IT-enabled/BPO
services.
Fibre Optic Communication
About Fibre Optic Cables
 Optical fibres are thin cylindrical strands of glass, with a diameter similar to that of a human hair.
 These fibres can transmit information (text, images, voices, videos, etc.) as digital information over long
distances at nearly the speed of light.
 Key attributes: Strong, light, flexible; can be buried underground, drawn underwater, or bent around a spool.
Working of Optical Fibres
 Operate on the principle of Total Internal Reflection.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 197 of 348

 1

 Electromagnetic waves (signals) are fed into one end of an optical fibre and bounce between the glass walls as
they travel long distances, carrying encoded information.
 A fibre optic communication system comprises:
1. Transmitter: Encodes information into optical signals using light pulses (zeros and ones).
2. Optical fibre: Carries the signal to its destination.
3. Receiver: Reproduces the information from the encoded signals.
 Fibre optics allow high data-transmission rates of up to several terabits per second in a single fibre.
 Advantages over radio/copper cables: Insensitive to external perturbations like lightning and bad weather.
Development of Optical Fibres
 Manufactured using the fibre-drawing technique.
 A thick glass rod called preform (with high purity and engineered refractive index profile) is prepared using
chemical vapour decomposition.
 The preform is heated to about 1,600°C, melted, and drawn into a long thin fibre, reducing the diameter while
maintaining the length.
 The drawn fibre is coated with a protective layer to enhance strength and durability.
Applications
 Widely used in telecommunication, medical science, laser technology, and sensing.
 Optical fibres are crucial for the ongoing development in communication technology.

SCO SUMMIT IN ASTANA, KAZAKHSTAN, 2024

Key Highlights of the Summit:
 New Membership:
o Belarus has become the 10th member state of the SCO.
o India's External Affairs Minister met with the Belarusian counterpart to enhance bilateral ties.
 Astana Declaration:
o The 24th SCO Summit adopted the Astana Declaration and approved 25 strategic agreements covering
energy, security, trade, finance, and information security.
o The SCO Development Strategy until 2035 was adopted, focusing on areas like combating terrorism,
separatism, extremism, anti-drug strategies, energy cooperation, economic development, protected areas,
and eco-tourism.
o Commitments included signing a memorandum to combat illicit drug trafficking and an interaction plan
on international information security.
 India-China Relations:
o India's External Affairs Minister met with the Chinese Foreign Minister at the summit.
o Both sides emphasized the need for complete disengagement of troops and the restoration of peace along
the Line of Actual Control (LAC).
o They agreed to expedite efforts through diplomatic and military channels to resolve remaining issues in
Eastern Ladakh.
 Make in India and Global Economic Growth:
o India highlighted the 'Make in India' initiative as a significant potential engine for global economic growth.
o India expressed openness to partnerships with other nations, especially in the Global South, for capacity
building and economic development.
 Combat Terrorism:
o India’s External Affairs Minister called for the global community to isolate countries that harbour
terrorists and condone terrorism.
o He emphasized the need to counter cross-border terrorism and underscored the importance of combating
terrorism as a foundational goal of the SCO.
o India has been actively enhancing security cooperation through the Regional Anti-Terrorism Structure
(RATS), focusing on security and defence issues.
 Multipolar World:
o The Russian President highlighted the SCO’s role in promoting a fair, multipolar world order.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 198 of 348
 1

Shanghai Cooperation Organisation (SCO)

About SCO
 SCO is a permanent intergovernmental international organisation created in June 2001 in Shanghai
(China).
 Founding members: Kazakhstan, China, Kyrgyzstan, Russia, and Tajikistan.
o Initially formed in 1996 as the Shanghai Five to address regional security, border troop reductions, and
terrorism post-Soviet era.
 In 2001, Uzbekistan joined, and the group was renamed SCO, promoting the Shanghai spirit of cooperation.
 Before Iran's inclusion, the SCO represented approximately 42% of the world’s population, 22% of its land
area, and 20% of its GDP.

Official Working Languages

 Chinese and Russian.

SCO Secretariat
 Located in Beijing, China.

Members & Observers

 10 member states:
o China, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Russia, Tajikistan, Uzbekistan, India, Pakistan, Iran, and Belarus.
o India and Pakistan became full members in 2017 at the Heads of State Council meeting in Astana.
o Iran became the 9th member in 2023 under India's chairmanship.
o Belarus officially joined in July 2024, becoming the 10th member.
 2 Observer members:
o Afghanistan and Mongolia.

Organisational Structure of SCO

 Heads of State Council (HSC):
o The supreme decision-making body of the SCO, meets once a year to decide on all major issues.
 Council of Heads of Government (CHG):
o The second-highest body, also meets annually, focuses on strategy for multilateral cooperation, sets
priority areas, and approves the SCO budget.
 Additional mechanisms for meetings on foreign affairs, national defense, security, economy, trade, etc.
 Standing bodies:
o Secretariat in Beijing.
o Executive Committee of the Regional Anti-Terrorist Structure (RATS) in Tashkent.

ARMENIAN GENOCIDE
 Armenians are an ancient people whose homeland by the early 20th century was divided between the Russian
and Ottoman empires.
 In the Ottoman Empire, Armenians, a Christian minority, were well-off but faced discrimination due to their
religion.
 Armenians had been demanding greater representation in the government, which led to resentment and
attacks against them.
 The term ‘genocide’ was coined by Polish lawyer Raphäel Lemkin in 1944 in his book Axis Rule in Occupied
Europe.
Role of Young Turks and World War I
 In 1908, a revolution led by the Young Turks brought the Committee of Union and Progress (CUP) to power,
advocating for the 'Turkification' of the empire, and being particularly harsh on minorities.
 In August 1914, during World War I, the Ottoman Empire allied with Germany and Austria-Hungary against
Russia, Great Britain, and France.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 199 of 348

 1

 Some Armenians sympathized with Russia and even supported it in the war, which fueled antipathy towards
the Armenian population.
 The Ottoman government viewed Armenians as a threat, leading to a crackdown that began on April 24, 1915
with the arrest and execution of prominent Armenians in Constantinople.
 The government then ordered the forcible deportation of Armenians, especially from the northeastern border
regions.
Recognition as Genocide
 As of now, 32 countries, including the US, France, and Germany, recognize the Armenian genocide.
 India and the UK do not officially recognize the Armenian Genocide, likely due to their broader foreign policy
and geopolitical interests.
 Turkey does not recognize the massacre as genocide and claims that there is no proof the deaths were planned
and targeted.
Current Armenia-Turkey Relations
 Armenia has sought better relations with Turkey in the past, but tensions remain, particularly over the
Nagorno-Karabakh region, an Armenian-majority area in Azerbaijan, where Turkey supports Azerbaijan in the
conflict.

Definition of Genocide (as per the UN)

 Genocide is the intentional and systematic destruction of a particular ethnic, racial, religious, or national
group.
 This destruction can occur through mass killing, forced relocation, or harsh living conditions leading to
widespread death.
Conditions for Genocide
 The UN outlines two main elements of genocide:
1. Mental Element: The intent to destroy, in whole or in part, a national, ethnic, racial, or religious group.
2. Physical Element: Includes five specific acts:
 Killing members of the group.
 Causing serious bodily or mental harm to members of the group.
 Inflicting conditions of life designed to cause physical destruction, in whole or part.
 Imposing measures to prevent births within the group.
 Forcibly transferring children of the group to another group.
 The group must be targeted because of their membership in the group, not as individuals, for it to be
considered genocide.
Genocide Convention
 Also known as the Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide.
 Adopted by the UN General Assembly on December 9, 1948.
 The convention aims to prevent and punish the crime of genocide.
 It requires signatory nations to:
o Criminalize genocide in their national laws.
o Cooperate internationally in investigating and prosecuting individuals accused of genocide.
 The International Court of Justice (ICJ) is designated as the primary judicial body for interpreting and
enforcing the Convention.
 It was the first human rights treaty adopted by the UN General Assembly.
About Armenia
 Landlocked country located in the Armenian Highlands of Western Asia.
 Part of the Caucasus region, bordered by:
o Turkey to the west,
o Georgia to the north,
o The Lachin corridor (under Russian peacekeeping) and Azerbaijan to the east,
o Iran and the Azerbaijani exclave of Nakhchivan to the south.
 Yerevan is the capital, largest city, and financial center.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 200 of 348

 1

 Armenia is a unitary, multi-party, democratic nation-state with a rich ancient cultural heritage.
About Turkey
 Transcontinental country situated primarily on the Anatolian Peninsula in Western Asia, with a smaller
portion on the Balkan Peninsula in Southeast Europe.
 Borders:
o Black Sea to the north,
o Georgia to the northeast,
o Armenia, Azerbaijan, and Iran to the east,
o Iraq to the southeast,
o Syria and the Mediterranean Sea to the south,
o Aegean Sea to the west,
o Greece and Bulgaria to the northwest.
 Ethnic Turks form the majority of the population, with Kurds being the largest ethnic minority.
 Ankara is the capital and second-largest city, while Istanbul is the largest city and the country's main financial
centre.
Law and Regulations in India for Genocide
No specific domestic law on genocide in India, despite having ratified the UN Convention on Genocide.
Indian Penal Code (IPC)
 The Indian Penal Code (IPC) provides for the punishment of genocide and related crimes through established
procedures for investigation, prosecution, and punishment.
 Genocide is addressed under Section 153B of the IPC, which criminalizes actions that promote enmity
between groups based on religion, race, place of birth, residence, language, etc., with the intent to incite
riots or violence.
Constitutional Provisions
 The Indian Constitution ensures protection against discrimination based on religion, race, caste, sex, or
place of birth.
 Article 15 prohibits discrimination on these grounds.
 Article 21 guarantees the right to life and personal liberty.

ASIA HIT HARDEST BY DISASTERS IN 2023: WMO REPORT

The World Meteorological Organization (WMO) has released its report titled "The State of the Climate in Asia
2023," highlighting the severe impacts of climate change on the Asian continent.
 The report draws attention to the devastating effects of extreme weather events, rising temperatures, and
environmental changes across the region.

Key Data from the Report

 In 2023, there were 79 hydrometeorological hazard events, affecting more than nine million people and
resulting in over 2,000 deaths across Asia.
 Over 80% of these events were floods and storms.
 Flooding accounted for over 60% of the 2,000 deaths, while storms contributed to more than 15%.
 The total number of disaster events in 2023 was lower than in 2022, but the impact on people was reduced as
the 2022 Pakistan floods alone affected over 30 million people.
 In India, extreme weather events were particularly impactful, with severe heatwaves, rainfall-induced floods,
glacial lake outbursts, and tropical cyclones.

Climate Change Indicators

 The report emphasized that accelerating key climate change indicators such as surface temperature rise,
glacier retreat, and sea level rise will have significant consequences for Asia's economy and ecosystems.

Impact of Heatwaves
 Severe heatwaves in April and June 2023 led to 110 deaths from heatstroke.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 201 of 348

 1

 In Ballia and Deoria districts of Uttar Pradesh, over 100 deaths were reported, mostly among senior citizens
with comorbidities, as temperatures ranged from 42-43°C.
 Southeast Asia, Bangladesh, eastern India, and parts of China also experienced prolonged heatwaves.

Flood Events and Cyclones in India

 In August 2023, floods in Himachal Pradesh and Uttarakhand caused 25 deaths and significant damage to
infrastructure and agriculture.
 The disaster was triggered by heavy rainfall, compounding the effects of an earlier monsoon surge in June.
 The Indian government declared a state of emergency in the worst-affected areas, launching rescue and relief
operations.
 The Indian subcontinent experienced six tropical cyclones in 2023, slightly above the average of 5.4
cyclones.
o Four cyclones formed over the Bay of Bengal: Mocha, Hamoon, Midhili, and Michaung.
o Two cyclones formed over the Arabian Sea: Biparjoy and Tej.
o Cyclone Mocha killed 156 people along Myanmar's Rakhine Coast, while Cyclone Michaung caused 22
deaths in south Andhra Pradesh.

Glacial Lake Outburst in Sikkim

 A significant glacial lake outburst flood occurred in South Lhonak Lake in Sikkim in 2023.
o The flood overtopped and breached the Chungthang dam on the Teesta River, killing over 40 people.
o The report highlighted this as an example of climate change-induced glacier retreat, posing compounding
risks to vulnerable mountain communities.

Climate Parameters Impacted

Temperature
 In 2023, the average annual surface temperature in Asia was 1.87°C above the 1961–1990 average and
0.91°C above the 1991–2020 average.
 Globally, temperatures have risen by at least 1.1°C above pre-industrial levels (1850-1900).
 Asia has insufficient data before the 1900s, resulting in different reference periods for calculating temperature
rise.
 Rate of warming in Asia is accelerating.
 From 1991 to 2023, the warming trend in Asia nearly doubled compared to the 1961–1990 period and is
higher than in previous 30-year periods.
 Asia is warming more rapidly than other regions, except for Europe.

Glaciers
 During the glaciological year 2022-23, 20 out of 22 glaciers in the High Mountain Asia (HMA) region
experienced continued mass loss due to record-high temperatures and dry conditions, especially in the East
Himalayas.
 The mass balance of glaciers (measured in metres of water equivalent (m w.e.)) shows significant mass losses
over the past 40 years, with the rate of loss increasing since the mid-1990s.

Precipitation
 In 2023, rainfall was below normal in large parts of Turkmenistan, Pakistan, and Myanmar.
 In India, summer monsoon rainfall from June to September was about 6% below the 1971–2000 average.
 For the second consecutive year, regions in southwest India—such as the Ganges catchment and the lower
course of the Brahmaputra—received less-than-normal rainfall.
 Excess rainfall was recorded in regions like the lower course of the Indus River (Pakistan), Tenasserim
Range (Myanmar), and areas of the Russian Federation (Kamchatka and Kolyma Range).

Sea Surface Temperature (SST)

 Since mid-March 2023, the global average sea surface temperature (SST) has been unusually high, with
North-west Pacific Ocean recording the warmest area-averaged SST anomalies on record.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 202 of 348

 1

 Warming in the upper ocean (0–700 m) is especially strong in the North-Western Arabian Sea, the Philippine
Sea, and the seas east of Japan, with temperatures rising more than three times faster than the global average.

About World Meteorological Organization:

 The World Meteorological Organization (WMO) is a specialized agency of the United Nations responsible
for promoting international cooperation in meteorology, climatology, hydrology, and related geophysical
sciences.
 Established in 1950, it became the successor of the International Meteorological Organization (founded in
1873).
 WMO is based in Geneva, Switzerland.
 It coordinates global efforts in weather forecasting, climate change monitoring, and the mitigation of natural
disasters.

SMART CITIES MISSION

The Standing Committee on Housing and Urban Affairs presented its report on the Smart Cities Mission (SCM),
highlighting financial and physical progress, as well as the challenges and issues faced in the implementation of the
mission.
Progress Highlighted by the Report
 Financial Progress:
o The Central Government has released 86% of its proposed share by December 2023.
o 45 smart cities have received 100% of central funds, but only 28 cities have received 100% of their share
from States/ULBs.
o Additional funding sources: While half of the cities could not undertake any project under the PPP model,
only six cities managed to generate funds through loans for Smart Cities projects.
 Physical Progress:
o By December 2023, out of 7,970 projects undertaken by smart cities, 6,419 projects were completed.
o 57 cities had made progress ranging from 80% to 100%, with Madurai being the only smart city to
complete 100% of its projects.

About Smart Cities Mission (SCM)

 Launch: Launched by the Ministry of Housing and Urban Affairs in 2015 as a Centrally Sponsored Scheme.
 Objective: To promote cities that offer core infrastructure, a clean and sustainable environment, and a
decent quality of life using smart solutions.
 Smart Cities: A total of 100 cities have been selected for development as smart cities.
 Timeline: The initial timeline for completion (2019-2023) has been extended to June 2024.
 Funding: The Central Government provides Rs. 48,000 crore over five years (an average of Rs. 100 crore per
city per year), with an equal contribution from States/ULBs. For Himalayan and North-Eastern States, the
sharing ratio is 90:10.
o Additional resources are raised through convergence, Municipal Bonds, and other mechanisms.
 Public Private Partnership (PPP): Emphasis is placed on private sector participation through PPP.

Development Strategy under Smart Cities Mission

 Area-Based Development (ABD):
o Includes city improvement (retrofitting), city renewal (redevelopment), and city extension (greenfield
development).
o Retrofitting covers existing areas of over 500 acres.
o Redevelopment involves replacing existing built-up environments in areas over 50 acres.
o Greenfield development introduces smart solutions in a previously vacant area of more than 250 acres.
 Pan-City Development:
o Applies smart solutions to existing city-wide infrastructure, improving services through technology and
data use.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 203 of 348

 1

 Implementation:
o Managed by Special Purpose Vehicles (SPVs), created under the Companies Act, 2013, with 50:50
ownership by ULBs and States.
o SPVs plan, implement, monitor, and evaluate projects.
 Integrated Command and Control Centre (ICCC):
o Provides centralized monitoring and decision-making using digital technology.

Issues and Challenges

 Frequent Variations in Projects: The number of projects increased from 5,151 to 7,970 due to challenges like
land availability, litigations, financial difficulties, and regulatory issues.
 Lack of Financial Progress: Some cities received less than 50% of eligible funds due to low utilization by
SPVs.
 Intercity Disparity in Progress: The top 20 best-performing cities had only 6% incomplete projects, while
the bottom 20 cities had 47% of projects still at the work order stage.
 Lack of Monitoring for Convergence Projects: Delays due to multiple stakeholders and different agencies
involved in convergence projects.
 Lack of Cross-Learning: Platforms like the Sister Cities concept have not been fully utilized (e.g., Chennai’s
relationship with Chongqing, China).
 Lack of Defined Governance for SPVs: Issues arose due to frequent transfers of CEOs, lack of dedicated staff,
and weak monitoring mechanisms within SPVs.

WHO GLOBAL REPORT ON NEGLECTED TROPICAL DISEASES (NTD) 2024

Ahead of the 77th session of the World Health Assembly, the World Health Organization (WHO) released its
Global report on neglected tropical diseases (NTD) 2024. The report outlines the progress made in 2023 towards
achieving the goals of the Road map for neglected tropical diseases 2021-2030.

Key Highlights of the WHO Report

Global Status for 2023:
 Elimination Progress:
As of December 2023, a total of 50 countries have successfully eliminated at least one NTD, reaching the
halfway mark towards the 2030 target of 100 countries.
 Recognition:
In 2023, 5 countries were acknowledged by WHO for eliminating one NTD, and 1 country for eliminating two
NTDs.
 Iraq:
In July 2023, Iraq became the 50th country to eliminate at least one NTD, marking a major milestone in the
global fight against NTDs.
 Noma:
In 2023, Noma was added to the list of neglected tropical diseases.
 Bangladesh:
In October 2023, Bangladesh became the first country to be validated by WHO for eliminating visceral
leishmaniasis as a public health problem.
Global Status for 2022:
 Interventions Required:
In 2022, around 1.62 billion people required interventions against NTDs, reflecting a 26% decrease from
2010. However, significant efforts are still needed to meet the road map’s target of a 90% reduction by 2030.
 Preventive Chemotherapy:
Approximately 848 million people received treatment for at least one NTD through preventive chemotherapy
interventions in 2022. This was 49 million fewer than in 2021 but 50 million more than in 2020.
 Vector-Borne NTDs:
As of the end of 2022, the number of reported deaths from vector-borne NTDs increased by 22% compared to
2016.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 204 of 348
 1

India's Status:
 Certified Free of NTDs: India has been certified free of NTDs like dracunculiasis and yaws.
 Treatment Reduction:
In 2022, India treated 117 million fewer people for lymphatic filariasis and soil-transmitted helminthiasis
compared to 2021.
 Population Needing Intervention:
In 2022, 40.56% of India's population required interventions against NTDs.
 Key Challenges:
o Slow post-Covid-19 recovery in addressing NTDs.
o Funding uncertainties affecting ongoing efforts.
o Geopolitical disruptions impacting interventions.
o Climate change exacerbating the spread of NTDs.
o Gaps in knowledge and tools to effectively combat NTDs.
o Insufficient data available to address NTD challenges comprehensively.
Key Facts About Neglected Tropical Diseases (NTDs)
About NTDs:
 According to WHO, Neglected tropical diseases (NTDs) are a diverse group of conditions caused by various
pathogens, including viruses, bacteria, parasites, fungi, and toxins.
 These diseases have devastating health, social, and economic consequences and primarily affect impoverished
communities in tropical regions.
 Although prevalent in tropical areas, some NTDs have a wider geographical distribution.
Factors Contributing to NTDs Being "Neglected":
 The epidemiology of NTDs is complex, often related to environmental conditions.
o Epidemiology is the study of the determinants, occurrence, and distribution of health and disease in a
defined population.
 Many NTDs are vector-borne, have animal reservoirs, and involve complex life cycles.
 NTDs receive significantly less funding for research and treatment development compared to diseases like
HIV/AIDS, malaria, and tuberculosis.
Global and Indian Initiatives to Tackle NTDs
Global Initiatives:
 WHO’s 2021-2030 Roadmap: Focuses on impact, rather than just treating NTDs. It emphasizes collaboration
across healthcare, sanitation, and communities, and encourages countries to take ownership of their NTD
programs.
 2012 London Declaration: This international agreement recognizes the global burden of NTDs and promotes a
unified approach to eliminate them.

Indian Initiatives:
 Elimination Programs: India has successfully eliminated guinea worm, trachoma, and yaws. The Accelerated
Plan for Elimination of Lymphatic Filariasis (APELF) aims to eliminate the disease by 2027.
 WHO Collaborations: India collaborates with WHO in regional alliances, such as a 2005 initiative with
Bangladesh and Nepal focusing on the early diagnosis and treatment of Kala-azar.
 Mass Drug Administration (MDA): Regular distribution of free anti-parasitic medication in high-risk areas
to prevent the transmission of NTDs.
 Vector Control: Programs like Indoor Residual Spraying target insect breeding grounds to prevent the spread
of NTDs like Kala-azar.
 Financial Assistance: Wage compensation schemes help individuals affected by NTDs, particularly those
suffering from Post-Kala Azar Dermal Leishmaniasis, manage the financial burden of their illness.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 205 of 348

 1

BIHAR’S DEMAND FOR SPECIAL CATEGORY STATUS

In light of the Bihar Caste-based Survey, 2022, which revealed that nearly 33% of Bihar's population is poor, the
State government is seeking Special Category Status (SCS).

What is Special Category Status (SCS)?

 Definition: A classification provided by the Centre to assist the development of states facing geographical or
socio-economic disadvantages.
 Launch Year: Introduced in 1969 based on the recommendations of the 5th Finance Commission (FC).
 Gadgil Formula: Named after Dr. Gadgil Mukherjee, Deputy Chairman of the Planning Commission, allocating
30% of total central assistance to SCS States.
 Granting Authority: National Development Council.
 Discontinuation: Discontinued in 2015 following the recommendations of the 14th Finance Commission.

Difference Between Special Category Status and Special Status

Special Category Status Special Status
Granted by the National Development Council, an Granted by the Constitution (Articles 371 to 371-J),
administrative body. through an Act passed by a 2/3rd majority in both
houses of Parliament.
Deals only with economic, administrative, and financial Empowers states with legislative and political rights.
aspects.
Applicable to 11 States: Assam, Sikkim, Manipur, Applicable to 12 States: Maharashtra, Gujarat, Nagaland,
Nagaland, Himachal Pradesh, Mizoram, Meghalaya, Goa, Assam, Manipur, Andhra Pradesh, Arunachal
Tripura, Arunachal Pradesh, Uttarakhand, Telangana. Pradesh, Telangana, Sikkim, Mizoram, Karnataka.

Benefits of Special Category Status (SCS)

 Centre-State Funding: Centrally sponsored schemes have a 90:10 funding ratio (more favorable than 60:40
or 80:20 for general category States).
 Special Treatment: Preferential access to 30% of the Centre's gross budget.
 Incentives: States can benefit from debt-swapping and debt relief schemes.
 Tax Exemption: Exempt from customs duty, corporate tax, income tax, and other taxes to attract investment.
 Excise Duty Concession: Provided to encourage industries to set up in SCS States.
 Carry Forward of Funds: Unspent money in a financial year can be carried forward to the next year.
 Increased Devolution: Assistance to SCS States has been subsumed in the increased devolution of divisible
pool funds (raised to 41% in the 15th FC from 32%).

Other States Demanding SCS

 Andhra Pradesh: Since bifurcation in 2014, it seeks SCS due to revenue loss caused by Hyderabad becoming
part of Telangana.
 Odisha: Seeks SCS due to vulnerability to natural disasters like cyclones and a large tribal population (22%).
 Centre’s Response: Denied SCS status citing the 14th Finance Commission report, which recommended that
no state be accorded SCS.

Reasons for Bihar’s Demand:

 Poverty: According to the Bihar caste survey, nearly one-third of Bihar’s population continues to live in
poverty.
 Backwardness: Bihar is one of the most backward states in India, with a per-capita GDP of around 54,000
rupees, less than half of the national average.
 Low Resources: The state faces challenges such as a lack of natural resources, inadequate water supply for
irrigation, frequent floods and droughts, and low human development indicators.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 206 of 348

 1

 Industrial Decline: The bifurcation of Bihar in 2000 led to the loss of mineral-rich areas and major industries
to Jharkhand, leaving Bihar with a weak industrial base and low revenue generation.
 Poor Investment: Bihar has struggled to attract private investment and create employment opportunities for
its large population.
 Need for Financial Assistance: Bihar has been demanding SCS since 2010 to receive increased financial
assistance and tax incentives from the Centre.

Is Bihar's Demand Justified?

 SCS Criteria: Bihar does not meet the hilly and difficult terrain criterion, which is a key factor for granting SCS.
 Raghuram Rajan Committee:
o Set up in 2013 to suggest a new formula for fund allocation to states.
o Ranked states based on a multi-dimensional index that included:
 Per capita consumption
 Poverty ratio
 Education and health
 Household amenities
 Urbanization
 Financial inclusion
 Connectivity
o Bihar was ranked the lowest among all states, indicating it is the least developed.

NOTA IN INDIAN ELECTIONS

NOTA (None of the Above) is a voting option on ballots and Electronic Voting Machines (EVMs) that allows voters
to reject all contesting candidates without choosing any of them.
 It empowers voters to express a lack of support for the contenders and indicates disapproval while maintaining
the secrecy of their decision.
 In Lok Sabha 2024 elections in Indore, Madhya Pradesh, a significant result emerged as the NOTA (None of the
Above) option received over 2 lakh votes, marking the highest number of NOTA votes ever recorded in any
constituency.
Background:
 In its 170th Report in 1999, the Law Commission discussed the concept of negative voting and a 50%+1
voting system, but no final recommendations were made due to practical challenges.
 In September 2013, the Supreme Court directed the Election Commission of India (ECI) to introduce the
NOTA option to safeguard the secrecy of voters' choices.
 The People’s Union for Civil Liberties (PUCL) approached the Supreme Court in 2004, seeking measures to
protect voters' right to secrecy.
o They argued that the Conduct of Elections Rules, 1961 violated secrecy, as the Presiding Officer kept a
record of voters who did not vote, along with their signatures or thumb impressions.
First Use of NOTA:
 NOTA was first used in the 2013 Assembly elections in Chhattisgarh, Mizoram, Rajasthan, Delhi, and
Madhya Pradesh, and later in the 2014 General Elections.
 It was introduced following the 2013 Supreme Court directive in the PUCL vs Union of India case.

What Happens if NOTA Receives the Most Votes?

 The Election Commission of India (ECI) clarified that votes cast as NOTA are counted but are treated as ‘invalid
votes’.
 Even if NOTA gets the highest number of votes, the candidate with the second-most votes is declared the
winner.
 Therefore, votes for NOTA do not affect the outcome of the election.
 The Supreme Court is currently considering a petition to establish guidelines for situations where NOTA gets
the majority of votes, including the possibility of nullifying the election and holding fresh polls.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 207 of 348
 1

 Some states and union territories, like Maharashtra, Haryana, and Puducherry, have declared NOTA as a
"Fictional Electoral Candidate," where fresh elections are held if NOTA gets the majority of votes.

Judgments Related to NOTA

Lily Thomas v. Speaker, Lok Sabha Case, 1993
 The Supreme Court ruled that voting is a formal expression of will or opinion by a person entitled to exercise
their right on an issue.
 It also stated that the right to vote includes the right to vote in favor of or against a motion or resolution,
implying the right to remain neutral as well.

People's Union for Civil Liberties & Anr v. Union of India & Anr Case, 2013
 The Supreme Court mandated the inclusion of a "None of the Above" (NOTA) button on EVMs to allow voters
to express dissatisfaction with candidates while maintaining secrecy.
 The 3-judge bench emphasized that secrecy must be maintained whether a voter chooses to cast a vote or not.
 This ruling aimed to strengthen democracy by empowering voters and promoting fair elections.

Shailesh Manubhai Parmar v. Election Commission of India Through the Chief Election Commissioner Case,
2018
 The Supreme Court ruled that the NOTA option, while useful in direct elections, was unsuitable for Rajya
Sabha elections.
 The court held that using NOTA in Rajya Sabha could undermine democracy by encouraging defection and
corruption.
 As a result, the NOTA option was removed from Rajya Sabha elections.

Similar Initiatives to NOTA in Other Democratic Countries

 European Countries: Countries like Finland, Spain, Sweden, France, Belgium, Greece allow voters to cast
votes similar to NOTA.
 United States:
o While the U.S. does not have a formal NOTA option on ballots, some states allow write-in votes, where voters
can write “None of the Above” or another name to express dissatisfaction.
 Other countries such as Colombia, Ukraine, Brazil, and Bangladesh also permit voters to cast NOTA votes.

IPEF MINISTERIAL MEETING 2024

India has signed the US-led Indo-Pacific Economic Framework for Prosperity (IPEF) bloc’s agreements on
promoting a clean and fair economy during PM Modi’s visit to the US.
 These agreements focus on facilitating the development, access, and deployment of clean energy and climate-
friendly technologies while strengthening anti-corruption measures and promoting tax transparency
among member countries.

What is Indo-Pacific Economic Framework (IPEF)?

Background: Origin
 US President Biden first introduced the concept of IPEF at the October 2021 East Asia Summit.
 The framework aims to define shared objectives related to:
o Trade facilitation
o Standards for the digital economy and technology
o Supply chain resilience
o Decarbonization and clean energy
o Infrastructure, worker standards, and other areas of shared interest
 Unlike traditional trade agreements, the IPEF does not include market access commitments like lowering
tariffs. It is more of an administrative arrangement.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 208 of 348

 1

About IPEF
 Launched in Tokyo in May 2023, IPEF aims to strengthen economic engagement among member countries
to promote growth, peace, and prosperity in the Indo-Pacific region.
 According to a US Congressional Research Service report, IPEF is not a traditional trade agreement but focuses
on various modules or pillars.

Four Pillars of IPEF

1. Fair and Resilient Trade
2. Supply Chain Resilience
3. Clean Economy (infrastructure and decarbonization)
4. Fair Economy (tax and anti-corruption)
 Countries must sign all components within a module (pillar) but are not required to participate in every pillar.

Members of IPEF
 IPEF consists of 14 partner countries: Australia, Brunei, Fiji, India, Indonesia, Japan, Republic of Korea,
Malaysia, New Zealand, Philippines, Singapore, Thailand, Vietnam, and the US.

Significance of IPEF
 The 14-nation IPEF bloc accounts for about 40% of the world’s GDP and 28% of global trade in goods and
services.
 It is seen as a US-backed strategy to counter China’s economic influence in the Indo-Pacific region.

India and IPEF

 In September 2022, India joined three of the four pillars of IPEF:
1. Supply Chain
2. Clean Economy
3. Fair Economy
 India has observer status in the trade pillar negotiations.

Key Initiatives Under IPEF

1. IPEF Upskilling Initiative:
o Launched in September 2022, it promotes sustainable and inclusive economic growth by providing
digital skills training, particularly for women and girls in IPEF partner countries.
o Over two years, 14 US companies and the Asia Foundation have provided 10.9 million upskilling
opportunities, with India benefiting from 4 million of these.
2. Critical Mineral Dialogue:
o Focuses on mapping mineral resources, tracking trade flows, and fostering technical collaboration for
mineral recovery and recycling.
o Aims to strengthen the critical mineral supply chain among IPEF countries.
3. Tech Council:
o Coordinates on key technologies like cybersecurity, undersea cables, and artificial intelligence among
IPEF partners.
o Focuses on sharing best practices, promoting investment, and fostering innovation through workforce
development.
4. Cooperative Work Program (CWP):
o Facilitates joint efforts to advance the Clean Economy Agreement among IPEF countries.
o Eight proposals have been announced, covering areas like hydrogen supply chains, carbon markets,
sustainable aviation fuel, and India’s proposal on e-waste urban mining.

India Signs Clean and Fair Economy Agreements Under IPEF

About the Agreements:
 India signed and exchanged agreements focused on Clean Economy, Fair Economy, and the IPEF Overarching
arrangement under the Indo-Pacific Economic Framework for Prosperity (IPEF).

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 209 of 348

 1

IPEF Clean Economy Agreement (Pillar-III):

 The agreement focuses on cooperation in clean energy and climate technologies to enhance energy security,
climate resilience, and reduce greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions.
 It promotes:
o Technical cooperation, workforce development, capacity building, and research collaborations.
o Investments, project financing, and joint projects, with an emphasis on supporting MSMEs and
integrating Indian companies into global value chains, especially in the Indo-Pacific region.
 Key initiatives include:
o Cooperative Work Programmes, the IPEF Catalytic Capital Fund, and the IPEF Accelerator to achieve
these goals.

IPEF Fair Economy Agreement (Pillar-IV):

 Aims to create a transparent and predictable trade and investment environment by:
o Enhancing anti-corruption measures, preventing bribery, and improving tax transparency.
 Focus areas include:
o Information sharing, asset recovery, and strengthening cross-border investigations and prosecutions.
 These initiatives will support India's efforts to combat corruption, money laundering, and terror financing.
 Partners will collaborate on Technical Assistance and Capacity Building (TACB) to implement anti-corruption
measures and improve tax administration efficiency.

Overarching IPEF Agreement:

 Establishes a high-level Ministerial oversight mechanism to guide the implementation of various IPEF
agreements.
 Sets general goals to ensure political oversight and long-term stability of the IPEF partnership.
 This agreement aims to:
o Enhance India’s productive capacity, supply chain integration, and innovation in alignment with the
Atmanirbhar Bharat initiative.

FINLAND AND SWEDEN JOIN NATO: BACKGROUND AND IMPACT

Finland's Accession to NATO
 Full Membership: Finland became a full NATO member on April 4, 2023.
 Accession Process:
o Application: Submitted on May 18, 2022.
o Accession Talks: Concluded at the Madrid Summit on July 4, 2022.
o Accession Protocol Ratification: All 30 NATO Allies ratified Finland's Accession Protocol.
o Instrument of Accession: Finland's Foreign Minister deposited the Instrument of Accession with the US
State Department at NATO Headquarters.
Background of Finland's NATO Membership:
 Reason for Joining: Finland joined NATO due to concerns over Russia’s invasion of Ukraine, which heightened
the need for military backing from NATO.
 Historical Context: Finland shares a 1,340-km border with Russia and had maintained over 70 years of
military non-alignment. During the Cold War, Finland pursued a policy of neutrality between the Soviet Union
and the West, a policy known as ‘Finlandisation’.

Impacts of Finland Joining NATO:

 Enhanced Security: Finland has gained better security through NATO's military alliance.
 Economic Losses: Finland faces a loss in trade and tourism revenue from Russia and may lose its status as a
confidence-building presence in the Baltic Sea.
 NATO’s Strategic Advantage: Finland’s membership strengthens NATO's ability to station weapons closer to
Russia and brings in a military trained for potential attacks from Russia.
 Russian Response: Russia views Finland’s accession as a dangerous historical mistake and has threatened to
strengthen its military in the west and northwest regions of Russia, potentially escalating the Ukraine conflict.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 210 of 348

 1

Sweden's Accession to NATO

 Full Membership: Sweden became a full NATO member on March 7, 2024.
 Accession Process:
o Accession Protocol Ratification: All NATO member countries ratified Sweden’s Accession Protocol.
o Instrument of Accession: Sweden deposited the Instrument of Accession with the US State Department
in Washington DC.

Benefits of Sweden Joining NATO:

 Military Force and Technology:
o Sweden has a highly capable military with advanced technology.
o Notable equipment includes Gripen fighter aircraft (with Meteor air-to-air missiles), Leopard 2 main
battle tanks, and Gotland-class attack submarines with air-independent propulsion systems.
 Geopolitical Significance:
o Sweden’s location is strategically important for NATO’s defense plans.
o It serves as a land transit route to reinforce Norway and Finland, and helps NATO to gain control of the
Baltic Sea in potential conflicts with Russia.
 Access to Alternative Routes:
o Sweden offers an alternative sea route for reinforcements to the Baltic States, reducing reliance on the
vulnerable land border between Poland and Lithuania, which is within artillery range of Russian-held
Kaliningrad and Belarus.
 Deterrence Against Russia:
o Sweden brings considerable experience in understanding and countering Russia’s influence and desire for
control over its neighbors.

North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) – Key Facts

 NATO (North Atlantic Treaty Organization) is a political and military alliance consisting of 32 member
countries.
 Established in 1949 through the North Atlantic Treaty (Washington Treaty), NATO was formed to promote
mutual defense and collective security among its members.
 Headquarters: Located in Brussels, Belgium.
 Headquarters of Allied Command Operations: Mons, Belgium.
 Mark Rutte took office as the new Secretary General of NATO on October 1, 2024.
 Rutte is a former Prime Minister of the Netherlands.

Original Purposes:
 Deterring Soviet expansionism during the Cold War.
 Preventing the resurgence of nationalist militarism in Europe.
 Promoting European political integration.
Important NATO Policies:
 Article 5: Establishes a system of collective defense, stating that an attack against one member is considered
an attack against all members, obligating a collective response.
o Article 5 was invoked only once after the 9/11 terrorist attacks in the United States.
o NATO protection does not cover civil wars or internal coups within member states.
 Article 10: Allows NATO membership to any European state that upholds NATO principles and contributes to
the security of the North Atlantic region.
Founding Member Countries (1949):
 12 founding members: Belgium, Canada, Denmark, France, Iceland, Italy, Luxembourg, Netherlands,
Norway, Portugal, United Kingdom, and United States.
Expansion of NATO Membership:
 Since 1949, 19 more countries have joined NATO:
o Greece and Turkey (1952)
o Germany (1955)

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 211 of 348

 1

o Spain (1982)
o Czechia, Hungary, Poland (1999)
o Bulgaria, Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, Romania, Slovakia, Slovenia (2004)
o Albania and Croatia (2009)
o Montenegro (2017)
o North Macedonia (2020)
o Finland (2023)
o Sweden (2024)
 Countries aspiring to join NATO: Bosnia and Herzegovina, Georgia, and Ukraine, provided they align with
NATO principles and contribute to North Atlantic security.

NATO Alliances:
 Euro-Atlantic Partnership Council (EAPC)
 Mediterranean Dialogue

SUPREME COURT RULING ON TAXATION OF MINERAL RIGHTS

Supreme Court in an 8:1 ruling held that power of state legislatures to tax mining lands is not limited by Parliament’s
Mines and Minerals (Development and Regulation) or MMDRA, 1957.
 One dissenting judgment cautioned about adverse consequences of giving mineral taxation rights to states.

Background of the Case:

 In 1989, a seven-judge Bench of the Supreme Court ruled that the Centre held primary authority over mining
regulation under the Mines and Minerals (Development and Regulation) Act (MMDRA), 1957, and Entry
54 of the Union List.
 States were allowed only to collect royalties, but not impose any additional taxes. The court classified royalties
as taxes, limiting the states' ability to levy cess on them.
 A 2004 five-judge Bench later suggested there was a typographical error in the 1989 ruling, indicating that
royalties were not a tax, leading to the current review by the nine-judge Bench.
2024 Decision by the Supreme Court:
 Overturning 1989 Verdict:
The nine-judge Bench ruled that the 1989 verdict—which classified royalties on minerals as a tax under the
MMDRA, 1957—was incorrect.
 State vs. Central Authority:
o The Court emphasized that the power to impose taxes on mineral rights resides solely with the states.
o Parliament can only impose limitations to prevent hindrances to mineral development but does not have
the authority to impose taxes on mineral rights.
o The ruling clarifies that Parliament lacks the power to tax mineral rights under Entry 50 of List II (State
List) of the Constitution, which governs state powers.
 Parliament's Role:
Parliament can set constraints on how states levy taxes on mineral rights to ensure that mineral development
is not obstructed, but it cannot directly impose taxes.
Dissenting Opinion:
 A dissenting view warned that allowing states to levy taxes on mineral rights could lead to attempts to impose
taxes on lands and buildings under Entry 49 of List II, potentially resulting in a breakdown of the federal
system.
 This could lead to legal uncertainty and negative economic consequences, including the disruption of mineral
pricing and development.
 The Parliament may need to intervene to maintain uniformity in mineral pricing and development across
India and prevent states from imposing taxes on mineral rights independently.
Mines and Minerals (Development and Regulation) Act, 1957
Overview:
 The Mines and Minerals (Development and Regulation) Act, 1957 governs the mining sector in India.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 212 of 348

 1

 It has undergone several amendments to address evolving challenges and align with national economic and
security interests.
 The Act aims to promote the development of the mining industry, ensure mineral conservation, and introduce
transparency in mineral exploitation.
Amendments:
1. 2015 Amendment:
o Auction Method: Introduced auctioning for mineral concessions to enhance transparency.
o District Mineral Foundation (DMF): Established to benefit areas and people affected by mining.
o National Mineral Exploration Trust (NMET): Created to boost mineral exploration activities.
o Penalties for Illegal Mining: Imposed stringent penalties to curb illegal mining.
2. 2016 and 2020 Amendments:
o Focused on addressing minor issues to ensure smooth functioning of the sector.
3. 2021 Amendment:
o Removed the distinction between Captive and Merchant Mines:
 Captive Mines: Operate exclusively for the company’s own use, with permission to sell up to 50% of
annual production in the open market after meeting internal needs.
 Merchant Mines: Operate to sell minerals in the open market to various buyers.
o Auction-Only Concessions: Mandated that all private-sector mineral concessions must be granted through
auctions.
4. 2023 Amendment:
o Focus on Critical Minerals: Aimed at enhancing the exploration and extraction of critical minerals vital
for India's economic development and national security.
o Key Changes:
 Removed 6 minerals from the list of 12 atomic minerals restricted to state agencies.
 Empowered the government to auction mineral concessions for critical minerals.
 Introduced exploration licenses to attract foreign direct investment (FDI) and engage junior mining
companies in exploring deep-seated and critical minerals.
o Goal: Reduce dependence on imports and encourage private sector involvement in the exploration and
mining of critical minerals.
o Focus Minerals: Recognized minerals like lithium, graphite, cobalt, titanium, and rare earth elements
as crucial for future technologies and India's commitment to net-zero emissions by 2070.

MAINTENANCE RIGHTS OF DIVORCED MUSLIM WOMEN

Mohd Abdul Samad v. State of Telangana, 2024: Supreme Court Ruling
 A Muslim man filed a petition challenging the applicability of Section 125 of the Criminal Procedure Code
(CrPC) to his divorced wife, arguing that the Muslim Women (Protection of Rights on Divorce) Act, 1986
should take precedence.
 The petitioner claimed that the 1986 Act, being a special law, provided more comprehensive maintenance
provisions and should override the general provisions of Section 125 CrPC.
 He argued that Sections 3 and 4 of the 1986 Act, which include a non-obstante clause, give First Class
Magistrates the authority to decide issues like Maher (mandatory gift from the husband to the wife at the
wedding) and subsistence allowances, thus excluding family courts from having jurisdiction.
 The petitioner also pointed out that the 1986 Act required the wife to file an affidavit to opt for the CrPC
provisions, which the wife had not done.
 The petitioner contended that the 1986 Act implicitly repealed Section 125 CrPC for Muslim women,
preventing them from seeking relief under this section.

Muslim Women (Protection of Rights on Divorce) Act, 1986:

 Purpose: Enacted to protect the rights of divorced Muslim women, it provides provisions for maintenance
and other matters connected to these rights.
o It was introduced following the Mohd. Ahmad Khan vs. Shah Bano Begum (1985) case, where the
Supreme Court ruled that Section 125 of the CrPC is a secular provision applicable to all, regardless of
religion.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 213 of 348

 1

o The right to maintenance under CrPC is not negated by personal law provisions.

Key Provisions:
 Maintenance: A divorced Muslim woman is entitled to a reasonable and fair provision and maintenance from
her former husband, to be paid within the iddat period (a period of approximately three months after divorce
or the death of a husband).
 Mahr and Property: The Act covers the payment of mahr (dower) and the return of properties given to the
woman at the time of marriage.
 CrPC Applicability: The Act allows a divorced woman and her former husband to choose to be governed by
Sections 125 to 128 of the CrPC if they declare so at the first hearing of the application.

Evolution of the 1986 Act:

 Danial Latifi & Another vs Union Of India (2001): The Supreme Court upheld the constitutional validity of
the 1986 Act, ruling that it did not violate Articles 14, 15, and 21 of the Constitution. The Court extended the
right of Muslim women to receive maintenance until they remarry, beyond the iddat period.
 Shabana Bano v. Imran Khan (2009): The Supreme Court reiterated that divorced Muslim women could
claim maintenance under Section 125 CrPC, even beyond the iddat period, unless they remarry. This affirmed
the application of Section 125 CrPC to all, irrespective of religion.

Section 125 of the CrPC:

 Section 125 CrPC empowers a Magistrate of the first class to order a person with sufficient means to provide
monthly maintenance for:
o His wife, if she is unable to maintain herself.
o His legitimate or illegitimate minor child, whether married or not, if unable to maintain itself.
o His legitimate or illegitimate adult child with physical or mental disabilities, rendering them unable to
maintain themselves.
o His father or mother, if they are unable to maintain themselves.

Supreme Court Observations:

 The Supreme Court held that Section 125 CrPC applies to all women, not just married women, and has
universal application.
 The judgment reaffirmed the rights of divorced Muslim women to claim maintenance under Section 125
CrPC, ensuring legal parity and upholding the constitutional guarantees of equality and non-
discrimination.
 The Court dismissed the appeal, confirming that Muslim women can still seek maintenance under Section
125 CrPC despite the existence of the Muslim Women (Protection of Rights on Divorce) Act, 1986.
 The Court highlighted that Section 3 of the 1986 Act, which begins with a non-obstante clause, does not
prevent the application of Section 125 CrPC, but provides an additional remedy.
 The SC emphasized the need for Indian men to financially support their wives if they lack independent income,
distinguishing between financially independent women and those dependent on their husbands.
 The Court confirmed that divorced Muslim women, including those divorced through triple talaq (now illegal),
are entitled to maintenance under Section 125 CrPC regardless of personal laws.
 The Supreme Court declared triple talaq void and it has been criminalized under the Muslim Women
(Protection of Rights on Marriage) Act, 2019.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 214 of 348

 1

ELECTION OF NON-PERMANENT MEMBERS TO THE UN SECURITY COUNCIL

Election Process and Regional Groupings:
 Non-permanent members of the UN Security Council (UNSC) are elected for a two-year term through a
process involving regional groups nominating candidates.
 There are four regional groups:
o Somalia was elected from the African Group.
o Pakistan from the Asia-Pacific Group.
o Panama from the Latin America and Caribbean Group.
o Denmark and Greece from the Western European and Others Group.
 These regional groups nominate candidates, and the UN General Assembly votes on them, ensuring regional
representation in the UNSC to reflect global geopolitical diversity.
 The newly elected members will replace outgoing countries like Mozambique, Japan, Ecuador, Malta, and
Switzerland.
Role and Challenges of the UNSC:
 The UN Security Council is responsible for maintaining international peace and security.
 Its effectiveness can be hindered by the veto power of the five permanent members (P5).
United Nations Security Council Overview
 Established under the UN Charter in 1945, the UN Security Council is one of the UN's six principal organs.
 It comprises 15 members:
o 5 permanent members (P5): United States, Russian Federation, France, China, and the United
Kingdom.
o 10 non-permanent members, with five elected each year for a two-year term by the General Assembly.
 Permanent Membership:
o According to Oppenheim's International Law, the five permanent members were granted this status due
to their importance following World War II.
 India’s Participation:
o India has been elected as a non-permanent member for the terms 1950-51, 1967-68, 1972-73, 1977-78,
1984-85, 1991-92, 2011-12, and 2021-22.
Uniting for Consensus (UfC) Movement:
 Informally known as the Coffee Club.
 Countries opposing the expansion of Permanent Seats in UNSC.
 Prime movers: Italy, Spain, Australia, Canada, South Korea, Argentina, Pakistan.
o Italy and Spain oppose Germany’s bid.
o Pakistan opposes India’s bid.
o Argentina opposes Brazil’s bid.
o Australia opposes Japan’s bid.

GLOBAL GENDER GAP REPORT 2024

 The Global Gender Gap Index benchmarks countries on their progress towards gender parity in four key
dimensions with submatrices:
o Economic Participation and Opportunity
o Educational Attainment
o Health and Survival
o Political Empowerment
 Each country is scored between 0 and 1, where 1 represents full gender parity and 0 indicates complete
gender imparity.
 The index is the longest-standing measure of gender disparity, tracking progress since its inception in 2006.
Objectives:
 The index serves as a compass to track the progress in closing gender gaps across the four dimensions.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 215 of 348

 1

 Through this annual benchmarking, stakeholders within each country can set priorities tailored to the
economic, political, and cultural context of their specific country.
Key Features:
 146 economies were assessed in the 2024 edition of the report.
 Provides an overall score and individual scores for each sub-index to offer a detailed analysis of gender parity
progress.
Findings of the Global Gender Gap Report 2024
Overall Findings:
 The global gender gap score in 2024 stands at 68.5%, meaning 31.5% of the gap remains unaddressed.
 Progress has been very slow, with only a 0.1% improvement since 2023.
 At the current pace, achieving full gender parity will take 134 years, which is far beyond the 2030 Sustainable
Development Goal (SDG) target.
 The largest gender gaps persist in:
o Political Empowerment (with 77.5% still unaddressed).
o Economic Participation & Opportunity (with 39.5% unaddressed).
Top-Ranking Countries:
 Iceland remains the world’s most gender-equal society for the 15th consecutive year, with a score of 93.5%.
 The top 5 countries are:
o Iceland, Finland, Norway, New Zealand, and Sweden.
 7 out of the top 10 countries are from Europe, including Germany, Ireland, and Spain.
 Other regions represented in the top 10 include:
o New Zealand (Eastern Asia & Pacific) at rank 4.
o Nicaragua (Latin America & Caribbean) at rank 6.
o Namibia (Sub-Saharan Africa) at rank 8.
 Spain and Ireland made significant jumps into the top 10, climbing 8 and 2 ranks, respectively, compared to
2023.
Regional Performance:
 Europe leads with 75% of its gender gap closed.
 Followed by Northern America (74.8%) and Latin America & Caribbean (74.2%).
 The Middle East and North Africa (MENA) region ranks lowest, closing 61.7% of its gender gap.
 The Southern Asia region ranks 7th out of 8 regions, with a gender parity score of only 63.7%.
Economic & Employment Gaps:
 Women's workforce representation is 42% overall, compared to men's, and only 31.7% in senior leadership
roles.
 The leadership pipeline shows a 21.5% point drop for women from entry-level to managerial level globally.
 Women's hiring into leadership roles has worsened in 2023-24 due to economic challenges.
Care Burden Impact:
 Women’s workforce participation is slowly recovering from an increase in caregiving responsibilities,
indicating the need for equitable care systems.
 Although equitable care policies like paid parental leave are on the rise, they remain inadequate in many
countries.
Technology & Skills Gaps:
 Women remain underrepresented in STEM, constituting 28.2% of that workforce versus 47.3% in non-STEM
roles.
 Significant gender gaps persist in critical future skills like AI, big data, and cybersecurity, which are vital for
the future of work.

India's Performance in the Global Gender Gap Report 2024

 India’s Rank: India has dropped to 129th position in 2024 from 127th in 2023 out of 146 countries.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 216 of 348

 1

 South Asia Ranking: Within South Asia, India ranks fifth, behind Bangladesh, Nepal, Sri Lanka, and Bhutan.
Pakistan ranks last in the region.
 Economic Parity: India is among the countries with the lowest levels of economic parity, with less than 30%
gender parity in estimated earned income, similar to Bangladesh, Sudan, Iran, Pakistan, and Morocco.
 Educational Attainment: India performed well in secondary education enrolment, showing the best gender
parity in this area.
 Political Empowerment:
 India ranks 65th globally in the political empowerment of women and 10th in the parity of years with
female/male heads of state over the past 50 years.
o However, women’s representation remains low:
 Ministerial positions: 6.9%.
 Parliament: 17.2%.
 Gender Gap Closure:
India has closed 64.1% of its overall gender gap as of 2024. The slip in ranking from 127th to 129th is mainly
due to small declines in the Educational Attainment and Political Empowerment parameters, though slight
improvements were seen in Economic Participation and Opportunity.

SUMMIT ON PEACE IN UKRAINE

The Swiss Peace Summit or the Summit on Peace in Ukraine is an international conference aimed at finding
solutions to end the ongoing Russia-Ukraine war.
 It is held at the Bürgenstock resort in Switzerland and gathers representatives from various countries and
organizations to promote peace initiatives.

Objective:
 The primary goal is to facilitate dialogue and negotiations aimed at ending the war between Russia and
Ukraine, which has been ongoing since February 2022.

Participants:
 The summit brings together representatives from numerous countries, international organizations, and
peace advocacy groups.
 In the latest summit, 80 countries and four organizations supported the final joint communique.

Key Outcome of Swiss Peace Summit:

 Joint Communiqué:
o A final joint communiqué was issued, supported by 80 countries and four organizations out of the 100
attending delegations.
o This document outlines collective consensus and recommendations for achieving peace between Russia
and Ukraine.
 Territorial Integrity of Ukraine: The communique emphasized that Ukraine’s territorial integrity should be
the basis for any peace agreement to end the war.

Important Themes in the Final Statement:

1. Nuclear Safety:
o Any threat or use of nuclear weapons in the context of the ongoing war is deemed inadmissible.
2. Food Security:
o Food security should not be weaponized.
o Ukrainian agricultural products should be securely and freely provided to interested third countries.
3. Prisoner Exchanges:
o The communique called for the release of all prisoners of war through complete exchange.
o All deported and unlawfully displaced Ukrainian children and other civilians must be returned to
Ukraine.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 217 of 348

 1

4. Commitment to Peace: Participants expressed a strong commitment to ending the war, with emphasis on
continued dialogue and diplomatic efforts to resolve the conflict.
5. Humanitarian Aid: The summit stressed the importance of providing humanitarian aid to those affected by
the war, including displaced persons and civilians in war-affected areas.
6. International Cooperation: The summit fostered international cooperation and solidarity, with countries
and organizations pledging to work together to promote peace and stability in the region.

India's Stand at the Swiss Peace Summit

 India’s Attendance:
o India participated in the summit to explore possibilities for a negotiated settlement to the complex
Russia-Ukraine conflict.
o India was represented by the Secretary (West) from the Ministry of External Affairs.
o Prime Minister Narendra Modi was invited by Ukraine’s President Volodymyr Zelenskyy to attend, but
India sent a Secretary-level official due to its strategic ties with Moscow and reliance on Russia for
defence supplies.
o India has been purchasing discounted Russian oil to mitigate the impact of rising global oil prices.
 India’s Decision Not to Sign the Joint Communiqué:
o India decided not to sign the joint communique, emphasizing that only mutually acceptable options can
lead to lasting peace.
o India reiterated that enduring peace can only be achieved through dialogue and diplomacy.
 Reasons for India’s Position:
o Russia’s absence from the summit was a key reason for India’s decision, as it felt that without one of the
primary warring parties, lasting peace could not be achieved.
 Other Countries Not Signing the Final Communiqué:
o In addition to India, countries like Saudi Arabia, South Africa, Thailand, Indonesia, Mexico, and UAE
participated in the summit but did not sign the final communique.
o Brazil, listed as an observer, also did not sign the communique.

International Efforts to Establish Peace between Russia and Ukraine

Ukrainian 10-Point Peace Plan:
 Promoted by Ukraine’s President since the 2023 G-20 Summit.
 Key demands include:
o Withdrawal of Russian troops from Ukrainian territory.
o Restoration of Ukraine’s territorial integrity as per its 1991 internationally recognized borders.
o Prosecution of war crimes committed by Russia.

Minsk Agreements (2015):

 The Minsk Agreements were signed in 2014 and 2015 in Minsk, Belarus.
 These agreements were facilitated with support from France, Germany, and the Organization for Security and
Co-operation in Europe (OSCE).
 Signed by Ukraine, Russia, and OSCE representatives, the agreements aimed to resolve the conflict in eastern
Ukraine. Key provisions include:
o Ceasefire between Ukrainian forces and pro-Russian separatists.
o Withdrawal of heavy weaponry from the conflict zone.
o Full Ukrainian government control over the eastern Donbas region.

United Nations Efforts:

 UN experts have repeatedly called for intensified international efforts to establish peace in accordance with
the UN Charter.
 The UN Secretary-General has emphasized respecting Ukraine’s sovereignty, independence, unity, and
territorial integrity.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 218 of 348

 1

INTERNATIONAL BIG CAT ALLIANCE

About:
 The International Big Cat Alliance (IBCA) is a multi-country, multi-agency coalition that focuses on the
conservation of big cats and their habitats.
 It consists of 96 range and non-range countries dedicated to conserving seven big cat species.
 The idea was first proposed by India’s Prime Minister in 2019 and was officially launched in April 2023 to
mark the 50th anniversary of Project Tiger.
Objectives:
 Prevent illegal wildlife trade involving the seven big cat species.
 Promote conservation of natural habitats for these big cats.
 Mobilise financial and technical resources to support conservation efforts.
 Mitigate the adverse effects of climate change on big cats and their habitats.
 Advocate for policy initiatives that align biodiversity conservation with local needs and contribute to
achieving the UN Sustainable Development Goals within member countries.

Focus Species:
 IBCA focuses on the conservation of seven big cat species:
o Tigers, Lions, Leopards, Snow Leopards, Cheetah, Jaguars, and Puma.
 Of these, five species—tiger, lion, leopard, snow leopard, and cheetah—are found in India, excluding the
puma and jaguar.

Member Countries:
 Four countries are currently members: India, Nicaragua, Eswatini, and Somalia.

Budgetary Allocation:
 The Union Cabinet allocated a one-time budgetary support of Rs 150 crore for the IBCA for five years (from
2023-24 to 2027-28).
Governance Structure:
 The IBCA’s governance includes an Assembly of Members, a Standing Committee, and a Secretariat based in
India.
 The governance model is inspired by the International Solar Alliance (ISA).
 A Director-General (DG) is appointed by the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEFCC)
to oversee the alliance.

Big Cats
Definition:
 Big cats generally refer to large wild cat species, primarily from the Panthera genus, though some non-Panthera
species are also included.
 Smaller and medium-sized cats, including domestic cats, fall under the Felis genus.

Key Points:
 Lions are the only big cats that live in social groups called prides and engage in cooperative hunting. Other
big cats are typically solitary, except for mothers with cubs.
 The Siberian tiger, the largest of the big cats, is classified as endangered due to threats like trophy hunting
and use in traditional Chinese medicine.
 Big cats are considered keystone species and serve as critical indicators of ecosystem health, but they face
increasing threats from poaching, illegal wildlife trade, and habitat loss.

Big Cats in the Indian Subcontinent:

 Out of the 7 big cats, India is home to 5 species: Tiger, Lion, Leopard, Snow Leopard, and Cheetah.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 219 of 348

 1

Royal Bengal Tiger:

 As per the latest Tiger Census (2018-19), India's tiger population has risen to 2,967.
 India accounts for about 70% of the world's tiger population.

Asiatic Lion:
 The Gir National Park in Gujarat is the only habitat for the surviving population of Asiatic Lions in the world.
 Since the late 1960s, the Asiatic Lion population has grown from less than 200 to 674 (Census 2020).

Leopard:
 India is estimated to have between 12,000 and 14,000 leopards.
 The Indian leopard population is the most genetically diverse out of all leopard subspecies in Asia.

Snow Leopard:
 Snow leopards are native to the mountain ranges of Central and South Asia.
 In India, they inhabit the western Himalayas (Jammu and Kashmir, Ladakh, Himachal Pradesh, Uttarakhand)
and parts of the eastern Himalayas (Sikkim and Arunachal Pradesh).
 In 2021, there are approximately 7,500 snow leopards left in the world, with around 500 in India.

Cheetah:
 The Cheetah became extinct in India in 1952.
 In September 2022, 8 cheetahs were reintroduced into the wild in India, imported from Namibia, and released
into Kuno National Park in Madhya Pradesh.
 Namibian Cheetah Aasha has given birth to three cubs in Kuno National Park, Madhya Pradesh, marking a
significant success for Project Cheetah.
 This development is termed as a "roaring success" for India's cheetah reintroduction efforts.
 Kuno National Park is located in Sheopur district, Madhya Pradesh.
 The park has become home to several cheetahs translocated from Namibia and South Africa under Project
Cheetah.

Tiger Conservation Initiatives:

 Tiger Reserves (55) have been established as part of India's efforts to conserve tigers.
 Project Tiger and Project Elephant have been merged into Project Tiger and Elephant (PTE) by the Ministry
of Environment, Forest, and Climate Change on 1 April 2024.
 Conflicts between the forest bureaucracy and forest dwellers in Tiger Reserves have escalated due to
violations of the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972 and the Forest Rights Act, 2006.

Shortcomings in Tiger Conservation:

 The Wildlife Protection (Amendment) Act, 2006 did not prevent the diversion of tiger habitats for
development projects and allowed wildlife to be killed as a last resort.
 In 2007, the National Tiger Conservation Authority (NTCA) ordered the delineation of Critical Tiger
Habitats (CTH) without following the provisions, leading to the notification of 26 Tiger Reserves across 12
states.
 In places like Similipal Tiger Reserve (Odisha), the CTHs lacked buffer areas until 2012, when the Supreme
Court intervened.
 The Tiger Task Force in 2005 found that relying solely on weapons, guards, and fences was ineffective and
that the increasing conflict between forest officials and local communities was problematic.
Initiatives for Tiger Conservation:
 Project Tiger (launched in 1973) is a key wildlife conservation effort, aiming to ensure the survival of the tiger
population in its natural habitat.
 Starting with nine reserves covering 9,115 sq. km, the project now includes 55 reserves covering 78,135.956
sq. km as of 2018, about 2.38% of India's land area.
 Tiger Census:

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 220 of 348

 1

o The unreliable pug-mark method used in 1972 was replaced by more accurate techniques like the camera-
trap method.
o In 2022, India's tiger population was estimated to be between 3,167-3,925, showing a 6.1% annual
growth rate. India now hosts three-quarters of the world's tiger population.

Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972:

 The Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972 provides the legal framework for protecting wild animals and plants,
managing habitats, and regulating trade.
 The 2006 amendment created the National Tiger Conservation Authority (NTCA) and a comprehensive tiger
conservation plan, which shifted the approach from fortress conservation to community-inclusive conservation.

Tiger Task Force:

 Formed in 2005, the Tiger Task Force emphasized the need to reassess tiger conservation strategies,
highlighting flaws in the dependence on weapons, guards, and fences.

Forest Rights Act (FRA), 2006:

 The Recognition of Forest Rights Act, 2006 recognizes the traditional forest rights of Scheduled Tribes and
other forest dwellers.
 Gram Sabhas are empowered to manage forest resources and biodiversity within their boundaries.
 The Critical Wildlife Habitat (CWH) provision under the FRA ensures that CWHs cannot be diverted for non-
forestry purposes.
 Critical Tiger Habitats (CTH) cover 42,913.37 sq. km, or 26% of the area under National Parks and Wildlife
Sanctuaries.
WORLD ENVIRONMENT DAY 2024
 Date: Celebrated annually on 5th June to promote awareness and action for environmental protection.
 Objective: Raise global awareness, drive action for environmental protection, and promote sustainable practices.
 Organized by: United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP).
 Theme for 2024: “Land Restoration, Desertification and Drought Resilience”.
 Slogan for 2024: “Our land. Our future. We are #GenerationRestoration”.
 Host Country for 2024: The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.

About World Environment Day (WED)

 Origin: The day was established in 1972 by the United Nations General Assembly (UNGA) to coincide with
the first day of the Stockholm Conference on the Human Environment.
 First Celebration: The first World Environment Day was celebrated in 1973 with the theme “Only One Earth”.
 Global Reach: Celebrated in over 150 countries, WED has become a global movement with millions
participating worldwide.

Objectives of World Environment Day

 Public Education: Raise awareness on critical environmental issues.
 Action and Mobilization: Encourage individuals, communities, and organizations to participate in activities
promoting environmental protection.
 Promote Eco-Friendly Practices: Advocate for sustainable habits and technologies.
 Highlight Global Challenges: Focus on major environmental challenges such as climate change, deforestation,
pollution, and biodiversity loss.
 Encourage Global Collaboration: Promote cooperation between countries and organizations for collective
action.
 Promote Sustainable Policies: Encourage the development and adoption of policies aimed at environmental
sustainability.
 Celebrate Environmental Achievements: Recognize the efforts of individuals, organizations, and countries in
environmental conservation.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 221 of 348

 1

 Engage Youth and Communities: Involve young people and local communities in environmental initiatives to
foster responsibility for the planet.

History of World Environment Day

 Established: In 1972, the UNGA designated June 5th as World Environment Day during the Stockholm
Conference on the Human Environment.
 Evolution: Since 1973, WED has been celebrated annually with a different host country and theme each year,
becoming one of the largest global celebrations for environmental conservation.

India’s First Biosphere in a Tiger Reserve

 Rajaji Raghati Biosphere (RRB): India's first biosphere within a tiger reserve, created by environmentalists Jai
Dhar Gupta and Vijay Dhasmana in Rajaji National Park, Uttarakhand.
 Purpose: The 35-acre private forest initiative focuses on identifying and reviving rare and endangered
native tree species while protecting the area from poachers and mining.
 Land Condition: The land for RRB was previously barren and degraded.
 Future Plans: A second biosphere is being developed above the Koyna River in the buffer zone of the Sahyadri
Tiger Reserve near Pune, Maharashtra, along the Western Ghats.

‘Ek Ped Maa Ke Naam’ Campaign

 Launch: The campaign was launched by the Acting Prime Minister of India on World Environment Day (5th
June 2024).
 Symbolic Event: The Prime Minister planted a Peepal tree at Buddha Jayanti Park in Delhi.
 Objective: The campaign urges people to protect Mother Nature by making sustainable lifestyle choices and
contributing to environmental protection for a better planet.

ARMENIAN AZERBAIJAN CONFLICT

The Nagorno-Karabakh conflict is a long-standing territorial dispute between Armenia and Azerbaijan over the
Nagorno-Karabakh region. The region is internationally recognized as part of Azerbaijan but is predominantly
populated by ethnic Armenians.
o The Nagorno-Karabakh conflict is considered one of the "frozen conflicts" of the world, involving a
territorial dispute between Armenia and Azerbaijan over the Nagorno-Karabakh region.

Causes of the Conflict

 Historical Context: Disputes over the Nagorno-Karabakh region date back to the early 20th century. During the
Soviet era, it was an autonomous region within Azerbaijan despite its Armenian majority.
 Ethnic Conflict: The region is ethnically Armenian but geographically within Azerbaijan, leading to territorial
claims by both sides.
 Nationalism and Self-Determination: Armenian nationalists argue for the right of self-determination for the
region's Armenian population, while Azerbaijan asserts territorial integrity.
 Collapse of the Soviet Union: The dissolution of the Soviet Union in 1991 intensified the conflict, leading to a
full-scale war between 1992-1994.
 Displacement and Refugees: The conflict caused large-scale displacement of Armenians and Azerbaijanis.
 External Involvement: External powers like Russia, Turkey, and Iran have been involved due to their strategic
interests. Russia has ties with Armenia, and Turkey supports Azerbaijan.
 Failed Diplomacy: Efforts by international bodies like the OSCE Minsk Group to resolve the conflict have so far
failed to achieve a lasting solution.
Key Historical Events
 1921: With the formation of the Soviet Union, Nagorno-Karabakh became part of the Azerbaijan Soviet
Socialist Republic (Azerbaijan SSR), despite its Armenian-majority population.
 1988: The Nagorno-Karabakh legislature passed a resolution declaring its intention to join Armenia, despite
being geographically located within Azerbaijan.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 222 of 348

 1

 1991: With the collapse of the Soviet Union, both Armenia and Azerbaijan became independent states, and
Nagorno-Karabakh declared its independence.
 1993: War broke out, with Armenia capturing Nagorno-Karabakh and occupying 20% of Azerbaijan’s
territory.
 1994: A ceasefire was brokered by Russia under the Bishkek Protocol, making Nagorno-Karabakh de facto
independent, although still reliant on Armenia.
 2020: Azerbaijan, with support from Turkey, launched a military operation and managed to seize control of
territory surrounding Nagorno-Karabakh.
 2022: Azerbaijan blockaded the Lachin Corridor, causing severe shortages in Nagorno-Karabakh. Despite an
agreement to reopen the corridor, Azerbaijan launched an anti-terrorist offensive and claimed to have
regained full control over the region.
 2023: Almost 120,000 ethnic Armenians fled the region after Azerbaijan’s lightning offensive.

Strategic Importance of the Region

 Location: Nagorno-Karabakh is of strategic importance due to its position between Turkey, Iran, and Russia
and the Caspian Sea’s hydrocarbon deposits.

India-Armenia Ties
 Historical Relations: Indian settlements in Armenia trace back to 149 BC when two princes from Kannauj,
Krishna and Ganesh, established them. Emperor Akbar had an Armenian wife, Mariam Zamani Begum, and
granted Armenian traders special privileges and religious freedom. Today, the Armenian community in India is
mainly settled in Kolkata.
 Diplomatic Relations: India opened its embassy in Armenia in 1999 and maintains a treaty relationship with
the country. India has hosted three Heads of State from Armenia and has sent two visits from India at the level
of the Vice President.
 Political Relations: Armenia supports India's stance on resolving the Kashmir issue through bilateral
discussions and backs India’s aspiration for a permanent seat in the expanded UN Security Council.
 Defence Ties: In 2022, India signed a $250 million deal with Armenia to supply PINAKA multi-barrel rocket
launchers, anti-tank munitions, and ammunition.
 India opened its embassy in Armenia in 1999.
 $250 million defence deal signed with Armenia in 2022.

India-Azerbaijan Ties
 Historical Ties: The Ateshgah fire temple near Baku is an 18th-century monument with inscriptions in
Devanagari and Gurmukhi. The Silk Route was a notable link where Indian merchants trading to Europe
enjoyed hospitality in Azerbaijani cities like Baku and Ganja.
 Diplomatic Relations: After the collapse of the Soviet Union, India recognized Azerbaijan's independence and
established diplomatic relations. However, Azerbaijan's close ties with Pakistan have been a factor limiting
high-level engagements, with no Head of State or Government visit between the two countries.
 No Head of State visit between India and Azerbaijan yet.

NATO AND CSTO

 Formation: NATO (North Atlantic Treaty Organisation) is a political and military alliance established on April
4, 1949, after World War II. It initially included 12 founding members from Europe and North America:
Belgium, Canada, Denmark, France, Iceland, Italy, Luxembourg, the Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, the
UK, and the US.
 Headquarters: Located in Brussels, Belgium. The Allied Command Operations headquarters is near Mons,
Belgium.
 Founding Treaty: The alliance was formed by signing the Washington Treaty, which is based on Article 51 of
the United Nations Charter, emphasizing the right to individual or collective defence.
 Collective Defence: Article 5 of the North Atlantic Treaty is key, stating that an attack against one NATO member
is considered an attack against all. It commits NATO members to mutual defence.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 223 of 348
 1

Membership and Enlargement:

 Open Door Policy: Article 10 allows all European countries to be eligible to join NATO.
 Since 1949, NATO's membership has expanded from 12 to 32 countries through nine rounds of enlargement.
 Sweden became the latest member to join the Alliance in 2024.
 Decision by Consensus: NATO requires consensus from all member countries for new memberships, and any
member can veto a new entry.
 Countries Seeking Membership: Bosnia and Herzegovina, Georgia, Sweden, and Ukraine have expressed
their desire to join NATO.

Founding Members (1949):

 Belgium, Canada, Denmark, France, Iceland, Italy, Luxembourg, the Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, the
United Kingdom, and the United States.
 NATO has expanded through 10 rounds of enlargement, adding 20 new members since its formation:
1. 1952: Greece, Turkiye
2. 1955: Germany
3. 1982: Spain
4. 1999: Czechia, Hungary, Poland
5. 2004: Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, Bulgaria, Romania, Slovakia, Slovenia
6. 2009: Albania, Croatia
7. 2017: Montenegro
8. 2020: North Macedonia
9. 2023: Finland
10. 2024: Sweden

Process of Joining NATO:

1. Accession Talks: Formal talks to confirm the invitees.
2. Letters of Intent: Sent to NATO, outlining the timeline of reforms by the aspiring member.
3. Accession Protocols: Signed and ratified by NATO countries with the consensus of all members.
4. Accession to the Treaty: Submission of instruments of accession to the US State Department, finalizing
membership.

NATO Functioning:
 North Atlantic Council: The primary political decision-making body.
 Military Command Structure: Includes Strategic Commands like Allied Command Operations, which are
responsible for planning and execution of operations.
 Integrated Military Forces: NATO maintains integrated military forces, allowing member countries to
contribute personnel and assets for collective defence.
 Funding: Each NATO member contributes to the Alliance’s running costs, based on a cost-sharing formula
derived from Gross National Income.

NATO in the Post-Cold War Era

 Cold War Role: NATO served as a deterrent to the Soviet Union's threat during the Cold War.
 Post-Soviet Relevance: After the collapse of the Soviet Union in 1991, NATO's relevance was questioned, but
the alliance continued to function even after the Warsaw Pact was dissolved.
 Shift in Focus: NATO successfully transitioned from a collective defence organization to a collective security
entity, adapting to new geopolitical realities.
 Mutual Benefits:
o Europe: NATO has provided security to Europe at a relatively low cost.
o U.S.: For the U.S., NATO has been a key tool for global power projection.
 Global Involvement: NATO has engaged in military operations in various regions such as the Balkans, Middle
East, South Asia, and Africa.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 224 of 348

 1

 Direct Military Interventions: While Article 5 of NATO allows for military interventions, these are not
mandatory and depend on the decision of each individual member.
 Article 5 Invocation: The only time Article 5 was invoked was after the 9/11 attacks in the U.S., leading to
NATO forces being deployed to Afghanistan for nearly 20 years.
 Non-NATO and Non-EU Countries: Switzerland, Moldova, and Belarus are neither NATO nor EU members.
 Austria is an EU member but not part of NATO.
 UK is a NATO member but not part of the EU.
 NATO Plus: It is a grouping of NATO and five countries — Australia, New Zealand, Japan, Israel, and South
Korea. The group works toward boosting global defence cooperation.

Collective Security Treaty Organization

 CSTO is an intergovernmental military alliance consisting of six countries. It officially came into effect in
2002. The alliance intervened in Kazakhstan to suppress protests that endangered the regime, which has ruled
since the country gained independence in 1991.
 History:
o The treaty was first signed on 15th May 1992 by six post-Soviet states from the Commonwealth of
Independent States: Russia, Armenia, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan, and Uzbekistan. This treaty
is also known as the Tashkent Pact or Tashkent Treaty.
o In 1993, Azerbaijan, Belarus, and Georgia joined the treaty, which officially took effect in 1994.
o In 1999, six of the original nine signatories (except Azerbaijan, Georgia, and Uzbekistan) renewed the
treaty for five more years.
o In 2002, the six countries transformed the treaty into the CSTO, forming a formal military alliance.
 Headquarters:
The CSTO is headquartered in Moscow, Russia.
 Members:
The current members of the CSTO are Armenia, Belarus, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Russia, and Tajikistan.
 Objectives:
o The CSTO aims to strengthen peace, international and regional security, including cybersecurity.
o The organization focuses on the collective protection of the independence, territorial integrity, and
sovereignty of its member states.

INTER–SERVICE ORGANISATION ACT

The Armed Forces currently function under separate Service Acts like the Army Act, 1950, the Navy Act, 1957,
and the Air Force Act, 1950. These different acts have sometimes caused challenges in ensuring uniform discipline
and coordination across inter-service establishments.
 The Inter–Service organisation (ISO) Act does not propose changes to the existing service acts, rules, or
regulations but aims to streamline coordination between the branches.

 Features of the Act:

o Empowering ISO Leadership:
 The Act gives Commanders-in-Chief and Officers-in-Command of ISOs the power to exercise
disciplinary and administrative control over personnel from any service branch (Army, Navy, Air
Force).
 This ensures a simplified command structure and improves decision-making within ISOs.
o Constituting and Classifying ISOs:
 Existing ISOs like the Andaman and Nicobar Command, Defence Space Agency, and the National
Defence Academy will be officially recognized under this Act.
 The central government can form an Inter-Services Organisation (ISO) composed of personnel from
at least two of the three services—Army, Navy, Air Force.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 225 of 348

 1

 An ISO will be led by an Officer-in-Command, and a Joint Services Command (tri-service) can also
be established under a Commander-in-Chief.
o Applicability and Qualifications:
 The Act can be extended to other centrally controlled forces beyond the Army, Navy, and Air Force.
 It defines the eligibility criteria for Commanders-in-Chief and Officers-in-Command, specifying that
they will be high-ranking officers from each service.
o Control and Commanding Officer:
 The central government retains ultimate control over ISOs and can issue directives on matters related
to national security, administration, and public interest.
 The Act establishes the role of a Commanding Officer within an ISO, responsible for a specific unit, ship,
or establishment.
 The Commanding Officer has the authority to initiate disciplinary or administrative actions for
personnel under their command, while carrying out duties assigned by the higher leadership.

Significance of Integration of Armed Forces

 Enhanced Operational Effectiveness:
o Joint planning and training promote better coordination and understanding between the Army, Navy, and
Air Force, which is vital for modern warfare.
o Example: The Inter-Services Organisations (ISOs) Act, 2024 empowers ISO leadership to function under
a unified command, improving operational efficiency.
 Faster Decision-Making:
o Integrated command structures enable faster decision-making during critical operations.
o The establishment of the Chief of Defence Staff (CDS) in 2019 ensures a single-point military advisor to
the government, improving coordination in defence planning and procurement.
 Optimum Resource Utilisation:
o Integration helps reduce duplication of tasks and allows for better allocation of resources across all branches
of the military.
o Integrated theatre commands are being created to streamline planning, logistics, and operations,
ensuring maximum efficiency.

Joint Command in Andaman and Nicobar Islands

 First Tri-Service Theatre Command of the Indian Armed Forces, located at Port Blair, Andaman and Nicobar
Islands.
 It integrates Army, Navy, and Air Force operations within the region, marking a strategic initiative in Indian
military structure.

Commands of the Indian Armed Forces

 17 Commands currently exist across the Indian Armed Forces.
o 7 commands each for the Army and the Air Force.
o The Navy operates 3 commands.
 Each command is headed by a 4-star rank military officer.

Theatreisation of Armed Forces

 Theatreisation refers to integrating the Army, Navy, and Air Force under a single unified command for
specific geographical areas.
 All assets and resources from the three services in a given area are placed under one commander responsible
for planning and executing military operations.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 226 of 348

 1

MAITRI SETU
 About the Bridge:
o Length: Maitri Setu spans 1.9 kilometres, connecting Sabroom in Tripura (India) with Ramgarh in
Bangladesh.
o River: Constructed over the Feni River, which serves as the boundary between India and Bangladesh.
o Symbolism: The name ‘Maitri Setu’ reflects the growing friendship and bilateral relations between India
and Bangladesh.
o Structure: The bridge is a pre-stressed concrete bridge with a single-span structure, designed for
smooth traffic and cargo flow.
o Supervision: The construction was managed by the National Highways and Infrastructure Development
Corporation Ltd. (NHIDCL), a government-owned entity under the Ministry of Road Transport and
Highways (MoRTH), established in 2014.
 Significance:
o Strategic Role: The bridge is crucial for India’s Northeast region, providing access to the Bay of Bengal
via Bangladesh's Chittagong and Mongla Ports.
o Cargo Movement: Chittagong port, just 80 km from Sabroom, enhances the importance of Maitri Setu for
faster cargo movement.
o New Trade Corridor: Maitri Setu will create a new trade corridor between India and Bangladesh,
benefiting the economic development of Northeastern India and enhancing people-to-people ties.
o Act East Policy: Bangladesh, as India’s biggest trade partner in South Asia, plays a significant role in
India's Act East Policy. The completion of the bridge will strengthen strategic ties and boost bilateral
trade.
o Maritime Route: The new Kolkata to Chittagong maritime route will provide a quicker alternative for
the movement of goods, complementing the Sittwe Port-Kaladan route.

Key Facts about the Feni River

 Origin: The Feni River originates in South Tripura district and passes through Sabroom town in India before
flowing into Bangladesh.
 Length: The river is 116 kilometres long, eventually flowing into the Bay of Bengal.
 Tributaries: Notable tributaries of the Feni River include the Muhuri River, Raidak River, Chandkhira River,
Ryang River, and Kushiyara River.

FIRST ALL-INDIA SURVEY ON AYUSH 2024

 About the Survey:
o Conducted by the National Sample Survey Office (NSSO), this is the first-ever all-India AYUSH survey
carried out from July 2022 to June 2023.
o It aimed to provide insights into the utilisation patterns of traditional healthcare practices such as
Ayurveda, Yoga & Naturopathy, Unani, Siddha, and Homoeopathy (AYUSH).
o The survey covered the entire Indian Union, excluding certain inaccessible villages in the Andaman &
Nicobar Islands.
 Objectives:
o To assess the awareness of AYUSH systems among the population.
o To determine the use of AYUSH for prevention or treatment of ailments.
o To gather information on home remedies, medicinal plants, and local health traditions (folk medicine).
o To collect data on household expenditure for treatments using AYUSH.
 Key Findings:
o Awareness of AYUSH:
 In rural India, approximately 95% of males and females (aged 15 and above) are aware of AYUSH,
while in urban areas, awareness stands at around 96%.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 227 of 348

 1

 Around 79% of rural households and 80% of urban households have at least one member aware of
medicinal plants and home remedies.
 Around 24% of households (in both rural and urban areas) have at least one member familiar with
folk medicine or local health traditions.
o Use of AYUSH:
 About 53% of urban residents and 46% of rural residents have used AYUSH for prevention or
treatment of ailments in the past 365 days.
o Expenditure for AYUSH Treatment:
 The average expenditure per person for AYUSH treatment is Rs. 574/person in urban areas and Rs.
472/person in rural areas.
o Use of AYUSH Systems:
 Yoga Practice: In approximately 1.1 crore households in rural India and 1.4 crore households in
urban India, at least one member practices yoga regularly.

Government Schemes Related to the Promotion of AYUSH in India

Centrally Sponsored Schemes:
 National AYUSH Mission (2014):
o Launched to promote the traditional and cost-effective AYUSH system of medicine in India.
o Focus areas include infrastructure development, education and research, manpower augmentation,
and quality control in AYUSH.
Central Sector Schemes:
 Ayur Gyan (2021-2026):
o Aims to promote education, research, and innovation in AYUSH.
o Two main components:
 Capacity Building and Continuing Medical Education (CME): Training AYUSH professionals to bridge
knowledge gaps.
 Research & Innovation in AYUSH: Supports research aligned with national health priorities.
 AYURSWASTHYA Yojana:
o Provides financial assistance to organisations and institutes working in AYUSH under the Centre of
Excellence program.
o Aims to improve facilities, research, and overall operations.
 Champion Service Sector Scheme:
o Aims to promote medical tourism in India by promoting AYUSH systems like Ayurveda and Yoga.
o Seeks to attract international patients and visitors seeking AYUSH healthcare options.
 Promotion of International Cooperation in AYUSH:
o Aims to raise awareness and promote AYUSH systems internationally.
o Facilitates global development and recognition of AYUSH medicine.
 Ayush Oushadhi Gunvatta Evam Uttpadan Samvardhan Yojana:
o Aims to improve the quality and manufacturing of AYUSH medicines in India, making them safer and more
exportable globally.
 Conservation, Development, and Sustainable Management of Medicinal Plants:
o Focuses on the promotion, cultivation, and conservation of medicinal plants.
o The National Medicinal Plant Board under the Ministry of AYUSH coordinates efforts to support the
growth of medicinal plants across various ministries and organisations.

Ministry of AYUSH: Key Notes

 Establishment: The Ministry of AYUSH was formed on 9th November 2014, after separating from the Ministry
of Health and Family Welfare, to promote indigenous systems of medicine in India.
 The Department of Indian Systems of Medicine and Homeopathy (ISM&H) was first established in 1995
under the Ministry of Health and Family Welfare. The Modi government made the ISM&H an official ministry in
2014.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 228 of 348

 1

 Objective: The ministry is responsible for education, research, and the development of indigenous systems
of medicine such as Ayurveda, Yoga, Naturopathy, Unani, Siddha, and Homeopathy.
 The current Minister of Ayush is Sarbananda Sonowal.
AYUSH Systems of Medicine
 AYUSH stands for the traditional medical systems practiced in India, representing an integrated approach to
health. It includes:
o Ayurveda: An ancient system focusing on holistic health and well-being through diet, lifestyle, and herbal
treatments.
o Yoga: A practice combining physical postures, meditation, and breathing exercises for mental and
physical harmony.
o Naturopathy: A healing system using natural elements like water, air, and diet to promote health.
o Unani: A traditional system of medicine that aims to restore balance through herbal treatments and the
humoral theory.
o Siddha: Rooted in Tamil tradition, focusing on balancing the five elements and humours for healing.
o Homeopathy: Uses highly diluted substances to stimulate the body's self-healing responses.

RBI’S REPATRIATION OF GOLD FROM UK TO INDIA

The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) has brought back over 100 tonnes of gold from the UK, marking the largest such
repatriation since the early 1990s.
 RBI's Gold Reserves:
o As of March 2024, RBI holds 822.10 tonnes of gold.
o 408.31 tonnes are stored domestically, while 413.79 tonnes remain with foreign institutions like the Bank
of England and the Bank for International Settlements (BIS).
o In April 2024, the value of gold reserves is USD 54.4 billion out of the total forex reserves of USD 648.562
billion.

 History of Gold Purchasing:

o RBI is one of the top five central banks in terms of gold purchasing.
o Significant purchases include:
 200 tonnes during the 2009 global financial crisis.
 65.11 tonnes in FY 2022, 34.22 tonnes in FY 2023, and 19 tonnes in FY 2024.
Reasons for Gold Repatriation
 Protection Against Inflation:
o Gold retains its value well during high inflation.
o It acts as a safeguard against currency devaluation and provides potential for price appreciation.
 Hedge Against Geopolitical Uncertainty:
o The Russia-Ukraine conflict and the resulting sanctions highlight the risks of holding assets abroad.
o Gold offers safety during geopolitical instability.
 Diversification and Liquidity:
o Gold diversifies RBI’s foreign exchange holdings.
o It is a secure and liquid asset, easily tradable on international markets, giving RBI more flexibility.
 Economic Strength and Confidence:
o The repatriation reflects India's robust economic growth and stability.
o It contrasts with the 1991 economic crisis, when India had to pledge gold to secure foreign currency.
 Storage Costs:
o Bringing the gold back saves on storage charges paid to the Bank of England.
Historical Regime of Exchange Rate Management
 The Gold Standard (1870-1914):
o Currencies were directly linked to the value of gold, with each country holding gold reserves to back its
currency.
o This system provided stable exchange rates, facilitating international trade.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 229 of 348

 1

o Drawbacks:
 Limited gold supply restricted expansion of the money supply, hindering economic growth.
 Countries with trade deficits lost gold reserves, negatively impacting their economies.
 Gold discoveries or losses could cause unpredictable fluctuations in exchange rates.
 The Bretton Woods System (1944-1971):
o Established after World War II, aimed to create a more stable international financial system.
o Key Features:
 Fixed exchange rates with the US dollar as the reserve currency.
 Other currencies were pegged to the dollar, while the dollar was convertible to gold at a fixed rate of USD
35 per ounce.
o Challenges:
 Triffin Dilemma: As the global economy grew, the US struggled to maintain sufficient gold reserves to
back the dollar.
 The US's trade deficits created doubts about its ability to maintain the gold peg.
 The Current Scenario (Post-1971):
o After 1971, exchange rates are determined by market forces (supply and demand), with countries adopting
different regimes:
 Floating Exchange Rates: Exchange rates fluctuate freely based on market conditions.
 Pegged Rates: A country ties its currency to a strong currency (e.g., USD) or a basket of currencies.
 Dollarization: Some countries abandon their own currency and adopt the US dollar (e.g., Ecuador),
eliminating exchange rate risk but losing control over monetary policy.
 Special Drawing Rights (SDRs):
o Created by the IMF as a supplement to gold reserves.
o SDRs represent a basket of major currencies and are not directly convertible to gold.
o The price of gold is now determined by supply and demand in the free market, no longer tied to currencies.

GLOBAL ECONOMIC PROSPECTS REPORT 2024

Global Growth:
 Global growth is projected at 2.6% in 2024-25, despite ongoing geopolitical tensions and high interest rates.
 Growth may rise slightly to 2.7% in 2025-26.
 The US economy continues to grow despite the most aggressive monetary policy tightening in 40 years.
 India's economy is driven by strong domestic demand, surging investment, and robust services activity.

Global Trade:
 The value of global services trade grew by 9% in 2023, primarily due to a recovery in tourism.
 Global trade in goods and services remained nearly flat in 2023, marking the weakest performance in 50 years
outside of global recessions.
 The volume of goods trade contracted for most of 2023, falling 1.9% for the year.
 Maritime transit and freight rates were impacted by commercial vessel attacks in the Red Sea and climate-
related disruptions in the Panama Canal.
Commodity Markets:
 Commodity prices increased in 2024 due to tight supply conditions and signs of firmer industrial activity.
 Oil prices surged in April 2024 due to escalating tensions in the Middle East.
 Natural gas prices dropped by 28% in early 2024 amid robust production and mild winter conditions.
 Gold prices hit record highs, driven by geopolitical concerns and central bank purchases.
 Food prices are expected to fall by 6% in 2024 and 4% in 2025 due to ample supplies of grains, oils, and meals.
Global Inflation:
 Global inflation is declining but remains above target in most advanced economies and in about one-fourth of
Emerging Markets and Developing Economies (EMDEs).
 Headline inflation in most East Asia and Pacific (EAP) EMDEs remains close to or below pre-pandemic
averages.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 230 of 348

 1

Global Financial Developments:

 Central banks in major advanced economies are expected to gradually lower policy rates in 2024.
 Policy rate projections have been volatile since U.S. policy tightening began in 2022.
Per Capita Income Growth:
 EMDE GDP per capita growth is projected to decline to 3% in 2024, down from 3.2% in 2023, and remain
around that pace until 2026.
 Excluding China and India, per capita income levels in EMDEs are expected to be lower in 2024 than in 2019,
continuing a stagnation that began in the 2010s.

Decline in Welfare:
 Many fragile and conflict-affected economies will remain poorer in 2024 than before the pandemic.

Volatility:
 Geopolitical tensions could increase commodity price volatility, driven by supply disruptions, trade
restrictions, and market uncertainty.

Trade Fragmentation:
 Trade fragmentation can disrupt global networks by causing supply chain interruptions, trade diversion, and
reduced market access.

South Asia Region (SAR)

 Growth Projections: Growth in South Asia is expected to slow from 6.6% in 2023 to 6.2% in 2024, largely due
to a moderation in India's growth.
 India's Steady Growth: Regional growth is forecast to remain stable at 6.2% in 2025-26.
 Other Countries: Growth in Bangladesh will remain robust but at a slower rate, while Pakistan and Sri Lanka
are expected to show strengthening growth.
 Risks: Key risks include commodity market disruptions, potential fiscal consolidations, and financial
instability due to large sovereign borrowings by banks.

India-Specific Developments
 Growth: India is projected to grow at an average of 6.7%, making it the world's fastest-growing region, driven
by strong manufacturing and services sectors.
 Inflation: Inflation has remained stable, with India's inflation rate lower than in other parts of the region.
 Trade Deficits: Increases in remittances, recovery in tourism, and import restrictions have helped reduce
external imbalances.
 Fiscal Deficit: India's fiscal deficit is expected to shrink due to increased tax revenues from efforts to broaden
the tax base.
 Forecast: India's growth is projected to remain robust, with steady 6.7% growth per year for FY 2024-25
onward.
INDIA TO TAKE AUSTRALIA TO WTO ARBITRATION
India has sought arbitration proceedings under the WTO rules to resolve a trade issue with Australia regarding the
services sector.
 Disagreement: The disagreement stems from changes Australia is making to its commitments under WTO rules,
which could potentially affect India's trade in services.
 Australia's Changes: Australia has modified certain standards related to licenses and qualifications, which
aim to reduce trade barriers. However, India argues that these changes do not meet agreed conditions and
could impact Indian service providers.
 Negotiations: India and Australia entered into negotiations to reach an agreement, but despite extended talks,
they failed to resolve the issue.
 India has now requested arbitration.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 231 of 348

 1

Recent Developments Under GATS

 WTO Meeting: Over 70 WTO nations, including India, agreed to take additional obligations under the General
Agreement on Trade in Services (GATS) to ease non-goods trade and extend similar concessions to all other
members.
 Objective: The main goal is to reduce trade barriers related to licensing requirements, qualification
procedures, and technical standards.
 Market Access: Indian professional companies stand to benefit from equal market access opportunities in these
70 countries if they meet the required standards.
 Global Impact: Reducing barriers could save USD 127 billion globally, with a 10% reduction in services trade
costs for lower-middle-income economies and 14% for upper-middle-income economies.
 India's Concerns: India is concerned about how Australia’s changes may affect its service providers' ability to
enter Australian markets on equal terms, as agreed under GATS.

WTO Dispute Settlement Mechanism

 Framework: The WTO's Understanding on Dispute Settlement provides a structured legal framework for
resolving trade disputes between member countries.
 Key Participants: The United States, European Union, and China are the most frequent participants in WTO
disputes.
 Dispute Settlement Body (DSB): Handles disputes and can authorize retaliatory measures if member countries
fail to comply with decisions.
 Process: The entire process, from filing a dispute to reaching a decision, typically takes 15 months.
 Addressing Non-Trade Concerns: Disputes often involve non-trade issues, such as environmental protection
and public health, making the process more complex.
 Arbitration: Arbitration is often used to determine compensation or retaliatory measures when a country does
not comply with the DSB rulings. It is also invoked when countries prefer arbitration as a dispute resolution
method.
BHARAT NCAP
The Bharat New Car Assessment Programme (Bharat NCAP) was introduced by the Ministry of Road Transport
and Highways, Government of India, and has come into effect from October 1, 2023.
 Objective: It aims to evaluate the safety of vehicles through crash tests, providing a star-rating system to help
consumers make informed decisions while purchasing cars.
 Application: The programme targets passenger vehicles with up to eight seats (excluding the driver) and a
gross vehicle weight not exceeding 3,500 kg.

Key Features:
 Crash Testing: Vehicles will undergo tests including the Frontal Offset Test, Side Impact Test, and Pole-Side
Impact Test.
 Voluntary Programme: Bharat NCAP is voluntary, with manufacturers encouraged to nominate their vehicles
for testing to promote the production of safer cars in India.
 Safety Ratings: Vehicles will receive a safety rating from 1 to 5 stars, based on their crash test performance
according to the Automotive Industry Standard 197.

Testing Parameters:
1. Adult Occupant Protection: Assesses protection levels for adults in case of a collision.
2. Child Occupant Protection: Evaluates the safety measures for children in the vehicle.
3. Safety Assist Technologies: Examines the effectiveness of technologies that help prevent accidents or reduce
their impact.

Mandatory and Recommended Testing:

 Base Model Testing: Models with a minimum sale of 30,000 units may be tested.
 Ministry Recommendations: Certain models may undergo testing based on public safety concerns or
recommendations from the Ministry of Road Transport and Highways.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 232 of 348
 1

Alignment with Global Standards:

 Global NCAP Inspiration: Bharat NCAP is aligned with the Global NCAP, a platform that assesses vehicles
worldwide, drawing from the U.K.-based NGO Towards Zero Foundation.
 Evolution of Testing Protocols: Over 50 crash test results have been published for the Indian market, with Tata
Motors achieving India’s first 5-star rating for a car in 2018.
 These norms will also be applicable for testing and rate CNG and EVs based on their performance.
 Unlike Global NCAP, Bharat NCAP will give a unified rating for the vehicles, combining crash test results for
adults and children alike.
PARIS OLYMPICS 2024
 Official Name: Games of the XXXIII Olympiad
 Edition: 33rd Summer Olympics
 Host City: Paris, France
 Opening Ceremony: July 26, 2024
 Closing Ceremony: August 11, 2024
 Slogan: Games Wide Open
 Mascot: The Phryges
 Total Events: 329 events
 Number of Sports: 32 sports (including 4 additional sports: Skateboarding, sport climbing, surfing and break
Dance)
 Expected Athletes: Approximately 10,500
 Opening Ceremony: River Seine.
 Participating Countries: 200 NOCs and the IOC Refugee Olympic Team
 India’s Participation: 117 athletes

Key Highlights of Paris Olympics 2024:

 Top Medal-Winning Countries: The United States, China, and Japan led the medal table with remarkable
performances across multiple sports.
 Historic Achievements:
o The U.S. men’s and women’s 4x400m relay teams secured gold medals, continuing their dominance in
track and field.
o Four National Olympic Committees (NOC) won their first-ever gold medals at Paris 2024: Botswana,
Dominica, Guatemala and Saint Lucia.
o Athletics was a common theme among those making history by achieving their NOC’s first Olympic gold
medal, with Saint Lucia’s Julien Alfred storming to victory the women’s 100m, Dominica’s Thea LaFond
leaping to history in the women’s triple jump and Botswana’s Letsile Tebogo sprinting to gold in the men’s
200m.
o The Host: France ended the Games with 16 gold medals, 26 silver medals, and 22 bronze medals,
marking an impressive showing at their home Olympics.
 Closing Ceremony:
o The event concluded with a grand closing ceremony, where the Olympic flag was handed over to Los
Angeles, the host city for the 2028 Summer Olympics.
 Full Gender Parity:
o Achieving gender parity for the first time, the Paris Olympics had an equal number of male and female
athletes, reflecting a significant milestone for inclusivity in sports.
 Sustainability Efforts:
o The Paris Olympics were the first to be delivered fully under the Olympic Agenda reforms, emphasizing
sustainability and urban inclusiveness, minimizing environmental impact while maximizing the legacy of
the host city.
 Memorable Performances:
o Emma Finucane from Team GB earned multiple medals in track cycling.
o The U.S. women’s soccer team reclaimed the gold after a hard-fought victory against Brazil.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 233 of 348

 1

Records Made at the Paris Olympics

Athletics Achievements:
 Julien Alfred from Saint Lucia won her NOC's first Olympic gold medal in the women's 100m event.
 Thea LaFond of Dominica made history by winning the women's triple jump.
 Letsile Tebogo of Botswana secured his country's first gold in the men's 200m sprint.
Shooting Achievements:
 Adriana Ruano from Guatemala earned her country's first Olympic gold in the women’s trap event.
 Francisca Crovetto Chadid from Chile became her NOC’s first female Olympic champion in the women’s skeet.
African Athletes’ Historic Wins:
 Ahmed Elgendy from Egypt won his NOC's first gold medal in modern pentathlon.
 Mohamed Khalil Jendoubi of Tunisia became his country's first taekwondo Olympic champion.
 Kaylia Nemour of Algeria made history as the first African gymnast to win Olympic gold.
Asian Athletes’ Historic Performances:
 Kim Woojin from the Republic of Korea became the first male archer to win three gold medals in a single
Olympics.
 Horigome Yuto from Japan became the first skateboarder to win back-to-back Olympic titles.
 Arshad Nadeem from Pakistan won his NOC’s first-ever Olympic medal in athletics, securing gold in men’s
javelin.
 Diyora Keldiyorova from Uzbekistan earned her country’s first gold in judo.
 Vivian Kong from Hong Kong, China, became the first female Olympic champion in fencing for her NOC.
Special Achievements:
 Cindy Ngamba became the first refugee athlete to win an Olympic medal.
 Remco Evenepoel of Belgium made history as the first man to win both the time trial and road race in road
cycling at the same Olympics.
 Chermen Valiev of Albania and David de Pina of Cabo Verde both won bronze medals, marking the first Olympic
medals for their respective NOCs.
Novak Djokovic (Serbia):
 Djokovic finally secured Olympic gold in men's singles tennis, after four previous attempts at the Games.
 With this victory, the 37-year-old completed the Career Golden Slam (winning all four major Opens and the
Olympic Games).
Simone Biles (USA):
 Biles made a triumphant comeback at Paris 2024, winning gold in the women's team event, women's
individual all-around, and women's floor finals.
 She now holds a total of 11 Olympic medals (7 gold), making her the joint-second most decorated Olympic
gymnast of all time, tied with Vera Caslavska.
Katie Ledecky (USA):
 Ledecky became the second swimmer in history to win an event four consecutive times, securing gold in the
women's 800m freestyle.
 Her victory in the women's 1500m freestyle also tied her with Larissa Latynina for the most Olympic gold
medals (9) won by a female athlete.
Mijaín López (Cuba):
 Cuban greco-roman wrestler Mijaín López made history as the first athlete to win five consecutive gold
medals in the Olympics.
 Lopez retired after Paris 2024, ending his career with this extraordinary achievement.
Armand ‘Mondo’ Duplantis (Sweden):
 Broke his own pole vault world record by clearing 6.25m, winning gold.
Leon Marchand (France):
 Won five medals in swimming, including four golds (200m breaststroke, 200m butterfly, 200m and 400m
individual medley).
 Most medals won by a French athlete since Roger Ducret in fencing at the Paris 1924 Olympics.
Teddy Riner (France):
 Became the most decorated judoka in Olympic history with seven medals, including two golds at Paris 2024.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 234 of 348

 1

French Rugby Sevens:

 Antoine Dupont led the team to their first-ever gold medal in men’s rugby sevens.
Kauli Vaast (France):
 Won France’s first-ever gold medal in surfing on his home wave of Teahupo’o in Tahiti.
French BMX Dominance:
 Joris Daudet, Sylvain Andre, and Romain Mahieu swept the podium in the men’s BMX racing final, marking
the first podium sweep for France since Paris 1924.

India’s Performance at Olympics 2024:

Medal Tally and Rank: India finished 71st in the medal tally at the Paris 2024 Olympics, a decline from its 48th
place at Tokyo 2020. India won a total of six medals, including one silver and five bronze.

Indian Medal Winners at Paris Olympics 2024:

1. Manu Bhaker - Bronze: Women’s 10m air pistol event.
2. Manu Bhaker and Sarabjot Singh - Bronze: 10m air pistol mixed team event.
3. Swapnil Kusale - Bronze: Men’s 50m rifle 3 positions.
4. Indian Hockey Team - Bronze: Men’s hockey.
5. Neeraj Chopra - Silver: Men’s javelin throw with a throw of 89.45m.
6. Aman Sehrawat - Bronze: Wrestling (Men’s 57kg freestyle).

Key Highlights of India’s Performance:

 Neeraj Chopra secured his second Olympic medal, becoming India's fifth two-time Olympic medallist with a
silver in the men’s javelin throw.
 Manu Bhaker became the first Indian woman to win an Olympic shooting medal and the first Indian athlete
to win two medals at a single Olympic Games.
 Swapnil Kusale won India's first-ever Olympic medal in the 50m rifle 3 positions, part of India's highest
shooting tally at the Olympics, with three shooting medals.
 Lakshya Sen became the first Indian to reach the semi-finals in men’s badminton at the Olympics, finishing
fourth.
 Vinesh Phogat was disqualified in the women’s 50 kg wrestling final for being overweight by 100 grams,
leading to a missed medal opportunity.

India's Participation:
 Indian athletes competed in 69 medal events across 16 sports, including archery, athletics, badminton, boxing,
equestrian, golf, hockey, judo, rowing, sailing, shooting, swimming, table tennis, and tennis.

Historical Context:
 India has won a total of 41 Olympic medals. Notable milestones include:
o Norman Pritchard: Silver Medals (1900 Paris).
o KD Jadhav: Bronze (1952 Helsinki).
o Karnam Malleswari: Bronze (2000 Sydney).
o Abhinav Bindra: Gold (2008 Beijing).
o Neeraj Chopra: Gold (2020 Tokyo).
 India’s best-ever performance was at Tokyo 2020, with seven medals including one gold. The second-best
performance was in the 2012 London Olympics, with six medals (two silver and four bronze).
 Men's Hockey has won 13 medals, including eight golds, and Wrestling has secured eight medals historically.

India’s Flag Bearer at Paris Olympics 2024

 Opening Ceremony Flag Bearers: Pusarla Venkata Sindhu (Badminton) and Achantha Sharath Kamal
(Table Tennis) were the Indian flag bearers for the Paris Olympics 2024 Opening Ceremony. They led the
Indian contingent during the Parade of Nations on the River Seine. Sindhu, a two-time Olympic medallist, and
Kamal, an accomplished table tennis player, symbolized India’s sporting prowess and aspirations.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 235 of 348

 1

 Closing Ceremony Flag Bearers: PR Sreejesh (Hockey) and Manu Bhaker (Shooting) carried the Indian flag
during the Closing Ceremony, representing India's strong presence at the Games. Sreejesh, a seasoned hockey
goalkeeper, and Bhaker, a shooting sensation, highlighted India’s achievements and sportsmanship throughout
the event.
 Participation: 117 athletes represented India, making this the largest-ever contingent sent to the Olympic
Games, reflecting high hopes of surpassing India’s previous best performance at Tokyo 2020.

SECTION 69A & SECTION 66A OF THE IT ACT

The Karnataka High Court dismissed a petition filed by Twitter, challenging blocking orders issued by the Ministry
of Electronics and Information Technology (MeitY) under Section 69A of the Information Technology (IT) Act,
2000.
 MeitY had directed Twitter to block various accounts, tweets, URLs, and hashtags based on security concerns.

Section 69A of the IT Act:

 Purpose: Allows the government to issue content-blocking orders to online intermediaries (e.g., ISPs, telecom
providers, search engines) if the content threatens India’s national security, sovereignty, or public order.
 Process:
o The blocking order must contain written reasons.
o It can be issued to any intermediary to block access to information.
 Penalty: Social media intermediaries failing to comply may face a fine and an imprisonment term of up to 7
years.
 Safeguards:
o Blocking can only be done where necessary to protect national interests under Article 19(2) of the
Constitution.
o Reasoned orders must be issued, enabling challenges through Article 226 writ petitions.

Other Instances of Government Use of Section 69A:

 2020: Following tensions with China, MeitY banned 59 apps, including TikTok. I
 In September and November 2020, 118 apps and 49 apps (including PUBG) were banned under Section 69A
due to concerns over data security and links to China.

Section 66A of the IT Act:

 Introduced in 2009 to curb misuse of online platforms.
 Provision: Penalized sending offensive messages via computers or communication devices.
o Messages had to be:
 Grossly offensive.
 False and meant to cause annoyance, inconvenience, or harm.
o Punishment included a three-year jail term and a fine.

Why was Section 66A Struck Down?

 Vagueness: The term “offensive” was subjective, leading to arbitrary interpretation by police, causing
misuse.
 Shreya Singhal Case (2015):
o PIL by Shreya Singhal argued that Section 66A violated freedom of speech under Article 19(1)(a).
o The Supreme Court declared Section 66A unconstitutional, stating it had a “chilling effect” on free speech
and violated Articles 14, 19, and 21.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 236 of 348

 1

NATIONAL SECURITY COUNCIL APPOINTS ADDITIONAL NATIONAL SECURITY

ADVISER
A new Additional National Security Advisor (ANSA) was appointed on July 1, 2024, marking the first time this position
has been filled. The ANSA will assist the National Security Advisor (NSA) in managing the country’s national security
affairs.

Key Appointments:
 Pavan Kapoor: The current Secretary (West) in the Ministry of External Affairs (MEA) has been appointed as
the Deputy National Security Adviser (NSA).
 Rajinder Khanna: A former chief of Research & Analysis Wing (R&AW) and Deputy NSA (T&I) since January
2018, has now been promoted as the Additional NSA. This is a significant move as there was no Additional NSA
position prior to this promotion.
 T.V. Ravichandran, IPS: Currently serving as Special Director in the Intelligence Bureau (IB), has replaced
Rajinder Khanna as Deputy NSA.

Continuity in Leadership:
 Rajinder Khanna’s Promotion: Officials emphasized that Khanna's promotion as Additional NSA represents
continuity in the leadership of the NSCS, reflecting stability in national security policies and operations.
 Vikram Misri: Recently appointed as the next Foreign Secretary, starting from July 15, 2024.

Strategic Advisory Function:

 Principal Advisor: The National Security Advisor (NSA) serves as the primary advisor to the Prime Minister
on all matters related to national security.
 Comprehensive Counsel: Provides detailed strategic insights on domestic, foreign, and defense policies to
address India’s evolving security landscape.
 Complex Security Issues: Offers analysis on intelligence and security matters, providing a holistic
understanding of threats.

Coordination and Integration:

 Central Coordination: Receives intelligence from all key agencies such as R&AW, IB, NTRO, Military
Intelligence, DIA, NIA, and ensures proper coordination among them.
 Synergy Creation: Ensures policy alignment and cooperation among various ministries involved in national
security issues.

Crisis Management and Response:

 Crisis Leadership: The NSA leads national security crisis management, overseeing the response during
emergencies like terrorist attacks, natural disasters, or external threats.
 Crisis Strategy Implementation: Ensures the execution of crisis response strategies at a national level.

Diplomatic Engagement and Negotiations:

 High-Level Negotiations: Engages in sensitive diplomatic negotiations related to security matters, often
involving strategic allies and international partners.
 Track-Two Diplomacy: Utilizes unofficial channels for sensitive international issues, often handling
backchannel negotiations.
 International Representation: Represents India at global security forums and in bilateral security
dialogues to strengthen India's global position.

Institutional Leadership:
 Head of National Security Council Secretariat: The NSA heads the National Security Council Secretariat
(NSCS) and acts as the Secretary of the National Security Council (NSC), which is chaired by the Prime
Minister.
 National Security Council (NSC): A body responsible for overseeing strategic issues of national security,
defense, and foreign affairs.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 237 of 348
 1

Recent Appointment of NSA (2024):

 Ajit Doval: The Appointments Committee of the Cabinet (ACC) reappointed Shri Ajit Doval, IPS (Retired),
as the National Security Advisor, effective from June 10, 2024.
 Rank: His position will hold the rank of a Cabinet Minister and will be co-terminus with the Prime Minister's
term or until further orders.

National Security Advisor (NSA):

About the NSA:
 Senior Official: The NSA is the senior-most official on the National Security Council (NSC) of India.
 Established in 1998: The post was created by the Atal Bihari Vajpayee government on 19 November 1998.
 Chief Adviser: The NSA acts as the principal adviser to the Prime Minister of India on matters of national
security and international affairs.
 Current NSA: Ajit Doval is the current NSA, serving at the rank equivalent to a Union Cabinet Minister.
 Role: The NSA coordinates and processes intelligence reports from multiple agencies, including R&AW, IB,
NTRO, MI, DIA, NIA, and presents them to the Prime Minister.
 Term: The NSA serves at the discretion of the Prime Minister.

National Security Council of India (NSC):

 Advisory Role: The NSC is an executive agency responsible for advising the Prime Minister’s Office (PMO) on
issues of national security and strategic importance.
 Three-Tier Structure:
1. Strategic Policy Group (SPG): This group focuses on national security policies.
2. National Security Advisory Board (NSAB): The NSAB includes experts from different fields for strategic
analysis.
3. National Security Council Secretariat: Coordinates day-to-day operations and policies.
 Apex Body: The NSC is the highest deliberative body on national security.
 Members:
o Ministers of Home Affairs, Defence, External Affairs, Finance.
o Deputy Chairman of the NITI Aayog.
o The NSA serves as the Secretary of the NSC.

Key Functions of NSA:

 Strategic Advisory Role: Provides advice on domestic, foreign, and defense policies.
 Coordination: Ensures synergy among different ministries and intelligence agencies.
 Crisis Management: Leads national security crisis management efforts.
 Diplomatic Negotiations: Participates in international security discussions and track-two diplomacy.

NITI AAYOG’S SDG INDIA INDEX 2023-24

About the SDG India Index:
 Developed by: NITI Aayog to track and rank the progress of Indian States and Union Territories (UTs)
towards achieving the United Nations’ 17 Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs).
 Objective: To promote cooperative and competitive federalism by reviewing social, economic, and
environmental indicators.
Assessment Framework:
 Indicators: The index measures performance across 113 indicators aligned with the Ministry of Statistics and
Programme Implementation’s (MoSPI) National Indicator Framework (NIF).
 Goal-wise Scores: Scores are computed for 16 SDGs (excluding Goal 14: Life Below Water) for all states and
UTs. Scores range from 0 to 100, where 100 indicates complete achievement of the targets.
 Composite Scores: The overall state and UT performance is determined by a composite score based on the 16
goals.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 238 of 348
 1

Key Highlights of SDG India Index 2023-24:

 Comprehensive Assessment: Focuses on 16 goals, covering sectors like health, education, clean energy,
economic growth, and climate action.
 Scoring and Ranking:
o Scores Range: 0–100
o Categories:
 Aspirant (0–49)
 Performer (50–64)
 Front Runner (65–99)
 Achiever (100)
 Top Performers:
o Kerala continues to lead the rankings.
o Other high-ranking states: Himachal Pradesh, Tamil Nadu, Andhra Pradesh.
 Areas of Improvement:
o Bihar, Jharkhand, Uttar Pradesh are identified as states needing improvement in poverty reduction,
education, and gender equality.
 Data-Driven: The index incorporates data from over 100 indicators from government and international
sources for evidence-based assessment.
 Policy Implications: The insights help central and state governments set priorities, identify gaps, and develop
strategies for achieving the SDGs.

Scores and Progress:

 National Score: India’s overall score for 2023-24 is 71, up from 66 in 2020-21 and 57 in 2018.
 State Scores: Range from 57 to 79, showing significant improvement since 2018.
 Significant Progress: Seen in:
o Goal 1 (No Poverty): Score improved from 60 to 72.
o Goal 13 (Climate Action): Score increased from 54 to 67.
 New Entrants in Front-Runner Category:
o Arunachal Pradesh, Assam, Chhattisgarh, Madhya Pradesh, Manipur, Odisha, Rajasthan, Uttar
Pradesh, West Bengal, and Dadra and Nagar Haveli.
 Fastest Movers (2018–2023-24):
o Uttar Pradesh (score increase of 25).
o Followed by J&K (21), Uttarakhand (19), Sikkim (18).

Significance of SDG India Index:

 Benchmarking Progress: It acts as a tool to measure the performance of states and UTs.
 Promoting Cooperative Federalism: Encourages states to adopt a competitive and collaborative approach
towards sustainable development.
 Guiding Policy and Investments: Helps stakeholders in making informed decisions and directing resources to
high-impact areas.
 Public Awareness: Increases public engagement by making sustainable development data accessible, fostering
community participation.

 National Indicator Framework (NIF)

 Initiated by MoSPI: The National Indicator Framework (NIF) was developed by the Ministry of Statistics
and Programme Implementation (MoSPI) starting in September 2016.
 Objective: To monitor and guide India’s progress towards the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs).
 Comprehensive Framework: Initially, 306 statistical indicators were consolidated after consultations with
Central Ministries, State Governments, and stakeholders. These indicators align directly with SDG goals and
targets, reflecting national priorities and guiding data collection for policymaking.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 239 of 348

 1

Key Features:
 National Consultation: The NIF was developed with broad stakeholder involvement, ensuring national
acceptability and coverage of all target components.
 Ongoing Refinement: The framework is continuously updated by a High-Level Steering Committee (HLSC) to
reflect improvements in the statistical system and national priorities.
 Applicability: Indicators in the NIF are designed to be relevant across diverse sectors and contexts in India.
 Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation (MoSPI)
 Formation: Established on October 15, 1999, after the merger of the Department of Statistics and
Department of Programme Implementation.
 Departments:
o Statistics Department: Manages national statistics through the National Statistical Office (NSO),
including the Central Statistical Office (CSO), Computer Center, and National Sample Survey Office
(NSSO).
o Programme Implementation Wing: Monitors major government initiatives, such as the Twenty Point
Programme and Member of Parliament Local Area Development Scheme (MPLADS).

Key Functions:
 Surveys and Data Collection: Conducts scientific sampling surveys using dedicated field staff to gather
reliable data.
 Coordination: Coordinates with central and state government departments to maintain consistency in
statistical data.
 International Collaboration: Collaborates with international organizations such as the United Nations and
maintains global standards in statistics.
 Dissemination: Widely shares statistical information and promotes research through funding seminars and
conferences on statistical topics.

Future Goals:
 Business Identification Number: Introduction of a 16-digit Business Identification Number to streamline
business registration processes and interactions with government agencies.

TELECOMMUNICATIONS ACT 2023

The Telecommunications Bill, 2023 has been passed by the Indian Parliament, consolidating the laws governing
telecommunication services in India, and replacing older Acts.

Key Legislation Replaced:

 Indian Telegraph Act, 1885
 Indian Wireless Telegraphy Act, 1933
 Telegraph Wires (Unlawful Protection) Act, 1950

Objective:
To amend and consolidate the laws governing the provision, development, and operation of telecommunication
services, telecom networks, and infrastructure, including the assignment of spectrum.

Key Features of Telecommunications Bill, 2023:

1. Authorisation for Telecom Activities:
o Prior authorization is required from the central government for:
 Providing telecommunication services.
 Establishing, operating, or expanding telecom networks.
 Possessing radio equipment.
2. Assignment of Spectrum:
o Spectrum will primarily be assigned through auction, except for specific uses such as:
 National security, defence, disaster management, and weather forecasting.
 Satellite services like DTH and satellite telephony.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 240 of 348
 1

 Allocations for BSNL, MTNL, and public broadcasting services.

3. Powers of Interception and Search:
o The Bill grants powers to intercept, monitor, or block communication between individuals on grounds like
public safety or national security.
o Telecom services may be suspended on similar grounds.
o Searches can be conducted for unauthorised telecom equipment or networks.
4. User Protection:
o The government can introduce measures to:
 Ensure prior consent for receiving certain messages, such as advertisements.
 Create Do Not Disturb registers.
 Develop mechanisms to report malware or unsolicited messages.
o Telecom entities must establish an online redressal mechanism for consumer grievances.
5. Right of Way:
o Entities laying telecom infrastructure can seek right of way over public or private property on a non-
discriminatory and non-exclusive basis.
6. Appointments to TRAI:
o The Telecom Regulatory Authority of India (TRAI) Act is amended to allow:
 Individuals with 30 years of experience to serve as Chairperson.
 Individuals with 25 years of experience to serve as members.
7. Digital Bharat Nidhi:
o The Universal Service Obligation Fund (USOF), previously established under the Indian Telegraph Act,
1885, will now be known as Digital Bharat Nidhi.
o This fund will also support research and development in the telecom sector.
8. Offences and Penalties:
o Unauthorized provision of telecom services or unauthorised access to telecom networks is punishable
with imprisonment (up to 3 years) and a fine (up to Rs. 2 crores).
o Breach of authorisation terms: Civil penalties up to Rs. 5 crores.
o Possession of unauthorised telecom equipment can result in penalties up to Rs. 10 lakhs.
9. Adjudication Process:
o An adjudicating officer, of the rank of Joint Secretary and above, will handle inquiries and pass orders on
civil offences.

PRESIDENT REJECTS MERCY PETITION

President Droupadi Murmu has recently rejected the mercy petition filed by Mohammad Arif, also known as Ashfaq,
who was a Pakistani National and is a member of the terrorist group Lashkar-e-Taiba.

Context of the Incident: Arif was involved in the Red Fort attack in December 2000, which tragically resulted in the
death of three Army personnel.
Judicial Decisions on Sentencing:
 In 2005, a trial court initially sentenced Arif to death for his involvement in the attack.
 This decision was subsequently confirmed by the Delhi High Court in 2007.
 The Supreme Court of India upheld this death sentence in 2011.
Legal Proceedings Post-Sentencing:
 Following his sentencing, Arif utilized various legal avenues including filing a review petition and a curative
petition; however, all of these were ultimately rejected by the Supreme Court.
Overview of Mercy Petitions:
 A mercy petition is a formal request for clemency typically filed after all other judicial remedies have been
exhausted. This petition can be submitted by either the convict himself or by a relative on his behalf.
 These petitions are received by the President’s secretariat and are then forwarded to the Ministry of Home
Affairs for evaluation and recommendation.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 241 of 348

 1

Constitutional Provisions Governing Mercy Petitions:

 Article 72 of the Indian Constitution: This article empowers the President to grant pardons, reprieves, respite
or remission of punishments, or to suspend, remit or commute the sentences of any person convicted of any
offence where the sentence is a death penalty.
 Article 161: Provides similar clemency powers to the governors of states, allowing them to pardon sentences
including death penalties under certain circumstances.
Key Judicial Principles and Review Processes:
 In the landmark case of Shatrughna Chauhan vs Union of India (2014), the Supreme Court asserted that the
right to seek mercy under Articles 72 and 161 is a constitutional right, not merely at the discretion of the
executive.
 According to the Maru Ram vs Union of India (1981) case, the Supreme Court ruled that the President must
act based on the advice provided by the Council of Ministers when considering mercy petitions.
 The Kehar Singh case (1988) set forth important clarifications regarding the pardoning power of the President,
such as:
o The individual petitioning for mercy does not have the right to an oral hearing by the President.
o The President has the authority to examine the evidence afresh and may take a different view from that of
the courts.
o The exercise of this power is to be based on the advice of the Union Cabinet.
o The exercise of presidential pardoning power is generally not subject to judicial review, unless the decision
is shown to be arbitrary, irrational, mala fide, or discriminatory.

Comparing Article 72 and Article 161 of the Indian Constitution

Feature Article 72 (President) Article 161 (Governor)
Extends to offenses against laws relating to Extends to offenses against laws relating to
Scope of Power matters under the executive power of the matters under the executive power of the
Union (central government). State.
Yes, can pardon/commute sentences in cases No, does not have the power to
Court Martial
where punishment is by a Court Martial pardon/commute sentences in Court Martial
Cases
(military court). cases.
Death
Yes, can pardon/commute death sentences. Yes, can pardon/commute death sentences.
Sentence Cases
Minimum No specific requirement for minimum
No specific requirement for minimum
Sentence sentence served before pardon (as per 2021
sentence served before pardon.
Served Supreme Court ruling).
Pardoning power is subject to judicial review
Judicial Pardoning power is subject to judicial review
on limited grounds (e.g., mala fide exercise,
Review on similar grounds as the President's power.
non-application of mind).
Changes under Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita:
 The Bharatiya Nyaya (Second) Sanhita, 2023, which aims to replace the Indian Penal Code, 1860, introduces
changes in the procedure for filing mercy petitions.
 The new law restricts the right to file a mercy petition to convicts or their relatives, which may affect death
row convicts.
 The law includes a 30-day time limit for convicts to submit mercy petitions to the Governor or President.
 No time limits are prescribed for the consideration of mercy petitions by the President and Governor.
 The law also states that the President's decision on a mercy petition is final and cannot be appealed, which
limits judicial review and may affect the convict's fundamental rights.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 242 of 348

 1

Types of Pardoning Powers

Type of
Description Example
Pardoning Power
Completely absolves the convict of the
The President grants a pardon to a person
Pardon crime, erasing the conviction and all
wrongly convicted of treason.
associated penalties.
Substitutes a harsher punishment with a The President commutes a death sentence to life
Commutation
lighter one imprisonment.
Reduces the period of the sentence without The Governor remits one year from a two-year
Remission
changing its nature sentence of rigorous imprisonment.
The President grants a reprieve to a condemned
Temporarily postpones the execution of a
Reprieve prisoner to allow time for the filing of a mercy
sentence, usually for a short period.
petition.
The Governor grants a respite to a terminally ill
Similar to reprieve, but for a longer period
Respite prisoner to allow them to spend their final days
and often for medical reasons.
at home.

INDIAN POST OFFICE ACT, 2023

The Indian Post Office Act 2023, passed by Parliament, replaces the colonial-era Indian Post Office Act of 1898.
 According to the government, the new law aims to enhance the efficiency of the Postal Department in delivering
messages and offering banking services.
Highlights of the Post Office Act 2023:
 Interception and Detention of Items:
o Section 9 allows the central government to authorize any officer to intercept or detain postal items for
reasons concerning state security, foreign relations, and similar concerns.
o Items suspected of containing prohibited goods or liable for customs duty can be handed over to the
customs authorities.
 Exemption from Liability:
o Section 10 provides that the Post Office and its officers are exempt from liability for loss, misdelivery, delay,
or damage during service provision, except where otherwise prescribed.
 Removal of Penalties and Offences:
o The new Act eliminates all penalties and offences outlined in the 1898 Act, which included misconduct,
fraud, and theft by postal officials.
o It allows for the recovery of unpaid service charges as arrears of land revenue.
 Penalty under Section 7:
o Every person using a service provided by the Post Office is liable to pay the required charges for that service.
 Removal of Centre’s Exclusivity:
o The new Act removes the exclusive privilege of the Centre to convey letters, a provision that became
obsolete with the rise of private courier services in the 1980s.
o Private courier services are now brought under the Act’s regulatory ambit, which also expands the scope
to intercept and detain any postal article, not limited to letters.
 Director General of Postal Services:
o The Act authorizes the Director General of Postal Services to make regulations related to offering
additional services as prescribed by the central government.
o It also empowers the Director General to fix charges for these services, eliminating the need for
parliamentary approval for revising postal service charges.
 Identifiers and Post Codes:
o Section 5(1) empowers the central government to set standards for addressing, including the use of
address identifiers and postcodes.
o This forward-looking provision aims to replace physical addresses with digital codes based on
geographical coordinates for more precise identification of premises.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 243 of 348

 1

Comparison between the Indian Post Office Act 2023 and the Indian Post Office Act 1898:
Feature Indian Post Office Act 2023 Indian Post Office Act 1898
Removes the exclusive privilege of the central Section 4 provided exclusive privilege to
Exclusive Privilege
government in conveying letters by post. the central government.
Services to be specified by the Central
Services Offered Services were mentioned in the Act itself.
Government.
Fixing Charges for Appointment of a Director General of Postal Required parliamentary approval to fix
Services Services to fix charges for services. charges.
Interception of Expands grounds for interception, including Interception on grounds of public
Postal Articles state security, friendly state relations. emergency affecting safety and tranquility.
Liability for Loss or Exempts liability in cases of loss or theft of
Liable for theft or loss of parcels.
Theft parcels.

RBI’S FINANCIAL STABILITY REPORT

 Released by: The Financial Stability Report is released by the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) twice a year.
 Authority: It reflects the collective assessment of the Sub-Committee of the Financial Stability and
Development Council (FSDC), which is chaired by the Governor of RBI.
 Purpose: The report provides insights into the risks to the financial stability of India and the resilience of its
financial system.
 Risk Assessment: The RBI conducts a Systemic Risk Survey (SRS) as part of the FSR, taking inputs from experts
and market participants to evaluate five types of risks: Global, Financial, Macroeconomic, Institutional, and
General.

Key Highlights of the Financial Stability Report (FSR):

 Resilience of the Indian Economy: Despite global economic and financial challenges, the Indian economy
remains resilient and continues to be the fastest-growing major economy. India’s contribution to global
growth is currently 18.5% in 2023-24.

Indian Banking System:

1. Improved Asset Quality:
o Gross Non-Performing Assets (GNPA) ratio of Scheduled Commercial Banks (SCBs) dropped to a 12-year
low of 2.8% in March 2024.
o Improvement observed across public, private, and foreign banks.

2. Increased Profitability:
o Return on Assets (RoA): Increased to 1.3%.
o Return on Equity (RoE): Increased to 13.8%.
3. Capital Buffers:
o Capital to Risk-Weighted Assets Ratio (CRAR): 16.8%.
o Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) Ratio: 13.9%, well above the regulatory minimum.
4. Positive Stress Test Results:
o Stress tests indicate that SCBs are well-capitalised and capable of absorbing macroeconomic shocks
without requiring additional capital infusion.

Non-Banking Financial Companies (NBFCs):

1. Robust Credit Growth:
o NBFCs maintained strong credit growth in 2023-24, with growth in loans to industry and services
accelerating, while personal loan growth decelerated.
2. Healthy Asset Quality:
o Capital to Risk (Weighted) Assets Ratio (CRAR) of NBFCs: 26.6%.
o Gross Non-Performing Assets (GNPA) ratio of NBFCs: 4.0%.
o Return on Assets (RoA): 3.3%.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 244 of 348

 1

Key Risks Highlighted in the FSR:

1. Global Economic Headwinds: Prolonged geopolitical tensions, high public debt, and slow disinflation
progress pose risks to global economic stability, affecting the Indian financial sector.
2. Increasing Cyber Risks: The rising frequency of cyberattacks on the financial sector, due to increasing
digitalisation of financial services, is a significant concern.
3. Domestic Risks: Supply-chain disruptions, rising commodity prices, weaknesses in the rural economy, and
uncertainties related to weather conditions are key domestic risks.
4. Interconnectedness and Contagion Risk: The interconnectedness of financial institutions is rising, with
interbank exposures reaching a 3-year peak in September 2023, heightening the risk of contagion.
5. Risks in Unsecured Retail Loan Segment: Unsecured retail loans have seen rapid growth of 23% over the last
two years, compared to 12-14% overall credit growth, posing stability risks to the financial sector.

RBI Initiatives for Stability of the Indian Financial System:

1. Strengthening Banks’ Internal Surveillance: RBI advised banks and NBFCs to enhance their internal
surveillance mechanisms to manage risks in the unsecured retail loan segment.
2. Revised Prudential Framework on Stressed Assets: The Revised Prudential Framework issued on June 7,
2019, extends the resolution framework for stressed assets and incentivises early adoption of resolution plans.
3. Large Exposures Framework (LEF): Introduced by RBI to address counterparty concentration risks in the
banking sector.
4. Supervisory Mechanism for Banks: RBI reviewed and revised the supervision structure in response to
increasing diversity, complexities, and interconnectedness in the financial sector.
5. Dedicated Cloud Facility: RBI announced a dedicated cloud facility for the financial sector to help banks and
other financial entities manage the rising volume of data.

FARMER’S PROTESTS AND FARM LAWS

Farmers from Punjab, Haryana, and Uttar Pradesh are marching towards Delhi, demanding legal guarantees for
Minimum Support Price (MSP).
 Previous Protests (2020): In 2020, farmers protested against the three farm laws, leading to their repeal in
2021.
o The repealed laws were:
1. The Farmers’ Produce Trade and Commerce (Promotion and Facilitation) Act.
2. The Farmers (Empowerment and Protection) Agreement of Price Assurance and Farm Services
Act.
3. The Essential Commodities (Amendment) Act.

Key Demands of Farmers:

 Minimum Support Price (MSP) Law:
o Farmers demand a law guaranteeing MSP for all crops based on the Dr. M S Swaminathan Commission’s
report.
o Swaminathan Commission Report: Recommends that the government should raise the MSP to at least
50% more than the weighted average cost of production, also called the C2+50% formula.
o C2 Formula: Includes imputed cost of capital and rent on land to ensure farmers receive 50% returns.
o Full debt waiver for farmers and laborers.
o Implementation of the Land Acquisition Act, 2013 with written consent from farmers before acquisition
and compensation at four times the collector rate.
o Punishment for those responsible for the Lakhimpur Kheri killings (October 2021).
o India’s withdrawal from WTO and freezing of all Free Trade Agreements (FTAs).
o Pensions for farmers and farm laborers.
o Compensation for farmers who died during the 2020 Delhi protest, with a job for one family member.
o Scrapping the Electricity Amendment Bill 2020.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 245 of 348

 1

o 200 days of employment per year under MGNREGA, with a daily wage of Rs 700, and linking MGNREGA
with farming.
o Strict penalties for companies producing fake seeds, pesticides, and fertilizers, along with improvements in
seed quality.
o Creation of a National Commission for spices like chili and turmeric.
o Ensure indigenous peoples' rights over water, forests, and land.

Concerns Related to WTO and FTAs:

 Market Access: Farmers fear that FTAs and WTO regulations bring in cheaper agricultural imports, increasing
competition and undercutting domestic prices.
 Imported Goods: Subsidized agricultural products from other countries may flood the domestic market,
lowering the prices of locally produced crops.
 Impact on Farming Practices: International trade agreements often impose regulations and standards that
are seen as burdensome for Indian farmers.
 Sovereignty and Autonomy: Farmers argue that withdrawing from the WTO and freezing FTAs would help
regain control over India’s agricultural policies and protect small farmers.

Current State of MSP and Farmers' Demands:

 Current MSP: For the Rabi Marketing Season 2024-25, the MSP for wheat is set at Rs 2,275 per quintal, which
is higher than the cost demanded by farmers under the C2+50% formula.
 A2+FL Formula: The current MSP is based on the A2+FL formula, which includes only paid-out costs, resulting
in a lower MSP compared to C2+50%.
 CACP Recommendations: The Commission for Agricultural Costs & Prices (CACP) recommends MSP using
the A2+FL formula, considering paid-out costs and the imputed value of family labor, but excluding C2 factors
like rent and interest on capital.
 Return Over Cost of Production:
o For wheat in Punjab, the C2 cost is Rs 1,503 per quintal, and the MSP is Rs 2,275 per quintal, giving
farmers a return of 51.36% over C2.
o For paddy in Punjab, the return over C2 was 49%, and it was 152% over A2+FL.

Three Farm Laws (2020) and their Repeal:

1. Farmers Produce Trade and Commerce (Promotion and Facilitation) Act, 2020: Allowed trade in
agricultural produce outside the APMC (Agricultural Produce Market Committee) mandis.
2. Farmers (Empowerment and Protection) Agreement on Price Assurance and Farm Services Act, 2020:
Established a framework for contract farming.
3. Essential Commodities (Amendment) Act, 2020: Removed items such as cereals, pulses, oilseeds, edible
oils, onions, and potatoes from the list of essential commodities.

Reasons for Enacting the Laws:

 There has been a long-standing demand for reforms in agricultural marketing, which is under the purview of
state governments.
 The central government has been advocating for reforms since the early 2000s by pushing states to adopt
changes in their APMC Acts.
 A model APMC Act was designed by the Agriculture Ministry in 2003 and circulated to the states for
implementation.
 Despite efforts, being a state subject, the Centre had limited success in convincing states to adopt the model Act.
 In this context, the central government passed the three farm laws to bring about the necessary reforms.

Reasons Behind Farmers' Protests:

1. Repeal of Farm Laws:
o The primary demand of the protesting farmers was the repeal of the three farm laws, which they believed
favored big corporations at the expense of farmers' interests.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 246 of 348

 1

2. Minimum Support Price (MSP):

o Farmers demanded legal guarantees for MSP and wanted a written assurance for the continuation of MSP
and the conventional food grain procurement system.
o They also insisted on protecting the APMC (Mandi) System.
3. Electricity (Amendment) Bill:
o Farmers wanted the withdrawal of the Electricity Amendment Bill, fearing it would lead to the end of free
electricity.
4. Swaminathan Commission Recommendations:
o Farmers demanded MSP as per the Swaminathan Commission's recommendations, which proposed
raising MSP to 50% more than the weighted average cost of production (C2+50% formula).
o The C2 formula includes imputed costs like capital and land rent to ensure 50% returns to farmers.

Staying the Implementation:

 The Supreme Court stayed the implementation of the three farm laws in January 2021.
 The laws were in force for 221 days, from June 5, 2020, when the ordinances were promulgated, to January 12,
2021, when the implementation was stayed.
 After the stay, the laws remained suspended, and the government reverted to using the Essential Commodities
Act, 1955 to impose stock limits.

Impact of Repealing the Laws:

1. Need for Consultation:
o The repeal highlights the need for wider consultation for future agricultural reforms to ensure better
design and broader acceptance.
o The government is likely to approach reforms cautiously to avoid further controversy.
2. Low Farmers' Income:
o With the average landholding size at 0.9 ha (2018-19), increasing farmers' incomes requires shifting
towards high-value agriculture.
o Reforms in value chains, private investments in logistics, storage, processing, and digital technologies
are necessary for raising farmers' incomes.
3. Negative Impact on Industries:
o Industries related to logistics, cold chains, agri-business, and farm equipment would be negatively
affected, as they were expected to benefit from these laws.
4. Constant Agri-GDP Growth:
o The growth of agricultural GDP has remained at an average of 3.5% per annum over the last 14 years and
is expected to continue at a similar rate.
o Cropping patterns will continue to favor rice and wheat, and the Food Corporation of India (FCI)
granaries will remain stocked with surplus grains.
o The food subsidy bill will continue to rise, along with leakages in the system.

About MSP:
 MSP is the guaranteed price paid to farmers when the government procures their produce.
 It is determined based on the recommendations of the Commission for Agricultural Costs and Prices (CACP),
which takes into account various factors like cost of production, demand and supply, market price trends,
and inter-crop price parity.
 CACP is an attached office of the Ministry of Agriculture and Farmers Welfare, established in January 1965.
 The final decision on MSP is made by the Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs (CCEA), chaired by the
Prime Minister of India.
 MSP aims to ensure remunerative prices for growers and encourages crop diversification.
Crops Under MSP:
 The CACP recommends MSPs for 22 mandated crops and a Fair and Remunerative Price (FRP) for sugarcane.
 The 22 crops include 14 kharif crops, 6 rabi crops, and 2 other commercial crops.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 247 of 348

 1

Three Types of Production Costs:

1. ‘A2’: Covers all paid-out costs incurred by the farmer in cash or kind, including seeds, fertilizers, pesticides,
hired labor, leased-in land, fuel, and irrigation.
2. ‘A2+FL’: Includes A2 plus the imputed value of unpaid family labor.
3. ‘C2’: A more comprehensive cost, including rental value of owned land and interest on fixed capital assets,
in addition to A2+FL.
o CACP considers both A2+FL and C2 while recommending MSP.
o The A2+FL cost is used for calculating returns, while C2 is primarily used as a benchmark to ensure MSP
covers major production costs in key producing states.
Need for MSP:
 Twin droughts (2014 and 2015) led to a decline in commodity prices, impacting farmers.
 The demonetization and the rollout of GST further affected the rural economy, especially the non-farm sector.
 The pandemic and the economic slowdown worsened the situation for farmers.
 Increasing input prices for diesel, electricity, and fertilizers have added to farmers' distress.
 MSP helps ensure farmers receive fair prices, thereby reducing farm distress and poverty, especially in
agriculture-dependent states.

Concerns Related to MSP in India:

1. Limited Extent:
o Although MSP is announced for 23 crops, only rice and wheat are procured extensively under the National
Food Security Act (NFSA).
o MSP implementation for other crops is ad-hoc and limited, leaving many farmers without benefits.
2. Ineffective Implementation: The Shanta Kumar Committee (2015) revealed that only 6% of farmers benefit
from MSP, indicating inadequate procurement mechanisms and poor market access.
3. Skewed Crop Dominance: The focus on MSP for rice and wheat has led to imbalanced cropping patterns,
with potential ecological, economic, and nutritional consequences.
4. Middlemen Dependency: Smaller farmers face difficulties accessing the MSP system due to the involvement of
middlemen, commission agents, and officials from Agricultural Produce Market Committees (APMCs).
5. Burden on Government: Procuring and maintaining buffer stocks of MSP-supported crops imposes a significant
financial burden on the government, diverting resources from other rural development programs.

ATTEMPTED ASSASSINATION OF FORMER U.S. PRESIDENT DONALD TRUMP

 Date and Location: On July 13, 2024, former U.S. President Donald Trump was shot in the ear during a
campaign rally in Butler, Pennsylvania.
 Casualties: The shooting left one person dead and two others critically injured.
 Shooter: The suspected shooter, identified as Thomas Matthew Crooks, aged 20, from Bethel Park,
Pennsylvania, was killed at the scene by law enforcement.
 Weapon: An AR-style rifle was recovered from the shooter.

Trump’s Condition:
 Safety: Trump was reported to be safe, according to the U.S. Secret Service.
 Response: After being shot in the ear, Trump was assisted by Secret Service agents, emerging with blood on his
face but showing defiance by pumping his fist in the air and mouthing the words "Fight! Fight! Fight!".
 Transport: Trump was quickly escorted to a black SUV by the Secret Service.

Shooter Details:
 Shooter Identification: The shooter was identified as Thomas Matthew Crooks, a registered Republican,
who had also made a $15 donation to a progressive political action committee in 2021.
 Motive: The FBI has not yet identified a motive, and the investigation is ongoing.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 248 of 348

 1

Political Impact:
 Significance: This is the first attempted assassination of a President or presidential candidate since Ronald
Reagan was shot in 1981. The incident occurred just days before Trump was to accept the Republican
nomination.

U.S. Secret Service:

 Establishment:
o The U.S. Secret Service (USSS) was established on July 5, 1865, initially created as a part of the U.S.
Department of the Treasury to combat widespread counterfeiting of U.S. currency.
 Current Role and Functions:
o The Secret Service now has two primary responsibilities:
1. Protection of National Leaders:
 The Secret Service provides security for the President, Vice President, President-elect, Vice
President-elect, and their immediate families.
 It also protects former Presidents and their families, major presidential candidates, and foreign
dignitaries during official visits.
 Protection extends to White House, Vice President's residence, and other significant locations related
to the U.S. leadership.
2. Investigation and Enforcement:
 Besides protecting national leaders, the Secret Service investigates financial crimes, including
counterfeiting, fraud, cybercrimes, and threats against its protectees.
 Protection of Presidential Candidates:
o The Secret Service began providing protection to presidential candidates after Robert F. Kennedy was
assassinated in 1968.
o Under the Presidential Protection Assistance Act of 1976, major candidates are given Secret Service
protection at least 120 days before the general election.
 Protection of Former Presidents:
o Former Presidents are entitled to lifetime Secret Service protection under the Former Presidents Act of
1958. Their immediate families also receive protection.
o Former Presidents lose this protection if they become President again.

List of U.S. Presidents Assassinated:

1. Abraham Lincoln:
o Date of Assassination: April 14, 1865
o Assassinated by: John Wilkes Booth, a Confederate sympathizer, at Ford’s Theatre in Washington, D.C.
o Reason: Lincoln was assassinated towards the end of the Civil War, primarily due to his efforts to abolish
slavery and his role in preserving the Union.
2. James A. Garfield:
o Date of Assassination: July 2, 1881 (died on September 19, 1881)
o Assassinated by: Charles J. Guiteau, a disgruntled office seeker, at a Washington, D.C. train station.
o Reason: Guiteau was upset that Garfield did not offer him a government job, leading him to shoot the
President.
3. William McKinley:
o Date of Assassination: September 6, 1901 (died on September 14, 1901)
o Assassinated by: Leon Czolgosz, an anarchist, during a public appearance at the Pan-American
Exposition in Buffalo, New York.
o Reason: Czolgosz believed McKinley was a symbol of oppression and targeted him as part of a broader
anarchist movement.
4. John F. Kennedy:
o Date of Assassination: November 22, 1963
o Assassinated by: Lee Harvey Oswald, while riding in a motorcade in Dallas, Texas.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 249 of 348

 1

o Reason: The motive behind Kennedy's assassination remains controversial and is the subject of many
conspiracy theories. Oswald was a former Marine who had defected to the Soviet Union before returning to
the U.S.

Gun Laws in the USA:

 Second Amendment:
o The Second Amendment to the U.S. Constitution (adopted in 1791) forms the legal basis for gun
ownership in the U.S. It states, "the right of the people to keep and bear Arms shall not be infringed."
o It guarantees the right to individuals to possess firearms but has been the subject of significant debate over
interpretation.
 Federal Gun Laws:
o Federal laws set the minimum standard for gun regulation across the country.
o Key federal regulations are governed by:
1. Gun Control Act (GCA) of 1968:
 This law regulates the firearms industry and ownership, prohibiting certain individuals (such as
felons and those with restraining orders) from owning guns.
 It also regulates the interstate transport and sale of firearms.
2. Brady Handgun Violence Prevention Act of 1993:
 Mandates background checks on individuals before purchasing a firearm from a licensed dealer.
 Established the National Instant Criminal Background Check System (NICS).
3. National Firearms Act (NFA) of 1934:
 Imposes restrictions on the sale, possession, and transfer of specific types of firearms, such as
machine guns, short-barreled rifles, and silencers.
4. Firearm Owners Protection Act (FOPA) of 1986:
 Eases restrictions on gun owners and dealers, but also prohibits the sale of automatic weapons
manufactured after May 19, 1986, to civilians.
 State Gun Laws:
o U.S. states have the authority to enact their own gun laws, which can be more restrictive or lenient than
federal laws. As a result, gun laws vary significantly from state to state.
o For example:
 California has stringent gun laws, including mandatory waiting periods, background checks, and a
ban on assault weapons.
 Texas, on the other hand, has more permissive gun laws, allowing open carry of firearms with minimal
restrictions.
o Preemption laws in some states prevent local governments from enacting stricter regulations than those
set by the state.

INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY ACT, 2000

 Principal Act: The Information Technology Act, 2000 governs cyberspace in India and was last amended in
2008.
 Privacy Protection: The Act safeguards individual privacy for users of electronic and internet services
provided by internet service providers.

Key Sections on Cybercrimes:

 Section 66: Addresses hacking (fraudulently accessing computer resources without permission).
 Section 66C: Penalizes identity theft.
 Section 66D: Punishes cheating by impersonation.
 Section 66E: Protects against violation of bodily privacy.
 Section 67: Prohibits the publishing or transmitting of obscene material in electronic form.
 Sections 67A & 67B: Penalize the transmission of sexually explicit material, including child pornography.
 Section 65: Deals with tampering with computer source documents.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 250 of 348

 1

Custodian of the IT Act:

 Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology (MeitY) is the custodian of the IT Act.

Comprehensive Legal Framework of the IT Act, 2000:

1. Legal Recognition: Provides legal backing for e-commerce, e-governance, electronic records, transactions,
and e-signatures.
2. Controller of Certifying Authority (CCA): Regulates the process of certification of digital signatures.
3. Adjudication Mechanism: Establishes adjudication and appellate mechanisms for cyber violations.
4. Cybercrime Punishment:
o Sections 43, 43A, 65, 66, 66B, 66C, 66D, 66E, 66F, 67, 67A, 67B, 70, 72 & 72A provide penalties and
compensation for various cybercrimes, such as:
 Tampering with computer source documents.
 Damage to computer systems.
 Identity theft and cheating by impersonation.
 Sensitive personal data leaks.
 Cyber terrorism, online pornography, child pornography.
 Unauthorized access to protected systems.
 Breach of confidentiality and privacy.
 Breach of lawful contracts.
5. Regulation of Intermediaries: Internet businesses, including social media platforms and mobile applications,
are regulated through Intermediary Rules.

Cybersecurity Framework:
 CERT-In and NCIIPC: The Act establishes a cybersecurity framework through CERT-In (Computer Emergency
Response Team - India) and National Critical Information Infrastructure Protection Centre (NCIIPC).
 Sections 69B & 70B: Deal with cyber incident information sharing for proactive/reactive actions by CERT-
In and law enforcement agencies.
 Section 70A: Protects critical information infrastructure.

Blocking of Information (Section 69A):

 Allows blocking of information to protect:
o Sovereignty and integrity of India.
o Defense and security of the State.
o Friendly relations with foreign States.
o Public order.
o Prevent incitement to commit cognizable offenses related to these issues.

Data Privacy and Security (Section 43A & 72A):

 Section 43A: Protects sensitive personal data, including financial information, and mandates compensation
for unauthorized access and data breaches.
o Due diligence by online platforms (body corporate) is outlined in the Information Technology
(Reasonable Security Practices and Procedures and Sensitive Personal Data and Information) Rules,
2011.
 Section 72A: Provides punishment for the disclosure of information in breach of lawful contract.

Takedown of Information (Section 79(3)(b)):

 Enables the removal of information from intermediary platforms that violate existing laws when ordered by
the government or its agencies.

Recent Amendments to IT Act:

 IT (Intermediary Guidelines and Digital Media Ethics Code) Rules, 2021:
 Notified by: Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology (MeitY) in February 2021.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 251 of 348

 1

 Objective: To establish due diligence for intermediaries, a Grievance Redressal Mechanism, and a Digital
Media Code of Ethics.

Due Diligence by Intermediaries:

 Publish Rules: Intermediaries must publish rules, privacy policy, and user agreements on their website or
mobile application.
 Content Restrictions: Modified categories of content that users are not allowed to upload or share.
 Periodic Updates: Intermediaries must inform users of their rules and policies at least once a year.

Grievance Redressal Mechanism for Intermediaries:

 Grievance Officer: Intermediaries must prominently publish the Grievance Officer's contact details on their
platform.
 Complaint Mechanism: Provide a mechanism for users or victims to lodge complaints against rule violations or
issues related to computer resources.
 Resolution Timeline: The Grievance Officer must acknowledge the complaint within 24 hours and resolve it
within 15 days.

Additional Due Diligence for Significant Social Media Intermediaries (SSMIs):

 SSMI Definition: Intermediaries enabling online interaction between users are classified as social media
intermediaries.
 Significant SSMIs: Platforms with registered users above a notified threshold are classified as SSMIs.
 Compliance Officer: SSMIs must appoint a Chief Compliance Officer to ensure compliance with the Act.
 24×7 Nodal Officer: SSMIs must appoint a Nodal Contact Person for continuous coordination with law
enforcement.

Identification of First Originator of Information:

 Messaging Services (e.g., WhatsApp): SSMIs must enable identification of the first originator of information
within India, if required.

Ensuring Online Safety and Dignity:

 Content Removal: Intermediaries must remove or disable access within 24 hours for content that violates
the dignity of users (e.g., nudity, sexual acts, morphed images).
 Filing Complaints: Complaints can be filed by the affected individual or any other person on their behalf.

Oversight Mechanism:
 Ministry of Information and Broadcasting: Responsible for formulating an oversight mechanism.
 Charter for Self-Regulating Bodies: Will publish a charter including Codes of Practice.
 Inter-Departmental Committee: Will hear grievances under the oversight mechanism.

 Information Technology (Intermediary Guidelines and Digital Media Ethics Code) Amendment Rules,
2023:
 Introduced in: April 2023 by the Government.
 Objective: To introduce further rules on intermediary responsibilities, particularly on fact-checking and online
gaming.

Fact Check Unit (FCU):

 New Requirement: SMIs, SSMIs (e.g., Twitter, Facebook), and Online Gaming Intermediaries must inform users
not to host, display, or transmit information flagged as fake, false, or misleading by a Fact Check Unit (FCU) of
the Central Government.
 Content Removal: Intermediaries must take down flagged content identified as misleading about central
government business.
 Enforcement: The FCU can instruct intermediaries to remove such content from their platforms.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 252 of 348

 1

FCU & Freedom of Speech Debate:

 Freedom Concerns: Concerns have been raised by internet freedom activists about potential impacts on
freedom of speech due to the introduction of the FCU.
 Unclear Definition: The amendment does not clearly define "any business of the Central Government."
 Commercial Interests: Experts have warned that intermediaries may prioritize commercial interests to avoid
losing safe-harbour protection, which exempts intermediaries from liability for third-party content provided
they adhere to due diligence under the IT Act.

Bombay High Court Struck down the Fact Check Unit:

In September 2024, the Bombay High Court struck down the Fact Check Unit (FCU) formed under the 2023
amendments to the Information Technology (Intermediary Guidelines and Digital Media Ethics Code) Rules,
2021.

Violation of Constitutional Rights:

 The Court held that the FCU provisions violated Articles 14 and 19 of the Constitution:
o Article 14: Right to equality before the law.
o Article 19: Freedom of speech and expression, and right to profession.
 The Court found that terms such as “fake, false, or misleading” were too vague and ambiguous, which could
lead to misuse and curb freedom of expression.

Absence of Legal Clarity:

 The Court ruled that without a clear “right to the truth” being legally defined, it is inappropriate for the
government to unilaterally determine what constitutes false or misleading information about its own activities.

Lack of Proportionality:
 The judgment highlighted that the measures introduced by the government did not meet the standard of
proportionality, meaning they were disproportionate to the harm they sought to prevent.

LIGNOSAT – THE WORLD’S FIRST WOODEN SATELLITE:

 Launch Date: The LignoSat satellite, the world’s first wooden satellite, was successfully launched in September
2024.
 Launch Vehicle: It was launched aboard a SpaceX rocket from the Kennedy Space Center.
 Destination: The satellite is currently in orbit around the International Space Station (ISS).

Specifications of LignoSat:
 Size and Weight: LignoSat is a cube satellite measuring 10 centimeters on each side and weighing just over
2 pounds.
 Material: It is made from magnolia wood, selected for its durability and resistance to cracking or breaking
during construction.
o Testing: Before LignoSat’s launch, wood samples, including magnolia, were tested on the ISS and found to
have no distortion after exposure to the extreme conditions of space.

Collaborators Behind LignoSat:

 Kyoto University: Provided the academic and technical expertise to develop the satellite.
 Sumitomo Forestry: Brought its industrial experience in wood utilization and forestry products.
 NASA and JAXA: Supported the project through international collaboration, highlighting the global significance
of sustainable space technology.

Orbit and Mission of LignoSat:

 Current Orbit: LignoSat is orbiting Earth as part of its mission to the ISS.
 Mission Duration: The satellite is expected to function for several months, during which it will study the viability
of wood as a construction material in space.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 253 of 348

 1

Significance of LignoSat:
 Environmental Impact: LignoSat is made from biodegradable wood, which will burn into fine ash upon re-
entry, eliminating the risk of harmful debris.
 Scientific Role: The satellite is equipped to monitor how wood behaves in space, exploring the potential of wood
as a sustainable alternative to traditional materials like metal.
o Wood burns without producing metal particles, which can pollute the atmosphere and contribute to ozone
depletion.
Need for Wooden Satellites:
 Sustainability: Wood offers a biodegradable, eco-friendly solution, addressing the growing concerns of space
debris.
 Space Debris Management: LignoSat offers an innovative way to reduce the generation of metal debris that
can harm spacecraft and the environment.
o Environmental Concerns: Research suggests that aluminum from re-entering metal satellites can harm
the ozone layer and contribute to pollution.

Future Prospects:
 Following the success of LignoSat, discussions are ongoing about launching more wooden satellites and even
considering a potential wooden space station under the LignoStar initiative.

Space Junk:
 Definition: Space junk refers to the millions of debris pieces that orbit Earth, including defunct satellites and
rocket stages.
 Current Situation: Over 9,300 tons of space debris currently orbit the Earth.

Steps to Tackle Space Junk:

1. e.DeOrbit Mission by ESA: A mission that aims to capture space debris using innovative tools like nets and
robotic arms.
2. CleanSpace One by Swiss Space Systems: A nanosatellite designed to push debris out of orbit using a claw-like
mechanism.

Legal Instruments to Regulate Space Activities:

1. Outer Space Treaty (1967): Establishes principles for peaceful exploration of space and holds states liable for
damage caused by their space objects.
2. Space Liability Convention (1972): Expands on liability rules, providing procedures for claiming compensation
for damages caused by space objects.
3. Rescue Agreement (1968): Requires states to return foreign space objects found in their territory and notify
the Secretary-General of such discoveries.

ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE INDEX, 2024

The Environmental Performance Index (EPI) 2024 was recently released by the Yale Center for Environmental
Law & Policy and the Columbia Center for International Earth Science Information Network.
 The report evaluates the sustainability efforts of 180 countries and highlights the global environmental
performance based on a variety of metrics, including climate change, ecosystem vitality, and environmental
health.

Key Highlights of EPI 2024:

 Global Scenario:
o Estonia leads the index by reducing its greenhouse gas emissions (GHG) by 59% from 1990 levels.
o Only five countries (Estonia, Finland, Greece, Timor-Leste, and the United Kingdom) have managed to
reduce their GHG emissions at a rate required to achieve net-zero emissions by 2050.
o Sub-Saharan Africa and Southern Asia are ranked lowest among the eight regions assessed in the report.
o Countries like China, India, and Russia have seen their emissions increase, and in the United States,
progress has been slow in achieving net-zero targets.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 254 of 348

 1

 India’s Performance:
o India ranks 176th out of 180 countries, scoring 27.6 points, just above Pakistan, Vietnam, Laos, and
Myanmar.
o India performs poorly in Air Quality, Emissions, and Biodiversity Conservation, largely due to its heavy
reliance on coal, which contributes to high levels of GHG emissions and air pollution.
o India ranks 177th in air quality and 172nd in projected emissions by 2025.
o India is the largest emitter of transboundary pollution in South Asia, affecting neighboring countries like
Bangladesh.
o Despite the low overall rank, India ranks 133rd in climate change due to its renewable energy
investments and commitment to achieve net-zero emissions by 2070. However, India needs an additional
USD 160 billion annually in climate change mitigation investments.
 New Metrics:
o The 2024 EPI introduced new pilot indicators to measure the effectiveness and stringency of protected
areas globally.
Issues Related to EPI:
 India’s Concerns:
o Projected GHG Emissions Calculation: The method of calculating projected emissions, based on the
average rate of emissions change, is considered inadequate by India.
o Biodiversity Loss Measurement: Measuring biodiversity loss or ecosystem health is challenging due to
the complex dynamics involved and the absence of standardized methodologies.
o Exclusion of Carbon Sinks: The EPI does not account for India’s forests and wetlands as carbon sinks,
which help absorb carbon and are essential for reducing emissions.
o Ecosystem Condition Ignored: While the index tracks the extent of ecosystems, it fails to evaluate their
condition or productivity.
o Lack of Relevant Indicators: The EPI lacks important indicators like agro-biodiversity, soil health, food
loss, and waste, which are especially relevant for developing nations like India with large agrarian
populations.
 General Issues:
o Balancing Priorities: Countries with economic development as their priority may find it difficult to
implement EPI recommendations, especially if reliant on resource extraction or fossil fuels.
o Funding Constraints: Developing nations may face funding and resource challenges in implementing
environmental policies. Additionally, developed nations have not allocated sufficient funds to developing
countries for climate mitigation.
o Transboundary Environmental Impacts: Addressing cross-border issues like air pollution, water
management, and wildlife protection requires multilateral efforts and agreements.
About the Environmental Performance Index:
 Background:
o The Environmental Performance Index (EPI) is a biennial index that was first launched by the World
Economic Forum in 2002 as the Environmental Sustainability Index (ESI).
 Released by:
o Yale Center for Environmental Law & Policy (Yale University).
o Center for International Earth Science Information Network (CIESIN), Columbia University.
 Evaluation Target:
o It assesses nations’ efforts to meet international environmental policy targets, such as the U.N.
Sustainable Development Goals, the Paris Climate Agreement (2015), and the Kunming-Montreal
Global Biodiversity Framework.
 Framework:
o The EPI 2024 utilizes 58 performance indicators grouped into 11 issue categories across 3 policy
objectives:
1. Environmental Health
2. Ecosystem Vitality
3. Climate Change

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 255 of 348

 1

o Countries are ranked on a scale of 0 to 100, from worst to best performance, based on their success in these
categories.

RUDRAM-II MISSILE FLIGHT TEST:

 Successful Test: The Defence Research & Development Organisation (DRDO) successfully flight-tested the
RudraM-II missile from a Sukhoi-30MKI fighter jet of the Indian Air Force (IAF) off the coast of Odisha.
 Purpose: It is designed for Air-to-Surface roles, allowing it to neutralise enemy assets like surveillance and
communication systems.
About RudraM-II Missile:
 Indigenous Development: The RudraM-II is an indigenously-developed missile with solid propulsion and
advanced technology from various DRDO laboratories.
 Strike Range: The missile has a range of up to 350 km, making it highly effective when launched from IAF's
Sukhoi-30MKI fighters.
 Technology: It incorporates state-of-the-art indigenous technologies, making it a crucial asset for India's
defence preparedness.
 Role: The missile is intended to neutralise a wide range of enemy assets, contributing significantly to India’s
air security.
RudraM Series Missiles:
 Development: The RudraM series is being developed by DRDO as new-generation anti-radiation missiles
(NGARMs).
o These missiles are designed to destroy enemy surveillance systems, radars, communication networks,
and command centers.
 RudraM-I:
o The RudraM-I missile, which has a range of 150 km, was first tested in October 2020.
o It uses INS-GPS navigation with a passive homing head for final targeting.
 Suppression of Enemy Air Defences (SEAD):
o The series is meant for long-range suppression of enemy air defences, allowing IAF strike aircraft to
conduct bombing missions with reduced risk.

Anti-Radiation Missile Features:

 Function: Anti-radiation missiles are designed to detect, track, and neutralise radar and communication
assets of the adversary's air defence systems.
 Navigation Systems:
o Inertial Navigation System (INS): A computerized system that tracks the object’s position.
o Passive Homing Head: Detects and classifies radio frequency sources over a wide frequency band,
engaging the target.
Specifications of RudraM-II:
 Range: Up to 350 km.
 Speed: Can travel at speeds of up to Mach 5.5.
 Payload: Capable of carrying a payload of up to 200 kilograms.
 Detection: Can detect enemy radio frequencies and signals from radars at over 100 km.
 Replacement for Kh-31: It is expected to replace the Russian Kh-31 missile currently used in India's Sukhoi-
30MKI fighter jets.
Significance:
 Force Multiplier: The RudraM-II is expected to play a critical role in strengthening India's air security, serving
as a force multiplier for the IAF.
 Advanced Tracking: Its performance was evaluated using advanced tracking tools like electro-optical systems,
radars, and telemetry stations.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 256 of 348

 1

INTERNATIONAL BOOKER PRIZE 2024

 Winner: Jenny Erpenbeck's novel Kairos, translated by Michael Hofmann, won the International Booker
Prize 2024.
 Prize Money: The £50,000 prize is split equally between the author and the translator, recognizing both their
contributions equally.
About the Novel - Kairos:
 Plot: Kairos is set in 1980s Berlin and narrates the story of a romantic relationship between a young woman
and an older man, set against the fall of the Berlin Wall, which marked the end of the Cold War between the
United States and the Soviet Union.
 Themes: The novel explores complex questions about freedom, loyalty, love, and power.
 Significance: The novel is noted for capturing the personal and political transformation during a seismic period
in European history.

About Jenny Erpenbeck:

 First German Winner: Jenny Erpenbeck, born and raised in East Berlin, is the first German author to win the
International Booker Prize.
 Previous Recognition:
o Her previous novel, "The End of Days", won the Independent Foreign Fiction Prize in 2015.
o Another work, "Go, Went, Gone", was longlisted for the International Booker Prize in 2018.

About Michael Hofmann:

 Translator: Michael Hofmann, who translated Kairos, is the first male translator to win the International
Booker Prize since its current form was launched in 2016.
 Previous Award: He had earlier won the Independent Foreign Fiction Prize in 1995.

Key Facts About the 2024 Edition:

 Top Recognition: Estonia, Luxembourg, and Germany were ranked as the highest-ranked countries for
environmental protection, according to the EPI 2024 report.

Indian Authors Who Won Booker Prizes:

 VS Naipaul: Won the Booker Prize for In a Free State in 1971.
 Salman Rushdie: Won for Midnight’s Children in 1981.
 Arundhati Roy: Won for The God of Small Things in 1997.
 Kiran Desai: Won for The Inheritance of Loss in 2006.
 Aravind Adiga: Won for The White Tiger in 2008.
 Geetanjali Shree became the first Indian author to win the International Booker Prize in 2022 for her novel
Tomb of Sand (रे त-समाधि), which was translated into English by Daisy Rockwell. The novel, originally written
in Hindi, made history as the first Hindi-language novel to receive the prestigious award.

Difference Between Booker Prize and International Booker Prize:

The Booker Prize (formerly known as the Man Booker Prize):
 Established: In 1969.
 Eligibility: Initially, it was open only to Commonwealth nations, Ireland, and Zimbabwe, but in 2014, it was
expanded to include any novel written in English and published in the UK or Ireland.
 Award Focus: It recognizes the best original full-length novel written in English and published in the UK or
Ireland.
 Prize Money: The £50,000 prize is awarded solely to the author of the winning novel.

The International Booker Prize:

 Established: In 2005 as the Man Booker International Prize, it was restructured in 2016 to its current format.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 257 of 348

 1

 Eligibility: It is awarded annually for fiction translated into English and published in the UK or Ireland. Both
the author and the translator are recognized, reflecting the importance of translation in bringing global
literature to an English-speaking audience.
 Award Focus: The prize honors long-form fiction from around the world, recognizing works originally written
in any language but translated into English.
 Prize Money: The £50,000 prize is split equally between the author and the translator.
 Panel: The judging panel for 2024 was chaired by artist and author Edmund de Waal.

Evolution of the Prizes:

1. Booker Prize Evolution:
o 1969: Established as the Booker Prize for novels written by authors from the Commonwealth, Ireland, and
Zimbabwe.
o 2014: Opened eligibility to all novels written in English and published in the UK or Ireland, regardless of
the author’s nationality.
2. International Booker Prize Evolution:
o 2005: Established as the Man Booker International Prize, initially awarded every two years to a body of
work from an author.
o 2016: The prize was restructured to become annual and focused on a single work of fiction translated
into English, with the prize shared between the author and the translator

CYCLONE REMAL
 Impact: Cyclone Remal caused loss of life, power outages, and inundation of coastal areas in Bangladesh and
West Bengal.
 Development: Remal is expected to consolidate and intensify as it moves through a low wind shear zone in
the northern Bay of Bengal.

About Cyclone Remal:

 Type: It is a tropical cyclone formed in the Northern Indian Ocean (Bay of Bengal).
 Name Origin: The name Remal means "sand" in Arabic, and was suggested by Oman.
 Naming Protocol: The naming follows a standard protocol set for cyclones in the Bay of Bengal and Arabian
Sea.

Reasons Behind Cyclone Remal’s Formation:

 Sea Surface Warming: Warming of sea surface temperatures (above 27°C) provides energy for the cyclone to
develop and intensify.
 Low Wind Shear: Cyclones develop in areas with low wind shear, allowing them to organize and strengthen
without interference.
 Moist Atmosphere: A moist atmosphere facilitates condensation, which releases energy that fuels the cyclone.
 Atmospheric Instability: Rising warm, moist air creates atmospheric instability, forming clouds and releasing
the energy that powers cyclones.

Naming of Cyclones in the North Indian Ocean:

 Panel on Tropical Cyclones (PTC): Formed by the World Meteorological Organization (WMO) in 1972,
initially consisting of 8 member countries (Bangladesh, India, Maldives, Myanmar, Pakistan, Sri Lanka, Oman,
Thailand).
 Cyclone Naming: The PTC decided to assign names to tropical cyclones in the Bay of Bengal and Arabian Sea
in 2000, and the naming system started in 2004.
 Expanded Panel: In 2018, the PTC expanded to include Iran, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, UAE, and Yemen.
 Current Naming List: A list of 169 cyclone names (13 suggestions from each country) was released in April
2020.

Guiding Principles for Cyclone Naming:

 Neutrality: Names should be neutral, without political, religious, cultural, or gender bias.
 Sensitivity: Names should not hurt the sentiments of people globally.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 258 of 348
 1

 Respectful Tone: Names should be short, easy to pronounce, and not offensive or rude.
 Length Limit: Cyclone names should not exceed eight letters.

Impact of Cyclone Remal:

 Destruction and Disruption: Cyclone Remal caused significant damage to coastal areas in India and
Bangladesh, disrupting normal life and causing flooding.

About Cyclones:
 Cyclone Definition: A cyclone is a large air mass that rotates around a central low-pressure area.
o Northern Hemisphere: Cyclones rotate counterclockwise.
o Southern Hemisphere: Cyclones rotate clockwise.
 Required Conditions for Cyclone Formation:
o Sea Surface Temperature: Above 27°C.
o Coriolis Effect: Essential for creating a cyclonic vortex.
o Low Vertical Wind Shear: Allows the cyclone to organize and grow.
o Latent Heat: Provides energy for the storm.
o Upper-Level Divergence: Supports cyclone development above sea level.

NAGI AND NAKTI BIRD SANCTUARIES - NEW RAMSAR SITES:

 Recognition: On World Environment Day (5 June 2024), the Nagi and Nakti Bird Sanctuaries in Bihar were
recognized as wetlands of international importance under the Ramsar Convention.
 Location: Both sanctuaries are located in the Jhajha forest range of Jamui district, Bihar.
 Total Ramsar Sites in India: This recognition brings the total number of Ramsar Sites in India to 82.
 Global Ramsar Sites:
o United Kingdom has the highest number with 175 sites.
o Mexico follows with 144 sites.
o India and China are tied for third with 82 Ramsar Sites each.

Key Features of Nagi and Nakti Bird Sanctuaries:

Feature Nagi Bird Sanctuary Nakti Bird Sanctuary
Type of Wetland Man-made Man-made
Created after the construction of Nakti Dam
Created after the construction of Nagi Dam
Formation on the Nakti River (a tributary of the Koel
on the Nagi River
River)
Location Jamui District, Bihar Jamui District, Bihar
Recognition as
In 1984 In 1984
Bird Sanctuary
Over 150 species of birds, mammals, fish,
Biodiversity Similar biodiversity with notable species
aquatic plants, reptiles, and amphibians
Hosts endangered species like the Indian
Baer’s Pochard (Critically Endangered),
Important Species Elephant, native Catfish, and Red-Crested
Steppe Eagle, and Bar-headed Goose
Pochard

About the Ramsar Convention:

 Treaty Origin: The Ramsar Convention is an international treaty signed in 1971 in Ramsar, Iran, under the
auspices of UNESCO, aimed at conserving wetlands of international importance.
 India’s Participation: The convention came into force in India on 1st February 1982.
 Montreux Record: A register of Ramsar Sites where changes in ecological character have occurred or are
likely to occur due to human interference, technological developments, or pollution.

Importance of Wetlands:
 Biodiversity Conservation: Wetlands support a wide range of plant and animal species, many of which are
threatened or endangered.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 259 of 348

 1

 Water Cycle Regulation: Wetlands play a crucial role in regulating water cycles.
 Climate Change Mitigation: They help store carbon, reduce flood risk, and improve water quality.

India’s Initiatives for Wetlands Conservation:

 Wetlands (Conservation and Management) Rules, 2017: Legal framework for wetland management and
protection.
 National Plan for Conservation of Aquatic Ecosystems (NPCA): Aimed at conserving and managing wetlands
and lakes in India.
 Amrit Dharohar Capacity Building Scheme: Focuses on enhancing the capacity of wetland managers and
stakeholders.
 National Wetland Conservation Programme (NWCP): Launched in 1985 to address threats to vulnerable
wetland ecosystems and enhance their conservation efforts.

Additional Information:
 World Wetlands Day: Celebrated globally on 2nd February each year.
 Kanwar Lake: Bihar’s first Ramsar site, designated in 2020 and located in Begusarai district.

SUPREME COURT'S JUDGEMENT ON SUB-CLASSIFICATION OF SCS:

 Recent Ruling: The Supreme Court recently in State of Punjab v Davinder Singh, upheld that states have the
authority to subdivide reserved category groups based on varying levels of backwardness to extend
reservation benefits.
 Overturned Precedent: This ruling overturns the 2004 decision in EV Chinnaiah vs State of Andhra
Pradesh, which held that sub-classification of SC/ST groups was not permissible, treating them as a
"homogeneous class."

Background on Sub-Categorisation of Scheduled Castes:

 Article 341 of the Constitution: Allows the President of India to notify SC groups through a public
notification, identifying those suffering from historical injustice due to untouchability.
 Reservation Quota: SC groups are granted 15% reservation in education and public employment.

Key Developments in Sub-Categorisation of SCs:

1. Punjab Government's Sub-Categorisation (1975):
o Punjab divided its 25% SC reservation into two parts:
 Reserved for Balmiki and Mazhbi Sikh communities (the most backward communities).
 Other SC communities.
2. Justice Ramachandran Commission (1996):
o Formed by the Andhra Pradesh Government to propose the sub-categorisation of SCs based on the varying
levels of backwardness.
3. Andhra Pradesh Scheduled Castes (Rationalisation of Reservations) Act, 2000:
o Aimed to distribute reservation benefits across various SC communities in the state.
4. EV Chinnaiah Case (2004):
o The Supreme Court struck down Andhra Pradesh’s sub-categorisation, holding that SCs must be treated as
a single homogenous group.
5. Davinder Singh vs State of Punjab (2014):
o The Supreme Court referred the appeal regarding the sub-classification to a five-judge constitution bench,
asking whether the EV Chinnaiah ruling required reconsideration.
6. Jarnail Singh vs Lachhmi Narain Gupta (2018):
o The Supreme Court upheld the concept of “creamy layer” within SCs, applying income ceilings for those
eligible for reservation.

Crucial Insights from the Supreme Court’s Recent Judgement:

1. Sub-Categorisation as Constitutional Requirement:

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 260 of 348

 1

o The court ruled that sub-classification is essential to ensure substantive equality among SC
communities, as some groups are more socially backward than others.
2. Legal Fiction of Presidential List: The Presidential list of SCs is a “legal fiction”, designed to provide benefits
to the listed communities. This does not imply that there are no internal differences among SC groups.
3. Power of States: The states are permitted to identify different degrees of social backwardness and provide
special provisions like reservation under Articles 15(4) and 16(4) of the Constitution.
4. Yardstick for Sub-Classification: States must provide empirical evidence to justify sub-categorisation and
demonstrate the need for wider protections.
5. Concept of “Creamy Layer” for SCs and STs: One opinion, by Justice Gavai, suggested applying the creamy
layer concept for SCs and STs, as is already done for Other Backward Classes (OBCs). This principle ensures
that reservation benefits reach those in need within these communities.
6. Concerns Raised on 'Creamy Layer' Concept: Experts questioned why the court delved into the creamy layer
issue for SCs/STs, as the primary matter before the court was sub-classification.

Questions Answered by the Supreme Court of India:

1. Is Sub-Classification of SCs Permissible?
o Decision: Yes, sub-classification is allowed if there is a rational principle that connects the sub-
classification with the goal of achieving substantive equality.
2. Are Scheduled Castes Homogenous?
o Decision: No, SCs are not homogenous; empirical evidence shows inequality within the SCs.
3. Does Article 341 Create a Homogenous Class via Legal Fiction?
o Decision: No, the inclusion in the Presidential list does not automatically make SCs a uniform group.
Article 341 creates a legal fiction only for the purpose of identifying SCs.
4. Can States Create Sub-Classifications Within Reserved Categories?
o Decision: Yes, states can create sub-classifications if based on quantifiable data regarding backwardness
and representation in public services.
o However, the sub-classification must be done fairly and must not exclude any SC community from the
benefits of reservation.

Caste and Sub-Caste System in India:

 Caste System: A hierarchical system in India dividing people based on occupation and social roles into
Brahmins, Kshatriyas, Vaishyas, Shudras, and outcastes.
 Sub-Castes: There are several sub-castes within each category, formed based on regional, occupational, or
social distinctions.

About Sub-Classification of SC and ST:

 Sub-Classification: It refers to creating sub-groups within SCs and STs to ensure equitable distribution of
reservation benefits, especially targeting the most backward groups.
 Need: States argue that some groups within the SC list are underrepresented, and creating sub-quotas will
ensure fair distribution of benefits.
 Demand: Some communities have sought recognition and special privileges based on their distinct
characteristics and socio-economic status.

Facts Related to SCs and STs:

 Article 341 of the Constitution: Empowers the President of India to designate certain castes, races, or tribes
as Scheduled Castes (SCs) based on their history of suffering due to untouchability.
 Census 2011:
o Scheduled Castes (SCs) constitute approximately 16.6% of India’s total population.
o Scheduled Tribes (STs) make up around 8.6% of the population.
 Reservation: SC groups are collectively entitled to 15% reservation in education and public employment.
1. Underrepresentation of Some SC Groups: Over time, certain SC groups have been underrepresented
compared to others. States have attempted to extend additional protections to these marginalized groups,
but such efforts often faced judicial scrutiny.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 261 of 348

 1

Related Constitutional Provisions:

1. Article 14: Guarantees equality before the law.
2. Article 15(4): Empowers the state to make special provisions for the advancement of socially and
educationally backward classes or for the Scheduled Castes.
3. Article 16(4), 16(4A), and 16(4B): Provide for reservation in posts and services for backward classes,
including SCs and STs.

States and Communities Affected:

1. Maharashtra:
o Mahar Community: A politically active and relatively literate SC community in Maharashtra. Notably, Dr.
B.R. Ambedkar, the architect of the Indian Constitution, belonged to the Mahar community.
o Matang Community: The second-largest SC community in Maharashtra, predominantly Hindu.
o Tribes: Gond and Bhil are the largest tribes in the state.
2. Rajasthan:
o Meghwal Community: The largest SC community in Rajasthan, with a significant presence, especially in
border districts.
o Bairwa and Jatav Communities: Predominantly found in eastern Rajasthan.
o Meena Tribe: A politically influential tribe, well-represented in the state’s police and bureaucracy.
o Bhil Tribe: Some Bhils do not identify as Hindus and have rallied behind a new tribal party.
3. Odisha:
o Khond Tribe: The numerically largest tribe in Odisha, mainly residing in the southern districts.
o Santal Tribe: The second-largest tribal group in the state, followed by the Gonds.
o SC Communities: The Pan community is a dominant SC group in Odisha.
4. Other States Affected:
o Chhattisgarh, Madhya Pradesh, West Bengal, Gujarat, Assam, Tripura, Uttarakhand, and others are also
significantly affected by issues related to SC and ST representation.

BS-VI NORMS
The Supreme Court has directed the Union government to formulate a national policy to phase out heavy-duty
diesel vehicles (like trucks and trailers) and replace them with BS-VI vehicles to reduce pollution.

About BS-VI Norms:

 Bharat Stage (BS) Emission Standards: These standards regulate the emission of air pollutants from internal
combustion engines and spark-ignition engines used in motor vehicles.
 Adoption: India has adopted the BS emission standards since 2000, which are modeled after the European
Union norms.
 BS Evolution:
o The first emission norms, named India 2000, were introduced in 2000.
o BS2 and BS3 were enforced in 2005 and 2010, respectively.
o BS4 norms came into effect in 2017 with stricter emission controls.
 Emission Control: These norms regulate tailpipe emissions of pollutants such as particulate matter (PM),
sulfur oxides (SOx), nitrogen oxides (NOx), carbon monoxide (CO), and hydrocarbons.

Who Sets BS Standards?

 Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB): The CPCB under the Ministry of Environment, Forests, and
Climate Change sets the standards and timelines for implementation.
Leapfrogging to BS-VI:
 April 2020 Transition: India moved directly from BS-IV to BS-VI standards on April 1, 2020.
 Applicability: The BS-VI norms apply to all cars, trucks, buses, three-wheelers, and two-wheelers
(motorcycles, scooters, mopeds).
o These norms do not apply to off-highway equipment such as tractors, back-hoe loaders, and excavators.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 262 of 348

 1

Difference Between BS-IV and BS-VI:

1. Emission Standards: Both BS-IV and BS-VI are emission norms that set the maximum permissible levels for
pollutants emitted by vehicle exhausts.
2. Sulphur Content: The primary difference lies in the sulphur content in the fuel:
o BS-IV fuel: Contains 50 parts per million (ppm) of sulphur.
o BS-VI fuel: Contains 10 ppm of sulphur.
o The lower sulphur content in BS-VI fuel makes it less polluting.
3. Harmful Emissions: BS-VI engines emit significantly less harmful pollutants compared to BS-IV engines.
Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB):
 Constitution: The CPCB is a statutory body that was constituted in September 1974 under the Water
(Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974.
 Additional Powers: Later, the CPCB was also given powers under the Air (Prevention and Control of
Pollution) Act, 1981.
Key Responsibilities of CPCB:
 Monitor Pollution: CPCB regularly monitors the levels of water and air pollution across the country.
 Set Standards: The board is responsible for setting pollution control standards for water and air quality.
 Research and Development: It conducts research on pollution control technologies and advises the
government on environmental issues.
 Enforcement: CPCB ensures that pollution control measures are implemented effectively and works with state
pollution control boards to enforce compliance.

SUPREME COURT ON KOLKATA RAPE CASE

 A bench of Chief Justice of India D Y Chandrachud, Justice J B Pardiwala, and Justice Manoj Misra took suo
motu cognizance of the alleged rape and murder of a doctor at a medical college in Kolkata.
 The court constituted a National Task Force (NTF) to address issues related to the safety of medical
professionals.
Facts of the Case:
 Incident Date: On 9th August 2024, a 31-year-old postgraduate doctor was murdered and allegedly raped
during a 36-hour duty shift inside the hospital's seminar room.
 Protests and Reactions: The incident sparked nationwide protests by doctors' associations, student bodies,
and civic groups.
o On 15th August 2024, a mob vandalized the hospital's Emergency Ward and other departments.
o Indian Medical Association (IMA) called for a nationwide 24-hour strike (except for emergency services)
on 17th August 2024.
 Investigation: On 13th August 2024, the Calcutta High Court ordered the Central Bureau of Investigation
(CBI) to take over the investigation.
Court’s Observations:
1. Privacy and Dignity Concerns: The court expressed concern about the circulation of the victim’s name,
photographs, and video clips in the media, stating that it violated the victim’s dignity.
2. Equality Rights of Women: The court emphasized the need to ensure safe working conditions for women and
stated that protecting the safety and well-being of doctors is of national interest.
3. Handling of the Case: The court criticized the initial handling of the case, noting delays in allowing the parents
to see the body and the late registration of the FIR.
4. Hospital Security and Vandalism: The court questioned the state’s inability to prevent vandalism,
expressing disbelief that a mob of 7,000 people could gather without the knowledge of the police.
5. Security Measures Ordered: The court directed the Central Industrial Security Force (CISF) to provide
security for the hospital and hostel premises.
6. Investigation Status: The CBI and State of West Bengal were asked to submit status reports on the case by
22nd August 2024.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 263 of 348

 1

Constitution of National Task Force (NTF):

The court constituted a National Task Force (NTF), composed of medical professionals and ex-officio members,
to recommend measures for the safety, working conditions, and well-being of medical professionals.
1. Focus Areas of the NTF:
o Prevention of violence, including gender-based violence, against medical professionals.
o Creation of an enforceable national protocol ensuring dignified and safe working conditions.
2. Tasks for NTF:
o The NTF was instructed to formulate an action plan addressing:
 Security measures and infrastructural development.
 Employment of social workers and initiation of training programs.
 Prevention of sexual violence.
3. Reporting Timeline:
o The NTF must submit an interim report within three weeks and a final report within two months.
o All state governments and the central government were directed to collect and submit data on hospital
security and facilities within one month.

BANGLADESH PROTESTS
Bangladesh Prime Minister Sheikh Hasina, who had been in power for the past 15 years, resigned and fled the
country after weeks of deadly unrest in which more than 300 people have been killed.

1. Protests and Unrest:

o Bangladesh is currently experiencing widespread protests and unrest, which have intensified following
Sheikh Hasina’s resignation. These protests, initially sparked by issues surrounding job quotas and the
government's authoritarian policies, have grown into the largest demonstrations seen since her
government began in 2008.
o The unrest is also attributed to the suppression of opposition and dissatisfaction with Hasina's approach
to governance, which has further fueled public discontent.
2. Economic Challenges:
o Bangladesh is already grappling with economic recovery challenges post-Covid-19, and Hasina's
departure has raised concerns about the nation's ability to stabilize its economy. Rising inflation and
currency depreciation have put significant pressure on Bangladesh’s economy, complicating the recovery
process.
o The textile sector, which is a major contributor to Bangladesh’s export revenue, is facing significant
disruptions due to the unrest, severely impacting supply chains, production schedules, and movement of
goods.
3. Political Landscape:
o Following the power vacuum created by Sheikh Hasina's exit, the Bangladesh Army is set to form an
interim government. This highlights the volatile and uncertain nature of the political landscape in the
country.
o A potential return of radical Islamist forces could pose a serious threat to Bangladesh's secular
governance, creating instability both within the country and the broader South Asian region.
4. Disruption in Export Flow:
o The garment sector, a crucial pillar of Bangladesh's economy, accounting for 7.9% of global trade in
clothing and generating around USD 45 billion annually, is significantly affected by the current unrest. The
industry employs over four million workers and represents 85% of the country’s merchandise exports.
o International buyers from the European Union, the UK, and the US, where Bangladesh holds a significant
market share (10% in the US), are reconsidering their supply chains due to the uncertainties.
5. Opportunity for India:
o The instability in Bangladesh's textile sector presents an opportunity for India. Experts suggest that India
could benefit if a portion of Bangladesh’s displaced export orders are redirected to Indian production
hubs such as Tiruppur.
o If India manages to capture 10-11% of Bangladesh’s textile exports, the Indian textile industry could
see an additional USD 300-400 million in monthly business.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 264 of 348

 1

Background of Quota System:

 1972 Notification: After Bangladesh's independence, 30% of government and semi-government jobs were
reserved for freedom fighters, with 10% reserved for women.
 Frozen Quota: After the 1975 assassination of Sheikh Mujibur Rahman, the quota was largely inactive until
Sheikh Hasina became Prime Minister in 1996 and extended the quota benefits to the children and later
grandchildren of freedom fighters.
 2018 Quota Withdrawal: The Hasina government scrapped the quotas in 2018 ahead of elections, but this
was challenged in court. On June 5, 2024, the High Court restored the 30% quota, sparking nationwide
protests.

Recent Court Ruling:

1. Bangladesh’s Constitution:
o Article 29(1) guarantees equality of opportunity in public employment. However, Article 29(3)(a) allows
for special provisions for backward sections of society, providing the legal basis for the job quota system.
2. High Court Ruling: On June 5, 2024, the High Court reinstated the 30% quota for freedom fighters’
descendants, calling the government’s 2018 decision to eliminate it arbitrary. The ruling led to immediate
protests, and the government’s appeal to the Supreme Court resulted in a stay, with a final hearing set for August
7, 2024.
>

 Supreme Court Ruling: On July 21, 2024, the Appellate Division of the Supreme Court ruled to reduce
the quota to 5%, dismissing the High Court ruling and addressing the protests’ core demand. However, the
decision to keep quotas for freedom fighters and minority groups remains contentious among protesters.

Impact of Quota System on the Economy and Employment:

1. Job Market: Government jobs are highly coveted in Bangladesh for their stability and income security. However,
the country faces a significant employment crisis, with 5 lakh vacant government posts despite high demand.
2. Youth Unemployment: More than two-thirds of Bangladesh’s 170 million population are of working age (15-
64), with a large proportion of the population entering the job market every year. The existing 56% reservation
system (30% for freedom fighters, 10% for women, 5% for tribal communities, 1% for disabled individuals)
complicates the already strained employment sector.

India-Bangladesh Relations During Sheikh Hasina's Tenure (2009–2024)

Strengthening Bilateral Ties:
 Sheikh Hasina’s return to power in 2009 marked a significant boost in India-Bangladesh relations. From the
outset, Hasina made clear her intention to strengthen ties with India.
 Security Cooperation: Hasina's government took decisive action against terror groups operating out of
Bangladesh, which had previously posed a threat to India. Over 20 wanted terrorists were extradited to India,
and terror camps along the India-Bangladesh border were dismantled.
 Religious radicalization was another key area where Hasina focused, helping curb extremist elements within
Bangladesh. This helped bolster security in both nations.

Resolving Border Disputes:

 One of the most significant milestones in India-Bangladesh relations during her tenure was the 2015 Land
Boundary Agreement. This historic accord resolved the long-standing border tensions between the two
nations, particularly concerning enclaves along the India-Bangladesh boundary.
 Hasina also addressed illegal immigration, a contentious issue that had resulted in clashes such as the 2001 BDR-
BSF incident, which left 15 people dead.

Economic Cooperation:
 India extended significant support to Bangladesh through trade concessions, Lines of Credit (LoCs), and
numerous connectivity projects. These initiatives helped in transforming Bangladesh's economy, enabling it to
achieve impressive economic growth and development.
 Bilateral trade saw a substantial boost, with India granting duty-free access to Bangladesh for most products
under the South Asian Free Trade Area (SAFTA) agreement.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 265 of 348

 1

India’s Role in Development:

 Under both Manmohan Singh and Narendra Modi’s governments, India remained a steadfast partner,
providing low-interest loans and supporting infrastructure development in Bangladesh. India extended three
lines of credit worth $8 billion for road, rail, shipping, and port development.
 During Hasina’s tenure, Bangladesh’s economy saw rapid development, with improved human development
indices, outpacing many neighboring countries.

Strategic Cooperation:
 Energy cooperation also strengthened, with Bangladesh importing electricity from India and entering power
deals such as those with the Adani group.
 Hasina supported India's stance on key geopolitical issues, such as boycotting SAARC summits due to
Pakistan's involvement in terrorism and maintaining strong ties despite controversial policies like the
Citizenship Amendment Act (CAA).

Concerns After Hasina’s Ouster:

 With Sheikh Hasina’s resignation, there is uncertainty about the future of India-Bangladesh relations. Many
agreements, including recent energy deals, may be re-evaluated by the new regime. This creates concerns for
India’s strategic connectivity projects and economic investments in Bangladesh.

INDIA-BANGLADESH RELATIONS
 Historical Links: India was the first country to recognize Bangladesh as an independent state after its
liberation from Pakistan in December 1971. Diplomatic ties were established immediately, with relations built
on shared civilizational, cultural, social, and economic links.
 Strategic Importance: Bangladesh's geographical location as India's eastern neighbor makes it strategically
vital, offering access to the Bay of Bengal and acting as a gateway for India's connectivity and trade with
Southeast Asia.

Economic Cooperation
 Trade Relations: Bangladesh is India’s largest trading partner in the subcontinent. India's exports to
Bangladesh stood at USD 8 billion from April to November 2022.
 Waterway Utilization: India has enabled the export of cargo from Inland Container Depots (ICDs) to
Bangladesh via inland waterways. This transshipment of cargo to third countries enhances trade routes.
 Duty-Free Quota Access: Since 2011, India has provided duty-free, quota-free access to Bangladesh on all
products except tobacco and alcohol, under the South Asian Free Trade Area (SAFTA) agreement.
 Trade in Rupees: In July 2023, India and Bangladesh initiated trade in Indian rupees, reducing dependence on
the US dollar and boosting regional trade.
 Tourism: According to the India Tourism Statistics Report 2022, Bangladesh was the second-largest source
of tourists to India in 2021.

Defence Cooperation
 Shared Border: India and Bangladesh share a 4096.7 km land border, the longest land boundary India has
with any neighbor. Bordering states include Assam, West Bengal, Mizoram, Meghalaya, and Tripura.
 Joint Exercises: The countries conduct joint military exercises such as Exercise Sampriti (Army) and Exercise
Bongosagar (Navy).

Energy and Connectivity

 India-Bangladesh Friendship Pipeline: A crucial pipeline connects Siliguri in West Bengal to Parbatipur in
Bangladesh, capable of transporting one million Metric Tonnes Per Annum (MMTPA) of high-speed diesel to
Bangladesh.
 Infrastructure Development: Joint infrastructure projects include the Akhaura-Agartala rail link and the
Maitri Setu (Friendship Bridge), enhancing connectivity between the two nations.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 266 of 348

 1

Multilateral Cooperation
 Regional Engagement: India and Bangladesh are actively involved in regional cooperation through forums like
SAARC, BIMSTEC, and the Indian Ocean Rim Association (IORA), promoting collaboration on trade, security,
and development.

Key Issues Between India and Bangladesh

1. Transboundary River Water Sharing: India and Bangladesh share 54 rivers, but only two treaties have been
signed—the Ganga Waters Treaty and the Kushiyara River Treaty. Negotiations over other rivers like Teesta
remain unresolved.
2. Illegal Migration: Illegal migration from Bangladesh to India remains a pressing concern, particularly in Indian
border states. The influx of Rohingya refugees through Bangladesh has exacerbated the issue.
3. Drug Smuggling and Trafficking: Cross-border drug smuggling and human trafficking are prevalent, affecting
both nations' security and socio-economic stability.
4. Growing Chinese Influence: Bangladesh's partnership with China's Belt and Road Initiative (BRI) poses
potential strategic challenges for India, as China increases its economic presence in the region.
Sheikh Mujibur Rahman: The Founding Father of Bangladesh
 Early Life: Sheikh Mujibur Rahman, born on March 17, 1920, in Tungipara, Bengal (then part of British India),
is often called the "Father of the Nation" of Bangladesh. He was instrumental in leading Bangladesh to
independence.
 Political Journey: Mujibur Rahman began his political career as an active member of the All India Muslim
Students Federation in the 1940s, and later the Awami League, founded in 1949. He quickly rose through the
ranks, focusing on the rights of Bengali-speaking people.
 Six-Point Movement (1966): Mujib became the leader of East Pakistan's autonomy movement, introducing the
Six-Point Movement, which sought greater autonomy for East Pakistan (now Bangladesh) from West Pakistan.
 1970 General Elections: Mujib's Awami League won a landslide victory in the 1970 Pakistani general
election, securing 167 of the 169 seats in East Pakistan.
 This victory provided the mandate to implement the Six-Point Plan. However, the West Pakistani leadership
refused to transfer power, which triggered political unrest.
 Liberation War (1971): On March 7, 1971, Mujib made his historic speech in Dhaka, calling for civil
disobedience and preparation for independence. The Bangladesh Liberation War broke out soon after, and
Bangladesh declared independence on March 26, 1971.
 After nine months of war, Bangladesh gained independence on December 16, 1971, with Mujib becoming the
first Prime Minister of the new nation.
 Post-Independence Leadership: As the Prime Minister (1972-1975), Mujib focused on rebuilding the war-
torn country. He introduced a secular, socialist constitution, aiming to modernize Bangladesh. However,
economic hardships, political instability, and opposition culminated in Mujib declaring one-party rule in 1975.
 Assassination: On August 15, 1975, Mujib and most of his family members were assassinated in a military coup,
leaving a lasting mark on Bangladesh's political history.

Awami League: The Oldest Political Party in Bangladesh

 Foundation: The Awami League was founded in 1949 by Huseyn Shaheed Suhrawardy and others in Dhaka,
originally to champion the cause of East Pakistan's autonomy.
 Mujib’s Leadership: Mujibur Rahman took leadership of the party in the 1960s and transformed it into the voice
of the Bengali people's struggle for rights and independence. His Six-Point Plan became the blueprint for the
autonomy movement, leading to the liberation of Bangladesh in 1971.
 Post-Independence Politics: After Mujib's assassination in 1975, the Awami League faced political turmoil and
was briefly marginalized during military rule. However, in the 1990s, under the leadership of Mujib’s daughter,
Sheikh Hasina, the party was revived.
 Sheikh Hasina’s Tenure: Sheikh Hasina, who became the party's leader in 1981, has served as Prime Minister
of Bangladesh multiple times (1996-2001, 2009-present). Under her leadership, the Awami League has focused
on economic development, infrastructure projects, and strengthening ties with neighboring India.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 267 of 348

 1

 Ideology: The Awami League is traditionally seen as secular and socialist. Over time, it has evolved into a more
centrist party, emphasizing economic growth, education, and regional cooperation.

RESOLVE TIBET ACT, 2024

 Passed by: US Congress in June 2024.
 Third Major Legislation: Follows the Tibetan Policy Act (2002) and the Tibetan Policy & Support Act
(2020).
 Objective: Promote a peaceful resolution to the Tibet-China dispute through dialogue as per international law
and the UN Charter.

Key Provisions of the Resolve Tibet Act:

1. Strengthens US Position on Tibet: Aims to pressure China into resuming negotiations with the Dalai Lama or
his democratically elected representatives, without preconditions.
2. Empowers US Diplomacy: The US will actively counter Chinese disinformation about Tibet, including false
narratives on its history, culture, and religion.
3. Self-determination & Human Rights: The Act emphasizes the Tibetan people's right to self-determination
and human rights, citing China's obligations under international human rights treaties.
4. Recognition of Tibetan Identity: Focuses on the distinct historical, cultural, religious, and linguistic
identity of the Tibetan people.
5. Amends the TPA (2002): Expands the definition of the Tibetan Autonomous Region (TAR) geographically to
include all areas historically inhabited by Tibetans.

Differences with Previous Acts:

 Tibetan Policy Act (2002): Recognized China’s claim over Tibet and encouraged dialogue with the Dalai Lama
as a spiritual leader.
 Tibetan Policy & Support Act (2020): Pushed for constructive dialogue but did not directly challenge China’s
sovereignty claims over Tibet.
 Resolve Tibet Act (2024): Boldly challenges China’s claim over Tibet, urging unconditional talks that respect
Tibetan self-determination.

India’s Relations with Tibet:

1. Historical Relations: India maintained close ties with Tibet through the spread of Buddhism, and the two
regions share deep cultural and religious links.
2. Sino-Indian Border Disputes: The Sino-Indian border dispute in regions like Ladakh and Arunachal Pradesh
has been influenced by the historical status of Tibet.
3. India’s Official Stance: Since the Panchsheel Agreement (1954), India has recognized Tibet as part of China
but continues to host the Dalai Lama and the Tibetan government-in-exile.
4. Post-1959: India granted asylum to the Dalai Lama after the failed Tibetan uprising against Chinese rule in
1959.

Background of the China-Tibet Dispute:

1. Tibet’s Claims to Independence: Tibet enjoyed de facto independence between 1913-1951, following the
collapse of the Qing dynasty.
2. Chinese Invasion (1951): The People's Liberation Army (PLA) invaded Tibet in 1951, forcing the Tibetan
leaders to sign the Seventeen Point Agreement, which Tibetans view as coerced and invalid.
3. 1959 Uprising: The 1959 revolt against Chinese rule led to the Dalai Lama’s escape to India and the formation
of a Tibetan government-in-exile.
4. Current Situation: China maintains strict control over Tibet, with significant restrictions on freedom of speech,
religion, and press, and has been accused of engaging in cultural genocide.

Dalai Lama and Tibetan Leadership:

1. Spiritual Tradition: The Dalai Lama is a spiritual leader in the Gelugpa tradition of Tibetan Buddhism,
regarded as the Bodhisattva of Compassion.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 268 of 348

 1

2. Reincarnation Process: A reincarnation search follows the death of a Dalai Lama, usually conducted by senior
Tibetan monks to find the next spiritual leader.
3. Current Dalai Lama: Tenzin Gyatso, the 14th Dalai Lama, has hinted that he may not reincarnate under Chinese
rule.
o Tenzin Gyatso was born on July 6, 1935, in Taktser, a small village in northeastern Tibet.
o He was recognized as the 14th Dalai Lama at the age of 2, identified through traditional Tibetan practices
of reincarnation.In 1959, following the Tibetan uprising against Chinese rule, the Dalai Lama fled to India
and established a government-in-exile.
o Tenzin Gyatso is known for his promotion of non-violence and compassion as central principles of his
leadership and spiritual teachings.
o He was awarded the Nobel Peace Prize in 1989 for his peaceful efforts in the struggle for Tibetan autonomy.
o In recent years, Tenzin Gyatso has suggested that he may not reincarnate or could do so outside of
Chinese-controlled Tibet.
o The Dalai Lama lives in Dharamshala, India, where he continues to serve as the spiritual leader of Tibetans
in exile.

Relevance of the Tibet Issue to India:

1. Geopolitical Implications: Tibet’s situation impacts India’s border security and its relationship with China,
especially regarding disputed territories like Arunachal Pradesh.
2. Diplomatic Balance: India has historically supported the Tibetan exiles but carefully balances its diplomatic
relations with China.
3. Strategic Importance: Tibet holds significant strategic importance in the context of Sino-Indian tensions,
especially after recent border clashes.

23RD SCO SUMMIT IN PAKISTAN

Key Details:
 Event: 23rd SCO Council of Heads of Government (CHG)
 Date: October 16, 2024
 Location: Islamabad, Pakistan
 Indian Representation: External Affairs Minister S. Jaishankar
 Significance: This was the first visit by an Indian Foreign Minister to Pakistan in 9 years, despite ongoing
tensions between the two nations.
 The summit focused on the bloc’s trade and economic agenda.
Shanghai Cooperation Organisation (SCO):
 Established: June 2001, in Shanghai, China.
 Original Members: Kazakhstan, China, Kyrgyzstan, Russia, Tajikistan. These countries had formed the Shanghai
Five in 1996 to address regional security and border issues following the Soviet Union’s dissolution.
 Expanded Membership: In 2001, Uzbekistan joined, and the SCO was formally established, promoting regional
cooperation under the principles of the Shanghai Spirit.
 Current Membership:
o 10 Member States: China, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Russia, Tajikistan, Uzbekistan, India, Pakistan, Iran
(joined in 2023), and Belarus (joined in 2024).
o 2 Observer Members: Afghanistan, Mongolia.
 Headquarters:
o SCO Secretariat: Beijing, China.
o Executive Committee of the Regional Anti-Terrorist Structure (RATS): Tashkent, Uzbekistan.
 Official Languages: Chinese and Russian.

SCO's Organisational Structure:

1. Heads of State Council (HSC): The highest decision-making body, meets annually to address all important
matters of the organization.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 269 of 348

 1

2. Heads of Government Council (CHG): The second highest body, focusing on multilateral cooperation, economic
strategies, and budget approval.
3. Other Meetings: Include gatherings on foreign affairs, national defense, security, economy, and trade.
4. Permanent Bodies:
o SCO Secretariat in Beijing.
o RATS in Tashkent.

Key Highlights of EAM Jaishankar's Address:

1. Emphasis on Trust and Cooperation: Subtle Reference to China and Pakistan: Jaishankar emphasized the
importance of trust and good neighborly relations, hinting at issues related to cross-border terrorism and
projects like the China-Pakistan Economic Corridor (CPEC), which India perceives as a violation of its
territorial integrity.
2. Challenges of Terrorism, Separatism, and Extremism: He reiterated that these three issues hinder regional
peace, trade, and development, stressing the need for collective action.
3. Multilateralism and Reform: Jaishankar called for reformed multilateralism in global institutions, advocating
for the United Nations Security Council (UNSC) reforms and India’s bid for a permanent seat.
4. Regional Cooperation and Connectivity Initiatives: He spoke about India’s support for regional cooperation
through initiatives like the International Solar Alliance, Mission LiFE, and digital public infrastructure,
aiming for economic cooperation based on mutual respect and sovereignty.
5. Congratulating Pakistan: Jaishankar congratulated Pakistan for its SCO presidency and stressed unity to tackle
global challenges such as economic disruptions, climate change, and health crises.
India-Pakistan Diplomatic Developments:
 First India-Pakistan Ministerial Talks in 9 Years: S. Jaishankar and Pakistani Finance Minister Muhammad
Ishaq Dar held direct talks, marking a significant diplomatic development since 2015.
 Discussion on Resuming Cricketing Ties: They discussed the possibility of resuming India-Pakistan cricket
matches, specifically India’s participation in the 2025 ICC Champions Trophy, which would be held in Pakistan.
Points of Contention Between India and Pakistan:
1. Revocation of Article 370 (2019):
 Event: In August 2019, India revoked the special status of Jammu and Kashmir by abrogating Article 370 of
the Indian Constitution.
 India's Stance: India views the revocation as an internal matter, aimed at fully integrating Jammu and Kashmir
with the rest of India.
 Pakistan's Response: Pakistan sees this as an illegal annexation of a disputed region and has raised the issue
at various international platforms, including the United Nations.
2. Downgrade in Bilateral Relations:
 Pakistan’s Action: Following the revocation of Article 370, on 7th August 2019, Pakistan unilaterally
downgraded diplomatic relations with India by expelling the Indian High Commissioner and reducing the
diplomatic relationship to the chargé d'affaires level.
 Impact: This significantly strained diplomatic ties, leading to minimal direct engagement between the two
countries.
3. Indus Waters Treaty (IWT):
 Disputes: The Indus Waters Treaty (IWT) has been a source of tension, particularly over India's construction
of the Kishanganga and Ratle hydroelectric projects. Pakistan alleges that these projects violate the terms of
the IWT by impacting water flow.
 India’s Action: In 2023, India requested a review and modification of the IWT, citing changes in the political
and environmental landscape. Pakistan has strongly opposed this move, viewing it as undermining the existing
treaty framework.
4. Limited Trade Relations:
 Pulwama Attack (2019): Following the Pulwama terror attack in February 2019, India revoked Pakistan’s
Most Favoured Nation (MFN) status, which significantly affected trade relations.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 270 of 348

 1

 Impact of Article 370: The revocation of Article 370 further halted bilateral trade between the two countries.
Prior to this, in 2018-19, India exported USD 2.06 billion worth of goods to Pakistan, while imports from
Pakistan stood at USD 0.495 billion.
 Current Situation: Trade between India and Pakistan remains at a standstill due to political tensions and
security concerns.
5. Allegations of Internal Interference:
 Pakistan’s Allegations: Pakistan accuses India of fomenting unrest in its Balochistan province by supporting
separatist movements and interfering in Pakistan’s internal matters.
 India’s Allegations: India, in turn, accuses Pakistan of radicalizing youth in Jammu and Kashmir and
internationalizing the Kashmir issue by raising it at global forums like the UN and OIC (Organisation of Islamic
Cooperation).

PUSHPAK: ISRO’S REUSABLE LAUNCH VEHICLE:

Pushpak is ISRO's ambitious Reusable Launch Vehicle (RLV), developed to reduce the cost of space exploration
and increase sustainability in satellite launches.
 The goal is to create a launch vehicle that can be reused multiple times, similar to aircraft, to make space
missions more affordable.
Recent Development:
 June 23, 2024: ISRO successfully conducted its third Reusable Launch Vehicle Landing Experiment (LEX) at
the Aeronautical Test Range (ATR) in Chitradurga, Karnataka.
 This was the final test in the series, validating several technologies crucial for the RLV's future missions.

Objective:
 Primary Goal: Develop a reusable vehicle that significantly lowers the cost of launching payloads into Low Earth
Orbit (LEO).
 Pushpak aims to bring down the cost per kilogram for payloads, making space missions more accessible.

Design and Development:

 Combines the flexibility of aircraft with the reusability of rockets.
 Incorporates advanced materials, cutting-edge avionics, and innovative propulsion systems to ensure safe
reentry and landing.

Key Features:
 Reusability: Can be used multiple times, unlike conventional expendable rockets.
 Vertical Take-off, Horizontal Landing (VTHL): Pushpak takes off vertically like a rocket and lands horizontally
like an aircraft.
 Advanced Materials: Designed with lightweight and heat-resistant materials to withstand launch and reentry
stresses.
 Autonomous Operations: Equipped with advanced guidance, navigation, and control systems for
autonomous reentry and landing.

Development Phases:
1. Technology Demonstration: Initial testing of key technologies required for reusability.
2. Prototype Testing: Suborbital and orbital test flights to ensure reliability and performance.
3. Operational Deployment: Pushpak will eventually be used for operational missions, launching payloads to
space.

Progress and Milestones:

 RLV-TD Program: ISRO has conducted multiple technology demonstrations under the Reusable Launch
Vehicle-Technology Demonstrator (RLV-TD) program.
 HEX-01 Flight (2016): ISRO successfully tested Hypersonic Flight Experiment (HEX-01) in 2016, focusing on
autonomous navigation, thermal protection, and guidance.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 271 of 348

 1

 Future plans include testing for precise landing technologies, on both land and sea.

Significance and Impact:

 Cost Reduction: Reusability lowers the cost of space missions, opening space access for more nations and
companies.
 Sustainability: Reduces the need for new rockets, minimizing space debris and improving environmental
sustainability.
 Technological Leadership: Pushpak will position ISRO as a leader in reusable launch vehicle technology,
enhancing India’s competitive edge in the space industry.
 Commercial Opportunities: Pushpak’s success can attract international customers seeking affordable and
reliable launch services, and encourage private sector participation.

Types of Reusable Launch Vehicles (RLV):

1. Vertical Takeoff, Vertical Landing (VTVL): Rockets that launch and land vertically (e.g., SpaceX’s Falcon 9).
2. Horizontal Takeoff, Horizontal Landing (HTHL): Spaceplanes that take off and land like aircraft (e.g., NASA’s
Space Shuttle).
3. Vertical Takeoff, Horizontal Landing (VTHL): Rockets that launch vertically and land horizontally (e.g., Space
Shuttle).
4. Horizontal Takeoff, Vertical Landing (HTVL): Emerging concept being explored for specialized missions.

Notable Examples of Reusable Launch Vehicles:

 SpaceX’s Falcon 9: The first orbital-class rocket capable of reuse, setting new standards for cost-effective space
launches.
 Blue Origin’s New Shepard: A suborbital reusable vehicle designed for space tourism and research missions.
 NASA’s Space Shuttle: Pioneered reusable spaceflight, contributing to the construction of the International
Space Station (ISS).

ALL ABOUT INDIAN SPACE RESEARCH ORGANISATION

About ISRO:
 Full Form: Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO)
 Founded: August 15, 1969
 Headquarters: Bengaluru, Karnataka, India
 Parent Organization: Department of Space, which is directly under the Prime Minister of India
 Founding Visionary: Dr. Vikram Sarabhai, considered the father of the Indian space program.

Evolution of ISRO:
 INCOSPAR (Indian National Committee for Space Research) was set up by Dr. Vikram Sarabhai in 1962 under the
Department of Atomic Energy. It laid the groundwork for ISRO’s formation.
 1969: ISRO was established to harness space technology for India’s development.
 1972: The Department of Space was created, and ISRO came under its supervision.
 1975: India's first satellite was launched, Aryabhata.
 1980: ISRO successfully launched Rohini-1 using its own Satellite Launch Vehicle (SLV-3), marking India's first
satellite launch on an Indian-made rocket.

Key Milestones:
 First Satellite: Aryabhata (1975): India’s first satellite, Aryabhata, was launched on April 19, 1975, from the
Soviet Union. It was primarily designed for scientific and technological research.
 First Indian Launch Vehicle: SLV-3 (1980) SLV-3 launched Rohini Satellite RS-1 on July 18, 1980, marking
India’s first indigenously launched satellite.
 First Operational Launch Vehicle: PSLV (1993): Polar Satellite Launch Vehicle (PSLV) was developed to
launch satellites into polar orbits. Its first successful launch occurred on October 15, 1994.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 272 of 348

 1

 Geosynchronous Satellite Launch Vehicle (GSLV) (2001) GSLV was developed to place larger payloads into
geostationary orbit. The first successful launch occurred in 2001.
 Chandrayaan-1 (2008): India's first lunar mission, Chandrayaan-1, discovered water molecules on the moon.
 Mangalyaan (Mars Orbiter Mission) (2013): The Mars Orbiter Mission made India the first Asian country to
reach Mars orbit and the fourth space agency in the world to reach Mars.
 Chandrayaan-2 (2019): A follow-up lunar mission aiming to explore the moon's south pole. Though the lander
failed, the orbiter is operational and providing data.
 PSLV-C57/Aditya-L1 Mission (2023): Aditya-L1 is India’s first solar mission, launched to study the Sun’s
outermost layers, including the photosphere and corona.
 Chandrayaan-3 (2023): Launched on July 14, 2023, Chandrayaan-3 successfully soft-landed on the Moon's
South Pole on August 23, 2023.
 NISAR (2024): A collaboration between NASA and ISRO, NISAR is an Earth observation satellite to be launched
in 2024.
 Human Spaceflight Program: The Gaganyaan Mission, planned for 2025, aims to send Indian astronauts
(Vyomanauts) into space.

Umbrella Organisation under ISRO ANTRIX, NSIL, and IN-SPACe:

1. ANTRIX Corporation Ltd.
 Established: 1992
 Overview: ANTRIX Corporation Ltd. is the commercial arm of ISRO (Indian Space Research Organisation).
 Antrix Corporation Limited (Antrix), incorporated on 28 September 1992 (under the Companies Act,
1956), is a wholly owned Government of India Company under the administrative control of Department of
Space (DOS).
 It was established to promote and commercially exploit products, technical consultancy services, and
transfer technologies developed by ISRO.
 ANTRIX facilitates the international marketing of space products, satellite launches, and the transfer of
technology to industry.
 Functions:
o Marketing satellite launch services, particularly using ISRO's PSLV and GSLV.
o Commercialization of space technology developed by ISRO.
o Providing communication satellite transponders and ground systems for telecommunication services.
o Facilitating international partnerships for space missions and joint ventures.
 Notable Achievements: ANTRIX has been responsible for launching numerous foreign satellites. It signed
contracts with multiple countries and space agencies, helping ISRO commercialize its launch services.
 Recent Developments: Over the past decade, ANTRIX has shifted more focus on launching small satellites
and providing space solutions. However, with the formation of NSIL (NewSpace India Ltd.) in 2019, ANTRIX's
functions are becoming more niche, focusing on telecommunication services and limited commercial
engagements.

2. NewSpace India Ltd. (NSIL)

 Established: March 2019
 Overview: NSIL is a government-owned enterprise under the Department of Space (DoS), created to
commercialize space products, technical services, and satellite launches. It was set up to meet the rising
demand for space-related commercial services globally and to manage the growing space economy in India.
 Functions:
o Undertaking production and operationalization of space assets such as satellites, launch vehicles, and
ground systems.
o Commercializing the manufacturing of the PSLV, GSLV, and other ISRO-developed products.
o Providing satellite transponder leasing services.
o Offering satellite communication services and developing ground infrastructure.
o Facilitating the transfer of space-related technologies to Indian industries.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 273 of 348

 1

 Key Projects:
o NSIL has been involved in launching satellites, leasing satellite transponders, and marketing various
space-related services developed by ISRO.
o One of its goals is to scale up the commercialization of ISRO’s PSLV and small satellite launch services. It
aims to develop partnerships with the private sector to foster innovation in space technology.
 Significance: NSIL is designed to take on more active commercial responsibilities, especially to cater to the
growing demand for Indian satellite launches globally. It also focuses on production and procurement from
the private sector, effectively facilitating a privatized space ecosystem in India.
 Recent Developments: NSIL has signed multiple contracts for satellite launches, including large
communication satellites like GSAT-24 and commercial services for Earth observation and other space
applications.

3. Indian National Space Promotion and Authorization Center (IN-SPACe)

 Established: June 2020
 Overview: IN-SPACe is a regulatory body under the Department of Space (DoS) created to promote,
authorize, and supervise private sector involvement in space activities. It plays a pivotal role in opening up
the Indian space sector to non-governmental entities (NGEs), including startups, industries, and academia.
 Functions:
o Providing a regulatory framework for private players in the Indian space sector.
o Authorizing and facilitating private companies to launch satellites, create ground infrastructure, and
participate in ISRO’s missions.
o Promoting space activities through public-private partnerships, including R&D collaborations with
private entities.
o Encouraging innovation by creating space for startups to work in satellite building, launch services,
space exploration, and other space-related ventures.
 Significance: IN-SPACe serves as the single window clearance and authorization body for all private
space activities in India.
 It streamlines the entry of private players into space operations and acts as a bridge between ISRO and
private enterprises, facilitating growth and innovation in the Indian space sector.
 Recent Initiatives: IN-SPACe has attracted multiple private players into the space sector. Numerous startups
and private firms have shown interest in satellite launches, ground-based systems, and new space
technologies. It is expected to play a crucial role in helping India’s private space sector thrive.
 Partnerships: IN-SPACe has also worked to foster collaboration between ISRO and private companies,
enabling them to use ISRO’s facilities and expertise while ensuring commercial viability for space
technologies developed by the private sector.

Key Differences and Roles:

 ANTRIX: Focuses on international marketing of ISRO’s capabilities, primarily satellite launches, transponder
leasing, and technology transfer.
 NSIL: Focuses on commercialization and operationalization of ISRO’s space assets, production of launch
vehicles, and managing commercial space activities for ISRO.
 IN-SPACe: Facilitates private sector participation, regulates and promotes private companies’ involvement in
the space sector, and ensures a competitive environment for innovation in space technology.

INAUGURATION OF NALANDA UNIVERSITY

The Prime Minister has inaugurated the new campus of Nalanda University, an international institution located
near the ancient ruins of Nalanda in Rajgir, Bihar.
 The new campus features a ‘Net Zero’ Green Campus with solar power, water treatment plants, water
recycling, and extensive water bodies.

Revival of Nalanda University

 Initiative for Revival: The idea to revive Nalanda University was proposed by Dr. APJ Abdul Kalam in 2006.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 274 of 348

 1

 Legislative Action: The Nalanda University Bill was passed in 2010, leading to its formal revival.
 Operational Launch: The university's operations were launched in 2014 from a temporary location.
 Foundation and Inauguration: Former President Pranab Mukherjee laid the foundation stone for the
permanent campus in 2016, with construction beginning in 2017. The new campus was inaugurated in October
2024.
 International Collaboration: Nalanda University has collaboration from 17 countries and offers 137
international scholarships supported by the ASEAN-India Fund, BIMSTEC, and Bhutan's Ministry of External
Affairs.

Historical Background
 Established: Nalanda University was established in the 5th century CE under the Gupta Dynasty, specifically
under Emperor Kumaragupta I.
 Significance: It was the world’s first residential university and attracted scholars from across China, Korea,
Japan, Tibet, Mongolia, Sri Lanka, and Southeast Asia.
 Subjects: Courses included medicine, Ayurveda, Buddhism, mathematics, grammar, astronomy, and Indian
philosophy.
 Endowments: The university flourished under the patronage of rulers like King Harsha and the Pala Empire,
with significant contributions to mathematics and astronomy.
 Famed Scholars: Aryabhatta, the inventor of zero, and Nagarjuna, a scholar of Mahayana Buddhism, were
among its famous educators.
Admission and Academic Rigor
 Admission to Nalanda was highly competitive, akin to IITs, IIMs, or Ivy League institutions today.
 The university’s library, known as ‘Dharma Gunj’ or ‘Mountain of Truth,’ held 9 million palm-leaf
manuscripts, making it a rich repository of Buddhist knowledge.
Destruction and Rediscovery
 Destruction: In the 1190s, Nalanda was destroyed by Bakhtiyar Khilji, whose troops burned the university’s
library for three months.
 Rediscovery: Rediscovered in 1812 by Scottish surveyor Francis Buchanan-Hamilton and formally identified
in 1861 by Sir Alexander Cunningham.
Scholarly Influence
 Nalanda contributed significantly to Buddhist philosophy, particularly through the work of Nagarjuna,
Aryadeva, and Dharmapala.
 The scholars from Nalanda extended its influence across Asia, shaping religious and philosophical thought.
Foreign Accounts
 Xuanzang (7th century CE) described the university's vastness, academic rigour, and large library.
 I-Tsing (7th century CE) spent years at Nalanda, highlighting its diverse student population and robust academic
environment.
 Al-Biruni (11th century CE) praised Nalanda for its intellectual prominence and attraction to scholars across
Asia.
Current Status and Courses
 Courses Offered: The university offers postgraduate, doctoral research, and short-term certificate courses.
 New Campus: The newly inaugurated campus (2024) is a significant milestone in the institution's revival,
promoting global collaboration and cultural exchange.
International Significance
 International Collaborations: Signed MoUs with countries like Australia, China, Bhutan, Bangladesh, and
Indonesia.
 Recognized as a hub for Buddhist studies, philosophy, and interdisciplinary research in Southeast Asia.
.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 275 of 348

 1

INTERNATIONAL YOGA DAY

About International Yoga Day
 Date: Celebrated annually on 21st June, coinciding with the Summer Solstice (longest day of the year in the
Northern Hemisphere).
 Purpose: Raises global awareness about the benefits of Yoga for physical, mental, and spiritual well-being.
Key Facts about International Yoga Day 2024
 Theme: "Yoga for Self and Society".
 First Celebration: Took place on 21 June 2015 after being proposed by Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi
in 2014 at the United Nations General Assembly.
 Logo: Reflects harmony and peace, represented through a human figure in a yoga posture, a globe symbolizing
universal appeal, and nature elements (green and brown leaves).
What is Yoga?
 Yoga is a holistic practice that includes Asanas (physical postures), Pranayama (breathing exercises),
Dhyana (meditation), and Yama and Niyama (ethical principles).
 Derived from the Sanskrit word “Yuj,” meaning to unite, symbolizing harmony between the body, mind, and
spirit.
 Origin: Yoga is rooted in ancient India, dating back over 5,000 years.
History of International Yoga Day
 Proposed: By PM Narendra Modi at the United Nations General Assembly (UNGA) in September 2014.
 Adopted: The UNGA passed a resolution on 11 December 2014, declaring 21st June as the International Day
of Yoga.
 First Observance: In June 2015, with participation from 177 countries, making it a global movement.

Reasons for Choosing 21 June

 Summer Solstice: The day is the longest of the year, symbolizing light and vitality, which yoga brings to one’s
life.
 Cultural Significance: Many cultures regard this day as special, adding symbolic importance to Yoga.

Aims & Objectives

 Promote Health: Encourages people to adopt healthy lifestyle practices through Yoga.
 Raise Awareness: Increases global awareness of physical inactivity, which is a risk factor for diseases like
cardiovascular ailments and diabetes.
 Community Building: Yoga promotes a sense of community and peace.

Global Celebrations
 Celebrations are marked by mass yoga sessions, workshops, seminars, and online campaigns worldwide.
 Locations such as Times Square (New York), Eiffel Tower (Paris), and Sydney Opera House host iconic Yoga
events.

International Yoga Day 2024 in India

 Organized by the Ministry of AYUSH: Official events, yoga sessions in government offices, and workshops
across India.
 Public Events: Mass participation in schools, parks, and public spaces led by yoga gurus and celebrities.

Significance of the Theme 2024: "Yoga for Self and Society"

 Healthier Society: Yoga helps reduce stress and improves physical health, contributing to lower healthcare
costs and increased productivity.
 Cultural Integration: Yoga acts as a bridge between cultures, fostering global harmony.
 Empowerment: Yoga can empower individuals, particularly those from marginalized communities, improving
self-esteem and resilience.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 276 of 348

 1

Key Initiatives by India to Promote Yoga

 Ocean Ring of Yoga: An initiative by the Indian Navy to promote Yoga through naval exercises.

11 NEW UNESCO BIOSPHERE RESERVES

 UNESCO approved 11 new biosphere reserves in 2024, adding Belgium and Gambia for the first time to the
global list.
 These new designations bring the total number of biosphere reserves to 759 across 136 countries.
 The combined area of the new biosphere reserves spans 37,400 km², equivalent to the size of the Netherlands.

UNESCO Biosphere Reserve:

 A UNESCO Biosphere Reserve is a designated area aimed at balancing biodiversity conservation with
sustainable development.
 Reserves are part of the World Network of Biosphere Reserves, under UNESCO's Man and the Biosphere
(MAB) Programme.
 They encompass terrestrial, marine, and coastal ecosystems, serving as living laboratories for sustainable
development.

Significance of Biosphere Reserves:

 Biodiversity Conservation: Contribute to preserving endangered species and habitats globally.
 Sustainable Development: Promote practices that integrate conservation with economic and human
development.
 Research and Education: Serve as hubs for advancing knowledge on sustainable living and environmental
protection.
 Community Involvement: Local communities participate in managing these reserves, ensuring sustainable use
of resources.
 Global Networking: The reserves benefit from shared knowledge, resources, and collaborative global efforts.
Newly Recognised Biosphere Reserves (2024):
Biosphere Reserve Location Distinct Feature
Belgium, Wetlands converted to farmlands, retains marshes and bog
Kempen-Broek
Netherlands forests.
Darién Norte Biodiversity bridge, archaeological sites, Indigenous and Afro-
Colombia
Chocoano Colombian communities.
Dominican Diverse topography, habitat for endangered species like
Madre de las Aguas
Republic Sparrowhawk.
Mangrove forests, includes UNESCO World Heritage site Kunta
Niumi Gambia
Kinteh Island.
Volcanic hills, sustainable agriculture and ecotourism, Europe’s
Colli Euganei Italy
largest thermal basin.
Julian Alps Alpine mountains, karst plateaux, diverse wildlife, participatory
Italy, Slovenia
Transboundary planning.
Sustainable animal husbandry, diverse ecosystems, heritage-
Khar Us Lake Mongolia
based ecotourism.
Apayao River watershed, Indigenous Cultural Communities,
yApayaos Philippines
sustainable natural resource use (Lapat system).
Includes Mount Hua Wang and Upo Wetland, supports diverse
Changnyeong Republic of Korea
agriculture and conservation.
North-facing valley, varied climates, focus on resilient rural
Val d'Aran Spain
development.
Second-largest beech forest in Europe, community-driven
Irati Spain
conservation efforts.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 277 of 348

 1

Important Points:
 New Countries Added: Belgium and Gambia included for the first time.
 Transboundary Reserves: Two new transboundary reserves established (e.g., Julian Alps between Italy and
Slovenia).
 Total Reserves Worldwide: 759 biosphere reserves across 136 countries. (As of July 2024).
Biosphere Reserves in India:
India has 18 Biosphere Reserves, with 12 identified under the UNESCO MAB Programme.
Biosphere Reserve State Year of Notification UNESCO MAB
Designation
Nilgiri Tamil Nadu, Kerala, Karnataka 1986 2000
Nanda Devi Uttarakhand 1988 2004
Nokrek Meghalaya 1988 2009
Great Nicobar Andaman and Nicobar Islands 1989 2013
Gulf of Mannar Tamil Nadu 1989 2001
Manas Assam 1989 -
Sundarbans West Bengal 1989 2001
Similipal Odisha 1994 2009
Dibru-Saikhowa Assam 1997 -
Dehang-Dibang Arunachal Pradesh 1998 -
Pachmarhi Madhya Pradesh 1999 2009
Khangchendzonga Sikkim 2000 2018
Agasthyamalai Kerala, Tamil Nadu 2001 2016
Achanakmar-Amarkantak Madhya Pradesh, Chhattisgarh 2005 2012
Kachchh Gujarat 2008 -
Cold Desert Himachal Pradesh 2009 -
Seshachalam Hills Andhra Pradesh 2010 -
Panna Madhya Pradesh 2011 2020

STOCKHOLM CONFERENCE, EARTH SUMMIT, KYOTO PROTOCOL

 Stockholm Conference, 1972
Background:
 The United Nations General Assembly (UNGA) first discussed climate change in 1968, using emerging scientific
evidence.
 In 1967, a study predicted that doubling CO2 levels would result in a 2°C rise in global temperature.
 The Stockholm Conference was proposed by Sweden in what became known as the “Swedish Initiative.”
About the Conference:
 The United Nations Conference on the Human Environment was held in Stockholm from 5th to 16th June
1972.
 It was the first global convergence focused on the environment.
 122 countries participated, and the theme was "Only One Earth".
Aim:
 To create a common governance framework for managing the planetary environment and natural
resources.
Stockholm Declaration and Action Plan for the Human Environment:
 Stockholm Declaration:
o 70 out of 122 countries (primarily developing nations) adopted the Stockholm Declaration.
o It contained 26 principles that initiated dialogue between developed and developing countries and
established links between development, poverty, and environment.
 Action Plan:
o It was divided into three main categories, covering 109 recommendations:
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 278 of 348
 1

1. Global Environmental Assessment Programme.

2. Environmental management activities.
3. International measures supporting national and international environmental management.

Three Dimensions of the Conference:

1. No harm principle: Countries agreed not to harm each other's environment or areas beyond national
jurisdiction.
2. An Action Plan to study environmental threats.
3. Creation of the United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP) for international cooperation.
Key Agreements of the Stockholm Declaration:
 Natural resources such as air, water, and land must be safeguarded for present and future generations.
 Release of toxic substances should not exceed the environment’s capacity to manage them.
 Support for poor and developing nations in combating pollution.
 Environmental policies should complement the development potential of developing countries.
 States have the sovereign right to exploit resources but must ensure activities do not harm other states or global
regions.
Importance of Stockholm, 1972:
 It was the first global conference focused on environmental issues.
 Triggered the creation of environment ministries in countries like Norway and Sweden, with India establishing
its Ministry of Environment and Forest in 1985.
 Raised public consciousness about species extinction and mercury poisoning.
 Marked the start of the “environmental era,” leading to global environmental policies and conventions.

Legacy:
 The Stockholm Conference set the stage for subsequent environmental conferences, including the Earth
Summit (1992), and provided the foundation for numerous global environmental treaties.

 Earth Summit (UNCED) - Rio de Janeiro, 1992

Background:
 The United Nations Conference on Environment and Development (UNCED), known as the Earth
Summit, took place in Rio de Janeiro, Brazil from 3rd to 14th June 1992.
 It marked the 20th anniversary of the 1972 Stockholm Conference on the Human Environment.
Objective:
 The primary goal was to create a comprehensive agenda for sustainable development to guide
international cooperation on environmental and developmental issues for the 21st century.
Participants:
 179 countries participated, including political leaders, diplomats, scientists, NGOs, and media
representatives.
Key Outcomes:
1. Sustainable Development:
o The Earth Summit recognized sustainable development as an attainable global goal, balancing
economic, social, and environmental factors.
2. Agenda 21:
o A non-binding action plan for sustainable development, calling for global, national, and local
stakeholders (governments, businesses, NGOs) to invest in the future.
o Focused on natural resource preservation, education, and sustainable economic practices.
3. Key Achievements:
o Rio Declaration: A set of 27 universal principles on sustainable development.
o UN Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC): Framework to address climate change.
o Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD): Aimed at conserving biological diversity.
o Principles of Forest Management: Guidelines for forest conservation.
o Established the Commission on Sustainable Development to monitor implementation of summit
decisions.
o Initiated negotiations for straddling fish stocks and highly migratory fish stocks management.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 279 of 348

 1

4. Small Island Developing States (SIDS):

o Led to the first global conference on the sustainable development of small island developing states
in 1994.
Rio+20 (2012):
 Rio+20, also known as the United Nations Conference on Sustainable Development, was held in Rio
de Janeiro in June 2012.
 Marked the 20th anniversary of the 1992 Earth Summit and focused on seven priority areas:
o Decent jobs, energy, sustainable cities, food security, sustainable agriculture, water, oceans,
and disaster readiness.

 Kyoto Protocol
1. Adoption and Objective:
o The Kyoto Protocol was adopted on 11th December 1997 to curb greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions.
o It aimed at reducing carbon dioxide (CO2) and other GHG emissions in industrialized countries to
combat climate change.
2. Greenhouse Gases Covered: Six GHGs were targeted: Carbon dioxide (CO2), Methane (CH4), Nitrous
oxide (N2O), Hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs), Perfluorocarbons (PFCs), and Sulfur hexafluoride (SF6).
3. Entry into Force: The Protocol entered into force on 16th February 2005 after a complex ratification
process.
4. Commitments: Focuses on binding commitments for 37 industrialized countries and the European
Union (EU) to reduce GHG emissions by 5% below 1990 levels during the first commitment period (2008-
2012).
5. Principles: Operates on the principle of “common but differentiated responsibilities”—placing more
responsibility on developed nations due to their historical contributions to GHG emissions.
6. Mechanisms:
o International Emissions Trading (IET): Allows countries emitting less than their quota to sell their
excess emission capacity to countries that exceed their limits.
o Clean Development Mechanism (CDM): Developed countries can invest in emission-reducing projects
in developing countries and earn credits.
o Joint Implementation (JI): Developed countries can earn credits by investing in emission-reducing
projects in other industrialized countries.
7. Doha Amendment:
o Adopted in 2012, the Doha Amendment extended the Kyoto Protocol into a second commitment
period (2013-2020), with a target of an 18% reduction in GHG emissions below 1990 levels.
o It added new GHGs to the list and updated targets for participating countries.
8. Monitoring and Compliance: The Protocol includes a robust monitoring, review, and verification system
to ensure transparency and compliance.
9. Developing Nations: Developing countries, including India and China, were exempt from mandatory
emission reduction targets but could voluntarily participate through carbon credit projects.
10. Signatories: The Kyoto Protocol has 192 parties. However, Canada withdrew in 2011, and countries like
the USA and South Sudan have not signed the Protocol.
11. Exclusions: The Protocol does not cover ozone-depleting substances, which are handled under the
Montreal Protocol.
12. Significance: The Kyoto Protocol was the first legally binding agreement to address global climate
change by holding developed nations accountable for reducing GHG emissions.
13. Paris Agreement: Although the 1997 Kyoto Protocol also technically remains in force, the Paris Agreement
has, in effect, superseded the Kyoto Protocol as the principal regulatory instrument governing the global
response to climate change.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 280 of 348

 1

CHINA PLUS ONE STRATEGY AND INDIA:

 About: A global trend where companies diversify manufacturing by establishing operations outside of China to
mitigate over-reliance.
 China's Dominance: China has been central to global supply chains for decades, termed as the "World's
Factory" due to favorable factors and a strong business ecosystem.
 Shift in the 1990s: Companies moved production to China due to low manufacturing costs and vast domestic
market access.
 Disruptions: China's zero-COVID policy led to supply chain inconsistencies during the pandemic, catalyzing the
China-Plus-One strategy.
 Evolution: Global firms began exploring alternative manufacturing hubs in developing countries like India,
Vietnam, Thailand, Bangladesh, and Malaysia.
Opportunities for India to Attract Foreign Investment
1. Demographic Dividend:
o India's Young Workforce: 28.4% of the population under 30 in 2023 compared to China’s 20.4%.
o Potential Market: India’s youthful workforce and consumer base make it an attractive destination for global
investment.
2. Cost Competitiveness:
o Lower Costs: India’s labor and production costs are highly competitive, with average manufacturing wages
47% lower than China (Deloitte 2023).
o Infrastructure Investment: Government investments in the National Infrastructure Pipeline (NIP) aim
to reduce manufacturing costs by 20%.
3. Business Environment:
o Policy Reforms: Initiatives like Production Linked Incentive (PLI), tax reforms, and relaxed FDI norms
enhance the business environment.
o Make in India: Government initiative to position India as a global manufacturing hub.
4. Technological Edge: Digital Advantage: With 870 million internet users in 2024, India’s youth benefit from
access to global tech giants like Google and Facebook, which are not available in China.
5. Strategic Economic Partnerships: Partnerships: India’s regional trade agreements, such as CEPA with UAE,
aim to double bilateral trade within five years.
6. Global Influence: Active Diplomacy: India's participation in groupings like QUAD and leadership roles in G20
and SCO enhance its strategic position.
7. Large Domestic Market: Vast Market: India’s population of 1.3 billion and growing GDP per capita provide a
strong foundation for sustained growth and trade.

Sectors Benefiting from China+1 Strategy in India

1. Information Technology: India is a global IT services hub, strengthened by Make in India and contributions
from major technology firms.
2. Pharmaceuticals: Valued at Rs 3.5 lakh crore in 2024, India is the world’s third-largest pharma industry by
volume and supplies 70% of WHO’s vaccines.
3. Metals and Steel: Rich in natural resources, with the PLI scheme for specialty steel attracting Rs 40,000 crore
in investments by 2029.

India's Performance in the China+1 Landscape

1. Import Growth: India’s imports from the West grew at a 6.3% CAGR (2014-2023), trailing behind Vietnam and
Thailand.
2. Business Perception: Despite abundant resources, Vietnam and Thailand are perceived as more attractive for
businesses relocating from China.
3. Tariff Rates: India's higher tariffs (14.7% for non-agricultural products) have deterred Western investors.
 India is emerging as the most favored destination in Asia for companies looking to shift production,
especially in the electronics sector.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 281 of 348

 1

KERALA LEGISLATIVE ASSEMBLY'S RESOLUTION TO RENAME KERALA AS

'KERALAM'
On June 24, 2023, the Kerala Legislative Assembly unanimously passed a resolution to amend the Constitution and
change the state's name from ‘Kerala’ to ‘Keralam’.
 Initiation: The resolution was moved by Chief Minister Pinarayi Vijayan under Article 3 of the Constitution to
update the First Schedule.
 Previous Attempt: A similar resolution was passed in 2022 but returned by the Central government for
procedural reasons.
 Focus on First Schedule: Initially, the aim was to amend the names across languages listed in the Eighth
Schedule. However, after Union Home Ministry advice, the focus shifted to amending the First Schedule only.
 Process for Renaming a State:
o A bill for renaming can be initiated by either Parliament or the State Legislature.
o Requires Parliamentary approval under Articles 3 and 4.
o The bill needs to be introduced in Parliament after President's recommendation.
o The State Assembly is consulted but its views are non-binding.
o After approval by simple majority in Parliament and Presidential assent, the state's name is changed.

Constitutional Provisions Related to State Renaming:

 Article 3: Allows Parliament to:
o Form new states,
o Alter state boundaries,
o Change the name of existing states.
 Article 4: Provides that laws under Articles 2 and 3 (including renaming) do not require a constitutional
amendment under Article 368.

Significance of the Name Change:

 'Keralam': The name change aims to align the state's name with the Malayalam pronunciation.
 Historical Origins:
o The word Keralaputra (meaning "son of Kerala") is first mentioned in Emperor Ashoka’s Rock Edict II
(257 BCE).
o The term refers to the Cheras dynasty, one of the prominent southern Indian kingdoms.

Kerala's Journey to Statehood:

 Pre-Independence: The demand for a united Malayalam-speaking state began in the 1920s.
 Post-Independence:
o On July 1, 1949, Travancore and Cochin were merged to form Travancore-Cochin.
o The State Reorganisation Commission (1956) recommended creating Kerala by merging Malabar district,
Kasargod taluk, and parts of Travancore.
o Kerala was officially formed on November 1, 1956.

NITI AAYOG'S FORMATION OF MULTI-SECTORAL COMMITTEES FOR NET-

ZERO TARGET
 Objective: Achieve net-zero emissions by 2070 through policy design and sectoral transition.
 Working Groups: Six dedicated groups focusing on:
o Macroeconomic Implications: Study the impact of net-zero targets on macroeconomic indicators and
suggest fiscal policies.
o Climate Finance: Identify India's climate finance needs and potential funding sources.
o Critical Minerals: Focus on the domestic supply chain and research in critical minerals.
o Social Aspects of Energy Transition: Assess the social impact and recommend mitigation strategies.
o Policy Synthesis: Consolidate reports from sectoral committees and create a policy handbook.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 282 of 348

 1

o Sectoral Committees: Devise pathways for transitioning core sectors like power, industry, transport, and
agriculture.
 Expected Outcome: The final action plans are due by October 2024. The report will guide climate-resilient
policies for achieving the net-zero goal.

Net-Zero Target
 Definition: Achieving a balance between carbon emissions and their removal from the atmosphere. Involves
carbon sinks like forests and technologies like carbon capture and storage.
 Global Commitments: Over 70 countries aim to achieve net-zero by 2050.

India's Initiatives for Net-Zero

 National Action Plan on Climate Change (NAPCC): Raises awareness about climate threats and steps to
mitigate them.
 COP26 Commitments (Panchamitra):
o Reach 500 GW non-fossil energy capacity by 2030.
o Meet 50% energy needs from renewable sources by 2030.
o Reduce 1 billion tonnes of carbon emissions by 2030.
o Reduce carbon intensity by 45% over 2005 levels by 2030.
o Achieve net-zero by 2070.

Steps to Achieve Net-Zero

 Enhance Carbon Sequestration: Expand forest cover, restore lands, and promote agroforestry.
 Build Climate Resilience: Invest in climate-proof infrastructure, disaster management, and early warning
systems.
 Green Transportation: Promote electric vehicles (EVs) and build charging infrastructure.
 Climate-Smart Agriculture: Encourage sustainable farming with precision agriculture and tech-driven
solutions.
 International Collaboration: Acquire clean technologies and secure international climate finance.
Key Focus Areas and Strategies
 Cost Competitiveness: India's competitive labor and capital costs make it an attractive hub for manufacturing.
 Technological Edge: With 870 million internet users in 2024, India has the digital capacity for tech-driven
solutions.
 International Partnerships: Strategic alliances like the CEPA agreement with the UAE help diversify trade and
access global markets.

EIGHT NEW CABINET COMMITTEES FORMED

1. Cabinet Committees Overview:
o Definition: Subsets of the Union Cabinet with selected ministers to handle specific government functions
more efficiently.
o Purpose: To streamline decision-making across different sectors such as economic, security, and political
affairs.
o Types:
 Standing Committees: Permanent in nature.
 Ad hoc Committees: Formed temporarily to handle specific issues.
o Recent Development (2024): Union government reconstituted eight Cabinet Committees.
2. Home Minister’s Role:
o Amit Shah is the only minister present on all eight Cabinet Committees, highlighting his central role in the
government.
3. New Members in Cabinet Committees (2024):
o Three new faces in the Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs (CCEA):
 Shivraj Singh Chouhan (Agriculture Minister),
 H.D. Kumaraswamy (Heavy Industries Minister),
 Rajiv Ranjan Singh (Fisheries, Animal Husbandry and Dairying Minister).

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 283 of 348

 1

o Lalan Singh is also a part of the Cabinet Committee on Parliamentary Affairs.

4. Eight Cabinet Committees:
o Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs (CCEA).
o Appointments Committee of the Cabinet (ACC).
o Cabinet Committee on Security (CCS).
o Cabinet Committee on Accommodation.
o Cabinet Committee on Parliamentary Affairs.
o Cabinet Committee on Political Affairs.
o Cabinet Committee on Investment and Growth.
o Cabinet Committee on Skill, Employment and Livelihood.
5. Prime Minister’s Role:
o Prime Minister Narendra Modi heads six of these committees, except for:
 Cabinet Committee on Accommodation.
 Cabinet Committee on Parliamentary Affairs.
6. Composition of Key Committees:
o Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs (CCEA) now has 11 members, with three new additions.
o Appointments Committee of the Cabinet (ACC) remains unchanged, headed by the Prime Minister with
Home Minister Shah as the only other member.
o Cabinet Committee on Security (CCS), also unchanged, includes the Prime Minister, Rajnath Singh, Amit
Shah, Nirmala Sitharaman, and S. Jaishankar.
7. Additional Appointments:
o Chirag Paswan (Food Processing Industries Minister) has been included in the Cabinet Committee on
Investment and Growth.
o Jayant Chaudhary (Minister of State for Education) has been included as a special invitee on the Cabinet
Committee on Skill, Employment and Livelihood.
22ND INDIA-RUSSIA ANNUAL SUMMIT
1. Diplomatic Achievements:
o Award: Prime Minister Narendra Modi was conferred with Russia's highest civilian honour, the "Order of
Saint Andrew the Apostle".
o Significance: This award, established in 1698, recognizes PM Modi's contributions to promoting India-
Russia strategic partnership.
o Previous Recipients: Leaders like Chinese President Xi Jinping and Kazakh President Nursultan
Nazarbayev have also received this honour.
2. Economic Cooperation:
o New Trade Target: India and Russia set a new bilateral trade target of USD 100 billion by 2030.
o Reason: India's increased imports of discounted Russian crude oil due to sanctions on Russia post the
Ukraine invasion.
o Programme-2030: Agreement to develop the "Programme-2030" for economic cooperation, coordinated
by the India-Russia Intergovernmental Commission on Trade, Economic, Scientific, Technical, and
Cultural Cooperation (IRIGC-TEC).
o Free Trade Agreement: India and the Eurasian Economic Union initiated FTA negotiations, aiming to
include services and investments.
o Make in India & Atmanirbhar Bharat: Russian participation in India's Make in India and Atmanirbhar
Bharat initiatives was encouraged, while Indian companies were urged to invest in Russian projects.
3. Defence and Technology:
o Collaboration: Emphasis on moving from a buyer-seller relationship to joint research, development,
and production of advanced defense systems.
o Joint Ventures: Agreement to establish joint ventures for spare parts and Russian-origin defence
equipment production in India.
o New Working Group: Formation of a Working Group on Technological Cooperation to discuss at the next
IRIGC-Military Technical Cooperation meeting.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 284 of 348

 1

o No RELOS Agreement: The summit ended without signing the Reciprocal Exchange of Logistics
Agreement (RELOS), which would have granted India access to Russian military facilities in the Arctic.
4. Transport and Connectivity:
o Chennai-Vladivostok Maritime Corridor: Focus on the Chennai-Vladivostok Corridor, reducing
transportation time between India and Russia by 40%.
o International North-South Transport Corridor (INSTC): Cooperation to enhance the INSTC, connecting
India to Northern Europe via Iran and Russia.
o Northern Sea Route: Plans to increase infrastructure capacity and explore the Northern Sea Route for
cargo transportation in Eurasia.
5. International Cooperation:
o UN Security Council: Russia reaffirmed support for India’s permanent membership in a reformed UN
Security Council.
o BRICS: India extended full support for Russia’s BRICS Chairship in 2024 with a theme centered on
"Strengthening Multilateralism for Just Global Development and Security".
o Global Forums: Close cooperation was reiterated in multilateral forums like UN, G20, BRICS, SCO, focusing
on reinvigorating multilateralism.
o International Alliances: India expressed interest in Russia joining the International Solar Alliance (ISA),
Coalition for Disaster Resilient Infrastructure (CDRI), and International Big Cat Alliance (IBCA).

SUPREME COURT ON MENSTRUAL LEAVE POLICY

The court has asked the Central Government to frame a model policy on menstrual leave for female employees
after consulting states and stakeholders.
 The court emphasized that this is a policy-making matter, not under judicial jurisdiction.

Menstrual Leave in India

 Menstrual leave refers to the option where women employees can take paid or unpaid leave during
menstruation due to discomfort or health issues.
 Implemented Policies:
o Bihar (1992): Two days of paid menstrual leave per month for women employees.
o Kerala (2023): Female students across universities and institutions are allowed menstrual leave and up to
60 days maternity leave for those over the age of 18.
 Corporate Adoption:
o Companies like Zomato, Swiggy, and Byjus have introduced policies granting paid menstrual leave.
 Legislative Efforts:
o No national law exists yet regarding menstrual leave in India.
o Private Bills: Attempts in Parliament include the Menstruation Benefits Bill (2017) and the Women’s
Sexual, Reproductive and Menstrual Rights Bill (2018), but these have not succeeded.
 Proposed Bill (2022): The Right of Women to Menstrual Leave and Free Access to Menstrual Health
Products Bill proposed 3 days of paid leave for women and transwomen during menstruation.

Global Perspective on Menstrual Leave

 Countries with Menstrual Leave:
o Spain (2023): The first European country to grant paid menstrual leave (3-5 days/month).
o Japan, Indonesia, Philippines, Taiwan, South Korea, Zambia, and Vietnam also provide menstrual leave.
 Japan Case Study:
o Despite being introduced 70 years ago, only 0.9% of women take menstrual leave due to fear of sexual
harassment and stigma.
o Japan ranks 125th in gender equality as per the World Economic Forum’s 2023 report.

The Need for Paid Menstrual Leave

 Health and Well-being: Menstruation can cause physical discomfort (cramps, fatigue) and emotional
distress. Paid leave would help women manage these symptoms without penalizing them financially.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 285 of 348

 1

 Workplace Inclusivity: It would reduce stigma, normalizing conversations around menstrual health, and
promote gender inclusivity in the workforce.
 Economic Benefits: IMF suggests that equal participation of women in the workforce can increase India’s
GDP by 27%, adding USD 700 billion to the economy by 2025.

Legal Framework for Menstrual Leave

 Article 15(3): Allows the state to make special provisions for women, countering claims of discrimination
against men.
 Article 42: Mandates the state to ensure just and humane work conditions, and menstrual leave could be
viewed as an extension of this responsibility, improving the workplace environment for women.

"NAVIGATING NEW HORIZONS: A GLOBAL FORESIGHT REPORT ON

PLANETARY HEALTH AND HUMAN WELLBEING, 2024"
No Significant Progress in UN SDG Goals:
 85% of SDG targets are off track.
 37% of targets have shown no progress or regressed since 2015.
 Particularly, 42.85% of SDG 6 (Clean Water and Sanitation), SDG 13 (Climate Action), SDG 14 (Life Below
Water), and SDG 15 (Life on Land) are stagnating or regressing.
 60% of environmental indicators are either deteriorating or have unclear status.

8 Critical Global Shifts:

 The report identifies 18 signals of change across 8 critical shifts.
 These signals indicate potential future developments that could drastically impact planetary health and human
well-being.
Changing Human-Environment Relationship:
 Human activities are projected to affect 90% of global land by 2050.
 Up to 46% of species may face extinction.
 Global temperatures are expected to rise 2.1-3.9°C by 2100, driven by greenhouse gas emissions primarily from
developed nations.

Scarcity and Competition for Critical Resources:

 Global competition for resources, including water and food, is increasing due to climate change and
unsustainable management.
 This is disproportionately affecting vulnerable populations and increasing the likelihood of resource conflicts.

Demand for Critical Minerals by 2050:

 The growing need for critical minerals is essential to achieving net-zero emissions by 2050, leading to potential
global tensions and competition.

AI, Digital Transformation, and Technology:

 8.89 billion mobile subscriptions globally, with 5.6 billion device owners.
 67.4% of the global population are internet users.
 The rapid growth of AI and digital technologies presents both opportunities and environmental challenges.

A New Era of Conflict:

 Increasing use of AI-based and autonomous weapons, such as AI-equipped drones in the Russia-Ukraine war,
could lead to major disruptions within 4-6 years without proper oversight.
 Bioweapons controlled by AI pose an additional risk.

Mass Forced Displacement:

 Currently, 1.5% of the global population is forcibly displaced, with numbers expected to rise due to climate
change.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 286 of 348

 1

 By 2070, 3 billion people could live outside suitable climate conditions without mitigation efforts.
 Climate-induced migration could range between 25 million to 1 billion by 2050.

Widening Inequalities:
 Top 10% of the global population holds over 75% of the world's wealth, while the bottom 50% owns just 2%.
 Inequalities within nations stem from uneven access to education, jobs, and resources, further exacerbated by
globalization.

Misinformation and Declining Trust:

 Erosion of trust in science and public institutions has hampered efforts to create effective policies, further
worsening challenges like climate change due to misinformation.

United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP)

 Established: 5th June 1972.
 Purpose: UNEP serves as the leading global environmental authority. It sets the global environmental agenda,
promotes sustainable development, and advocates for environmental protection on a global scale.
 Role:
o Guides international efforts on environmental protection.
o Works to promote the integration of environmental sustainability in UN policies and programs.
o Acts as an authoritative advocate for global environmental issues.
 Major Reports: Emissions Gap Report, Adaptation Gap Report, Global Environment Outlook, Frontiers, Invest
into a Healthy Planet
 Major Campaigns: Beat Pollution, UN75, World Environment Day, Wild for Life
 Headquarters: Nairobi, Kenya.

STONEWALL RIOTS AND PRIDE MONTH

 Stonewall Riots:
o Date: June 28, 1969.
o Location: Stonewall Inn, Greenwich Village, New York.
o Trigger: Frequent police raids on LGBTQ+ gathering spaces, including the Stonewall Inn, which was targeted
for allegedly selling alcohol without a liquor license.
o Community Response: The third police raid led to massive protests as the crowd outside Stonewall clashed
with the police, marking a significant turning point for LGBTQ+ rights.
o Duration: The riots continued for six days, with violent clashes between the community and law
enforcement.
o Impact: The event is now seen as the birth of the modern gay and lesbian civil rights movement.
 Role of Marsha P. Johnson:
o Key Figure: Marsha P. Johnson, a transgender activist and drag queen, was a pivotal leader during the
riots.
o Co-founded: The Street Transvestite Action Revolutionaries (STAR) with Sylvia Rivera, which provided
housing and support for homeless LGBTQ youth.
o AIDS Activism: Johnson also played a crucial role in raising awareness about AIDS during the epidemic in
the 1980s.
 Evolution of Gay Pride:
o First Anniversary: On the first anniversary of the Stonewall Riots in 1970, activists organized the
Christopher Street Liberation Day March, which is considered the first Gay Pride March.
o Pride Month: Pride celebrations evolved into a month-long event in June, with marches, events, and
cultural programs.
o International Recognition: LGBTQ Pride is now celebrated globally, with regional variations, promoting
inclusivity and celebrating unique cultures within the movement.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 287 of 348

 1

 Official Recognition:
o 1999: US President Bill Clinton officially declared June as Gay and Lesbian Pride Month to commemorate
the Stonewall Uprising.
o 2009: President Barack Obama expanded it to LGBT Pride Month.
o 2021: President Joe Biden proclaimed June as LGBTQ Pride Month.
 Significance:
o The riots are seen as a fight against police brutality and discrimination faced by LGBTQ+ individuals.
o In 2019, the New York Police Department issued a formal apology, acknowledging the wrongful actions
taken by the police during the Stonewall raid.
o Pride Month today represents fearless identity, proud unity, and a movement for rights that started
with Stonewall.
 International Influence:
o While LGBTQ+ activism existed before Stonewall, the riots gave the movement a public face and triggered
global recognition of LGBTQ+ rights.

Pride History in India: Key Notes for UPSC Aspirants

 First Protest (1992): India's first protest for gay rights occurred on August 11, 1992, led by the AIDS
Bhedbhav Virodhi Andolan (ABVA) outside the ITO Police headquarters in Delhi. This protest opposed the
arrest of men under suspicion of homosexuality.
 Tihar Jail Incident (1994): In 1994, ABVA attempted to distribute condoms to inmates in Tihar Jail, following
reports of same-sex relations. The jail authorities refused, leading ABVA to file a PIL in the Delhi High Court,
challenging Section 377 of the Indian Penal Code.
 Kolkata Pride Walk (1999): India’s first pride parade, and South Asia’s first, was held on July 2, 1999, in
Kolkata, known as the Kolkata Rainbow Pride Walk.

Decriminalisation of Homosexuality in India:

 Delhi High Court (2009): In Naz Foundation vs Govt. of NCT Delhi, the Delhi High Court ruled that
criminalizing consensual gay sex violated the fundamental right to privacy.
 Private Member Bill (2015): MP Shashi Tharoor introduced a bill in Lok Sabha to amend Section 377, but it
was unsuccessful.
 Puttaswamy Judgment (2017): The Justice K. S. Puttaswamy vs. Union of India case set a crucial precedent
by recognizing the right to privacy, which strengthened the legal battle for LGBTQ rights.
 Supreme Court Ruling (2018): On September 6, 2018, the Supreme Court in Navtej Singh Johar v. Union of
India declared Section 377 unconstitutional, legalizing consensual same-sex acts between adults.

Progress Post Section 377 Judgment:

 Same-Sex Marriage: The next legal battle is for same-sex marriage recognition.
o Legislature: In April 2022, NCP MP Supriya Sule introduced a bill in Lok Sabha to legalize same-sex
marriage.
o Judiciary: In June 2022, the Kerala High Court allowed a lesbian couple to live together after being
forcibly separated by their parents. In November 2022, two gay couples filed writ petitions in the Supreme
Court seeking legal recognition of same-sex marriages under the Special Marriage Act, 1954.
o Supreme Court Hearing (2023): A Constitution Bench began hearing the same-sex marriage petitions in
April 2023.
 Union Government Stance: The government has urged the Supreme Court to leave the issue to Parliament,
stating that decriminalization does not imply the acceptance of same-sex marriage, which it claims does not align
with Indian societal norms.
 The Supreme Court of India declined to legalize same-sex marriage, stating that marriage is not a fundamental
right under the Constitution.
 Ban on Conversion Therapy (2022): On August 25, 2022, the National Medical Commission (NMC) banned
conversion therapy and labeled it professional misconduct.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 288 of 348

 1

 The Bhartiya Nyaya Sanhita came into effect on July 1, 2024, along with the Bhartiya Nagrik Surakhsa Sanhita
(BNSS) and the Bhartiya Sakshya Adhiniyam (BSA). The BNS replaced the IPC, CrPC, and the Evidence Act.
 Section 377 of the Indian Penal Code (IPC) is not included in the Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita (BNS).
A petition has been filed in in the Delhi High Court stating that Section 377 decriminalised consensual
homosexual acts and only criminalised non-consensual sexual acts, and its absence in the BNS has engendered
a critical void in legal protection, disproportionately affecting vulnerable communities.

THE APARAJITA WOMAN AND CHILD (WEST BENGAL CRIMINAL LAWS

AMENDMENT) BILL 2024
 The West Bengal Assembly unanimously approved the Aparajita Woman and Child (West Bengal Criminal
Laws Amendment) Bill, 2024.
 This bill mandates the death penalty for rape cases where the victim dies or is left in a permanent vegetative
state.
 The bill was passed amid public protests following the rape and murder of a doctor in Kolkata's R G Kar
Medical College.

Current Indian Laws to Curb Sexual Assaults:

 Criminal Law (Amendment) Act 2013: Allows the death penalty in cases of rape leading to death or a
permanent vegetative state, and for repeat offenders.
 Criminal Laws (Amendment) Act 2018: Introduced the death penalty for the rape and gang rape of girls
under 12 years.
 Bhartiya Nyaya Sanhita 2023: Retains the old penal provisions and adds that gang rape of a woman under 18
years is punishable by death.

Salient Provisions of the Aparajita Bill:

 Amendments to the Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita (BNS):
o Introduces the death penalty in cases where aggravating circumstances are present (such as rape by a
public servant).
o Makes the death penalty mandatory for cases of rape where the victim dies or is left in a vegetative state.
o Provides the death penalty for gang rape of a woman over 18 years.
o For repeat offenders, it replaces life imprisonment with rigorous imprisonment for life.
o Increases the jail terms for disclosing a rape victim’s identity and publishing details about court
proceedings.
o In cases of acid attacks, the bill mandates rigorous imprisonment for life.
 Amendments to the Protection of Children Against Sexual Offences (POCSO) Act:
o Introduces the death penalty for penetrative sexual assault (previously punishable by life imprisonment).
 Amendments to the Bharatiya Nyaya Suraksha Sanhita (BNSS):
o Reduces the time for completing the investigation from two months to 21 days, extendable by 15 days.
o Reduces the time for completing the trial from two months to 30 days after filing the chargesheet.

Task Forces and Special Courts:

 The bill establishes special institutions like Aparajita Task Forces and Special Courts in each district for
expedited investigation and trials of rape cases.
 Special Public Prosecutors will also be appointed to ensure swift legal proceedings.

Other State Laws on Sexual Assaults:

 Andhra Pradesh (Disha Bill 2019): Introduced the death penalty for rape, including of minors below 16
years.
 Maharashtra (Shakti Bill 2020): Similar to the Aparajita Bill, it introduces the death penalty in rape cases
and expedites the legal process.
 Neither of these bills has received President's assent yet.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 289 of 348

 1

 Madhya Pradesh (2017) and Arunachal Pradesh (2018): Passed laws introducing the death penalty for the
rape of girls up to 12 years of age.

Difficulties in Implementing State Laws:

 The Aparajita Bill will be sent to the Governor of West Bengal, who will forward it to the President for
approval.
 President's assent is crucial because of the Mithu vs State of Punjab (1983) case, where the Supreme Court
ruled that mandatory death sentences violate the right to equality (Article 14) and right to life (Article 21),
deeming them unfair and unjust.

OPS – NPS – UPS

Unified Pension Scheme (UPS)
 Approval Date: August 24, 2024
 Implementation Date: April 1, 2025
 Coverage: Benefits 23 lakh Central Government employees

Key Features of Unified Pension Scheme

 Assured Pension: 50% of average basic salary from the last 12 months for employees with at least 25 years of
service.
 Minimum Pension: ₹10,000 per month for those with 10 or more years of service.
 Family Pension: 60% of the last pension on employee's death.
 Contributions: Employees contribute 10%, government contributes 18.5%; contributions are adjusted based
on actuarial assessments.
 Inflation Indexation: Pensions indexed to the All India Consumer Price Index for Industrial Workers (AICPI-
IW).
 Lump Sum Payment: Additional payout at superannuation, equating to 1/10th of monthly emoluments for
every six months of service.
 Inflation Protection: Both pension and family pension are indexed to inflation, ensuring protection against the
rising cost of living.
 Scheme Nature: Contributory, similar to the National Pension Scheme, with a fixed payout akin to the Old
Pension Scheme.
Old Pension Scheme (OPS)
 Introduction Year: 1871 under the Pensions Act
 Scheme Type: Defined Benefit
 Pension Benefit: 50% of last drawn basic salary as lifelong pension.
 Dearness Allowance (DA): Periodically adjusted based on inflation.
 Family Pension: 50-60% of pension amount transferred to spouse/family post employee's death.
 Contributions: None required from employees.
 Provident Fund and Gratuity:
o General Provident Fund (GPF) available.
o Gratuity capped at ₹20 lakh at retirement.
Financial Impact of OPS
 Nature: Unfunded, Pay-As-You-Go system, funded by government revenue.
 Pension Bill by 2020-21: ₹3.37 lakh crore, approx. 9.2% of GDP.
 Fund Management: OPS operated on a Pay-As-You-Go basis with no employee control over investment.
 Sustainability Concerns: The unfunded nature led to increased pension liabilities as the number of retirees
grew, questioning the long-term sustainability.
National Pension Scheme (NPS)
 Launch Date: January 1, 2004
 Applicability: Initially for Central Government employees, excluding Armed Forces; later extended to all citizens
NRIs aged 18-70 years.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 290 of 348

 1

 Origin: Based on the OASIS report, the NPS was notified in December 2003 and introduced by the Central
Government in January 2004 (excluding armed forces).
 Pension Liability Motivation: Launched as a measure to reduce the government's pension liabilities, prompted
by escalating pension debt levels in the early 2000s.
 Legal Amendments: Introduction of NPS led to amendments in the Central Civil Services (Pension) Rules, 1972.
 Scheme Type: Defined Contribution
 Contributions: 10% from employees and 14% from government for central government employees.
 Investment Flexibility: In 2019, the Finance Ministry allowed central government employees to select their
Pension Funds and Investment Patterns.
 Account Structure:
o Tier I Account: Mandatory, locked-in until retirement.
o Tier II Account: Voluntary, with no withdrawal restrictions.
 Investment Options: Equity, Corporate Bonds, Government Bonds.
 Regulation: Overseen by the Pension Fund Regulatory and Development Authority (PFRDA).
 Tax Benefits:
o Contributions eligible for tax deduction under Section 80C up to ₹1.5 lakh.
o Additional deduction under Section 80CCD (1B) for NPS.
 Withdrawal Rules:
o 60% of lump sum withdrawal tax-free at retirement.
o Mandatory annuity purchase with 40% of corpus at age 60.
Implementation and Regulation
 Regulatory Body: NPS is regulated by the Pension Fund Regulatory and Development Authority (PFRDA).
 Asset Ownership: The National Pension System Trust (NPST), established by PFRDA, holds all assets under NPS
as the registered owner.
Issues with NPS
 Employee Contributions: Unlike OPS, NPS requires a 10% deposit from the basic pay and DA by employees.
 No GPF Benefits: There is no General Provident Fund (GPF) advantage in NPS.
 Uncertain Payout: Being market-linked, the returns and hence the pension payout are not guaranteed,
introducing uncertainty in retirement income.
COMPARISON CHART
Features Old Pension Scheme National Pension System (NPS) Unified Pension System (UPS)
(OPS)
Pension 50% of last drawn Market-linked pension. No Guaranteed pension of 50% of the
Amount salary. defined pension amount, average basic pay from the last 12
dependent on investment fund months before retirement.
performance.
Inflation Adjusted for inflation Not applicable, the pension is Indexed for Inflation based on the
Indexation through Dearness market-linked. All India Consumer Price Index for
Allowance (DA). Industrial Workers (AICPI-IW).
Employee No contribution from Defined contribution of 10% of Defined contribution of 10% of
Contribution employee. basic pay and dearness allowance basic pay and dearness allowance
(DA). (DA).
Government Full funding by Defined contribution of 14% of Defined contribution of 18.5% of
Contribution government. the employee’s basic pay and the employee’s basic pay and
dearness allowance. dearness allowance.
Family Pension Yes. Continues after Dependent on the accumulated Yes. Provides 60% of employee’s
retiree's death. corpus and chosen annuity plans. pension to family in event of death.
Risk No market risk. Subject to market risk. Lower risk than NPS due to
guaranteed payout.
Flexibility Low, fixed benefits. High, with investment choice Limited, with assured pension but
flexibility. some indexation benefits.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 291 of 348

 1

UNLAWFUL ACTIVITIES PREVENTION ACT, 1967

Constitution (Sixteenth Amendment) Act, 1963: Granted Parliament authority to impose reasonable restrictions
on:
 Freedom of speech and expression
 Right to assemble peaceably and without arms
 Right to form associations or unions

Unlawful Activities (Prevention) Act (UAPA), 1967:

 Purpose: To prevent certain unlawful activities of individuals and associations, and to address terrorist acts.
 Background: Introduced following the Naxalbari peasant rebellion in March 1967, initially by the Unlawful
Activities (Prevention) Ordinance in June 1966.
 Initial Focus: Prohibit demands for secession and actions undermining India’s sovereignty and territorial
integrity.

Key Amendments:
 2004 Amendment:
o Terrorist Act Definition: Expanded the definition to include financing of terrorism. The term 'terrorist act'
was specifically included to cover acts that threaten the unity, integrity, security, or sovereignty of India or
strike terror in the people or any section of the people.
o Funding Terrorism: Introduced stringent punishments for raising funds intended for terrorist activities.
o Seizure and Attachment of Property: Empowered the Director-General of the National Investigation
Agency (NIA) to seize or attach properties involved in terrorism-related activities.
o Duration of Bans on Unlawful Associations: Extended the period for which an association can be declared
unlawful from two to five years.
 2008 Amendment:
o Setting up of NIA: Establishment of the National Investigation Agency (NIA) as a central agency to combat
terror in India.
o Speedy Trials: Provisions for speedy trials and special courts for terrorism-related cases.
o Enhanced Penalties: Introduced the death penalty for certain terrorism-related offenses.
 2012 Amendment:
o Economic Security: Expanded definitions to include threats to the economic security of India by means of
production or smuggling of high-quality counterfeit Indian currency.
o Judicial Proceedings: Allowed courts to take cognizance of offenses without the accused being committed
for trial.
 2019 Amendment:
o Individual Designation as Terrorists: Prior to this amendment, only organizations could be designated as
terrorist organizations. The 2019 amendment enabled the government to designate individuals as terrorists
as well.
o Procedure for Seizure/Attachment of Property: Streamlined the process for the seizure and attachment
of property linked to terrorism.
o Reciprocal Arrangement: Provided for a reciprocal arrangement for the recognition of other countries' lists
of terrorist organizations and terrorists, enhancing international cooperation.

Extent: Applies to the whole of India, and to:

o Indian citizens anywhere in the world
o Persons in the service of the Government, regardless of location
o Persons on ships and aircraft registered in India

Tribunal: Establishment of a Tribunal to confirm the legality of the government's declarations of unlawful
associations within six months.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 292 of 348

 1

Designation: Empowers the government to declare any activity as unlawful, which can be declared by publishing a
notice in the Official Gazette.

Terrorist Organizations:
 Listed in Schedule 1: Includes Khalistan Zindabad Force, International Sikh Youth Federation, Lashkar-E-Taiba,
Jaish-E-Mohammed, and others.
 Authorities: Central Government can add or remove organizations from the Schedule.

Legal Provisions:
 NIA Authority: Empowers the National Investigation Agency (NIA) to investigate and prosecute cases
nationwide.
 Charge Sheet Filing: Allows up to 180 days for filing charge sheets, extendable after notifying the court.
 Punishments: Includes severe penalties like the death penalty and life imprisonment for certain offenses.

PARIS AGREEMENT, COP26, INDC AND PANCHAMRIT

Paris Agreement:
 Formalized: 30 November to 11 December 2015, in Paris, France.
 Participating Nations: 195 countries discussed the global agreement on climate change.
 Length and Structure: The agreement consists of 32 pages and contains 29 articles.
 Key Feature: First comprehensive global agreement on climate change.

Main Aims of the Paris Agreement

 Temperature Goals:
o Keep global temperature rise well below 2°C above pre-industrial levels this century.
o Pursue efforts to limit the temperature increase even further to 1.5°C.
 Adaptation: Strengthen the ability of countries to deal with the impacts of climate change.

Significant Elements
 Language Versions: Known as L’accord de Paris in French.
 Emissions Target: Limit greenhouse gases emitted by human activity to the levels that trees, soil, and oceans
can absorb naturally, between 2050 and 2100.
 Review Mechanism: Requires a review of each country's contribution to cutting emissions every five years.
 Financial Support: Developed countries to provide "climate finance" to help poorer nations adapt to climate
change and switch to renewable energy.

Binding vs Non-Binding Provisions

 Binding: Reporting requirements are binding.
 Non-Binding: Emissions targets for any individual country are non-binding.

Context Under UNFCCC

 Relation to Other Agreements: Falls under the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change
(UNFCCC) which started in 1992.
 Preceding Agreement: Follows the Kyoto Protocol of 1997, which did not mandate developing countries to
reduce emissions.

Key Sessions and Contributions

 Conference Sessions: Paris Agreement was reached during the 21st session of the Conference of the Parties
(COP 21) and the 11th session of the Conference of the Parties serving as the meeting of the Parties to the Kyoto
Protocol (CMP 11).
 Nationally Determined Contributions (NDCs):
o Countries voluntarily pledge to cut emissions.
o All Parties to report regularly on their emissions and implementation efforts.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 293 of 348

 1

o First stocktake in 2018 and every five years thereafter.

India’s Commitment (INDC)

 Emissions Intensity: Reduce emissions intensity of its GDP by 33 to 35% by 2030 from 2005 levels.
 Carbon Sink: Create an additional carbon sink of 2.5 to 3 billion tonnes of CO2 equivalent through additional
forest and tree cover by 2030.
 Solar Alliance: Lead the International Solar Alliance (INSPA) targeting solar policy and application among
tropical nations.

Implementation Frameworks
 Technology Framework: Support innovation and access to climate technology.
 Capacity Building Framework: Enhance support for capacity building in developing countries.
 Transparency Framework: Build mutual trust and confidence and promote effective implementation through
transparent action.

Importance and Timeline

 Post-2020 Agenda: Addresses global greenhouse gas emissions management post the Kyoto Protocol which
ends in 2020.
 Funding: Developed countries to provide $100 billion annually from 2020 as a starting point.
 Enforcement: Entered into force on 4 November 2016, after the required threshold of at least 55 Parties
accounting for at least 55% of global greenhouse gas emissions ratified the agreement.

India’s Updated INDCs Announced at COP-26

The UN COP 26 Summit, or the 26th session of the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change, was
held in Glasgow from October 31 to November 12, 2021.
 The summit was a chance for countries to make progress on the goals of the 2015 Paris Agreement, and to
negotiate the details of how the agreement would work in the future
 India announced the slogan "One LIFE, One World", where LIFE stands for Lifestyle for Environment Today.
 India announced a five-point pledge, or Panchamrit, to achieve its nationally determined contributions earlier
than the target:
o Increase non-fossil fuel energy capacity to 500 GW by 2030.
o Meet 50% of energy requirements from renewable sources by 2030.
o Reduce total projected carbon emissions by 1 billion tonnes from now through 2030.
o Reduce carbon intensity of the economy to less than 45%.
o Achieve Net Zero by 2070 (not included in NDCs as it is a long-term target).
Revisions to Existing Targets
 Emission Intensity: Revised target to reduce emission intensity by 45% by 2030, from the original 33-35%.
 Electric Power from Non-Fossil Sources: Revised target to achieve 50% capacity from non-fossil fuel sources
by 2030, including large hydropower (previously only renewable sources like solar and wind).
Context and Significance of India’s Climate Targets
 Progress on Initial INDCs:
o Emissions intensity was 24% lower than 2005 levels by 2016.
o Over 40% of electricity now comes from non-fossil fuels, surpassing the initial target.
 Framework for 2021-2030: Sets the pathway for India's clean energy transition, promoting sustainable
lifestyles and climate justice.
 Potential Impact: Expected to enhance manufacturing capabilities, increase exports, and create more green
jobs.
Challenges in Achieving Targets
 500 GW Non-Fossil Fuel Capacity: Current non-fossil capacity stands at 167 GW; reaching 500 GW requires a
significant increase.
 Billion Ton Carbon Reduction: No official projection for 2030 emissions; absence of a baseline makes this
target challenging to quantify.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 294 of 348

 1

Impacts of 1.5°C Temperature Rise on India (Based on IPCC AR6 and CSE Study)
 General Temperature Increase: India could warm by 1.2°C, with increased rainfall by about 10% annually.
 Regional Temperature Increases:
o Ladakh: up to 2.23°C warmer.
o Rajasthan and Gujarat: increases of 1.43°C and 1.33°C, respectively.
 Glacial Melt and Precipitation Changes: Likely in northern and western India, affecting water sources and
agriculture.
 Heatwaves: Increased days of heatwaves, with Rajasthan, Delhi, and Gujarat experiencing up to 13 additional
days above 40°C.
 Rainfall Distribution: Uneven increase across regions; maximum increase expected in Rajasthan (up to 22.87%
more rain).
COP26 Summit Overview and Objectives
 Summit Location and Date: Held in Glasgow.
 Global Temperature Goal: Urged to keep global warming not to exceed +1.5°C.
 Net Zero Emissions: Around 140 countries announced target dates for reaching net zero emissions.
Key Achievements of COP26
 Global and Country Targets:
o Countries encouraged to strengthen their 2030 targets by the next COP27 in Egypt, 2022.
o Developing countries, which previously only agreed to reduce "emissions-intensity" of GDP, now part of the
net-zero consensus.
 India’s Commitment:
o Announced a net-zero target for 2070.
o Represents a significant step from past positions, aligning with global emission reduction goals.
 Glasgow Breakthrough Agenda:
o Endorsed by 42 countries including India.
o Focuses on accelerating the development and deployment of clean technologies in sectors like power,
transport, steel, and hydrogen.

Challenges and Setbacks at COP26

 Voluntary Nature of Targets:
o Targets set are voluntary, with no enforcement mechanism or penalties for non-compliance.
o Many targets are conditional on financial support.
 Phasing Down of Coal:
o A compromise was reached with a call for a "phase-down" of coal consumption rather than a complete phase-
out.
o Resistance primarily from developing countries, with a middle path suggested by India.
 Climate Finance:
o Developed countries urged to scale up climate finance provisions, but no firm funding commitments secured.
 Emissions and Carbon Budget:
o Unequal distribution of carbon budget among the world's largest emitters.
o China, USA, and Europe together use 78% of the carbon budget but only account for 30% of the global
population.

Assessment and Projections

 Climate Action Tracker (CAT) Analysis:
o Early assessments suggest that if targets are fully met, global warming could be limited to around +1.8°C.
o Warns that 2030 targets are not ambitious enough, with potential global temperature rise of 2.1°C to 2.4°C.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 295 of 348

 1

JUSTICE HEMA COMMITTEE REPORT

Background of Justice Hema Committee
 Formation: Formed in response to a petition by the Women in Cinema Collective (WCC) to the Chief Minister of
Kerala, Pinarayi Vijayan.
 Context: Addressing issues in the Malayalam film industry.
 Report Submission: Report submitted in December 2019; released on August 19, 2024.
 Members:
o Justice K. Hema (Chairperson): Former Judge, High Court of Kerala.
o Smt. T. Sarada: Artist.
o Smt. K.B. Valsalakumari: Retired Principal Secretary, Government of Kerala.

Terms of Reference for the Justice Hema Committee

1. Security concerns and solutions for women.
2. Service conditions and remuneration.
3. Enhancing women's participation across all cinema fields.
4. Increasing female involvement in technical cinema roles.
5. Support during childbirth, childcare, or health-related work absences.
6. Promoting gender equality in cinema content.
7. Encouraging productions with at least 30% women involved in production activities.

Key Issues Highlighted by the Justice Hema Committee

 Sexual Harassment and Abuse:
o Unwanted Physical Advances: Incidents reported before commencing work, including rape threats and
demeaning code names for compliant women.
o Casting Couch: Widespread issue where sexual favors are exchanged for job opportunities; compliant
female actors labeled as "cooperating artists."
o Forced Collaboration: Women compelled to work alongside their abusers, leading to significant emotional
distress.
 Safety Concerns on Film Sets: Due to fears of harassment, female workers often bring relatives for
protection on set.
 Criminal Influence in the Industry: Presence of criminal elements within the industry, with instances of men
under the influence of substances causing disturbances at female artists' accommodations.
 Fear of Reporting: Despite legal protections under the Indian Penal Code and the Sexual Harassment of
Women at Workplace Act 2013, fear of backlash and stigma deters many from lodging complaints.
 Cyberthreats: Online Harassment: Significant issue with cyberbullying, including vulgar and threatening
messages targeted especially at female artists on social media platforms.
 Inadequate Facilities: Lack of proper amenities like toilets on set, forcing female artists to limit water intake
and face challenges managing menstrual hygiene in outdoor locations.
 Inhumane Working Conditions: Junior Artists, often work up to 19 hours with delayed payments and a
portion of earnings taken by intermediaries; conditions described as worse than slavery.

Recommendations suggested in the Report:

 Internal Complaints Committee (ICC):
o Mandatory Establishment: Under the Sexual Harassment of Women at Workplace (Prevention, Prohibition,
and Redressal) Act, 2013.
o Membership: Should include members from the Film Employees Federation of Kerala (FEFKA) and the
Association of Malayalam Movie Artists (AMMA).
 Independent Tribunal:
o Advocacy for Creation: To address harassment and discrimination specifically within the cinema industry.
o In-camera Proceedings: Recommended to ensure privacy and confidentiality, with names withheld from
media reports.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 296 of 348

 1

 Written Contracts:
o Mandatory Requirement: For all categories of cinema employees, including coordinators of junior artists,
to safeguard their interests.
 Gender Awareness Training Program:
o Mandatory Training: For all cast and crew before starting production.
o Language and Accessibility: Training materials to be available in Malayalam and English and accessible
online.
 Support for Women Producers:
o Budgetary and Financial Support: Timely support to incentivize movies focused on gender justice in
themes and production.
o Single-Window System: Proposed for facilitating loans at nominal interest rates and streamlining
permissions for shootings led by women producers (ensuring no male proxies).

CARLOS ALCARAZ'S ACHIEVEMENTS IN TENNIS

 Grand Slam Titles: Carlos Alcaraz has won his 4th Grand Slam title by defeating Serbia's Novak Djokovic in the
Wimbledon men's singles final.
 Record: Alcaraz is the youngest player to win 4 Grand Slam titles, achieving this milestone before the age of
22.
 Recent Wins: The new generation, including Alcaraz and Italy's Jannik Sinner, has claimed 4 out of the last 5
Grand Slam titles.

Grand Slam Definition and History

 Definition of Grand Slam: Winning all four major tennis championships (Australia, France, Britain
[Wimbledon], and the US) in the same calendar season.
 Historical Achievements:
o The Grand Slam feat has been accomplished 6 times by 5 different players.
o Don Budge was the first to achieve a Grand Slam in tennis in 1938 by winning all four major championships
in a single year.
Carlos Alcaraz's Grand Slam Titles
 Wimbledon 2023 and 2024: Alcaraz won his first and second Wimbledon titles.
 U.S. Open 2022: Secured his first Grand Slam title.
 French Open 2024: Demonstrated his versatility with a victory on clay.
Significance of Alcaraz's Victories
 Perfect Grand Slam Final Record: Alcaraz has won all four Grand Slam finals he has competed in.
 Young Prodigy: Alcaraz established himself as a dominant player by age 21.
Impact on Novak Djokovic
 Record Prevention: Djokovic's loss prevented him from securing his 25th Grand Slam title.
 Wimbledon Record: Denied Djokovic the chance to match Roger Federer's record of eight Wimbledon titles.
Carlos Alcaraz - Profile
 Early Start: Began playing tennis at age four and turned professional at age 16.
 Coaching: Coached by former World No. 1 Juan Carlos Ferrero.
 Youngest Achievements:
o Youngest player to win an ATP 500 tournament at 17.
o Became the youngest World No. 1 after his U.S. Open victory in 2022.
About Novak Djokovic
 Birth: Born on May 22, 1987, in Belgrade, Serbia.
 Career Highlights:
o Grand Slam Wins: 24 titles including a Career Grand Slam.
o ATP Records: Over 380 weeks as World No. 1.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 297 of 348

 1

o Masters 1000: First player to win all nine ATP Masters 1000 tournaments.
About Wimbledon
 Oldest Tennis Tournament: Established in 1877 at the All England Club, London.
 Surface: Only Grand Slam played on grass courts.
 Traditions: Known for its strict all-white dress code.
 Championship Trophies:
o Men's champion receives a silver gilt cup.
o Women's champion receives the Venus Rosewater Dish.
General Tennis Facts
 Origins: Modern tennis began in late 19th-century England.
 Grand Slam: Comprises the Australian Open, French Open, Wimbledon, and US Open.
 Scoring System: Points are 15, 30, 40, and game.
 Longest Match: John Isner vs. Nicolas Mahut at Wimbledon 2010, lasting 11 hours and 5 minutes.

GALLANTRY AWARD 2024

 Date & Occasion: India celebrated its 78th Independence Day.
 Theme for 2024: 'Viksit Bharat', symbolizing the vision of becoming a developed nation by 2047.
Gallantry and Police Awards
 Kirti Chakra
o Criteria: Awarded for conspicuous gallantry otherwise than in the face of the enemy. Can be awarded
posthumously.
o Design: Circular medal made of standard silver, featuring an embossed Ashoka Chakra surrounded by a lotus
wreath.
o Ribbon: Green with two orange vertical lines.
o Awards Issued: 4 (including three posthumous).
 Shaurya Chakra
o Criteria: Recognizes gallantry otherwise than in the face of the enemy, similar to the Kirti Chakra. Can also
be awarded posthumously.
o Design: Circular bronze medal with an embossed Ashoka Chakra surrounded by a lotus wreath.
o Ribbon: Green divided into four equal parts by three vertical lines.
o Further Recognition: A Bar can be attached for each subsequent act of gallantry, with a miniature replica
of the Chakra added to the ribbon when worn alone.
o Awards Issued: 18 (including four posthumous).
 Sena Medal (Gallantry)
o Criteria: Awarded for acts of bravery or exceptional service by army personnel.
o Recognition for Repeated Acts: One Bar to Sena Medal (Gallantry) awarded for subsequent acts of bravery.
o Awards Issued: 63 (including two posthumous) and one Bar.
 Nao Sena Medal (Gallantry)
o Criteria: Awarded for exceptional devotion to duty or courage by Navy personnel.
o Awards Issued: 11.
 Vayu Sena Medal (Gallantry)
o Criteria: Awarded for acts of courage or exceptional devotion to duty by Air Force personnel.
o Recognition for Repeated Acts: A bar is given for each subsequent award.
o Awards Issued: 6.
 Mention-in-Despatches
o Criteria: Awarded for distinguished and meritorious service in operational areas and acts of gallantry not of
a high order enough to receive a gallantry award.
o Eligibility: All Army, Navy, Air Force personnel, and other lawfully constituted Armed Forces, members of
Nursing services, civilians working with or under the Armed Forces.
o Operations Cited: Including Operation Rakshak, Operation Snow Leopard, Operation Sahayata, Operation
Hifazat, Operation Orchid, and Operation Katchal.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 298 of 348

 1

o Awards Issued: 39, including posthumous to Army Dog Kent.

Military Operations Cited

 Operation Rakshak: Counter-insurgency in Jammu and Kashmir since June 1990.
 Operation Snow Leopard: Response to 2020 Chinese forces' standoff in Eastern Ladakh.
 Operation Sahayata: Humanitarian aid and disaster relief.
 Operation Orchid: Counter-insurgency in Nagaland.
 Operation Hifazat: Counter-insurgency in Nagaland-Manipur-Arunachal Pradesh.
 Operation Katchal: Details not specified in the brief.
Police Medals
 President’s Medal for Gallantry (PMG)
o Criteria: Highest police decoration awarded for acts of conspicuous gallantry in saving life and property,
preventing crime, or arresting criminals.
o Awards Issued: 1 to Shri Chaduvu Yadaiah, Head Constable, for bravery during a confrontation with
criminals.
 Medal for Gallantry (GM)
o Criteria: Awarded for acts of gallantry, with categories including decorations for firefighters and civil
defence personnel.
o Awards Issued: 213.
 President’s Medal for Distinguished Service (PSM)
o Criteria: Awarded for exceptional and distinguished service in police work.
o Awards Issued: 94.
 Medal for Meritorious Service (MSM)
o Criteria: Awarded for valuable service characterized by resourcefulness and devotion to duty.
o Awards Issued: 729.

DRDO LAUNCHES ZORAWAR: INDIA'S INDIGENOUS LIGHT TANK FOR TRIALS

 Development: Indigenously designed and developed in India.
 Collaboration: Joint project by the Defence Research and Development Organisation (DRDO) and Larsen &
Toubro (L&T), with L&T as the lead integrator.
 Naming: Named after General Zorawar Singh Kahluria, a 19th-century military leader who served under Raja
Gulab Singh of Jammu.

Key Features of Zorawar Light Tank

 Weight: Designed with a maximum weight of 25 tonnes, enabling air transportability.
 Firepower: Capable of high-angle fire, allowing it to perform limited artillery roles.
 Agility: Described as an agile weapon platform suitable for fast and mobile operations.
 Operational Terrain: Versatile design for operation in diverse environments, including high-altitude areas,
marginal terrains, and island territories.
 Technological Enhancements:
o Equipped with Artificial Intelligence and Drone Integration.
o Features advanced situational awareness capabilities.
o Capable of amphibious operations, enhancing its operational flexibility.
 Optimization: Balances the critical tank parameters—firepower, mobility, and protection—while maintaining a
light weight.

Induction and Trials

 Trials: Set to undergo extensive testing to evaluate its performance across various parameters.
 Induction Schedule: Expected to be officially inducted into the Indian Army by 2027, pending successful trials.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 299 of 348

 1

WOMEN AND MEN IN INDIA REPORT 2023

 Projected Population by 2036: India’s population is expected to reach 152.2 crore.
 Female Population: Expected to slightly increase to 48.8% in 2036 from 48.5% in 2011.
 Age Demographics:
o Decrease in the proportion of individuals under 15 years, attributed to declining fertility rates.
o Increase in the proportion of the elderly (60 years and above).

Gender Ratio and Fertility Rates

 Sex Ratio Improvement: Projected to improve from 943 females per 1,000 males in 2011 to 952 by 2036.
 Fertility Trends:
o Decrease in fertility rates for women aged 20-24 and 25-29, indicating a trend towards delayed
childbearing.
o Increase in fertility rates for women aged 35-39, suggesting later life family expansion.
 Adolescent Fertility Rate: Significantly lower among literate women (11.0) compared to illiterate women
(33.9), emphasizing the role of education in reducing early pregnancies.

Maternal and Child Health

 Maternal Mortality Ratio (MMR): Reduced to 97 per 100,000 live births for 2018-20, progressing towards
the SDG target of 70 by 2030.
 Infant Mortality Rate (IMR): Decreased to 28 per 1,000 live births in 2020 for both genders.
 Under-5 Mortality Rate: Reduction indicates improvements in child health.

Labor Force and Economic Participation

 Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR):
o Increase for men from 75.8% in 2017-18 to 78.5% in 2022-23.
o Significant increase for women from 23.3% to 37% in the same period, showing enhanced female workforce
involvement.
Political Participation and Entrepreneurship
 Voter Turnout:
o Women’s voter turnout in the 2019 elections was 67.2%, surpassing men’s turnout, reflecting increased
political engagement among women.
 Women Entrepreneurs in the Start-Up Ecosystem:
o As of December 2023, India has 1,17,254 recognized start-ups, with 55,816 led by women, accounting
for 47.6% of all start-ups.

Population Pyramids
 Current Shape: India’s population pyramid exhibits a triangular shape.
 Future Projection (2036): As per MoSPI data, by 2036, the pyramid is expected to transition into a bell shape
tapering towards the top.
 Definition: A population pyramid is a graphical representation that shows the distribution of people by sex
and age group.
 Triangular Shaped Pyramids:
o Characteristics: Wide base indicating a high number of young people due to high birth rates.
o Common in Less Developed Countries: Examples include Bangladesh and Nigeria.
 Bell Shaped Pyramid (Tapering at the Top):
o Characteristics: Birth and death rates are almost equal, resulting in a stable population.
o Example: Australia.

Demographic Transition Model (Population Cycle)

 Developed by: Warren Thompson, an American demographer, in 1929.
 Stages of Population Growth: The model describes the changes in population growth rates across four stages.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 300 of 348

 1

Stages of the Demographic Transition Model

1. Stage 1:
o Fertility and Mortality: Both are high due to epidemics, food shortages, and poor health conditions.
o Population Growth: Slow population growth as births compensate for high death rates.
o Economy and Society: Mostly agricultural societies where large families are beneficial.
o Life Expectancy: Low life expectancy, illiteracy and low levels of technology.
o Historical Context: 200 years ago, all countries were in this stage.
2. Stage 2:
o Fertility and Mortality: Fertility remains high but begins to decline gradually; mortality rates decrease
sharply.
o Population Growth: Rapid population growth due to the gap between high fertility and falling mortality.
o Improvements: Better sanitation and healthcare reduce death rates.
3. Stage 3:
o Fertility and Mortality: Both fertility and mortality decline significantly.
o Population Growth: The population becomes more stable or grows slowly.
o Societal Changes: Societies become urbanized, literate, and adopt higher levels of technology.
o Family Size: People deliberately control family size, adjusting fertility rates.

PM VISIT TO BRUNEI AND SINGAPORE

Brunei Darussalam
 Location: Located on the north-west of Borneo with a 161-km coastline along the South China Sea; bordered
by Malaysia on all sides except the north.
 Economy: Predominantly reliant on crude oil and natural gas exports.
o Third-largest oil producer in Southeast Asia.
o Fourth-largest liquefied natural gas (LNG) producer globally.
 Main Exports: Crude oil, petroleum products, and liquefied natural gas, mostly exported to Japan, the US, and
ASEAN countries.

Singapore
 Geography: An island nation consisting of one main island (Pulau Ujong) and 62 smaller islands. It is located
between Malaysia to the north and Indonesia to the south.
 Historical Background: Originally known as Tumasik ("sea"), renamed Singapura ("Lion City") in the 14th
century. Singapore was under British rule from 1826, briefly occupied by Japan during WWII, and became fully
independent in 1965.
 Government and Economy: Parliamentary republic with one of the strongest economies in Southeast Asia,
excelling in banking and manufacturing.

Key Outcomes of PM’s Visit to Brunei Darussalam

 Omar Ali Saifuddien Mosque Visit: PM visited this mosque, a symbol of Brunei’s Islamic heritage.
 ISRO Cooperation: India appreciated Brunei's support in hosting ISRO’s Telemetry Tracking and
Telecommand (TTC) Station and discussed further cooperation under a renewed MoU.
 South China Sea: Both nations emphasized peaceful dispute resolution in the South China Sea, in line with
UNCLOS 1982.
 Multilateral Cooperation: Agreed to enhance collaboration in multilateral forums like ASEAN-India Dialogue
Relations, East Asia Summit, and the UN.
 Climate Change: India supported Brunei's climate change initiatives, including the ASEAN Centre for
Climate Change.
 Energy Cooperation: Initiated discussions for long-term liquefied natural gas (LNG) cooperation following
India's reduced oil imports from Brunei.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 301 of 348

 1

Key Outcomes of PM’s Visit to Singapore

 Semiconductor Ecosystem Partnership: Signed an MoU to develop a resilient semiconductor supply chain,
given Singapore’s significant role, contributing 10% of global semiconductor output.
 Comprehensive Strategic Partnership: Bilateral ties were elevated to a Comprehensive Strategic
Partnership, expanding cooperation across multiple sectors.
 Sustainability Cooperation: Both nations agreed to collaborate on green hydrogen and ammonia projects,
with a framework in development.
 Food Security: India agreed to exempt non-Basmati white rice exports to Singapore to support Singapore’s
food security needs.
 Digital Technologies: Signed an MoU to deepen cooperation in data, AI, and cybersecurity, including
establishing a Cyber Policy Dialogue.
 Fintech Cooperation: Recognized the significance of the UPI-PayNow linkage and TradeTrust initiative in
facilitating paperless transactions.
 Cultural Linkages: PM announced the opening of the Thiruvalluvar Cultural Centre in Singapore, highlighting
cultural ties and the Indian community’s contributions.
India’s Relations with Brunei Darussalam and Singapore
Brunei Darussalam
 Political Relations: Diplomatic relations established in 1984. Strong ties through cultural linkages and
memberships in organizations like the UN, NAM, Commonwealth, and ASEAN.
 Commercial Relations: India imports crude oil from Brunei, with imports valued at USD 500-600 million
annually. India’s exports to Brunei include automobiles, rice, spices, and transport equipment.
 Indian Community: A longstanding Indian diaspora in Brunei, with many working in the oil, gas,
construction, and retail sectors.
Singapore
 Historical Connect: Historical ties date back to the 19th century when Stamford Raffles established a trading
post in Singapore, then governed from Kolkata. India recognized Singapore’s independence in 1965.
 Trade and Economic Cooperation:
o Trade: Singapore is India’s 6th largest trade partner, accounting for 3.2% of India’s overall trade.
o Investments: Singapore has been the largest contributor of FDI to India since 2018-19. Top sectors include
services, software, telecommunications, and pharmaceuticals.
o Fintech: RuPay card acceptance in Singapore and the UPI-PayNow linkage mark significant cross-border
fintech developments.
 Science and Technology Cooperation: ISRO has launched several Singaporean satellites, including its first
indigenous micro-satellite in 2011.
 Multilateral Cooperation: Singapore is a member of the International Solar Alliance and Global Bio-fuel
Alliance, and is part of multilateral groups like IORA.
 Indian Community: Ethnic Indians make up about 9.1% of Singapore’s population. Tamil is one of Singapore's
four official languages.

KHALISTAN MOVEMENT
The Khalistan movement seeks the establishment of a separate, sovereign Sikh state in present-day Punjab (both
India and Pakistan).
 Current Status: While the movement was crushed in India following Operation Blue Star (1984) and
Operation Black Thunder (1986, 1988), it still garners sympathy and support, especially among the Sikh
diaspora in countries like Canada, the UK, and Australia.

Timeline of the Khalistan Movement

India’s Independence and Partition (1947):
 The origins of the movement trace back to India’s Independence and Partition, which divided Punjab between
India and Pakistan.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 302 of 348

 1

 Lahore, the capital of Maharaja Ranjit Singh’s Sikh Empire, and several holy Sikh sites, including Nankana Sahib,
went to Pakistan, fueling resentment.

Demand for Punjabi Suba (1950s-1960s):

 The demand for an autonomous Punjabi-speaking state led to the Punjabi Suba Movement.
 In 1966, Punjab was reorganized into three states:
o Punjab (Sikh-majority, Punjabi-speaking),
o Haryana (Hindu-majority, Hindi-speaking),
o Himachal Pradesh (Hindu-majority, Hindi-speaking).

Anandpur Sahib Resolution (1973):

 The Akali Dal released the Anandpur Sahib Resolution, which demanded greater autonomy for Punjab,
identified regions for a separate state, and sought the right to frame its own constitution.
 Although the Akalis clarified that they were not demanding secession, the resolution raised concerns for the
Indian government.

Rise of Bhindranwale (1980s):

 Jarnail Singh Bhindranwale, a charismatic Sikh preacher, positioned himself as the voice of the Sikhs.
 Initially supported by Sanjay Gandhi for political purposes, Bhindranwale soon became a threat to the
government.

Dharam Yudh Morcha (1982):

 Bhindranwale, along with Akali Dal’s leadership, launched the Dharam Yudh Morcha, a civil disobedience
movement.
 Bhindranwale took residence inside the Golden Temple and began directing demonstrations.
 The movement’s demands were based on the Anandpur Sahib Resolution, and tensions escalated with growing
religious polarization and violence.

Operation Blue Star (1984):

 Operation Blue Star began on 1st June 1984 to remove Bhindranwale and his armed supporters from the
Golden Temple.
 The operation involved the use of tanks and air support. Bhindranwale was killed, and the militants were
removed, but the operation severely hurt the sentiments of the Sikh community worldwide, further galvanizing
the Khalistan demand.

Aftermath of Operation Blue Star:

 In October 1984, Prime Minister Indira Gandhi was assassinated by two Sikh bodyguards, triggering large-
scale anti-Sikh riots where over 8,000 Sikhs were killed.
 In 1985, Sikh nationalists based in Canada bombed an Air India flight, killing 329 people as revenge for
Bhindranwale’s death.
 Punjab became the center of a violent insurgency that lasted until 1995. However, the majority of the population
turned against the militants, and India moved towards economic liberalization.

Current Status of the Khalistan Movement

 Punjab has remained peaceful, but the movement still has support within some sections of the Sikh diaspora
overseas.
 Many in the diaspora who support the cause are those who left India during or remember the 1980s insurgency
and Operation Blue Star.
 Although Bhindranwale is seen as a martyr by many Sikhs, and the events of the 1980s are remembered as dark
times, this has not translated into significant political support for the Khalistan cause today.
 A small minority clings to the past, and their influence is driven more by political lobbying in their host countries
rather than popular support.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 303 of 348

 1

India-Canada Diplomatic Row

 Canada’s Claim: Canadian Prime Minister Justin Trudeau alleged that the Indian government played a role in
the killing of Khalistani separatist Hardeep Singh Nijjar in June 2023. Trudeau stated that Canadian security
agencies had been investigating a potential link between Indian agents and Nijjar’s death.
 India’s Response: India rejected the claim, calling it “absurd and motivated,” and emphasized that such
allegations shift focus away from the Khalistani terrorists sheltered in Canada. India urged Canada to take legal
action against anti-India elements operating from its soil.
 Diplomatic Fallout: Following the allegations, Canada expelled an Indian diplomat, to which India retaliated
by expelling a top Canadian diplomat on September 19, 2023.
Who Was Hardeep Singh Nijjar?
 Nijjar’s Background:
o Nationality: Canadian national, lived in Surrey, about 30 km southeast of Vancouver, British Columbia.
o Migration: Moved from Punjab to Canada in 1997 and worked as a plumber. He became the president of
the Surrey gurdwara body in 2020.
o Birthplace: Nijjar hailed from Bhar Singh Pura village, Jalandhar district, Punjab.
 Involvement in Separatism:
o Khalistan Tiger Force (KTF): Head of KTF, a militant outfit aiming to revive terrorism in Punjab and
challenge India’s territorial integrity.
o Connections:
 Pakistan Visit: Allegedly visited Pakistan in 2013-14 to meet Jagtar Singh Tara, a key figure in the assassination
of Punjab CM Beant Singh.
 Dal Khalsa: Associated with Gajinder Singh, one of the hijackers of an Indian Airlines flight in 1981.
o Terrorist Designation: In February 2023, India’s Ministry of Home Affairs designated KTF as a terrorist
organization under the Unlawful Activities Prevention Act (UAPA).
Hardeep Singh Nijjar’s Connection to the KTF
 Role in KTF: Actively involved in the operationalization, networking, training, and financing of KTF
members.
 Allegations:
o NIA Cases: Involved in several cases of targeted killings in Punjab. A cash reward of Rs 10 lakh was
declared for information leading to his arrest by the National Investigation Agency (NIA).
o Insurrectionary Activities: Accused of using social media to spread insurrectionary imputations and sow
discord among different communities in India.

Nijjar’s Activities and Legal Cases

 NIA FIR (2020): Named in an FIR during the farmers' protests in Delhi. Accused of conspiring with other
separatists to create unrest in India.
 Connection with Sikhs for Justice (SFJ): Associated with SFJ, a separatist group banned in India. Participated
in the so-called Khalistan Referendum voting in Australia.
 Properties in Punjab: His properties were attached by Indian authorities in 2020 due to his involvement with
SFJ.

CLAUSE 6 OF ASSAM ACCORD

 Background: Assam Accord (1985):
o The Assam Accord was signed between the Rajiv Gandhi-led Union government and the All Assam
Students’ Union (AASU) in 1985.
o It ended a six-year-long agitation against the entry of Bangladeshi migrants into Assam.
 Clause 6:
o It promises Constitutional, legislative, and administrative safeguards to protect the cultural, social,
linguistic identity, and heritage of the Assamese people.
o The aim is to address concerns regarding Assam's demographic and cultural integrity due to the influx of
migrants.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 304 of 348

 1

Justice Biplab Sarma Committee

 Formation:
o In July 2019, the Union Home Ministry formed a 14-member committee chaired by retired Justice Biplab
Kumar Sarma.
o Its task was to provide recommendations on implementing Clause 6 of the Assam Accord.
o A key issue was defining the term "Assamese people" for implementing the safeguards.
 Submission of the Report:
o The final report was submitted in February 2020 to the then Assam Chief Minister Sarbananda Sonowal.
o In August 2020, four members of the committee publicly released the confidential report.

Key Recommendations of the Report

 Definition of Assamese People:
o The committee recommended defining "Assamese people" to include:
 Indigenous Tribals.
 Other Indigenous Communities of Assam.
 Indian citizens residing in Assam on or before January 1, 1951, and their descendants.
 Indigenous Assamese people.
 Safeguards:
o Based on this definition, the committee recommended reservations for Assamese people in:
 Parliament and the state Assembly.
 Local bodies and jobs.

Classification and Implementation of Recommendations

 Classification:
o The committee's 67 recommendations were classified into three categories:
 40 recommendations under the state government’s jurisdiction.
 12 recommendations requiring Centre’s concurrence.
 15 recommendations exclusively within the Centre’s domain.
 Implementation:
o 52 recommendations from the first two categories will be implemented by April 2025. A roadmap will be
submitted to AASU by October 25, 2024.
 1951 Cut-off Date:
o The 1951 cut-off date was accepted for specific recommendations, but the definition of "Assamese people"
is limited to the context of the report's recommendations.

Land Safeguards
 Special Revenue Circles: Designating areas where only Assamese people can own and transfer land.
 Land Titles: A three-year program to grant land titles to Assamese people who have long occupied land without
proper documentation.
 Char Areas Survey: Surveying char areas (riverine regions) to treat newly formed chars as government land,
prioritizing allocation to those affected by river erosion.

Language Safeguards
 Assamese as Official Language: Retaining Assamese as the official state language as per the 1960 Assam
Official Language Act, with provisions for local languages in specific regions.
 Bilingual Government Documents: Issuing all state government acts, rules, and orders in both Assamese
and English.
 Autonomous Language Council: Establishing a council to preserve and promote indigenous languages of
Assam.
 Assamese in Schools: Making Assamese a compulsory subject in all English medium schools up to Class VIII
or Class X.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 305 of 348

 1

Cultural Heritage Preservation

 Sattras (Neo-Vaishnavite Monasteries): Establishing an autonomous body to oversee the development of
sattras and provide them financial assistance.
 Cultural Complexes: Building multipurpose cultural complexes in every district to preserve the cultural
heritage of all ethnic groups.

Sixth Schedule Areas

 Autonomous Councils: Councils in Sixth Schedule Areas (e.g., Bodoland Territorial Council, North Cachar
Hills Autonomous Council, Karbi Anglong Autonomous Council) will decide whether to implement the 52
recommendations.
 These councils have legislative and judicial autonomy under the Sixth Schedule of the Constitution.

Recommendations Left Out for Now

 Inner Line Permit (ILP): Proposal for implementing an ILP for entry into Assam, similar to Nagaland,
Arunachal Pradesh, Manipur, and Mizoram.
 Reservations for Assamese People:
o Parliament and State Assembly: 80-100% reservation of seats for Assamese in Parliament, State
Assembly, and local bodies.
o Government Jobs: 80-100% reservation in Assam government jobs.
o Private Sector Collaborations: 70-100% reservation in vacancies in government-private sector
collaborations.
 Creation of Upper House: Proposal for establishing a Legislative Council in Assam, exclusively reserved for
Assamese people.
WORLD DEVELOPMENT REPORT 2024
World Bank has released a report titled "World Development Report 2024: The Middle Income Trap"
 The report provides challenges faced by over 100 countries, including India, in achieving high-income status in
the coming decades.
Findings of the Report:
 Middle-Income Trap:
o India is among 100 countries, including China, at risk of falling into the "middle-income trap," where
nations struggle to transition from middle-income to high-income status.
o India stands at a crucial juncture, with favorable demographics and advancements in digitalization, but
faces challenges in the external environment.
o Only 34 middle-income economies have transitioned to high-income status since 1990, often due to special
circumstances like EU integration or oil reserves.
o Middle-income countries, including India, face diminishing returns on physical capital.
o The report criticizes the reliance on outdated economic strategies focusing mainly on expanding
investments.
 Global Economic Impact:
o Middle-income countries are home to 6 billion people, representing 75% of the global population, and
generate over 40% of global GDP.
o The success or failure of these countries in achieving high-income status will significantly impact global
economic prosperity.
 Per Capita Income Disparity:
o India is identified as the fastest-growing major economy, but it will take 75 years for its per capita income
to reach a quarter of the US income levels if current trends continue.
o China would take over 10 years, Indonesia 70 years, and India 75 years to reach this level.
 Challenges and Risks:
o Middle-income countries face challenges such as ageing populations, rising debt, geopolitical tensions,
trade frictions, and environmental concerns.
o These challenges may hinder their ability to become reasonably prosperous societies by the mid-century.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 306 of 348

 1

 Strategic Recommendations (3i Strategy):

o 1i Phase: Focus on investment for low-income countries.
o 2i Phase: Focus on investment and infusion of foreign technologies for lower-middle-income countries.
o 3i Phase: Focus on investment, infusion, and innovation for upper-middle-income countries.
o The report highlights South Korea as an example, where its per capita income rose from USD 1,200 in 1960
to USD 33,000 by 2023 using this strategy.
 Policy Recommendations for India:
o India must adopt a comprehensive approach to enhance overall economic performance instead of focusing
on isolated sectors.
o Improve education and skills to absorb and utilize new technologies and innovations.
o Strengthen university-industry connections to enhance knowledge transfer.
o While India excels in technology preparedness, dynamism in firms is necessary to absorb these
technologies.
o The prevalence of microenterprises in India suggests that policies favoring small firms hinder their
growth into productive enterprises.
What is the Middle-Income Trap?
 The middle-income trap refers to the situation where a country struggles to transition from middle-income to
high-income status.
 It occurs when initial growth drivers, such as low wages and basic technology catch-up, are exhausted, and
countries face institutional weaknesses and lack of innovation.
 According to the World Bank, the middle-income trap refers to stagnation at around USD 8,000 GDP per capita,
or 10% of US levels.
 By the end of 2023, 108 countries were classified as middle-income, housing 75% of the global population
and generating over 40% of global GDP.
Challenges for India in Overcoming the Middle-Income Trap
 Income Inequality: India faces high levels of income inequality, with a Gini index of around 35 over the past
two decades, limiting inclusive growth.
 Poverty Reduction: While India made progress in poverty reduction between 2011 and 2019, the pace has
slowed, especially after the Covid-19 pandemic.
 Balancing Growth and Inflation: India needs to balance monetary policy to control inflation while supporting
economic growth.
 Income Per Capita: India’s per capita income is significantly below the upper-middle-income threshold of USD
4,256.
 Labor Force Participation: Concerns remain about the quality of jobs, wage growth, and the low
participation of women in the workforce.
 Economic Diversification: India must continue diversifying its economy to avoid over-reliance on single sectors.
 Environmental and Climate Resilience: India’s aspiration for high-income status by 2047 must align with its
net-zero emissions goal by 2070.
Factors Supporting India’s Transition to High-Income Status
 Global Offshoring: Increased outsourcing could potentially double employment in outsourced jobs to over 11
million by 2030.
 Digitalization: Programs like Aadhaar and IndiaStack are driving financial inclusion and credit access.
 Energy Transition: Investment in renewable energy and reduced reliance on imported energy will improve
living standards.
 Manufacturing Sector: Policies like PLI schemes aim to boost production and increase manufacturing’s
share of GDP from 15.6% to 21% by 2031.
 Services Sector: Expected to grow at 6.9% between FY 2025 and FY 2031, driving India’s growth.
 Economic Size: India’s GDP could potentially double from USD 3.5 trillion to USD 7 trillion by 2031, making
it the world’s third-largest economy.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 307 of 348

 1

EXTENDED STAY OF ASTRONAUTS ON ISS

 Astronauts Affected: Sunita Williams and Barry "Butch" Wilmore are expected to stay on the International
Space Station (ISS) until February 2025 due to technical issues with the Boeing Starliner spacecraft.
 Starliner Issues: The spacecraft encountered a helium leak before launch and additional leaks during transit,
delaying their return.
 Return Schedule: Initially set to return a week after arrival, their return is now delayed until February 2025,
with a potential alternative return on a SpaceX spacecraft scheduled for September 2024.

Starliner Spacecraft
 Design: The Boeing Starliner is designed to carry astronauts with a crew capsule, reentry capability, and a
non-reusable service module for life support and propulsion.
 Comparable Spacecraft: Similar to SpaceX's Crew Dragon and NASA's SpaceX Demo-2 missions.

ISS Capacity and Current Crew

 Current Crew: The ISS is housing seven astronauts, with space to accommodate more if necessary.
 Facilities: The ISS has six sleeping quarters, two bathrooms, and a gym, ensuring support for an extended
crew.
 Resupply Capability: The ISS is regularly resupplied by cargo ships like Cygnus, which recently delivered over
3,700 kg of supplies. However, cargo ships cannot return crew as they lack life-support capsules.

Historical Context of Extended Space Stays

 Longest Space Stays:
o Valeri Polyakov holds the record for the longest space stay, at 438 days on the Mir space station.
o Frank Rubio spent 371 days on the ISS recently.
 Williams and Wilmore's Previous ISS Experience:
o Sunita Williams spent 196 days on the ISS in 2006-07 and another 127 days in 2012.
o Barry Wilmore has completed 178 days over two previous ISS missions.

Impact of Long-Duration Space Missions on Health

 Bone Density Loss: Astronauts can lose up to 1% bone mass per month in microgravity, increasing the risk of
osteoporosis and fractures.
 Muscle Atrophy: Extended space stays result in muscle loss and diminished strength, requiring daily exercise
to counteract the effects.
 Vision and Cardiovascular Health: Spaceflight can cause vision problems, such as Spaceflight Associated
Neuro-ocular Syndrome (SANS), and alter the shape and function of the heart.
 Psychological Effects: Prolonged isolation can lead to stress, anxiety, and other psychological challenges.

Key Facts About the International Space Station (ISS)

 Launch Date: 1998
 Continuous Operation: Continuously occupied since 2000.
 Participating Agencies: NASA (USA), Roscosmos (Russia), ESA (Europe), JAXA (Japan), and CSA (Canada).
 Orbit: Approximately 400 kilometers above Earth.
 Speed: Travels at about 28,000 kilometers per hour, completing one orbit every 90 minutes.
 Objectives: To advance understanding of space and microgravity, support scientific research, and promote
international collaboration.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 308 of 348

 1

WAYANAD LANDSLIDE
 Casualties: At least 144 persons killed and 197 injured after multiple landslides hit Vythiri taluk in Wayanad
district, Kerala.
 Timing: The first landslide struck around 1 am, followed by a second landslide at 4:30 am.

Possible Causes of the Wayanad Landslide

1. Heavy Rainfall:
o The region received more than 140 mm of rainfall in 24 hours between Monday and Tuesday.
o This was five times higher than the expected rainfall.
o Heavy monsoon rains trigger landslides almost every year in Kerala.
2. Hilly Terrain:
o Western Kerala, a hilly region with sharp slopes, is prone to landslides.
o According to ISRO's Landslide Atlas (2023), 10 out of 30 most landslide-prone districts in India are in
Kerala, with Wayanad ranked 13th.
o The terrain consists of a layer of soil over hard rocks. Heavy rainfall weakens the soil's binding with rocks,
triggering landslides.
3. Loss of Green Cover:
o A 2021 study revealed that 59% of landslides in Kerala occurred in plantation areas.
o Deforestation increases the fragility of the terrain, especially in the Western Ghats which are prone to heavy
rains.
4. Climate Change:
o The warming of the Arabian Sea has been linked to unpredictable and extremely heavy rain patterns in
Kerala.
o The warming sea causes the atmosphere above Kerala to become thermodynamically unstable, leading to
deep cloud formations and intense rain spells in short periods.
o These rains heighten the risk of landslides.
5. Environmental Neglect and Mining:
o In 2011, the Western Ghats Ecology Expert Panel, led by Madhav Gadgil, recommended that 75% of the
Western Ghats be declared ecologically sensitive.
o The panel urged restrictions on mining, quarrying, and large-scale energy projects in the most
ecologically sensitive zones.
o Despite these recommendations, the measures have not been implemented for over 14 years due to
opposition from state governments, industries, and local communities.
Causes of Landslides
1. Gravitational Forces:
o The primary cause of landslides. When gravity overcomes the strength of geomaterials like rocks, sand, silt,
and clay, it triggers the downhill movement of these materials.
2. Natural Triggers:
o Rainfall: Heavy or prolonged rainfall increases soil moisture content, reducing cohesion and adding weight
to slopes, making them prone to landslides.
 The Western Ghats in Kerala, with a dual-layer terrain of soil over hard rocks, experience landslides
when heavy rainfall saturates the soil, reducing its stability.
 Warming of the Arabian Sea has caused deep cloud systems and extremely heavy rainfall in the region,
further increasing landslide risks.
o Convectional Rainfall: Occurs when heated air rises with water vapor, condensing and causing rainfall
in the same area due to the absence of wind to carry clouds.
o Earthquakes: Destabilize slopes by shaking the ground, especially in tectonically active regions like the
Himalayas.
o Erosion: Natural processes such as river or wave action erode the base of slopes, weakening them. Coastal
areas are especially vulnerable due to wave-induced erosion.
o Hydrological Factors: Groundwater movement can increase pore pressure and reduce slope stability,
increasing landslide risks.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 309 of 348

 1

3. Anthropogenic Influences:
o Deforestation: Removal of vegetation weakens slopes by eliminating tree roots that provide natural
reinforcement.
o Construction and Land Use Changes: Activities like mining, road construction, and urban development
disrupt natural drainage and load distribution, making slopes more prone to failure.
o Historical Deforestation: The British-era deforestation for tea plantations and agriculture in the
Western Ghats has weakened soil stability, making the region prone to landslides during heavy rains.
o Infrastructure Development: Tourism and resort construction, along with the creation of artificial
lakes, increase land pressure and landslide risks by disturbing natural drainage patterns.
o Defunct Quarries: Even non-operational quarries contribute to soil destabilization by weakening the
geological structure, increasing landslide risk during heavy rainfall.
4. Geological Factors:
o Fragile Ecology: The Western Ghats have steep slopes and a dual-layer terrain of soil and rocks, making
them susceptible to landslides when saturated with water.

Government Initiatives to Mitigate Landslide Risks in India

1. National Landslide Risk Management Strategy (2019): A comprehensive strategy that includes hazard
mapping, early warning systems, awareness programs, capacity building, and stabilization measures.
2. Landslide Risk Mitigation Scheme (LRMS):
o A forthcoming scheme that aims to provide financial support for specific landslide mitigation projects in
vulnerable states, focusing on disaster prevention and mitigation.
o It will also help establish Early Warning Systems (EWS) and enhance capacity building for landslide
management.
3. Flood Risk Mitigation Scheme (FRMS): An upcoming initiative focusing on flood shelters, river basin-
specific early warning systems, and digital elevation maps for better flood preparedness and evacuation
strategies.
4. National Guidelines on Landslides and Snow Avalanches: Guidelines from the National Disaster
Management Authority (NDMA) covering hazard assessment, risk management, institutional
mechanisms, and community participation.
5. Landslide Atlas of India: Developed by ISRO's National Remote Sensing Centre (NRSC), it documents
landslide events across India's vulnerable areas and provides damage assessments for specific sites.

Recommendations of Various Committees on Western Ghats

Western Ghats Ecology Expert Panel, 2011 (Madhav Gadgil Committee):
 All of the Western Ghats to be declared Ecologically Sensitive Areas (ESA) with limited development allowed
based on graded zones.
 The Western Ghats were to be classified into ESA-1, ESA-2, and ESA-3, with ESA-1 being of high priority where
almost all developmental activities would be restricted.
 Governance system recommended to follow a bottom-up approach, starting from Gram Sabhas, instead of a
top-down approach.
 Western Ghats Ecology Authority (WGEA) to be created as a statutory authority under the Ministry of
Environment, Forest, and Climate Change, with powers under Section 3 of the Environment (Protection) Act,
1986.
 The report was criticised for being overly environment-focused and not aligned with ground realities.

Kasturirangan Committee, 2013:

 Aimed to balance development and environmental protection, unlike the Gadgil report.
 Recommended that only 37% of the Western Ghats area be declared as ESA instead of the entire region.
 Called for a complete ban on mining, quarrying, and sand mining in ESAs.
 No thermal power projects to be allowed, and hydropower projects should be permitted only after thorough
studies.
 Red industries (highly polluting industries) to be strictly banned in the region.
 Inhabited regions and plantations were excluded from ESAs, making the recommendations more pro-farmer.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 310 of 348
 1

DEMAND FOR BHIL PRADESH

About Bhils:
 Bhils are one of the oldest tribes in India, identified as a Dravidian racial tribe of Western India, belonging to
the Austroloid group.
 They are descendants of the Munda race and speak Bhili, a language of Dravidian origin.
 Historically, they were rulers in parts of Rajasthan, Gujarat, Malwa, Madhya Pradesh, and Bihar.
 Census 2011 records show 1.7 crore Bhils across India, with their largest concentration in Madhya Pradesh
(60 lakh), followed by Gujarat (42 lakh), Rajasthan (41 lakh), and Maharashtra (26 lakh).
 Bhils follow Hinduism and worship deities of the forest, evil spirits, as well as Lord Shiva and Durga.

Demand for Bhil Pradesh:

 The demand for Bhil Pradesh dates back to 1913, initiated by Govind Giri Banjara, a tribal activist, during a
mobilisation at Mangarh Hill, which led to a massacre of around 1,500 tribals by British forces.
 The proposed Bhil Pradesh would cover 49 districts across Rajasthan, Madhya Pradesh, Gujarat, and
Maharashtra, with 12 districts from Rajasthan.

Reasons for the Demand:

 Cultural and Linguistic Homogeneity: Bhils share a common language, Bhili, and cultural practices across the
states. A separate state would help preserve and promote their cultural heritage.
 Geographic Considerations: The region spans 49 districts, which have historical and cultural ties that
transcend state boundaries.
 Political Marginalisation: Tribal leaders argue that current political structures fail to meet the needs of the
Bhil community. A separate state would ensure focused governance and development.
 Developmental Focus: Proponents believe a separate state would lead to tailored development policies and
better resource utilisation for tribal welfare. Historical neglect and slow implementation of laws like PESA
(Panchayats Extension to Scheduled Areas) Act, 1996 highlight the need for localised governance.

Criticism of the Demand:

 Critics argue that forming states based on caste or community could lead to further fragmentation and
instability.
 The Fazl Ali Commission emphasised that the unity of India should be the primary consideration when
redrawing political boundaries.
 Political resistance exists from established parties, and there are concerns that forming states based on tribal
identity may exacerbate social divisions.

Other Regions Demanding Separate States:

 Vidarbha: Located in eastern Maharashtra, the demand for Vidarbha state has roots in the State
Reorganisation Act of 1956. The region’s backwardness due to state government neglect is the basis for this
demand.
 Bodoland: The Bodos, the largest ethnic group in northern Assam, have agitated for a separate Bodoland. An
agreement in 2003 granted them Bodoland Territorial Council, but the demand for full statehood remains.
 Other regions with similar demands include Gorkhaland, Kukiland, and Mithila.
Issues Arising Due to the Creation of New States:
 Hegemony of Dominant Communities: New states may lead to dominance by a single community, resulting
in intra-regional rivalries.
 Political Consequences: The creation of smaller states could allow a small group of legislators to manipulate
governments.
 Inter-State Disputes: New states could lead to increased water, power, and boundary disputes, as seen
between Delhi and Haryana over water sharing.
 High Costs: Creating new states requires significant funds for new capitals, and the administration, as seen in
the case of Andhra Pradesh and Telangana.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 311 of 348

 1

 Power Centralisation: Often, creating new states shifts power from the old state capital to the new one, without
empowering local institutions like Gram Panchayats or District Collectors.

ECONOMIC SURVEY FOR 2023-24

State of the Economy:
 Real GDP Growth: India’s real GDP grew by 8.2% in FY24, surpassing 8% in three out of four quarters.
 Retail Inflation: Declined from 6.7% in FY23 to 5.4% in FY24.
 Current Account Deficit (CAD): Improved to 0.7% of GDP in FY24 from 2.0% in FY23.
 Tax Revenue: Direct taxes contributed 55% and indirect taxes made up 45% of total tax revenue.
 Capital Spending: Government increased capital expenditure and provided free food grains to 81.4 crore
people.
Monetary Management and Financial Intermediation – Stability is the Watchword:
 Monetary Policy: RBI kept the policy repo rate steady at 6.5% throughout FY24. Core inflation decreased by
4% from April 2022 to June 2024.
 Credit Growth: Credit disbursed by SCBs reached Rs 164.3 lakh crore, a growth of 20.2% by March 2024.
 Banking Sector: Gross NPAs at a 12-year low of 2.8% in March 2024.
 Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code: Disposed of 31,394 corporate debtors worth Rs 13.9 lakh crore as of
March 2024.
 Capital Markets: Facilitated capital formation of Rs 10.9 lakh crore, constituting 29% of gross fixed capital
formation.
 Insurance and Microfinance: India has the second-largest microfinance sector globally and is poised to
become a fast-growing insurance market.
Prices and Inflation – Under Control:
 Inflation Trends:
o 29 states recorded inflation below 6% in FY24.
o Core services inflation hit a 9-year low.
o Food inflation increased to 7.5% in FY24 from 6.6% in FY23.
o Price cuts in LPG, petrol, and diesel helped keep retail fuel inflation low.
 Projections: The RBI forecasts inflation to fall to 4.5% in FY25 and 4.1% in FY26.
External Sector – Stability Amid Plenty:
 Exports: India’s services exports grew by 4.9% to USD 341.1 billion in FY24, led by IT/software services.
 Remittances: India remains the top global recipient of remittances, totaling USD 120 billion in 2023.
 External Debt: The external debt-to-GDP ratio stood at 18.7% as of March 2024.
 Tourism: India’s share of world tourism receipts rose from 1.38% in 2021 to 1.58% in 2022.

Medium-Term Outlook – A Growth Strategy for New India:

 Growth Strategy: To sustain 7%+ growth, cooperation between the Union Government, State Governments,
and private sector is essential.
 Key Focus Areas: Job creation, addressing MSME bottlenecks, agricultural growth, green transitions, and
closing the education-employment gap are critical.

Climate Change and Energy Transition – Dealing with Trade-Offs:

 Renewable Energy: Non-fossil sources accounted for 45.4% of installed electricity generation capacity as of
May 2024.
 Energy Needs: India’s energy demand is projected to grow 2 to 2.5 times by 2047.
 Clean Energy Investments: The clean energy sector attracted Rs 8.5 lakh crore in investments between 2014
and 2023.

Social Sector – Benefits that Empower:

 Welfare Expenditure: Grew at a CAGR of 12.8% between FY18 and FY24.
 Healthcare: Over 34.7 crore Ayushman Bharat cards issued.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 312 of 348

 1

 Housing: 2.63 crore houses constructed under PM-AWAS-Gramin since 2014.

 Rural Infrastructure: 15.14 lakh km of roads constructed under Gram Sadak Yojana since 2014-15.

Employment and Skill Development – Towards Quality:

 Unemployment Rate: Declined to 3.2% in 2022-23.
 EPFO Payroll Additions: 13.15 million net additions in the past five years.
 Youth Unemployment: Fell from 17.8% in 2017-18 to 10% in 2022-23.
 Female Labor Force Participation: Rising for six consecutive years, now at 37.0%.
 Gig Economy: Workforce expected to reach 2.35 crore by 2029-30.

Agriculture and Food Management:

 Agricultural Growth: Registered an average annual growth rate of 4.18% over the last five years.
 Agricultural Credit: Disbursed Rs 22.84 lakh crore in credit.
 Micro Irrigation: 90 lakh hectares covered since 2015-16.
 Kisan Credit Cards: 7.5 crore cards issued with a limit of Rs 9.4 lakh crore.

Industry – Small and Medium Matters:

 Industrial Growth: Grew by 9.5%, supporting the overall 8.2% economic growth in FY24.
 Pharmaceutical and Clothing Sectors: India is the 3rd-largest pharmaceutical market by volume and 2nd-
largest clothing manufacturer globally.
 Electronics Manufacturing: Domestic production grew to Rs 8.22 lakh crore, and exports increased to Rs 1.9
lakh crore in FY23.

Services – Fuelling Growth Opportunities:

 Sector Contribution: The services sector contributed 55% to the economy and grew by 7.6% in FY24.
 Digital Services: India’s share in global digitally delivered services exports increased to 6%.
 E-commerce: Expected to cross USD 350 billion by 2030.
 Start-ups: Start-ups surged from around 2,000 in 2014 to 31,000 in 2023.

Infrastructure – Lifting Potential Growth:

 National Highways: Construction pace increased to 34 km/day by FY24 from 11.7 km/day in FY14.
 Railways: Capital expenditure increased by 77% in the last five years.
 Space: India operates 55 active space assets, including communication, navigation, and earth observation
satellites.
 Telecommunication: Teledensity rose to 85.7% in March 2024, with internet density at 68.2%.

Climate Change and India:

 India's Approach: India’s ethos of human-nature harmony contrasts with the culture of overconsumption in
the developed world.
 Mission LiFE: Focuses on mindful consumption, promoting a balance with nature.
What is the Economic Survey?
About:
 The Economic Survey is an annual document presented by the government before the Union Budget to review
the state of the economy.
 It is prepared by the Economic Division of the Department of Economic Affairs in the Ministry of Finance
under the supervision of the Chief Economic Adviser (currently V. Anantha Nageswaran).
 The Survey is tabled in both houses of Parliament by the Union Finance Minister.
Purpose:
 Review the economic developments in India over the last 12 months.
 Summarise the performance of major development programs.
 Highlight key policy initiatives taken by the government.
 Analyse economic trends and provide an outlook for the upcoming year.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 313 of 348
 1

Historical Context:
 The Economic Survey was first presented in 1950-51.
 Initially, it was part of the budget documents.
 It became a separate volume in 1964.

ABHINAV BINDRA AWARDED PRESTIGIOUS OLYMPIC ORDER BY IOC

 Abhinav Bindra, India's renowned Olympic shooter, was awarded the prestigious Olympic Order by the
International Olympic Committee (IOC) during its 142nd Session.
 This honour recognises his significant contributions to the Olympic movement and his involvement in
supporting Olympic ideals.
Profile and Achievements of Abhinav Bindra
 Historic Achievement: Bindra won India’s first-ever individual Olympic gold medal in the 10m air rifle
event at the 2008 Beijing Games.
 Olympic Participation: He has competed in five consecutive Summer Olympics from Sydney 2000 to Rio
2016, narrowly missing a medal in Rio, finishing fourth.
Contributions to the Olympic Movement
 Vice Chair of IOC Athletes' Commission: Since 2018, Bindra has played a key role in representing athletes’
interests and contributing to the broader Olympic agenda.
 Post-retirement Engagement: Bindra has actively engaged in initiatives promoting sports and the Olympic
spirit, showcasing his dedication to supporting the sports community.
Significance of the Olympic Order
 Highest Honour: Established in 1975, the Olympic Order is the highest award given by the IOC for
distinguished contributions to the Olympic Movement.
 Notable Recipients: Past recipients include Juan Carlos I of Spain, King Harald V of Norway, Sebastian Coe,
Nadia Comăneci, and Ban Ki-moon.

CHHATRAPATI SHIVAJI MAHARAJ STATUE AT RAJKOT FORT AND MARATHA

EMPIRE
A 35-foot statue of Chhatrapati Shivaji Maharaj, unveiled at Rajkot Fort in Malvan (Sindhudurg district),
collapsed in less than a year after its installation.
 Contrast with Sindhudurg Fort: In sharp contrast, the Sindhudurg Fort, built by Shivaji Maharaj 357 years
ago, remains structurally resilient and stands as a testament to the Maratha military architecture.
 Historical Importance of Sindhudurg Fort: The fort played a critical role in military operations, including the
Surat raids conducted by Shivaji Maharaj.
 Financing: A major portion of Sindhudurg Fort’s construction was financed by the wealth seized during the
Surat raids.

Key Facts about Sindhudurg Fort

 Construction Timeline: Construction of Sindhudurg Fort began on 25th November 1664 and was completed
on 29th March 1667.
 Location and Planning: Built on the island of Kurte in the Arabian Sea, Shivaji Maharaj and expert Hiroji
Indulkar planned the fort's strategic location after thorough examination.
 Cost of Construction: The fort was constructed at an estimated cost of one crore hons, a gold currency used
during the reign of Shivaji Maharaj in the 17th century.
 Maritime Importance: The fort symbolized Shivaji Maharaj’s aim to establish maritime dominance and
strengthen economic stability through a powerful navy, protecting against foreign powers like the Siddis,
Portuguese, and other colonial forces.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 314 of 348

 1

 Architectural Features: The fort includes a serpentine wall covering four kilometres, standing ten metres
high with 45 stairways. It featured facilities for guards and cannons and included a south-facing statue of
Hanuman at the entrance.
 Current Status: The fort remains a symbol of Shivaji Maharaj’s military prowess, standing as a historical
testament to Maratha naval strength and fortification techniques.

Maratha Empire: Key Points

 Formation and Rise: The Maratha Empire was an early modern Indian confederation established by
Chhatrapati Shivaji in the late 17th century in response to chaos and misrule in the Deccan region. It rose to
prominence in the 18th century, dominating much of the Indian subcontinent.
 Tributary Status: The Maratha confederacy was officially recognized as a tributary state by Emperor Bahadur
Shah I in 1707.
 Influence on Imperial Politics: Between 1737 and 1803, the Marathas played a crucial role in the imperial
politics of Delhi, influencing power dynamics and shaping Indian history during this period.

Factors for the Rise of the Maratha Empire

 Geographic Advantages: The Maratha region's mountainous terrain and dense forests fostered guerilla
warfare skills. Forts built on these mountains strengthened their defenses.
 Religious and Political Unity: Shivaji’s leadership brought political unity, while the Bhakti movement spread
religious unity. Spiritual leaders like Tukaram, Ramdas, and Eknath promoted social cohesion.
 Political Influence: Many Marathas held positions in the Deccan Sultanates. The Maratha state was primarily
founded by Shahji Bhonsle and his son, Shivaji.

Maratha Empire Under Shivaji (1630–1680)

 Birth: Born on 19th February 1630 at Shivneri Fort, located in District Pune, present-day Maharashtra.
 Early Life: As a teenager, Shivaji successfully captured Torna Fort from Bijapur and also acquired Kondana Fort
from Adil Shah of Bijapur.
 Death: He passed away on 3rd April 1680 at Raigad Fort, after suffering from a fever for three weeks.

Important Battles:
 Battle of Pratapgad (1659): Fought between Shivaji Maharaj and Afzal Khan, the general of the Adilshahi
forces.
 Battle of Surat (1664): Fought between Shivaji Maharaj and Inayat Khan, a Mughal Governor.
 Battle of Purandar (1665): Fought between Shivaji Maharaj and Mughal commander Jai Singh.
 Battle of Sangamner (1679): Fought between the Maratha Empire and the Mughal Empire. This was Shivaji’s
last battle.

Titles:
 Crowned as King: Shivaji was crowned as the King of the Marathas on 6th June 1674 at Raigad.
 He adopted titles such as Chhatrapati, Shakakarta, Kshatriya Kulavantas, and Haindava Dharmodhhaarak.

Administration:
 Central Administration: Shivaji was the supreme head of the state, assisted by a council of eight ministers,
known as the Ashtapradhan.
 Revenue Administration:
o Chauth: A tax equivalent to one-fourth (1/4th) of the revenue collected from non-Maratha territories,
paid as protection against Maratha raids.
o Sardeshmukhi: An additional levy of 10% imposed on lands where the Marathas claimed hereditary
rights.

Maratha Empire's Administration

 Central Administration: Shivaji created the Ashtapradhan or Council of Eight, comprising key ministers
responsible for governance.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 315 of 348

 1

o Peshwa: Prime Minister overseeing administration.

o Senapati: Commander-in-Chief of the military.
o Mazumdar: Finance Minister.
 Provincial and Revenue Administration: Shivaji divided his kingdom into provinces with officers collecting
taxes directly from farmers. He introduced the Chauth tax and the Ryotwari system to maintain revenue
stability.
 Military Reforms: Shivaji paid soldiers in cash and introduced a strong navy for defense and trade.

Successors of Shivaji
 Sambhaji: Shivaji's son, Sambhaji, was executed by the Mughals, and Rajaram became the next ruler.
 Rise of the Peshwas: Under Shahu, son of Sambhaji, the Peshwas rose to power, with Balaji Vishwanath
becoming the first Peshwa in 1713.

Maratha Empire During Peshwa Era

 Baji Rao I: Peshwa Baji Rao I expanded Maratha power across India and established the Maratha Confederacy.
o Key Battles: Baji Rao fought over 40 battles, including the Battle of Delhi (1737) and Battle of Bhopal
(1737).
 Balaji Baji Rao: Also known as Nanasaheb, he expanded the Maratha influence. However, the Third Battle of
Panipat in 1761 against Ahmad Shah Abdali weakened the Marathas.

Maratha-Mughal Relations
 The Marathas resisted the Mughal Empire, using their guerilla warfare tactics to challenge Mughal authority,
eventually becoming a major power in India.

Anglo-Maratha Wars
 First Anglo-Maratha War (1775-1782): Ended with the Treaty of Salbai in 1782. The war was fought between
the British East India Company and the Maratha Empire.
 Second Anglo-Maratha War (1803-1805): Resulted in British victory. The war resulted in the British gaining a
large portion of Central India and several treaties, including the Treaty of Surji-Anjangaon, the Treaty of Rajghat,
and the Treaty of Deogaon.
 The Treaty of Bassein, which was signed in December 1802, is considered the "death knell of the Maratha
Empire".
 Third Anglo-Maratha War (1817-1818): Marked the final defeat of the Marathas, leading to the collapse of the
Maratha Confederacy.
 The British won the Third Anglo-Maratha War, which took place between 1817 and 1818.
Decline of the Maratha Empire
 Surrender of Peshwa (1818): The Peshwa surrendered, leading to the abolition of the Maratha Confederacy.
 Reasons for Decline:
o Ineffective Leadership: Later Maratha leaders, including Bajirao II, were ineffective.
o Fragile Political Structure: Maratha chiefs lacked unity, leading to internal rivalries.
o Weak Military and Economic Framework: The Marathas were unable to match the British in military
strategy and modern weaponry, and lacked a stable economic policy.
o Proficient English Diplomacy: The British used diplomacy and espionage effectively, isolating the
Marathas and gaining control over Indian territories.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 316 of 348

 1

SPECIAL PROTECTION GROUP ACT

 Formation: The Special Protection Group (SPG) is an elite force created specifically for the protection of the
Prime Minister, former Prime Ministers, and their immediate family members.
 Establishment: It was started in 1985 following the assassination of Prime Minister Indira Gandhi in 1984.
 Current Strength: The force consists of around 3,000 personnel drawn from various Central and State forces,
including CRPF and BSF.

Unique Features of the SPG

 Training: SPG personnel are highly trained in physical efficiency, marksmanship, combat, and proximate
protection tactics.
 Coordination: The SPG works in close coordination with all central and state agencies to ensure foolproof
security.
 Appearance and Equipment:
o SPG agents wear black, Western-style formal business suits (or safari suits on occasions) and
sunglasses.
o They are equipped with encrypted communication earpieces and concealed handguns.
o Special operations commandos carry ultra-modern assault rifles, wear bulletproof vests, and dark-visor
sunglasses with inbuilt communication earpieces.

SPG Act of 1988

 The SPG Act of 1988 provides for the formation and regulation of the SPG to ensure security for:
o The Prime Minister (both within India and abroad) and their immediate family members.
o Former Prime Ministers and their immediate family members residing at their official residence.
 Security for former PMs is provided for 1 year from the date they leave office. It can be extended based on the
level of threat, which must be from a military or terrorist organisation and of a grave and continuing nature.

SPG (Amendment) Act of 2019

 SPG security will be provided only to the current Prime Minister, former PMs, and their immediate family
members residing with them at their official residence.
 Former PMs and their family members will receive SPG security for 5 years after they leave office.
 When the security of a former PM is withdrawn, the same will apply to their immediate family.

New Rules for the SPG (2024)

 Appointments: Officers of the All India Services will be appointed on deputation by the central government,
with the same terms as corresponding central government officers.
 Tenure: Non-All India Services members of SPG will be appointed for an initial deputation period of 6 years.
o A second tenure may be approved by the central government with reasons documented.
 Headquarters: The SPG headquarters will remain in New Delhi and will be headed by an officer of the rank of
Additional Director-General (ADG) of the Indian Police Service.
 Director’s Role: The Director of the SPG will hold responsibility for the general superintendence, direction,
command, control, training, and administration of the SPG, and will be the functional head responsible for
executing the duties laid out in the Act.

INDIA-IRAN RELATIONS
India and Iran share deep historical ties, dating back to the Indus Valley and Mesopotamian civilizations. Trade
between India and Iran through the Persian Gulf was significant in ancient times.
 Border until 1947: India and Iran shared a border until India’s partition and independence in 1947.
 Diplomatic relations: Diplomatic links were formally established on 15 March 1950. Notable visits include the
Shah’s visit to India in 1956 and Jawaharlal Nehru's visit to Iran in 1959.
 Tehran Declaration (2001): A significant agreement between Atal Bihari Vajpayee and Iran affirmed shared
visions for equitable and pluralistic international cooperation.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 317 of 348

 1

Bilateral Relations
 Consultative mechanisms: Regular meetings and bilateral dialogues through established mechanisms between
both nations.
 Research Institutions: Collaboration between India’s Institute of Defence Studies and Analyses (IDSA) and
Iran’s Institute of Political and International Studies (IPIS) on bilateral and multilateral issues.
 Support in international forums: Iran has opposed Pakistan’s anti-India resolutions at international
organizations like the OIC and the Human Rights Commission. India supported Iran’s observer status in SAARC.

Economic Relations
 Crude oil imports: India traditionally imported Iranian crude oil, a key component of the bilateral economic
relationship.
 Indian exports: India exports petroleum products, rice, machinery, metals, pharmaceuticals, tea, and
rubber to Iran.
 Joint projects: India and Iran have collaborated on projects like the Chahbahar port, the Chahbahar-Zaranj
railway, and joint ventures like the Madras Fertilizer Company and the Chennai Refinery.
 Bilateral agreements: Both countries have agreed upon the Bilateral Investment Promotion & Protection
Agreement (BIPPA) and the Double Taxation Avoidance Agreement (DTAA).

Strategic Relations
 Geopolitical importance: Iran’s location is crucial for India as it provides alternate connectivity routes to
Afghanistan and Central Asia, bypassing Pakistan.
 Energy interests: Iran possesses some of the largest crude oil and natural gas reserves globally, vital for
India’s energy security.
 Strategic alignment: Iran sees India’s strategic location as key to its “Asia-oriented” foreign policy. India’s
large economy offers Iran investment and trade opportunities.

Challenges in India-Iran Relations

 US sanctions: The US sanctions (CAATSA) on Iran affected India’s crude oil imports and overall energy security.
 India-Israel relations: India’s close ties with Israel and Iran’s deepening relationship with China have created
friction.
 Geopolitical tensions: Iran’s involvement in Yemen, countering Saudi Arabia and UAE (India’s allies), has led
to challenges.
 Article 370: Iran’s critical stance on India’s abrogation of Article 370 in Kashmir further strained relations.
 Chahbahar and Farzad B: India’s participation in the Chahbahar Railway Project and Farzad B gas field has
seen setbacks, complicating ties.

Restructuring India-Iran Relations

 Afghanistan: Cooperation on Afghanistan could forge a stronger relationship, with both countries maintaining
engagement after the Taliban’s takeover.
 Gulf relations: India’s growing ties with Gulf countries like UAE and Qatar could help mediate between Iran
and the Gulf nations.
 International North-South Transport Corridor (INSTC): Both nations can leverage the INSTC project to boost
connectivity and trade with Russia, Central Asia, and Europe.
CAATSA (Countering America's Adversaries Through Sanctions Act):
 About CAATSA: Enacted by the United States, CAATSA imposes sanctions on countries involved in significant
transactions with Iran, Russia, and North Korea.
 The bill was passed by the US Senate on July 27, 2017.
 India's Challenges:
o As a strategic partner of the U.S., India faces difficulties in maintaining its economic and energy ties with
Iran due to the extraterritorial nature of CAATSA sanctions.
o The sanctions impact India's defense and energy cooperation with both Iran and the U.S., requiring a
careful diplomatic approach to manage both relationships.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 318 of 348

 1

JCPOA (Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action):

 About JCPOA: Also known as the Iran Nuclear Deal, the JCPOA was an agreement to limit Iran's nuclear
program in exchange for sanctions relief.
 Impact of U.S. Withdrawal (2018):
o The U.S. withdrawal from the deal and the re-imposition of sanctions severely affected Iran's economy and
India's energy imports from Iran.
o India has expressed its support for the JCPOA but must balance its commitment to the deal with the need to
adhere to evolving U.S. sanctions policies.

PARIS PARALYMPICS 2024

 India’s Record-Breaking Performance at Paris Paralympics 2024: India secured a total of 29 medals (7 gold,
9 silver, 13 bronze), marking its best-ever campaign in Paralympics history.
 Key Government Support: Success was bolstered by programs like Khelo India and the Target Olympic
Podium Scheme (TOPS), which provide financial and training support to para-athletes.
o TOPS includes a ₹50,000 monthly Out-of-Pocket Allowance (OPA) and funding for personalized training.

History and Evolution of the Paralympics:

 Origin: The Paralympic movement began in 1948 with the Stoke Mandeville Games for injured servicemen,
evolving into the Paralympic Games in 1960 in Rome, with 400 athletes from 23 countries.
 Paralympic Games Today: Held every four years alongside the Olympic Games, thanks to the collaboration
between the International Paralympic Committee (IPC) and the International Olympic Committee (IOC).

India’s Early Participation in Paralympics:

 First Appearance (1968): India debuted in Tel Aviv 1968 with 10 athletes but won no medals.
 First Medal (1972): Murlikant Petkar won India's first gold medal in the 50m freestyle swimming event at
the Heidelberg Games.

Significant Paralympic Moments for India:

 1984 Paralympics: India won four medals (2 silver, 2 bronze). Notable winners included Bhimrao Kesarkar
and Joginder Singh Bedi.
 2004 Athens Paralympics: Devendra Jhajharia won gold in Men’s Javelin Throw F44/46, marking a
significant achievement for India.
 2012 London Paralympics: Girisha N Gowda won a silver medal in Men’s High Jump F42.
 2016 Rio Paralympics: India’s best performance at the time, with 4 medals (2 gold, 1 silver, 1 bronze). Notable
winners included Mariyappan Thangavelu and Devendra Jhajharia.

Transformation Period (2012-2020):

 2020 Tokyo Paralympics: India won 19 medals (5 gold), breaking all previous records. Standout performances
included Avani Lekhara, Sumit Antil, Pramod Bhagat, and Devendra Jhajharia.

India’s Best Performance at Paris Paralympics 2024:

 Total Medals: India won 29 medals (7 gold, 9 silver, 13 bronze), finishing 18th in the overall medal tally.
 Notable Performances:
o Avani Lekhara: First Indian woman to win two gold medals in shooting, setting a world record in the
women's 10m air rifle standing SH1.
o Sumit Antil: Defended his gold in Men’s Javelin Throw F64, breaking his world record.
o Mariyappan Thangavelu: Won his third consecutive Paralympic medal in high jump.
o Sheetal Devi: Became the youngest Indian Paralympic medallist with bronze in archery.
o Navdeep Singh: Gold in Men’s Javelin Throw F41, marking India's first-ever gold in this category.
o Badminton: Contributed significantly with Suhas Yathiraj winning silver and Manoj Sarkar securing
bronze.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 319 of 348

 1

Paralympic Games Structure:

 Motto for Paris 2024: "Ouvrons Grand les Jeux" (Games Wide Open), symbolizing inclusivity and accessibility.
 Mascot: The Paralympic Phryge, inspired by the Phrygian cap, a symbol of liberty and freedom, promoting
inclusivity and celebrating para-athletes.

International Record-Breakers:
 Jaydin Blackwell (USA): Set a new world record in the 100m T38 (10.64 seconds).
 Vanessa Low (Australia): World record in women’s long jump T61 (5.45 meters).
 Simone Barlaam (Italy): World record in men’s 50m freestyle S9.
 Gabriel Geraldo dos Santos Araujo (Brazil): World record in men’s 150m individual medley SM2.
 Folashade Oluwafemiayo (Nigeria): Set a world record in women’s powerlifting (86kg+) with a 167kg lift.

WORLD BIOFUEL DAY

 World Biofuel Day (August 10): Celebrated annually to highlight the importance of biofuels as a sustainable
energy source and to commemorate Sir Rudolf Diesel’s successful operation of an engine on peanut oil on
August 9, 1893.

Understanding Biofuels:
 Definition: Biofuels are derived from biomass like plant or animal waste, making them a renewable energy
source. Common sources include corn, sugarcane, and animal waste.
 Types:
o Ethanol: Produced from crops like corn and sugarcane, and blended with petroleum to reduce emissions.
Ethanol-10 (E10) is the most common blend with 10% ethanol.
o Biodiesel: Made from used cooking oil, yellow grease, or animal fats. It is produced by reacting oil or fat with
alcohol in the presence of a catalyst.

Importance of Biofuels:
1. Environmental Benefits: Helps mitigate greenhouse gas emissions and reduces dependence on finite fossil
fuels, while also aiding waste management.
2. Energy Security: India, the third-largest consumer of crude oil, relies on imports for over 85% of its needs.
Biofuels can reduce dependence on foreign oil and enhance energy security.
3. Economic Benefits: Using biofuels can reduce oil imports and provide economic benefits to farmers through
the production of biofuel crops like corn and sugarcane, improving farm incomes.

Government Initiatives and Policies:

1. National Policy on Biofuels (2018): Aims to promote fuel blending to reduce import dependence and
encourage the production of bioethanol, biodiesel, and bio-CNG. Key objectives include:
o Ethanol Blending Programme (EBP)
o Promotion of 2nd generation ethanol from agricultural residues
o 20% blending target advanced to 2025-26.
2. Global Biofuels Alliance (GBA): Launched by Prime Minister Narendra Modi during the G20 Summit in
2023, it includes 24 countries and 12 international organizations to promote biofuel usage and trade globally.
3. Reduced GST on Ethanol: The GST rate on ethanol for blending in petrol was reduced from 18% to 5% to
promote the Ethanol Blended Petrol (EBP) Programme.
4. Pradhan Mantri JI-VAN Yojana: Supports Second Generation (2G) ethanol production by providing financial
support for cellulosic and lignocellulosic biofuel technologies.
India’s Progress on Sustainable Energy through Biofuels:
 Ethanol Blending: The government is pushing for E20 petrol (20% ethanol, 80% petrol) by 2025-26, ahead of
the original 2030 target.
 Impact on Farmers: The focus on ethanol has positively impacted sugarcane farmers. Ethanol procurement
increased from 38 crore liters in 2013-14 to 408 crore liters in 2021-22, benefitting farmers by ₹25,750
crore.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 320 of 348

 1

US ANTITRUST RULING AGAINST GOOGLE:

 Accusation: Google used its dominant position in the online search market by making exclusive deals with
smartphone makers like Apple and Samsung, making its search engine the default.
 Court Ruling: The US District Court of Columbia ruled that Alphabet Inc (Google’s parent company) violated US
antitrust law with its $26 billion payments to secure default search engine status on smartphones.
 Monopoly Violation: Google was found guilty of maintaining a monopoly over “general search services” and
“general search text ads” by using its default search engine position.
 Google's Search Engine Usage: Processes 8.5 billion queries daily worldwide, nearly double compared to 12
years ago.
 Geographic Limitation: The judgment focuses on the US market. For example, in India, Xiaomi leads the
market, and its phones come with Opera browser pre-installed, creating different market conditions.

 Consequences of Google’s Default Position:

o Barriers for New Entrants: High entry barriers such as capital costs, access to distribution channels, and
brand recognition make it difficult for new entrants to compete with Google.
o Revenue Challenges for Competitors: New competitors face revenue shortfall either due to reduced
query volume or inferior ad monetisation.
 Steps Taken in India to Address Google’s Monopoly:
o Monetary Penalty: In 2022, the Competition Commission of India (CCI) fined Google Rs 1337.76 Crores
for mandatory pre-installation of its apps, which was seen as an abuse of dominance.
o User Choice: Following the CCI ruling, Google allowed Indian users to select their default search engine.
o Draft Competition Bill 2024: Proposes restrictions on Systemically Significant Digital Enterprises
(SSDEs), barring them from anti-competitive practices like favouring their products or misusing user data.
o Recent Complaints: Alliance of Digital India Foundation (ADIF) filed complaints against Google for anti-
competitive practices in online advertising.
 Implications of the US Antitrust Ruling:
o Precedent for Big Tech: The ruling sets a new precedent, reminiscent of the Microsoft antitrust ruling 25
years ago, reshaping the tech industry.
o Impact on Business Structures: Could fundamentally change digital businesses linked to Google services.
o Effect on Handset Makers: If Google’s exclusive deal with Apple ends, it could significantly impact Apple’s
revenue from these deals.
o New Search Engines: Could incentivise Apple, Samsung, and others to develop rival search engines,
providing users with alternatives.
o User Privacy Focus: May push Google to develop better products prioritising user privacy.
o Broader Impact: This ruling may influence other antitrust cases against Meta, Amazon, and Apple for
their monopolistic practices.

WAQF BOARD AMENDMENT BILL 2024

 Definition of Waqf Property: A property designated by Muslims for specific purposes such as religious,
charitable, or private uses, where ownership is attributed to God, and the property's benefits are dedicated
accordingly.
 Establishment of Waqf: A Waqf can be legally established either through a formal written declaration, an oral
statement, or by utilizing a legal instrument.
 Permanence of Waqf Status: Once a property is declared as Waqf, this status becomes permanent and cannot
be reversed.
 Historical Background of Waqf: The concept of Waqf in India traces back to the era of the Delhi Sultanate. For
instance, Sultan Muizuddin Sam Ghaor dedicated two villages for the support of Multan's Jama Masjid.
 British Era and Waqf: During the late 19th century, the British Privy Council challenged the concept of Waqf,
labeling it as problematic perpetuity. Nonetheless, the Waqf system was preserved through the Mussalman Waqf
Validating Act of 1913, which upheld these religious endowments.
 Waqf Act of 1995: This legislation was enacted to oversee the administration and management of Waqf
properties across India, facilitating the establishment of Waqf Boards at both state and central levels.
 Provisions Under Waqf Act 1995:
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 321 of 348
 1

o The act defines a Waqf as a property permanently dedicated for Muslim religious or charitable activities.
o It mandates the creation of Waqf Boards in each state and a Central Waqf Council to oversee these properties.
o It requires that all Waqf properties be registered and regularly surveyed to ensure proper management.
o Waqf Tribunals are established to adjudicate disputes related to Waqf properties.
 Introduction of Waqf (Amendment) Bill 2024: The bill was brought to the Lok Sabha on August 8, 2024,
proposing substantial modifications to the existing framework governing Waqf properties.
 Principal Modifications in Waqf (Amendment) Bill 2024:
o Proposes renaming the original act to the Unified Waqf Management, Empowerment, Efficiency, and
Development Act of 1995.
o Suggests shifting the regulatory authority from Waqf Boards and Tribunals directly to state
governments.
o Specifies that Waqfs can be formed through declarations, recognized by long-term usage, or through
endowments completed upon the cessation of succession.
o Restricts the declaration of Waqf properties to practicing Muslims who have been adherent for at least
five years and are the rightful owners.
o States that government properties identified as Waqf will revert back to state control, and disputes over
property ownership will be resolved by the District Collector.
o Surveys of Waqf properties are to be carried out under the regulations of state revenue laws.
o Revises the composition of the Central Waqf Council to include two non-Muslim members, allowing for
a broader representation including MPs, judges, and distinguished individuals not necessarily of the Muslim
faith, but ensuring inclusion of two female Muslim members.
o Recommends that state governments appoint Waqf Board members, including representatives from Shia,
Sunni, backward Muslim communities, and two non-Muslims.
o Alters the composition of tribunals, removing the requirement for Muslim law experts and instead including
a District Court judge and a state officer of joint secretary rank or higher.
o Allows for tribunal decisions to be challenged in the High Court within a 90-day period.
o Grants the central government the authority to establish regulations concerning registration, account
management, and Board procedures, with audits potentially being conducted by the Comptroller and
Auditor General (CAG).
o Permits the establishment of separate Waqf Boards for the Bohra and Agakhani communities.

EU'S FIRST LAW ON VIOLENCE AGAINST WOMEN

The European Union has enacted its first extensive legislation to combat violence against women across its 27
member states.
Key Provisions of the Legislation:
 Broad Protection Measures: The law is designed to protect women from various forms of gender-related
violence.
 Criminal Offenses:
o Online Stalking and Harassment: Recognized as a criminal offense to combat increasing cyber violence.
o Non-Consensual Sharing of Intimate Images: Classified as a criminal offense.
o Incitement to Violence or Hatred Based on Gender: Criminalized to curb harmful rhetoric.
 Punishments:
o Imprisonment Terms: Crimes under this law can result in imprisonment ranging from one to five years.
o Enhanced Penalties: Higher penalties for crimes against minors or family members, such as spouses or ex-
spouses.

Support and Protection for Victims:

 Emphasis on Victim Support: Focuses on supporting and enhancing protections for victims of domestic abuse,
including children.
 Specific Measures for Child Safety: Authorities must ensure a child's safety before notifying someone with
parental responsibilities about the crime report.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 322 of 348

 1

Implementation and Impact:

 Incorporation into National Laws: EU member states must integrate these rules into their national laws within
three years.
 Harmonization of Laws:
o Strengthens the legal response to gender-based violence.
o Ensures significant penalties for perpetrators.
o Provides comprehensive support for victims.

Controversy Over Definition of Rape:

 Division Among EU Countries: There is division on adopting a standardized EU-wide definition of rape.
 Differing Perspectives:
o Support for Unified Definition: Advocated by countries like Italy and Greece for consistent legal
standards.
o Opposition: Countries like Germany and France, citing concerns over EU competency and national
jurisdiction.

About the European Union:

 Formation and Purpose: Formed post-World War II to promote economic cooperation and prevent conflicts,
aiming for a stable and prosperous Europe.
 Establishment: Founded by the Maastricht Treaty in 1993.
 Internal Market: Features a single market allowing free movement of goods, services, capital, and people.
 Languages and Currency:
o Official Languages: Utilizes 24 official languages.
o Euro: The official currency used by 19 member countries.
 Key Institutions:
o European Commission: Proposes legislation, implements decisions, and manages daily operations.
o European Parliament: Represents citizens and plays a key role in the legislative process.
o European Court of Justice: Ensures uniform application and interpretation of EU law.

GOLDMAN ENVIRONMENTAL PRIZE 2024

Alok Shukla, the convener of Chhattisgarh Bachao Andolan (CBA), has been recognized with the Goldman
Environmental Prize 2024, often referred to as the Green Nobel.
 Contributions to Environmental Conservation:
o Protection of Hasdeo Arand: Shukla played a pivotal role in efforts to protect Hasdeo Arand, a vast forest
in central India covering 170,000 hectares and containing 23 coal blocks.
o Campaign Against Coal Mining: He led campaigns mobilizing indigenous communities against the
establishment of 21 planned coal mines by Adani mining, aimed at preserving 445,000 acres of
biodiversity-rich forests in Chhattisgarh.
o Advocacy for "No-Go" Zone: Initially recognized as a “No-Go” zone by the environment ministry in 2009
due to its dense forest cover, Hasdeo Arand was later reopened for mining, against which Shukla and the
CBA have fought.
 Hasdeo Arand Forest Details:
o Location: Extends across Korba, Sujapur, and Surguja districts in northern Chhattisgarh, known for its
significant tribal population.
o Ecological Features: Contains large, unfragmented areas of pristine Sal (Shorea robusta) and teak
forests.
o Biodiversity and Ecosystem: Serves as a crucial migratory corridor for wildlife, including a significant
elephant presence.
o Hasdeo River: A tributary of the Mahanadi, flows through this forest, adding to its ecological importance.
 Goldman Environmental Prize Overview:
o Establishment: Awarded annually since 1990 by the Goldman Environmental Foundation.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 323 of 348

 1

o Purpose: Recognizes individuals for sustained efforts to enhance and protect the natural environment, often
involving personal risk.
o Global Recognition: Honors environmental heroes from six continental regions: Africa, Asia, Europe,
Islands & Island Nations, North America, and South & Central America.
o Criteria: Focuses on "grassroots" leaders who drive positive environmental change through community or
citizen involvement.
o Announcement Date: Winners are announced on Earth Day, observed annually on April 22.

AMENDMENTS TO INTERNATIONAL HEALTH REGULATIONS (2005)

The World Health Assembly has adopted significant amendments to enhance global preparedness and response to
pandemics.
IHR 2005 Overview:
 Purpose: Aims to prevent, control, and provide a public health response to the international spread of diseases.
 Legal Framework: Establishes a legal structure for the rights and obligations of countries in managing public
health events that could cross borders.
 Successor to International Sanitary Regulations 1951: Updated from the previous regulations to focus more
on global cooperation while minimizing disruptions to travel and trade.
 Instrument of International Law: The Member States have a self-reporting obligation under IHR
(International Health Regulations) 2005. However, review of IHR implementation is voluntary.
 Includes 196 State Parties, encompassing 194 WHO Member States plus Liechtenstein and Holy See.
 Public Health Emergency Criteria: Sets criteria for declaring a “public health emergency of international
concern”.
Key Amendments to IHR 2005:
 Strengthened Response Capabilities: Enhances national capacities and international coordination on disease
surveillance, information sharing, and response.
 Determination of Public Health Emergencies: The WHO Director General will decide if an event constitutes a
public health emergency based on advice from the Emergency Committee, scientific evidence, and risk
assessments related to human health and international spread.
 Definition of Pandemic Emergency: Defined as a public health emergency caused by a communicable disease
with high risk of wide geographical spread, exceeding health system capacities, causing substantial disruption,
including to international traffic and trade, and requiring rapid international action.
 National IHR Authorities: Each State Party is required to establish a designated authority to coordinate IHR
implementation within its jurisdiction.
Support for State Parties:
 Equitable Access to Health Products: WHO to facilitate access to essential health products like medicines,
vaccines, and protective equipment during emergencies.
 Financial Collaboration and Mechanisms:
o Coordinating Financial Mechanism: Established to provide timely, sustainable financing for implementing
IHR, focusing on developing and maintaining core capacities.
o Financial Resource Identification: Supports State Parties in identifying and accessing financial resources
for public health preparedness and response.
Timeline for Global Pandemic Agreement:
 Implementation Deadline: Members of the World Health Assembly agreed to bring the Global Pandemic
Agreement into effect within one year following the COVID-19 pandemic.

Twin-Track Process Post-COVID-19:

 Formation of Intergovernmental Negotiating Body: Created to develop the Pandemic Prevention,
Preparedness, and Response Accord.
 Constitution of Working Group: Established to amend the IHR based on lessons learned from the COVID-19
pandemic to better prepare for future public health emergencies.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 324 of 348

 1

WHO:
 Establishment: The World Health Organization (WHO) was established on April 7, 1948.
 Primary Role: WHO is responsible for international public health.
 Headquarters: Located in Geneva, Switzerland.
 Member States: Comprises 194 member countries.
 Current Director-General: Dr. Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus.

ISRO STUDY ON CHANGES IN GLACIAL LAKES IN THE INDIAN HIMALAYAN

RIVER BASINS
Indian Space Research Organisation has analyzed satellite imagery over nearly four decades to track the expansion
of glacial lakes in the Himalayas, identifying significant changes in 2,431 lakes larger than 10 hectares.

Distribution of Expanded Glacial Lakes:

 Total Lakes Showing Notable Expansion: 676 lakes.
 Location of Expanding Lakes by River Basin:
o Indus River Basin: Contains 65 of the expanded lakes.
o Ganga River Basin: Home to 7 of these expanding lakes.
o Brahmaputra River Basin: Includes 58 expanding lakes.

Details on Lake Expansion:

 Highly Expanded Lakes: 601 lakes have expanded to more than double their original size.
 Moderately Expanded Lakes: 10 lakes have grown between 1.5 to 2 times their original size.
 Slightly Expanded Lakes: 65 lakes expanded by approximately 1.5 times their initial size.

Elevation-Based Lake Distribution:

 Lakes Between 4,000 to 5,000 Meters: 314 lakes are located within this elevation range.
 Lakes Above 5,000 Meters: 296 lakes are situated above this altitude.
 Specific Case Study: The Ghepang Ghat glacial lake in the Indus River Basin, situated at an elevation of 4,068
meters in Himachal Pradesh, expanded from 36.49 hectares to 101.30 hectares, marking a 178% increase from
1989 to 2022.

Classification of Glacial Lakes in the Himalayas:

 Moraine-Dammed Lakes: Comprising 307 lakes, these are formed by moraines—accumulations of dirt and
rocks left behind by retreating glaciers.
 Ice-Dammed Lakes: Consist of 8 lakes, where glaciers themselves act as dams.
 Erosion Lakes: Totaling 265, these lakes are formed in natural depressions carved by glacial activity.
 Other Types: Includes 96 lakes that do not fall into the standard categories of formation.

Factors Contributing to the Expansion of Glacial Lakes:

 Impact of Global Warming: Rising temperatures in the Himalayas accelerate glacier melt, increasing the volume
of water in the lakes.
 Glacier Retreat: As glaciers melt, they feed more water into these lakes while also exposing new land that can
host additional lakes.
 Moraine Degradation: As glaciers recede, the moraines that dam these lakes weaken, potentially leading to their
collapse and triggering glacial lake outburst floods (GLOFs).
 Variability in Precipitation: Increased rainfall and snowfall contribute additional water to the lakes,
exacerbating their expansion.
 Thawing Permafrost: Thawed permafrost leads to the formation of new water-collecting depressions, further
enlarging these lakes.
 Human Influence: Infrastructure projects and other human activities can alter natural water drainage systems
or exacerbate climate change effects, impacting lake sizes.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 325 of 348

 1

Recent Glacial Lake Outburst Floods (GLOFs) in India:

 2013 Uttarakhand Disaster: Excessive rainfall led to the melting of the Chorabari glacier, causing the Mandakini
river to overflow.
 2014 Ladakh Flood: A GLOF struck the village of Gya in Ladakh.
 2021 Chamoli Flash Flood: Suspected GLOF triggered devastating floods in Chamoli district, Uttarakhand.
 2023 Sikkim Flood: Continuous rainfall caused the rupture of South Lhonak Lake at an altitude of 17,000 feet,
resulting in significant flooding.

ANNUAL STATUS OF EDUCATION REPORT (ASER) 2023

Conducted by Pratham Foundation, this household survey involved 34,745 rural students aged 14 to 18 in 28
districts across 26 states to evaluate foundational reading and arithmetic skills.

Key Findings from ASER 2023:

 Youth Activities: Females are more likely than males to engage in household work daily by about 20
percentage points. A higher percentage of males (40.3%) than females (28%) performed non-household work
for more than 15 days.
 Employment in Agriculture: Many youths are involved in family farming activities.
 Career Aspirations: Popular career choices among boys are the army (13.8%) and police (13.6%). For girls,
the top choices are teacher (16%) and doctor (14.8%).
 Enrollment Trends: 86.8% of youths aged 14-18 are enrolled in educational institutions, with enrollment
dropping significantly to 32.6% by age 18.
 Educational Streams: A majority in the age group are enrolled in Arts/Humanities streams, with more than half
(55.7%) in Class XI or higher in these streams. Females are less likely (28.1%) than males (36.3%) to be enrolled
in Science, Technology, Engineering, and Mathematics (STEM) streams.
 Vocational Training: Only 5.6% of surveyed youths are engaged in vocational training, predominantly short
courses lasting six months or less.
 Assessment of Basic Skills:
 Literacy Levels: About 25% of youths cannot fluently read a standard II-level text in their regional language.
Females (76%) generally outperform males (70.9%) in reading.
 English Proficiency: Around 57.3% of youths can read English sentences, with approximately 73.5%
understanding the meaning of those sentences.
 Math Skills: Only 43.3% of youths can correctly solve division problems (3-digit by 1-digit), which shows an
improvement from 39.5% in 2017.
 Practical Application of Skills: Two-thirds (65.1%) of surveyed youths can read and comprehend instructions
on an ORS packet.
 Digital Skills and Usage:
 Smartphone Access: Around 90% of households have smartphones. Among youths, 95% of boys and 90% of
girls can operate a smartphone.
 Educational Use of Smartphones: Two-thirds of those who can use smartphones reported using them for
educational activities like watching educational videos, solving doubts, or exchanging notes.
Challenges Highlighted in the ASER Report 2023:
 Stagnation in Foundational Literacy and Numeracy: No significant improvement in foundational literacy and
numeracy skills; the percentage able to read a grade 2-level text decreased from 76.6% in 2017 to 73.6% in 2023.
 Impact on Labour Quality: Low levels of numeracy are affecting the quality of India's labor force.
 Balancing Academics and Responsibilities: Youths often need to balance academic commitments with
responsibilities like family farming.
 Smartphone Utilization: Usage of smartphones for educational purposes is substantially lower compared to
entertainment, with 80% using them for activities like watching movies or listening to music.

Gender Disparities:
 Reading and Arithmetic: Males generally perform better than females in arithmetic and English reading tasks.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 326 of 348
 1

 Digital Proficiency: Males (43.7%) own smartphones at a higher rate than females (19.8%), and perform better
in digital tasks.

About ASER Report:

 Full Name: Annual Status of Education Report.
 Conducting Body: Released by NGO Pratham Foundation.
 Inception: Initially conducted annually from its start in 2005 until 2014; switched to an alternate-year cycle
beginning in 2016.
 Focus of Data Collection:
o Enrollment Status: Assesses the enrollment status of children aged 3 to 16 years.
o Foundational Skills: Evaluates basic reading and arithmetic levels for children aged 5 to 16 years.
 Purpose and Significance: The findings are utilized by the government to inform policy decisions and
educational strategies to improve learning outcomes in rural India.

SWACHH SURVEKSHAN AWARDS, 2023

 Event Host: Ministry of Housing and Urban Affairs (MoHUA).
 Award Ceremony: Conducted by President Droupadi Murmu at Bharat Mandapam, New Delhi.
 Scope of Survey: Encompassed 4,416 urban local bodies, 61 cantonments, and 88 Ganga towns.
 Annual Theme: "Waste to Wealth" for 2023; "Reduce, Reuse and Recycle" set for 2024.

Cleanest Cities Announcement:

 Top Cities: Indore and Surat jointly declared the cleanest cities.
 Streak: This marks the seventh consecutive year Indore has been named the cleanest city.
 First-time Achievement: Surat shares the top position for the first time since the awards began in 2016.
 Performance Metrics: Both cities achieved 100% door-to-door waste collection, 98% source segregation, and
100% remediation of dumpsites.
 Third Place: Navi Mumbai was named the third cleanest city.

Cleanest State Award:

 Top State: Maharashtra won the cleanest state award.
 Metrics: Achieved 89.24% door-to-door waste collection and 67.76% source segregation.
 Runner-up State: Madhya Pradesh ranked second in state cleanliness, followed by Chhattisgarh.

Specialized Awards:
 Safaimitra Surakshit Shehar Award: Chandigarh recognized for the best safety standards for sanitation
workers.
 Cleanest Ganga Town: Varanasi received this title.
 Cleanest Small City: Sasvad in Maharashtra for cities with a population below 1 lakh.
 Cleanest Cantonment: Mhow Cantonment declared the cleanest cantonment.

Bottom Five States in Cleanliness:

 Ranked from the lowest: Arunachal Pradesh, Mizoram, Rajasthan, Nagaland, and Tripura.

Swachh Survekshan Background:

 Initiative Launch: As part of the Swachh Bharat Abhiyan (SBA), specifically under SBA-Urban, launched on
October 2, 2014.
 Purpose: Aims to eradicate open defecation and promote cleanliness and sanitation.
 Survey Inception: First conducted in 2016, covering initially 73 cities, has expanded significantly in scope.
 Evaluation Criteria: Includes citizen feedback and field assessment of sanitation measures.

Swachh Bharat Mission Urban 2.0 (SBM-U 2.0):

 Launch Date: Launched on October 1, 2021.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 327 of 348

 1

 Vision: Focuses on ensuring complete access to sanitation facilities for all and promoting a "Garbage Free India".

19TH SUMMIT OF THE NON-ALIGNED MOVEMENT (NAM)

 Location and Theme: Held in Kampala, Uganda, with the theme "Deepening Cooperation for Shared Global
Affluence".
 Leadership Transition: Uganda took over the chairmanship from Azerbaijan, to hold until 2027.
 Kampala Declaration: Focused on condemning Israeli military actions and advocating for the enforcement of
UN Security Council resolutions for humanitarian aid access to Gaza.
 India's Involvement: The Indian delegation, led by the External Affairs Minister, pushed for sustainable
solutions to the Gaza crisis and emphasized the necessity for immediate humanitarian relief and preventing
conflict spread in West Asia.
 NAM Overview: Established in 1961 in Belgrade, Yugoslavia by leaders including Josip Broz Tito, Gamal Abdel
Nasser, Jawaharlal Nehru, Sukarno, and Kwame Nkrumah, aiming for a neutral stance during the Cold War.
 Membership: Consists of 120 Member States, 17 Observer Countries, and 10 Observer organizations; lacks
a permanent secretariat or a formal founding document.
 The founders of the Non-Aligned Movement (NAM) were Jawaharlal Nehru of India, Kwame Nkrumah of
Ghana, Gamal Abdel Nasser of Egypt, Sukarno of Indonesia and Josip Broz Tito of Yugoslavia.
 Meeting Frequency: Summits are typically held every three years.

Historical Context of Indians in Uganda:

 Idi Amin's Expulsion Order: In August 1972, Idi Amin expelled around 80,000 Indians and other Asians, giving
them 90 days to leave Uganda, which led to significant economic and skill losses for Uganda.

India-Uganda Bilateral Relations:

 Historical Ties: Relations date back over a century, with the Indian influence evident since the early 20th
century.
 Diplomatic Relations: Established in 1965, relations were disrupted during Idi Amin's regime in the 1970s but
were restored after his overthrow in 1979, with invitations for expelled Indians to return.
 Indian Diaspora's Influence: Indians/PIOs, though less than 0.1% of the population, contribute about 70% of
Uganda's direct taxes.
 Cultural Integration: 'India Day' is a significant cultural event that enhances the bond between Indian and
Ugandan communities.
 Defence Cooperation: India offers training programs to Ugandan defence personnel.

Economic and Commercial Relations:

 Trade Framework: Uganda benefits from India's Duty Free Tariff Preference Scheme for Least Developed
Countries (LDCs).
 Primary Exports to Uganda: Pharmaceuticals, vehicles, plastics, paper and paperboard, and organic chemicals.
 Imports from Uganda: Mainly edible vegetables, roots, tubers, coffee, tea, spices, and cocoa products.
 Tax Agreement: The Double Taxation Avoidance Agreement (DTAA) has been effective since 2004, preventing
dual tax liabilities for taxpayers earning in both countries.

KHELO INDIA YOUTH GAMES (KIYG) 2024:

 Host State: Tamil Nadu with events in Chennai, Madurai, Trichy, and Coimbatore.
 Participants: Over 5,600 athletes participated across the country.
 Mascot: Veera Mangai, symbolizing an Indian queen who fought against British colonial rule.
 Medal Tally:
o Maharashtra: Overall champions with 57 gold, 48 silver, and 53 bronze medals; their fourth KIYG title.
o Tamil Nadu: Second place with 38 gold, 21 silver, and 39 bronze medals; their best-ever finish.
o Haryana: Third place with 35 gold, 22 silver, and 46 bronze medals.
 Total Medals: 926 medals awarded, including 278 gold, 278 silver, and 370 bronze across 26 sports.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 328 of 348

 1

 New Inclusions: Squash introduced; Silambam featured as a demonstration sport.

About Khelo India Youth Games (KIYG):

 Nature of Event: National-level multidisciplinary sports competition.
 Frequency: Annual event.
 First Edition: Initiated in 2018 in Delhi.
 Previous Host Cities: Delhi, Pune, Guwahati, Panchkula, and Bhopal.
 Participant Categories: Under-17 school students and under-21 college students.
 Talent Support: Identified talents receive INR 5 lakh annually for 8 years by a High-Powered Committee to
support their development in priority sports.

About Khelo India Programme:

 Launch Year: Began in 2018 with the Khelo India School Games in New Delhi.
 Formation: Merged from existing schemes including Rajiv Gandhi Khel Abhiyan, Urban Sports Infrastructure
Scheme, and National Sports Talent Search System.
 Types of Events:
o Khelo India Youth Games.
o Khelo India University Games.
o Khelo India Winter Games.
 Objectives:
o Facilitate smooth transition of athletes for international representation.
o Promote broad sports participation under the banners "Sports for Excellence" and "Sports for All".
 Key Features:
o 12 development verticals such as Playfield Development, Talent Search, Sports for Women, etc.
o Offers scholarships to 1000 deserving athletes annually.
 Benefits:
o Enhances sports standards in educational institutions.
o Uses technology to advance sports development.
o Focuses on social inclusivity and gender equality in sports.
 Age Criteria for Participation: Open to candidates aged 10 to 18.

SUPREME COURT QUASHES REMISSION IN BILKIS BANO CASE

Incident Context: During the 2002 Gujarat riots, Bilkis Bano, who was pregnant, was gangraped and seven of her
family members, including her three-year-old daughter, were murdered.
 Legal Proceedings: The case was investigated by the CBI. Due to threats to Bilkis, the Supreme Court transferred
the trial from Gujarat to Mumbai in 2004 and appointed a special public prosecutor.
 Convictions: In 2008, a Mumbai court convicted 11 individuals for gangrape and murder.
 Controversial Remission: In August 2022, the Gujarat government granted remission to the 11 convicts, leading
to their release, which sparked significant controversy and legal challenges.

Supreme Court's 2024 Ruling on Gujarat Government's Remission:

 Authority and Jurisdiction: The Supreme Court stated that the Gujarat government did not have the authority
to grant remission as the convicts were sentenced in Maharashtra. According to Section 432(7)(b) of the CrPC,
the "appropriate government" for remission is where the convicts are sentenced, not where the crime occurred
or where they were imprisoned.
 Flaws in Remission Process: The Court identified that the remission process had serious flaws, including orders
obtained through the concealment of facts, constituting a fraud upon the court.
 Overreach of Power: The ruling emphasized that the Gujarat government unlawfully exercised power belonging
to the Maharashtra government.
 Directive to Convicts: The convicts were directed to surrender to jail authorities within two weeks, rejecting
their plea to protect their liberty.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 329 of 348

 1

Understanding Remission:
 Definition: Remission is the reduction of the term of sentence without changing the nature of the sentence.
 Effect of Remission: A prisoner is given a new release date and is considered legally free upon release, unless
the remission is canceled due to a breach of conditions.

Constitutional and Statutory Provisions on Remission:

 Presidential Pardon Powers (Article 72): Grants pardons, reprieves, respites, or remissions of punishment or
can suspend, remit, or commute sentences, including death sentences, for offences under Union law, court-
martial sentences, or any sentences.
 Governor's Pardon Powers (Article 161): Similar powers for offences under state law, with scope narrower
than the President’s powers.
 CrPC Provisions:
o Section 432: Allows the 'appropriate government' to suspend or remit sentences, with or without
conditions.
o Section 433: Permits the commutation of sentences to a lesser form by the appropriate government.

CONSTITUTION OF THE 16TH FINANCE COMMISSION

Establishment of 16th Finance Commission:
 Constitutional Basis: Established under Article 280(1) of the Constitution.
 Chairman: Dr. Arvind Panagariya appointed as the chairman.

Terms of Reference for the 16th Finance Commission:

 Tax Distribution: Tasked with determining the distribution of taxes between the Union and the states and
allocating shares of taxes to states.
 Grants-in-Aid: Establish principles governing grants-in-aid from the Consolidated Fund of India to states and
specific grants under Article 275.
 Support for Local Governments: Measures to enhance State Consolidated Funds to support Panchayats and
Municipalities, based on recommendations from State Finance Commissions.
 Disaster Management Financing: Review and propose changes to the financing structures related to disaster
management as per the Disaster Management Act of 2005.
Issues in Financial Devolution:
 Cess and Surcharges: Estimated at around 23% of the Union government's gross tax receipts, not shared with
states.
 State Share of Union Tax Revenue:
o 2022-23: ₹9.5 lakh crore
o 2023-24: ₹11.0 lakh crore
o 2024-25: ₹12.2 lakh crore
 Comparison with 15th Finance Commission Recommendations: Actual state share is about 32% of the total
tax receipts of the Centre, less than the recommended 41%.

Variation in State Returns:

 Tax Contribution vs. Return: Industrially developed states receive much less per rupee contributed compared
to states like Uttar Pradesh and Bihar.

Divisible Pool of Taxes:

 Reduction for Southern States: Share in the divisible pool of taxes has been reducing for southern states over
the last six finance commissions due to higher weightage given to equity and needs over efficiency.

Grants-in-Aid Variation:
 Distribution Basis: Based on revenue deficits, sector-specific and state-specific needs, and population and area
of states.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 330 of 348

 1

Vertical Fiscal Imbalance (VFI):

 Definition: VFI refers to the mismatch between revenue-raising powers and expenditure responsibilities of
different government levels in a federal system.
 Current Scenario: States incur about 61% of the revenue expenditure but collect only 38% of the revenue
receipts.
 Importance of Reducing VFI: Enhances efficiency in public spending, addresses imbalances during crises, and
promotes equitable federal structure.
Role of Finance Commission in Addressing VFI:
 Tax Distribution: Determines the distribution of taxes collected by the Union to states.
 Allocation Recommendations: Advises on the allocation of these taxes across individual states and
recommends grants under Article 275.
 Unconditional Transfers: Focuses on tax devolution from net proceeds, excluding cesses and surcharges.
Measuring VFI:
 Calculation Method: Comparison of Own Revenue Receipts (ORR) and tax devolution to Own Revenue
Expenditure (ORE) for all states.
 Ideal Devolution Share: To eliminate VFI, the share of net proceeds devolved to states should have been 48.94%
based on averages from 2015-16 to 2022-23.
Overview of Finance Commission of India (FCI):
 Nature: A quasi-judicial body established under the Constitution of India.
 Constitutional Basis: Constituted by the President as per Article 280 of the Constitution.
 Functionality: Not a permanent body; reconstituted every fifth year or sooner if deemed necessary by the
President.
 Primary Role: Advises on financial distributions between the Union government and State governments.
Constitutional Articles Governing FCI:
 Article 280: Establishes the Finance Commission.
 Article 281: Pertains to the recommendations made by the Finance Commission.
Composition of the Finance Commission:
 Members: Comprises a Chairman and four other members appointed by the President.
 Term of Office: Members serve for a term specified by the President and are eligible for reappointment.
Qualifications for Membership:
 Legislative Specifications: Qualifications are specified under the Finance Commission Act of 1951.
 Chairman: Must have experience in public affairs.
 Other Members: Must be chosen from among the following categories:
o A High Court judge or someone qualified to be one.
o A person with specialized knowledge of government finance and accounts.
o A person with extensive experience in financial matters and administration.
o A person with special knowledge of economics.

DRAFT EXPLOSIVES BILL, 2024

 Drafted by: Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade (DPIIT).
 Purpose: To replace the existing Explosives Act of 1884.
 Key Objectives:
o Increase fines for regulatory violations.
o Improve the efficiency of licensing procedures.

Key Provisions of the Explosives Bill 2024:

 Licensing Authority: Designated by the Union government, responsible for granting, suspending, or revoking
licenses.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 331 of 348

 1

 Role of PESO: Continues as the regulatory body under DPIIT, managing licenses and safety of hazardous
substances.
 License Specifications: Licenses will detail the allowed quantity of explosives for manufacture, possession, sale,
transport, import, and export.
 Penalties: Increased penalties for violations including:
o Up to three years imprisonment or a fine of Rs 1,00,000, or both for unauthorized manufacturing, importing,
or exporting of explosives.
o Up to two years imprisonment or a fine of Rs 50,000, or both for unauthorized possession, use, sale, or
transportation of explosives.
Petroleum and Explosives Safety Organization (PESO):
 Establishment: Originally known as the Department of Explosives, founded in 1898.
 Function: Regulates the safety of explosives, compressed gases, and petroleum under the Explosives Act 1884
and Petroleum Act 1934.
 Role: Administers safety regulations, licensing, and provides training for safe handling of explosives.
Historical Context of the Explosives Act 1884:
 Purpose: Introduced during British rule to regulate the handling, storage, and use of explosives.
 Safety Measures: Established guidelines for the safe management of explosives, including manufacturing,
storage, transportation, and use.
 Regulatory Powers: Empowered the Central Government to regulate the manufacture, possession, use, sale,
transport, import, and export of explosives.
 Prohibition and Exemption:
o Allows prohibition of especially dangerous explosives.
o Does not interfere with the Arms Act, 1959; licenses under the Explosives Act can serve similar purposes as
those under the Arms Act.

Popular Explosives Described in the Act:

 Dynamite: Made by stabilizing nitroglycerin with an absorbent material like clay.
 Ammonium Nitrate: Commonly used as a fertilizer and under certain conditions, as an explosive.
 TNT (Trinitrotoluene): Insensitive to shock, used in military shells and industrial applications.
 RDX (Royal Demolition Explosive): Known for its high explosive power and stability, used in military and
civilian applications.
TREE COVER LOSS IN INDIA
The latest report from the Global Forest Watch (GFW) indicates that since the year 2000, India has experienced a loss
of 2.33 million hectares of tree cover, which equates to a 6% reduction in total tree cover over this period.
 Total Tree Cover Loss: Since 2000, India has lost 2.33 million hectares, amounting to a 6% decrease.
 Primary Forest Loss: From 2002 to 2023, 414,000 hectares of humid primary forest were lost, comprising 4.1%
of total tree cover.
 Carbon Impact: Annually, Indian forests emitted 51 million tons and absorbed 141 million tons of CO2, netting
a carbon sink of 89.9 million tons.
 Natural Forests: 95% of tree cover loss between 2013 and 2023 occurred within natural forests.
 Peak Loss Years: The highest losses were recorded in 2017 (189,000 hectares), 2016 (175,000 hectares), and
2023 (144,000 hectares).
 State-Level Impact: Assam (324,000 hectares), Mizoram, Arunachal Pradesh, Nagaland, and Manipur were most
affected, with these five states accounting for 60% of total loss.
 Forest Fire Impact: Contributed to 1.6% of tree cover loss from 2001 to 2022, with 2008 witnessing the
maximum loss due to fires (3,000 hectares).
Global Context of Forest Loss:
 Global Loss of Primary Forest: From 2002 to 2023, the world lost 76.3 million hectares of humid primary forest,
which is 16% of its total tree cover loss.
 Overall Global Tree Cover Loss: From 2001 to 2023, there was a total global loss of 488 million hectares,
marking a 12% decrease since 2000.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 332 of 348

 1

 Contributors to Global Loss: Fires accounted for 126 million hectares and other drivers for 333 million hectares
of tree cover loss globally from 2001 to 2022.
 Top 5 Countries by Tree Cover: As of 2010, Russia had the most tree cover (755 million hectares), followed by
Brazil, Canada, the US, and Democratic Republic of Congo.
Major Forest Conservation Initiatives in India:
 Forest Survey of India (FSI) Reports: Biennial assessments since 1987; ISFR 2021 shows a total forest and tree
cover of 809,537 square kilometers, which is 24.62% of India's geographical area.
 Increase in Cover: ISFR 2021 noted an increase of 2,261 square kilometers compared to ISFR 2019.
 National Action Plan on Climate Change (NAPCC): Launched in 2008, aims to increase awareness and counter
climate change threats.
 National Mission for Green India: Part of NAPCC, focuses on enhancing India's forest cover and responding to
climate change through adaptation and mitigation measures.
 Nagar Van Yojana (NVY): Initiated in 2020 to develop 600 urban forests and 400 garden spaces by 2024-25 to
improve urban green cover and biodiversity.
 Compensatory Afforestation Fund (CAMPA): Utilizes funds for afforestation activities as compensation for
forest land diverted to non-forest uses; 90% of funds are disbursed to states.
 Multi-Departmental Efforts: Includes schemes like the National Bamboo Mission and Sub-Mission on
Agroforestry under various ministries and state government initiatives.
Status of Forests in India According to ISFR 2021:
 Forest and Tree Cover: Comprises 24.62% of India's geographical area with 21.71% forest cover and 2.91%
tree cover.
 State-Wise Coverage: Madhya Pradesh has the highest forest cover followed by Arunachal Pradesh,
Chhattisgarh, Odisha, and Maharashtra.
 Forestry Sector Employment: As per the FAO, 6.26 million people were employed in forestry in 2010.
 Economic Contribution: Forestry sector contributed a net of -690 million USD to the economy in 2010,
approximately -0.037% of India's GDP.
 Largest Plantation Type: Wood fiber or timber with 5.92 million hectares, representing 1.9% of land area.

66TH GRAMMY AWARDS 2024

 Date and Location: Held on February 4, 2024, at Crypto.com Arena (formerly Staples Center) in Los Angeles,
California.
 Host: Trevor Noah.
 Key Achievements: Taylor Swift won Album of the Year for "Midnights," becoming the first individual to win this
category four times and also won Best Pop Vocal Album.
 Miley Cyrus won her first Grammy for Best Pop Solo Performance with "Flowers" and another for Record of the
Year.
Notable Performers:
 Billie Eilish, Billy Joel, Burna Boy, Dua Lipa, Joni Mitchell (her first Grammy performance), Luke Combs, Olivia
Rodrigo, SZA, Travis Scott.
 U2 performed for the first time via broadcast from Sphere in Las Vegas.

Introduction of New Categories:

 Best African Music Performance.
 Best Alternative Jazz Album.
 Best Pop Dance Recording.

Key Winners at the 66th Grammy Awards:

 Album of the Year: "Midnights" by Taylor Swift.
 Record of the Year: "Flowers" by Miley Cyrus.
 Song of the Year: "What Was I Made For? [From The Motion Picture “Barbie”]".
 Best New Artist: Victoria Monet.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 333 of 348

 1

Grammy Awards Overview:

 Official Name: Originally named Gramophone Award.
 Organizers: Presented by the National Academy of Recording Arts & Sciences (NARAS) and the Latin Academy
of Recording Arts & Sciences (LARAS), with LARAS handling awards for Spanish/Portuguese recordings.
 Inception: Launched in 1959 to honor musical achievements from the previous year.
 Award Trophy: Winners receive a golden statuette of a gramophone.

India’s Achievements at the 66th Grammy Awards (2024):

 Winner: The fusion music group Shakti, including members Zakir Hussain, Shankar Mahadevan, John
McLaughlin, Ganesh Rajagopalan, and Selvaganesh Vinayakram.
 Award Category: Won Best Global Music Album for “This Moment”.
 Significance: This album marked Shakti’s return after 46 years and was released on June 23, 2023. Described as
an unprecedented transcontinental collaboration, it pioneers what is recognized as world music.
 Additional Awards for Zakir Hussain:
o Best Global Music Performance: Won for the track 'Pashto'.
o Best Contemporary Instrumental Album: Secured for the album 'As We Speak', which also features Rakesh
Chaurasia, an Indian flautist and the nephew of renowned flautist Hariprasad Chaurasia.

INTERNATIONAL ENERGY AGENCY (IEA) REPORT ON RENEWABLE ENERGY,

2023
 Record Growth: In 2023, global annual renewable capacity additions increased by nearly 50% to almost 510
GW, the fastest growth rate in two decades.
 China's Contribution: China led significant growth, installing as much solar photovoltaics (PV) in 2023 as the
entire world did in 2022. Wind additions in China grew by 66% year-on-year.
 Transformation of Global Power Mix: Renewables are expected to surpass coal as the largest source of
electricity generation by 2025, with wind and solar PV becoming dominant sources by 2028.

Regional Growth Highlights:

 US, EU, India, and Brazil: Enhanced growth driven by supportive policies and the economic attractiveness of
solar PV and onshore wind.
 Middle East and North Africa: Increased capacity growth due to policy incentives, though sub-Saharan Africa
remains behind despite significant resource potential.
 India's Forecast: Expected to add 205 GW from 2023 to 2028, doubling its 2022’s cumulative installed capacity
and becoming the world’s third-largest market for renewables.
Solar PV Market Dynamics:
 Price Reduction: Solar PV module prices fell by nearly 50% in 2023 due to increased manufacturing capacity.
 Cost-Effectiveness: Solar PV and onshore wind are now cheaper than both new and existing fossil fuel plants,
which is a key driver of their rapid adoption globally.
Biofuel and Electric Vehicle (EV) Integration:
 Biofuel Expansion: Led primarily by Brazil in emerging economies.
 Impact on Oil Demand: Biofuels and renewable electricity in EVs are projected to offset significant oil demand
by 2028, highlighting their role in energy transition.
Challenges Identified in the Report:
 Financial Constraints: Emerging and developing economies are facing inadequate financing for renewable
projects, exacerbated by rising interest rates.
 Grid Bottlenecks: Rapid deployment of renewables is leading to integration challenges, with increased
curtailment due to inadequate grid expansion.
 Wind Industry: Experiencing supply chain disruptions, particularly in offshore wind sectors.
IEA's Major Recommendations:
 Triple Capacity by 2030: Align with the Net Zero Emissions by 2050 scenario.
©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 334 of 348
 1

 Policy and Infrastructure Enhancements: Address policy uncertainties, invest in grid infrastructure, ease
administrative barriers, and improve financing in emerging economies to meet 2030 targets.
India’s Renewable Energy Targets and Government Interventions:
 Panchamrit Goals: Aim to achieve a non-fossil fuel energy capacity of 500 GW by 2030, fulfill at least half of its
energy requirements via renewable energy by 2030, reduce CO2 emissions by 1 billion tons by 2030, and
reduce carbon intensity below 45 percent by 2030.
 Net-Zero by 2070: Target set for achieving net-zero emissions.
 Key Initiatives: Pradhan Mantri- Kisan Urja Suraksha evam Utthaan Mahabhiyan (PM- KUSUM), National Solar
Mission, PLI Scheme for High-Efficiency Solar PV Modules, Offshore Wind Energy Policy, Global Biofuel Alliance,
International Solar Alliance, and Suryamitra Skill Development Programme.
Overview of IEA:
 Establishment: Founded in 1974 following the 1973-1974 oil crisis.
 Expanded Mandate: Now focuses on broader energy security, economic development, environmental
awareness, and global engagement, including guiding towards net-zero emission energy systems and integrating
critical minerals for clean energy technologies.
 Membership: Comprises 31 member countries and 13 association countries, including India, with five countries
pursuing full membership.

NEURALINK HUMAN BRAIN IMPLANT FOR THE FIRST TIME

Overview of Brain-Computer Interface (BCI):
 Definition: Technology that facilitates direct communication between the brain and external devices without
traditional neuromuscular pathways.
 Mechanism: Involves sensors that detect brain signals which are translated into commands that control devices
or enable interactions with the external environment.
Background of Neuralink's First Human Implant Recipient:
 Name: Noland Arbaugh.
 Age: 30 years old.
 Condition: Quadriplegic, paralyzed from the shoulders down due to a spinal cord injury in 2016.
Details of the Neuralink Device Implanted:
 Type: Brain-computer interface (BCI) known as Neuralink.
 Size and Composition: Coin-sized, placed under the skull, contains a processing chip and battery.
 Functionality: Equipped with 64 threads that connect to brain tissue, it reads neuron activity and converts it
into computer commands.
Potential Applications of Brain-Computer Interface:
 Medical Treatments:
o Neurological Disorders: Utilized for monitoring and treating conditions such as epilepsy, Parkinson's
disease, and neurodegenerative disorders.
o Stroke Rehabilitation: Aids in the recovery of motor functions and rehabilitation post-stroke.
o Assistive Technology: Allows individuals with paralysis or motor impairments to control prosthetic limbs,
wheelchairs, or robotic arms using their thoughts.
o Communication Restoration: Facilitates communication for people with locked-in syndrome.
o Mental Health Monitoring: Offers real-time data for monitoring and managing mental health issues like
depression or anxiety.
 Virtual and Augmented Reality: Enhances interaction within digital environments using thoughts.

About Neuralink Corp.:

 Founding: Established by Elon Musk and a team of seven scientists and engineers in 2016, publicly reported first
in March 2017.
 Developments as of 2024: Developed implantable brain-computer interfaces approved by the US Food and
Drug Administration under the "investigational device exemption" for trials.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 335 of 348

 1

 Device Characteristics: The device is similar in size to a large coin and designed for implantation in the skull.

WOMEN, BUSINESS AND THE LAW 2024 REPORT

The Women, Business and Law Index is a pivotal tool developed by the World Bank to assess the impact of laws
and regulations on women's economic opportunities across 190 economies worldwide.
 This index rates countries on a scale from 0 to 100, with 100 indicating complete legal gender equality.
 The areas evaluated include Mobility, Workplace, Pay, Marriage, Parenthood, Entrepreneurship, Assets, and
Pension, providing clear, measurable benchmarks to track global progress toward legal gender parity.
 This year marks the 10th edition of the Women, Business and Law report.
 Despite efforts, no country has achieved a perfect score on the index, underscoring the universal gap in legal
rights for women.
 India's position has improved, ranking 113th among 190 nations.
 In India, women have legal rights equivalent to 60% of those available to men, which is below the global
average of 64.2%, highlighting significant room for improvement in gender legal equality.

Key Findings:
 Global Legal Frameworks Index:
o High-Income OECD Economies: Eleven economies scored 90 or above; Italy is the highest with a score of
95, followed by New Zealand and Portugal both at 92.5.
o Overall Scores: More than 37 economies provide less than half the legal rights to women compared to men,
impacting about half a billion women worldwide. High-income economies average a score of 75.4, while
upper-middle-income economies average 66.8.
 Disparity in Women’s Legal Rights:
o Globally, women enjoy only 64% of the legal protections afforded to men when considering legal differences
in areas like violence and childcare.
o Despite legal reforms for gender equality, women's actual experiences lag significantly behind, with a noted
gap in legal reforms and their implementation.
 Economic and Legal Performance by Country:
o Togo: Leads in Sub-Saharan Africa with laws providing women about 77% of the rights available to men.
However, only 27% of necessary systems for full implementation are established.
o Safety and Childcare:
 Global average score for women's safety is notably low at 36, indicating inadequate legal protections
against domestic violence, sexual harassment, child marriage, and femicide.
 Less than half of the economies (78) provide some form of financial or tax support for childcare for
young children. Only 62 economies have set quality standards for childcare services.
 India's Specific Findings:
o 2024 Ranking: India ranked 113th with a score of 74.4%, showing a marginal improvement in rank but a
stable score since 2021.
o Legal Rights: Indian women have 60% of the legal rights compared to men, slightly below the global average
of 64.2%.
o Comparison: India performs better than its South Asian counterparts, where women have only 45.9% of the
legal protections enjoyed by men.
 Report Recommendations:
o Economic Impact: Removing discriminatory laws could increase global GDP by more than 20%, potentially
doubling the rate of global growth over the next decade.
o Policy and Legal Reforms:
 Effective implementation of equal-opportunity laws requires robust enforcement mechanisms and
systems to track gender-related pay disparities.
 Public policies should empower women to work and engage in business, stressing the urgent need for
law reforms to enhance women's economic participation and decision-making influence.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 336 of 348

 1

ISRO’S SECOND LAUNCHPAD

Prime Minister Narendra Modi inaugurated the construction of ISRO's second rocket launchport at
Kulasekarapattinam in Tamil Nadu's Thoothukudi district on February 28.
 Project Cost: The new facility is estimated to cost Rs 986 crore.
 Purpose: The Kulasekarapattinam launchport is designed specifically for commercial, on-demand, and small
satellite launches.
 Avoiding Overburden: The new launchport will prevent overloading at the Satish Dhawan Space Centre (SDSC)
SHAR in Sriharikota, which will continue to handle larger and heavy-lift missions.
 Location Benefits: Located in coastal Tamil Nadu, the Kulasekarapattinam site offers geographical advantages
for launching Southward trajectories, which are more fuel-efficient for certain types of missions.
 Land Acquisition: Over 2,000 acres of land have been acquired and transferred to ISRO for the development of
the launchport.
 Construction Timeline: ISRO Chairman S Somanath indicated that the construction might take up to two years
to complete.
 Launch Capacity: Once operational, the site is expected to support 20 to 30 launches of Small Satellite Launch
Vehicles (SSLVs) per year.
o Equatorial Location:
 Like the SDSC SHAR, Kulasekarapattinam is also situated near the equator.
 Launch sites near the equator benefit from the Earth's rotation, which imparts a significant velocity
boost to rockets during liftoff.
 This boost in velocity allows for increased payload capacity, particularly advantageous for missions
aiming for geostationary orbit.
 SSLV Details: SSLV, a three-stage launch vehicle with both solid and liquid propulsion stages, is designed for
lifting small satellites (10 to 500 kg) into Low Earth Orbit. SSLV is about 34 meters in length and 2 meters in
diameter.
 SSLV Usage: SSLVs are intended for rapid deployment of small satellites, benefiting commercial and educational
satellite projects.
 SSLV Track Record: The initial SSLV mission (SSLV-D1) in August 2022 failed to achieve the correct orbit, but a
subsequent launch (SSLV-D2) in February 2023 successfully placed three satellites into their designated orbit.
 SHAR Capabilities: Located near Sriharikota, Andhra Pradesh, SHAR is equipped with two launch pads and
supports all major ISRO missions including the launch of PSLV, GSLV, and LVM3 vehicles.
 Previous Launchpad Utilization: SHAR's first launch pad was inaugurated in the early 1990s, with its first
mission in September 1993, while the second launch pad has been operational since May 2005.

HOUSEHOLD CONSUMPTION EXPENDITURE SURVEY 2022-23

For the first time in about 11 years, the government released the broad findings of the All India Household
Consumption Expenditure Survey carried out between August 2022 and July 2023.
 The data will play a key role in reviewing critical economic indicators, including the Gross Domestic Product
(GDP), poverty levels, and the Consumer Price Inflation (CPI).
 The Household Consumption Expenditure Survey (HCES) is usually conducted by the National Statistical Office
(NSO) every five years, but the findings of the last Survey, conducted in 2017-18 soon after the
demonetisation of high-value currency notes and the implementation of the Goods and Services Tax (GST),
were never released after the government cited “data quality” issues.

Key Highlights of HCES 2022-23:

 Food Expenditure:
o Beverages, refreshments, and processed food see significant expenditure, especially in Tamil Nadu with rural
(28.4%) and urban (33.7%).
o Milk and milk products are mostly purchased in northern states like Haryana (rural 41.7%, urban 33.1%)
and Rajasthan (urban 33.2%).

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 337 of 348

 1

o Egg, fish, and meat consumption is highest in Kerala for both rural (23.5%) and urban (19.8%) households.
 Overall Expenditure:
o Food constitutes 46% of total expenditure in rural areas and 39% in urban areas.
o Non-food items see increased spending, with rural non-food expenditure rising from 40.6% in 1999 to
53.62% in 2022-23, and urban from 51.94% to 60.83%.
 Major Non-Food Expenditure:
o Conveyance is a significant expense in both rural and urban households, particularly in Kerala.
o Medical expenses are notably high in Kerala, West Bengal, and Andhra Pradesh (rural) and West Bengal,
Kerala, and Punjab (urban).
o Durable goods expenditure is highest in Kerala for both rural and urban areas.
o Fuel and light spending is substantial in West Bengal and Odisha.

Regional Variations in Expenditure:

 Reflects diverse cultural and economic differences across states.

Growth in Consumption Expenditure:

 Rural monthly consumption per person grew by 164% from 2011-12 to 2022-23, urban by 146%.
 The disparity in monthly per capita consumption between urban and rural areas has decreased from 90% in
2009-10 to 75% in 2022-23.

National Statistical Office (NSO) Facts:

 Formed in 2019 by merging the Central Statistical Office (CSO) and the National Sample Survey Office (NSSO).
 Recommended by the C. Rangarajan Committee to be the leading agency for core statistical activities.
 Operates under the Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation (MoSPI).
 Responsible for collecting, compiling, and disseminating reliable and relevant statistical data.

ONE NATION, ONE ELECTION

The High-level Committee on Simultaneous Elections, chaired by Shri Ram Nath Kovind, former President of
India, proposed simultaneous elections for the Lok Sabha, state Assemblies, and local bodies.

Key Recommendations:
 Bill 1: Proposes simultaneous elections for the Lok Sabha and State Assemblies without state ratification for
the amendment.
 Bill 2: Aims to synchronize elections for municipalities and panchayats with Lok Sabha and state assemblies,
requiring ratification by at least one-half of the states.
 Article 82A: Introduction of a new article to establish a system for simultaneous elections.
 Expansion of Article 327: To include the conduct of simultaneous elections.
 Articles 83(4) and 172(4): Ensure any newly elected Lok Sabha or state assembly serves only the remaining
"unexpired term."
 Article 324A: Proposed to empower Parliament to legislate for simultaneous local body elections.
 Term Synchronization: Targets the potential first simultaneous elections for 2029 or 2034, depending on
implementation decisions post-2024 Lok Sabha elections. Shorter terms for some state assemblies as a one-time
adjustment to align with this schedule.
 Synchronization of Local Body Elections: Recommends new legislation, potentially under a new Article 324A,
to align local body elections with the national electoral calendar.
 Electoral Roll Management: Suggests amending Article 325 to enable a unified electoral roll and EPIC system
managed by the Election Commission of India (ECI) in collaboration with State Election Commissions (SECs).

Logistical and Governance Recommendations:

 Calls for detailed logistical plans and budgets from the ECI and SECs for conducting simultaneous elections.
 Emphasizes the potential benefits of stable governance periods free from frequent electoral disruptions.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 338 of 348

 1

Constitutional Provisions Related to Elections:

 Article 83: Defines the tenure of the Lok Sabha as five years unless dissolved sooner.
 Article 172: Similar tenure definition for State Legislative Assemblies.
 Article 324: Mandates the ECI’s role in overseeing election preparations and conduct.
 Article 356: Details the imposition of the President's Rule in states under certain conditions.
 Representation of People Act, 1951: Framework for electoral processes in India.

Historical Context:
 Initial years post-independence (1952, 1957, 1962) saw simultaneous elections, which were later disrupted due
to political instability and the need to address regional concerns separately.

Previous Recommendations on Simultaneous Elections:

 Law Commission: In 1999 and 2018, proposed simultaneous elections to reduce costs and administrative strain.
 Parliamentary Standing Committee on Personnel, Public Grievances, Law, and Justice (79th Report):
Suggested a practicable method for holding simultaneous elections.
 NITI Aayog (2017): Advocated for simultaneous elections for effective governance and reduced frequent
election cycles.

PLASTIC WASTE MANAGEMENT (AMENDMENT) RULES, 2024

 Introduced to update the Plastic Waste Management Rules 2016.
 Aim to tighten regulations on labeling disposable plastic ware as 'biodegradable' and prevent microplastic
residue.

Definition and Impact of Microplastics:

 Microplastics are solid plastic particles, insoluble in water, measuring between 1 µm and 1,000 µm. They are a
significant source of pollution in rivers and oceans.

Goals of the Original Plastic Waste Management Rules 2016:

 Increase the minimum thickness of plastic carry bags from 40 to 50 microns and plastic sheets to facilitate
recycling.
 Extend the applicability from municipal to rural areas to address widespread plastic use.
 Integrate responsibilities of producers and generators in plastic waste management.
 Implement a collect-back system for plastic waste by producers/brand owners as per extended producer
responsibility.
 Encourage the use of plastic waste for road construction, energy recovery, or conversion to oil.

Rationale Behind Amending the Plastic Waste Management Rules:

 Address the rapid growth of plastic waste pollution through technological solutions like biodegradable and
compostable plastics.
 The 2022 ban on single-use plastic highlighted the need for clear definitions and standards for biodegradable
plastics.
 Address ambiguity in certification for biodegradable plastics due to undefined degradation standards.

Key Provisions in the Plastic Waste Management (Amendment) Rules 2024:

 Biodegradable plastics must degrade in specific environments like soil or landfill without leaving microplastics.
 New rules lack specific guidelines on the chemical tests for establishing the absence of microplastics or the
required reduction levels in products.
 Manufacturers of products from compostable or biodegradable plastics must ensure mandatory marking,
labelling, and obtain certification from the CPCB.
 Manufacturers must process pre-consumer plastic waste generated during production and report to the
respective State Pollution Control Board or Pollution Control Committee.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 339 of 348

 1

BELGIUM RECOGNISES ECOCIDE AS A CRIME

Ecocide refers to unlawful or deliberate acts known to have a high likelihood of causing severe and widespread or
long-term environmental damage.
 The definition was formalized by the Independent Expert Panel for the Legal Definition of Ecocide in 2021.
 Examples of Ecocide:
o Industrial fishing: Practices like deep-sea bottom-trawling that destroy ecosystems by dredging the ocean
floor.
o Oil spills: Notable incidents include the Deepwater Horizon disaster in 2010, which affected over 149,000
square kilometers and polluted around 1,770 km of shoreline.
o Textile industry pollution: Significant pollution from wastewater generated by dyeing and tanning
processes.
 Organizations Involved:
o Stop Ecocide International (SEI): Co-founded in 2017 by Polly Higgins and Jojo Mehta, aims to make
ecocide an international crime.
o Stop Ecocide Foundation: Established in 2019 to support SEI’s initiatives and serve as a primary
fundraising entity.
 Belgium’s New Legislation on Ecocide:
o Belgium has enacted laws making ecocide punishable under both national and international law, aiming to
address severe environmental degradation like large-scale oil spills.
o Penalties: Individuals may face up to 20 years in prison, and corporations could be fined up to 1.6 million
euros.
o Applies within the jurisdiction of Belgium’s federal authority, including the North Sea and areas involved in
nuclear waste management.
o Belgium is the first European nation to recognize ecocide as an international crime, adding it as a fifth
international crime alongside war crimes, crimes of aggression, crimes against humanity, and genocide.
 Ecocide and the European Union:
o During COP26 in Glasgow, the first global citizen’s assembly advocated for the recognition of ecocide in
international courts.
o The EU has encouraged member states to support the inclusion of ecocide as a recognized crime in
international courts.
DELHI EXCISE POLICY CASE
Involves allegations related to the Delhi Excise Policy 2021-22, scrapped due to procedural lapses and corruption
leading to estimated financial losses of over Rs 580 crore.
o Central allegations include arbitrary decisions by the Deputy Chief Minister and Excise Minister, forming
cartels, and preferential treatment in the alcohol sector with alleged 12% profits and 6% kickbacks.
o Accusations assert misuse of kickbacks to influence Punjab and Goa Assembly elections in 2022.
 Governance by Incumbent Chief Minister from Jail:
o The Indian Constitution does not explicitly prohibit a Chief Minister from governing from jail.
o Legal immunity is limited to the President and Governors under Article 361, not extending to Chief
Ministers.
o A Chief Minister remains in office until convicted or if they lose majority support in the assembly.
o The Supreme Court’s Manoj Narula vs Union of India Case, 2014, emphasizes high moral standards
expected from public office holders, impacting public trust.
o Practical governance challenges involve restrictions on official document access and communication
hurdles.
 Consequences and Legal Implications:
o President’s Rule can be imposed citing 'failure of constitutional machinery', leading potentially to the Chief
Minister's resignation and direct Union government control over Delhi, as per Article 239AB.
o The Chief Minister is not automatically disqualified by arrest but is by conviction, aligning with the
Representation of the People Act, 1951.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 340 of 348

 1

Arvind Kejriwal Arrest Overview:

 ED Summons: Arvind Kejriwal missed nine summons between November 2, 2023, and March 21, 2024,
leading to his arrest by the Enforcement Directorate (ED) concerning the Delhi excise policy case.
 High Court Petition: Filed for "no coercive action" but was denied by the Delhi High Court, leading to his arrest
on March 21.
 Custody Details: Initially remanded to ED custody till March 28, with subsequent extensions, the latest until
May 20.
Supreme Court Hearing on Bail:
 Representation by Senior Advocate: Abhishek Manu Singhvi argued against Kejriwal's arrest citing lack of
direct evidence linking him to the excise scam.
 Interim Bail Granted: Under conditions that restrict Kejriwal from visiting the Chief Minister's office and
interacting with case witnesses or official files, effective until June 4, coinciding with election results.
CBI and ED Investigations:
 Dual Investigations: The Central Bureau of Investigation (CBI) and the ED are investigating the excise policy
case; the CBI focuses on corruption aspects while the ED handles money laundering accusations.
 Other Arrests: Former Deputy Chief Minister Manish Sisodia was arrested in February 2023 related to the same
case.
 Kejriwal's CBI Interaction: Interrogated for over nine hours by the CBI in April 2023.
 September 2024: The Supreme Court ordered Delhi Chief Minister Arvind Kejriwal to be released on regular
bail in a case registered by the Central Bureau of Investigation (CBI).

ISRO'S ZERO ORBITAL DEBRIS MILESTONE AND THE SPACE DEBRIS CRISIS
 ISRO launched the PSLV-C58/XPoSat mission with a focus on zero-debris in space by transforming the final
rocket stage into a space platform called POEM-3 (PSLV Orbital Experimental Module-3).
o Rather than allowing debris to linger in orbit, ISRO brought it back into Earth’s atmosphere after completing
the mission.
 What is POEM?
o Developed by the Vikram Sarabhai Space Centre (VSSC), POEM serves as a cost-effective platform for in-
orbit experiments.
o It repurposes the spent fourth stage of the PSLV rocket to serve as an orbital platform.
o First Used in: June 2022 on the PSLV-C53 mission, functioning as a stabilized platform for scientific
experiments.
 Features of POEM:
o Equipped with solar panels mounted on the rocket’s fuel tank and a lithium-ion battery for power.
o Utilizes a Navigation, Guidance, and Control (NGC) system and helium thrusters for stability.
o Interacts with ISRO’s NavIC satellite constellation for navigation and includes a telecommand system for
ground communication.
 Achievements of POEM-3:
o Payloads: Carried nine different scientific payloads.
o Orbit Count: Completed 400 Earth orbits in 25 days, with all payloads performing their assigned
experiments.
Challenges of Space Debris
 Increase in Space Debris:
o The proliferation of satellites has heightened concerns around space debris, especially in Low Earth Orbit
(LEO), comprising defunct satellites, spent rocket stages, and fragments from anti-satellite missile tests.
o LEO range: Extends from 100 km to 2,000 km above Earth’s surface, including critical satellites for
intelligence, communication, and navigation.
o Projection: By 2030, an estimated 60,000 objects larger than 10 cm will populate LEO.
 Threats Posed by Space Debris:
o In Orbit: Debris moves at speeds up to 27,000 km/h, posing collision risks to operational satellites and
space assets.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 341 of 348

 1

o On Earth: Debris incidents on Earth include falling objects like a discarded battery pallet damaging a house
in Florida.
o Kessler Syndrome: Ongoing collisions could result in cascading debris, further creating unusable regions
in space.

Efforts to Tackle Space Debris

 Legal Framework:
o While there is no binding international law on LEO debris, the Space Debris Mitigation Guidelines of 2002
by the Inter-Agency Space Debris Coordination Committee (IADC) have been endorsed by the UN since
2007.
o These guidelines focus on avoiding collisions, limiting operational break-ups, and discouraging prolonged
presence in LEO.
 Global Initiatives:
o NASA: Initiated the Orbital Debris Program in 1979, aiming to minimize and track space debris. The Space
Force now monitors debris and potential collisions.
o European Space Agency (ESA): Promotes a Zero Debris charter aiming for zero debris by 2030.
o Japan: Runs the Commercial Removal of Debris Demonstration (CRD2) project to address space junk.
 India's Contributions to Debris Management:
o ISRO's POEM Missions: Aimed at reducing space debris by reusing rocket stages as experimental modules.
o Space Situational Awareness Control Centre: Established by ISRO to safeguard its space assets against
close encounters and potential collisions.
o Manastu Space: An Indian start-up focusing on in-space refueling, de-orbiting old satellites, and
satellite life extension technology.

FOOD WASTE INDEX REPORT 2024

Released jointly by the United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP) and WRAP (Waste and Resources
Action Programme), a UK-based NGO focused on climate action.
 Emphasizes the need for better data infrastructure to track and monitor food waste effectively.
 Food Waste Definition: Refers to food and inedible parts removed from the human food supply chain.
 Food Loss: Involves crop and livestock quantities exiting the supply chain up to the retail level.
 Tracks progress toward halving global food waste by 2030 (SDG 12.3).
 First issued in 2021, the 2024 report builds on expanded datasets and highlights Public Private Partnerships
(PPP) for tackling food waste.
Highlights of the 2024 Report
 Global Food Waste: In 2022, 1.05 billion tonnes of food were wasted (approx. 19% of all food available at
retail, food service, and household levels).
o An additional 13% of food is lost in the supply chain before reaching retail, as per FAO.
 Impact on Greenhouse Gases: Food loss and waste account for 8-10% of global greenhouse gas emissions—
nearly 5x the emissions from the aviation sector.
o This occurs even as one-third of humanity faces food insecurity.

Data Insights and Patterns

 Lower Disparity in Food Waste: Enhanced data reduced per capita food waste disparities to 7 kg across
income levels (high, upper-middle, and lower-middle-income countries).
 Temperature Correlation: Higher per capita waste in hotter regions, likely due to reliance on fresh produce
and lack of robust cold chains.
o Extreme heat events further disrupt food storage, processing, and transport, escalating waste.
 Urban-Rural Differences: Middle-income countries show lower waste in rural areas due to practices like
animal feeding and home composting.
 Tracking Shortcomings: Many low- and middle-income countries lack tracking systems for SDG 12.3 targets,
especially in retail and food service sectors.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 342 of 348

 1

o Only four G-20 countries (Australia, Japan, UK, US) and the European Union have comprehensive food
waste tracking.
 Data Variances: Countries like India, Indonesia, and South Korea rely on subnational estimates, showing a
gap in consistent national data.

Key Recommendations
 G20 Leadership: Encourage G20 nations to drive international cooperation on SDG 12.3 by promoting food
waste awareness and policy frameworks.
 Public-Private Partnerships: Advocate for PPP frameworks to address food waste’s impact on climate and
water resources through a Target-Measure-Act approach.
 Utilizing the Food Waste Index: Countries should adopt the Food Waste Index for baseline measurement
and track their progress on SDG 12.3.
o Emphasis on improved data collection in retail and food services.
 National Food Waste Studies: Conduct nationally representative food waste studies in key countries,
including India, China, South Africa, Indonesia, and Mexico.
 Sector Collaboration: Urge cross-sector collaboration—among governments, cities, food businesses, and
researchers—for innovative solutions and collective action toward SDG 12.3.

India’s National Food Security Act, 2013 (NFSA)

 Shifted approach to food security from welfare to rights-based.
 Coverage: 75% of the rural population and 50% of the urban population under two categories:
o Antyodaya Anna Yojana: Poorest households receive 35 kg of food grains per month.
o Priority Households (PHH): Entitled to 5 kg of food grains per person per month.

ASIA DEVELOPMENT OUTLOOK REPORT 2024

 Resilient Growth: Asia is forecasted to sustain robust growth, despite external uncertainties, driven by interest
rate stability in many economies and a rebound in goods exports, particularly in the semiconductor sector.
 GDP Forecast: Asia’s GDP is projected to grow by 4.9% in 2024 and maintain the same pace in 2025,
indicating resilience to external challenges.
 Inflation Trends: Inflation is expected to ease to 3.2% in 2024 and 3.0% in 2025, supporting consumer
confidence and spending.
India’s Growth Forecast
 GDP Growth Projection: India’s GDP growth is anticipated at 7% in FY 2024 and 7.2% in FY 2025, an increase
from the previous estimate of 6.7% for FY 2024.
 Key Growth Drivers:
o Capital Expenditure: Increased infrastructure spending by central and state governments.
o Private Investment: Boosted by stable interest rates and improved consumer confidence.
o Service Sector Contribution: Growth driven by financial, real estate, and professional services.
 FY 2025 Outlook: Anticipated increase in growth momentum due to enhanced goods exports, improved
manufacturing productivity, and higher agricultural output.
 Risks: Potential risks include global shocks like crude oil supply disruptions and weather-related impacts on
agriculture.
o Current Account Deficit: Expected to widen slightly due to rising imports, though it has reduced
sequentially, from 1.3% of GDP in Q2 FY24 to 1.2% in Q3 FY24.

About Asian Development Bank (ADB)

 Establishment: Founded in 1966 with a mission to create a prosperous, inclusive, resilient, and sustainable
Asia-Pacific region.
 Support Mechanisms: Provides loans, technical assistance, grants, and equity investments for social and
economic development.
 Headquarters: Manila, Philippines.
 Membership: 68 members, with 49 from Asia-Pacific and 19 outside.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 343 of 348

 1

 India and ADB: India is a founding member and the fourth-largest shareholder. ADB supports India’s climate-
resilient and inclusive growth aligned with ADB’s Strategy 2030.

Drivers of Asia’s Growth

 Economic Powerhouse: Asia’s rapidly expanding economies, especially China, Japan, and India, rank among
the world’s top five economies.
o The region’s large and growing middle class significantly drives demand.
 Manufacturing Hubs: Dominance in manufacturing; e.g., China in electronics and Vietnam in footwear,
supported by skilled labor and robust infrastructure.
 Trade and Investment: Active in international trade, with agreements like RCEP strengthening intra-Asian
trade and foreign investment.
 Financial Centers: Cities like Tokyo, Hong Kong, and Singapore are major financial hubs, promoting cross-
border capital flows and entrepreneurship.

India’s Role in Asia’s Growth

 Regional Connectivity: Through projects like the International North-South Transport Corridor (INSTC)
and the India-Middle East-Europe Corridor, India is enhancing connectivity across Asia, Africa, and Europe.
 Renewable Energy: India leads renewable initiatives such as the International Solar Alliance (ISA),
addressing climate change and energy security, especially in Asia and Africa.
 Capacity Building: Programs like the Indian Technical and Economic Cooperation (ITEC) aid in skill
development and education across Asia, promoting human resource development.
 Digital Integration: India’s Unified Payments Interface (UPI) is expanding into Asia, with UPI services now
operational in Sri Lanka and Mauritius.

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 344 of 348

 1

Notes:

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 345 of 348

 1

Notes:

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 346 of 348

 1

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 347 of 348

 1

©LegalEdge Tutorial Page 348 of 348